JP2021159473A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: counted value update means for updating a counted value related to each ball entry when game balls enter a first ball entry port and game balls enter a second ball entry port; specific game state control means for performing control to a specific game state differing from a jackpot game state when a counted value becomes a specific value; and performance control means for executing predetermined performance control. The first ball entry port and the second ball entry port are disposed in a game area such that game balls can enter even in a normal game state. While first performance control for performing notification regarding a ball entry in a mode for allowing a player to easily recognize ball entry when game balls enter the first ball entry port is executed, second performance control for performing notification regarding a ball entry in a mode for preventing a player from more easily recognizing ball entry than the first performance control when game balls enter the second ball entry port is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 182

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

Conventionally, a lottery is performed based on whether or not a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and when the lottery result is a big hit, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the display device to generate a big hit game. There are known gaming machines that let you play. In addition, a large number of gaming machines have been proposed that control a state that is more advantageous to the player than in the normal state after the end of the jackpot game (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-26097

As a conventional gaming machine, a machine that gives a time saving state after the end of a big hit game is known, but simply giving a time saving state after the end of a big hit game becomes a monotonous game, and the interest is reduced. There was a risk of inviting.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in gaming interest.

Effective solutions to achieve the above objectives are shown below. In addition, the operation and the like will be explained as necessary. Further, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations and the like in the embodiments of the invention are appropriately shown, but the present invention is not limited thereto.

In the invention according to claim 1, in order to achieve the above-mentioned object,
In a gaming machine that can control a high profit-giving state by displaying a variable display of a symbol based on a prize in a specific winning opening and stopping and displaying a profit-giving symbol as a result of the variable display of the symbol.
A first specific game state control means for controlling the first specific game state after the end of the high profit granting state, and
When a game ball enters the specific winning opening, a counting value updating means for updating the counting value related to the winning ball and a counting value updating means.
When the count value becomes a specific value, the second specific game state control means for controlling the high profit granting state and the second specific game state different from the first specific game state, and the second specific game state control means.
It is equipped with a setting means that can set the probability of being in a high profit granting state to one probability from a plurality of probabilities by an administrator operation.
The specific value is the same regardless of which probability is set.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game in a time-saving state that occurs other than after the end of the big hit game.

As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the interest in gaming.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front when the pressing operation part of a production operation unit was in an ascending position. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the assembly under the outer frame of the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) viewed from the rear front, and (c) is a cylinder in a conventional pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the lock from the front, and (d) is the perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from the rear. be. (A) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) from the front, and (b) is a cylinder lock shown in a state of being rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of (a). (C) is an explanatory view of a cylinder lock shown in a state of being rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of (a). (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (A) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the handle cover unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the handle cover unit and looked at from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and looked at from the back. It is sectional drawing which cut at the eye line in FIG. 41 (a). It is sectional drawing cut along the aer line in FIG. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit from the back. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the door frame by cutting horizontally at the portion of the lower plate ball supply port, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part by cutting the same portion as (a) in the conventional door frame. (C) is a table comparing the number of stored game balls in the lower plate in the present embodiment product and the conventional product. It is a top view which shows the part of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of a door frame enlarged. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front with the effect operation button directed upward, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of (a) viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front and above. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the lower front. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating spring lower holding member is in the position of the upward moving end, and (b) is the effect operation unit from the state of (a). It is sectional drawing of the effect operation unit in a state where is moved to an ascending position. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operating unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating spring lower holding member is in the position of the downward moving end. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of the effect operation part outer peripheral decorative board, the button outer decorative board, and the button inner decorative board in the plan view which saw the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of a pressing operation part. (A) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. It is a top view of the effect operation unit unit which shows the example which provided a plurality of contact detectors in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit. (A) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of the contact detection sensor main body and the plurality of contact detectors in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the example which provided the switching part between, and (c) is the effect operation unit which allows the plate left decoration unit, the plate right decoration unit, the effect operation unit, etc. of the plate unit to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the contact detection body on the front side and the rear side of the above. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a contact detector having decorativeness, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 62 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the woo line. (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front. (D) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 66 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AE. FIG. 66 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the OO line. (A) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing a state in which the outer layer of the two-color molding is opaque in the door frame, and (b) is a transparent outer layer in (a) while leaving the inner layer as it is. It is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in this state. It is a front view which shows each decorative substrate of a door frame. It is a top view which shows the decorative substrate of the part of the effect operation unit of a door frame. It is a rear view which shows each decorative substrate provided around the door window of a door frame. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. It is a rear sectional view which cut the payout device of a payout unit at the center in the front-rear direction of a payout blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the board unit from the back lower part. It is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main structure and looked at from the back. It is an enlarged side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine which cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which shows the upper part enlarged in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side with a tank rail or the like assembled on a ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 3A is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100A viewed from the front by disassembling. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area where the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame is distributed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view which shows the vicinity of a tank rail enlarged in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back on the hinge side. It is a perspective view which enlarges and shows the part of the tank rail when the pachinko machine provided with the tank rail of the 2nd Embodiment is seen from the rear. (A) is a plan view showing the tank rail and the like of FIG. 106 assembled together with the ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of (a) seen from the front, and (c) is (c). It is a perspective view which looked at the tank rail etc. of a) from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 107A is a cross-sectional view of a tank rail or the like cut along a marker line in FIG. 107 (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the tank rail of FIG. 107 in the cross section. It is a perspective view which shows the part of the tank rail enlarged when the main body frame provided with the tank rail of the 3rd Embodiment is seen from the right rear. It is a perspective view which shows the part of the tank rail enlarged when the main body frame provided with the tank rail of the 3rd Embodiment is seen from the left rear. (A) is a rear view of the main body frame showing an enlarged portion of the external terminal plate, and (b) is a left side view of the main body frame showing an enlarged upper part. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 113 (b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 113 (a). FIG. 114 (b) is an explanatory view showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail. (A) is a perspective view of the tank rail or the like of the third embodiment seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail or the like of (a) seen from the upper right rear, and (c) is a perspective view of (a). ) Is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like as viewed from the lower right rear. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 116 as viewed from the front by disassembling. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 116 as viewed from behind by disassembling. (A) is a front view of the substrate unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) viewed from the front right, and (c) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) from the front left. It is a seen perspective view. (A) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) as viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) as viewed from the lower right rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) and looked at from the back. (A) is a cross-sectional view cut along the key line in FIG. 119 (a), (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Ku Ku line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view in (a). It is sectional drawing cut by the cake line. It is a bottom view which shows the part after the door frame in the pachinko machine provided with the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the guide piece in the out ball discharge port of the out ball passage. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in (a). (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment shown by omitting the power supply unit, the payout control unit, and the interface unit from the front right, and (b) is the board unit of (a) viewed from the front left. It is a perspective view. (A) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) as viewed from the lower right rear. (A) is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the coco line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view cut along the coco line in (a). It is a cross-sectional view. It is sectional drawing which cut at the sea line in FIG. 129 (a). FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from behind by disassembling. (A) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from the rear. It is explanatory drawing which shows the elimination of the ball clogging in the substrate unit of FIG. 127. It is explanatory drawing which shows the prevention of the invasion of a linear fraudulent tool in the board unit of FIG. 127. It is explanatory drawing which shows the dust removal in the substrate unit of FIG. 127. It is a front view of a game board in which a center accessory and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 137 from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 137 from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is the schematic explanatory drawing of the wiring route from a function display unit in a main control board. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the center accessory and the like are made transparent. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a front view of the game board which shows the inside of the game area where a game ball circulates, and the obstacle nail by cutting the table unit parallel to the surface of a game panel. It is an enlarged front view which shows the left side of FIG. 145 enlarged. It is an enlarged front view which shows the right side of FIG. 145 enlarged. (A) is a front view showing the right half of the front unit together with a panel plate and obstacle nails, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the front. FIG. 148 is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate disassembled and viewed from the front in FIG. 148, and FIG. 148 shows the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate disassembled from the rear in FIG. 148. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. FIG. 148 is an exploded perspective view of only the center right front plate viewed from the back and disassembled. (A) is a perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the back box relationship of FIG. 151 disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the rear box rear unit in FIG. 152 disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the rear. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the back lower front decoration body of the back lower front effect unit and the back lower rear decorative body of the back lower rear effect unit in the back unit are each moving to the ascending position. The back lower front decoration unit of the back lower front production unit in the back unit has moved to the center of the game area, and the back upper rear decoration of the back upper back production unit has moved to the upper side of the back lower front decoration body. , It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the back lower back decoration body of the back lower back effect unit is moving to the lower side of the back lower front decoration body. In the state of FIG. 155, the front surface of the game board showing a state in which the front left decorative body and the front right decorative body in the back lower front decorative body of the back lower front effect unit move to open positions with each other and the central decorative body appears. It is a figure. In the back unit, the back-up and back-effect unit is moved to the descending position, and the back-down and back-effect unit is raised and is in contact with the back-up and back-decoration. It is a front view of the game board which shows. In the state of FIG. 157, the front surface of the game board showing a state in which the front left decorative body and the front right decorative body in the back lower front decorative body of the back lower front effect unit move to open positions with each other and the central decorative body appears. It is a figure. In the back unit, the back upper front decoration unit of the back upper front effect unit has moved to the descending position, and the back upper rear decorative body of the back upper rear effect unit has moved to the rear of the back upper front decorative body. The back lower front decoration of the front production unit rises and moves to the lower side of the back upper front decoration, and the back lower rear decoration of the back lower rear production unit rises behind the back lower front decoration. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which is in contact with the decorative body after the back-up. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine schematicly. It is a front view of the game board of the 2nd Embodiment which shows the state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of a game panel, and the inside of the game area where a game ball is distributed is shown. (A) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the game board of the second embodiment as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the game board of the second embodiment as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the center front right plate and the ball guidance unit disassembled in the right half of the center accessory of FIG. 162 and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the back. It is a figure. (A) is a front view of the ball guidance unit in the center accessory of FIG. 162, and (b) is a right side view of the ball guidance unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 164, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 164, and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. It is a cross-sectional view cut by the above, and (d) is a cross-sectional view cut along the starter line in FIG. 164. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit of FIG. 164 disassembled and viewed from the front right, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit of FIG. 164 disassembled and viewed from the front left. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the main control side of FIG. 167. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting value confirmation display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of error display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a payout control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit of FIG. 173. It is the flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit following FIG. 174. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the payout control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing. It is a front view of the game board of the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passing process (step S232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the effect pre-determination process (step S245). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd start port passing process (step S234). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process (step S238). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol normal processing (step S280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hit determination process (step S305). Various tables showing a lottery table (A) at a low probability, a lottery table (B) at a high probability, a big hit symbol determination table (C), an immediate short hit symbol determination table (D), and a small hit symbol determination table (E). .. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the variation pattern setting process (step S282). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol variation processing (step S283). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol stop processing (step S284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the relief number counting process (step S394). It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of a game state. This is a concrete production example until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times. This is a specific example of the effect when the ball enters the second starting port during the execution of the count effect. This is a concrete production example until the lottery result becomes an immediate short hit. It is a time chart which shows the count suppression period. It is a time chart which shows an immediate short hit symbol invalid period. It is a time chart which shows when the count suppression period A and the immediate short hit symbol invalid period are used together. It is a time chart which shows the production progress of the RTC production. It is a time chart which shows the production progress before and after the variation display of a special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). It is a time chart which shows the progress of the effect when the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied before the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). It is a time chart which shows the production progress when the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied after the variation display of a special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). It is a time chart showing the progress of the production before and after the immediate short hit. It is a time chart which shows the progress of the production when the start condition of the RTC production is satisfied before the immediate short hit. It is a time chart which shows the production progress when the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied after it becomes an immediate short hit. It is a list of RAM clear conditions indicating the operation at the time of power-on for executing RAM clear. It is explanatory drawing which shows the history display which can be displayed during the period when the setting of a set value is changed and the display of a set value is confirmed. It is a lottery table and a symbol determination table of a modification. It is a time chart which shows the immediate short hit time in control of a low probability time saving state B. It is a time chart which shows the immediate short hit time in the control of the low probability time saving state A of 100 times started with the big hit C as a trigger. It is explanatory drawing which shows the door frame top unit and the effect operation unit which can be attached to and detached from the door frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination target of the ID code. It is explanatory drawing which shows the grouping of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided in a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the grouping of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided in a door frame. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the suggestion effect which is executed as the effect while the symbol is changing. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the suggestion effect which is executed as the effect while the symbol is changing when there is a part which ID code does not match with respect to a game board. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the button effect A during execution of a rainbow effect. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the button effect B during execution of a rainbow effect. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the button effect C during execution of a rainbow effect. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the case where there is no operation of the effect operation part in the button effect B during execution of a rainbow effect. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the case where the entanglement prevention display is executed after the execution of the simulated rainbow effect. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the case of erasing the entanglement prevention display after the execution of the simulated rainbow effect. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the case where the execution of the simulated rainbow effect is restricted. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the case where the light emission of LED is confirmed at the time of execution of the simulated rainbow effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which attached the rainbow single decoration part to the game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the rainbow single decoration part. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the case where the simulated rainbow effect is executed when the rainbow single decoration part is attached. It is explanatory drawing which shows the rainbow single decoration part of another example. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the case where the rainbow effect is executed at the time of the initial position error of the front decoration body on the back side. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the case where the rainbow effect is executed when the situation that the effect image of the rainbow mode cannot be visually recognized in the effect display device occurs. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the case where the rainbow effect is executed when the 1st to 3rd abnormalities occur. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the case where the 1st to 3rd abnormalities occur during execution of a rainbow effect. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the case where a confirmation period other than the simulated rainbow effect is provided after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the ring-shaped decorative part. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a rainbow effect using a ring decoration part.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position. be. Further, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back by disassembling into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and can be visually recognized from the player side through the door frame 3. It includes a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 89) is hit.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 and the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 are attached to the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 make up the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4. The hinge assembly 520 under the frame is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side in the front view as the center.

Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 195 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 195, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. The player can participate in the production, and the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301 in addition to the game by the game ball B.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame for attaching the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and the game. A ball launching device 540 for driving a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. A board unit 620 having a payout control board 633 in addition to a payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side and a power supply board 630 including a power supply switch 630a capable of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1. A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. I have.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side so as to be openable and closable, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which the game ball B is performed by the operation of the player, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and a front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. On the rear side of the main control unit 1300 having the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311, the function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the game panel 1100. Attached to the front of the peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12), the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are provided. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emitting effect according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by accepting or passing the game ball B. (For example, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out), a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2004, a gate 2002, a second starting opening 2005, and a first large winning opening 2006 are provided. The obstacle nail N is planted in front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting opening 2005, and the first large winning opening 2006 are provided in the table unit 2000.

The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting opening 2005, the first major winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. As described above, it is possible to entertain the player with the driving operation of the handle 195.

Further, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a, or displays the lower right unit 2400 and the back unit. 3000 back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, back top front production unit 3300, back bottom front production unit 3400, back top rear production unit 3500, back bottom rear production unit 3600, etc. , Can entertain the player.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated to the front.

In the outer frame 2, the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame can detachably support the hinge member 510 on the main body frame of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, respectively, and are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially and rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. This is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, in the outer frame left assembly 10, the outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and the upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame left member 11 has a recess 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the right side surface that is opposite to the recess 11a to the right. It includes a bulging portion 11b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 are increased by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20, which will be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 12, the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is inserted into the cavity portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, in the upper left connecting member 12, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-shaped upper side extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixed portion 13b, the flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion 13a on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b, and the upper lateral fixing portion 13b from the rear side to the right. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d that extends shortly toward the direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower left connecting member 13, the rear surface of the contact portion 13d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b is in contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 to remove the outer frame. It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, in the lower left connecting member 13, the horizontal fixing portion 13a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the notch portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 has an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hook member 24 attached to the upper part of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. It includes a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the left side surface that is opposite to the concave portion 21a to the left. It includes a bulging portion 21b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper right connecting member 22, the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the upper right connecting member 22, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-shaped upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. From the horizontal fixing portion 23b, the flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion 23a on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d extending shortly to the left. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower right connecting member 23, the rear surface of the contact portion 23d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b is brought into contact with the left surface of the outer frame right member 21. By abutting and aligning the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the lower right connecting member 23, the horizontal fixing portion 23a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends to the left from the front side of the flat plate-shaped mounting portion 24a to be mounted on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and the mounting portion 24a. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped hooking piece portion 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and has a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extending from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left. Insertion that allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted through the flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked and the hook piece portion 25b. It has a mouth 25c and.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right. The width of the outer frame upper member 30 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the notches 30a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. A hinge assembly 50 on an outer frame, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Assembly under the outer frame]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the lower assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front by disassembling. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 includes an outer frame lower member 41 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right and extends to the left and right, and the outer frame lower assembly 40. A box-shaped front curtain plate member 42 that is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends to the left and right along the lower member 41 of the outer frame and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain plate member 42. A box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear curtain plate member 43. It includes a mechanism 44 and.

The width of the outer frame lower member 41 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

The outer frame lower member 41 includes a notch 41a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively. As a result, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and includes a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends to the left and right, and is pulled out from a position closer to the rear in the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end side. The recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 as large as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape in which the length in the left-right direction extends to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41 and the depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 is closed on the open rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the curtain plate front member 42 becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate rear member 43. It forms a space 40a. The curtain plate front member 42 includes an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates the front and rear and extends to the left and right on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a tubular connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right and projects upward at the central portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so as to be positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, toward the rear. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting cylinder portion 43a in the left-right direction is formed to be about 1/3 of the length of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620 of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a to connect the speaker unit. It communicates with the internal space of the 620a and forms the enclosure 624.

In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Is to prevent being pinched.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and is a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the hinge member 60 under the outer frame, which will be described later, is highlighted, and a mounting portion. The first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a and the second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a are mounted. A vertical wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placement portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion protruding forward from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d and being inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as the upper surface is directed backward. A part 44e and a part 44e are provided.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an illegal tool abuts on the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it abuts on the upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and further invades. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the hinge member 60 under the outer frame.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the mounting portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen on the mounting portion 44a for some reason is the standing wall portion. Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is prevented by the 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the mounting portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is first referred to as the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 arranged apart from each other on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46 and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 sandwiched between them. A frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 is provided.

The pair of guide members 45 are such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 has a strip-like shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a plurality of blade portions 46b provided at intervals in the up-down direction. The blade portion 46b is provided in an inclined state so that the front end side is higher than the rear end side (see FIG. 47). The grill member 46 allows the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 (the curtain plate internal space 40a) and the outside to communicate with each other through a gap between the blade portions 46b.

The port member 47 communicates between the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 through a gap between the blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Therefore, rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This is to prevent the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 from leaking from between the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

According to the grill member 46 of the present embodiment, the air vibration emitted from the curtain plate internal space 40a to the outside by the main body frame speaker 622 is slanted upward and forward by the plurality of inclined blade portions 46b. The handle unit 180 can be directed into the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180 is housed through the notch opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295. As a result, when the player thrusts his / her finger into the inside of the handle cover 295 (the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the driving device of the game ball B), the main body frame. By vibrating the speaker 622 and sending wind into the front cylinder portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented effect can be performed.

Further, since the port member 47 is opened forward, a part of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the plurality of blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 is discharged forward. Therefore, it is also released from the port member 47 to the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and other players migrating in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The pachinko machine 1 can be heard, and the player's attention can be attracted by the directing sound, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided.

Further, since the port member 47 is provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 with respect to the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the main body frame 4, the volume of the enclosure 624 is increased. Therefore, it is possible to output a deeper bass effect sound, entertain the player, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 21 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 21 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower surface. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided, and a mounting screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame is provided.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has an upper fixing portion 51a which is horizontally extended and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion. The flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of the 51a and the end edge extending downward from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The hinge member 51 on the outer frame is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It is provided with an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending diagonally to the left front and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame by the attachment screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right surface near the front end is the end of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space is formed in the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a so that the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame can be accommodated.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under the outer frame]
The hinge member 60 below the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. A hinge pin 60c under the outer frame that protrudes upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d that penetrates the horizontal portion 60a up and down and allows only one game ball B to pass through. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 60b in the front-rear direction and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

In the state where the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled on the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. It is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. As a result, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is moved between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the distance from 4 is gradually narrowed, the ball is rolled to the rear side where the interval is wide, and the ball can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, since the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame can be easily prevented from rolling. The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically in front view, and the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Has been done. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 195 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape extends vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 which is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and is attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and a door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface, the handle cover unit 290 covering the outer periphery of the handle unit 180, the dish unit 200 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the dish unit 200. The door frame left side unit 420 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side unit 430 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit. It includes a door frame top unit 450 attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a square shape (rectangular shape) whose outer shape extends vertically and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a rear side of the door frame base 101. The speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear view, the door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and the back surface of the door frame main relay board 104. The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the view, the rear relay board 106 after the handle mounted to the left side of the rear view of the door frame sub-relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay. A door frame relay board cover 107 that covers a part of the board 105 from the rear side, a handle rear relay board cover 108 that covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which is launched by the ball launcher 540 and does not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 195 that can be rotated by a player, and the handle unit 180 operates a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer circumference of the handle unit 180 to launch a game ball B in the upper plate 201. This is for playing a game of driving into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the 540.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so that the left side side of the front view can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed, and the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 is closed. The game area 5a of the above is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a square and flat door frame base 101 having an outer shape extending vertically, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner of the rear view. ..

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and the rear handle relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame relay board cover 107, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. The rear relay board cover 108, which is attached to the rear side and covers the rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and the cable cover 109, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable, are attached. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 420 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Further, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. ..

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates the front and rear and is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. As described above, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42, etc.) formed in the lower right corner of the front view and inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, and the handle mounting. Cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted between the seat surface 101b and the door window 101a, and the left side of the front view of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b. It is provided with a ball feeding opening 101e for facing forward the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, which penetrate the front and rear of the ball feeding unit 140.

Further, the door frame base 101 is to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. The passage port 101f, the upper plate ball passage port 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end of the front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to the front, and the door. It is provided with a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 is formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage port 101 g), and is provided with a plurality of vertically long slits 101i penetrating the front and rear. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, in the plurality of slits 101i, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the main body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later is penetrated. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. In the speaker duct 103, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the cylindrical portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, the pachinko machine 1 can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side).

Further, the speaker duct 103 is provided with a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged on the left side of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, rear relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the rear-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the relay board 106 after the handle and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 82). And a part of (see FIG. 83) are connected.

The outer shape of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which quadrangles extending to the left and right are combined on the right side of the upper part of the quadrangle extending vertically, and the portion extending vertically is formed. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 includes a handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and a door frame left side lower decorative board of the door frame left side unit 420. 423, the door frame right side unit 430 door frame right side upper decorative board 432, door frame right side lower decorative board 433, door frame top unit 450 door frame top relay board, etc., and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. It is for relaying the connection, and the rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105, when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending vertically of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are doors. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining portion of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The rear handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is mounted on the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear-handle relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. Is for relaying. The rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear-handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover / rear relay board cover / cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear relay board cover 108 after the handle, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 (a portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the rear side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side when viewed from the front open. In the state of being assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The rear-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and provides a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and openings for passing wiring cables are formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is provided on the left and right sides connecting the vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112, which are arranged apart from each other on the left and right, and the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 having the left end side attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending to the right to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 connecting the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of mounted cylinder mounting frames 115 vertically separated from each other on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, and a hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 is hooked. The hook member 116 is provided.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically at substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are separated in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends to the left and right in the vertical direction with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and has a pair of rear piece portions formed in a quadrangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. The left rear piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating the front and rear. The hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 is hooked on these hook members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are punched out metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is assembled. , It is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). In the state where the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passage port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101d of the door frame base 101.

[3-1f. Door frame hinge assembly]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the front upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It includes a member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a quadrangular front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the mounting piece 121a is mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is a columnar metal rod bent into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion extending vertically penetrates from below near the front end of a pair of projecting pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the pair of projecting pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around a portion extending vertically on the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame upward via the collar member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is in a state of being urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves the door frame upper hinge pin 122 as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 may be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, or may be pulled out downward. can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is hinged with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 extending vertically is located coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1 g. Hinge member under the door frame]
The hinge member 125 under the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the front left lower corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so that the hinge can be rotated.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a quadrangular front view flat plate-shaped mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) projecting downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b is provided.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the hinge member 125 under the door frame are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a columnar metal rod having a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. When the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is coaxial with the portion extending vertically of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the protruding piece 125b. It is installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 makes the door frame 3 hingeable with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522a of the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. Can be supported.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame viewed from the front, FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) viewed from the rear front, and FIG. 34 (c) is a conventional pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the back. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from behind. It is a figure. 36 (a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) shows a state of being rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing of the cylinder lock, and (c) is the explanatory view of the cylinder lock which shows the state which was rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of (a).

The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body. It is used for opening / closing and locking with the frame 4. The cylinder lock 130 is a regular columnar cylinder body 131 extending forward and backward, a key hole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a regular key hole 132 provided behind the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the key hole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece portion of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and the rear end is attached to the front piece portion. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the rotation is rotated by inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the key hole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

More specifically, the cylinder lock 130 includes a first cam member 134 provided on the rear end side of the cylinder body 131 and rotating together with the rotation of a regular key inserted in the key hole 132, and a cylinder mounting frame 115. The second cam member 135, which is rotatably attached around the axis in the front-rear direction at a portion below the cylinder body 131, and the upper end side rotates at a portion to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. A strip-shaped first arm 136 that is rotatably attached and the lower end side is rotatably attached to a portion to the right of the center of rotation of the second cam member 135, and the upper end side is rotation of the first cam member 134. It is provided with a strip-shaped second arm 137 that is rotatably attached at a portion below the center and rotatably attached at a portion below the center of rotation of the second cam member 135 on the lower end side. ing.

Further, the cylinder lock 130 has a cylinder mounting frame so as to cover the cylinder body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from the rear except for the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133). The rear cover 138 attached to the 115 and the upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are rotatably attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. It is equipped with 139 and.

In the first cam member 134, the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the rear surface side, and the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front surface side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably attached from the rear side by the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the rotation transmission member 133 is integrally rotatably attached to the rear side sandwiching the front surface of the cylinder mounting frame 115. The lower end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the front side of the second cam member 135, and the lower end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front side in front of the first arm 136.

In the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached and the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached are separated from each other at an angle of 90 degrees about their respective rotation axes. doing. Further, each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 is provided at a position where the first arm 136 is attached at a position farther from the rotation center than the portion where the second arm 137 is attached. ..

The rear cover 138 has a screw whose upper end side is not shown in a state where the shaft portion 138a projecting outward from the lower ends of both left and right side surfaces in a columnar shape is locked in the L-shaped locking slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115. Therefore, it is detachably attached to the cylinder attachment frame 115.

In this cylinder lock 130, the cylinder mounting frame 115, the cylinder body 131, the rotation transmission member 133, the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 are made of metal. ..

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 substantially coincides with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 440b of the door frame right side unit 430.

Here, the conventional cylinder lock 130A will be described. In the conventional cylinder lock 130A, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c) and 34 (d), the cylinder body 131 penetrates the front piece portion of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear and the rear end is mounted on the front piece portion. There is. The cylinder lock 130A is provided with a rotation transmission member 133 on the axis of the cylinder body 131.

Subsequently, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 34 (c) and 34 (d), the conventional cylinder lock 130 is provided with the rotation transmission member 133 on the axis of the cylinder body 131, whereas the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment is provided. As shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b), the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position separated downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131.

In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 36A, the upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 of the cylinder lock 130 are centered on rotation of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The upper and lower ends of the second arm 137 are attached to the right portion, and the upper and lower ends of the second arm 137 are attached to the portions below the respective rotation centers of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The cylinder body 131 can be rotated at an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction by using a regular key.

In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted into the key hole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. It will be. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right side of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the first arm 136 will rotate the second cam member 135 in the counterclockwise direction. On the other hand, in the second arm 137, the upper end side is attached below the rotation center of the first cam member 134, so that the second cam member 135 is counterclockwise from the second arm 137. There is almost no force to rotate it in the clockwise direction.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state, the force is mainly transmitted via the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates counterclockwise. It rotates in the direction, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force acting upward by rotating the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction is the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the first cam member. It is proportional to the distance in the left-right direction from the center of rotation of 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state, the force acting upward on the first arm 136 becomes smaller, whereas the force acting upward on the second arm 137 acts upward. The power to do becomes greater.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction exceeds 45 degrees from the normal state, the force acting upward on the second arm 137 becomes larger than that on the first arm 136. The second cam member 135 rotates in the counterclockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the key hole 132 can be rotated from the normal state to an angle of 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction (see FIG. 36 (b)).

When the key is used to rotate the key 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state to 90 degrees clockwise to return to the normal state, the action opposite to the above is applied. It will work.

On the other hand, when the first cam member 134 is rotated clockwise through the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted into the key hole 132 from the normal state, the upper end side is to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. The first arm 136 attached to the side moves downward, and the second arm 137 attached to the upper end side below the rotation center of the first cam member 134 moves upward. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right side of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the first arm 136 attempts to rotate the second cam member 135 in the clockwise direction. In contrast to the large force acting on the second arm 137, since the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 is rotated clockwise from the second arm 137. There is almost no force to rotate in the direction of.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, the force is mainly transmitted through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 moves in the clockwise direction. It rotates, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force that transmits the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134. Is proportional to the distance between the first cam member 134 and the center of rotation in the left-right direction. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, the force for rotating the second cam member 135 in the first arm 136 becomes smaller, whereas the force for rotating the second cam member 135 becomes smaller. In the arm 137, the force for rotating the second cam member 135 becomes large.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the clockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the second arm 137 will rotate the second cam member 135 more than the first arm 136. The force is increased, and the second cam member 135 rotates in the clockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the key hole 132 can be rotated from the normal state to an angle of 90 degrees in the clockwise direction (see FIG. 36 (c)).

When the key is used to rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state to 90 degrees clockwise to return to the normal state, the operation is the opposite of the above. Will be done.

As described above, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 so as to be in phase with each other at an angle of 90 degrees. Since the first cam member 134 (the key inserted in the key hole 132) is in any rotation position, at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is connected by The second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133) can be rotated by transmitting the rotation, and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 can be locked and unlocked well.

Further, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the rotation is transmitted by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as the rotation transmission mechanism, so that the rotation transmission member 133 ( Since the axis of the transmission cylinder 654) of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 can be provided at different positions, the position of the cylinder main body 131 in the door frame 3 can be set to an arbitrary position without changing the locking unit 650. The cylinder body 131 (key hole 132) can be provided at a portion that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 with high decorativeness of the door frame 3 can be provided.

Further, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder main body 131 is changed in the door frame 3, it is not necessary to change the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, so that the locking unit 650 can be diverted, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the door.

By the way, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided behind the cylinder body 131, a fraudster who knows the configuration inserts a tool from the front to the rear of the cylinder body 131. By illegally rotating the rotation transmission member 133 with the tool, there is a risk of opening the door frame 3 and performing an illegal act. On the other hand, since the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment is provided with the rotation transmission member 133 at a position away from the axis (rear) of the cylinder body 131, a tool is inserted behind the cylinder body 131. Even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotation transmission member 133, the rotation transmission member 133 cannot be rotated because the rotation transmission member 133 does not exist at the relevant portion, and a fraudulent act of opening the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 or the like. Can be prevented from being done.

Further, in the cylinder lock 130, the second arm 137 connects the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 apart from each other at a rotation angle of 90 degrees with respect to the first arm 136. A straight line in which a portion attached to one of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 of one arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. Even if it is located above, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the parts farthest from the straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. It will be in a state of being. Therefore, when either the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 is located at the dead point of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the rotation from the first cam member 134 is transferred to the second cam member 135. Even if it cannot be transmitted, the rotation from the first cam member 134 can be transmitted to the second cam member 135 by the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137, so that the first cam member 134 can be transmitted. There is no great resistance to rotation, the key inserted in the keyway 132 can be rotated smoothly, unlocking and locking can be done easily, and the key inserted in the keyway can be forcibly rotated. It is possible to prevent the key from being damaged and prevent the key from being damaged.

Further, since the rotation of the key inserted in the key hole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at the eccentric position by the two arms of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, for some reason. Therefore, even if one arm is damaged, the rotation can be transmitted by the other arm, and the pachinko machine 1 having a highly reliable cylinder lock 130 can be provided.

Further, the smooth rod-shaped (strip-shaped) first arm 136 and second arm 137 transmit the rotation of the key inserted in the key hole 132 to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at the eccentric position. Therefore, when the rotation is transmitted by the gear, the gear may rotate and the rotation transmission member 133 may be rotated by hooking the tip of the tool on the teeth of the gear. Since the arm 136 and the second arm 137 have a smooth rod shape, the tip of the tool can be made difficult to be caught by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, and the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are moved. This makes it possible to prevent the rotation transmission member 133 from being rotated, and reliably prevents the lock unit 650 from being illegally operated to unlock the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. be able to.

In the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are used as the rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. , Not limited to this, for example, a rotation transmission mechanism using a plurality of gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using gears and rack gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using a sprocket and a chain, a rotation transmission mechanism using a pulley and a belt. , Etc. may be used.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 37 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open front cover and a box-shaped front cover with the rear end of the front cover 141 closed and the front open. The front cover is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 having a ball hitting supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, the rear cover 142, and the front cover 141. A ball pulling member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a game ball B on the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 are covered one by one. The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. It is equipped with a ball feeding solenoid 145.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in the front view, and the ball feeding member 143 is ball feeding on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b when viewed from the front. From 141c, the operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240 The portion of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c that is open to the rear on the upstream end side is closed from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a and a partition portion 143a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 144 as a partition between the entrance entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b below the entrance 141a. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from the vicinity of the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod 143b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 143b, and a rotating rod 143b that is below the operating rod 143c. It is provided with a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The actuating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to project forward through the arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37 (a)). The operating rod 143c is the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 that moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 is after the blocking portion 144a and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-shaped plan view centered on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 143a of the entrance / exit 141a and the ball pulling member 143. It is provided with a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotating shaft core by moving the rod portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft core in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is designed to rotate with and from the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hit ball supply port 142a and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (striking ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the ball hitting supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip swinging in the vertical direction in the ball feeding operating rod 146. It is provided with a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates a ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operation rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around the axis extending back and forth. Has been done. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is pulled toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding operation rod 146 is centered on the right end. The left end side near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. It rotates in this way and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation rod 146, the left end portion (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is arranged on the opposite side to the side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 38B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 is in a state where the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in a state of being positioned at the feeding position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is sucked by the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145, and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 160) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to apply a moment that rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 that is rotatably supported by the ball or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removing member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 that operates by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the ball pulling member 143, and the ball pulling port 141b side. The game ball B does not invade.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission unit 242b to move the operation transmission unit 242b downward. Along with this, the operating plate 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, the ball pulling member 143 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b. The partition is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball extraction port 141b side, and is discharged from the ball extraction port 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the plate unit 200. It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

Since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 in which the working transmission portion 242b with which the working rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 abuts is formed is urged upward by the spring, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if it is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by a spring via the operating rod 143c, it is possible to prevent the ball pulling member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B is formed by the partition portion 143a. It can prevent it from bouncing back.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 38B and the like) recessed forward in the upper right corner when viewed from the rear of the ball hitting port 142a in the rear cover 142. The fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape with the outer shape of the front view extending to the left and right, and the upper piece portion 148a and the upper piece portion 148a which are separated vertically at substantially the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It includes a lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C chamfer shape on the tip end side (right end side in the front view) of the side facing each other of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b. .. The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent so that the right end of the front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same surface as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. As a result, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b communicates with the inside of the ball striking supply port 142a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 148, the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launcher 540 from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 and attached to the fraudulent game ball B. When a fraudulent act such as manipulating the string to move the fraudulent game ball B in and out of the first starting port 2004 or the like is performed, the fraudulent game ball B launched (struck) by the ball launcher 540 A V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b after inserting the string attached to the illegal game ball B between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b by the momentum. It can be cut by the narrowed portion of the shape, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached.

[3-1j. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 39 (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 39 (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which is launched by the ball launcher 540 and does not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and the front side open, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. It is equipped with 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and penetrates the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit 200. A full tank receiver that opens rearward on the lower right side of the ball passage 150a and the through ball passage 150a in front view and can communicate with the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4. It has a mouth 150b.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 opens upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank ball receiving port 150b, and does not reach the game area 5a even though it is launched by the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving port 150c that receives a foul ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B that is open forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received by a full tank ball receiving port 150b and a foul ball receiving port 150c. The ball discharge port 150d communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit 200 while discharging the ball forward.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. It is provided with a storage passage 150e having a possible size.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed on the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 and a movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. It is provided with a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In this foul cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the storage passage 150e is filled to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full with the game ball B. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower plate 202 is full, the payout of the game ball B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, the staff of the game hall, and the like to that effect, and urge the player to eliminate the fullness of the lower plate 202.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 described later in the main body frame 4. The door opening / closing contact portion 150f to which the actuating protrusion 613a of the 613 can come into contact is provided (see FIG. 90). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to rotate the lower end of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and is detachably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and also makes the game visible. It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. It includes a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b and. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 96).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 163b and a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably mounted on the outer side of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base portion 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the movement of the glass frame 161 to the rear. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally lifted, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally disengaged from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged so as to be separated from each other to the left and right by a flat plate-shaped main body 171 whose outer periphery is formed into a predetermined shape and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 that projects rearward shortly along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward from the main body 171 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). As a result, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 172 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to come into contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 41 to 47 and the like. FIG. 41 (a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and FIG. 41 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E in FIG. 41 (a). FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line of the arrow in FIG. Note that FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view of only the door frame 3 in which the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are omitted.

The handle unit 180 of the present embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the plate unit 200 together with the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer circumference, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be operated by the player. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

First, the handle unit 180 will be described. The handle unit 180 is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle cover base 291 of the handle cover unit 290, which will be described later, and to the front end of the handle base 181. A disc-shaped handle 195, a plurality of handle guides 196 attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by a handle cover base 291 described later, and a disk-shaped handle base 181 attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the center of the front end side of the handle 195. The cover pedestal 183, the handle decorative board 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface, and the handle attached to the cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decorative board 184. It is equipped with a front lens 185.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 195, a handle 195 attached to the front end, and rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. The handle base 181 and the inner have a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. It includes a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end side is attached to the handle 195 to return the handle 195 to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 and the one end side are attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188. It is equipped with an auxiliary spring 191 that is urged in the direction.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a tip side protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 and is attached to the handle base 181. It is equipped with an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, the disk-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and the cylindrical base 181a. It also has three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 291d of the handle cover base 291 which will be described later. Therefore, with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three ridges 291d, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 and the ridges 291d are inserted into the three groove portions 181c, respectively. Is inserted so that the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle cover base 291.

The handle 195 includes a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of spoke portions 195b extending outward radially at intervals in the circumferential direction from the central hub portion 195a, and a plurality of spokes. An annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the portions 195b, and two extending in an arc shape around the rotation axis (shaft member 187) and penetrating the central hub portion 195a in the front-rear direction. It includes a slit 195d and a locking projection 195e that protrudes rearward from a position inside the rotation center of the slit 195d and locks the other end side of the handle return spring 190. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the general outer peripheral surface of the handle of a conventional pachinko machine.

The three spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 are clockwise and clockwise about one spoke portion 195b extending horizontally to the left from the central hub portion 195a in a state where the handle 195 is free (not rotated). Two spoke portions 195b extend from a portion having an angle of 120 degrees in each counterclockwise direction. The three spoke portions 195b extend with a length such that a gap into which a player's finger can be inserted is formed between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c.

The outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer peripheral ring portion 195c is formed in an annular shape with a constant cross-sectional shape with the rounded side of the U-shape facing forward.

The handle 195 is formed so as to have translucency as a whole, and is partially plated with an electrically continuous plating portion from the central hub portion 195a to the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. As a result, the touch of the handle 195 can be detected by the handle touch sensor 192 even when only the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is touched. Therefore, the game ball B can be driven even if the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is turned.

The handle guide 196 has a U-shaped guide portion 196a that is open toward the center side of the handle 195, and a flat plate-shaped mounting stay 196b that extends from the front end of the guide portion 196a toward the center side. There is. In the three handle guides 196, the mounting stay 196b is mounted behind the spokes 195b of the handle 195 so that the guide portion 196a is located behind the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195. The handle guide 196 is restricted from moving in the front-rear direction by inserting the guide piece 291 g of the handle cover base 291 described later into the inside of the guide portion 196a.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and includes three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 195d of the handle 195 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the cover pedestal 183 penetrates the slit 195d of the handle 195, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 195d, and the rotation angle of the handle 195 is restricted. In this example, the handle 195 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

There are a total of 10 handle decorative substrates 184, one in the center, three on the middle circumference with a certain interval in the circumferential direction, and six with a certain interval in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference. A number of LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric pattern. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: one in the center, three in the middle, two in the upper left of the outer circumference, two in the upper right of the outer circumference, and two in the lower part of the outer circumference. (See FIG. 72). A 24-bit LED driver 184b having a unique address for causing each LED 184a to emit light is mounted on the handle decorative substrate 184. This LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems, and controls 10 LEDs 184a divided into 5 groups with a total of 15 systems of 3 systems for each set so that each LED 184a can emit light in full color. I am trying to do it.

Although not shown, the handle decorative board 184 has two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the LED 184a and the LED driver 184b, and commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected, one control signal line for receiving signals such as, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510. .. Then, in the LED driver 184b of the handle decorative board 184, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, the LED driver 184b is divided into five groups according to the command. The 10 LEDs 184a can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

As described above, since the handle decorative substrate 184 has the LED driver 184b, the number of light emission of the LEDs 184a is larger than the number of electric wires constituting the wiring cable to be connected individually (here, the set). Since it can be controlled every), the number of electric wires can be reduced, and the configuration of electrical wiring can be simplified.

The front surface of the steering wheel front lens 185 bulges forward in a round shape and has translucency. The front handle lens 185 is provided with a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member inside. The steering wheel front lens 185 is light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting an LED on the front surface of the steering wheel decoration substrate 184.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance, and the rotation of the handle 195 The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the angle.

The steering wheel touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the steering wheel unit 180, and when the player comes into contact with the steering wheel 195, the static electricity acting from the player is detected, and the player comes into contact with the steering wheel 195. To detect. Then, when the handle 195 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven.

Therefore, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 195 in some way without touching the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be driven. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 195 by a method different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

The single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 by the player. When the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 stops the drive of the launch solenoid 542. Therefore, if the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 195, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 195, and the single-shot button can be temporarily stopped. By releasing the pressing operation of 193, the game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength before operating the single-shot button 193.

Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be described. The handle cover unit 290 covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 on the rear side of the handle 195, and covers the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover base 291 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. An inner 292 whose rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200, and an annular handle cover decorative board 293 which is provided on the front side of the inner 292 and has a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface. It includes an annular substrate cover 294 that covers the handle cover decorative substrate 293 from the front, and a handle cover 295 that covers the outer periphery of the inner 292 and has a rear end attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200.

The handle cover base 291 has a cylindrical front cylinder portion 291a that has substantially the same inner diameter as the inner diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 and extends forward and backward, and the inner diameter decreases from the rear end of the front cylinder portion 291a toward the front. The inner circumference of the cylindrical rear cylinder portion 291c extending forward and backward with an inner diameter that penetrates the middle wall portion 291b and the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 and extends to the front and rear, and the inner circumference of the rear cylinder portion 291c. It is provided with a plurality of (three in this case) ridges 291d, which are projected inward from the ridge and extend back and forth, and are provided at positions corresponding to the groove 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

Further, the handle cover base 291 has a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion rearward from the front end of the outer periphery of the front cylinder portion 291a, and the same position as the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a from the middle of the flange portion 291e. At the portion between the cylindrical outer cylinder portion 291f protruding forward and the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a and the flange portion 291e, the guide piece 291g protruding outward from the front cylinder portion 291a and the front cylinder. It is provided with an opening 291h penetrating in the lower part of the portion 291a.

The inner wall portion 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends in an arc shape whose cross section bulges outward from the rear end of the front cylinder portion 291a to the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction. The rear end of the rear cylinder portion 291c is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The rear cylinder portion 291c is formed to have the same length as the base portion 181a of the handle base 181, and the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted therein. The three ridges 291d correspond to the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 and can be inserted into the groove portion 181c to make the handle base 181 relatively non-rotatable. The outer cylinder portion 291f extends forward from a position outside the center of the flange portion 291e in the radial direction. The handle cover base 291 is provided with a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction so as to connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylinder portion 291f.

The guide piece 291g projects from the outer circumference of the front cylinder portion 291a from the center between the outer circumference of the front cylinder portion 291a and the inner circumference of the outer cylinder portion 291f to a position closer to the front cylinder portion 291a. The guide pieces 291 g extend in the circumferential direction with a length in the range of about 110 degrees, and are provided in three in the circumferential direction at intervals of 10 degrees. A U-shaped guide portion is formed by inserting the rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 in the handle unit 180 behind the guide pieces 291 g and rotating the handle 195 through the guide pieces 291 g. The guide piece 291g can be positioned in the 196a to restrict the movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195) in the front-rear direction.

The opening 291h has a length in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front cylinder portion 291a to the vicinity of the flange portion 291e, and has a size in a range of an angle of about 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and penetrates the front cylinder portion 291a. ..

The inner 292 has an annular base portion 292a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter larger than the flange portion 291e, and the inner portion 292 extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the base portion 292a. It has a leg portion 292b and a plurality of (here, four) notches 292c which are notched from the rear end of the leg portion 292b to the vicinity of the base portion 292a and are provided apart from each other in the circumferential direction. The base portion 292a is located behind the flange portion 291e into which the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 is inserted from the front. The leg portion 292b extends in a curved shape so as to bulge outward, and its rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200. The notch 292c is provided at the upper and lower portions and the left and right portions of the leg portion 292b, respectively.

The handle cover decorative substrate 293 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange portion 291e. The handle cover decorative substrate 293 is mounted with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b having a unique address for causing each LED 293a to emit light. The 12 LEDs 293a (full-color LEDs) are provided in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into 6 sets of 2 from the center on the lower left, 2 on the left, 2 on the upper left, 2 on the upper right, 2 on the right, and 2 on the lower right. It is divided (see FIG. 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and control 10 LEDs 293a divided into 6 groups with a total of 18 systems of 3 systems for each set so that they can emit light in full color. I have to.

Although not shown, the handle cover decorative substrate 293 includes two power lines (one is a ground wire) for supplying power for driving the LED 293a and the LED driver 293b, and commands and commands from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected, one control signal line for receiving signals such as addresses and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510. There is. Then, in the LED driver 293b of the handle cover decorative board 293, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, the LED driver 293b is divided into 6 groups according to the command. The 12 LEDs 293a can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

The board cover 294 has an annular front plate portion 294a and a front plate portion 294a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and substantially the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the base portion 292a of the inner 292. It has a tubular side plate portion 294b, which has a short outer peripheral edge extending rearward. In the substrate cover 294, the front plate portion 294a is located between the flange portion 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative substrate 293, and the side plate portion 294b extends to the base portion 292a of the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a having an inner diameter of the same as the outer diameter of the outer cylinder portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 at the front end, and is a spindle type (kamakura type or bowl type) that bulges toward the rear. , Etc.), and a plurality of notch openings 295b notched from the rear end to the front are provided in the circumferential direction (here, four). The handle cover 295 is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and the plurality of notch openings 295b are formed so as to coincide with the notch 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200 via the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 is molded in two colors using synthetic resins having different colors and light transmittance (light transmittance). More specifically, the handle cover 295 is molded in two colors with two types of resins, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface. , Circular or radial patterns are formed. That is, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71 (a)). When molding the handle cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

As shown in FIG. 46 and the like, the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment are assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and inside the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 with the handle 195 in the handle unit 180. A portion on the rear side of the steering wheel is inserted, and a steering wheel 195, a front lens of the steering wheel 185, and the like are located on the front side of the steering wheel cover unit 290. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 sandwiches the portion of the handle cover unit 290 that closes the rear end of the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 and the handle mounting seat surface of the door frame base 101. It is attached to 101b.

In the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, the central hub portion 195a at the center is rotatably supported by the handle base 181. Further, in the handle 195, the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the central hub portion 195a is rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 by the handle guide 196 attached to the rear side. The handle guide 196 is inserted (locked) at the rear end side of the guide portion 196a between the front cylinder portion 291a and the outer cylinder portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 and between the flange portion 291e and the guide piece 291g. ), And it is rotatably supported in a state where movement in the front-back direction (axial direction) is restricted.

The handle 195, the handle cover base 291 and the inner 292, the board cover 294, and the handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 are formed so as to have translucency, and the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293 is made to emit light. In addition to being able to illuminate the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the inside of the handle cover base 291 (front cylinder portion 291a), the handle cover 295, and the like can also be luminescently decorated.

Since the handle cover unit 290 has a notch opening 295b and a notch 292c that coincide with each other in the handle cover 295 and the inner 292, the handle cover base 291 is provided on both the left and right sides and the lower side when viewed from the outside. It can be made to appear as if there is a hole communicating with the inside of the front cylinder portion 291a. As a result, the player is relieved of the mental anxiety of thrusting a hand (finger) into the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer ring portion 195c. Can be done.

The notch opening 295b on the upper side of the handle cover 295 (the notch 292c on the upper side of the inner 292) is closed by the dish right decoration unit 275 and the door frame right side unit 430.

In the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the inside of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted is below the inner 292 and the handle cover 295 through the opening 291h. It communicates with the notch 292c and the notch opening 295b (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B or the like enters the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the lower side It can be discharged below the handle cover unit 290 through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b.

Further, when a liquid or a game ball B enters the cutout openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, the lower side passes through a gap between the front cylinder portion 291a and the leg portion 292b of the inner 292. It can be discharged downward from the notch opening 295b.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the notch 292c on the lower side of the inner 292, and the notch opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 are assembled under the outer frame of the outer frame 2. It is provided on an extension line in the inclination direction of the blade portion 46b of the grill member 46 in the solid 40. As a result, the wind (wind pressure) emitted diagonally upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the blade portion 46b due to the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 is passed through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b to the front cylinder. It can be made to enter the portion 291a. Therefore, when the player thrusts his / her finger into the inside of the handle cover 295 (the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the device for driving the game ball B), the main body frame speaker. By vibrating the 622 and sending the wind into the front cylinder portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented effect can be performed.

Further, since the handle cover 295 has a notch opening 295b, when opening the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, the notch opening 295b on the right side can be pulled with a finger, and the door frame 3 or the like can be pulled. It can be used as a handle when opening.

Further, since the handle 195 is plated up to the outer ring portion 195c, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched, the game ball B Can be typed in.

Further, since the handle cover 295 has a notch opening 295b, the rotation position of the handle 195 can be easily positioned by hooking a finger on the outer ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b of the handle 195. It can be fixed, and the game ball B can be continuously driven into the game area 5a with a certain strength without continuing to twist the hand. As described above, since the game ball B can be driven by rotating the handle 195 by various methods, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of selecting the driving operation suitable for the player.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). Therefore, the handle cover base 291 is used. The handle unit 180 attached via the handle unit 180 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 and perform the rotation operation without a sense of discomfort.

As described above, according to the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 are provided so as to be openable and closable with the left side as the axis, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is visibly closed from the front. In the lower right corner of the door frame 3, a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of spoke portions 195b radially protruding from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer circumference connecting the tips of the plurality of spoke portions 195b. Since the handle 195 having the ring portion 195c and the handle 195 having the ring portion 195c and the tubular handle cover unit 290 extending rearward from the outer ring portion 195c are provided, the handle in the conventional pachinko machine is provided. The handle 195 and the handle cover unit 290, which have never been seen before, can be seen in the area where they are, which can have a strong impact on the player and strongly attract the player's attention. At the same time, it is possible to motivate the player to play with the pachinko machine 1, and to the player who is wandering in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the game is played. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be used.

Further, since the player's finger can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the player can insert the player's finger into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291). When the handle 195 is operated to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a, when the player grabs the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, the player's finger is inserted into the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, the operation of the handle 195 can be given to the player a feeling different from that of the handle of the conventional pachinko machine, and the player can be entertained by the new sense of driving the game ball B. Can be suppressed.

Then, when the player is operating the handle 195, when the effect sound is output from the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the speaker unit 620a in the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4, the speaker is caused by the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622. The air inside the enclosure 624 vibrates due to the box 623, and the vibration of the air inside the enclosure 624 through the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the port member 47 in the outer frame 2 communicating with the enclosure 624 is sound pressure. It is emitted forward as (sound wind). At this time, the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 is transmitted to the notch opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the handle cover by the plurality of blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47. It can be guided into the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the opening 291h of the base 291 and into the handle cover unit 290 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c. A sound pressure stimulus can be applied to the finger of the player who is operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted. Therefore, the sound pressure from the port member 47 is supplied to the player's fingers inserted in the handle cover unit 290 through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h according to the game state in the game area 5a. , You can surprise the player, foresee the arrival of a chance, change the amount of operation of the steering wheel, entertain the player, and make it harder for the player to get bored. , It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h, the handle cover. By making the inside of the unit 290 cool and making the environment around the fingers of the player operating the handle 195 comfortable, it is possible to alleviate the stress on the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game. can.

Further, as described above, with respect to the finger of the player who is operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle 195 and the handle 195 The sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 different from the door frame 3 provided with the handle cover unit 290 is applied to the grill member 46. Since the stimulus is given by guiding by a plurality of blades 46b, various sensors (handle rotation detection sensor) provided on the handle 195 are compared with the case where the handle 195 is provided with a vibration device. 189, handle touch sensor 192, single-shot button operation sensor 194, etc.) and the bearing mechanism are not damaged, making it possible to make the handle unit 180 less likely to be damaged, and the damage to the handle unit 180 is not suitable for the player. It is possible to avoid giving a pleasant sensation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, a spoke portion 195b, and an outer ring portion 195c, the handle 195 looks like a steering wheel of an automobile. Even if the appearance is significantly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine, the player can intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is the same as that of the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, even a player who sees the pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of the pachinko machine 1 without any confusion, and the pachinko machine can be used as a pachinko machine to play without hesitation. It is possible to make it easier to select the machine 1.

Further, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h are formed in a portion facing the lower side of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 into which a player's finger can be inserted through between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. When the inside of the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) is viewed from the front, the lower part of the handle cover unit 290 is lower than the handle cover unit 290 through the opening 291h and the lower notch opening 295b. Since it becomes visible and a feeling of openness can be given to the tubular handle cover unit 290, it is possible to reduce the player's anxiety about inserting a finger into the handle cover unit 290, and the player can be seen. The handle 195 can be operated without hesitation.

Further, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h that penetrate the handle cover unit 290 are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 so as to face downward, and a port of the outer frame 2 (outer frame lower assembly 40) is provided. Since the member 47 is opened forward, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B or the like enters the handle cover unit 290, it is discharged downward from the lower notch opening 295b and the opening 291h. At the same time, it is possible to make it difficult for the liquid or the like discharged downward from the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h to enter the port member 47.

Further, the handle 195 is provided with the central hub portion 195a, the spoke portions 195b, and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, and the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 having the same diameter as the outer peripheral ring portion 195c has a plurality of front ends. Since the notch opening 295b is provided, the central hub portion 195a can be gripped and operated in the same way as the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, the spoke portion 195b can be operated only with a finger, and the outer ring. The steering wheel of an automobile can be operated by the portion 195c, the outer ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b can be gripped by a finger, or the handle cover unit can be straddled by the outer ring portion 195c. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of performing operations such as picking the inside and outside of the 290 with a finger, and capable of driving various game balls B (handle operation). Therefore, the game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a by a method that is easy for the player to operate according to the game state, the state of the player, and the like, so that the player is less likely to get bored and the player. It is possible to entertain the driving operation of the game ball B and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b of the handle 195 may be gripped by a finger, or the inner and outer sides of the handle cover unit 290 may be pinched by a finger so as to straddle the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. By doing so, it becomes possible to fix the operation position of the handle 195. Therefore, in addition to the same handle operation as the handle of the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to perform the handle operation that cannot be achieved by the conventional pachinko machine, so that it is possible to provide the player with various handle operations. , It is possible to entertain the steering wheel operation and make it difficult for the player to get bored.

Further, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 is in a form extending rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, and the handle cover unit. The appearance of the 290 as being integrated with the handle 195 can be made, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look good and attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as that of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, it is possible to prevent the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from becoming larger than necessary, and the handle cover unit 290. By suppressing the pressing of the game area 5a (door window 101a) upward, it is possible to prevent the game area 5a from becoming narrower, and the game area 5a can be made relatively large. The large gaming area 5a makes it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 stand out, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with a high appealing power that strongly attracts the attention of the player.

Further, by appropriately emitting light of the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative substrate 293, the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be light-emitting and decorated. Therefore, even if the player operates the handle 195, the light emitting decoration of the handle cover 295 and the outer ring portion 195c is not blocked by the player's hand, and the handle cover 295 and the outer ring portion 195c are made to stand out. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can attract the attention of the player.

Further, a handle 195 is provided in the lower right corner of the door frame 3 opposite to the hinge side, and a notch opening 295b is provided in a portion of the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 facing the right side of the outer peripheral surface. Therefore, the cutout opening 295b can be used as a handle when opening and closing the door frame 3. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the door frame 3 with a handle that makes the door frame look unattractive, and the appearance of the door frame 3 can be improved.

Further, the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports the outer peripheral ring portion 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction, and the flange portion 291e and the flange portion 291e that restrict the movement in the front-rear direction. The guide piece 291 g is provided, and even if the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the movement of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c to the front can be restricted by the guide piece 291 g or the like. The 195c and the spoke portion 195b connecting the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a are not deformed, and the handle 195 can be prevented from being damaged.

Further, since the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the player is touching the handle 195 and then accepts the operation of the handle 195 to drive the game ball B, only the spoke portion 195b and the outer ring portion 195c are used. The game ball B can be driven by operating the handle 195 while touching the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used for various driving operations (handle operation) as described above. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being driven in a state where the handle 195 is not touched, and it is possible to prevent the handle from being operated using a tool and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from behind. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front surface of the door frame base 101 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing a game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. A lower plate 202 capable of storing B and a lower plate 202 are provided.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower plate 202 is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210. It is provided with a plate decoration unit 250 having a plate decoration unit 250, and a production operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate main body 212. A mounting base (not shown) that is mounted on and projects forward, a dish unit relay board (not shown) that is mounted to the right of the mounting base, and a ball that is mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base. The rental operation unit 220, the upper plate ball removal unit (not shown) mounted below the mounting base, and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit. It has.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The dish unit main body 252, the lower dish ball pulling unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251 and the dish left decoration unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit main body 252, respectively. It is equipped with a plate right decoration unit 275.

The effect operation unit 300 includes a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by the player and a press operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit cover unit 310 having a spherical outer surface, an operation unit base 315 housed inside the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, and an operation unit base 315. An annular effect operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320 attached to the upper surface, an outer peripheral board cover 325 covering the upper part of the effect operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320, and an operation attached to the rear side of the operation part base 315. A unit relay board unit 330 is provided.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit 350, which is provided with the effect operation unit 301 and is provided with the effect operation unit 301, and the effect operation unit base 315, so that the effect operation unit 300 can project upward from the effect operation unit cover unit 310. It is provided with an effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360 that supports the unit 350 so as to be able to move up and down, and a projecting output adjusting mechanism 380 that adjusts the upward projecting output of the effect operating unit 350 by the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360. There is.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 is arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged on the right side, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides of the front view and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 201 recedes rearward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. See). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 201a is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When the upper plate 201 is assembled in the plate unit 200, its bottom surface is from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port (not shown). On the other hand, it is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper plate ball feeding port.

The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting that is electrically grounded in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B comes into contact (rolls), the game ball B is brought into contact with the game ball B. It is possible to remove the static electricity charged in the machine.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50 and the like. FIG. 50 (a) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the door frame by cutting horizontally at the portion of the lower plate ball supply port, and FIG. It is sectional drawing which shows the main part, (c) is the table which compared the number of game balls stored in the lower plate in this Example product and the conventional product. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates the bottom wall up and down so that the game ball B can be discharged. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed so as to be openable and closable by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangle shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom surface of the lower plate 202 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located below the effect operation unit 300 on the left side with respect to the front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state of being assembled in the plate unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and at the same time, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is opened. The game ball B stored in the plate unit 200 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate ball supply port 211c is forward. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. 50B, the lower plate ball supply port 211j of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 communicating with the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. On the other hand, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202b of the lower plate 202 is provided in front of the central axis. Then, the lower plate ball supply port 211j has a cylindrical shape that extends straight forward so that the game ball B discharged forward from the ball discharge port 150d goes straight to the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211j can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b by moving the shortest distance.

By the way, when the game ball B is guided straight toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b by the lower plate ball supply port 211j, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265. Since the plate ball extraction hole 202b and the lower plate ball supply port 211j are provided near the right end of the lower plate 202, there is a risk that the storage of the game ball B will be concentrated in the area on the right side of the center of the lower plate 202. There is. Then, when the game ball B concentrated in the area on the right side in the lower plate 202 blocks the front of the lower plate ball supply port 211j, the game ball B moves from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to the lower plate 202 side. There is a risk that the full tank detection sensor 154 will operate and the lower plate 202 will be determined to be full even though there is still room on the left side of the lower plate 202. There is.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, although details will be described later, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), the left side wall (ball guide portion 213) of the lower plate ball supply port 211c is extended diagonally to the left front. It is tilted to. More specifically, at least one game ball B can be distributed with a distance between the left side wall of the lower plate ball supply port 211c and the front surface of the plate unit base 211 at a portion directly behind the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. It is tilted diagonally to the left and forward so that it is a distance.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is to the left of the central axis (line indicated by the alternate long and short dash line) of the rear end (ball discharge port 150d) of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. I'm moving to.

As a result, by moving the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a to the left, the lowest portion of the lower plate 202 (the portion of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) is moved to the left, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is moved to the left. With the 202a closed, it is possible to reduce the concentration of the game ball B on the right side in the lower plate 202. Then, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored in the lower plate 202 from the portion of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower plate 202 (front surface of the plate unit base 211), the lower plate ball is supplied. Since the side wall on the left side of the mouth 211c extends diagonally to form a gap through which the game ball B can flow from the rear end of the lower plate 202, the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper plate ball The game ball B discharged from the unit 240 (ball removal guide path 241c) to the lower plate ball supply port 211c side is guided to the left side in the lower plate 202 along the diagonally extending left side wall and released. The game ball B can be properly stored in the entire lower plate 202.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying the full tank even though a sufficient area for storing the game ball B remains in the lower plate 202. More game balls B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5c. Plate base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The plate base unit 210 has a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201. It includes a main body 212 and a dish unit relay board 214 attached to the rear surface of the dish unit base 211 near the lower right corner.

Further, the plate base unit 210 is a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211, and an upper plate ball attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the ball lending operation unit 220. It includes a pre-pulling unit (not shown) and a pre-drilling ball pulling unit 240 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 211 behind the pre-dish ball pulling unit.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape (shallow with the rear open) extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is formed in a box shape).

The plate unit base 211 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a and the upper plate ball supply port 211a extending rearward in a tubular shape. A speaker port 211b with a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c that penetrates back and forth at the lower part on the left side of the center of the left and right sides of the front view, and extends rearward in a tubular shape, and a lower plate. A notch 211d that is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right wall of a portion that extends cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear on the upper right side of the front view of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is provided with an upper plate ball feeding port (not shown) whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled in the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower plate ball supply port 211c has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a tubular rear end having a lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the tubular portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 can be operated by operating the upper plate ball ejection port 222, the upper plate ball feeding port, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, and the upper plate. After the ball is removed, the unit 240 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b, the ball removal guide path 241c, and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port 211a is located in front of the ball receiving port (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and the upper plate 201 The game ball B inside is supplied to the ball feeding guide path 241b from the ball receiving port of the unit 240 after the upper plate ball is pulled out.

Further, the plate unit base 211 of the present embodiment has a ball guiding portion 213 that guides the game ball B supplied into the lower plate 202 to a position far from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The ball guide unit 213 guides the game ball B guided from the upper plate 201 by the ball extraction guideway 241c to a position far from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (left part of the lower plate 202). be. As shown in FIG. 50A, the ball guiding portion 213 forms a part of the inner wall of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. More specifically, the ball guide portion 213 forms the inner wall on the left side facing the inner wall on the right side where the ball extraction guide path 241c is open in the inner wall of the lower plate ball supply port 211c formed in a cylindrical shape. It is inclined so as to move to the left from the rear end side to the front end side. Due to the inclination of the inner wall on the left side (ball guide portion 213), at least one game ball B is placed between the front surface of the plate unit base 211 (rear end of the lower plate 202) at a portion directly behind the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. There is a distance (gap) that can be circulated. As a result, when the game ball B circulating from the upper plate 201 to the ball pulling guide portion 241c comes into contact with the ball guide portion 213 from the right side, the game ball B is guided to the left front by the inclination of the ball guide portion 213. The ball B can be guided to the left end side in the lower plate 202 away from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a in the lower plate 202. That is, the ball guiding portion 213 can guide the game ball B to a position far from the lowest portion (lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) in the lower plate 202.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), since the lower plate ball supply port 211j in the conventional pachinko machine (also referred to as the conventional product) extends straight in the front-rear direction, it is guided by the ball removal guide path 241c. When the game ball B comes into contact with the inner wall on the left side of the lower plate ball supply port 211j, it rolls forward while bouncing to the right, and is sent to a position far from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b in the lower plate 202. Instead, it is stored in the area on the right side in the lower plate 202 provided with the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b. Therefore, in the conventional product, the storage of the game ball B (indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 50 (b)) is concentrated in the region on the right side of the center of the lower plate 202, and the right side of the lower plate 202 is stored. When the game ball B concentrated in the area blocks the front of the lower plate ball supply port 211j, the game ball B is not discharged from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to the lower plate 202 side, so that the tank is full. There is a risk that the detection sensor 154 is activated and the lower plate 202 is determined to be full even though there is still room on the left side of the lower plate 202.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the ball guiding portion 213 is provided, the game ball B that has been distributed through the ball pulling guiding portion 241c is guided to the left region in the lower plate 202. can do. Further, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored in the lower plate 202 from the portion of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower plate 202 (front surface of the plate unit base 211), the lower plate ball is supplied. From the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 (ball removal guide path 241c) through between the left side wall (ball guide portion 213) of the mouth 211c and the rear end of the lower plate 202. The game ball B released to the lower plate ball supply port 211c side can be guided to the left side in the lower plate 202, and the game ball B can be stored throughout the lower plate 202. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying the full tank even though a sufficient area for storing the game ball B remains in the lower plate 202. More game balls B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

Then, as a proof of the above-mentioned action and effect, the inventors of the present application store the product of the present embodiment and the conventional product in the lower plate 202 when the full tank detection sensor 154 is activated. The number of game balls B was counted. The counting of the game ball B was performed 10 times in each case. As a result, as shown in the table of FIG. 50 (c), the lower plate 202 (the product of the present embodiment) of the present embodiment has a larger number of stored game balls B than the conventional product at any time. It was confirmed that the game ball B could be stored about 40% more than the conventional product on average.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The upper plate main body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger and bulges forward than the center of the left and right in the front view. The front end of the upper plate main body 212 recedes rearward from the most forward bulging portion toward the right side of the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper part of the upper plate main body 212 is closed near the right end.

In the state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, the upper plate main body 212 is attached so that a portion where the upper part is closed near the right end is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, in the upper plate main body 212, an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed in an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish left decorative board 273, the dish right decorative board 278, and the operation unit relay board 332. Is for. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner on the rear surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, its rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-4. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is an enlarged plan view showing a portion of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of the door frame. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After inserting a prepaid card or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B can be rented into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine can be displayed, or the ball lending machine can be used. The purpose is to deduct the amount of the rented game ball B and return the cash or prepaid card inserted in the card, adjust the volume, adjust the amount of light, and so on.

The ball lending operation unit 220 is provided on a base portion 221 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211, an upper plate ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221 and an upper surface of the base portion 221. A disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is arranged on the right side of the upper plate ball lending button 222 and has translucency, and a ball lending button 224 that is arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223. The return button 225 located on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, the ball lending display unit 226 located below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending button 224 outside the base unit 221. It includes a volume control button 227 arranged in front and a light amount control button 228 arranged on the left side of the volume control button 227.

The upper plate ball pulling button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221 and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and the letters "ball" are given on the upper surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one cannonball type LED, and can be satisfactorily visually recognized from the player side through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light emitting state.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card having cash or a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and then the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the rented game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display unit 226 displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted in the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit 226 when the ball lending machine breaks down.

The volume control button 227 sets the volume of the sound for directing the music, sound, sound effect, etc. output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4. It is for adjusting. The volume control button 227 is formed in a bicircular gourd shape that looks like a combination of two circles. The volume control button 227 has a "+" character in the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" character in the center of the other (lower) circle, and between the two circles. The part of is decorated with a pattern that makes the sound come from the speaker. The volume control button 227 is formed so that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. When the "+" side of the volume control button 227 is pressed, the volume is increased, and when the "-" side is pressed, the volume is decreased.

The light amount adjusting button 228 is for adjusting the light amount of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. The light amount adjustment button 228 is formed in a bicircular gourd shape that looks like a combination of two circles. The light intensity adjustment button 228 has a "+" character in the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" character in the center of the other (lower) circle, and between the two circles. The part of is decorated with a light bulb pattern. The light amount adjustment button 228 is formed so that the diameter of the circle on the “+” side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the “−” side. The light amount adjustment button 228 becomes bright when the "+" side is pressed, and becomes dark when the "-" side is pressed.

The volume control button 227 and the light amount control button 228 have different colors (for example, the volume control button 227 is white and the light amount control button 228 is black) so that the player cannot make a mistake.

By the way, when the volume and the amount of light are adjusted by using the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301, the player participation type effect that requires the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is not executed. Occasionally, the effect operation unit 301 is appropriately operated to display a setting menu for adjusting the volume, the amount of light, etc. on the effect display device 1600, and after selecting an item to be adjusted, the contact operation unit 302 is operated. Since the loudness of the volume and the brightness of the amount of light are changed, it takes time and effort to adjust the volume and the amount of light. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the volume and the amount of light can be directly adjusted by operating the volume control button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228, and it takes time and effort to adjust the volume and the amount of light. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be adjusted in a short time by simplifying the above.

[3-5c-5. Unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 49. The upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperates with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, and the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 This is for discharging B to the lower plate 202.

The unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball is slidably attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 and the rear base 241 which are attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port from the rear. The upper plate ball removal slider 242, a spring for urging the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward (not shown), and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241 are provided. ing.

The rear base 241 has a ball receiving port (not shown) through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball, which protrudes upward from the part where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward. A ball feeding taxiway 241b that guides the game ball B received in the socket downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a ball feeding taxiway 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 below the ball feeding taxiway 241b. It is provided with a ball-extracting taxiway 241c that guides the game ball B downward from the position and then guides the game ball B to the right in the rear view.

The ball receiving port opens forward through the upper plate ball feeding port of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in the front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201 in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210. It is formed at the position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The portion extending to the left and right of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c protrudes to the right in the rear view from the portion in which the upper plate ball-extracting slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in the rear view is lower. It opens on the right side of the rear view. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. In the state where the ball feeding guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball feeding port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending to the left and right in the rear view is formed so as to be connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball pulling slider 242 has a quadrangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an actuating receiving portion (not shown) protruding forward from the upper left corner and a rear surface to the rear side of the actuating receiving portion. It is provided with a protruding operation transmission unit 242b. The upper surface of the actuating receiving portion is formed to be flat. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward toward the rear, and the lower surface thereof extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

In the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion penetrates the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the upper plate ball pulling portion is pulled out on the upper surface of the operating receiving portion. The lower end of the button 222 is in contact. Further, in the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled on the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b projects rearward of the rear base 241 and the ball feeding unit 140 operates on the ball pulling member 143 on the upper surface. The door 143c is in contact.

The upper end of the spring is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end is attached to the upper plate ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is located at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring, and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring.

In the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 passes through the actuating receiving portion of the upper plate ball removal slider 242. The pull-out button 222 is located at the upward moving end. Further, since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c which is in contact with the upper surface of the operating transmission portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, in the state where the upper plate ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves downward and hits the upper surface of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 in contact can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143, and the partition portion 143a moves to the entrance 141a and the ball pulling. Retreat from between the mouth 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. The Rukoto. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower plate ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the plate 202, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressure of the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring, the upper plate ball removal button 222 rises, and comes into contact with the operation transmission unit 242b. The ball pulling member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to return to the original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 side or discharged to the lower plate 202 side by the upper plate ball removal unit 240 via the ball feeding unit 140. can do.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 48 and the like. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211, and the plate unit base so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of 211, the lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and the plates attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit main body 252, respectively. It includes a left decoration unit 270 and a plate right decoration unit 275.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate body 251 extends to the left and right, and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower plate main body 251 is formed with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end at the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower plate main body 251 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate main body 251 is in a state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. Further, in the state where the lower plate body is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extends downward and is separated to the left and right, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251.

A dish left decoration unit 270 and a dish right decoration unit 275 are attached to the front surfaces of the left and right upper side bulging portions 252a.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

Further, although not shown, the dish unit main body 252 is formed between a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a centered in the left-right direction, and includes an effect operation unit mounting portion to which the effect operation unit 300 is attached. .. The effect operation unit mounting portion is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width in the left-right direction of the dish unit main body 252.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. ..

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removing unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 27 and 50. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and opens and closes the lower plate ball removing hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower plate 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower plate 202. It is for letting you do it.

The lower plate ball removal unit 260 includes a lower plate ball removal button 263 and a lower plate ball removal lid 265 that opens and closes a through hole by operating the lower plate ball removal button 263.

In the state where the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal button 263 coincides with the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b in the plate unit main body 252, and the lower plate ball removal lid 265 closes the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

When the lower plate ball removal button 263 is pressed backward in a normal state, the lower plate ball removal lid 265 moves to open the lower plate ball removal hole 202a, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is passed through the lower plate 202. The game ball B can be discharged below the plate unit 200.

When the lower plate ball removal lid 265 is moved by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 263, the lower plate ball removal lid 265 remains in the moved state, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a remains open. Then, the game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball removal hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball removal button 263, which is recessed from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, backward, and then release the pressure to release the lower plate ball removal lid 265. Returns to the normal state position, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed. As a result, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate left decoration unit and plate right decoration unit]
The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 48 and the like. The dish left decoration unit 270 and the dish right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The dish left decoration unit 270 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency, and a dish left decoration that penetrates the dish left decoration 271. It includes a lens 272 and a dish left decorative substrate 273 provided on the rear side of the dish left decorative lens 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish left decorative body 271 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper left at the left end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the right end, giving the shape of a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The dish left decorative body 271 is formed in a milky white color.

The dish left decorative lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction in a state of being aligned with the front surface of the dish left decorative body 271. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and the dish left decorative body 271 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light.

The left end of the dish left decorative unit 270 is continuous with the lower end of the left side unit 420 of the door frame in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. Since the dish left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish left decorative body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish left decorative substrate 273 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish left decorative body 271 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish right decoration unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency, and a dish right decoration that penetrates the dish right decoration 276 and has translucency. It includes a lens 277 and a dish right decorative substrate 278 provided on the rear side of the dish right decorative lens 277 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

The dish right decoration body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side. The dish right decorative body 276 has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper right at the right end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the left end, giving the shape that the semi-cylinder is twisted. It is formed. The dish right ornament 276 is formed in a milky white color.

The dish right decorative lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction thereof so as to coincide with the front surface of the dish right decorative body 276. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish right decorative substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and the dish right decorative body 276 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light.

The plate right decoration unit 275 is assembled on the door frame 3 and its right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430. Since the dish right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish right decorative substrate 278 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish right decorative body 276 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

A part of the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 is projected upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a in the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 in a state of being assembled on the door frame 3. , A step can be formed between the upper side bulging portion 252a and the dish left decorative unit 270 and the dish right decorative unit 275 side. As a result, the player can hook his / her finger on the step between the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is leveled. It can be used as a finger hook when operating the effect operation unit 301, which will be described later. Further, the step between the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 52 to 56 and the like. FIG. 52 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front with the effect operation button directed upward, and FIG. 52 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of (a) viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front lower side. be. FIG. 55 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating spring lower holding member is in the position of the upward moving end, and FIG. 55 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit from the state of (a). It is sectional drawing of the effect operation unit in the state which the part unit moved to an ascending position. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating spring lower holding member is in the position of the downward moving end.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. It is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that allows the player to perform a contact operation and a press operation unit 303 that allows the player to perform a press operation, and accepts the player's operation and moves the effect operation unit 301. It can be (vibrated) so that the player can participate not only in the driving operation of the game ball B but also in the production during the game. In the effect operation unit 301, the contact operation unit 302 is provided above the pressing operation unit 303. In the effect operation unit 301, the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are formed in a circular shape having a diameter of about 5/8 with respect to the outer diameter of the effect operation unit 300.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided on the front surface in the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200, and has a spherical effect operation unit cover unit 310 and an effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the outside on the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250. The operation unit base 315 to be attached and the effect operation unit provided on the upper surface of the operation unit base 315 and equipped with a plurality of LEDs 320a for illuminating and decorating the upper part of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 (unit top cover 312). The outer peripheral decorative board 320, the outer peripheral board cover 325 attached to the operation unit base 315 so as to cover the outer peripheral decorative board 320 of the effect operation unit from above, and the operation unit relay board unit attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315. It is equipped with 330.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 adjusts the effect operation unit 350 having the effect operation unit 301, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 for raising and lowering the effect operation unit 350, and the projecting output of the effect operation unit 350. It is provided with a sudden output adjusting mechanism 380. The effect operation unit unit 350 is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat upward from the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 via the operation unit base 315. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 decorates the outer periphery of the effect operation unit 300 (around the effect operation unit 350) at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is an annular shape having a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 opened upward and rearward and an insertion port 312a provided above the unit lower cover 311 through which the effect operation unit 301 is inserted. It is provided with a unit top cover 312. The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and the lower side of the operation unit base 315. The unit upper cover 312 is formed so as to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311. That is, the outer surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a substantially spherical shape. Incidentally, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the present embodiment has a spherical shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is tilted at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

The front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is the front end of the door frame 3 in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

At least the upper cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 has translucency, and the effect operation unit cover unit 310 can be light-emitting decorated by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320, which will be described later.

The front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is greatly projected forward from the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is connected so that the plate left decorative body 271 and the plate right decorative body 276 extend outward from both the left and right sides of the unit lower cover 311. As a result, the production operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 315 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The operation unit base 315 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a of the upper plate main body 212 on the plate base unit 210 on the rear side. The front and lower parts of the operation unit base 315 are covered by the unit lower cover 311 and the upper part is covered by the unit upper cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301. The operation unit base 315 is formed in the shape of a container with an open upper part.

The operation unit base 315 includes a substantially cubic box-shaped main body portion 315a having an open upper portion, and a flange portion 315b extending outward from the upper end of the main body portion and having a circular outer circumference. ing. The effect operation unit 350 is housed inside the main body 315a. Further, the main body 315a has a pair of guide shafts 362 and a lower end of the central shaft 366 of the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360 in the effect operation unit 350, which will be described later, attached to the bottom wall. Further, the main body portion 315a rotatably supports the lower end side of the adjusting screw 384 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 on the upper surface of the bottom wall. Further, the board base 331 of the operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the main body 315a.

On the upper surface of the flange portion 315b, the effect operation portion outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 is placed. Further, an annular outer peripheral substrate cover 325 is attached to the flange portion 315b so as to sandwich the effect operation portion outer peripheral decorative substrate 320. The unit top cover 312 is attached to the outer peripheral board cover 325.

When the operation unit base 315 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 315b is located on substantially the same surface as the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311.

[3-5e-3. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315. The operation unit relay board unit 330 covers the board base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315, the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the rear surface of the board base 331, and the operation unit relay board 332 from the rear. A board cover 333, which is attached to the board base 331 as described above, is provided.

The operation unit relay board 332 includes an effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 (front decorative board 321 and rear decorative board 322), a button outer decorative board 355, a vibration motor 356, a contact detection sensor main body 358, a button inner decorative board 364, and an operation button. The connection between the elevating drive motor 367, the push detection sensor 373, the elevating detection sensor 374, the protrusion output detection sensor 375, and the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381, and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 is relayed.

[3-5e-4. Production operation unit]
The effect operation unit 350 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation unit 350 is provided so as to face outward from the insertion port 312a of the unit upper cover 312 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and can function as a contact operation unit 302 or a pressing operation unit 303. Is.

The effect operation unit 350 includes a bottomed cylindrical button body 351 whose upper end side is closed, a disk-shaped contact detector 352 attached to the upper part of the button body 351 and a button body 351 from below. The cylindrical button sleeve 353 that is inserted, the disk-shaped button base 354 that is attached to the lower end of the button sleeve 353 and is supported by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, and is arranged above the button base 354. It is provided with an annular button outer decorative substrate 355 on which a plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted on the upper surface thereof.

Further, the effect operation unit 350 includes a vibration motor 356 arranged between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 in which the vibration motor 356 is attached to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detector 352. It is provided with a contact detection sensor main body 358 that is connected and attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353.

The button body 351 is entirely transparently formed. The button body 351 is composed of a disk-shaped upper surface portion 351a that is curved so as to bulge upward, a cylindrical tubular portion 351b that extends downward from the outer circumference of the upper surface portion 351a, and a tubular portion 351b. It has a locking portion 351c that protrudes downward from the lower end. The upper surface portion 351a is formed in a shape forming a part of a spherical surface having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310. The upper surface portion 351a is provided with a circular decoration formed to a diameter of about 1/2 of the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351a (cylindrical portion 351b) is about 5/8 of the diameter of the effect operation unit cover unit 310. The length (height) of the tubular portion 351b is about 5/8 of the diameter of the upper surface portion 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 351b. The locking portion 351c is locked to the button base 354. Incidentally, the button body 351 of the present embodiment has a diameter of about 127 mm.

The contact detector 352 has a circular outer circumference, and is formed in a dish shape in which the inner side having a certain width from the outer circumference bulges upward. The contact detector 352 is a portion below the circular decoration on the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 and bulges diagonally upward, and the inside thereof is formed flat. As a result, the contact detector 352 looks like a part of the decoration of the button body 351. The contact detector 352 has flat plate-shaped downward extending pieces 352a extending downward from the left and right ends of the outer peripheral edge and the rear end. The contact detector 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. The contact detector 352 is formed of punching metal. In the contact detector 352, the capacitance with respect to the entire area is suppressed by the plurality of holes of the punching metal, and erroneous detection is prevented. Further, since the contact detector 352 is made of punching metal, the light from the LED 364a of the decorative substrate 364 provided below can be transmitted upward, and the central portion of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is good. It can be luminescent and decorated in a state of being.

The contact detector 352 is connected to the external electrode terminal of the connector in the contact detection sensor main body 358. As a result, the contact detector 352 can function as a sensor electrode for detecting the capacitance, and detects contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface or side surface of the button body 351. Can be done. That is, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can make the button main body 351 function as the contact operation unit 302.

The button sleeve 353 has a cylindrical sleeve body 353a extending vertically and an annular flange portion 353b extending outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is entirely transparent. The outer diameter of the sleeve body 353a is about 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351 and the length is substantially the same as the length of the tubular portion 351b of the button body 351. The button sleeve 353 can transmit light from the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button outer decorative substrate 355 upward through the flange portion 353b.

The button base 354 has a disk shape having substantially the same diameter as the outer diameter of the button body 351 and is attached to the lower end of the button body 351 so as to close the open lower end side of the button body 351. The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a penetrating vertically at a portion symmetrical with respect to the center, a central hole 354b penetrating vertically at the center, and projecting from the inner surface of the central hole toward the center. It is provided with a pair of guide pins 354c and the like. The guide shafts 362 of the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360 are slidably inserted into the pair of guide holes 354a, respectively. The central hole 354b is formed to have an inner diameter large enough to allow the elevating cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c face each other on the same shaft core and are rotatably attached around the shaft core.

The button base 354 extends downward, and further has a flat plate-shaped detection piece 354d detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. In the button base 354, the locking portion 351c of the button body 351 is locked to the outer peripheral surface. The button base 354 is guided so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 354a. Further, the button base 354 is moved in the vertical direction by a pair of guide pins 354c being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. The upper ends of the pair of elevating springs 365 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 are in contact with the lower surface of the button base 354, and the button base 354 is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365.

A plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted on the upper surface of the button outer decorative substrate 355. The plurality of LEDs 355a are arranged in a row on the double circumference of concentric circles. More specifically, the plurality of LEDs 355a are provided at a portion slightly outside the sleeve body 353a of the button sleeve 353 and a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately emitting light of the LED 355a of the button outer decorative substrate 355, the portion of the upper surface of the button main body 351 outside the contact detector 352 and the side surface (peripheral surface) of the button main body 351 can be light-emitting and decorated.

The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to the rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight. The vibration motor 356 is arranged so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged so that the rotation axis extends in a direction orthogonal to the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operating unit 301. Further, the vibration motor 356 is provided at a portion on a straight line passing through a pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the effect operation unit 301 (effect operation unit unit 350) in the vertical direction. As a result, the vibration from the vibration motor 356 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the effect operation unit 301. Further, the influence of the vibration by the vibration motor 356 on the pair of guide holes 354a (pair of guide shafts 362) can be reduced.

The contact detection sensor main body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the contact detection sensor main body 358 supplies power to a sensor IC having a surge protection circuit, a transmission circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, and the like, an output circuit, and the sensor IC and the output circuit. It has a constant voltage circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connector. The contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the capacitance of the sensor electrode contained therein. Further, the connector of the contact detection sensor main body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detector 352. That is, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can make the contact detection body 352 function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the capacitance with the sensor electrode and outputs an ON signal when the predetermined capacitance set by the external resistance is exceeded. In the present embodiment, the ON signal is output when the predetermined capacitance is exceeded, but a signal having a plurality of stages may be output depending on the magnitude of the capacitance.

The effect operation unit 350 of the present embodiment is provided with a contact detector 352 that functions as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance by the contact detection sensor body 358 on the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. Therefore, it is possible to detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface of the button body 351 via the contact detection body 352. Further, since the contact detection body 352 of the effect operation unit 350 has a plurality of downward extension pieces 352a extending downward, the button main body is in a state where the effect operation unit 350 is projected upward. It is possible to detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the side surface of the 351. Therefore, the effect operation unit 350 can make the button body 351 function as the contact operation unit 302 by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358.

The effect operation unit unit 350 is supported so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. In the state where the effect operation unit 350 is moved to the most downward position (normal state), the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 coincides with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the effect operation is performed. The unit 300 looks like a sphere. When the effect operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. By pressing downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, it can function as the pressing operation unit 303.

More specifically, in the state where the effect operation unit 350 is moved to the most downward position (normal state), the effect operation unit 350 does not move further downward even when pressed, and the pressing operation cannot be performed. .. In this normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Then, when the effect operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated from the press detection sensor 373 and becomes a non-detection state. .. Then, when the upper surface of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the effect operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower moving end against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 detects the pressure. It is detected by the sensor 373. As a result, the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

Further, since the effect operation unit 350 covers the upper part of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal with the button body 351, it touches the upper surface of the smooth spherical button body 351 when operating the contact operation unit 302. Therefore, the player does not directly touch the surface of the punching metal having irregularities due to the plurality of holes, and the player can smoothly operate the contact operation unit 302. Further, since the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, fine irregularities and a plurality of streaks are formed on the surface (upper surface) of the button body 351 to give an arbitrary tactile sensation to the contact operation unit 302. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the contact operation unit 302, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is more entertaining to the player.

In the above description, the button body 351 is made transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button body 351 may be opaque or translucent so that the lower side is difficult to see through the button body 351. As a result, the contact detector 352 made of punching metal becomes difficult to see through the button body 351, so that the appearance of the effect operation unit 350 can be improved. Further, when the button body 351 is opaque, it is desirable that the button body 351 has translucency. As a result, the button body 351 can be light-lit and decorated by the light from the LED 355a of the button outer decorative board 355 and the LED 364a of the button inner decorative board 364 provided below, and the player can emit light by the light emitting effect of the button body 351. Can be entertained.

[3-5e-5. Production operation unit elevating mechanism]
The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation unit base 315, and can elevate the effect operation unit unit 350. The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is mounted in the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 below the effect operation unit unit 350, and has a substantially circular elevating mechanism base 361 and a central axis of the elevating mechanism base 361. A pair of cylindrical columns that are symmetrically arranged and have the lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation base 315 and the upper end penetrating the operation base 315 and the button base 354 and extending upward. The guide shaft 362 and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other, and the outer circumference is smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353. It includes a decorative substrate 364 in a button on which a plurality of irradiable LEDs 364a are mounted.

Further, in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted respectively, and a pair of elevating springs 365 for urging the button base 354 upward, and a center of the elevating mechanism base 361 and the button base 354. It includes a central shaft 366 that penetrates vertically and has a lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a and an upper end attached to the upper base 363.

Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation button elevating drive motor 367, which is attached to the lower surface of the elevating mechanism base 361 so that the rotation shaft projects upward, and the rotation shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367. The spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368, which is engaged with the elevating drive gear 368 and rotatably attached to the upper side of the elevating mechanism base 361, is rotated by the spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 and the driven gear 369. The elevating cam drive gear member 370, through which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached, is provided.

Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is rotatably attached with the central shaft 366 inserted and the lower end is connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370, and the elevating cam that elevates and lowers the button base 354 by rotating. It includes a member 371 and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the elevating mechanism base 361 so as to cover the elevating drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361 to detect the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and the elevating mechanism base 361 is attached to the elevating cam drive gear member 370. An elevating detection sensor 374 that detects the elevating and lowering of the effect operation unit 350 by detecting the rotational position of the (elevating cam member 371), and an elevating spring lower holding member of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 that is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361. It is provided with a sudden output detection sensor 375 that detects the sudden output of the effect operation unit 350 by detecting the ascending / descending of the 385.

The elevating mechanism base 361 includes an elevating spring together with a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a, and a pair of guide shafts 362 penetrating the base body 361a. It is provided with a pair of through holes 361c through which 365 can pass. The base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 315a in the operation portion base 315. A driven gear 369, an elevating cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressure detection sensor 373, and a sudden output detection sensor 375 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a. Further, an operation button elevating drive motor 367, an elevating detection sensor 374, and a bump output adjusting drive motor 381 are attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the elevating mechanism base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315. As a result, a space in which the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is arranged is formed between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The pair of through holes 361c are provided in the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 from the center to the front and rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base main body 361a, respectively.

The pair of guide shafts 362 penetrate the pair of through holes 361c provided in the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a. .. The central shaft 366 penetrates the center of the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The lower end of each of the pair of guide shafts 362 and the center shaft 366 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315, and the upper end of each is attached to the upper base 363. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal rods.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The upper base 363 has a lower protrusion that protrudes downward. The upper base 363 can form a space capable of accommodating the elevating cam member 371 between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 by bringing the lower projecting portion into contact with the upper projecting portion of the gear cover 372. can.

A plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the upper surface of the decorative substrate 364 in the button are full-color LEDs. The decorative substrate 364 in the button can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 364a.

The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and guide shafts 362 are inserted in each of the pair of elevating springs 365. The lower end of the pair of elevating springs 365 is in contact with the elevating spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, and the upper end is in contact with the button base 354.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that projects upward from the gear portion 370a and connects the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with an elevating detection piece 370c, which protrudes downward from the top in a cylindrical shape and has two notches facing each other and is detected by the elevating detection sensor 374. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is formed in a columnar shape, and is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 penetrates the gear cover 372 and is provided between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are separated by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar column and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

The cam portion 371a is one of a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the shaft core, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d. (See FIG. 55 and the like). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided with a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view of the elevating cam member 371. Is formed in. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 can be guided by the cam portion 371a, and the button base 354 is urged upward by the elevating spring 365 (effect operation unit unit 350). Can be raised and lowered.

The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the elevating spring 365 and the elevating cam member 371 can pass. Further, the gear cover 372 has an upper protrusion portion protruding upward at a portion facing the lower protrusion portion of the upper base 363. The gear cover 372 forms a space capable of accommodating the elevating cam member 371 between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 by bringing the upper projecting portion into contact with the lower end of the lower projecting portion of the upper base 363. be able to.

The pressing detection sensor 373 detects the pressing operation of the effect operating unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the effect operating unit 350. The pressure detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the state where the effect operation unit 350 is moved to the most downward position (normal state). When the effect operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state because the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated. Then, when the upper surface of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the effect operation unit 350 lowers the effect detection sensor 373 to the lower moving end against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the button base 354 The detection piece 354d can be detected, and the pressing operation of the effect operating unit unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) can be detected.

The elevating detection sensor 374 detects the elevating detection piece 370c of the elevating cam drive gear member 370, and thereby means the elevating cam member 371 via the connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370. The rotation position of is detected.

The sudden output detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d of the elevating spring lower holding member 385 in the sudden output adjusting mechanism 380.

The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can support the effect operation unit 350 so as to be able to move up and down via the button base 354 by a pair of guide shafts 362 arranged in the front and rear, and the button base 354 is supported by a pair of elevating springs 365. The effect operation unit 350 can be urged upward through the method. Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises and lowers the effect operation unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) with respect to the effect operation unit cover unit 310 by rotating the elevating cam member 371 by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Can be made to. Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can appropriately illuminate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately emitting light of a plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the decorative substrate 364 in the button.

In the normal state of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked to the locking portion 371c provided on the lower end side of the elevating cam member 371 (FIG. 55 (a)). See). In this normal state, the effect operation unit 350 is located at the downward moving end via the button base 354, and even if the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed downward, the effect operation is performed. The unit 350 does not move downward. Therefore, in the normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected. Further, in a normal state, the surface (upper surface) of the unit upper cover 312 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and the upper surface of the button body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 are in agreement with each other, and the effect operation unit cover unit 310 And the button body 351 form one sphere.

When the elevating drive gear 368 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 in a normal state (the effect operation unit 350 is in the descending position), it meshes with the elevating drive gear 368. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view via the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 55A moves to the right, and the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked. The button base 354 rolls from the 371c to the left portion of the locking portion 371c in the first cam 371b, and the button base 354 moves slightly downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

Then, when the guide pin 354c that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is located from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, the second cam Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 354c and the guide pin 354c At the same time, the button base 354 is raised, and the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position. In this state, since the detection piece 354d is separated from the pressure detection sensor 373, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state.

The elevating spring lower holding member 385 of the elevating output adjusting mechanism 380 with which the lower end of the elevating spring 365 is in contact can be moved to various positions in the vertical direction by the projecting output adjusting drive motor 381, although details will be described later. can. Then, since the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 can be changed according to the position of the elevating spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction, the effect operating unit 350 is raised by the protruding output according to the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365. It can be projected to a position.

When the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam portion 371a of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in contact with the cam 371e. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

When the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and the movement of the button base 354 further upward is restricted. Further, when the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire effect operation unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) is moving upward, and the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is located above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. Also protrudes upward.

In this raised position, when the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the effect operation unit 350 pushes the elevating spring 365. The button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372 as it moves downward against the urging force of the. When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 is in the lowered position, and the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is also in the lowered position together with the button base 354.

In this way, when the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is in a state of being detected by the pressure detection sensor 373, and the button body 351 of the effect operation unit unit ( The pressing of the pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

To return the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) from the ascending position to the descending position, the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. In (b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354, moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 354c), so that the guide pin 354c is moved by the third cam 371e. Is pressed downward, and the button base 354 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

When returning the effect operation unit 350 to the descending position, the projecting output adjusting drive motor 381 of the projecting output adjusting mechanism 380 moved the elevating spring lower holding member 385 downward to reduce the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365. The state (see FIG. 56). As a result, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit 350 upward becomes weak, so that the force acting on the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 also increases. It becomes weaker, and the load applied to the operation button elevating drive motor 367 that rotates the elevating cam member 371 can be reduced, and damage (failure) of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 can be reduced. Further, as the operation button elevating drive motor 367, an inexpensive motor having a low torque can be used.

Then, when the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the button base 354 stops and the guide pin 354c moves to the first cam. Roll along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the effect operation unit 350 is returned to the original descending position.

In the above, in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, so that the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is moved to the first cam 371b ( An example of moving the button base 354 (button body 351) from the locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d and projecting the button base 354 (button body 351) from the descending position to the ascending position at once has been described. In a normal state in which the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) is locked to the locking portion 371c of the 371 and the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) is moved to the lower position, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 makes the elevating cam member 371 a clock in a plan view. It may be rotated in the clockwise direction. Incidentally, the elevating distance of the button main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in the present embodiment is about 40 mm.

When the elevating cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in a normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the guide pin 354c is moved by the urging force of the elevating spring 365 to the third cam 371e. Will move upward along. When the guide pin 354c is in the middle position of the third cam 371e and the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is stopped, the button body 351 is projected upward at an arbitrary position between the descending position and the ascending position. It can be stopped. Then, by projecting the button body 351 to a position higher than the lowering position, the button body 351 can be pressed downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the button body 351 is pressed by the pressing operation unit 303. Can function as.

When the button body 351 is projected upward by the third cam 371e, the elevating spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the urging force of the elevating spring 365. Is desirable. As a result, the load applied to the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 (operation button elevating drive motor 367) can be reduced, and the operation feeling of the pressing operation of the button main body 351 can be lightened.

In this way, since the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) can be changed according to the rotation position of the elevating cam member 371, the protrusion amount can be changed according to the gaming state (for example, the first starting port 2004 or the like. By making the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 different (according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2005), it is possible to make the player suggest the degree of expectation for the game. can.

At least one shallow recess in which the guide pin 354c can be locked may be provided in the middle of the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371. As a result, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) can be stably projected to the position of the same protrusion amount, and the variation in the protrusion amount can be prevented. Further, when a recess is provided in at least one place in the middle of the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c is locked in the recess, so that the operation button elevating drive motor 367 stops the rotation of the elevating cam member 371. It is not necessary to continue, and the load applied to the operation button elevating drive motor 367 can be reduced.

[3-5e-6. Sudden output adjustment mechanism]
The sudden output adjusting mechanism 380 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The sudden output adjusting mechanism 380 changes the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit 350 upward, so that the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) protrudes upward (the momentum (pressing operation unit 303)). The sudden output) can be changed. The protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is provided between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361.

The sudden output adjusting mechanism 380 includes a sudden output adjusting drive motor 381 attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 and a spur gear-shaped pinion gear attached to the rotating shaft of the protruding output adjusting drive motor 381. From the transmission gear 383 that meshes with the pinion gear 382 and is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a, the spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a that meshes with the transmission gear 383, and the gear portion 384a. An adjustment screw 384 that has a screw portion 384b that extends downward in a columnar shape and has a spiral groove formed on the outer circumference, and is rotatably supported by inserting a central shaft 366, and an adjustment screw. It is provided with a lifting spring lower holding member 385 that meshes with the screw portion 384b of the 384, penetrates the pair of guide shafts 362, and is in contact with the lower ends of the pair of lifting springs 365.

The sudden output adjustment drive motor 381 is attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a so that a gap is formed between the bump output adjustment drive motor 381 and the lower surface of the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The sudden output adjustment drive motor 381 has a rotation shaft protruding from the gap between the motor and the base body 361a.

The upper and lower adjustment screws 384 are formed to have a length extending from the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 to the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The screw portion 384b of the adjusting screw 384 is formed in a columnar shape having a diameter larger than that of the gear portion 384a.

The elevating spring lower holding member 385 has a main body portion 385a extending in the front-rear direction, a screw hole 385b penetrating up and down at the center of the main body portion 385a and screwing with the screw portion 384b, and front and rear of the main body portion 385a. It has a spring holding recess 385c that is provided at both ends and is recessed downward to accommodate the lower end of the elevating spring 365, and a flat plate-shaped detection piece 385d that extends upward from the front end of the main body 385a. .. The guide shaft 362 penetrates the elevating spring lower holding member 385 at the center of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c. The detection piece 385d is detected by the sudden output detection sensor 375 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360.

When the pinion gear 382 is rotated by the protrusion adjustment drive motor 381, the protrusion adjustment mechanism 380 can rotate the adjustment screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a. Then, the sudden output adjusting mechanism 380 moves the elevating spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction by the screw hole 385b meshing with the screw portion 384b by rotating the adjusting screw 384 by the protruding output adjusting drive motor 381. be able to.

In the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, when the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the lower end of the elevating spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c is moved upward, and the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 is large. Become. On the other hand, when the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the elevating spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c is moved downward, and the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 is reduced (FIG. 56). reference). That is, when the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the urging force for urging the effect operating unit 350 upward by the elevating spring 365 can be increased, and the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward. Then, the urging force for urging the effect operation unit 350 upward by the elevating spring 365 can be reduced. As a result, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 can adjust the protrusion output upward of the effect operation unit 350.

The detection piece 385d of the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is detected by the sudden output detection sensor 375 when the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is raised most. That is, when the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 is the largest, the detection piece 385d is detected by the sudden output detection sensor 375. As a result, when the sudden output detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d while the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is being moved upward by the sudden output adjusting drive motor 381, the elevating spring lower holding member by the sudden output adjusting drive motor 381 By stopping the upward movement of the 385, it is possible to prevent the elevating spring 365 from being further compressed, and it is possible to prevent the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 from being damaged.

Further, as described above, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 can appropriately adjust the protrusion output of the effect operation unit 350, so that the button body is operated by the contact detector 352 while the effect operation unit 350 is in the lowered position. The contact or approach of the object to be detected (for example, the player's finger, etc.) to the 351 is detected, and the effect operation unit unit 350 is projected by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 so as to come into contact with the object to be detected. Occasionally, the vertical position of the elevating spring lower holding member 385 may be appropriately selected so that the protruding output of the button body 351 is different. As a result, when the button body 351 protrudes upward, the strength applied to the player's fingers or the like can be made different. Therefore, if the button body 351 strongly abuts, there may be something good for the player. It is possible to make the player think that it is, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game. Therefore, according to the sudden output adjusting mechanism 380, according to the gaming state (for example, according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005). By increasing or decreasing the sudden output of the button body 351, it is possible to make the player suggest the degree of expectation for the game.

By the way, as a method of changing the urging force of the spring, it is conceivable to change the urging force by applying a twist to the spring. However, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring) in order to project the effect operation unit 350, and if the compression coil spring is twisted to change the urging force, it is impossible to use it differently from the original use. Stress acts on the compression coil spring, and the internal structure may deteriorate and be damaged at an early stage. On the other hand, in the projecting output adjusting mechanism 380 of the present embodiment, the projecting output of the effect operating unit 350 is changed by changing the compression amount of the elevating spring 365 by moving the elevating spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction. Since the urging force) is adjusted, excessive stress does not act on the elevating spring 365, and it is possible to reduce the early deterioration of the elevating spring 365. It can be stably projected over a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57 is an explanatory view showing the positional relationship between the outer peripheral decorative substrate of the effect operation unit, the decorative substrate outside the button, and the decorative substrate inside the button in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 58A is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, and FIG. 58B is a front view of the dish unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation unit 300 is formed in a spherical shape as a whole, and has an effect operation unit 301 on the upper surface that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by touching or approaching the player's hand or the like, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can perform a pressing operation. The contact operation unit 302 is provided above the pressing operation unit 303 (button body 351).

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled in the dish unit 200 in a state in which the projecting direction of the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350) capable of projecting upward is inclined so that the upper side is positioned forward with respect to the vertical direction. ing. That is, the center of the effect operation unit 301 is located in front of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300. As a result, the effect operation unit 301 can be easily seen by the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1.

In the normal state of the effect operation unit 300, the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) is in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 is the effect. It coincides with the spherical surface of the operation unit cover unit 310. Further, in the normal state, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed downward, the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the effect operation unit 300 looks like a mere spherical decorative body and can be operated.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the effect operation unit 300, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 is arranged below the unit upper cover 312 that surrounds the outer circumference of the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350). An annular button outer decorative substrate 355 is arranged inside the pressing operation unit 303 near the outer edge, and a button inner decorative substrate 364 is further arranged inside the annular button outer decorative substrate 355. The effect operation unit 300 is arranged outward in the order of the button outer decorative board 355 and the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, centering on the button inner decorative board 364. The LED 355a inside the decorative substrate 364 inside the button and the decorative substrate 355 outside the button is arranged below the contact detector 352, but the contact detector 352 is formed of punching metal to provide translucency. Since it has, the light from them can be satisfactorily transmitted upward (player side).

The effect operation unit 300 can illuminate and decorate the annular unit upper cover 312 by the LED 320a of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration substrate 320. Further, the LED 355a of the button outer decorative substrate 355 can illuminate and decorate the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the upper surface of the button main body 351 and the outer peripheral surface. Further, the LED 364a of the decorative substrate 364 in the button can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351.

Since the plurality of LEDs 320a of the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the decorative substrate 355 outside the button, and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the decorative substrate 364 inside the button are arranged in a row on the circumference, in the circumferential direction. By sequentially emitting light, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the light rotates around the center of the pressing operation unit 303. Further, since the plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, and LEDs 364a are arranged concentrically, the light emission effect that the light spreads from the center of the pressing operation unit 303 to the outside and the light is emitted from the outside to the center of the pressing operation unit 303. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect that converges.

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a lowered position where the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) has its upper surface aligned with the surface of the unit upper cover 312, as shown in FIG. 58 (a). It is in a state. In this state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is impossible. On the other hand, the contact operation unit 302 can enable the contact operation according to the player participation type effect to be executed.

As an effect (player participation type effect) in a normal state in which the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) is not projected, for example, an effect image prompting the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed. It displays on the device 1600 and outputs voice, sound effects, and the like. Then, when the contact detection body 352 detects the contact (or approach) with the button body 351, the process proceeds to the next production stage. When the contact is detected, the button body 351 is light-emitting and decorated by the light emission of the LED 355a of the button outer decorative board 355 and the button inner decorative board 364, thereby recognizing that the contact operation is accepted by the player. It may be possible to give a feeling of operation to the contact operation unit 302. At this time, the degree of expectation for the game (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, such as a "big hit" game) is given to the player by the emission color, emission brightness, emission pattern, etc. of the button body 351. It may be suggested.

Alternatively, when the contact detector 352 detects contact (or approach) with the button body 351, the button body 351 may be vibrated by driving the vibration motor 356. As a result, it is possible to give a feeling of operation to the contact operation unit 302, and it is possible to make the player strongly recognize that the contact operation has been accepted. At this time, by giving a strong vibration, a weak vibration, or a vibration having a predetermined rhythm to the vibration motor 356, the player may be made to suggest the degree of expectation for the game. good.

Further, as an effect in a normal state (player participation type effect), an effect image prompting the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or a sound, a sound effect, or the like is output. After that, when the contact detector 352 detects the contact of the player (hand or finger) with respect to the upper surface of the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 moves the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) up and down. It is projected upward (pop-up) by the urging force of the spring 365. More specifically, in a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is moved to the cam portion 371a (first cam). Departing from 371b), the effecting operation unit 350 (button body 351 and pressing operation unit 303) vigorously protrudes upward together with the button base 354 by the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365 (FIG. 371b). 55 (b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the button body 351 is located above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button body 351 projects upward. Then, as the button body 351 protrudes upward as described above, the fingers touching the button body 351 are pushed upward together with the button body 351. Therefore, the player can be greatly surprised. It can be of great interest.

After that, the process shifts to the effect of pressing the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) to entertain the player with the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. More specifically, when the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is in the raised position and the button body 351 is pressed downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) is pressed. Moving downward, the upper surface of the button body 351 is flush with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373. As a result, the pressing operation of the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected, and the effect can be changed with the pressing operation as a trigger to entertain the player with the player participation type effect.

In addition, at the time of the above-mentioned production, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is used to increase or decrease the protrusion output (momentum) that causes the button body 351 to protrude, so that the player can determine the degree of expectation for the game depending on the strength of the protrusion output. May suggest to. Further, the button body 351 may be vibrated by the vibration motor 356 when the button body 351 pops up or is pressed.

In the effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, when the contact detector 352 detects that the player's fingers or the like approach the moving range (within the projecting range) of the button body 351 projecting upward, the button is displayed. The main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be projected upward. As a result, the button body 351 comes into contact with the player's fingers and the like to give an impact, so that the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 may increase or decrease the protrusion output of the button body 351 so that the player can suggest the degree of expectation for the game by the strength of the protrusion output.

Further, in the effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the contact detector 352 causes the player's fingers and the like to be outside the projecting range of the button body 351 protruding upward and within a predetermined distance from the protruding button body 351. The button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be projected upward when it is detected that the button body is approaching. As a result, the wind pressure generated by the protrusion of the button body 351 can be applied to the fingers and the like of the player, so that the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 makes the protrusion output of the button body 351 stronger or weaker, and makes the player suggest the degree of expectation for the game by the strength of the wind pressure that hits the player's fingers or the like. You may do so.

Further, as an effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be projected upward regardless of the detection of the player's fingers or the like by the contact detector 352. At this time, if the button body 351 is projected with a strong projectile output by the projecting output adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes vigorously to generate a sound (protruding sound), which surprises the player with the projecting sound. Can be done. Further, when the button body 351 is projected with a weak protrusion by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes quietly, so that it is difficult for the player to notice the protrusion of the button body 351. The button body 351 protrudes before you know it, which can surprise the player.

As an effect after projecting the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351), the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is generally used by weakening the urging force of the elevating spring 365 by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380. It is also possible to perform an effect of performing a pressing operation similar to that of a pressing button. Alternatively, the thrust output adjusting mechanism 380 may be used to increase the urging force of the elevating spring 365 to cause the player to perform an effect of pressing the button body 351 with a strong force.

Further, as the effect after the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) is projected, an effect such that the protruding button body 351 is touched may be executed. At this time, since the contact detection body 352 has the downward extending piece 352a extending downward, the side surface of the button main body 351 may be contact-operated. Further, at this time, it is desirable to strengthen the urging force of the elevating spring 365 by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, whereby the protruding button body 351 can be made difficult to move, and the button body 351 (contact operation). The contact operation of the unit 302) can be easily performed.

As an effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the button base 354 is described above by rotating the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 in the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360. The guide pin 354c of the above is moved from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d, and the button base 354 (button body 351) is projected from the descending position to the ascending position at once. It is not limited to this.

For example, in a normal state where the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked to the locking portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371 and the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) is moved to the descending position, the operation button elevates and lowers. By rotating the elevating cam member 371 in the clockwise direction in a plan view by the drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c is moved from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the elevating cam member 371 is in the middle of the third cam 371e. The rotation of the button body 351 may be stopped to stop the upward protrusion of the button body 351 at a position between the descending position and the ascending position. At this time, the elevating spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the urging force of the elevating spring 365.

In this way, even when the button body 351 is halfway projected by the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371, the button body 351 can be pressed and the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with the player participation type production. In this case, since the amount of protrusion upward of the button body 351 can be made different according to the rotation position of the elevating cam member 371, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the game according to the amount of protrusion of the button body 351. , Can entertain the player.

Further, as an effect of pressing the projected effect operation unit 350 (button body 351), after the effect operation unit 350 is projected, the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward to compress the elevating spring 365. To the minimum state. As a result, since the urging force of the elevating spring 365 is in the weakest state, the effect operation unit 350 can be pressed with a light (weak) force, and the operability of the pressing operation is enhanced to perform the pressing operation. Can be entertained. Further, as an effect of pressing the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351), the elevating spring 365 is set to an appropriate position in the vertical direction according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn. The urging force may be any strength from the strongest to the weakest. As a result, the player can be forced to push the effect operation unit 350 strongly or weakly, so that the player can be entertained by the difference in the operation force of the effect operation unit 350, and more versatile. It is possible to present the production, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored.

Further, as an effect using the effect operation unit 300, a contact detector is provided so that the contact of the player's fingers or the like with the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351) can be detected in a plurality of contact stages (approach stages). A plurality of steps of threshold values may be set according to the capacitance of 352, and the effect may be changed according to each step. That is, paying attention to the fact that the capacitance of the contact detector 352 increases as the player's fingers and the like approach the button body 351 (contact detector 352), a plurality of threshold values are set for the magnitude of the capacitance. It may be possible to detect in multiple stages by providing the above and utilize it for the production. Specifically, for example, a stage where the player's fingers or the like are separated from the button body 351 by a predetermined distance or more, a stage where the player's fingers or the like are not in contact with the button body 351 within a predetermined distance from the button body 351 or the game. By dividing the stage where a person's fingers or the like are in contact with the button body 351 and changing the effect according to each stage, a variety of effects can be presented to the player even with one contact detection sensor body 358. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored and suppresses the decline in interest.

In the above embodiment, as a normal state of the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is set to the lower position, and the elevating spring lower holding member is set. Although the state in which the 385 is moved upward is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 56A, the effect operation unit 350 is set to the lowering position and the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is moved. It may be in a state of being moved downward. As a result, since the elevating spring 365 is not strongly compressed under the normal state, it is possible to prevent the elevating spring 365 from deteriorating (fatigue) at an early stage. Further, the strongly compressed urging force of the elevating spring 365 can prevent the button base 354 and the elevating spring lower holding member 385 from being deteriorated (fatigue) at an early stage.

As described above, according to the effect operation unit 300 of the present embodiment, since it can be used for the player participation type effect of various patterns, it is possible to entertain the player with various effects and make the player bored. It is possible to make it difficult and suppress the decline in interest.

By the way, in the effect operation unit 300, an annular (combined two arcs) effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 is provided on the upper part of the spherical effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the outer circumference of the effect operation unit 300 is provided. A contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided on the effect operation unit 350 that moves up and down inside the decorative substrate 320. Further, inside the button sleeve 353 of the effect operation unit 350, a button interior decorative substrate 364 whose position is fixed is provided. Since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided with a sensor electrode for detecting the capacitance, when the effect operation unit 350 is moved from the lower position to the upper position, the contact detection sensor main body 358 (sensor electrode) is provided. ) Will approach the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit and the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and the capacitance of the sensor electrode will change due to the approach of the decorative substrate 320 in the outer periphery of the effect operation unit and the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and the contact detection sensor There is a risk that the main body 358 will erroneously detect.

Therefore, a conductive shield connected to the ground (GND) between the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and between the decorative substrate 364 in the button and the contact detection sensor main body 358. (For example, punching metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) may be provided. As a result, by moving the effect operation unit 350 up and down, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor body 358 and the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 and the button inner decorative board 364 changes, the contact detection sensor body 358 And the shield connected to the ground (GND) where the distance from the contact detection sensor main body 358 does not change between the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 and the button inner decorative board 364, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 and It is possible to reduce the influence of the change in capacitance due to the approach of the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and it is possible to prevent erroneous detection in the contact detection sensor main body 358.

[3-5f. Another embodiment of the dish unit]
Subsequently, the dish unit 200 of the embodiment different from the above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61 and the like. FIG. 59 is a plan view of the effect operation unit unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are provided in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit. FIG. 60A is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, and FIG. 60B is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are connected to one contact detection sensor main body. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the example which provided the switching part between, and (c) is the effect that the plate left decoration unit, the plate right decoration unit, the effect operation unit, etc. of the plate unit can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the contact detection body on the front side and the rear side of an operation unit and the like. FIG. 61A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a contact detector having decorativeness, and FIG. 61B is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. In FIGS. 59 to 61, the same components as described above are designated by the same reference numerals.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 59, the contact detection body 352 is divided into left and right of the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R on the lower side of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350. The contact detection sensor main body left 391L and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R are connected to each of the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R. According to this embodiment, on the upper surface of the button body 351, for example, when the player moves the fingers or the like from the left side to the right side, first, when the player's fingers or the like are located on the left side of the button body 351. The capacitance of the contact detector left 390L changes and the contact detection sensor body left 391L becomes detection, and the capacitance of the contact detector right 390R does not change, and the contact detection sensor body right 391R remains undetected. It becomes. Then, when the player's finger or the like moves to the center of the button body 351, the capacitances of both the contact detector left 390L and the contact detector right 390R change, so that the contact detection sensor body left 391L and the contact detection sensor body 391L and the contact detection sensor body change. Both right 391R are detected. Further, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the contact detector left 390L returns to the original state, the contact detection sensor body left 391L becomes non-detection, and the contact detector right 390R is electrostatically charged. The capacitance is changing and the contact detection sensor body right 391R remains detected.

In this way, the movement of the player's fingers and the like due to the combination of detection / non-detection of the contact detection sensor main body left 391L and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R by the contact detector left 390L and the contact detector right 390R and the pattern of the change. Can be detected. As a result, it is possible to detect a contact operation with a wider variety of movements, and it is possible to present to the player a player-participatory effect capable of causing the contact operation unit 302 to perform a variety of contact operations. , The player participation type effect of operating the contact operation unit 302 can be further enjoyed. If a contact detector is added, more complicated operations can be detected.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60A is an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to one contact detection sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, in a state where a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of different locations, one contact detection sensor main body 392 detects contact with a human body or the like by any of the contact detection bodies 393. can do.

For example, by arranging a plurality of contact detectors 393 distributed inside (lower side) of the button body 351 so that the player's fingers or the like come into contact with any part of the surface of the button body 351. The contact detection body 393 can detect the contact, and the detection accuracy for the contact with the contact operation unit 302 can be improved.

In addition, the plurality of contact detectors 393 may cause trouble to a part of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch (for example, a part where the player may be injured or another player). It may be provided in a certain part, a part where a fraudulent act may be performed, etc.), and when a human body or the like is detected by any of the contact detectors 393, cautions, warnings, etc. may be notified.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 60B, switching between one contact detection sensor main body 392 and a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in which only one of the contact detection bodies 393 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. This is an example in which the portion 394 is provided. According to this embodiment, by switching the connection to any one of the plurality of contact detection bodies 352 by the switching unit 394, it is possible to detect the contact of the human body or the like only in the desired portion (contact detection body 352). .. The switching unit 394 includes "a switch by a switching circuit using a relay or a transistor", "a switch by another electronic circuit", and "a movable member (for example, a movable dish left decoration as shown in FIG. 60 (c)". The unit 270, the dish right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300) are switched according to the movement of the unit 270).

For example, in the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302), a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are distributed and arranged, and a player participation type effect is executed such that the parts detected by each contact detection body 393 are touched in order. Occasionally, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is switched in the order of being touched by the switching unit 394, and the contact detection body 393 detects whether or not the player's fingers or the like have touched. good. As a result, it is possible to present the player with a highly game-like player-participation-type effect by the plurality of contact detectors 393, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60 (c), when the plate left decoration unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300 can be moved forward and backward, the first is on the front side of the effect operation unit 300. When the contact detector 393a is provided and the second contact detector 393b is provided on the rear side of the dish left decoration unit 270, the dish right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300 to project the effect operation unit 300 and the like forward. When the first contact detection body 393a and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching unit 394 and the effect operation unit 300 or the like is retracted, the second contact detection body 393b and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching unit 394. You may switch to do so.

As a result, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like is projected (moved) forward, the first contact detector 393a detects the contact or approach of the player and stops the effect operation unit 300 or the like from moving forward. To. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 300 and the like from unnecessarily pressing the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and to prevent the player from being uncomfortable. be able to.

On the other hand, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like is projected forward, a gap may be formed on the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like, and the effect is performed with the player's fingers or the like inserted in the gap. If the operation unit 300 or the like is retracted to the initial position, the player's fingers or the like may be pinched and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like moved forward is moved backward, the switching unit 394 switches the second contact detector 393b so as to be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. Then, when the second contact detector 393b detects the player's fingers or the like, the movement of the effect operation unit 300 or the like to the rear is stopped, and the fingers or the like are separated from the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like. The guidance is notified to the player, and the effect operation unit 300 and the like are moved backward and returned to the initial state only when the second contact detector 393b is not detected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured by the gap on the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like, and it is possible to enhance the safety of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 61A, the outer shape of the contact detector 395 that detects the contact of the player's fingers or the like is shaped like a star to have decorativeness (design). The shape of the decorative contact detector 395 is not limited to a star shape, but is a circular shape, a polygonal shape, a geometric pattern shape, a shape imitating a predetermined character, and a predetermined item. It may have a shape, a shape imitating a predetermined logo, a frame-like shape, or the like. As a result, since the contact detector 395 that can be seen through the transparent button body 351 has decorativeness (design), the contact detector 395 itself can improve the appearance of the button body 351 and thus the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to a player.

Further, in the above embodiment, the contact detector 352 formed of punching metal is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the contact detector can be a metal plate, an expanded metal, a wire mesh, a metal wire, a plating, or the like. It may be formed by metal vapor deposition, foil stamping, or the like, and the same effect as described above can be obtained. It is desirable that the contact detector is provided on the back surface side of the transparent surface member so that the player's fingers or the like do not come into direct contact with the contact detector. It can be smooth.

Further, in the above embodiment, the one in which the decorative substrate 364 (LED364a) in the button is provided below the contact detector 352 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the present invention is shown. A contact detector 397 may be provided below the transparent surface member 396, and a decorative body 398 may be provided below the contact detector 397. As a result, the decorative body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detector 397, so that the decorativeness of the effect operation unit provided with the surface member 396 can be enhanced, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. can.

In the embodiment of FIG. 61B, the contact detector 397 is formed by metal vapor deposition so that the decorative body 398 provided below cannot be visually recognized due to the metallic luster of the contact detector 397 under normal conditions. By illuminating the decorative body 398 with an LED provided below the contact detector 397 by detecting contact with the surface member 396, the decorative body 398 can be visually recognized through the surface member 396 and the contact detector 397. good.

Further, the contact detector 352 may be formed so as not to be recognized by the player. Here, examples of the unrecognizable contact detector include "a body formed of a transparent member", "a body formed so as to be integrally visible with the decoration of a surface member such as a button body", and the like. As a result, the effect operation unit 301 provided with the contact detection body 352 cannot recognize the contact detection body 352, so that the player does not detect the contact of the fingers or the like or perform the contact operation. For example, when a predetermined player participation type effect is executed and the player's fingers or the like come into contact with or approach the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises the button body 351. By projecting to, the player becomes aware of the existence of the contact detector 352 (contact operation unit 302) for the first time, which can greatly surprise the player, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest. Can be done.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65 and the like. 62 (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view taken along the woo line in FIG. 62 (a). The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame left side base 421. It is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side base 421 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted on the front surface at regular intervals. It covers the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 and the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front surface at regular intervals. The left side upper reflector 424 attached to the door frame left side base 421 and the left side lower reflector 425 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423. The door frame left side decorative body 426 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the left side upper reflector 424 and the left side lower reflector 425 is provided.

Further, the door frame left side unit 420 includes a left side upper light guide member 427 that guides the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 forward, and the upper and lower decorative boards 423 of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423. From the left side middle light guide member 428 that guides the light from the first LED 423a above the center of the direction forward, and from the first LED 423a below the center in the vertical direction in the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423. It is provided with a left side lower light guide member 429 that guides the light of the light forward.

The door frame left side base 421 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open forward. The door frame left side base 421 is molded in two colors using synthetic resins having different colors and light transmittance (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame left side base 421 is molded in two colors with two types of resins, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295 described above, and a part of the inner layer 3a is outer. By penetrating the layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface, a circular or radial pattern is formed. That is, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame left side base 421 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71 (a)). ). When molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 422a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 422a. LED 422b is mounted. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 422c having a unique address for causing the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b to emit light is mounted on the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame.

On the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, a total of 12 full-color LEDs, 4 for the first LED 422a and 8 for the second LED 422b, are mounted. Further, the first LED 422a provided with the second LED 422b on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 422b. Further, at least the second LED 422b is a wide-angle top-view type LED capable of irradiating light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

In the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three sets: the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the third to the sixth to the eighth from the top. It is divided. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit four first LEDs 422a divided into two sets and eight second LEDs 422b divided into three sets in full color, respectively. As described above, a total of 15 systems of 3 systems are controlled for one set.

Although not shown, the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame has two power lines (one is a ground wire) that supplies power for driving the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the LED driver 422c. And one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of electric wires is connected. Then, in the LED driver 422c of the decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, two sets are received according to the command. The four first LEDs 422a divided into three sets and the eight second LEDs 422 b divided into three sets can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

The lower decorative substrate 423 on the left side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and the right side is formed unevenly. A plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 423a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 423a. LED423b is mounted. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 423c having a unique address for causing the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b to emit light is mounted on the decorative substrate 423 below the left side of the door frame.

In the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, a total of 18 full-color LEDs, 6 for the first LED 423a and 12 for the second LED 423b, are mounted. Further, the first LED 423a provided with the second LED 423b on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 423b. Further, at least the second LED 423b is a wide-angle top-view type LED capable of irradiating light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

In the lower decorative substrate 423 on the left side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 423b are 3 from the 1st to the 3rd from the top, 3 from the 4th to the 6th from the top, and 7th to the 9th from the top. It is divided into 4 groups: 3 pieces from the top and 3 pieces from the 10th to the 12th pieces from the top. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit six first LEDs 423a divided into three sets and twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four sets in full color, respectively. As described above, a total of 21 systems of 3 systems are controlled for one set.

Although not shown, the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame has two power lines (one is a ground wire) that supplies power for driving the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the LED driver 423c. And one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of electric wires is connected. Then, in the LED driver 423c of the decorative board 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, three sets are received according to the command. The six first LEDs 423a divided into four and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four sets can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

The left side upper reflector 424 is formed with a through hole 424a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, and corresponds to the first LED 422a. A cylindrical holding cylinder 424b extending back and forth at the position is formed. The left side upper reflector 424 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 424a abuts on the front surface of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, and the circumference of the front side of the through hole 424a faces forward. It is formed in a dish shape that spreads out. As a result, the light from the second LED 422b can be widely diffused forward.

The holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 holds the light guide shaft portion 427 straight in the front-rear direction by inserting the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 described later. Is. The holding cylinder 424b is provided in the center between the through holes 424a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 that penetrates the holding cylinder 424b and protrudes forward, the second of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 facing the through holes 424a on both the upper and lower sides thereof. The light from the LED 422b is irradiated to the light guide shaft portion 427a from both the upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light, so that the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a is prevented from being reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426. be able to.

Further, in the reflector 424 on the left side, a mounting hole for mounting on the left side base 421 of the door frame is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The left side lower reflector 425 is formed with a through hole 425a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and corresponds to the first LED 423a. A cylindrical holding cylinder 425b extending back and forth at the position is formed. The left side lower reflector 425 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 425a abuts on the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the circumference of the front side of the through hole 425a faces forward. It is formed in a dish shape that spreads out. As a result, the light from the second LED 423b can be widely diffused forward.

In the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425, the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the columnar light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are inserted. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a are held straight in the front-rear direction. The holding cylinder 425b is provided in the center between the through holes 425a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 that penetrate the holding cylinder 425b and project forward, the through holes 425a on both the upper and lower sides thereof. The light from the second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame facing more is irradiated to the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from both the upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light, and the left side of the door frame. It is possible to prevent the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from being reflected on the back side of the side decoration body 426.

Further, in the left side lower reflector 425, a mounting hole for mounting on the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a form in which a semicircle bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame left side decorative body 426 has a plurality of openings 426a penetrating back and forth at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The plurality of openings 426a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 and the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. These openings 426a include a light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, a light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and a light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429. The tips of each are inserted from the rear. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421. Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 further has a decorative portion 426b which has a constant shape recessed in an arc shape and extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to avoid a plurality of openings 426a. doing.

The left side upper light guide member 427 has four light guide shaft portions 427a extending in the front-rear direction in a columnar shape and a runner portion 427b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 427a. , Formed of transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 427a are provided at regular intervals in the vertical direction so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 424b of the reflector 424 on the left side. Further, the light guide shaft portion 427a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 424b. Each light guide shaft portion 427a penetrates the holding cylinder 424b of the reflector 424 on the left side from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the tip surface is on the left side of the door frame. It is in a state of matching the surface of the side decoration body 426. The light guide member 427 on the left side can guide the light from the first LED 422a of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a and irradiate the light from the tip to the outside. The opening 426a of the decorative body 426 on the left side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

The left side middle light guide member 428 has three light guide shaft portions 428a extending in the front and rear in a columnar shape, and a runner portion 428b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 428a. , Formed of transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 428a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three upper holding cylinders 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 428a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 428a penetrates the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the tip surface is on the left side of the door frame. It is in a state of matching the surface of the side decoration body 426. The light guide member 428 on the left side can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 428a and irradiate the light from the tip to the outside. The opening 426a of the decorative body 426 on the left side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

The lower left side light guide member 429 has three light guide shaft portions 429a extending in a columnar shape in the front-rear direction and a runner portion 429b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 429a. , Formed of transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 429a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three holding cylinders 425b on the lower side of the lower left side reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 429a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 429a penetrates the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the tip surface is on the left side of the door frame. It is in a state of matching the surface of the side decoration body 426. The left side lower light guide member 429 can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 forward by the light guide shaft portion 429a and irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the decorative body 426 on the left side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion on the door frame left side base 421 is formed to be the same color as the color of the circular or radial pattern portion on the handle cover 295. At the same time, the color of the outer part of the circular or radial pattern on the left side base 421 of the door frame is formed to be the same color as the color of the outer part of the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the portion above the center in the vertical direction slightly protrudes forward from the portion below the center, and the vicinity of the lower end is gently curved to the right. The upper end of the door frame left side unit 420 is located above the door window 101a and below the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, and the lower end is below the door window 101a. It is located above the speaker port 211b in the above. Further, the upper portion of the door frame left side unit 420 is located on the left outer side of the door frame top unit 450. The door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and makes it appear that a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

According to the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 are located at a position to some extent rearward from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. Because the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted on them is sufficiently spread, the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 is irradiated with the door frame. The left side decorative body 426 can be uniformly luminescently decorated.

Further, the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 provided at a position separated from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. Is guided forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429. Light) can be used to make the portion of the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 emit light in a point-like manner brighter than the other portions.

Further, the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, and the left side middle light guide member 428. The light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are provided at the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 422b and the second LED 423b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are irradiated with light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b on both sides with an equal amount of light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected onto the left side decoration body 426 from the rear, the shadows become difficult to see, and the door frame left side decoration body 426 is evenly projected. It can be luminescent and decorated in a planar shape.

Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is provided with a decorative portion 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 426a to each other. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected on the door frame left side decorative body 426 by the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b. Since the decorative portion 426b is provided at the portion where the shadow is projected, the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a can be made difficult to understand, and the left side of the door frame. The appearance of the side decorative body 426 in the light emitting decoration can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70 and the like. FIG. 66A is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, FIG. 66B is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and FIG. 66C is a front view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view, and FIG. 3D is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A in FIG. 66 (a). FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view taken along the OO line in FIG. 66 (a). The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame right side base 431 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame right side base 431. It is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side base 431 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface at regular intervals. The door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame right side lower The right side reflector 434 attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the decorative substrate 433, and the door frame right attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the right side reflector 434. It includes a side decoration body 435 and.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a right side upper light guide member 436 that guides the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 forward, and a door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433. It includes a right side lower light guide member 437 that guides the light from the LED 433a forward.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 is mounted so as to cover the left side surface of the door frame right side base 431, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a penetrating left and right in a predetermined shape on the right side of the door frame. It is provided between the left side decorative body 438, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side base 431 so as to close the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. A plurality of translucent right side left lenses 439 having a decorative portion 439a to be fitted and a plurality of door frame right side bases 431 that are covered and attached so as to cover the right side surface and penetrate left and right in a predetermined shape. It is provided between the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 having the decorative hole 440a, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, and the door frame right side base 431, and is provided between the door frame right side right side right side. It comprises a translucent right side right lens 441 having a decorative portion 441a fitted so as to close the decorative hole 440a of the decorative body 440.

The left and right sides of the door frame right side base 431 extend vertically with a substantially constant width. Further, the door frame right side base 431 is curved to the rear side when the rear end side extends vertically over the entire height and the front end side extends substantially straight downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction. After extending diagonally backward, it curves vertically near the bottom and extends vertically to the bottom.

The door frame right side base 431 has a decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and a decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 (decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the right side right lens). At a height portion where the decorative portion 441a) of 441 is provided, there are a plurality of reflector portions 431a that are recessed from the left and right side surface sides and extend forward to the front end. The rear end side of the reflector portion 431a, which is the inside of the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a, is inclined toward the side surface side, and the bottom surface is curved.

Further, the door frame right side base 431 is provided with decorative holes 438a and decorative holes 440a provided on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The reflector portion 431a corresponding to (the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441) has a front portion excluding a portion inside the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a. , Penetrating in the left-right direction (recessed from the left and right sides and connected to each other).

The reflector portion 431a of the door frame right side base 431 transmits light radiated rearward from the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, which will be described later. It reflects in the direction to illuminate the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 (see FIG. 70 and the like).

The decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 432a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 432a. LED432b is mounted. Further, a plurality of third LEDs 432c are mounted on the rear surface of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 432d having a unique address for causing the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, and the third LED 432c to emit light is mounted on the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame.

In the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, a total of 16 full-color LEDs are mounted, that is, four first LEDs 432a, eight second LEDs 432b, and four third LEDs 432c. Further, the first LED 432a provided with the second LED 432b on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 432b. Further, at least the second LED 432b and the third LED 432c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of irradiating light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

In the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three sets: the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the third to the sixth to the eighth from the top. It is divided. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

The decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame is divided into two sets of the first LED 432a, three sets of the second LED 432b, and two sets of the third LED 432c. In order to make the third LED 432c emit light in full color, there are a total of 21 systems of 3 systems for each set. On the other hand, since the LED driver 432d of the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame can control up to 24 systems, in addition to the above 21 systems, the decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame will be described later. A total of 24 systems, 3 systems for 1 group on the upper side of the 3rd LED 433c divided into 2 groups, are controlled.

Although not shown, the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame has a first LED 432a, a second LED 432b, a third LED 432c, two third LEDs 433c on the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, and an LED. Two power lines (one is a ground line) that supplies power to drive the driver 432d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and an LED. A wiring cable composed of one clock line for synchronizing the driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510 and four electric wires is connected. Then, in the LED driver 432d of the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, two sets are received according to the command. In the four first LEDs 432a divided into three, the eight second LEDs 432b divided into three sets, the four third LEDs 432c divided into two sets, and the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, 2 The two third LEDs 433c in the upper group of the groups can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The lower decorative substrate 433 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 433a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 433a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 433a. LED433b is mounted. Further, a plurality of third LEDs 433c are mounted on the rear surface of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame at intervals at the top and bottom. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for causing the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c to emit light is mounted on the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame.

In the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, a total of 22 full-color LEDs, 6 first LEDs 433a, 12 second LEDs 433b, and 4 third LEDs 433c, are mounted. Further, the first LED 433a provided with the second LED 433b on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 433b. Further, at least the second LED 433b and the third LED 433c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of irradiating light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

In the lower decorative substrate 433 on the right side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 433b are 3 from the 1st to the 3rd from the top, 3 from the 4th to the 6th from the top, and 7th to the 9th from the top. It is divided into 4 groups: 3 pieces from the top and 3 pieces from the 10th to the 12th pieces from the top. Further, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

The decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame is divided into three sets of the first LED 433a, four sets of the second LED 433b, and two sets of the third LED 433c. In order to make the third LED 433c emit light in full color, there are a total of 27 systems of 3 systems for each set. On the other hand, since the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 can control only up to 24 systems, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is divided into two sets of the third LED 433c. Of these, 3 systems for one set on the upper side are controlled by the LED driver 432d of the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the remaining 24 systems (all of the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b on the front side and the third LED 433c on the rear side). The lower two) are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the lower decorative substrate 433 on the right side of the door frame. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the number of LED drivers.

Although not shown, the lower right side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame is provided with power for driving the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, the lower two third LEDs 433c, and the LED driver 433d. Power line (one is the ground line), one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and 1 for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of a book clock line and four electric wires is connected. Then, in the LED driver 433d of the decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, three sets are received according to the command. Each set consists of 6 first LEDs 433a divided into 4 sets, 12 second LEDs 433b divided into 4 sets, and 2 third LEDs 433c in the lower set divided into 2 sets. It is possible to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each.

The right side reflector 434 is formed with through holes 434a penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the second LED 432b of the upper decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame and the second LED 433b of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame. At the same time, a cylindrical holding cylinder 434b extending in the front-rear direction is formed at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 434a abuts on the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, and the front surface of the through hole 434a. The circumference of the side is formed in a dish shape that spreads forward. As a result, the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b can be widely diffused forward.

In the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434, the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, which will be described later, are inserted. The light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are held straight in the front-rear direction. The holding cylinder 434b is provided in the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a that penetrate the holding cylinder 434b and project forward, the second LED 432b of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame facing the through holes 434a on both the upper and lower sides thereof and the like. The light from the second LED 433b of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame is irradiated to the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from both the upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light. It is possible to prevent the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from being reflected on the back side of the 435.

Further, in the right side reflector 434, a mounting hole for mounting on the door frame right side base 431 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The decorative body 435 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a form in which a semicircle bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has a plurality of openings 435a penetrating back and forth at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The plurality of openings 435a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinders 434b of the right side reflector 434. The tips of the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted into these openings 435a from the rear. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decorative body 426. Further, the door frame right side decorative body 435 further has a decorative portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction in a fixed shape recessed in an arc shape so as to avoid a plurality of openings 435a. doing.

The light guide member 436 on the right side has four light guide shafts 436a extending in a columnar shape in the front-rear direction and a runner portion 436b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shafts 436a. , Formed of transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 436a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 434b from above the right side reflector 434. Further, the light guide shaft portion 436a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 436a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the front end surface is the door frame right side. It is in a state of matching the surface of the decorative body 435. The light guide member 436 on the right side can guide the light from the first LED 432a of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a and irradiate the light from the tip to the outside. The opening 435a of the decorative body 435 on the right side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

The lower right side light guide member 437 has six light guide shafts 437a extending back and forth in a columnar shape and a runner portion 437b connecting the lower ends of the six light guide shafts 437a. , Formed of transparent material. The six light guide shafts 437a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the six holding cylinders 434b from the bottom of the right side reflector 434. Further, the light guide shaft portion 437a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 437a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the tip surface is on the door frame right side. It is in a state of matching the surface of the decorative body 435. The light guide shaft member 437 on the lower right side can guide the light from the first LED 433a of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 437a and irradiate the light from the tip to the outside. The opening 435a of the decorative body 435 on the right side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

The left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a penetrating in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape) in the left-right direction. The front end side of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The decorative body 438 on the right side and left side of the door frame is molded in two colors using synthetic resins having different colors and light transmittance (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is molded in two colors with two types of resins, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, similarly to the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface to form a circular or radial pattern. That is, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (FIG. 71 (a)). When molding the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The right side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and protrudes to the left to decorate the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. It has a decorative portion 439a that fits into the hole 438a from the inside (right side). The surface of the decorative portion 439a is aligned with the outer (left side) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 in a state of being fitted into the decorative hole 438a (see FIG. 70). The right side left lens 439 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. The decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 is located to the left of the reflector portion 431a in the door frame right side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for light emission decoration.

Further, the right side left lens 439 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 439a facing from the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 has a radial pattern formed in two colors on the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the part of the decorative portion 439a which is light-emitting and decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

The decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 440a penetrating in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape) in the left-right direction. Further, the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame has a cylinder insertion port 440b into which a cylindrical portion having a key hole 132 at the front end of the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted. The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is formed so that the vertical direction is substantially the same as the total height of the door frame 3. Further, the front end side of the door frame right side decorative body 440 from the upper end to the cylinder insertion port 440b is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is molded in two colors with synthetic resins having different colors and light transmittance (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 includes the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, similarly to the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. The two types of resins are molded in two colors, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface to form a circular or radial pattern. That is, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (FIG. 71 (a)). When molding the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The right side right lens 441 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface above the cylinder insertion port 440b of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, and protrudes to the right to the right of the door frame. It has a decorative portion 441a that fits into the decorative hole 440a of the side right side decorative body 440 from the inside (left side). The surface of the decorative portion 441a is aligned with the outer (right side) surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 in a state of being fitted into the decorative hole 440a (see FIG. 70). The right side right lens 441 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 is located to the right of the reflector portion 431a in the door frame right side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for light emission decoration.

Further, the right side right lens 441 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a in the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 441a facing from the decorative hole 440a of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame has a radial pattern formed in two colors on the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame. It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the part of the decorative portion 441a which is light-emitting and decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is the handle cover 295 or the door frame left. It is formed in the same color as the part of the circular or radial pattern on the side base 421, and is outside the circular or radial pattern on the right side left side decoration 438 of the door frame and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame. The color of the portion is the same as the color of the outer portion of the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the portion above the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward more than the portion at the same height in the door frame left side unit 420 on the opposite side. The door frame right side unit 430 is formed at substantially the same height from the upper end to the lower end of the door frame 3. The upper part of the door frame right side unit 430 is located on the right outer side of the door frame top unit 450.

The door frame right side unit 430 decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded.

The door frame right side unit 430 has a large protrusion from the top to a portion at a height of about half a portion, and forms a tsuitate. As a result, in the island equipment of the game hall, it is difficult for the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine provided adjacent to the right side to visually recognize the inside of the door window 101a (game area 5a). Therefore, since the door frame right side unit 430 is formed in a tsuitate shape, the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity can be blocked, making it difficult for other players to see the entire game area 5a. It is possible to make it difficult for other players to feel as if they are being seen by other players, so that other players can play the game without hesitation.

According to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are located at a position to some extent rearward from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. Because the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted on them is sufficiently spread, the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is irradiated with the door frame. The right side decorative body 435 can be uniformly luminescently decorated.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate provided at positions separated from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The light from the first LED 433a of the 433 is guided (guided) forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, and the door frame. The portion of the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit light in a point-like manner brighter than the other portions.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 emits light of the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, thereby causing the reflector portion of the door frame right side base 431. It is fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, which are fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 via 431a. The decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 can be light-emitting decorated. Further, since a part of the left and right side surfaces (parts of the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a) of the right side unit 430 of the counter-shaped door frame can be light-emittingly decorated, the pachinko machine 1 can be used for other players. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be made to stand out and has a high appeal to the player.

Further, according to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the front side first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433. The one LED 433a and the second LED 433b are used to illuminate the door frame right side decorative body 435 on the front end side, and the third LED 432c on the rear surface side of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side. With the third LED 433c on the rear surface side of the lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 on the rear side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 are luminescently decorated. Therefore, due to the presence of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame and the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, the light from the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b is emitted from the rear door. The right side decoration body 438 on the right side of the frame and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame are irradiated to illuminate the decoration, or the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c illuminates the right side decoration 435 on the front door frame. It is possible to prevent the door from being luminescent and decorated. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 435, the rear side door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be completely independent and luminescently decorated. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting a light emitting effect having a higher effect to a player.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, and the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436. The light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guide member 437 is provided at the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 432b and the second LED 433b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are irradiated with light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b on both sides in an equal amount of light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected from the rear, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be uniformly luminescent and decorated.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 has a door frame right side decorative body 435 having a decorative portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 435a to each other. .. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected on the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the light from the second LED 432b or the second LED 433b, the shadows are projected. Since the decorative portion 435b is provided in the portion to be used, the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be made difficult to see, and the appearance of the light emitting decoration of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is improved. be able to.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper parts of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a, the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. The top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. It is equipped with a door frame top bottom plate (not shown) that connects to the lower end of the door frame.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and has a door frame top central decorative board 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and a door. Door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a door The door frame top right decorative board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. (See FIG. 72).

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) provided on the front surface of the door frame top base 451 and a pair of tops provided on both the left and right outer sides of the pair of top center speakers. The side speaker (not shown), the top lower cover 465 attached to the lower side of the door frame top decorative body 453 so as to cover the front of the top center speaker and the top side speaker, and the front surface of the door frame top base 451. A door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end and a door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451 are provided. There is.

The door frame top base 451 extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the distance between the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430. The top top cover 452 projects forward in a semicircular shape in a plan view, and has an opening 452a that is largely notched from the rear end to the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 extends to the left and right in a semicircular shape along the front end of the top top cover 452 in a plan view. Further, the front surface of the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semicircular shape so that the center in the vertical direction projects forward. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 is formed in a strip shape extending to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 455a.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 456a.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 457a.

The pair of top center speakers are provided apart from each other on the left and right. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers, and output sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band. The pair of top-side speakers are tweeters and output high frequencies of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, the sound output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker is radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker, and a top side speaker, and a door frame sub of the door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, the front end is locked to the top top cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The door frame top unit 450 is connected so that the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 sink from the front to a portion rearward from the inside of the upper part of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. Has been done. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side by a pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 28, 71 and the like. FIG. 71 (a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing a state in which the outer layer of the two-color molding is opaque in the door frame, and FIG. Is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in a transparent state. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially quadrangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a dish left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish right decorative body 276, a unit top cover 312 and a button body 351 of the production operation unit 300, and a door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

The dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame top decorative body 453 that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a have a semi-tube shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the unit top cover 312, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind or below the top decorative body 453, the dish left decorative board 273, the dish right decorative board 278, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame. Since the right side upper decorative substrate 432, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, these decorative substrates By appropriately emitting light from the LED, it is possible to decorate the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a with light emission, or to show the player a light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, a spherical effect operation unit 300 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is attached to the center in the left-right direction. As a result, in the dish unit 200, since the large spherical effect operation unit 300 is located at the center, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302 and pressing) of the effect operation unit 300 can be enhanced. The operation unit 303) can be made to stand out.

Further, in a normal state, the upper surface of the button body 351 as the effect operation unit 301 coincides with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 so as to form one sphere, so that the player It is possible to make it difficult for the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) to be recognized as being operable, and the effect operation unit 300 made of a huge sphere allows the player to see other things at first glance. It is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from the pachinko machine, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to enhance the appealing power to the player. It is possible to make it easier to select the machine 1.

Further, in the dish unit 200, since the center (center) of the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is positioned in front of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300, the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302) And the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303) faces the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the entire effect of the effect operation unit 301 can be easily seen by the player who recognizes that the huge sphere provided in the center of the plate unit 200 is the effect operation unit 301, and the effect operation unit 301 can be displayed. You can make it look bigger. In addition, it is possible to strongly make the player want to operate the huge spherical effect operation unit 301, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the execution of the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301. At the same time, when the player participation type production is executed, the player can actively operate the production operation unit 301, and the operation of the production operation unit 301 makes the player participation type production entertaining. The decrease can be suppressed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 2 to 5, the exterior of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of circular or radial patterns on its outer surface. In FIG. 71, the door frame right side unit 430 is shown as an example as a part of the exterior of the door frame 3.

More specifically, as the exterior of the door frame 3, the plurality of circular and radial patterns on the outer surface are colored in two colors using two types of synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). It is formed by molding. The patterned exterior portion of the door frame 3 is molded in two colors with two types of resins, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b. By appearing on the outer surface, a circular or radial pattern is formed.

For example, demonstrating the door frame right side unit 430 as an example, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), when the inner layer 3a is provided with a honeycomb-like pattern and the outer layer 3b is made opaque, the circular pattern portion is inside. The honeycomb-like pattern of the layer 3a can be seen, and the opaque outer layer 3b can be seen in the portion other than the pattern, and the exterior has an appearance in which the circular or radial pattern is emphasized.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb-like pattern applied to the inner layer 3a can be seen through the outer layer 3b, and is relatively circular. The radial pattern is hard to see. That is, the exterior has an appearance in which the honeycomb-like pattern applied to the inner layer 3a is emphasized.

In FIG. 71, in the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 molded in two colors as a part of the exterior, the decorative portion 441a fitted in the decorative hole 440a is used as a part of the right side right lens 441. Since it is a separate member different from the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the pattern of the decorative hole 440a (decorative portion 441a) does not change even if the outer layer 3b is made transparent.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the main members constituting the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding, the materials used for the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b (synthesis). By appropriately selecting and combining the color of the resin), the light transmittance, and the like, the appearance can be significantly different even if the shape remains the same.

Therefore, for example, at the time of a minor change or the like, by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed at no cost.

Alternatively, the colors of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are changed for each production lot, and the pachinko machines 1 of different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed in the island equipment to make the player feel colorful. It is possible to increase the appealing power to.

In the above embodiment, two-color molding is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multicolor molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may be used. Specifically, in the above embodiment, the exterior is constructed by combining the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame molded in two colors with the right lens 441 on the right side, but the door is molded in three colors. The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the frame and the right lens 441 on the right side may be integrally formed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, those in which a circular or radial pattern is formed are shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and patterns of various shapes may be formed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side provided on the outside of the door window 101a in which the game area 5a in the door frame 3 faces forward. The decorative body such as the surface decorative body 438 and the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame are molded in two colors (multicolor molding) with two synthetic resins having different light transmission rates, and the decoration with a polka dot pattern is formed by the two color molding. Since the decorative body is formed into a desired shape, the desired decoration is applied to the decorative body at the same time, so that the decorative body has a desired shape like the decorative body of a conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to apply the desired decoration by painting or the like after forming the door, and the labor required for the decoration can be omitted and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, since the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. More specifically, when the polka dot decoration is formed by two-color molding, the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the polka dot circle and the outer layer 3b forming the outside of the circle are each transmitted. When formed in the same color with different rates, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b have the same color, so that the polka-dotted circles are difficult to see, and the appearance is such that the polka-dotted decoration is not applied. On the other hand, when the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the polka-dotted circle is white and the outer layer 3b forming the outside of the circle is pink, the difference in color between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b causes. The polka-dotted circles are clearly visible, giving the appearance a pink background with white polka-dotted decorations. In this way, when the decorative body is formed, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin to be used, and the appearance can be changed. The cost can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin to be used when forming the decorative body. If the combination of synthetic resins used for each lot is changed and different lots of this pachinko machine 1 are shipped to the same game hall and installed in a row at the island equipment, the island equipment will look colorful. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player who is wandering in the game hall, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power that can attract the player.

Further, a handle cover 295 and a door frame left side base having a decoration molded in two colors by a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittances on a portion outside the door window 101a in which the game area 5a of the door frame 3 faces forward. Since decorative bodies such as 421, the right side left side decorative body 438 of the door frame, and the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame are provided, the outside of the door window 101a should be decorated with the decorative body to improve the appearance. Can be done.

Further, since the outer layer 3b of the decorative body molded in two colors is formed of a synthetic resin having a lower light transmittance than the remaining inner layer 3a, it is possible to make the inner layer 3a difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. As a result, the boundary of the decoration (polka dot pattern) composed of the inner layer 3a can be seen clearly, and the decoration can be clearly seen.

Further, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, the inner layer 3a can be made difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. Therefore, in the initial model, the outer layer 3b is transmitted through the light. As a low rate, the inner layer 3a is prevented from being seen through from the outside, and at the time of model change, a synthetic resin having high light transmittance is used for the outer layer 3b so that the inner layer 3a can be seen through. As a result, the way of looking at the decoration of the decorative body can be greatly changed, and the appearance (decoration) can be easily changed without changing the shape of the decorative body.

Further, as described above, since the inner layer 3a can be made difficult to see by the outer layer 3b having low light transmittance, a pattern (pattern by shape, painting, printing, sticking of a seal, etc.) on the surface of the inner layer 3a, etc. In the initial model, the opaque outer layer 3b with low light transmittance prevents the pattern of the inner layer 3a from being seen through the outer layer 3b, and is transparent to the outer layer 3b at the time of model change. Since the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen through by using a synthetic resin, the appearance (decoration) of the decorative body can be significantly changed without changing the shape of the decorative body. , It is possible to suppress the increase in the cost of model change.

Further, inside the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board that can irradiate light Since the third LED 433c of 433 is provided and the inner layer 3a is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmission rate than the others, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body When the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided inside the 440 are made to emit light, the inside of the decorations formed on the surfaces of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The part of the layer 3a (the part of the polka dots) can be brightly decorated with light emission, and the outside of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a can be decorated with light emission to improve the appearance and to the player on the right side of the door frame. The light emitting decoration of the side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be enjoyed, and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed.

Further, depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the outer layer 3b can also be light-emitting and decorated by the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c irradiated to the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a. The entire side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be light-emitting decorated, and the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be beautifully displayed for the game. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of the person.

Further, as described above, the decoration of the decorative body such as the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is molded in two colors of a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittances (multicolor). Since it is formed by molding), LEDs (light emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c are made to emit light depending on the number of layers to the surface and the difference in the light transmittance of the synthetic resin used. The decoration that can be seen when there is no light and the decoration that can be seen when the LED is lit can be made different, and by changing the decoration, the player's interest can be strongly attracted. More specifically, for example, when two-color molding is described as multicolor molding as an example, when a hole having a predetermined shape is formed in a portion of the inner layer 3a covered by the outer layer 3b, the LED is made to emit light. In the absence, only the surface-exposed portion of the inner layer 3a is visible. On the other hand, when the LED is made to emit light, the light from the LED is directly irradiated to the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a at the portion where the hole is formed in the inner layer 3a, so that the surface of the outer layer 3b is inside. The shape of the hole in the layer 3a can be seen, and the portion of the inner layer 3a exposed on the surface and the portion of the hole can be seen, and the decoration different from that when the LED is not emitted can be seen. Alternatively, for example, when the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED is made to emit yellow light, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is luminescently decorated. On the other hand, when the LED emits green light (or white), both the inner layer 3a portion and the outer layer 3b portion on the surface are luminescently decorated. The part to be decorated can be changed, and the decoration to be luminescent can be changed. As described above, since the decoration of the decorative body can be changed by the light emission of the LED, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained. In addition, by making the LED emit light according to the game state, the change in the decoration of the decorative body causes the player to have a chance or change the driving operation (for example, "right-handed"). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be suggested and can produce various effects.

Further, since the amount of protrusion in the front-rear direction is different between the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 provided on both the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (game area 5a). Since the impression (appearance) when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front left and the front right can be different, the pachinko machine 1 is wandering around in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Even if the player once passes in front of the pachinko machine 1, when the player approaches the pachinko machine 1 from the opposite side, the appearance is different from that at the time of the previous round trip, which attracts interest in the pachinko machine 1. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can be attached and can attract a player who is wandering in the game hall to select the pachinko machine 1 to be played. ..

[3-10. LED layout and system in the door frame]
Next, the arrangement and control system of each LED provided on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front view showing each decorative substrate of the door frame, and FIG. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative substrate of the portion of the effect operation unit of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 in the lower right corner in the front view, in which the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by a rotation operation by the player. The handle 195 includes a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b in which the central hub portion 195a extends outward, an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the spoke portions 195b to each other, and an annular outer ring portion 195c. It has an appearance similar to that of a steering wheel (steering wheel) of an automobile.

In the handle 195, the front side of the central hub portion 195a is covered with the handle front lens 185, and a handle decorative substrate 184 on which a plurality of LEDs 184a are mounted on the front surface is provided between the handle front lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a. It is provided. Further, behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, a handle cover decorative substrate 293 on which a plurality of LEDs 293a are mounted is provided on the front surface.

There are a total of 10 handle decorative substrates 184, one in the center, three on the middle circumference with a certain interval in the circumferential direction, and six with a certain interval in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference. A number of LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric pattern. These LEDs 184a are one in the center, three in the middle connected by a broken line in FIG. 72, two in the upper left of the outer circumference and two in the upper right of the outer circumference, each connected by a broken line. It is divided into 5 groups, 2 on the lower side of the outer circumference and 2 on the lower side. The LEDs 184a divided into these five sets are controlled by 15 systems by the LED driver 184b, and each set of LEDs 184a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the other hand, on the handle cover decorative substrate 293, 12 LEDs 293a are provided in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are connected by a broken line in FIG. 72, from the center to the lower left two, the left two, the upper left two, the upper right two, and the right two. It is divided into 6 groups, 2 in the lower right and 2 in the lower right. The LEDs 293a divided into these 6 sets are controlled by 18 systems by the LED driver 293b, and each set of LEDs 293a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In this way, since the handle 195 is provided with the handle decorative substrate 184 and the handle cover decorative substrate 293, a light emitting effect such that the light rotates around the handle 195 and toward the center of the handle 195 can be produced. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the light is concentrated and a light emitting effect in which the light spreads toward the outside of the handle 195. Further, the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative substrate 293 can illuminate the outside and the inside of the handle cover 295.

Further, as shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially quadrangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 is a dish left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish right decorative body 276, a production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, and a door frame of the door frame right side unit 430. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the right side decorative body 435 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

The dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame top decorative body 453 that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a have a semi-tube shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which substantially the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 72, the dish left decorative substrate 273 behind the dish left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the dish right decorative substrate 278 behind the dish right decorative body 276, and the like. Door frame left side decorative board 426 rear door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and door frame left side lower decorative board 423, door frame right side decorative body 435 rear door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and door frame right The lower side decorative substrate 433, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are provided facing forward.

More specifically, the dish left decorative board 273 has four LEDs 273a mounted in a row in the left-right direction on the front surface, and an LED driver for emitting the LED 273a and the LED 273a of the dish right decorative board 278, which will be described later. (The illustration is omitted). These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. The LEDs 273a divided into these two sets are controlled by an LED driver in six systems, and each set of LEDs 273a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The dish right decorative substrate 278 is provided with four LEDs 278a mounted on the front surface in a row in the left-right direction. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. The LEDs 278a divided into these two sets are controlled by the LED driver of the dish left decorative substrate 273 in six systems, and each set of LEDs 278a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, four first LEDs 422a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction and two mounted vertically side by side between the first LEDs 422a. It includes eight second LEDs 422b and an LED driver 422c for emitting a total of twelve first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b. The first LED 422a and the second LED 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a of the upper decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. Further, the eight second LEDs 422b are the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the sixth to the eighth from the top, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. It is divided into 3 groups, 3 pieces up to the first piece. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two sets and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three sets are controlled by the LED driver 422c in 15 systems, and the first LED 422a and the second of each set are controlled. The LED 422b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the lower left side decorative substrate 423 of the door frame, six first LEDs 423a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction and two mounted vertically side by side between the first LEDs 423a. It includes 12 second LEDs 423b and an LED driver 423c for causing a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b to emit light. The first LED 423a and the second LED 423b are mounted on the front surface. The six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. Further, the twelve second LEDs 423b are three from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. It is divided into 4 groups, 3 from the 7th to the 9th from the top and 3 from the 10th to the 12th from the top. The six first LEDs 423a divided into three sets and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four sets are controlled by the LED driver 423c in 21 systems, and the first LED 423a and the second LED of each set are controlled. The LED 423b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, four first LEDs 432a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction and two first LEDs 432a arranged vertically side by side between the first LEDs 432a are placed on the front surface. It includes eight mounted second LEDs 432b and four third LEDs 432c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame causes a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LED 432b, and third LED 432c, and two third LEDs 433c of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame to emit light. The LED driver 432d of the above is provided. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a chain double-dashed line in FIG. 72. Further, the eight second LEDs 432b are the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the sixth to the eighth from the top, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. It is divided into 3 groups, 3 pieces up to the first piece. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. The first LED 432a divided into two sets, the second LED 432b divided into three sets, the third LED 432c divided into two sets, and the third LED 432c divided into two sets in the lower right side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame. The upper set of the third LED 433c of the LED 433c is controlled by the LED driver 432d in 24 systems, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the third LED 432c, and the third LED 433c of each set are appropriately colored. It can emit light in full color.

On the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction and two first LEDs 433a arranged vertically side by side between the first LEDs 433a are placed on the front surface. Twelve second LEDs 433b mounted, four third LEDs 433c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction, first LED 433a, second LED 433b, and two lower third LEDs 433c. It is equipped with an LED driver 433d for emitting light. The six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. Further, the twelve second LEDs 433b are three from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. It is divided into 4 groups, 3 from the 7th to the 9th from the top and 3 from the 10th to the 12th from the top. Further, the four third LEDs 433c on the rear side are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as shown by the broken lines in FIG. 72. What are the 6 first LEDs 433a divided into 3 sets, the 12 second LEDs 433b divided into 4 sets, and the lower 1 set of 2 3rd LEDs 433c divided into 2 sets? , The LED driver 433d controls 24 systems, and each set of the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In the present embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 provided on the left side of the door window 101a, and the door frame right side upper decoration provided on the right side of the door window 101a. The substrate 432 and the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame are formed in a left-right asymmetrical shape with the center of the door window 101a in the left-right direction as a boundary. Further, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are also different in shape in the front-rear direction. ..

The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are mounted on their respective front surfaces. The number of one LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, second LED 423b and the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, second LED 433b are the same as each other, and the arrangement and system (one point in FIG. 72). (Systems connected by chain lines and two-dot chain lines) are provided symmetrically. As a result, it is possible to easily create the data of the LED lighting pattern for performing the light emission effect.

The door frame top center decorative board 455 has six LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface at intervals in the left-right direction, the LEDs 455a, the LED 456a of the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457. It is equipped with an LED driver (not shown) for emitting light. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three sets of two from the left, as shown by the broken lines in FIG. 72. The six LEDs 455a divided into three sets are controlled by nine systems by the LED driver, and each set of LEDs 455a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is provided with four LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface so as to be opened in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. The four LEDs 456a divided into two sets are controlled by the LED driver of the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 in six systems, and each set of LEDs 456a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is provided with four LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface, which are opened in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. The four LEDs 457a divided into two sets are controlled by the LED driver of the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 in six systems, and each set of LEDs 457a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, And the light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 is the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the left side lower guide. The opening of the door frame left side decorative body 426 by the light guide shaft portion 429a of the optical member 429, the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436, and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437. It is guided to 426a and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and is irradiated outward (forward). As a result, on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect that emits bright light in a dot shape, which is a dot shape that has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines. The luminescent effect that shines in the spot can make the player "haha".

Further, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the dish left decorative board 273 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the LED 278a of the dish right decorative board 278, the second LED 422b of the decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, and the lower left side of the door frame The second LED 423b of the decorative board 423, the second LED 432b of the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, the second LED 433b of the decorative board 433 below the right side of the door frame, the LED 455a of the central decorative board 455 of the door frame top, the left decorative board of the door frame top. By appropriately causing the LED 456a of the 456 and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 to emit light, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a is luminescent and decorated, or the light is emitted so as to move along the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Can be shown to the player.

That is, in the door frame 3, the LED system connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72 executes a spot emission effect on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect in which the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 emit light in a planar manner (surface emission) by the LED system connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. Can be done.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is directed by the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide. The shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a guide the light to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and forward from there. Since the light is radiated to the door frame, the portions of the opening 426a and the opening 435a can be spot-emitting brightly and brightly as compared with the general surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. .. At this time, since the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are arranged outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 a. And even if the portion of the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is made to emit spot light with high brightness, the inside of the game area 5a facing from the door window 101a is not difficult to see due to the glare, and the game is played through the door window 101a. The game ball B, the effect image, the decorative body, and the like in the area 5a can be visually recognized in a good state.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are projected forward from the door window 101a (game area 5a), and spot light is emitted with high brightness. The opening 426a and the opening 435a are connected to the front ends of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 that project forward (the front ends that project forward in an arc shape in a plan view). However, since it is provided on the line in the vertical direction), the light of the spot emission is not emitted to the rear side (door window 101a side). Therefore, the spot emission light from the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 is reflected toward the player by the glass plate 162 provided on the door window 101a, and is behind the door window 101a. The inside of the game area 5a is not difficult to see, and the spot light emission with high brightness makes it possible to direct the interest of other players to the pachinko machine 1.

Further, according to the door frame 3, spot light emitting portions are provided on the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 that protrude forward from the door window 101a in the door frame 3. Therefore, the spot-emitting portion is located at substantially the same position as the vicinity of the outer periphery of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, even if the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the spot-emitting portion is located outside the player, so that the player does not block the spot-emitting light. As a result, when the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame emit spot light, high-intensity spot light can be seen from other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the existence of this pachinko machine 1 can be appealed to other players, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine to be played can be selected in the game hall. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of attracting a player who is wandering around to the pachinko machine 1.

It should be noted that both sides sandwiching the spot LEDs (first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a) for making the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 emit spot light. It is desirable that the surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) belong to the same system. As a result, both sides of the light guide pin (light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, and light guide shaft portion 437a) that guide the light of the spot LED are sandwiched. Since the surface LEDs of the above are in the same lighting mode, the same amount of light is emitted from both sides of the light guide pin at the same timing, and the light is guided by the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. The shadow of the optical pin can be made even more difficult to see.

Further, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the contact operation unit 302 in the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300, and has an annular shape in which 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the upper surface. The outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit is provided. The effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 includes two LED drivers for causing 31 LEDs 320a to emit light. The outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit is divided into a front decorative substrate 321 and a rear decorative substrate 322.

Eighteen of the 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decorative substrate 321 of the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit. Six of the 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative substrate 321 are provided at intervals on the circumference close to the inner circumference, and three are provided at intervals on the circumference between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. The remaining nine are provided at intervals on the circumference near the outer circumference.

The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decorative substrate 322 of the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit. Of the 13 LEDs 320a on the rear decorative substrate 322, 4 are provided on the circumference close to the inner circumference at intervals near both ends of the arc, and 3 are provided between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. The remaining six are provided at intervals on the circumference, and the remaining six are provided at intervals near both ends of the arc on the circumference near the outer circumference.

The 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative substrate 321 are connected by a chain line in FIG. 73, and 6 on the inner circumference are 3 sets of 2 each in the circumferential direction, and 3 on the middle circumference. Is divided into 3 sets of 1 each, and 9 sets on the outer circumference are divided into 3 sets of 3 sets in the circumferential direction, for a total of 9 sets. Further, the 18 LEDs 320a of the rear decorative substrate 322 are connected by a chain line in FIG. 73, and four on the inner circumference are two sets of two near both ends, on the middle circumference. There are 7 groups in total, 3 groups of 3 each, and 2 groups of 9 on the outer circumference, 3 each near both ends. That is, in the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320, 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 sets. The LEDs 320a divided into these 16 sets are controlled by 48 systems by two LED drivers, and each set of LEDs 320a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320, by appropriately emitting light from 31 or 48 systems of LEDs 320a, a light emission effect in which the light is rotated in the effect operation unit 301 or light emission in which the light is concentrated in the center is emitted. It is possible to show the player a production or a light emission production in which the light spreads outward.

Further, according to the door frame 3, it extends vertically along the door window 101a so that the amount of protrusion in the front-rear direction differs from each other to the outside of one and the other in the left-right direction of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a. The door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body are provided. Door frame left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LED 422a and second LED 422b are mounted behind each of 435, and door frame left side lower decoration on which a plurality of first LED 423a and second LED 423b are mounted. The board 423 and the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame on which the plurality of first LEDs 432a and the second LED 432b are mounted, and the decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame on which the plurality of first LEDs 433a and the second LED 433b are mounted. Is provided, and the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is guided to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 to move forward. The light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, and the right side upper light guide member to be irradiated. Since the light guide shaft portion 436a of the 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guide member 437 are provided, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the door frame right side The second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b of the upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 emit light to make the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. The door frame can be light-emitting decorated (surface-emitting), and the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. When the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a are made to emit light, the light emitted forward causes the columnar light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft. After being guided to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the door is radiated forward from their front ends (front end faces). Guidance in the frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 The portions corresponding to the tips of the optical axis portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be light-emitting decorated (spot-emitting) in a dot shape. ..

Therefore, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the first LED 423a. A door frame left side decorative body provided outside the game area 5a (door window 101a) by appropriately causing the second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b to emit light. The entire 426 and the right side decoration of the door frame 435 are luminescent and decorated in a plane shape, and a part of the left side decoration 426 of the door frame and the right side decoration 435 of the door frame is luminescently decorated in dots, or the left side of the door frame. Since the entire side decoration 426 and the right side decoration 435 of the door frame can be luminescent and decorated in a dot shape, a variety of luminescent effects can be shown to the player. It is possible to make the player less bored and entertain, and to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

At this time, the system in which the plurality of first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a, and the second LED 423b of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 are separated and the door frame right The system in which the plurality of first LEDs 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b of the side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are separated from each other is symmetrical with each other, and in each case, Since the plurality of first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a, and the plurality of second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b are different systems from each other, the left side of the door frame. Lighting pattern of the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a, and the second LED 423b on the decoration body 426 side, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b on the door frame right side decoration body 435 side. When creating the data of, for example, the data for the door frame left side decorative body 426 side can be diverted to the data for the door frame right side decorative body 435 side, or the door frame left side decorative body 426 side and the door frame. Since it is possible to create data with the same flow as that of the right side decorative body 435 side, it is possible to easily create the lighting pattern data (with the same creation time). ) It becomes easier to construct data of more complicated lighting patterns, and it is possible to show the player a variety of lighting effects of the lighting pattern, and at the same time, it is possible to show the player a variety of lighting effects with a high effect. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of exerting a sufficient effect on the light emission effect of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 on both the left and right outer sides of the 101a.

Further, since the two second LEDs 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b provided between the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a have the same system. , First LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a (light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, light guide shaft portion 437a). Since the two second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b provided in the above are always turned on at the same time, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a, By irradiating light from both sides of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light guide shaft portion 427a and the guide by the light from the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, respectively. The shadows of the optical axis portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a are thinned so as to cancel out, and are projected onto the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. It is possible to make it difficult to see the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a. The right side decorative body 435 can be uniformly luminescent and decorated in a plane shape.

Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 that emit light and decorate in a plane shape by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b are the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, and the first LED 423a. (1) The LED 432a and the first LED 433a are used to light-illuminate and decorate the parts corresponding to the front ends of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a. Because of this, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect that could not be seen with conventional pachinko machines, such as light-emitting in a planar manner and partially emitting light in a dot-like manner, and the light is emitted brightly in a dot-like manner. The light emission effect can strongly attract the player's interest, and the light emission effect that emits spot-like lights that are not found in conventional pachinko machines can make the player "haha". It can be a pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player.

Further, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 on one side (left side) in the left-right direction, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower on the other side (right side). Since the decorative substrate 433 has a shape that is asymmetrical to each other, at first glance, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, and the door frame right Since the lower side decorative board 433 can be distinguished, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame to be assembled in the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be identified. It is possible to prevent the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side from being mistaken, improve the workability of assembly, and suppress the increase in cost.

[3-11. Identification of decorative board]
Subsequently, using the door frame 3 as an example, the identification of various decorative substrates on which the LEDs are mounted in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 74 and the like. FIG. 74 is a rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the dish left decorative board 273, the dish right decorative board 278, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and the door frame right provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3. The side upper decorative substrate 432, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 will be described in detail as examples.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a white substrate is used as the decorative substrate on which the LED is mounted, and a non-white LED driver, a connector, or the like attached to the decorative substrate is attached to the rear surface side of the substrate. I am trying to do it. As a result, the light from the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate is reflected to the front side so that the decorative body and the like in the front can be luminescent and decorated, and the front (player side). Therefore, the decorative board is made inconspicuous.

The white decorative substrate may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the substrate plate material itself may be white.

Since the pachinko machine 1 has many decorative substrates, different identification portions 7 are provided on the rear surface of each decorative substrate so that each decorative substrate can be easily identified (see FIG. 74). ). The identification unit 7 is a character identification unit 7a with characters such as Chinese characters, kana, alphabets, symbols, numbers, model numbers, etc., and a color identification unit 7b with different colors (shown by shading with different shades in FIG. 74). And have.

More specifically, as the character identification unit 7a, the characters "lower left" on the dish left decorative board 273, the characters "lower right" on the dish right decorative board 278, and "upper left" on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422. The letters "lower left" on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, "upper right" on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, and "lower right" on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame. The characters are "upper middle" on the door frame top center decorative board 455, "upper left" on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and "upper right" on the door frame top right decorative board 457. , Each is given.

Further, the color identification unit 7b has a different color for each decorative substrate, and is applied over substantially the front surface of the rear surface. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification unit 7b is not provided on the entire surface of the rear surface but partially so as not to interfere with the soldering of the LED or the like mounted on the decorative substrate. ..

The identification unit 7 is applied to the decorative substrate by printing (silk printing), sticking a sticker, applying paint, or the like.

In the above description, the decorative substrate provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 has been described as an example, but various types provided in the handle unit 180, the effect operation unit 300, the game board 5, and the like have been described. The decorative substrate may also be provided with an identification unit 7 such as a character identification unit 7a and a color identification unit 7b.

Further, in the above embodiment, the identification unit 7 is provided with both the character identification unit 7a and the color identification unit 7b, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only the character identification unit 7a may be used. However, only the color identification unit 7b may be used.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the decorative substrate on which the LED is mounted is provided with the identification unit 7 (character identification unit 7a and color identification unit 7b), a decorative substrate having a similar shape can be easily formed. It is possible to prevent the wrong decorative substrate from being assembled during the assembly work, and it is possible to improve the workability of the assembly.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the identification unit 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, the front side of the decorative substrate can be made as white as possible, and the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate can be used. The light can be reflected forward on the front side of the decorative substrate to make the front decorative body or the like brighter and luminescent, and the decorative substrate can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side) to improve the appearance. Can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification unit 7b as the identification unit 7 is applied over substantially the entire decorative substrate, it is desired (desired color) only by looking at a part of the decorative substrate. ) Can be recognized as a decorative substrate. Therefore, even when a plurality of types of decorative boards are overlapped during assembly or the like, if a part of the decorative boards can be seen, the desired decorative board can be easily found, and the labor required for the assembly work. Can be simplified.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color of the color identification unit 7b is different for each decorative substrate, the same color is used when preparing the decorative substrate required for one pachinko machine 1 at the time of assembly. When there is a decorative substrate provided with the identification unit 7b, it can be easily recognized that the same decorative substrate is prepared in duplicate. Alternatively, when the color identification unit 7b of the prepared decorative substrate is insufficient in color, it can be easily recognized that there is a decorative substrate that is not prepared. Therefore, when preparing the decorative board necessary for assembling the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to easily recognize that an extra decorative board is prepared or the prepared decorative board is insufficient. Therefore, the decorative substrate can be surely prepared as much as necessary, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily set up at the time of assembly. Therefore, the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be smoothly performed, the time required for assembly can be shortened, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the character identification unit 7a as the identification unit 7 for distinguishing from other substrates is provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, the operator reads the characters of the character identification unit 7a. Therefore, it is possible to easily know which part the decorative substrate belongs to, and it is possible to obtain the same effects as described above.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the front surface and the rear surface of each decorative substrate are white and the identification portion 7 is provided on the rear surface, the transparency of the decorative body provided in front of the decorative substrate is high. However, the decorative substrate can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side), the appearance of the decorative body can be improved, and the light from the LED is reflected forward by the white front surface of the decorative substrate. It is possible to make the decorative body brighter and light-emitting, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest by the light-emitting effect having a high effect.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, functional parts such as an LED driver are provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate so that the functional parts cannot be seen from the front (player side), so that the functional parts can be seen through the decorative body. It is possible to prevent the appearance from being deteriorated by seeing it, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the decorative body (game machine). In addition, since the functional parts are hidden on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, it is not necessary to color the functional parts in white (or yellow) so as to be inconspicuous, and the functional parts can be used as they are. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 by omitting the trouble of coloring the functional parts.

[3-12. Door frame action effect]
According to the present embodiment, the contact detector 393 provided at a desired portion for detecting the approach or contact of the player with respect to the plurality of contact detectors 393 provided at different positions in the pachinko machine 1. By switching by the switching unit 394 so that the contact detection sensor main body 392 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392, when the player approaches or contacts the contact detection body 393 of the desired portion, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 changes. Therefore, since the change in capacitance can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to a desired portion. Predetermined control can be executed by control means such as the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, and the effect display control unit 1512 in response to the detection of the contact detection sensor main body 392. On the other hand, in a state where the contact detection body 393 of the desired portion and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching unit 394, the contact detection body 393 provided in the other portion and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected. Therefore, even if the capacitance of the contact detector 393 provided in the other portion changes due to the player approaching or contacting the other portion, the contact detector 393 still has the contact detector 393. Since the connection is disconnected by the switching unit 394, the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 393 is not detected, and only the capacitance of the contact detector 393 at the desired portion is reliably detected. It is possible to prevent false detection.

In this way, the contact detection bodies 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 are appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394 with respect to the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at different positions. Capacitance can be detected by one contact detection sensor main body 392 for a plurality of contact detectors 393, and the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1512, etc. In the control means of the above, the number of channels for detecting the approach or contact of the player can be reduced, and the number of channels that can be used for the production can be relatively increased. Therefore, more production means (for example, movable decorations, light emitting decorations, effect display devices, etc.) can be controlled by the control means, and the number of production means can be increased to give the player a wider variety of effects. It can be presented, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and it is possible to sufficiently entertain the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the contact detector 393 is provided in each of the plurality of parts of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to be touched, and the contact detector 393 provided in the desired part by the switching unit 394 according to the game state. By connecting to the contact detection sensor main body 392 and detecting the approach or contact of the player to a desired part, control of the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1512, etc. Since it is possible to leave a predetermined caution or alarm by means, one contact detection sensor main body 392 monitors a wide range of the pachinko machine 1, and the number of channels that can be used for the production is relatively large. The number can be increased, and the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, since the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are configured to detect the capacitance by one contact detection sensor main body 392, each contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are provided apart from each other. Therefore, the sensor body having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit can be provided in a part that is difficult for the player to see, which improves the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and enhances the appeal to the player. Can be enhanced.

Further, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with a connection terminal for electrically connecting a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in advance, the wiring from the contact detection body 393 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. Since the capacitance of the contact detector 393 can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 simply by connecting to the connection terminal of the pachinko machine 1, the labor required for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the machine 1.

Further, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with a connection terminal in advance, and the contact detection sensor main body 392 and the contact detection body 393 can be obtained by simply connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392. In comparison with the case where the conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode of the contact detection sensor main body 392 and connected to the contact detector 393 via the conductive member, the number of parts is increased. It can be reduced, the cost required for the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced, and the design of handling the conductive member for connecting to the contact detector 393 can be eliminated, so that the contact detector 393 and the contact detection sensor main body can be eliminated. The degree of freedom of arrangement of the 392 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-mentioned effects can be easily embodied.

Further, a switching unit 394 for switching the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided, and the contact detection body 393 to be detected can be selected by the switching unit 394. Therefore, for example, a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 When a player participation type effect is executed in which the distributed arrangement of the contact detectors 393 is touched in a predetermined order, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is operated by the switching unit 394 at the timing when the player touches the contact detectors 393 in order. By switching the contact detection body 393 connected to the player, it is possible to detect whether or not the player has touched the contact detection body 393 in order, and a player participation type production with high game characteristics can be achieved. This can be realized by the contact detection sensor main body 392, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is more entertaining to the player.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player's fingers or the like approach or come into contact with the button body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 that the player can press and operate. Then, the player approaches the contact detector 352 made of the patching metal of the metal plate whose player side is covered by the button body 351, and the capacitance of the contact detector 352 changes. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358, it is possible to detect a change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352. Therefore, the button body via the contact detection body 352. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player with the 351 (effect operation unit 350).

When the player's approach or contact with the effect operation unit unit 350 is detected by using the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 in this way, the button outer decorative substrate 355, the vibration motor 356, and the effect operation unit are raised and lowered. Since a predetermined effect is output to the player side through the contact detector 352 and the button body 351 by the effect means such as the mechanism 360, the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, the player is entertained by the effect. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. At this time, when the player approaches or comes into contact with the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is output. It can function as a contact operation unit. Since the player can press the effect operation unit 350 that functions as the non-contact operation unit or the contact operation unit when the effect operation unit 350 is projected, the effect operation unit 350 can perform the non-contact operation, the contact operation, and the pressing operation. Since various production operations such as operations can be performed, it is possible to easily embody a pachinko machine 1 having an appearance different from that of a conventional pachinko machine equipped with operation buttons capable of only pressing operations, and other pachinko machines. By differentiating it from the machine, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player.

Further, a predetermined effect is output to the player side in response to the detection of the capacitance of the contact detector 352 by the contact detection sensor body 358, and the capacitance is the contact detector 352 (button body 351). Since it differs depending on the distance between the player and the player, it is possible to set a plurality of capacitance thresholds and output different effects for each threshold. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the period (distance) from the approach of the player to the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) in multiple stages, the effect corresponding to each stage is output. By doing so, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in interest.

Further, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is provided apart from the contact detection body 352, contact detection having an electronic component such as a sensor IC or an output circuit is provided. The sensor main body 358 can be provided in a portion of the effect operation unit 350 that is difficult for the player to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved to enhance the appeal to the player.

Further, as described above, since the operation unit can perform various production operations such as non-contact operation, contact operation, and pressing operation, a player participation type production that enables the player's production operation is executed. By doing so, it is possible to entertain a variety of directing operations, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, it is possible to entertain the player with the player-participatory directing, which reduces the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the contact detector 352 whose capacitance is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358 is made of punching metal made of a metal plate having a plurality of holes formed therein, the player can use the plurality of holes to form the button body 351. The capacitance of the contact detector 352 in the approaching or non-contacting state can be reduced, and the occurrence of erroneous detection by the contact detection sensor main body 358 can be avoided. Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, arrangement, etc. of the plurality of holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact detector 352 while suppressing the increase in capacitance, so that the button by the contact detector 352 can be increased. The range for detecting the approach or contact of the player with the main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) can be widened. As a result, the contact detector 352 can be enlarged to widen the detection range. Therefore, as in the above embodiment, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) that the player can press and operate is enlarged. When the contact detector 352 is made to have the same size as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, the player can approach or contact the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) by executing the player participation type effect. When requested, since the contact detection body 352 covered by the button body 351 is as large as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, the player's fingers or the like are brought close to or in contact with the effect operation unit 350. The movement distance is shortened, the production operation unit 350 can be operated quickly, the operation timing can be made difficult to be missed in the player participation type production, and the player participation type production can be surely participated. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest by the production.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, a button as an effect means provided on the contact detection body 352 on the side opposite to the player side through a plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352. It is possible to output the light emitting effect from the LED 364a of the intermediate decoration substrate 364 to the player side, and it is possible to surely entertain the player with the light emitting effect and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the contact detector 352 is provided on the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) capable of pressing, the contact detector made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having a certain degree of strength and rigidity. The effect operation unit 350 can be reinforced by the 352, and even if the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is strongly pressed or hit when the player performs a pressing operation, the effect operation unit unit The 350 can be made difficult to be deformed or damaged. Therefore, since the contact detection body 352 can make the effect operation unit 350 less likely to be damaged, the player can press the effect operation unit 350 without hesitation and operate the effect operation unit 350. It is possible to make the player-participation-type production more enjoyable and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the contact detector 352 is made of punching metal, and the thickness of the contact detector 352 can be reduced as compared with the case where the contact detector 352 is made of expanded metal processed from a metal plate having the same thickness. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space for providing the contact detection body 352, it is possible to easily provide the contact detection body 352, and it is possible to increase the degree of design freedom, which is more appealing to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily designed.

Further, since the contact detector 352 is made of punching metal, the plate thickness is constant as compared with the expanded metal, so that the contact detector 352 can be easily processed into a desired three-dimensional shape by press working. This makes it possible to facilitate the formation of an optimum shape for detecting the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350), and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably realized.

Further, in the effect operation unit 350, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by the button body 351 is provided. It is possible to prevent the player from directly touching the contact detector 352 having a plurality of holes, and it is possible to prevent the player from touching the contact detector 352, which causes discomfort, and the button body 351. In the player participation type production using the above as an operation unit, the button main body 351 can be operated without discomfort, and the production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the player side of the contact detector 352 made of punching metal is covered with the button body 351, dirt such as dust and food and drink adheres to the plurality of holes formed in the contact detector 352. This does not mean that the time and effort required for cleaning can be facilitated, and the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed as the pachinko machine 1 that is easy to clean can be reduced.

Further, the effect means such as the button outer decorative substrate 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the button inner decorative substrate 364, and the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 are placed on the side opposite to the player side of the contact detector 352. A predetermined effect can be output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351, and the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350). Then, since the predetermined effect is output through the plurality of holes formed in the contact detector 352 and the transparent button body 351, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit 350, and the effect can be produced. It is possible to surely entertain the effect output through (via) the operation unit 350 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the effect means such as the button outer decorative substrate 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the button inner decorative substrate 364, and the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 are placed on the side opposite to the player side of the contact detector 352. Since it is provided, the contact detector 352 is in a state of covering the effect means, and the contact detector 352 (effect operation unit 350) and the effect means can be compactly integrated. Provided is a pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal that can be easily provided at a desired portion of the pachinko machine 1 and can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. It can be made easier.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player approaches or comes into contact with the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) provided so as to be able to advance and retreat in the vertical direction. Since the capacitance of the contact detector 352 of the operation unit 350 changes, the player approaches the effect operation unit 350 by detecting the capacitance of the contact detector 352 with the contact detection sensor main body 358. Alternatively, contact can be detected. Then, when the player's approach or contact with the effect operation unit 350 is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358, the effect operation unit 350 protrudes upward due to the urging force of the elevating spring 365 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Therefore, if the effect operation unit 350 protrudes while the player is not in contact with the effect operation unit 350, it abuts (collides) with the player, and the player is in contact with the effect operation unit 350. When the effect operation unit 350 protrudes, it is possible to present the player with an effect by a physical force that pushes the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player by the effect not found in the conventional pachinko machines, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest to the effect operation unit 350, and also to the player. It is possible to surely notice the protrusion of the effect operation unit 350.

When the elevating spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved toward the upper end side (upward) of the elevating spring 365 when the effect operation unit 350 is projected, the elevating spring 365 is strongly compressed. The urging force can be increased, and when the elevating spring 365 is moved away from the upper end side (downward), the compression of the elevating spring 365 is weakened and the urging force can be reduced. By moving the holding member 385 to an appropriate position, the urging force of the effect operating unit 350 by the elevating spring 365 can be changed. In this way, since the effect operation unit 350 can be projected with various sudden outputs, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect by physical force, and it is possible to make the player less bored and to operate the effect. It is possible to entertain the effect of the protrusion of the unit 350, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the sudden output of the effect operation unit 350 is changed according to the game state, when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350 with his / her fingers or the like, the effect operation unit unit has a strong force. When the 350 comes into contact with each other, a strong impact is given to the player, which makes it strongly think that there is something good (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage). It is possible to raise the expectation for the above and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 350 is a press operation unit 303 capable of a press operation, when a player participation type effect is executed, the player is made to press the effect operation unit 350 to perform a game. The player can participate in the person-participation type production, and the pressing operation of the production operation unit 350 can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the effect operation unit 350 can be pressed, the player who puts his / her fingers or the like on the effect operation unit 350 (upper surface of the button body 351) can perform the press operation at any time. Then, when the player-participation type production in which the effect operation unit 350 is pressed is executed, the effect operation unit 350 is projected by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, so that the player-participation type can be obtained by the effect image, sound, or the like. It is possible to promptly make the player recognize the start of execution of the player participation type production without informing the start of execution of the production, and to increase the motivation for the pressing operation of the production operation unit 350 to perform the player participation type production. It can be even more entertaining.

Further, since the effect operating unit 350 is projected by the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, it is compared with the case where the effect operation unit 350 is projected by using the drive motor. Therefore, the effect operation unit 350 can be easily and vigorously projected, and the above-described effects can be more easily exerted.

Further, by detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, the approach or contact of the player to the effect operation unit 350 is detected, and the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 352 is detected. Since the capacity differs depending on the distance between the effect operation unit 350 and the player, it is possible to set a plurality of capacitance thresholds and project the effect operation unit 350 with a different sudden output for each threshold. It becomes. Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the period (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the effect operation unit 350 in multiple stages, depending on each stage. By projecting with a sudden output, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in interest.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player can move to the effect operation unit unit 350 provided so that the player can advance and retreat by popping up by executing the player participation type effect. When they approach or come into contact with each other, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 provided on the back side of the button body 351 that the player of the effect operation unit 350 comes into contact with changes. On the other hand, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided separately from the contact detection body 352 in the effect operation unit 350 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, the player approaches or makes contact. Since the change in the capacitance of the detector 352 can be detected, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350, and the contact detection sensor body 358 is based on the capacitance. The player can be detected. Then, by detecting the contact detection sensor main body 358 and advancing / retreating (pressing) the effect operation unit unit 350 by the player, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, the button outer decorative board 355, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, and the button inner decorative board A predetermined effect is executed by the effect means such as 364, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. That is, when the player moves the effect operation unit 350 forward and backward or approaches or comes into contact with the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is executed, so that the player can be entertained by the effect. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

At this time, when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350, the effect is executed. Therefore, the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is used as the effect operation unit (non-contact operation unit, contact operation unit). Can work like this. On the other hand, when the player advances (presses) the effect operation unit 350, the effect is executed, so that the effect operation unit 350 can function like the effect operation unit (pressing operation unit). For this reason, the player can perform various production operations. Therefore, by executing the player participation type production that enables the player's production operation, the various production operations can be enjoyed. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, the player can enjoy the player-participatory production, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, the player is detected by the capacitance of the contact detector 352 provided in the vicinity of the portion of the button main body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 where the player contacts (the lower side of the upper surface portion 351a). Since the capacitance of the contact detector 352 differs depending on the distance between the contact detector 352 (button body 351) and the player, a plurality of capacitance thresholds for executing a predetermined effect are set for each. It is possible to execute different effects for each threshold value. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the period (distance) from the approach of the player's fingers or the like to the effect operation unit 350 to the contact in multiple stages, the effect is presented according to each stage. Therefore, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in interest.

Further, since a predetermined effect is executed by the detection of the player by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358, the effect operation using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358 (non-contact operation, It is possible to give a feeling of operation to the contact operation), and it is possible to make the effect operation more enjoyable for the player.

Further, it is provided with an effect operation unit 350 capable of allowing the player to move forward and backward (pressable), a contact detector 352 capable of detecting the approach or contact of the player with the effect operation unit 350, and a contact detection sensor body 358. Therefore, in the player participation type production, the operation of moving the effect operation unit 350 forward and backward (pressing operation) and the operation of approaching or contacting the effect operation unit 350 with fingers or the like (non-contact operation, contact operation). ), Etc. can be requested, and the various operations can increase the motivation of the player to participate in the player participation type production, and make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type production. Can be done. Then, when the player participates in the player participation type production, various operations using the production operation unit 350, the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can make the player less likely to get bored. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player-participatory production, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the effect operation unit 350 is locked to the locking portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 to lock the effect operation unit 350 so as not to advance or retreat. Therefore, until the effect of advancing / retreating the effect operation unit 350 is executed, the effect operation unit 350 is made incapable of advancing / retreating by the guide pin 354c and the elevating cam member 371. It is possible to prevent the 350 from moving or shaking without permission. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or anxiety by moving or shaking the production operation unit 350 without permission, which makes the production by the production operation unit 350 more enjoyable. Can be done.

Further, in the effect operation unit 350, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided at a position away from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection sensor having an electronic component such as a sensor IC or an output circuit is provided. The main body 358 can be provided in a portion that is difficult for the player to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 for detecting the capacitance and the contact detection sensor main body 358 having a sensor IC, an output circuit, etc. for detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 are separate bodies. Since the shape, material, etc. of the contact detection body 352 can be appropriately selected regardless of the contact detection sensor body 358, the contact detection body 352 can be used as the shape, form, specifications, etc. of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350. It is possible to optimally correspond to the above, and it is possible to surely embody the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-described effects.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the player is attached to the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 covering the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398. When the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button outer decorative substrate 355 or the button inner decorative substrate 364 or the decorative body 398 are brought into close contact with each other, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is provided. The capacitance of the button changes, and the player side is executed because the player side is subjected to a predetermined effect of irradiating the player side with light by the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398 according to the change. The light shining on the button can strongly attract the player's attention to the decorative substrate 355 outside the button, the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, or the decorative body 398, and the player can be entertained by the executed effect. At this time, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button outer decorative substrate 355 or the button inner decorative substrate 364 or the decorative body 398 is the button body 351 or the contact detector 397. Since it is formed along the decorative portion provided on the surface member 396, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 can be made to appear as a part of the decorative portion to the player, and the game can be played. It is possible to make it unrecognizable to the person that the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is for detecting the player.

In this way, since the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 cannot be recognized from the player side, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is likened to the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decoration. Even if a part of the body 398 (directing) is blocked, the player does not care about the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397, and the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398. Even if the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is provided in front of the above, the presence of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 does not give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the effect of the decorative substrate 355 outside the button, the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, or the decorative body 398 in a good state, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like with the button body 351 or the surface member 396 by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the outside of the button covered with the button body 351 or the surface member 396 Since the effect of irradiating the player side with light is executed on the decorative substrate 355, the decorative substrate 364 in the button, or the decorative body 398, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is moved to the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit). In addition to being able to function as in 302), it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation by light. Therefore, for example, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player's fingers or the like are brought close to or brought into contact with the button body 351 or the surface member 396, and the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 approaches or contacts the fingers or the like. By detecting the contact, the effect is executed by the decorative substrate 355 outside the button, the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, or the decorative body 398, so that the player can participate in the player participation type effect, and the player participates in the player. You can entertain the pattern production.

Further, since the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 detects the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the player's fingers or the like are detected. Since it is possible to make the effect of the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 different according to the distance from the button outer decorative board 355, the button outer decorative board 355 depends on the movement (position) of the player's fingers or the like. The effect of the decorative board 364 or the decorative body 398 can be changed, and a wider variety of effects can be shown to the player, and the various effects can make the player less likely to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the.

Further, the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is detected, and when the player approaches or touches the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button are detected. Since the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 provided between the outer decorative substrate 355, the inner decorative substrate 364 of the button, or the decorative body 398 changes, the game of the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is played. The approach or contact of a person's fingers or the like can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned effects can be surely embodied.

Further, since the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is used to detect the change in capacitance, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 can be a conductive member, for example. When the contact detector 397 is made of a metal vapor deposition film, it can be made transparent by thinning the vapor deposition film, and by making the vapor deposition film thicker to have a metallic luster, it looks like a part of decoration. Can be done. Alternatively, when the contact detector 352 and the contact detector 395 are made of punching metal having an outer shape such as a star shape or a heart shape, the contact detector 352 and the contact detector 395 appear to be part of the decoration. be able to. Therefore, the contact detection body 352, the contact detection body 395, and the contact detection body 397, which cannot be recognized from the player side, can be used, and the above-mentioned effects can be surely achieved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the capacitance is increased by the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like with the transparent button body 351 covering the upper surface side (front surface side). It changes, and according to the change, a predetermined effect is produced by the effect presenting means such as the button outer decorative substrate 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the button inner decorative substrate 364, the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. 395 and the like (including the contact detection body 352, the contact detection body left 390L, the contact detection body right 390R, the contact detection body 393, and the contact detection body 397, etc.) Since the pachinko machine 1 is formed in the outer peripheral shape of the slingshot machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated by the contact detector 395 itself, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with a good appearance and a high appeal to the player. Further, the surface side of the contact detector 395 or the like is covered with a transparent button body 351 and the effect is presented according to the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like due to the approach of the player's fingers or the like to the contact detector 395. Since the predetermined effect is presented via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 by means, the predetermined effect is presented in response to the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like with the button body 351. Therefore, the button body 351 can be made to function as the effect operation unit 301. Since the contact detector 395 and the like that can be seen through the button body 351 have a design, the effect operation unit 301 seems to have a design, which is not found in conventional pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 provided with the operation unit 301 can give a strong impact to the player, and can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of differentiating from other pachinko machines. Further, as described above, since the contact detector 395 and the like having a design can give a strong impact to the player, it is possible to strongly have an interest in the contact detector 395 and the like (button body 351). It is possible to raise expectations for the operation of the button body 351 (effect operation unit 301), and to entertain the operation of the button body 351 when the player participation type effect of operating the button body 351 is executed. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the contact detector 395 and the like for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like to the button body 351 are formed in an outer peripheral shape having a design, at first glance, some players may present the effect. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) for presenting the effect by means. Therefore, when the player participation type effect of operating the effect operation unit 301 is executed, the button body 351 is produced by the contact detector 395 or the like for the first time by urging the player to approach or contact the button body 351. It is possible to make the player notice that it is the operation unit 301, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and make the player participation type production more enjoyable. Alternatively, when the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301 is executed, when the player approaches or touches the button body 351 without knowing the effect operation unit 301, the contact detector 395 or the like is static. Since the electric capacity is changed and the effect is presented by the effect presenting means, the player can be surprised, and the presented effect can entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the effect is presented by the effect presenting means according to the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like, the player's fingers or the like on the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like The approach and contact can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned effects can be easily realized. Further, since the effect is presented according to the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like, the player's fingers or the like approach the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like to make contact. Since it is possible to detect the distance (distance) in multiple stages, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player by presenting the effects according to each stage. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by making it difficult to get bored.

Further, since the outer periphery of the contact detector 395 or the like is formed in a predetermined shape, even if an inorganic material such as a punching metal, an expanded metal, or a wire mesh is used as the conductive contact detector 395 or the like. It is possible to impart design to the contact detector 395 and the like, prevent deterioration of the appearance due to the contact detector 395 and the like, and make the contact detector 395 and the like stand out, thereby exhibiting the above-mentioned effects. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily embodied.

Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the contact detector 395 or the like is formed into a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct a designable one without forming the contact detector 395 or the like in a three-dimensional shape. can. Therefore, the contact detector 395 and the like can be made into a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the cost for manufacturing the contact detector 395 and the like can be reduced.

Further, since the surface side of the contact detector 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button body 351, dust and dirt such as food and drink do not adhere to the contact detector 395 and the like, and the labor required for cleaning is easy. Can be. More specifically, since the contact detector 395 or the like has irregularities such as punching metal, dirt such as dust and food and drink easily adheres to the irregularities, and it is troublesome to clean the stains. However, since the surface side of the contact detector 395 or the like is covered with the button body 351 even if the contact detector 395 or the like has irregularities such as punching metal, the button body 351 is used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the adhesion of dirt, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed as an easy-to-clean one.

Further, since the surface side of the contact detector 395 or the like is covered with a transparent button body 351 to prevent the player from touching the contact detector 395 or the like, a metal vapor deposition film or the like can be used as the contact detector 395 or the like. When a material that can enhance the design such as foil pressing is used, it is possible to prevent the player from being worn early by touching it, and it is possible to enhance the durability of the contact detector 395 and the like.

Further, the surface side of the contact detector 395 or the like is covered with the transparent button body 351. As described above, the transparent button body 351 does not allow the player to directly touch the contact detector 395 or the like. Since it is possible to use a detector 395 or the like that is uncomfortable to the touch or that causes discomfort to the player, the degree of freedom of the material used for the contact detector 395 or the like can be increased, and the needs can be met. A contact detector 395 or the like can be formed by a suitable material.

Further, when the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like is changed by approaching or contacting the player's fingers or the like with the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like, the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 are changed. Since a predetermined effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the like, the player brings the fingers and the like closer to or touches the button body 351 by the effect presented via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 and the like. Can be intuitively recognized, and the player can enjoy the movements of the fingers and the like.

Further, the effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, etc., and the player's fingers or the like approach or touch the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like. Since the effect presented to the player is executed via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, the button body 351 can function like a contact operation unit, and the presented effect gives a feeling of operation. Can be added, and the operation using the button body 351 (player participation type production) can be enjoyed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in order to operate the button main body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 capable of a plurality of operations, the player brings his or her fingers or the like close to or comes into contact with the button main body 351 to approach or bring the contact detector 352. When the (contact detection sensor main body 358) detects the entry into the detection area such as a finger, the game is played through the button main body 351 by emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 355a of the decorative substrate 355 outside the button and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the decorative substrate 364 inside the button. Light emission effect that irradiates a person with light, effect that vibrates the fingers of a player who is in contact with (via) through the button body 351 by the vibration motor 356, and protrusions upward of the button body 351 by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. The button body 351 can be made to function as the contact operation unit 302 because the effect of applying impact, push-up, wind pressure, etc. to the player is executed through (via) the button body 351. You can do it. Further, at this time, since the player is given effects such as light, vibration, impact, push-up, and wind pressure through the button body 351, the effects can surprise the player and entertain the player. This can increase the motivation for operating the button body 351. Then, with the player's fingers or the like touching the button body 351 and pressing the button body 351 downward by appropriately moving the fingers or the like, the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation unit 303, so that the contact detector The contact operation by detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like by 352 and the pressing operation of the button body 351 can entertain the player with various production operations, making it difficult for the player to get bored. Can be suppressed.

Further, the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the contact detection body 352 is provided near the back surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351, the contact detection body 352 causes the button main body 351. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like on the upper surface portion 351a of the above, and it is possible to exert the same action and effect as described above.

Further, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is provided. Can be arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a (contact detection body 352) of the button body 351. Therefore, the contact detection sensor body 358 can be arranged in an inconspicuous portion, and the pachinko machine The appearance of 1 can be improved.

Further, since the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, and the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 are provided on the back side (lower side) of the button main body 351, the player can see the light through the button main body 351. It is possible to easily impart effects such as vibration, impact, push-up, and wind pressure, and it is possible to achieve the same effects as described above.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. 75 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. 77 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side so as to be openable and closable, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge member 510 on the main body frame, which are attached to the upper end of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame 3, and the main body frame. Main body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end on the left side of the front view of the base unit 500 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. It has a three-dimensional 520 and.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game is played in the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launching device 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is openable and closable and is attached to the main body frame base 501, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. It also includes a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view shape extends vertically, and the connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. It includes a 502 and a game board lock member 505 for holding the game board 5 detachably.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right. The 552, the tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending to the left in a groove shape open upward, the first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the first rail cover 554. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. It includes a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 to be paid out one by one, the upper full tank path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full tank path unit 600 are placed on the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, it is provided with a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the substrate unit to the 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. It includes a 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and project rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It includes a lock spring 655 that is urging and urging the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 83 and the like. FIG. 82 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame, and FIG. 82 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 is for holding the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front while the rear portion is inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape in which the front view extends vertically, and the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502 to be connected, and a game board lock member 505 rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth to hold the game board 5 detachably. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a whose front view shape is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board that penetrates back and forth within the height range of the game board 5 and forms the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and the game board insertion port 501b on which the game board 5 is placed. It includes a mounting portion 501c and a game board regulating section 501d that projects upward from the center of the game board mounting section 501c in the left-right direction and regulates the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left and right and to the rear.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and the launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540 and the launcher mounting portion 501e are mounted. The board unit penetrates back and forth on the right side of the front view of the part 501e and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the front view of the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. The circular speaker opening 501g and the main frame base 501, which face the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in the 620 to the front, are recessed rearward and extend to the left and right below the speaker opening 501g. It is provided with a cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion port 501i that penetrates back and forth at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h in the front view.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion port 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j that is rotatably attached and a rear extending portion 501j are formed near the upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the base main body 501a to attach the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. It includes an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is a door for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted in the front surface of the base main body 501a. A frame release switch is installed. When the door frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch releases the pressure and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. The detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Further, the main body frame base 501 is provided with a main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the base main body 501a below the position where the door frame opening switch is attached. There is. When the main body frame 4 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame release switch releases the pressure and can detect the opening of the main body frame 4. The detection signal from the main body frame release switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

The game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position on the right side of the speaker opening 501 g below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and around an axis extending back and forth. The game board lock member 505 makes it possible to restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted on the right side of the speaker opening 501g. .. The cable mounting recess 501h is formed in a size capable of accommodating the connecting cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connecting cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an vertically extending axis.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the flat guide main body 502a extending to the left and right and the upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a, and extends to the right of the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are exposed, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a that penetrate back and forth and are left and right. It is provided with a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is rotatably mounted around a shaft whose mounting shaft 502c extends vertically near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of the door frame 3 is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub. It is connected to the relay board 105.

Subsequently, the action and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is hinge-rotatably attached in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. The left and right directions of the plurality of through holes 502d formed on both the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide main body 502a by being tightened together with the guide main body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. It is located at (see FIG. 83 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends to the left from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l and passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 to cover the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the rightmost mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 83 (b)).

The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases when the door frame 3 is opened, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes like this. In the present embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to be less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501, so that the connection cable guide member 502 By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the open door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the connection cable 503 presses the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 rearward. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connecting cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connecting cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the door.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can make a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connecting cable 503 that is folded 180 degrees is changed to open, a force that tries to close the connecting cable 503 due to the folding habit acts. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the bending habit, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is closed. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is placed closer to the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to be held by the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 126 under the door frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, is centered on the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, and is more door than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The angle at which the tangent line in contact with the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis core) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame intersects with the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is used when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on the main body frame]
The hinge member 510 on the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached.

The hinge member 510 on the main body frame has an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 511 projects upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The hinge pin 512 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame, is provided. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extended portion, and provides a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for axially supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to rotatably attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 and the door frame to the main body frame 4. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under the main body frame]
The hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge member 125 under the door frame is rotatably attached.

The lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L shape. It is provided with a lower hinge second main body 522 in which the rear portion of a flat plate-like plate extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. In the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame, a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is arranged at an upward interval from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and a lower portion is arranged. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position rearward from the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion to regulate the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is equipped. The lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated in cooperation with the main body frame upper hinge member 510, and the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 regulates the movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending from the front end to the right. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the groove portion 530a is inserted with the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 becomes meandering in a plan view, and an illegal tool is used from the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. FIG. 84 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 84 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the game area 5a of 5. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 540 is attached to the flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher mounting portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 541 when viewed from the front, and rotates. From the launch solenoid 542, which consists of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the launch base 541, the ball hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the launch solenoid 542, and the vicinity of the tip of the ball mallet 543. It is equipped with a launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 195 is rotated while the handle 195 is in the state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B or the like, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) are used. From between, it falls into the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a width in the front-rear direction extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c whose width in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as that of the top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. The upper part of the back plate 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and the upper portion 551d of the back plate extending downward from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right with a substantially constant width to the vicinity of the lower end. The left side of the back plate 551e, the inner plate 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side of the back plate 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate 551b, and the front side of the lower side of the left side plate 551b to the right. It includes a bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view, and is formed in a box shape open to the front and inward of the L shape.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 in the left-right direction, and the left plate portion 551b extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends up and down with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is open rearward and extends vertically by the left plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, and the payout base 551 is provided in the portion. The unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 projects to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f in the front view, and has a back cover mounting portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is mounted.

The payout base unit 550 is a box-shaped ball tank 552 attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and extending upward to the left and right, and a portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. It is provided with a tank rail 553 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends to the left in a groove shape that is open upward.

Further, the payout base unit 550 is separated from the first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the upper end of the tank rail 535 in the left-right direction and the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A ball rectifying member 556 that is attached and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the second rail cover 555 that extends to the left end of the tank rail 555 and the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stop member 557 attached near the left end of the front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 in the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction. It is formed in the direction. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The shape of the tank rail 553 in a plan view is diagonally to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is about one minute from the depth of several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape that extends straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the opening at the upper end of the guidance passage 570a in the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is tilted so that the left end side is low at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, in the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 555 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is provided at a portion between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 555 with respect to the axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 91). The rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game ball B on the upper side of the game ball B, which is distributed in two upper and lower stages, and rectifies the game ball B so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side. I try not to clog the ball even if the height becomes low.

The ball stop member 557 is slidably attached in the left-right direction near the left end of the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and by sliding it to the left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front on the upper surface of a portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal plate 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 86 and 87. FIG. 86A is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 86B is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 87 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. be. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 is a ball guidance unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guidance unit 570 and is guided by the ball guidance unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank path unit. It includes a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side.

The ball guidance unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a row by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guidance unit 570 can be distributed, and a ball removal passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , The game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated from the ball pulling passage 580b to the upper full tank path unit. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B discharged from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The ball guidance unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper part of the rear surface of the left portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guidance unit 570 has a meandering guidance passage 570a through which the game ball B can flow, and closes the box-shaped guidance unit base 571 that is open forward and the front side of the guidance unit base 571. The movable piece member 573 that is movable by the flat plate-shaped guide passage front lid 572 and the game ball B that circulates in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of the (see FIG. 91).

The ball guidance unit 570 has a front view shape of the guidance unit base 571 and the guidance passage front lid 572 formed in a quadrangle extending vertically. The guidance passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guidance unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guidance unit base 571, and then bends to the right to guide. It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly folding back between the widths of the unit base 571 in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

In the guidance passage 570a, the depth on the front-back right side and the width in the left-right direction are formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. It can be guided in a row.

In the ball guidance unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached in the vicinity of the upper portion so that the movable piece member 573 can move forward and backward into the guidance passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached around an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outer side of the guide passage 570a when viewed from the front, and a part of its lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B comes into contact with the portion protruding into the guidance passage 570a, so that the protruding portion is pushed by the game ball B and retracts from the guidance passage 570a and does not protrude. It becomes.

When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When it is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the game ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guidance unit 570 is assembled in the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guidance passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guidance passage 570a is the payout passage of the payout device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guidance unit 570, since the guidance passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering shape, the guidance passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guidance unit 570, and many games are played in the guidance passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Payout device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89 and the like. FIG. 88 is a rear sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. FIG. 89A is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-rear direction when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 89B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guidance unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear.

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a open to the rear and a ball ejection passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can be distributed, and a payout device main body 581. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped payout device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped payout device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and the rotary shaft is projected on the payout motor 584 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584. The spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 that is attached, and the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. , The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587, which is meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, is meshed with the second transmission gear 587. It has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588, the payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and project into the payout passage 580a, and the payout blade 589. It is equipped with a blade rotation detection sensor 590 which is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, and a payout device main body 581 and after the payout device. A ball-extracting movable piece 592 attached so that the ball-extracting passage 580b can be opened and closed at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a by the lid 582, and a ball-extracting movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-extracting passage 580b is closed. It is provided with a ball pulling lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582.

The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view shape extends vertically. The width of the payout device 580 in the left-right direction is formed to be larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guidance unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 88, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward from the center in the left-right direction to the left and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is provided between the payout blade 589 and the outer circumference. It extends downward in an arc shape concentric with the payout blade 589 so as to form, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, the payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball-extracting passage 580b branches at a portion of the payout passage 580a that extends diagonally downward from the upstream end and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side of the rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is opposed to each other. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to project rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b, respectively. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a is provided. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are rear view of the portion extending to the right side of the rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top branching from the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout passage 580a. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed diagonally upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to form a side wall of the ball pulling passage 580b. The ball pulling movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the rear view of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is arranged between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends from above toward the rotation axis in the payout passage 580a and then extends to the right in the rear view so that the distance between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage becomes narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. In addition, it protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed between the three blade pieces 589a by an arc having a radius younger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can be restricted from moving the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by the payout device rear lid 582 and the payout device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Through the gap between them, it is possible to project into the ball-extracting passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball-extracting passage 580b.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear view near the upper end of the ball pulling movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 penetrates the rear lid 582 of the payout device and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the descending end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball pulling passage 580b can be closed by the ball pulling movable piece 592. Further, by locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. FIG. See 89).

When the ball pulling lever 593 is raised to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state like a string of beads on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592, becomes a ball pulling movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball pulling passage 580b side beyond the above. At this time, since the ball ejection passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball ejection passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down soon.

In this way, in the state where the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball-extracting passage 580b at a high speed, so that the ball-extracting movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-extracting passage 580b. The game ball B vigorously abuts on the lower end side of the ball, but the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear lid 582. Since the ball pulling passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the ball pulling movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b due to the contact force, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 is a ball. It is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the drawing passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the ball can be pulled out by the collision of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in durability and damage of the piece 592.

For this reason, the movable ball-extracting piece 592 can be made less likely to be damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball-extracting passage 580b more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball pulling movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a at a narrower interval than the game ball B, and the ball pulling passage 580b. In order to move to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592 protruding into the ball pulling passage 580b, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball pulling movable piece 592 when moving outward through the space, the space is larger than that of the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward due to the narrow space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball. Since the movement of the movable ball-pulling piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the movable ball-pulling piece 592, and the movable ball-pulling piece 592 can be made hard to be damaged, and the guide on the main body side. The game ball B does not jump out from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the game ball B can be reliably distributed to the downstream side of the ball pulling passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically.

The upper full tank path unit 600 has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 attached to the payout base 551 and the rear side is open, and a box shape attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the front side is open. The upper full tank cover 602 and the payout device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the payout device 580 upward are provided. The upper full tank base 601 projects from the right side in the front view to the right, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 600 is open upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right of the front view by about 3/4 of the total width and extends downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. The upper sphere storage passage 600b, the upper normal payout passage 600c extending downward from the left side in the front view from the center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper normal payout passage 600c adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. The upper full tank payout passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the front view and opening downward on the lower surface of the ball storage passage 600b from the center in the left-right direction, and the upper full tank payout passage 600d opening upward near the right end of the front view on the upper surface and substantially vertical downward. It is provided with an upper ball-extracting passage 600e which is opened downward near the right end of the lower surface after extending to (see FIG. 91).

On the lower surface of the upper full tank path unit 600, the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e are opened downward in order from the left side in the front view. In the state where the upper full tank path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened just below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upper ball is pulled out. The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. It is emitted downward from any of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball pulling passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The lower full tank path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551 g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and is a lower full tank base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, the lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower normal payout passage 610a which are rotatably attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 around an axis extending back and forth. A payout passage opening / closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a payout passage opening / closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end opening of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are attached. It is equipped with a rushing closing spring 614.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c are arranged in this order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In the state, each upstream end opens upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball pulling passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank payout passage 610b in the front view, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is urged in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 614. Under normal conditions, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are provided. The opening) is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided with an actuating protrusion 613a projecting forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a front view shape in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is tilted so that it protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

The lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the payout unit 560, and the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are each upper full. It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue ball path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates in the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d circulates in the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball pulling passage 600e will circulate in the lower ball pulling passage 610c.

Further, in the state where the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front end (downstream end) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b penetrates the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball pulling guide portion 627 which is opened to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 in contact with the door opening / closing contact of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are open, and communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full tank receiver 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 Is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game ball B in the payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled on the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is located at the descending end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in the open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number is set based on the detection of the ball out by the ball out of ball detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, for example, from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state of being arranged in a row by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay on the upstream side of the payout blade 589. It becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. From this, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 584, the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the rear view clockwise direction, and the payout blade 580a in the payout passage 580a is moved. It is released to the downstream side of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 is arranged directly under the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down into the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. It is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in the above.

When a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a, so that the payout device The game ball B paid out from the 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that communicates. Then, when the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is further paid out, the upper normal payout passage 600c is communicated with the upper ball storage passage 600b on the upstream side. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and the full tank receiver 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3 Can be received by. After that, the game ball B received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper plate 201 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is further paid out, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

When the lower plate 202 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate B is further paid out. The game ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is notified by voice (for example, "Please pull out the ball!") That the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is in a state where the full tank detection sensor 154 is not detected. Temporarily stop until.

When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide it to the position of the rising end. After that, the lower end side of the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the ball-extracting movable piece 592 becomes the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball pulling passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball pulling passage 580b.

At this time, at the portion of the ball pulling movable piece 592, the flowing game ball B comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball pulling movable piece 592, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball pulling passage 600e of the upper full tank path unit 600 and the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball pulling passage 610c to the ball pulling guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the discharging ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharging port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hole). It is discharged to the island facility side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96 and the like. FIG. 92A is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 92B is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the lower rear. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 96 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the speaker unit 621 faces forward near the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. It is provided with a main body frame speaker 622 attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates back and forth near the left end of the front view, and is composed of a plurality of slits extending vertically and vertically, and a circular speaker mounting portion 621a and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b, which is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b, which protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, diagonally downward and backward. It is provided with an open connection portion 621c.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward. It is formed so that the protrusion of the speaker is small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the center of the front view of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a is formed by a speaker cover 621 and a speaker box 623 as a part of an enclosure 624 for containing the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. Since the enclosure 624 has a front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the front view of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it moves to the right. Even if the speaker is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount is small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

When the main body frame 4 of the speaker unit 620a is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43a so as to sandwich the seal member 48, and is behind the main body frame speaker 622. And the space 40a inside the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, an enclosure 624 in a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43 on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, and behind the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side of the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and the connection portion 621c and the speaker unit 620a are extended. Since the sound is communicated to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 does not particularly attenuate the bass range in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. It can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is a dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker ports 211b of 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound in which deep bass sounds.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 This makes it possible for the player to hear a sound having rich bass.

Further, in the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess 621b for space, and the speaker box 623. In addition, a through cylinder 623a that communicates with the through port 621d and extends in a tubular shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed. In the state of being assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a communicate with each other and become independent from the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 has a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. It is equipped with a rear base 626 to which the 620c is mounted.

Further, the base unit 620b is formed by the front base 625 and the rear base 626 in cooperation with each other, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball ejection guidance unit 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that is open upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guidance unit 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. It includes a 628, a ball discharge port 629 that discharges the game ball B that has passed through the ball pulling guidance unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628 downward.

The ball pulling guide portion 627 has an upstream end opening to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and a downstream end opening to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball pulling guide portion 627 faces the opening at the upstream end so as to coincide with the opening at the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is inclined so that the left end of the front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball ejection guiding portion 627 and becomes lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B pulled out from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball pulling guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then the ball. Since the space is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear the sound having richer bass than the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 is a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. It is equipped with 631 and.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (FIG. 96) and. The payout control board 633 sets the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to the pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 and the payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5. It is for controlling and paying out the instructed number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, it is possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, and enhance the deterrent against fraudulent activities.

The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 mounted on the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 mounted on the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. It includes an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to a portion on the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most rearward, which is behind the main body frame speaker 622. One end (main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 is connected to the interface board 635. The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is also connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in the front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end where the right side in front view extends vertically of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and around the axis extending vertically, and the left side is the payout base 551. It is attached to the back cover mounting portion 551i of the above and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in a shape in which the right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 is formed in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same surface as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate the front and rear and extend vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97A is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 97B is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of units that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3. Door frame hook 652, multiple outer frame hooks 653 protruding rearward from the unit base 651 and lockable to the outer frame 2, and door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 depending on the direction of rotation. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

Further, the locking unit 650 is more than a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is provided with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

In the state where the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, transmission cylinder 654, and outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion port 501f of the main body frame base 501, and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. It engages with the transmission member 133, and the rotation of the key inserted in the key hole 132 is transmitted and rotates.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and the outside of the plurality (two). The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the lock unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of lock units 650 are inserted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved downward. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip side of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 is inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are replaced with the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the door is locked by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 105. FIG. 98 (a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 98 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in (a). FIG. 99 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper part in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the rear. FIG. 100 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side with a tank rail or the like assembled on the ball tank, and FIG. 100 (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100 (a) as viewed from the front. FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in the upper part of the main body frame where game balls overflowing from the ball tank circulate. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball overflowing from the ball tank at the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and is removable and hinged to the outer frame 2 by the hinge member 510 above the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. A frame-shaped main frame base 501 that is rotatably attached to support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped base that is attached along the upper side and the left side of the front view on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. The payout base 551, the ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape (container shape) extending to the left and right, and the ball tank 552 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. The tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, the first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the tank rail separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the 553, the ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and the tank rail 553. A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the ball, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551 to pay out the game ball B to the player side. It has.

The ball tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a which is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view extends in the left-right direction and is inclined so that the left side is lowered in the front view, and the bottom wall 552a from the front side and the rear side, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape with the upper side open. Has been done. The ball tank 552 stores the game ball B supplied from the island equipment such as the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. The overflow portion 552f has a length of about 3/4 of the lateral length of the front wall 552b from the end side of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (right side wall 552e side). It is formed over the length.

The right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. .. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can be circulated in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game sphere B. Have. The main guide portion 553a is inclined so as to be lowered toward the left side of the front view. Further, in a plan view, the main guide portion 553a extends from the right end to a position of about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end side, and then moves to the left. It is formed in a crank shape that extends diagonally from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes toward it, and extends parallel to the axis line extending in the left-right direction to the left end. .. In the tank rail 553, a portion of the main guide portion 553a extending parallel to the axis extending from the left end to the right in the left-right direction extends to the upper end with the same width, and the first rail extends to the upper end of this portion. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. Is formed at a height at which only one can be distributed (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

Further, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and narrows in the width direction from the upstream end to the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. There is. With this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B circulating in the bulging portion 553b so that the width directions are aligned in the downstream side and the downward side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has the center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is arranged above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 is slightly at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b that abuts. It changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball shavings in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends constantly, a reaction force always acts in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B circulating in the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is difficult to disperse, the internal game ball B is always pushed in a certain direction, so that the game ball B is difficult to escape and ball clogging (ball shaving) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. By dispersing the pushing directions of the plurality of game balls B, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball shavings) can be less likely to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball jam (ball gummy) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the location where the ball is jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly cleared, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a movable defect occurs in the movable production unit or the like, the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be checked with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. Can produce the effects of.

The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in the front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B, which extends to the left (left) and overflows forward from the ball tank 552, to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so as to be the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. It extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m and the overflow surface portion 501 m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. A part of the game ball B that overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m because the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 is inclined so as to be low in the left-right direction. It is equipped with a detour passage 552 g for guiding the vehicle.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on both outer sides of the detour passage 552 g in the left-right direction, and the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball B and the bottom surface. Is provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501 m on the opposite side of the detour passage 552 g between the discharge portion 551j and the discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open. It covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear and the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), and the upper surface overflows. It includes a terminal cover 551k that extends horizontally at a position higher than the surface portion 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501 m has a flat plate shape from a position lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B by a distance of 2 to 4 times from the upper side on the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape with a front view extending vertically. It extends to. The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in the front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The height of the overflow surface portion 501 m from the front end to the rear end is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. In the overflow surface portion 501 m, a gap is formed between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 at a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. ..

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m, and has a flat plate-shaped left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. On both outer sides of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o in the left-right direction, the upper ends are higher than those of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o and extend in a strip-like shape in the front-rear direction, and the outside of the game ball B in the left-right direction. It has a plurality of ribs 501p, which are arranged in a row at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left-stage portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined so that the right corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane in the front view. The right-stage portion 501o is formed to have a longer length in the left-right direction than a length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the left corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. The gap between the game ball B and the game ball B is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501 m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction and the overflow surface portion 501 m. The left end of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left end of the detour passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right end wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552 g is integrally formed with the ball tank 552. In the following, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a ball tank 552. The detour passage 552g extends from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left in a flat plate shape, and the front end is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is inclined so as to be low. And a weir portion extending upward from the end side of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. Regarding the rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g, the left end side (weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in front view, and the left end side thereof. It extends diagonally so that it moves forward toward the right end. The passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be inclined in the left-right direction horizontally.

The detour passage 552g is assembled on the main body frame 4 so that the rear end of the tank rail 553 extending in a crank shape in the left-right direction is along the front end side of the portion extending diagonally in the left-right direction. It is extending. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552 g extends diagonally in the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552 g changes so that its distribution direction is perpendicular to the diagonal rear end from the oblique rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the detour passage 552 g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the distribution direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552 g is discharged at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552 g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552 g. It is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging in 553 to occur.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends diagonally in the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side, where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball shavings in the tank rail 553 by discharging it to a wide part of the tank rail.

Further, the portion for guiding the game ball B by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the rear portion of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the left portion in the front view of the rear wall 552c in the tank rail 553. A game ball B that goes under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) is distributed from the inside of the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, at the portion of the tank rail 553 behind the detour passage 552 g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552 k (the wall of the tank rail 553). Height) will not be exceeded. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward, so that the detour passage 552 g The game ball B guided to the rear can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f on the left side wall 552d inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. It has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. Further, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side in the front view from a position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to the front wall 552b. Approximately 1/9 of the total length extends diagonally backward from the front wall 552b to a position near about 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d, and then extends parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c. From there, it is formed in a shape parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction and extending from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

In the ball tank 552, in a plan view, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above shape, the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side, and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The region surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 is a flat plate-shaped flange extending laterally outward and vertically on the same surface as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the detour passage 552 g, respectively. It has a portion 552 liters. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edge of the two flange portions 552l is the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (main body frame base 501). It is formed higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled from each other, the upstream end (right end in the front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, in a plan view, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side thereof are located rearward (protruding) from the ball tank 552. )doing. The rear end side of the detour passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge portion 551j is in the ball tank 552 so as to be stepped backward from a height lower than the detour passage 552 g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 in a state of being assembled in the main body frame 4. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side of the front view to the tank rail 553, a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 to the left along the tank rail 553 (center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555). It extends to a nearby position) and then extends backward.

The external terminal plate 558 is attached with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the grip portion can be opened by operating the lever to grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the portion closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 on the upper side of the tank rail 553 in the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. .. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the action and effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501 m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552 g are arranged so that the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g are lower on the rear end side as shown by the white arrows in FIG. The left-stage portion 501n is inclined so that the rear end right corner is lowered, and the right-stage portion 501o is inclined so that the rear end left corner is lowered. Further, the bottom wall 552a and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) of the ball tank 552 are inclined so that the left end side is lower in the front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

Then, when the amount of the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 increases due to the supply from the island equipment, first of all, the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest of the uppermost edges of the outer circumference, is exceeded. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface portion 501 m, and can be discharged from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501 m. The game ball B can be returned to the ball tank 552 by inclining the overflow surface portion 501 m (see FIG. 103). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from further increasing in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the strong pressing of the game balls B against each other (increase in the ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. , It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball shavings) due to the engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552.

Further, since the detour passage 552 g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501 m from exerting a strong backward pressing force on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is clogged. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m can be prevented from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem that the game ball B spilled on the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by suppressing the strong pressing of the game balls B against each other in the tank rail 553.

Further, since the height of the remaining upper end edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than that of the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper end edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the game ball B, which overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m beyond the overflow portion 552 f and is distributed from the overflow surface portion 501 m to the detour passage 552 g, is on the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the ball from returning from the detour passage 552 g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552 g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

Further, as described above, the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). It is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552 g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (ball tank 552) to the detour passage 552 g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552 g is rearward from the overflow surface portion 501 m on the front end side. The flow can be in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the detour passage 552 g to the tank rail 553 can be in a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pushed against each other and being bitten by the different directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B, and the game balls B are clogged. Can be prevented.

Further, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a in a row in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. Further, since the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up in a portion where the upper side is open, the game released from the rear end of the detour passage 552 g. The sphere B can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be reliably achieved.

Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is extended from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction is narrowed from the upstream end to the downstream side to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. Since the game balls are changed so as to coincide with each other, as the plurality of game balls B move toward the downstream side in the bulge portion 553b, they can be aligned so as to be aligned with respect to the width direction. Further, since the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (ball tank 552 side). By distributing a plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction to the downstream side through a portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced and a row is formed. Can be aligned with. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide the plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Further, since the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulge portion 553 b. Therefore, since the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, an external terminal plate 558 provided with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a on the opposite side of the ball tank 552 with the detour passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j in between. Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the electric wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be separated from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island equipment. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island equipment bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the electric wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , There is no problem such as short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be made difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501 m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (to the right in FIG. 103) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

Further, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m, and rides on the left stage portion 501n and the right stage portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m. However, as shown in FIG. 103, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g by their inclination, and the game ball B spills on the outside of the main body frame 4, causing a problem. Can be prevented.

Further, since the game ball B is configured to pass under the guide surface portion 552j when the game ball B is distributed from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game balls stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 552 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) of the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) on which the game balls B can be stacked upward. , The game ball B guided by the detour passage 552 g can be reliably received.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, the game ball B can be dropped. The game ball B is not accepted by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[4-12-1. Second embodiment of tank rail, etc.]
Subsequently, the second embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 110 and the like. FIG. 106 is an enlarged perspective view showing a portion of the tank rail when the pachinko machine provided with the tank rail or the like of the second embodiment is viewed from behind. FIG. 107A is a plan view showing the tank rail and the like of FIG. 106 assembled together with the ball tank, and FIG. 107B is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 106 as viewed from the front. Is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like in (a) as viewed from behind. FIG. 108 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of a tank rail or the like cut along a marker line in FIG. 107 (a). FIG. 110 is an explanatory view showing a cross-sectional view of the flow of the game ball in the tank rail of FIG. 107. In addition to the tank rail 553A, the tank rail 555A and the like of the second embodiment different from the above include the first rail cover 554A, the second rail cover 555A, and the ball rectifying member 556A. , The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are different from each other, and the same configuration will be described with the same reference numerals.

The tank rail 553A of the present embodiment rectifies the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivers it to the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560. The tank rail 553A extends to the left in a groove shape that opens upward. The tank rail 555A has a first rail cover 554A so as to close the upper end side, a second rail cover 555A provided on the left side of the front view of the first rail cover 554A, and an upper side of the second rail cover 555A. A ball rectifying member 556A provided is attached, and a ball stopping member 557 capable of blocking the flow of the game ball B is attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A.

As shown in FIG. 107A and the like, the tank rail 553A has a meandering portion 553c meandering in the front-rear direction on the downstream side of the bulging portion 553b. The meandering portion 553c can suppress the distribution speed of the game ball B. The first rail cover 554A is attached to the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) of the meandering portion 553c.

The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in the front view) including the meandering portion 553c on the open upper end side of the tank rail 555A. The second rail cover 555A includes a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 555A, and a pair of protective walls 555b that extend upward from both front and rear ends on the upstream side of the cover portion 555a in the left-right direction. It has an opening 555c that penetrates the cover portion 555a between the pair of protective walls 555b. The pair of protective walls 555b are formed in a meandering shape following the meandering portion 553c at the portion of the tank rail 553A where the meandering portion 553c is provided. The rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 555c so as to penetrate from above.

The ball rectifying member 556A is rotatably attached so that the upstream end side extends back and forth and around the axis. The ball rectifying member 556A is provided above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A and between the pair of protective walls 555b, penetrates the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A, and protrudes into the tank rail 555A. It has a flat plate-shaped rectifying piece 556a. The ball rectifying member 556A abuts on the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the tank rail 553A from above, thereby breaking the stages of the game balls B and making it easier to align them in a row, and at the uppermost side. The game ball B is prevented from moving rapidly to the downstream side, and ball biting is prevented from occurring on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

According to the tank rail 555A and the like of the present embodiment, in the assembled state, the ball rectifying member 556A is located between the pair of protective walls 555b in the second rail cover 555A and below the upper end of the protective wall 555b. ing. As a result, the electric wire (indicated by the broken line in FIG. 106) connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 provided on the front upper side of the portion of the tank rail 553A to which the ball rectifying member 556A is attached becomes. It is possible to prevent the ball rectifying member 556A from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above. By the way, when the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a comes into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A due to the weight of the electric wire, the ball rectifying member 556A May not be able to rotate upward, and the rectifying action of the game ball B by the ball rectifying member 556A may not be sufficiently exerted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A. When the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the rectifying member 556A, the ball rectifying member 556A can rotate upward to fully exert the rectifying action, and the ball bites or the ball in the tank rail 553A. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging.

Further, since the tank rail 553A is provided with the meandering portion 553c, the meandering portion 553c can suppress the distribution speed of the game ball B. By the way, in the tank rail 553A whose height becomes narrower toward the downstream side, if the upper game ball B among the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages moves to the downstream side first, ball biting is likely to occur. .. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the meandering portion 553c can suppress the circulation speed of the game ball B, so that the upper game ball B moves to the downstream side first. It can be suppressed and the occurrence of ball biting can be reduced.

Further, as described above, since the protective wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A and prevent the occurrence of ball clogging, many tank rails 553A can be used. Place the terminal board or control board to which the electric wires are connected (for example, external terminal board 558) or the control board, or place the terminal board or control board to which many electric wires are connected near the tank rail 553A. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high degree of freedom in arranging the tank rail 553A (ball tank 552), the terminal board, and the like.

[4-12-2. Third embodiment of tank rails and the like]
Subsequently, the third embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 111 to 118 and the like. FIG. 111 is a perspective view showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail when the main body frame provided with the tank rail or the like of the third embodiment is viewed from the rear right. FIG. 112 is a perspective view showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail when the main body frame provided with the tank rail or the like of the third embodiment is viewed from the left rear. FIG. 113A is an enlarged rear view of the main body frame showing a portion of the external terminal plate, and FIG. 113B is a left side view of the main body frame showing an enlarged upper part. 114 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 113 (b), and FIG. 114 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 113 (a). FIG. 115 is an enlarged explanatory view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in FIG. 114 (b). FIG. 116 (a) is a perspective view of the tank rail or the like of the third embodiment as viewed from the front, FIG. 116 (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail or the like of (a) as viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. It is a perspective view which looked at the tank rail and the like of (a) from the lower right rear. FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 116 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 116 disassembled and viewed from the rear.

The tank rail or the like of the third embodiment includes the tank rail or the like of the first embodiment (ball tank 552, tank rail 535, first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, ball rectifying member 556, and ball stopping member). A protective cover 559 that covers the ball rectifying member 556 from above is added to the configuration of 557), and the same configuration as described above will be described with the same reference numerals.

The tank rails and the like of the present embodiment are attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and extend to the left and right of the payout base 551 and a box-shaped ball tank 552 that extends to the left and right and is open upward. It is provided with a tank rail 553 which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side of the portion and which is open upward and extends to the left in a groove shape.

The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 in the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction. It is formed in the direction. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The shape of the tank rail 553 in a plan view is diagonally to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is about one minute from the depth of several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape that extends straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the opening at the upper end of the guidance passage 570a in the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is tilted so that the left end side is low at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a.

The tank rail 553 has an opening on the bottom surface of a portion that extends straight to the left (a portion whose height decreases toward the downstream) so that dust, dirt, etc. in the tank rail 553 can be dropped. A plurality of portions 553d are formed. These openings 553d are provided in portions below the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556, which will be described later. The opening 553d opens downward and rearward of the tank rail 553 and extends to the left and right, and is formed in a size that the game ball B cannot pass through. When the game ball B is present on the tank rail 553, a part of the game ball B can be directly visually recognized from behind through the opening 553d. Further, the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be touched by the operator's finger, a thin stick, or the like through the opening 553d. As a result, the ball clogging generated at the site can be eliminated through the opening 553d. Further, the ball rectifying member 556 can be lifted through the opening 553d through the game ball B of the relevant portion, and the operation of the ball rectifying member 556 can be confirmed.

Further, the tank rail or the like is to the left of the ball tank 552, and is closed above the predetermined range from the right end to the left of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends to the left at a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction. The second rail cover 555 that closes upward from the portion spaced between the first rail cover 554 and the first rail cover 554 in the tank rail 554 to the left end, and the first at the upper end of the tank rail 555. A ball rectifying member 556 provided at a portion between the rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, a ball stopping member 557 provided near the left end of the lower surface of the tank rail 555, and the first rail cover 554. It is provided with a protective cover 559 that straddles the ball rectifying member 556 from the middle of the left-right direction and covers the upper part of the second rail cover 555 halfway in the left-right direction.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 555 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. ..

The ball rectifying member 556 is provided at a portion between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 555 with respect to the axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114A and the like).

By the way, in the tank rail 553, the game balls B stacked vertically are arranged in one stage, but when the stacked game balls B are reduced from the second stage to the first stage, the upper game balls B are moved. If you try to overtake the lower game balls B, those game balls B may mesh with each other and become stuck (so-called ball clogging due to ball shavings). On the other hand, in the ball rectifying member 556 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is distributed in two upper and lower stages in the tank rail 553, the upper game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a. By slowing down the flow of the game ball B, it is possible to prevent an attempt to overtake the lower game ball B. As a result, the game ball B on the lower stage side moves to the downstream side first, and the game ball B on the upper stage side moves to the rear side, so that the game balls B can be aligned in one stage. At this time, since the game ball B on the upper stage side presses the rectifying piece 556a from below, the ball rectifying member 556 moves so that the rectifying piece 556a moves upward, and the game on the upper stage side due to its own weight. The ball B can be pressed downward, and the ball rectifying member 556 (rectifying piece 556a) swings in the vertical direction to promote the movement of the game ball B on the upper stage side to the lower stage side and the tank rail. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging at the relevant portion (a portion whose height becomes lower toward the downstream) in 553.

The ball stop member 557 is slidably attached in the left-right direction near the left end of the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and by sliding it to the left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

The protective cover 559 includes a strip-shaped top plate portion 559a extending to the left and right, a flat plate-shaped rear plate portion 559b extending downward from a part of the rear side of the top plate portion 559a, and a top plate portion 559a. It has a flat plate-shaped front plate portion 559c extending downward from the front side and the left side of the above, and a flat plate-shaped guide plate portion 559d extending forward from the front plate portion 559c. The top plate portion 559a and the guide plate portion 559d are inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The guide plate portion 559d is formed so that the left side of the top plate portion 559a wraps around from the front side to the left side, and the rear end of the portion coincides with the rear end of the top plate portion 559a in the front-rear direction.

The protective cover 559 is positioned so that the top plate portion 559a covers the upper part from the middle of the first rail cover 554 in the left-right direction to the middle of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. A space is formed between the ball rectifying member 556 and the ball rectifying member 556 so that the ball rectifying member 556 can swing up and down. The rear plate portion 559b extends to a position below the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to cover the rear of the ball rectifying member 556.

The right end side of the front plate portion 559c extends to the right of the top plate portion 559a, and extends along the tank rail 553 to the ball tank 552. In the guide plate portion 559d, a portion on the front side of the top plate portion 559a protrudes forward from the front plate portion 559c with a length larger than the diameter of the game ball B, and the game ball B can be guided to the left. Has been done. The guide plate portion 559d is inclined more gently than the inclination of the upper end of the tank rail 553. The front end of the guide plate portion 559d forms a slight gap between the front end of the guide plate portion 559d and the rear surface of the payout base 551 so that the game ball B cannot enter.

The protective cover 559 can prevent contact with the ball rectifying member 556 from the outside when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. To confirm the operation of the ball rectifying member 556, a thin rod is inserted into the opening 553d of the tank rail 553 to bring it into contact from below, or the game ball B in the tank rail 553 is passed through the opening 553d and the operator's finger. It can be confirmed by pushing it upward with the like and lifting it through the game ball B.

Further, the protective cover 559 can guide the game ball B that has entered the rear of the external terminal plate 558 for some reason to the left by the guide plate portion 559d and discharge it to the outside from the left side surface of the main body frame 4. ..

In the present embodiment, the ball tank 552, the tank rail 555, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, the protective cover 559, etc. are formed of a transparent material, and the inside of the tank rail 553. The game ball B can be visually recognized from the outside.

Further, since the upper part of the tank rail 553 is covered with the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559, it is possible to prevent dust, dirt, etc. from entering the tank rail 553 from above. be able to.

Further, since the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559 cover the upper part of the tank rail 553, the ball rectifying member 556 and the game ball B cannot be touched from above. Therefore, when dust or dirt adheres to the game ball B or the like, it is necessary to remove the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the protective cover 559, etc., but in the present embodiment, the tank rail 553 It is significant that a plurality of openings 553d are provided at the bottom. More specifically, when dust or dirt adheres to the ball rectifying member 556 or the game ball B in the tank rail 553, the ball rectifies the ball B inside by touching the game ball B inside through the opening 553d and via the game ball B or the game ball B. Since the ball rectifying member 556 can be shaken, dust and dirt adhering to the game ball B and the like can be removed. Then, dust and dirt dropped from the game ball B and the like can be discharged to the outside through the opening 553d.

By the way, in the main body frame 4, since the portion where the front-rear direction of the tank rail 553 extends to the left at a substantially constant depth is provided behind the external terminal board 558, the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558a. When the electric wire connected to the ball rectifying member 556 comes into contact with the ball rectifying member 556 from above, the ball rectifying member 556 rotates upward even if the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556 due to the weight of the electric wire. There is a possibility that the rectifying action of the game ball B by the ball rectifying member 556 cannot be sufficiently exerted.

Further, since the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 is connected to the electric wire whose tip is stripped, if the game ball B remains behind the external terminal board 558 for some reason, the electric wire connection terminal If the connection (insertion) of the electric wire to the 558a is insufficient, a short circuit may occur due to the remaining game ball B.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the protective cover 559 covers the upper part of the ball rectifying member 556, the protective cover 559 prevents the electric wire connected to the electric wire connecting terminal 558a from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556. can do. As a result, when the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the sphere rectifying member 556, the sphere rectifying member 556 can rotate upward, sufficiently exerting the rectifying action, and in the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball biting and ball clogging.

By the way, when an electric wire is pulled out from the external terminal plate 558 for some reason and the tip of the electric wire comes into contact with the game ball B existing behind the external terminal plate 558, the computer in the game hall provides necessary information due to the occurrence of a short circuit. You will not be able to receive it, and there will be an error in the counting at the game hall. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the guide plate portion 559d is provided on the protective cover 559, the game ball B that has invaded behind the external terminal plate 558 for some reason is guided to the left and the main body. It can be discharged to the outside from the left side surface of the frame 4. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from remaining behind the external terminal plate 558, and thus it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a short circuit due to the remaining game ball B. Therefore, by avoiding a short circuit of the electric wire, it is possible to ensure that the computer (hall controller) of the game hall can receive the necessary information, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of counting error in the game hall. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the game ball B is discharged to the left side surface side of the main body frame 4 by the guide plate portion 559d of the protective cover 559, the game ball B is after the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as disconnection or short circuit by contacting various electric wires and wirings provided on the side.

[4-13. Another embodiment of the board unit]
Subsequently, the substrate unit 620A of another embodiment (second embodiment) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 119 to 124 and the like. 119 (a) is a front view of a substrate unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) viewed from the front right, and (c) is a substrate unit of (a). It is a perspective view seen from the left front. 120 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) as viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 120 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) as viewed from the lower right rear. FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 123 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the key line in FIG. 119 (a), FIG. 123 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Ku Ku line in (a), and FIG. It is a cross-sectional view cut by the cake line in). FIG. 124 is a bottom view showing a portion of the pachinko machine provided with the substrate unit of FIG. 119 (a) behind the door frame.

The substrate unit 620A of the present embodiment is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in place of the above substrate unit 620. In the substrate unit 620A of the present embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is significantly different from the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 described above. Here, the same components as those of the substrate unit 620 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The board unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 660 mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 660, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The base unit 660 has a front base 661 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the front base 661. A game that is provided between the rear base 662, the front base 661, and the rear base 662, and distributes the out-ball passage 663 and the out-ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5 is distributed. An out sensor 664 that detects the balls B one by one, and a ball pulling guidance unit 627 that receives the game ball B released from the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 and guides it to the right in the front view. The game ball B guided by the ball pulling guidance unit 627 circulates, and closes the ball pulling out passage 665 provided behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662 and the rear side of the ball pulling out passage 665. The passage wall member 666, which is attached to the rear base 662 as described above, is provided.

The front base 661 is formed in the shape of a long box on the left and right that is open to the front. The rear base 662 has a flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 662a extending to the left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction, and an out-ball passage 663 and a ball ejection guidance portion 627 are formed on the front side of the partition wall portion 662a. At the same time, a ball ejection discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed in a box shape in which the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a is open to the rear.

In the base unit 660, the front base 661, the rear base 662, and the passage wall member 666 are formed of transparent members. Therefore, the ball removal guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 are also transparently formed. Therefore, the inside of the ball ejection guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 can be clearly seen from the upper side or the lower side of the base unit 660, and it becomes easier to confirm ball clogging or the like. There is.

The out-ball passage 663 is formed on the front side of the flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 662a extending to the left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction in the rear base 662 with the front open, and is open. The front end is closed by the front base 661.

The out-ball passage 663 is a ball discharge receiving portion 663a that is open upward and extends to the left and right at a position substantially central in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1, and a game ball B received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. At the lower end of the out-ball rectifying section 663b that rectifies in a row while largely meandering in the left-right direction, the downward guiding section 663c that guides the game ball B rectified in a row by the out-ball rectifying section 663b downward, and the downward guiding section 663c. It is open downward and has an out-ball discharge port 663d for discharging the game ball B downward from the lower surface of the base unit 660. The out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 is provided behind the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 124).

The ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is about 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving portion 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end side is lowered.

The out-ball rectifying unit 663b is inclined at a gentle angle from a position to the right of the right end of the ball discharge receiving unit 663a toward the lower side of the ball discharging receiving unit 663a so that the left end side becomes lower. Further, the depth of the out-ball rectifying section 663b becomes narrower in the front-rear direction toward the downstream side (left), and is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B in the vicinity of the downstream end below the ball discharging receiving section 663a. It is the depth. Further, the portion of the out-ball rectifying section 663b on the left side of the right end of the ball discharge receiving section 663a becomes lower in vertical height toward the downstream side (left side), and in the vicinity of the downstream end, the game ball B The height is slightly larger than the diameter. As a result, the game balls B can be aligned in a row in the out-ball rectifying unit 663b.

The lower guide portion 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a, and the front wall is flush with the rear wall (partition wall portion) in the middle of the vertical direction. It bends backward in a curved curve like a small crank. As a result, the downstream end (out ball discharge port 663d) of the downward guidance portion 663c is located behind the front surface of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. The out sensor 664 is provided on the upstream side of the cranked portion of the downward guidance portion 663c. Since the downward guiding portion 663c is formed in a curved shape so that the portion bent in a crank shape does not have a portion extending in the horizontal direction, the downward guide portion 663c passes through the out sensor 664 and is bent in a crank shape. Even if the game ball B comes into contact with the existing portion, it does not jump up to the upper out sensor 664 side, and it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected twice by the out sensor 664.

Since the game ball B frequently passes through the out sensor 664, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch having high durability and long life is used.

The ball pulling-out guide portion 627 is provided on the left side of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a in the out ball passage 663. The ball pulling guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and the downstream side bends backward and extends to the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. , It is connected to the upstream end of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 (see FIG. 123 (a) and the like).

The ball ejection discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a in the rear base 662. The ball ejection discharge passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 in a state of being open to the rear, and the rear end side is closed by the passage wall member 666. The rear end of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 is located in front of the rear end of the rear base 662 by about one outer diameter of the game ball B. That is, a gap of one game ball B or more is formed between the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662.

The upstream end (left end) of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 is connected to the downstream end of the ball ejection guidance portion 627, and has the same inclination as the ball ejection receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 and is larger than the ball ejection receiving portion 663a. The lateral guide portion 665a extending to the right, the vertical guide portion 665b extending vertically downward from the downstream end (right end) of the lateral guide portion 665a to the lower surface of the rear base 662, and the downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guide portion 665b. ) Has a ball ejection port 665c that opens downward. The ball ejection port 665c is provided slightly behind the out ball ejection port 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 124).

Further, the ball ejection discharge passage 665 has a plurality of protrusions 665d that alternately project inward at regular intervals in the vertical direction on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guide portion 665b. In the ball ejection discharge passage 665, the game balls B flowing through the vertically extending vertical guide portion 665b alternately contact the plurality of protrusions 665d, so that the game balls B flow down in a zigzag shape and are distributed. The increase in speed can be suppressed, and the speed of the game ball B discharged downward from the ball ejection port 665c can be suppressed.

Since the ball ejection discharge passage 665 is formed into a simple L-shaped passage by the lateral guide portion 665a and the vertical guide portion 665b, when the ball ejection lever 593 is operated to eject the game ball B in the ball tank 552. , Many game balls B can be smoothly guided and discharged.

According to the substrate unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B that is driven into the game area 5a and discharged from the game board 5 is received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and then the out sensor 664. It is detected by the sensor and discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to discharge (pull out) the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the like, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is operated to remove the game ball B discharged to the ball pulling passage 580b side from the out ball passage 663. The ball is discharged to the island facility side of the game hall through the ball pulling guidance unit 627 and the ball pulling discharge passage 665, which are separate and independent from the above. As a result, only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so that only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be accurately detected. Can be counted. Therefore, the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 are used to obtain an accurate game ball B. It can be a pachinko machine 1 capable of calculating a payout rate (ball payout rate).

The number of game balls B (the number of out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 is driven into the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001, the first starting port 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting port 2005, the first The number of game balls B that have been accepted into the winning openings such as the large winning opening 2006 and the second major winning opening 2007 and discharged from the game board 5, and which of the winning openings is accepted after being driven into the game area 5a. It is the sum of the number of game balls B that are received in the out port 1008 and discharged from the game board 5, and the number of game balls B that are driven into the game area 5a (the number of shot balls). That is.

Since the payout rate (ball payout rate) changes according to the game state, the payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time, per day, etc.) is set to "Payout within a predetermined period". Calculate as "number ÷ number of out balls within a predetermined period = payout rate within a predetermined period".

Further, according to the present embodiment, the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is detachably attached is provided with an out ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 is distributed, and an out ball is provided. The game ball B circulating in the passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected. Therefore, the game board 5 detects the "out ball". It is not necessary to provide an out-ball detection unit, and the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified to reduce the cost.

Further, according to the present embodiment, there is a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B between the rear end of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662. The out-ball passage 663 and the ball-extracting discharge passage 665 are moved away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc. The pachinko machine 1 which can reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc. due to electrical noise due to static electricity, induced current, etc. generated by the distribution of the game ball B and less malfunction due to the distribution of the game ball B. Can be.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the game ball B whose flow speed is suppressed by the out ball rectifying unit 663b of the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, the game ball B is distributed. Since the impact applied to the out sensor 664 can be weakened, it is possible to reduce the premature wear and damage of the out sensor 664.

Further, when the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, the game is played. Since a person wants to pay out many game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is large, it is possible to immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a high possibility that many game balls B will be paid out. It is possible to make it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 to be played. In addition, when the payout rate is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, if a fraudulent act such that a large number of game balls B are paid out is performed, the displayed payout rate becomes larger than usual. , Other players and the staff of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the fraudulent activity, so that the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against the fraudulent activity can be hesitated. Can be.

In addition, when the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed at a position invisible from the player side, the staff of the game hall can see the same reason as above. Can detect fraudulent activity. Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, obstacle nail N, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay). Since there is a possibility of a defect in the board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc.), it is possible to deal with the defect at an early stage and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, since the out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 in which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 is distributed, a configuration for detecting the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 (for example, It is not necessary to provide an out-ball detection unit), the cost for the game board 5 can be reduced, and a space is secured in the game board 5 for the configuration for detecting the ejected game ball B. By providing a directing device in the secured space, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) more entertaining to the player.

Further, since the ball ejection discharge passage 665 has a vertical guide portion 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d are alternately projected, the game ball B is distributed through the vertical guide portion 665 b, so that the game ball B can be distributed. Since the speed can be suppressed, damage in the ball ejection discharge passage 665 due to the impact of the circulating game ball B, damage on the island equipment side of the game hall that receives the game ball B ejected from the ball ejection discharge passage 665, Etc. can be prevented.

Further, the out-ball rectifying section 663b that is meandering is provided in the out-ball passage 663, and the vertical guiding section 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d are projected is provided in the ball-extracting discharge passage 665. Since it is possible to suppress the distribution speed of the ball, it is possible to reduce the electrical noise emitted from the game ball B circulating in the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665, so that the ball is provided nearby. The influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the distribution of the game ball B can be obtained.

Further, since the out ball discharge port 663d and the ball removal discharge port 665c of the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal discharge passage 665 are opened downward, the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal discharge passage are opened. Since the game ball B is discharged downward from the 665, it becomes difficult for the game ball B to collide with another pachinko machine, a wall, or the like provided behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment, and the other pachinko machines. It is possible to prevent the machine, the wall, etc. from being damaged. Further, since the game ball B is discharged downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal discharge passage 665, the discharged game ball B is less likely to scatter, and the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal discharge passage 665 on the island equipment side. The discharged game ball B can be easily collected.

Further, since the base unit 660 in which the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 are formed is provided below the portion of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is attached, the game board 5 is provided with a game. Since the game ball B driven into the area 5a can be delivered to the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660 simply by discharging it downward, the configuration related to the discharge of the game ball B in the game board 5 is configured. The configuration can be simple (simple), and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

Further, since the ball ejection port 665c of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball ejection port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball ejection passage 663 Since it is possible to prevent the discharged game ball B from colliding with the outer frame 2, the game ball B vigorously circulating in the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 collides with the outer frame 2. It is possible to prevent the outer frame 2 from being damaged, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which is not easily damaged.

Further, since the ball ejection port 665c of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball ejection port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, a portion for collecting the game ball B on the island equipment side ( It is not necessary to advance the out receiving portion, the bucket, etc.) to a position where it overlaps with the outer frame 2, and it is possible to reduce the trouble of installing the pachinko machine 1 and the trouble of moving the pachinko machine 1.

[4-13a. Another embodiment of ball ejection in a substrate unit]
Next, another embodiment of ball discharge in the above-mentioned substrate unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126 and the like. FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out ball discharge port of the out ball passage. FIG. 126 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and FIG. 126 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in (a).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, a guide piece 667 that guides the game ball B to the rear side is provided at a portion of the out ball discharge port 663d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660. More specifically, in this embodiment, a merging portion 663e that joins the ball ejection / discharging passage 665 is provided in the vicinity of the downstream end of the out ball passage 663. The merging portion 663e is open downward, and the end of the opening is an out ball discharge port 663d (ball ejection port 665c). Then, the guide piece 667 projects shortly backward from the front wall at the out ball discharge port 663d.

According to the embodiment of FIG. 125, the game ball B discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d comes into contact with the guide piece 667, so that the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed diagonally backward and downward. .. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) for collecting the game ball B provided on the rear side (inside the island equipment) of the island equipment. Etc.), the game ball B can be easily released to the island equipment side, and the game ball B can be reliably collected on the island equipment side.

Further, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, since the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed diagonally backward and downward by the guide piece 667, the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 is provided in the main body frame 4. Even if the game board 5 is provided at a position close to directly below the game area 5a of the attached game board 5 (a position close to the front side in the island equipment), the game ball B can be reliably received by a bucket or the like in the island equipment. Therefore, since the out-ball passage 663 (out-ball discharge port 663d) can be arranged in the front portion as much as possible, the space behind the out-ball passage 663 in the main body frame 4 can be widened. Therefore, when the out-ball passage 663 is moved away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., due to electrical noise due to static electricity, induced current, etc. generated by the circulation of many game balls B in the out-ball passage 663. The influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the distribution of the game ball B can be obtained.

Subsequently, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, the out sensor 664 can be attached to and detached from below at the portion of the out ball discharge port 663d in the out ball passage 663. In this embodiment, a sensor mounting recess 663f formed at the downstream end of the downward guide portion 663c in the out ball passage 663 and open downward so as to accommodate the out sensor 664, and an out sensor housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f. It is equipped with a sensor cover 668 that regulates the downward movement of the 664.

The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end of the lower guidance portion 663c connected to the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b in the out-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. Also in this embodiment, the base unit 660 is formed of a transparent member, and the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from the upper side or the lower side of the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 detects the main body portion 668a which extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and whose base end side is rotatably mounted on the base unit 660, and the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f in the main body portion 668a. A through hole 668b through which the game ball B can pass through at a portion corresponding to the hole, and an elastically deformable locking claw portion 668c provided on the side opposite to the proximal end side of the main body portion 668a. Have.

The sensor cover 668 is rotatably mounted on the outer side of the base unit 660 with respect to the sensor mounting recess 663f, which is opposite to the out-sphere rectifying section 663b. The locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is locked to the locking portion 663g provided on the outer side of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b side with respect to the sensor mounting recess 663f in the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 has the locking claw portion 668c moved upward in a state where the out sensor 664 is housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out sensor 664 coincides with the out ball passage 663. By rotating and locking the locking claw portion 668c to the locking portion 663g and closing it, the main body portion 668a abuts on the lower surface of the out sensor 664, restricting the downward movement of the out sensor 664, and out. The sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see FIG. 126 (a)). In this state, the through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 coincides with the detection hole of the out sensor 664, and after the game ball B circulating through the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, the through hole 668b is inserted. It is discharged downward through it. The through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 also serves as the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663.

When the out sensor 664 is replaced (removed), the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is operated to elastically deform the locking claw portion 668c to release the locking with the locking portion 663g. Then, by rotating and opening the sensor cover 668 around the base end side of the main body 668a so that the locking claw portion 668c moves downward, the main body 668a of the sensor cover 668 is opened under the out sensor 664. The out-sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 126 (b)).

As shown in FIG. 126 (b), in the present embodiment, in the state where the sensor cover 668 is rotated and opened, the lower end of the sensor cover 668 and the upper end of the dangerous contact object indicated by the alternate long and short dash line (for example, the outer frame 2). There is a certain amount of gap between the upper end surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43, etc.) or the lower end of the main body frame 4. ing. As a result, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 does not come into contact with a dangerous object and the sensor cover 668 is prevented from being damaged. be able to.

According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, since the out sensor 664 detects all the game balls B driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, many game balls B are distributed. As a result, the out sensor 664 may be worn out and damaged at an early stage, but as described above, the out sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below by opening the sensor cover 668, so that the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced. can.

Further, according to this embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 comes into contact with a contact-risk object such as the outer frame 2. It is possible to prevent the sensor cover 668 from being damaged. More specifically, the sensor cover 668 supports the out sensor 664 from below, but since many game balls B come into contact with the out sensor 664 from above, many game balls B come into contact with each other. There is a risk that the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 will come off due to the vibration caused by the sensor cover 668, and the sensor cover 668 will open. When the sensor cover 668 is opened and the out sensor 664 is dropped downward during the game, the game ball B is detected by the out sensor 664 even though the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a. Therefore, the occurrence of an abnormality is notified by the main control board 1310 or the like. Upon notification of the occurrence of this abnormality, the staff of the game hall or the like opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to confirm the abnormality, but the lower end of the open sensor cover 668 and the outer frame 2 Since there is a gap between the sensor cover 668 and the sensor cover, the main body frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with the contact risk, and the sensor cover 668 can be prevented from being damaged.

Further, according to the embodiment of FIG. 126, the base end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at an outer portion of the sensor mounting recess 663f opposite to the out-sphere rectifying portion 663b. At the same time, since the base unit 660 is transparent, the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be clearly seen from below by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out-sensor 664. Therefore, when the game ball B is jammed in the out ball passage 663, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the place where the game ball B is jammed can be identified at a glance. It is possible to eliminate the clogging of the game ball B at an early stage.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed to be substantially on the same surface as the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be turned upside down and upright, and the out sensor 664 can be replaced by opening and closing the sensor cover 668, and the out ball passage 663 from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660. It is possible to easily perform confirmation work inside and inside the ball ejection discharge passage 665.

Further, according to the present embodiment, even if the out sensor 664 is damaged, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced, so that the game that was interrupted due to the damage of the out sensor 664 can be restarted at an early stage. , It is possible to alleviate the irritation of the player due to the interruption of the game and suppress the decrease in the interest, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 and reduce the burden on the game hall side. can.

Further, since one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, even if the sensor cover 668 is opened when the out sensor 664 is replaced, the sensor cover 668 is attached to the base unit 660. Since it is in a suspended state and does not fall off, it is possible to prevent the sensor cover 668 from being lost.

Further, in the sensor cover 668 holding the out sensor 664 from below, the outer portion of the base unit 660 near the out ball passage 663 in which many game balls B circulate, around the axis in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction). On the other hand, since it is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, the downward force distribution applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 due to the circulation of the game ball B is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 (one side). It is largely applied to the end side of the base unit 660), and is relatively small on the locking claw portion 668c side (the other end side) locked to the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660. Therefore, when many game balls B pass through the out sensor 664, even if a downward force acts on the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664, it is rotatably attached to one end side thereof. Since a large amount can be received, it becomes difficult to release the lock at the locking claw portion 668c on the other end side, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the sensor cover 668 opens and the out sensor 664 falls off. ..

[4-14. Third Embodiment of the board unit]
Next, the substrate unit 700 of the third embodiment, which is further different from the above, will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 127 to 136 and the like. FIG. 127 (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment shown by omitting the power supply unit, the payout control unit, and the interface unit from the front right, and FIG. 127 (b) shows the board unit of (a) in the front left. It is a perspective view seen from. 128 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 128 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) as viewed from the lower right rear. 129 (a) is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along a coco line in (a), and (c) is a searcher line in (a). It is a cut cross-sectional view, and FIG. 130 is a cross-sectional view cut along the sieve line in FIG. 129 (a).

FIG. 131 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 133 (a) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 133 (b) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 as viewed from the rear. FIG. 134 is an explanatory view showing the elimination of ball clogging in the substrate unit of FIG. 127. FIG. 135 is an explanatory view showing prevention of intrusion of a linear illegal tool in the substrate unit of FIG. 127. FIG. 136 is an explanatory diagram showing dust removal in the substrate unit of FIG. 127.

Since the substrate unit 700 of the third embodiment is the same as the substrate unit 620 and the substrate unit 620A only in the configuration of the base unit 710 and other configurations, the above substrate unit 620 and the above-mentioned substrate unit 620 are described here. The same components as those of the board unit 620A are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in FIGS. 127 to 136, the power supply unit 620c, the payout control unit 620d, and the interface unit 620e are not shown.

The substrate unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in place of the substrate unit 620 or the substrate unit 620A described above. The board unit 700 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 710 mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 710, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The substrate unit 700 is provided behind the first ball path 701 in which the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5 can be distributed and the first ball path 701, and is discharged downward from the game board 5. The second ball path 702 in which the game ball B can be distributed, the first ball sensor 703 that detects the game ball B in circulation in the first ball path 701, and the game ball in circulation in the second ball path 702. It includes a second ball sensor 704 that detects B, and a ball pulling passage 705 through which the game ball B released from the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 is distributed. The entrances of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are opened upward, respectively, and after each of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 detects the game ball B one by one. Discharge downward.

In the present embodiment, the game ball B received in the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 in the game board 5 circulates in the first ball path 701, and the game board 5 has a general prize. The game ball B received in the opening 2001, the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, and the second big winning opening 2007 is configured to circulate through the second ball path 702. ing. That is, the out ball is configured to circulate through the first ball path 701 and the safe ball circulates through the second ball path 702, and the number of all out balls can be counted by the first ball sensor 703. At the same time, the number of all safe balls can be counted by the second ball sensor 704. As a result, with respect to the winning openings (winning opening sensors) such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first major winning opening 2006, and the second major winning opening 2007 of the game board 5. When cheating is performed, the number of safe balls on the game board 5 side and the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704 are different, and cheating on the winning opening can be detected. ..

More specifically, the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 is attached to the front base 711 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and to the rear side of the front base 711. A power supply unit 620c is attached to the rear surface of the rear base, and a rear base 712 having a ball removal passage 705 is provided between the front base 711 and the rear base 712, and the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are provided. The front base 711 and the rear base 712 in order to eliminate the ball clogging of the ball path member 713 and the game ball B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 and prevent the intrusion of unauthorized tools. A security cover 714 that can be opened and closed, a passage wall member 715 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closes the rear end side of the ball ejection passage 705, and a passage wall member 715 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712. The frame relay board 716 and the like are provided. In the base unit 710, the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are transparently formed.

The front base 711 is formed in a long box shape on the left and right, which is open rearward and upward. The ball path member 713 is housed inside the front base 711 from the rear. The front base 711 closes the front end side of the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713 by the front wall. The front base 711 has a ball receiving port 711a that opens long in the left-right direction on the upper peripheral wall portion, and a elimination port 711b that opens at a position to the right of the center of the lower peripheral wall portion in the left-right direction. ing. The front base 711 has the ball path member 713 housed therein, and the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 face upward from the ball receiving port 711a. Further, the front base 711 rotatably supports the security cover 714 around the axis extending in the left-right direction on the front end side of the elimination port 711b.

The rear base 712 is formed in the shape of a long box on the left and right that is open to the rear. The rear base 712 closes the rear end side of the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 by the front wall. The rear base 712 receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610, guides it to the right in the front view, and then guides it downward to discharge the ball removal passage 705. Have. The ball pulling passage 705 is provided in the box-shaped rear base 712, and the whole is opened rearward. The ball pulling passage 705 is closed at the rear end side by the passage wall member 715. The portion of the rear base 712 above the speaker box 623 in the ball-extracting passage 705 (the portion on the left end side in the front view) penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the front end side is closed by the front base 711. , The rear side is closed by the passage wall member 715.

Further, the rear base 712 receives the game ball B circulated through the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward, and the second discharge guiding portion 712a of the ball path member 713. It has a second discharge guiding unit 712b that receives the game ball B that has flowed through the ball path 702, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward. The inlet side of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b protrudes forward from the front wall of the rear base 712, and the inlet of the first discharge guide section 712a opens forward. , The entrance of the second discharge induction unit 712b opens upward. The outlets of the first discharge guidance unit 712a and the second discharge guidance unit 712b are provided at the same positions in the front-rear direction. The rear side of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b is open to the rear with respect to the front wall, and the rear end side is closed by the passage wall member 715.

In the rear base 712, the exits of the ball ejection passage 705, the first discharge guide portion 712a, and the second discharge guide portion 712b are located to the left of the front base 711, which is the elimination port 711b, and are left. They are arranged in order from to the right. The outlet of the ball pulling passage 705 has a large front end side and a small rear end side with respect to the outlets of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b (FIG. 128 (b). ). That is, the outlet of the ball pulling passage 705 is formed to be larger (wider) in the front-rear direction than the outlets of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b.

The ball path member 713 is inserted and housed in the box-shaped front base 711 from the rear. The ball path member 713 has a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702. The ball path member 713 includes a left wall portion 713a extending vertically downward from the upper end at the right end and an upper left shelf portion 713b inclined so as to decrease from the lower end of the left wall portion 713a toward the right. , The step wall portion 713c extending vertically downward from the right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b, and the upper right shelf portion 713d inclined so as to decrease from the lower end of the step wall portion 713c toward the right. The rectifying wall portion 713e extending diagonally to the lower left from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d and the position separated to the right from the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e become higher toward the right and the upper right shelf. The lower shelf portion 713f extending to the right of the portion 713d, and the right wall portion 713g extending vertically upward from the right end of the lower shelf portion 713f to substantially the same height as the upper end of the left wall portion 713a, and the right. The upper wall portion 713h extending to the left from the upper end of the wall portion 713g to the same position as the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the U-shaped portion connected to the left end of the upper wall portion 713h and opened upward. It has a groove wall portion 713i. The left end of the groove wall portion 713i is located at a portion to the right of the center of the upper right shelf portion 713d in the left-right direction.

Further, the ball path member 713 extends vertically upward from the lower end of the lower wall portion 713e extending to the left from the lower end of the lower wall portion 713j and from the left end of the lower wall portion upper 713j to the lower surface of the upper left shelf portion 713b. The middle wall portion 713k that is exposed, the eaves portion 713l that extends downward from the middle of the left side surface of the middle wall portion 713k toward the left, and the lower shelf portion 713f are short and vertically downward from the vicinity of the left end. It has a hanging wall portion 713 m extending from the lower end of the hanging wall portion 713 m and a lower wall portion lower 713n extending to the left in parallel with the lower wall portion upper 713j. The lower portion of the lower wall portion 713n between the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e and the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is cut out vertically with a size that allows the game ball B to pass through.

Further, the ball path member 713 extends downward from the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, respectively, and a plurality of obstructions provided at intervals in the left-right direction. It has a rib 713o. Further, the ball path member 713 includes a left wall portion 713a, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a step wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a rectifying wall portion 713e, a lower shelf portion 713f, a right wall portion 713g, and a groove wall portion 713i. It has a flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 713p that partitions the space surrounded by the lower wall portion upper 713j, the middle wall portion 713k, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower wall portion lower 713n.

Further, the ball path member 713 is notched in the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f so as to be recessed from the front end and the rear end toward the partition wall portion 713p. It has a notch 713q of. Each notch portion 713q is provided so that a gap smaller in the front-rear direction than the radius of the game ball B is formed between the front base 711 and the rear base 712 when assembled in the substrate unit 700. Dust, dust, etc. in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be discharged downward through the gap.

Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f on the front surface of the partition wall portion 713p, and has a plurality of guide ridges 713r extending to the left and right. ing.

Further, the ball path member 713 is surrounded by the lower wall portion upper 713j, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower wall portion lower 713n on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p, and the sensor accommodating the first ball sensor 703 is accommodated. It is surrounded by the lower wall portion 713j, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower wall portion lower 713n on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p and the front portion 713s, and is behind the sensor accommodating portion in which the second ball sensor 704 is accommodated. It has 713t and.

At 713s in front of the sensor housing and 713t after the sensor housing, the detection holes of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are located below the parts between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f. That is, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are housed with the detection hole on the right side. Although not shown, the wiring cables extending from the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 extend to the left from the inner wall portion 713k from the sensor housing portion front 713s and the sensor housing portion rear 713t. ..

Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion on the lower surface of the lower wall portion lower 713n in front of the partition wall portion 713p, and the first ball guiding portion 713u projecting downward and opening rearward. Have. When the first ball guide portion 713u is assembled to the substrate unit 700, the right half on the rear end side is closed by the front surface of the rear base 712, and the left half is on the inlet side of the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712. Facing. The first ball guiding portion 713u guides the game ball B, which has flowed downward from between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, to the right and then to the rear in front of the partition wall portion 713p. It can be delivered to the first discharge induction unit 712a of the rear base 712.

On the other hand, on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713, a portion opened below the lower wall portion 713n (a portion of the detection hole of the second ball sensor 704 housed in the sensor housing portion 713t). ) Is located below the inlet that opens upward of the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712. As a result, the game ball B that has flowed downward from between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f behind the partition wall portion 713p can be delivered to the second discharge guiding portion 712b of the rear base 712.

The right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b is located slightly to the right of the left end of the elimination port 711b in the front base 711. The right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d is located to the right of the right end of the elimination port 711b in the front base 711. The left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is located to the left of the left end of the elimination port 711b in the front base 711. Therefore, the area directly above the elimination port 711b of the front base 711 is covered by the rectifying wall portion 713e. The upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f are inclined in a straight line. On the other hand, the rectifying wall portion 713e is inclined in a curved shape, and is curved so that the left end side faces downward vertically. The distance (height) between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is inclined so as to become narrower toward the left so that the left end side has a height at which one game ball B can pass. .. The rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f can rectify a plurality of game balls B in a row and guide them downward.

As described above, the space between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is formed so that the vertical dimension becomes narrower toward the left (downstream direction in which the game ball B is distributed). Depending on the distribution amount of the balls B and the like, a plurality of game balls B may get caught between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, causing ball clogging (see FIG. 134). Since the rectifying wall portion 713e is located above the eliminating port 711b, when a ball clogging occurs between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the security cover 714 is opened to open the eliminating port 711b. In the open state, a rod-shaped tool is inserted between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the opening 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f from below, and the game ball B bitten from the tool. It is possible to eliminate the ball clogging by poking.

By the way, since the lower shelf portion 713f is provided with a notch portion 713q for clearing the ball clogging and dropping dust and dirt downward, a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire or a catheter is provided. Is penetrated from below through the notch 713q into the upper part of the lower shelf portion 713f (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702), and the tip of the illegal tool is further inserted into the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 701 and second). There is a risk of cheating on the game board 5 provided above by extending upward from the ball path 702). Such insertion of an illegal tool is not limited to the lower shelf portion 713f, but there is a similar concern not only in the upper left shelf portion 713b and the upper right shelf portion 713d provided with the notch portion 713q.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, a plurality of flat plate-shaped inhibitory ribs 713o separated in the left-right direction and extending downward. Even if the tip of the linear fraudulent tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it comes into contact with the obstructing rib 713o and the tip of the tip It can prevent movement and prevent further insertion of fraudulent tools (see Figure 135). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game board 5 from executing an illegal act through the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 or second ball path 702), and the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is borne. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent power against fraudulent activities.

In the parts of the upper right shelf portion 713d and the upper left shelf portion 713b on the right side of the middle wall portion 713k, the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower wall on which the notch portion 713q is not provided are located below and to the left and right of them. Since it is closed by the upper right shelf part 713j and the middle wall part 713k, an unauthorized tool is not inserted from below through the cutout part 713q of the corresponding part of the upper right shelf part 713d and the upper left shelf part 713b, and the part concerned. No cheating is done through the notch 713q.

As described above, the ball path member 713 is provided with a plurality of cutout portions 713q in the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f, so that dust and dirt are downward through the cutout portion 713q. Can be discharged to (see FIG. 136). Dust and the like discharged downward through the notch 713q located above the sensor housing portion 713s and the sensor housing portion rear 713t in the upper left shelf portion 713b are the rectifying wall portion 713e, the lower wall portion upper 713j, and the middle. It is housed in a space surrounded by a wall portion 713k. As a result, dust and the like do not adhere to the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the 713s in front of the sensor housing and the 713t after the sensor housing.

Further, a wiring cable is connected to the left end side of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the 713s in front of the sensor housing and the 713t after the sensor housing by a connector, and the wiring cable and the connector are connected. It protrudes to the left from 713s in front of the sensor housing and 713t after the sensor housing. That is, the wiring cables and connectors of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 project to the left of the inner wall portion 713k. In this middle wall portion 713k, since the eaves portion 713l extends to the left from the upper portion of the sensor accommodating portion front 713s and the sensor accommodating portion 713t on the left side surface, the eaves portion 713l is formed on the upper upper left shelf portion 713b. Dust and dust that have fallen downward through the notch 713q are guided to the left by the inclination of the eaves 713l, and the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 projecting to the left from the inner wall portion 713k. It is possible to prevent the wiring cable and the connector from falling, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems caused by dust and the like.

The base unit 710 includes a left wall portion 713a, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a step wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a rectifying wall portion 713e, and a lower shelf portion 713f on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713. The first ball path 701 is formed by the right wall portion 713g, the groove wall portion 713i, the first ball guiding portion 713u, and the first discharge guiding portion 712a of the rear base 712, and the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713. Left wall part 713a, upper left shelf part 713b, step wall part 713c, upper right shelf part 713d, rectifying wall part 713e, lower shelf part 713f, right wall part 713g, groove wall part 713i, and rear base 712. The second ball path 702 is formed by the second discharge induction unit 712b of the above.

The security cover 714 is formed in a flat plate shape, and is attached to the vicinity of the front end of the elimination port 711b of the front base 711 in a state where the front end side can rotate around the axis in the left-right direction. Further, the security cover 714 has an elastic locking portion 714a that is locked to the rear base 712 on the rear end side. As shown in FIG. 130, the security cover 714 closes the release port 711b in a state where the elastic locking portion 714a is locked to the rear base 712 and is horizontal, and the elastic locking portion 714a is locked. The elimination port 711b is open in a state in which the rear end side is rotated so as to be positioned downward to make it vertical. That is, the security cover 714 can open and close the elimination port 711b.

Since the security cover 714 can close the release port 711b of the front base 711 by closing the security cover 714, a linear fraudulent tool can be inserted from the release port 711b into the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 or first ball path 711 or first). It is possible to prevent the insertion into the two-ball path 702). Further, the security cover 714 is opened when a ball is clogged between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f of the ball path member 713, thereby opening the elimination port 711b of the front base 711. Therefore, a rod-shaped tool is inserted between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the clearing port 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f from below to eliminate the ball clogging of the game ball B. Can be done. This ball clogging clearing work is carried out in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2.

In the security cover 714, when the release port 711b is open (vertical), the lower end (the end on the elastic locking portion 714a side) is at risk of contact (here, after the curtain plate in the outer frame 2). It is located below the height of the connecting cylinder portion 43a) of the member 43 (the height indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 130). Therefore, in order to eliminate the clogging of the game ball B in the ball path member 713, after opening the main body frame 4 forward with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is kept open with the security cover 714 open. Even if an attempt is made to close the outer frame 2, the open security cover 714 comes into contact with a dangerous object (connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43), and the main body frame 4 cannot be closed. As a result, it is possible to avoid forgetting to close the security cover 714, and it is possible to securely close the security cover 714 and exert the security function of the security cover 714.

Further, in the present embodiment, if the security cover 714 is opened for some reason when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 may be opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as it is. , The open security cover 714 will come into contact with the contact risk from the front, but since the front end side of the security cover 714 is rotatably attached around the axis in the left-right direction, the contact risk from the front. Since the security cover 714 rotates in the closing direction when the security cover 714 comes into contact with the body, the main body frame 4 can be opened without the security cover 714 being caught by the contact risky object, and damage to the security cover 714 or the contact risk object can be avoided. ..

The security cover 714 of the present embodiment is open because the game ball B is rarely clogged between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f and is basically in a closed state. The locking by the elastic locking portion 714a is set to be hard so as to be difficult.

The passage wall member 715 is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712, and closes the rear end side of the ball pulling passage 705 that is open to the rear. Further, the passage wall member 715 closes the portions of the rear base 712 that are open to the rear on the outlet side of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b, and the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712a. (Ii) The game ball B that has been distributed through the discharge guidance unit 712b can be discharged downward. Further, the passage wall member 715 sandwiches the frame relay board 716 with the rear base 712 and covers the rear side of the frame relay board 716.

The frame relay board 716 is sandwiched between the rear base 712 and the passage wall member 715. The frame relay board 716 is for relaying the connection between the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the first ball sensor 703, and the second ball sensor 704 of the door frame 3 and the main control board 1310. ..

In the base unit 710 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129 (a), the upper left shelf portion 713b and a part of the upper right shelf portion 713d of the ball path member 713 are formed from the ball receiving port 711a of the front base 711. It faces upward and can receive all the game balls B released downward from the game board 5. The game ball B that has fallen to the upper left shelf 713b or the upper right shelf 713d through the ball receiving port 711a rolls to the right and flows down from the right end of the upper right shelf 713d to the lower shelf 713f. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the lower shelf portion 713f rolls the lower shelf portion 713f to the left. At this time, if a plurality of game balls B are stacked vertically on the lower shelf portion 713f, they are broken by the upper rectifying wall portion 713e so as to form a line toward the left.

The game ball B that has rolled the lower shelf portion 713f to the left falls downward from the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f, and if it is in front of the partition wall portion 713p, it is housed in the sensor housing portion 713s. After being detected by the one-ball sensor 703, it passes through the first ball guide unit 713u, and then is discharged downward through the first discharge guide unit 712a of the rear base 712. On the other hand, in the case of being behind the partition wall portion 713p, after being detected by the second ball sensor 704 housed in the sensor accommodating portion 713t, the sensor is discharged downward through the second discharge guiding portion 712b of the rear base 712. Will be done.

As described above, in the base unit 710 of the present embodiment, the game ball B circulates through the paths separated from each other before and after the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713, and is discharged downward. The front side is the first ball path 701, and the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p is the second ball path 702. Therefore, the game ball B that has fallen from the game board 5 to the front of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 circulates in the first ball path 701, is detected by the first ball sensor 703, and is discharged downward. be able to. On the other hand, the game ball B that has fallen from the game board 5 to the rear of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 circulates in the second ball path 702, is detected by the second ball sensor 704, and is discharged downward. be able to.

Further, the base unit 710 uses the game ball B released from the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 in order to pull out the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the ball pulling passage 705 of the rear base 712. It can be discharged downward through. The first discharge guide section 712a (first ball path 701), the second discharge guide section 712b (second ball path 702), and the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 705 of the base unit 710 are island equipment. It is delivered to the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) where the game ball B on the side is collected.

According to the base unit 710 in the substrate unit 700 of the present embodiment, since the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f are provided with a plurality of cutout portions 713q, dust is passed through the cutout portion 713q. Since dust and dirt can be dropped and removed from the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, it is possible to prevent dust and the like from obstructing the distribution of the game ball B and suppress the occurrence of ball clogging and the like. Can be made to.

Further, since the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are transparently formed, the door frame 3 is opened forward with respect to the main body frame 4, and the game board is opened from the main body frame 4. By removing 5, the presence or absence of ball clogging of the game ball B in the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702) from above the base unit 710 (board unit 700). Can be easily confirmed. Further, since the lower shelf portion 713f is provided with the notch portion 713q at the portion where the game balls B are aligned in a row by the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f in the ball path member 713, the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf When a ball is clogged with the portion 713f, the main body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2 and the security cover 714 is opened, so that a rod-shaped tool can be inserted from below through the elimination port 711b and the notch 713q. It can be inserted between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and the ball clogging can be eliminated from the tool.

Further, since the elimination port 711b opened downward is provided in the lower part of the lower shelf portion 713f below the rectifying wall portion 713e and the security cover 714 for closing the elimination opening 711b is provided, the elimination port 711b is passed through. In addition to being able to clear the ball clogging as described above, by closing the clearing port 711b with the security cover 714 under normal conditions, a linear fraudulent tool can be removed from the clearing port 711b through the first ball path 701. It is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being inserted into the second ball path 702, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against fraudulent activities.

Further, since the security cover 714 that opens and closes the elimination port 711b is opened and closed by rotating it around the axis in the left-right direction on the front end side, the main body frame 4 is opened in a state where the security cover 714 is forgotten to be closed. If the outer frame 2 is to be closed, the security cover 714 will come into contact with a dangerous object (connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43), and the main body frame 4 cannot be closed. It is possible to make people notice that they have forgotten to close it, and it is possible to securely close the security cover 714 and exert the security function of the security cover 714.

Further, since the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h are provided with a plurality of flat plate-shaped inhibitory ribs 713o separated in the left-right direction and extending downward, they are linear. Even if the tip of the illegal tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it can come into contact with the obstructing rib 713o to prevent the tip from moving. It is possible to prevent further insertion of illegal tools. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game board 5 from executing an illegal act through the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 or second ball path 702), and the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is borne. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent power against fraudulent activities.

Further, as described above, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 meander or crank by the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b of the rear base 712 and the ball path member 713. Since the complicated distribution route is configured, even if a linear fraudulent tool is inserted from the outlet side of the first discharge guide unit 712a or the second discharge guide unit 712b, the intrusion is blocked by the complicated route. It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game board 5 through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702.

Further, since all the game balls B emitted from the game board 5 can be detected (counted) by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, the game balls B discharged to the game board 5 can be detected (counted). It is not necessary to provide a configuration (for example, an out-ball detection unit) for detecting the above, the cost for the game board 5 can be reduced, and the game board 5 detects the ejected game ball B. It is possible to secure a space for the configuration, and by providing the effect device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be made more entertaining for the player.

Further, since the out ball is distributed in the first ball path 701 and the safe ball is distributed in the second ball path 702, the number of safe balls counted in the game board 5 and the safe ball by the second ball sensor 704 are distributed. By comparing with the count number of, it is possible to determine whether or not fraudulent activity is being performed on the game board 5, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

Further, when the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, the game is played. Since a person wants to pay out many game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is large, it is possible to immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a high possibility that many game balls B will be paid out. It is possible to make it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 to be played. In addition, when the payout rate is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, if a fraudulent act such that a large number of game balls B are paid out is performed, the displayed payout rate becomes larger than usual. , Other players and the staff of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the fraudulent activity, so that the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against the fraudulent activity can be hesitated. Can be.

In addition, when the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed at a position invisible from the player side, the staff of the game hall can see the same reason as above. Can detect fraudulent activity. Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, obstacle nail N, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay). Since there is a possibility of a defect in the board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc.), it is possible to deal with the defect at an early stage and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, since the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are separated from the ball pulling passage 705 for discharging the game ball B in the ball tank 552, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 The game ball B without the ball is not counted. Therefore, only the game ball B released from the game board 5 can be accurately counted by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704.

In the above embodiment, the out ball circulates in the first ball path 701 and the safe ball circulates in the second ball path 702, respectively, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first ball path 701 is not limited to this. The safe ball may circulate on the second ball path 702, respectively, or the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 regardless of the safe ball and the out ball may be the first ball path 701 and the second ball. Any one of the ball paths 702 may be distributed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the solution opening 711b is opened and closed by rotating the security cover 714, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the elimination port 711b is opened and closed by sliding the security cover 714 back and forth or left and right. It may be a thing.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5 is separated into the front and rear of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 by partitioning by one partition wall portion 713p. The one that discharges through one of the two ball paths is shown, but it is not limited to this, and it is provided with three or more ball paths in the front and back by a plurality of partition walls, and any of the ball paths can be used. The game ball B released from the game board 5 may be discharged downward.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 147. FIG. 137 is a front view of a game board in which the center accessory and the like are made opaque in the pachinko machine. 138 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 as viewed from the front right, FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 140 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the back. .. FIG. 141 is a schematic explanatory view of wiring wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. FIG. 142 is a front view of the game board in a state where the center accessory and the like are transparent. FIG. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 145 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut in parallel with the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed and the obstacle nails. 146 is an enlarged front view showing the left side of FIG. 145 in an enlarged manner, and FIG. 147 is an enlarged front view showing an enlarged right side of FIG. 145.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a gate 2002, a variable winning opening 2003, which grants a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by accepting or passing the game ball B, A first starting port 2004, a second starting port 2005, a first large winning opening 2006, and a second large winning opening 2007 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a gate 2002, a variable winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, a first large winning opening 2006, and a first large winning opening 2006 in the game area 5a. The purpose is to entertain the driving operation of the handle 195 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a so that the two major winning openings 2007 and the like can be accepted or passed.

The game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a. It includes a plate-shaped game panel 1100 and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 (see FIG. 160) that detect magnetism that acts illegally in the game area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIGS. 145 to 147) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

Further, the game board 5 is a game played by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and the board holder 1200. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 160 and the like) for controlling the contents.

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component 1000. The peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the 1100, the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the effect display device 1600 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. A panel relay board (not shown) that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a table unit 2000 that is mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a rear surface of the game panel 1100. It is further equipped with a back unit 3000 that can be used.

An effect display device 1600 is provided on the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is provided on the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

The table unit 2000 is provided with a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 which are open at all times and can accept the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and are provided at predetermined positions in the game area 5a. Gate 2002, which detects the passage of game ball B, and variable winning opening 2003, which enables acceptance of game ball B according to the lottery result of a normal symbol drawn when game ball B passes through gate 2002. The first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005, which are provided at predetermined positions in the game area 5a and are always open so that the game ball B can be received, and the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005. The first big prize opening 2006 and the first big prize that can accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to Depending on the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is provided at a position different from the mouth 2006 and is drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005. It is provided with a second major winning opening 2007 capable of accepting the game ball B, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 (see FIG. 160) that detect illegally acting magnetism in the game area 5a.

Further, the table unit 2000 is further provided with a first sub-out port 2021 and a second sub-out port 2022, each of which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and is always open so that the game ball B can be received. ..

Further, the front unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2004, and a front surface of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has four general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. The 2300, the lower right unit 2400 provided on the right side of the front view of the start port unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a and having the second start port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022. It is provided above the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the lower right unit 2400, slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a, and is provided at the variable winning opening 2003, the first large winning opening 2006, and the second. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a large winning opening 2007 and a first sub-out opening 2021 and a gate 2002 provided near the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction on the left side of the center accessory 2500. The gate member 2600 and the like.

Further, the table unit 2000 is provided on the right side in the game area 5a, and includes a specific obstacle nail group 2700 composed of a plurality of obstacle nails N.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and is attached to the back wall 3010 having a box-shaped opening 3010a having a square opening 3010a in the rear wall and the rear wall of the back box 3010. It includes a back box rear unit 3030 that is detachably attached by a lock slider 3020, and a back board unit 3040 that is arranged behind the back box rear unit 3030 and is attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010. There is.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided in the lower part near the front end in the back box 3010, and the back ball guidance unit 3100 in which the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 is distributed and the vicinity of the front end in the back box 3010. The back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 provided in the back box 3010, the back upper front effect unit 3300 provided at the upper part in the back box 3010 at substantially the same position as the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, and the inside of the back box 3010. The back bottom front effect unit 3400 provided in the lower part behind the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, and the back top rear effect unit 3500 provided behind the back top front effect unit 3300 in the back box 3010 (FIG. (Refer to 155 and the like), and a back bottom rear effect unit 3600 provided behind the back bottom front effect unit 3400 in the back box 3010.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The front component 1000 is formed to be transparent as a whole. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the circumferential direction in the clockwise direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view in the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1010 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 to penetrate the lower full tank path unit 610. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b face forward.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparently, and the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, to which the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 145 and the like).

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes 1113 formed in round holes and short elongated holes penetrating the front and rear, and the upper edge and the lower edge are separated from each other in the left-right direction, so that the plate thickness is thin. It is provided with a plurality of engaging step portions 1114 and (see FIG. 148). The positioning hole 1113 is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engaging step portion 1114 is for being detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engaging claw (not shown) or an engaging piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. Is.

In the panel plate 1110, the large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 is offset upward from the center in the front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and the width orthogonal to the distribution direction (circumferential direction of the frame shape) of the game ball B in the front view is the left side and the left side excluding the upper side from the center. The right side and the lower side have a wide width in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be lined up.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion (not shown) that is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the holding step portion is substantially the same size as the game area 5a. It is provided with a through-hole 1121 that penetrates in the front-rear direction.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch and lowers. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and is recessed from the rear surface to the front. The upper portion of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 1008.

Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 has a plurality of protruding pins protruding forward from the holding step portion and each of which is inserted into a plurality of positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and outside the holding step portion. Three engaging claws that are arranged and elastically engage with the engaging step 1114 of the inclined portion on the upper side and the lower left of the panel plate 1110, and the panel protruding upward from the lower outside of the holding step part. It includes two engaging steps 1114 on the lower side of the plate 1110 and a pair of engaging pieces that engage with each other. The panel holder 1120 tilts the upper side and the lower left by moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 to the rear after engaging the engaging step portion of the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above the front. By elastically engaging the engaging step portion 1114 of the portion to be engaged with the engaging claw, the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being housed in the holding step portion. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Since the game panel 1100 is transparently formed together with the front component 1000 attached to the front side, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5, and the player can reduce the visibility. It is possible to give a feeling of openness to the player, and although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change, the game area 5a can be made to appear larger (wider) to the player.

Further, since the game panel 1100 is transparent together with the front component 1000, the light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (on the player side). This makes it appear as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Board holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is on the rear surface. The main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the game ball B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game ball B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received, and the bottom surface can be received. It can be discharged from the discharge unit 1201 formed in the above to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 or the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 123) below. The game balls B discharged to the out ball passage 663 are detected (counted) one by one by the out sensor 664.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 141, 143, 144 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 houses the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 160) that controls the game content and the payout of the game ball B, and the main control board 1310, and is attached to the board holder 1200. And have.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The main control board 1310 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded from polycarbonate resin, the state of the front surface side and the back surface side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not unauthorized modification has been performed, or an unauthorized IC is mounted). Whether or not it is done) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Further, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the main control board box 1320 is then closed. In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent force against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like. Further, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2601, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a first large winning opening sensor 2525, and a second large winning opening. It is connected to a sensor 2561, a variable winning opening solenoid 2522, a first winning opening solenoid 2524, a second winning opening solenoid 2563, a magnetic sensor 1050, and the like.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 has a setting key switch 1311a capable of switching the set value of the pachinko machine 1 and confirming the set value, and a setting switching button 1311b capable of selecting and switching the set value. It is provided with a setting change permission lamp 1311c indicating a state in which switching of the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 by a connector (connection between boards) (a harness between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310). May be electrically connected via). By this connector connection (connection between boards), the signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The vertical distance dimension of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311 is almost the same as the vertical distance dimension of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, and the vertical distance dimension thereof is the left and right of the main control board 1310. It is shorter than the distance dimension in the direction, and the center line passing through the middle points of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310 and the center line passing through the middle points of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311 are It matches.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311 at the center of the vertical distance dimension on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is the main. Along the left side of the control board 1310, a position at the center of the vertical distance dimension is arranged on the center line. A setting in which a setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder that is rotated by inserting a setting key below the center line of the setting change board 1311 is arranged and has a pressing operation unit above the center line of the setting change board 1311. A setting change permission lamp on which the changeover button 1311b is arranged and capable of emitting a single color (for example, red) on the center line of the setting change board 1311 and on the upper left side of the setting key switch 1311a (lower left side of the setting changeover button 1311b). 1311c is arranged. A setting display 1310 g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dots) is placed above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN, and the center line of the main control board 1310. The base monitor 1310h, which is lower than the center and is composed of six 7-segment LED displays with a decimal point (so-called dots) arranged in a row from the center to the right side, is arranged near the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310. A RAM clear switch 1310f having a pressing operation unit is arranged on the.

In the present embodiment, the position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the position where the longitudinal direction of the insertion port having a rectangular shape is along the vertical direction). In the initial position, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion slot and the setting key can be removed from the insertion slot. In the present embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 with the setting key inserted in the insertion port, the other equipment is arranged in a row opposite to the island equipment of the game hall. The distance dimension of the setting key switch 1311a in the depth direction is adopted so that the member of the pachinko machine (or the member of the island equipment of the game hall) and the setting key do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

The setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and the first ON operation, and the setting key ON signal is set. It is input from the change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position and operating the second ON operation, and the determination key ON signal can be set. Is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key cylinder is set so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it off, and the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). Can be turned off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In the present embodiment, two functions in which the function of setting key ON and the function of setting key ON are completely different can be realized only by the setting key switch 1311a depending on the direction in which the setting key silin is rotated. The operation of turning on the setting key and the operation of turning on the enter key can be performed collectively by using only the setting key switch 1311a.

The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f are formed through openings formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320. A "gap" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the corresponding openings, respectively. The structure is such that a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body for each of these openings so that the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310 cannot be modified by invading a wire or the like. .. Although the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body and cannot be touched at all, the cover body is transparently molded as described above. Through the cover body, the set value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and a setting key switch As a route between the wiring pattern in which the OFF signal of 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted, the setting change board 1311 is kept away from each other (separated from each other). At the same time, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately, and various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are also formed on the main control board 1310. (That is, the wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the OFF of the setting key switch 1311a. The wiring pattern in which the signal is transmitted) and the wiring pattern in which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are also formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other), and the RAM clear switch 1310f The wiring pattern with which the signal from is transmitted is also formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other).

The setting key switch 1311a, the setting switching button 1311b, and the setting display 1310g will be briefly described. Here, first, a case of changing the setting value of the setting value will be briefly described, and a case of confirming and displaying the current setting value will be briefly described. In addition to changing the set value, the setting key is an important key that allows you to check the current set value, etc., so only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, can own it. Allowed and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the setting of the set value, the main body frame is relative to the outer frame 2 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). 4 is released, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the first ON operation is performed. It is necessary that the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is satisfied. That is, the person who actually changes the setting value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the state where the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then the outer frame 2 is used. The work of opening the main body frame 4 is performed, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to set by the first ON operation. The key switch 1311a is turned on and the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. As the above-mentioned "predetermined setting value change permission condition", it may be a condition that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is further operated and an operation signal is input. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a The setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the first ON operation is performed to turn on the setting key switch 1311a. The setting change of the set value may be executed when the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated is satisfied.

A person who changes the setting of the set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then sets the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. The work of opening is performed, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to set by the first ON operation. The key switch 1311a is set to ON. Subsequently, the power switch 630a (see FIG. 7) is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a has the current set value (the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned on) stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM. The set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from the off state to the on state.

When a person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting changing board 1311 is sent from the setting changing board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Is entered in. Each time a person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a sets the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. When the value reaches the set value 6 which is the maximum value, the value is increased by 1 and the value is increased by 1 again to return to the set value 1 which is the initial value, and the set value is displayed on the setting display 1310 g.

When determining the set value, the person who changes the setting of the set value rotates the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the setting key with the setting key switch 1311a turned on). Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return from the rotation position of the cylinder to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and then turn it off. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in the specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

The setting key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the initial position (that is, the setting key) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The ON signal of the enter key may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 when the switch 1311a is returned to the setting key cylinder rotation position). After pressing the pressing operation part of the setting switching button 1311b to display the set value on the setting display 1310g, the setting value is determined by simply turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key is pulled out from the setting key cylinder as it is. It becomes possible to improve workability.

The person who changes the setting of the set value should return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the enter key is turned on to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches from the state in which the set value is displayed to the state in which the set value is not displayed on the setting display 1310 g, and switches from the state in which the setting change permission lamp 1311c is turned on to the state in which the set value is turned off.

A person who changes the setting of the set value pulls out the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and changes the setting of the set value. To complete.

When confirming and displaying the currently set value, the outer frame 2 is used when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn the first ON. It is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value display permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the operation. That is, the person who actually confirms and displays the currently set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (a state in which power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). , The work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first operation. By turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key is turned on.

The person who confirms and displays the currently set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (a state in which power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure), and then the outer frame 2 Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. As a result, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a has the current set value stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned on. Of these, the set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310 g. At this time, the state in which the setting change permission lamp 1311c is turned off is maintained, and even if a person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, this pressing operation is performed. Correspondingly, the set value is not changed at all, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310 g is not changed either.

When the person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value completes the confirmation of the currently set setting value, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the setting key is turned on. Turn the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the turning position of the setting key cylinder) to turn it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a switches from a state in which the set value is displayed to the state in which the set value is not displayed on the setting display 1310 g.

The person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value pulls out the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and currently sets the setting value. Complete the work of confirming and displaying the set values.

As described above, the predetermined set value change permission condition is the power when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). At the time of power recovery at the time of recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder moves clockwise. While it is necessary that the setting key is turned on by the first ON operation after being rotated 60 degrees, the predetermined set value display permission condition is the pachinko machine as described above. The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a is set after the power is restored when the power of 1 is turned on or after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs when a power failure occurs momentarily). It is necessary that the setting key is turned on by inserting the setting key into the insertion port of the key cylinder and rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. As described above, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the preset setting value display permission condition are such that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted. There is a common requirement that the setting key is turned on by the setting key being inserted into the and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation is performed. The difference is that the set value change permission condition requires "at the time of power recovery", whereas the predetermined set value display permission condition requires "after power recovery".

Here, briefly explaining the set value, the "set value" is a probability for determining whether or not it is a big hit by lottery, a probability for determining whether or not it is a small hit by lottery, and usually from the time of probability change. It is possible to change the probability for determining the lottery when shifting to time, the distribution rate to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc., which is advantageous to the player (that is, to be acquired by the player). The probability (degree of advantage) that can increase the number of game balls B that can be played is preset. In the present embodiment, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are prepared in advance as the set values, and the set value 1 to the set value 6 The probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is of various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values (for example, a jackpot determination table in which the ratio of jackpot determination values indicating that a jackpot has been won is defined, and a jackpot symbol. The big hit symbol determination table that defines the ratio of the judgment value of the decision, the small hit judgment table that specifies the ratio of the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit was won, and the ratio of the judgment value of the determination of the small hit symbol are specified. It is used to select the small hit symbol determination table to be performed, the normal transition determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the transition decision from the probability change to the normal time, etc.), or to use various distribution rates associated with the set value. Various tables (for example, a distribution table in which the distribution time is specified, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) are selected. In various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values, various determination values are assigned at a predetermined ratio. The various tables used in the various lottery determinations are set so that at least a part of the values are different from each other, and the various tables used in the various distribution rates are set so that at least a part of the values are different from each other. Some have different values based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of one electrical drive source and the table that corresponds to the block that manages the drive of the other electrical drive source. Some are set to. Further, as the above-mentioned setting values, six setting values (integers) in the range from the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 are set, but the setting values may be smaller than this and may be in the larger range. It may be a thing. For example, it may be four setting values (integers) in the range of setting values 1 to 4, or eight setting values (integers) in the range of setting values 1 to 8.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the set value, but also checks the contents of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a at the time of power recovery to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an error, and if the main control side power off processing is not completed normally when the power is turned off, there is an error (or trust) in the contents stored in the RAM built in the unit. An error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. The base monitor 1310h is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 among the game balls B launched in the game area 5a. The number of balls of the game ball B is displayed. Of the game balls B launched into the game area 5a, the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 is detected by the out sensor 664 (see FIG. 160 and the like), and this detection signal is mainly transmitted via the panel relay board. It is input to the control MPU 1310a.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but this setting key switch 1311a was set from the initial position. The setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only within the range up to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the key is turned on may be used. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'is counterclockwise so as to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a'can be turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a'by 60 degrees in the direction and turning it off, and the signal of this decision key ON is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. (The mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be described as "variation example (1) of the enter key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the setting change board 1311 has a pressing operation unit. A decision key button may be provided. In this case, the push operation part of the decision key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the decision key button, and corresponds to the push operation part of the decision key button. The wire intrusion prevention part covers the opening so that the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the opening. It will be a molded structure. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON when the pressing operation is not performed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the setting change board 1311 may be near the setting key switch 1311a or near the setting switching button 1311b. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed at a position corresponding to the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b so that the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Further, so that the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b are not confused, a button with a cover that covers one of the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b (to press the push operation unit). It is necessary to open the cover), or the color of the pressing operation unit may be different, or the outer shape of the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b or the pressing operation. A switch having a different shape of the portion may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be adopted as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a push operation unit as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. The switch can be mentioned. Further, when the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b are provided on the setting change board 1311, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the setting switching button 1311b are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The setting change board 1311 is formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other), and the connection to the connector SMCN terminal of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also separated. In the main control board 1310 as well, the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the enter key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted should not be brought close to each other ( It is formed (separated from each other). Further, when the decision key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a may be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. A possible setting key switch 1311a'may be used (the mode of the decision key button (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (2)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the finger is touching, and detection from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The signal may be branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and the presence / absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the palm or finger is touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, while the palm or finger is on the handle 195. When not touching, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON, and / or when the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the enter key is ON. On the other hand, when the launch of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON (even if the mode of the handle touch sensor (including the mode of the single-shot button operation sensor) is included. Good) may be described as "a modified example of the enter key (3)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the launch control unit of the payout control board 633 described later A firing reference pulse is branched from the firing timing control circuit provided in 633b at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and a determination key is input based on these firing reference pulses. The presence or absence of ON may be determined. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse in which 100 game balls B can be launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on a clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the emission reference pulse from the payout control board 633 is input, while it is determined that the determination key is not ON when the emission reference pulse is not input. (The mode of the firing reference pulse may be described as "variation example (4) of the determination key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the movement of the player sitting on the opposite side of the pachinko machine 1 was detected. When a range-finding sensor capable of performing the range-finding sensor is provided on the game board 5, and the detection signal from the range-finding sensor is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the relay board, the detection signal from the range-finding sensor is transmitted. It may be branched on the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and it may be determined whether or not the determination key is ON based on this detection signal. In the distance measuring sensor, the light emitted by the light emitting unit passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and is reflected on the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance dimension. The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving unit, so that the movement of the player can be detected. In this case, when the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is input via the relay board, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an operation based on the detection signal, and when it is determined that there is an operation, the enter key is turned on. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no operation, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON (the mode of the distance measuring sensor may be described as "a modification of the determination key (5)"). ..

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform a second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is set to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder with the key turned on to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by the rotation operation and the OFF operation, and the initial position (that is, the setting) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off to return it to the setting key cylinder rotation position). This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information for transmitting the setting key ON, the enter key ON, and OFF is sent to the outside as serial information. A serial output circuit capable of serial output may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, the security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a can be improved. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311, but may be provided on the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 633 instead of the setting change board 1311. .. When the serial information serially output from the serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a uses the received serial information to set the setting key ON, the enter key ON, and the main control MPU 1310a. It is possible to determine which of the OFFs is to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as "a modification of the decision key (6)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform a second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is set to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder with the key turned on to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by the rotation operation and the OFF operation, and the initial position (that is, the setting) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off to return it to the setting key cylinder rotation position). This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information for transmitting the setting key ON, the enter key ON, and OFF was sent to the outside as a pulse signal. A pulse output circuit capable of outputting may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, the security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a can be improved. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311, but may be provided on the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 633 instead. .. For the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit, for example, the pulse width is set to 1 ms when the information conveys the setting key ON, and the pulse width is set to 3 ms when the information conveys the enter key ON. If the information conveys OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a uses the input pulse signal to set the setting key ON and the enter key ON. It is possible to determine which of the above and OFF is the information to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having the pulse output circuit may be described as "a modification of the decision key (7)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. The setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is set to return to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder with the key turned on 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by the rotation operation and the OFF operation, and the initial position (that is, the setting) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off to return it to the setting key cylinder rotation position). This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the voltage level of the setting key ON signal, the voltage level of the enter key ON signal, and OFF The voltage level of the signal is set on the main control board 1310 by using an intermediate potential (for example, a potential of 2V to 3V from zero V to 5V) between the boards extending from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. By providing a comparator circuit and inputting the comparison result by the comparator circuit to the main control MPU 1310a, the main control MPU 1310a turns on / off the setting key ON signal, turns on / off the enter key ON signal, and turns off the signal. May be determined to be ON / OFF. Thereby, the security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a can be improved (the mode of the setting key switch using the intermediate potential may be described as "variation example (8) of the determination key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation unit. A decision key button may be provided. In this case, the push operation part of the decision key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the decision key button, and corresponds to the push operation part of the decision key button. A structure in which a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body with respect to the opening so that the payout control board 633 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the opening. Become. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON when the pressing operation is not performed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be near the error release switch having the pressing operation unit described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed is affixed at the position corresponding to the enter key button and the error release switch so that the enter key button and the error release switch are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Also, to avoid confusion between the enter key button and the error release switch, a button with a cover that covers the pressing operation unit of either the enter key button or the error release switch (a cover for pressing the pressing operation unit). The shape of the outer shape of the enter key button and the error release switch or the shape of the pressing operation unit may be adopted. A different type of switch may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation unit may be adopted as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a push operation unit as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. The switch can be mentioned. Further, when the payout control board 633 is provided with the decision key button and the error release switch, the payout is performed as a route between the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the error release switch in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The control board 633 is formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed so as to be separated from each other. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the enter key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the error release switch is transmitted should not be close to each other (separated from each other). ) Is formed. Further, when the decision key button is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a may be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. A possible setting key switch 1311a'may be used (the mode of the decision key button (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (9)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation unit. The signal from the error release switch is branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and it is determined whether or not the decision key is ON based on this signal. May be good. As described above, the error release switch is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and the system of the pachinko machine 1 is started up after the power is restored (turned on when the power of various control boards is turned on). When the time processing is completed and the interrupt processing is being performed) and no error has occurred in the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is operated based on the signal from the error release switch, while the main control MPU 1310a is based on the signal from the error release switch. When the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is not operated, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the decision key ON (the mode of the error release switch may be described as "a modification of the decision key (10)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation unit. The logic of the signal from the error release switch is monitored by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later to create a command, and the payout control unit power-on process described later is performed. The command created in the command transmission process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receiving this command may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. As described above, the error release switch is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and the system of the pachinko machine 1 is started up after the power is restored (turned on when the power of various control boards is turned on). When the time processing is completed and the interrupt processing is being performed) and no error has occurred in the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, in the main control MPU 1310a, the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is operated based on the signal from the error release switch in the frame command receiving process in the main control timer interrupt process described later, and conveys that fact. When the command is received, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, while the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is not operated based on the signal from the error release switch and receives a command to that effect. When this is done, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. Thereby, the security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the decision key ON (the mode 2 of the error release switch may be described as "a modification of the decision key (11)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting key switch) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. Set to turn 1311a OFF. Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the rotation position of the key cylinder) to turn it off, and then rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise to rotate it 60 degrees.) Second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and is branched and paid out on the payout control board 633. The presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on an operation signal input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a. As will be described later, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), When the setting is changed so that the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Be sure to clear the area excluding the specific area out of all the areas of.). Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, so that the RAM clear switch 1310f Can be diverted as the determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a turns on the determination key when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633. On the other hand, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, it is determined that the determination key is not ON. Can be done. As a result, security can be improved with respect to whether or not the decision key is ON.

The pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f is performed. The wire intrusion prevention part covers the opening so that the payout control board 633 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the portion and the opening corresponding to the portion. It becomes a structure that is molded into.

The position where the RAM clear switch 1310f is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be near the error release switch having the pressing operation unit described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, there is a sticker on which the name of each button is printed at the position corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are not confused. It is affixed (the name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Further, in order not to confuse the RAM clear switch 1310f with the error release switch, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation portion of either the RAM clear switch 1310f or the error canceling switch (to press the pressing operation portion). It is necessary to open the cover.), The color of the pressing operation unit may be different, or the outer shape of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch or the pressing operation may be adopted. A switch having a different shape of the portion may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be adopted as the RAM clear switch 1310f. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as the RAM clear switch 1310f include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. Various switches can be mentioned. Further, when the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are provided on the payout control board 633, the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern to the error release switch are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The payout control board 633 is formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other), and the connection to the connector terminal of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately. Therefore, also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern in which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the error release switch is transmitted should not be brought close to each other (mutually). Formed (separately). When the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. (The mode of the RAM clear switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (12)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting key switch) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. Turn the 1311a off by 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the setting key cylinder rotation position), and then rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it back to the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on for the decision key, and the signal for turning on the decision key is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, and the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 as a port input for the power-on processing of the payout control unit, which will be described later. The command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on processing described later is transmitted to the main control board 1310 by monitoring in the process, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receiving this command receives this command. It may be determined whether or not the enter key is ON. As will be described later, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), When the setting is changed so that the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Be sure to clear the area excluding the specific area out of all the areas of.). Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the RAM clear switch 1310f. Can be diverted as a decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a is a RAM clear switch 1310f based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of is being operated and receives a command to that effect, it can be determined that the decision key is ON, while the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 can be used. When the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated based on the operation signal of the above and receives a command to convey that fact, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. Thereby, the security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the decision key ON (the aspect 2 of the RAM clear switch (the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included)) is described as "a modification of the decision key (13). May be described).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the full tank detection sensor 154 and the ball cut detection sensor The detection signal from 574 or the payout detection sensor 591 is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and is branched at the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the decision key is ON based on the input and these detection signals, or the logic of the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cut detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591. The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 monitors and creates a command in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on processing described later, and creates a command in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that transmits to the main control board 1310 and receives this command may determine whether or not the decision key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (of the payout unit). A mode (a mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (16)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the main control MPU 1310a is operated from the main body frame release switch. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, it can be determined that the decision key is ON, while the main body frame 4 remains open with respect to the outer frame 2. When is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (main body frame open). The mode of the switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the enter key (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to turn on the decision key, and after turning on the decision key, the outer frame 2 is closed. It is necessary to open the main body frame 4 again, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 again with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, the main control MPU 1310a was released from the door frame open switch. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, it can be determined that the decision key is ON, while the door frame 3 remains closed with respect to the main body frame 4. When is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (door frame open). The mode of the switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the enter key (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the decision key, and after turning on the decision key, with respect to the main body frame 4. It is necessary to close the door frame 3 again, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is set to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on. Rotate the key switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and then rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the second ON operation. The decision key can be turned ON, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, this setting key switch 1311a is used as the main control board. It may be prepared for 1310 (the mode of the setting key switch may be described as "a modification of the decision key (18)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is set to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on. Rotate the key switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and then rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the second ON operation. The decision key can be turned ON, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, this setting key switch 1311a is used as the main control board. In preparation for 1310, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder to the initial position and turning it off. By inputting the signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the OFF signal is input, while the OFF signal is input. If not, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (setting key switch 1311a'). Aspect 2 (aspect of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (19)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control board 1310 has a pressing operation unit. A decision key button may be provided. In this case, the push operation part of the decision key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the decision key button, and corresponds to the push operation part of the decision key button. A structure in which a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body with respect to the opening so that the main control board 1310 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the opening. Become. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON when the pressing operation is not performed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the main control board 1310 may be near the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed at the position corresponding to the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Further, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation portion of either the enter key button or the RAM clear switch 1310f (to press the pressing operation portion) so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused. It is necessary to open the cover), or a different color of the pressing operation unit may be adopted, or the outer shape of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f or the pressing operation. A switch having a different shape of the portion may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be adopted as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a push operation unit as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. The switch can be mentioned. Further, when the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are provided on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The main control board 1310 is formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other). Further, when the decision key button is provided on the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a may be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. A possible setting key switch 1311a'may be used (aspect 2 of the decision key button (aspect of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as a "modification example (20) of the decision key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the RAM clear switch to which the main control MPU 1310a is input. The presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on the operation signal from 1310f. As will be described later, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), When the setting is changed so that the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Be sure to clear the area excluding the specific area out of all the areas of.). Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, so that the RAM clear switch 1310f Can be diverted as the decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the other hand, based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed. As a result, security can be improved with respect to whether or not the decision key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (RAM clear switch). Aspect 3 (aspect of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (21)"). The period during which the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is a payout control board 633, as will be described later. Since it is input to the payout control MPU, when the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to also have the function of the error canceling switch described later, the payout control board 633 does not need the error canceling switch.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the gate 2002 provided on the game board 5 Gate sensor 2601, various sensors of various winning openings (for example, general winning opening sensor 3001, first starting opening sensor 3002, second starting opening sensor 2401, variable winning opening sensor 2526, first large winning opening sensor 2525, second large The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signals from the winning opening sensor 2561) and the out sensor 664 of the main body frame 4 are input may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (various sensors, etc.). (The aspect of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (22)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and sends the game ball B to the gate 2002 in order to turn on the decision key, or various winning openings. It is necessary to send the game ball B to the out port 1008 or to send the game ball B to the out port 1008.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The operation of the movable body (accessory) is controlled by controlling the drive of an electric drive source such as a solenoid, and the movable body (accessory) is operated based on the detection signal from the optical sensor (photo sensor, ranging sensor, etc.). When determining the original position, the operating position, or the like, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on the detection signal from the optical sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (optical combination). The mode of the object sensor (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (23)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the decision key, and the optical sensor is in the original position of the movable body (accessory). It is necessary to move the movable body (accessory) so as to detect the operating position and the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a was detected. The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'in which the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (of the magnetic sensor). A mode (a mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (24)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to bring the magnet closer from the front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front of the game board 5 in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 is shaken or hit. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5, and the various winning openings and gates (gate 2002) provided on the game board 5 are used. When the game board 5 is provided with a vibration sensor that detects fraudulent activity to enter the ball, the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor, and is based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor. You may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (vibration sensor). A mode (a mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (25)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 was irradiated with radio waves to play a game. The game board 5 and the payout device 580 are provided with radio sensors for detecting fraudulent acts in which the various sensors of the winning openings provided on the board 5 and the various sensors provided in the payout device 580 malfunction to illegally acquire the game ball B. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence / absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and may determine the presence / absence of the determination key ON based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the radio wave sensor). A mode (a mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (26)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 350 The detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 373 that detects the pressing operation of the above, and the detection signal from the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the contact of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 350 are input to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 may be branched and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (effect operation button). A mode of the unit (a mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (27)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320 composed of the cover body and the base body, but the setting change board 1311 is separated. It may be housed in the body setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are crimped by a one-way screw or the like in the crimped portion. This caulking part is a sealing mechanism and is provided with a plurality of parts. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like in the caulking portion using one sealing mechanism. Next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, The sealing mechanism needs to be destroyed. That is, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, although the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the enter key button are exposed through the openings formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320. , The setting change board 1311 can be modified by invading a wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the opening corresponding to the pressing operation portion of the enter key button. The structure is such that the wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body with respect to the opening so as not to be possible. When the structure of the setting change board box is different from the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above and is configured so that the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body, the structure of the base body is changed. A setting change board cover body open / close switch capable of detecting the opening of the cover body may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the open / close switch for the setting change board cover may be directly input to the main control board 1310, or (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. It may be configured to be. The case where the cover body is released from the base body based on the detection signal from the open / close switch for the setting change board cover body can be included in the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition (setting change board box). The embodiment may be described as "a modified example of the determination key (28)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are configured to be connected, and the setting key switch 1311a is set in order to prevent unauthorized modification. A wiring pattern in which a key ON signal is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which a decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which an OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and a setting switching button 1311b. As a routing with the wiring pattern in which the signal from is transmitted, the setting change board 1311 is formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other), and the terminal (main control) of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. The connection to the connector MSCN terminal of the board 1310 is also formed separately, and the main control board 1310 also has a wiring pattern in which various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are transmitted (that is, the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a). Signal is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern in which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted) and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b. Was formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other) with the wiring pattern to be transmitted, but the wiring pattern to which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted and the setting key switch Regarding the wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of 1311a is transmitted, one of the wiring patterns is via the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately. , The connector of the main control board 1310 may be connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 (connection between boards) separately from the MSCN, and the other connector provided on the setting change board 1311 and the main control board may be connected. The other connector provided in 1310 may be electrically connected via a harness (the mode of routing the wiring pattern may be described as "variation example (29) of the determination key").

Further, the mode in which the determination keys are appropriately selected and combined from the above-described modification keys (1) to (29) may be adopted. May be described).

Further, in the above-mentioned set values, in addition to the probability for determining whether or not it is a big hit by lottery and the probability for determining whether or not it is a small hit by lottery, the lottery is determined when shifting from the probability change time to the normal time. It is possible to change the probability of Probability (degree of advantage) is preset. In the present embodiment, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are prepared in advance as the set value, and the set value 1 is moved toward the set value 6. The probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is set in advance. By the way, although the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of set values from the set value 1 to the set value 6, the other pachinko machines have a probability (degree of advantage) of being advantageous to the player. Some have a single preset value. That is, there are game specifications such as the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment in which the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player exists as a plurality of set values in advance and the setting needs to be changed, and the player is advantageous. There is a game specification in which only a single setting value has a probability (advantage) in advance and no setting change is required. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed according to such game specifications and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are used. Will depend on the game specifications, and therefore will have a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 having similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Therefore, it is required that the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be used in common without depending on the game specifications, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in a game specification in which only a single set value exists in advance and the setting value does not need to be changed at all, the probability that the set value is advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) is the probability that the set value is advantageous to the player (degree of advantage). Since there is no need to use the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are assigned as the following contents by design change by software. Can be done.

For example, after the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of the RAM (an area excluding a specific area out of the total area of the RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, a plurality of actual machine confirmation operation patterns can be set (after the RAM is cleared). It can be used as a set value (which can give variation to the starting method of the pachinko machine 1). In this case, with respect to the operation of the movable body (accessory) controlled by the main control MPU1310a and the lighting of the light emitting body such as a lamp or LED, the setting value 1 is set to "all operations (movable body (role)). Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 that specifies "operation of object), lighting of light emitter)" is assigned, and actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that specifies "operation of movable body (accessory)" is assigned and set as setting value 2. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "lighting of the light emitting body" is assigned as the value 3, and the "detailed operation of the movable body (accessory) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operating area, etc.) is assigned as the setting value 4. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 that specifies "check for interference with the structure and other movable bodies (roles), operation order with other movable bodies (roles), etc.)" is assigned, and the set value 5 is " An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 for designating "lighting of the light emitter in units of one light emitter (lighting of the light emitter in a predetermined output port unit (that is, for each output port) of the main control MPU 1310a)" is assigned, and "lighting of the light emitter" is assigned as the setting value 6. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 that specifies "no operation" is assigned (the mode of the change setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM may be described as "variation example (1) by common hardware configuration"). The main control MPU 1310a operates a movable body (accessory) and lights a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED by repeatedly performing an actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM and a timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is a movable body that is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 according to the content (actual machine confirmation operation pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. (Characteristics) can be operated and the light emitting body can be turned on. Depending on the mode of changing the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM, the method of starting the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of times from the end of the fluctuation of the symbol to the demonstration (demo production performed in the player waiting state). In this case, the time setting pattern 1 that specifies "10 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 1, the time setting pattern 2 that specifies "15 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 2, and "20 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 3. The time setting pattern 3 that specifies "" is assigned, the time setting pattern 4 that specifies "25 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 4, and the time setting pattern 5 that specifies "30 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 5. A time setting pattern 6 that specifies "35 seconds" as the setting value 6 is assigned (a modification of the time from the end of the symbol change to the player waiting state is set to "Modification example by common hardware configuration (2). ) ”). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing the time from the end of the symbol change to the player waiting state, the time from the end of the symbol change to the demonstration can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of contents of a demonstration (demo effect performed in a player waiting state) performed after the end of the change of the symbol. In this case, the demo effect setting pattern 1 that specifies "comical effect" is assigned as the setting value 1, and the demo effect setting pattern 1 that specifies "comical effect, motion effect of the movable body (character)" is assigned as the setting value 2. 2 is assigned, and a demo effect setting pattern 3 that specifies "serious effect" as a setting value 3 is assigned, and a demo effect setting pattern 3 that specifies "serial effect, motion effect of a movable body (character)" as a setting value 4 is assigned. 4 is assigned, and a demo production setting pattern 5 that specifies "historical drama-style production" as a setting value 5 is assigned, and a demo production setting that specifies "historical drama-style production, movable body (role)" as a setting value 6. Pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of setting the change of the content of the demo effect may be described as "variation example (3) by common hardware configuration"). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demo effect (demo effect setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing the content of the demo effect, it is possible to give variation to the content of the demo effect performed after the end of the change of the symbol.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of default volumes adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. By rotating the volume control switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, the volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "volume 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "volume 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, and the "volume 3" is assigned as the setting value 3. The volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "volume 5" is assigned, the volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and the volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "volume 5" is assigned as the setting value 5. A volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "volume 6" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the mode of setting the change of the default volume may be described as "variation example (4) by common hardware configuration"). The volume is set to increase from the set value 1 to the set value 6. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is set to the default volume with a volume (volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of "volume 1" assigned to the setting value 1 is moved in the direction in which the volume adjustment switch is decreased (moved in the direction opposite to the direction in which the volume is increased), and the movement is completed to the end on the minimum volume side. When the volume is adjusted to the minimum side volume, the sound may be muted, or the volume may be such that the sound can be recognized when the player stops in front of the pachinko machine. In addition, the default volume of "volume 6" assigned to the setting value 6 is moved in the direction of increasing the volume (moved in the direction opposite to the direction of decreasing the volume), and the movement is completed to the end on the maximum volume side. When the volume is adjusted to the maximum side volume, the volume may be set to the maximum volume or may be set to a predetermined ratio (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. Depending on the mode of changing the default volume, the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of volume of error notification sound in error notification such as various defects, gotos, and errors. Various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, those that are not dependent on the volume adjustment switch). Although it is easy for a staff member such as a clerk to notice, it may be jarring to a player who is playing a game with another pachinko machine. Therefore, a device capable of adjusting the volume of various error notification sounds is also required. In this case, the error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification volume 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, and the error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification volume 2" is assigned as the setting value 2. , The error notification volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification volume 3" is assigned as the setting value 3, the error notification volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and "error notification volume setting pattern 4" is assigned as the setting value 5. The error notification volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification volume 5" is assigned, and the error notification volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" is assigned as the setting value 6 (error notification volume volume). The mode of the change setting may be described as "variation example (5) by common hardware configuration"). It should be noted that the set value 1 (the volume that does not mute and the error notification sound can be recognized when the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound is stopped) to the setting value 6 (the maximum volume and the maximum volume). The volume of the error notification sound is set to increase toward (the volume at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if the distance from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound is several meters). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a controls to emit an error notification sound at the volume of the error notification sound (error notification volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing the volume of the error notification sound, the volume of the error notification sound in the error notification can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value at which a plurality of default brightness of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED can be set. The brightness can be increased or decreased from the default brightness for the light emitter to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a. In this case, the default brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the default brightness setting pattern 2 that specifies "brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, and "brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 3. The default brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies "brightness 3" is assigned, the default brightness setting pattern 4 that specifies "brightness 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and the default brightness setting pattern 4 that specifies "brightness 5" as the setting value 5 is assigned. 5 is assigned, and the default brightness setting pattern 6 that specifies "brightness 6" as the setting value 6 is assigned (the mode of setting the change of the default brightness may be described as "variation example (6) by common hardware configuration". be). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt process described later for changing the default brightness, and lights, blinks, gradation points, etc. of the light emitter. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is the target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to adjust the brightness of the light emitting body to light, blink, gradation point, etc. of the light emitting body. Depending on the mode of changing the content of the default brightness, the default brightness of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of brightness of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED in error notification such as various defects, gotos, and errors. An error notification brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 1 to the lamp controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, and "error notification brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 2. The specified error notification brightness setting pattern 2 is assigned, the error notification brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification brightness 3" is assigned as the setting value 3, and the error notification that specifies "error notification brightness 4" as the setting value 4 is assigned. The brightness setting pattern 4 is assigned, and the error notification brightness setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification brightness 5" as the setting value 5 is assigned, and the error notification that specifies "error notification brightness 6 (maximum brightness)" as the setting value 6 is assigned. The brightness setting pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of setting the change of the brightness of the light emitter in the error notification may be described as "variation example (7) by common hardware configuration"). It should be noted that the lamp changes from the set value 1 (the brightness of the lamp is low, although it does not turn off, and the brightness of the lamp that can recognize an error notification when stopped in front of the pachinko machine) to the set value 6 (maximum brightness). The brightness is set to be high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitting body by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt process described later for changing the brightness of the light emitting body in the error notification, and lights, blinks, gradation points, etc. of the light emitting body. conduct. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is the target that the peripheral control board 1510 controls based on the error notification brightness (error notification brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to adjust the brightness of the light emitting body so that the light emitting body can be turned on, blinked, a gradation point, or the like. Depending on the mode of changing the brightness of the light emitting body in the error notification, the brightness of the light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED in the error notification can be varied.

Further, for the various setting values assigned to the above-mentioned modification examples (1) to (7) by the common hardware configuration, the setting value display permission condition predetermined in the setting value confirmation display process described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a is satisfied. Occasionally, it is displayed on the setting display 1310g, but it may always be displayed on the setting display 1310g from the time when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on to the time when the power is turned off (setting value display). Aspect may be described as "variation example (8) by common hardware configuration").

Further, any one of the above-described modified examples (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration may be appropriately selected and adopted in the above-mentioned modified example (30) of the determination key.

Further, the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is applied to the outer frame 2 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it was necessary that the setting key was turned on. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a is subjected to a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-on processing described later. Clear except for, and then proceed with the game by setting interrupt permission and so on. Further, when the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied at the time of power recovery of the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing in the main control side power-on processing described later to perform the setting change processing of the main control built-in RAM. Clear all areas except for a specific area, and then proceed with the game by setting interrupt permission and so on. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, when the above-mentioned preset value change permission condition is satisfied when the pachinko machine 1 is restored to power, In either case, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then advances the game by setting interrupt permission and the like. It will be. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored at the time of power recovery after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs), the outer frame 2 is The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. By doing so, in addition to the setting key being turned on, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f may be pressed (in some cases, it may be described as "a modification of a predetermined setting value change permission condition"). be).

Further, the above-mentioned predetermined set value display permission condition is applied to the outer frame 2 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after the power is restored after the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it was necessary that the setting key was turned on. When the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets and displays the current set value set in the set value confirmation display process performed as one process of the main control side timer interrupt process described later. Display on the vessel 1310 g. Further, as described above, in the RAM clear switch 1310f, the pressing operation unit needs to be pressed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the period of the pressing operation is limited. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined set value display permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored at the time of power recovery after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs), the outer frame 2 is The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. By doing so, in addition to the setting key being turned on, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f does not have to be pressed (when described as "a modification of a predetermined set value display permission condition"). There is). In this case, when the modified example of the preset value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the set value confirmation display process as one process of the main control side timer interrupt process described later, but the main control side power supply described later. In the on-time processing, the game is advanced by performing the initial setting and the start setting of the built-in WDT before the initial setting and the start setting, and then performing the interrupt permission setting and the like. Note that the main control MPU 1310a does not yet set the interrupt enable when the preset value display permission condition is satisfied and the set value confirmation display process is performed. Therefore, the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. Instead, the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key are inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is initially set. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees clockwise from the position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) and performing the first ON operation. The signal of the setting key ON from the setting key switch 1311a is read and is not stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the input information described later. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a opens the main body frame for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 when a modification of the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied and the set value confirmation display process is performed. The detection signal from the switch and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a are read.

By adopting both the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value change permission condition and the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a to set the power at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after (the momentary power failure that occurs). The pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed on the premise that the setting key is turned on by the key cylinder being rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation. Occasionally, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on processing described later to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then performs an interrupt enable setting or the like. While the game progresses, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a set value confirmation display process in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then performs a set value confirmation display process. The game progresses by setting interrupt permission and so on. By adopting this aspect, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game, the set value confirmation display process is never performed. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game by setting the interrupt permission or the like, the current set value that has been set is never displayed on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a is collected by the out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4 via the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 in the ball number counting process of the main control side power-on processing described later. The number of balls of the game ball B is counted and output to the base monitor 1310h in the port output process of the main control side power-on processing described later, and the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 is calculated by the base monitor 1310h. Display on. Therefore, the current set value displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h (may be described as "a modified example of how to use the base monitor"). .. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a displays the current set value set in the period from when the power is restored to when the progress of the game is started by setting the interrupt permission or the like using the base monitor 1310h. When the game starts to proceed by setting the interrupt permission after the power is restored, the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 (out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4) is displayed. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the setting display 1310 g, which can contribute to cost reduction.

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition, and the above-mentioned modified example of the usage method of the base monitor is appropriately selected. It may be selected and adopted in the above-mentioned modification of the decision key (30).

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition, and the above-mentioned modified example of the usage method of the base monitor is appropriately selected. It may be selected and adopted in the above-mentioned modification examples (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 137 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a lottery result of a normal symbol, a lottery result of a special symbol, and the like. ..

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 displays a status indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game status and a lottery result of a normal symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the gate 2002. It is provided with a normal symbol display composed of two LEDs and a normal hold display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the gate 2002.

Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2004, and the first start. A first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the mouth 2004, and a second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2005. A second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs that displays the lottery results, and a second special holding number display consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2005. And have.

Further, the function display unit 1400 repeats the opening / closing pattern of the first special winning opening 2006 and the second special winning opening 2007 when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is "hit" or the like. It is equipped with a round indicator consisting of five LEDs that display (number of rounds).

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 144 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is provided behind the effect display device 1600 provided on the rear side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 160) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like (see FIG. 160).

The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the set plate 1650 which attaches the effect display device 1600 to the back box 3010, although the details will be described later.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 and the set plate 1650 of the back unit 3000. Although the details will be described later, the effect display device 1600 is attached to the front surface of the set plate 1650 which is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010 (FIGS. 151 to 153). See). The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the transparent game panel 1100 and the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the state where the game board 5 is assembled.

The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED, and is installed in a vertically long state. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a part of the rear end protrudes into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. There is.

The table unit 2000 is provided with a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 which are open at all times and can accept the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and are provided at predetermined positions in the game area 5a. Gate 2002, which detects the passage of game ball B, and variable winning opening 2003, which enables acceptance of game ball B according to the lottery result of a normal symbol drawn when game ball B passes through gate 2002. The first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005, which are provided at predetermined positions in the game area 5a and are always open so that the game ball B can be received, and the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005. The first big prize opening 2006 and the first big prize that can accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to Depending on the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is provided at a position different from the mouth 2006 and is drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005. It is equipped with a second major winning opening 2007 that can accept the game ball B.

Further, the table unit 2000 is further provided with a first sub-out port 2021 and a second sub-out port 2022, each of which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and is always open so that the game ball B can be received. ..

A plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 are arranged on the left side with respect to the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the game area 5a. The gate 2002 is arranged at a height slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction near the left end of the front view in the game area 5a. The variable winning opening 2003 is located at the upper right of the gate 2002. The first starting port 2004 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2005 is arranged on the right side of the first starting port 2004 in the lower part of the game area 5a and above the first starting port 2004. The first large winning opening 2006 is arranged in the game area 5a at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom and directly above the variable winning opening 2003. The second prize opening 2007 is arranged in the game area 5a slightly higher than the height of 3/4 from the bottom and close to the right end of the game basin 5a.

The first sub-out opening 2021 is arranged between the second big winning opening 2007 and the left end of the game area 5a. The second sub-out port 2022 is arranged to the right of the second starting port 2005.

The table unit 2000 is mounted on the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2004 and a front view left of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 and has four general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit 2300 that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. The lower right unit 2400 provided on the right side of the front view of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a, and has the second start port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022. ing.

Further, the front unit 2000 is provided above the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the lower right unit 2400, slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a, and the variable winning opening 2003, the first. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a large winning opening 2006, a second major winning opening 2007, and a first sub-out opening 2021 and a left side of the center accessory 2500 near the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. It is provided with a gate member 2600 having a gate 2002, and a specific obstacle nail group 2700 provided on the right side in the game area 5a and composed of a plurality of obstacle nails N.

The lower right unit 2400, which will be described in detail later, is capable of accepting the game ball B received in the second major winning opening 2007, and has a pseudo-large winning opening 2402 having a larger opening than the second major winning opening 2007. It is provided with a pseudo-out port 2404 for discharging the game ball B that was not accepted by the large winning opening 2402 to the rear of the game panel 1100.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 145 and the like. The start port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1008, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2004 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be accepted.

By attaching the start port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first start port 2004 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, so that the center accessory 2500 is in the left-right direction. Located just below the center. More specifically, the first start port 2004 of the start port unit 2100 is located directly below the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513 in the center accessory 2500 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. As a result, the game ball B released from the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513 is received by the first starting port 2004 with a high probability.

The start port unit 2100 guides the game ball B received in the first start port 2004 to the rear of the game panel 1100 in a state of being attached to the game panel 1100, and delivers the game ball B to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. Can be done. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 is detected by the first start port sensor 3002 and then discharged downward.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 145 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes four general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be accepted at all times. The four general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. Each of the four general winning openings 2001 opens upward.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, four general winning openings 2001 project forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and then discharged downward.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
Next, the side upper left unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 145 and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to be in contact with the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 inclined so as to be lowered to the right.

In the state where the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled on the game board 5, the shelf portion 2301 projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by the shelf portion 2301.

[5-8d. Lower right unit]
Next, the lower right unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 147 and the like. The lower right unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a on the right side of the front view of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 from the front. The lower right unit 2400 includes a second starting port 2005, a second sub-out port 2022, and a second starting port sensor 2401 (see FIG. 149 and the like) that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2005. , Is equipped.

Further, the lower right unit 2400 includes a pseudo-large winning opening 2402 extending to the left and right over the entire width in the left-right direction, a pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received by the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, and a pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403. It has a pseudo-out opening 2404 provided below the vicinity of the left end of the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. The pseudo-large winning opening 2402 and the pseudo-out opening 2404 are open toward the front. The pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is wider (wider) on the left and right than the second large winning opening 2007. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the width of the pseudo large winning opening 2402 in the left-right direction is about 170 mm, which is wider than the maximum width of 135 mm of the normally used large winning opening.

Further, the lower right unit 2400 has a pseudo-large winning opening door 2405 that closes the pseudo-winning opening 2402 so as to be openable and closable, and a pseudo-large winning opening solenoid 2406 that opens and closes the pseudo-large winning opening door 2405 (see FIG. 149 and the like). ) And. The pseudo-winning door 2405 has a flat plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and is rotatably supported around an axis whose lower side extends in the horizontal direction.

In the lower right unit 2400, the second starting port 2005 is located to the right of the pseudo out port 2404 and directly above the pseudo large winning opening 2402, and the second sub out port 2022 is located to the right of the second starting port 2005. They are placed adjacent to each other.

When the lower right unit 2400 is assembled on the game board 5, the left end is located near the right side of the out port 1008, the right end is close to the right rail 1005, and most of the lower right rail 1004 is in the left-right direction. It is formed to have a length that covers the upper part.

The lower right unit 2400 has a flat plate-shaped base plate 2407 that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 and projects forward from the base plate 2407 to form a space (pseudo game area 2010) independent of the game area 5a. It has a possible partition 2410 and. The base plate 2407 and the partition portion 2410 are formed of a transparent material. The second starting port 2005, the second sub-out port 2022, the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, and the pseudo-out opening 2404 are provided so as to penetrate the base plate 2407, and the pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403 is provided on the base plate 2407. It is provided on the rear side. A pseudo-large winning opening 2402 and a pseudo-out opening 2404 are provided inside the dividing portion 2410.

The partition portion 2410 includes a bottom wall portion 2411 that extends to the left and right over the entire width and is inclined so that the right end side is higher, and a first standing wall portion 2412 that extends upward from the right end of the bottom wall portion 2411. , The right inclined wall portion 2413 extending diagonally from the upper end of the first standing wall portion 2412 to the lower left, and the right lateral wall portion 2414 extending horizontally from the lower end of the right inclined wall portion 2413 to the first standing wall portion 2412. The second vertical wall portion 2415, which is separated from the right horizontal wall portion 2414 to the left and extends upward from the portion of the same height as the lower end of the right horizontal wall portion 2414, and the second vertical wall portion 2415. The left inclined wall part 2416 extending diagonally to the lower right from the part having the same height as the upper end of the first standing wall part 2412 to the same height as the lower end of the second standing wall part 2415, and the second from the lower end of the left inclined wall part 2416. The left side wall part 2417 extending horizontally to the left of the standing wall part 2415, and the inclined wall part 2418 extending diagonally to the lower left from the left end of the left side wall part 2417 to the same position as the left end of the bottom wall part 2411. It has a third standing wall portion 2419 extending downward from the lower end of the inclined wall portion 2418 to a position below the left end of the bottom wall portion 2411.

The bottom wall portion 2411 is formed to have a length approximately one game ball B shorter than the length of the lower right rail 1004 in the left-right direction. The distance between the first standing wall portion 2412 and the second standing wall portion 2415 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the second large winning opening 2007. The distance between the lower end of the right inclined wall portion 2413 and the lower end of the left inclined wall portion 2416 is approximately half the length in the left-right direction of the second large winning opening 2007.

The second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022 are arranged at a portion of the left lateral wall portion 2417 between the second standing wall portion 2415 and the inclined wall portion 2418. The pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is arranged directly below the right side wall portion 2414, the left side wall portion 2417, and the inclined wall portion 2418, and the portion along the inclined wall portion 2418 is diagonally cut out with respect to the horizontally long rectangle. The shape is open toward the front. The pseudo out port 2404 is arranged adjacent to the portion where the bottom wall portion 2411 and the third standing wall portion 2419 intersect.

Further, the lower right unit 2400 is a flat plate-shaped lower right decorative portion 2431 that closes the front end side of the triangular frame formed by the first vertical wall portion 2412, the right inclined wall portion 2413, and the right lateral wall portion 2414. The front end side of the triangular frame formed by the second standing wall portion 2415, the left inclined wall portion 2416, and the left lateral wall portion 2417 is closed, and the front of the second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022. It is provided in the center between the extended flat plate-shaped lower right left decorative portion 2432, the lower right right decorative portion 2431, and the lower right left decorative portion 2432, and is provided in the shape of a downward arrow from the base plate 2407 to the front. It has a protruding lower right middle decorative portion 2433 (see FIG. 137 and the like).

Further, the lower right unit 2400 is provided behind the base plate 2407, and the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, the lower right right decorative portion 2431, the lower right left decorative portion 2432, and the lower right middle decorative portion 2433 are independent of each other. Further, it has a lower right decorative substrate 2434 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting and decorating are mounted on the front surface.

Further, the lower right unit 2400 has a translucent decorative sticker on the front surface of each of the pseudo grand prize opening door 2405, the lower right right decorative portion 2431, the lower right left decorative portion 2432, and the lower right middle decorative portion 2433. Is pasted.

The lower right unit 2400 is provided in the lower right corner in the game area 5a in a state where the game ball B cannot be distributed on the right side and the lower side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. Around the upper part of each of the right inclined wall portion 2413, the second standing wall portion 2415, and the left inclined wall portion 2416, the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed forward, and a plurality of obstacles are present in the relevant portions. Nail N is planted. Further, the portion between the first standing wall portion 2412 and the second standing wall portion 2415 is located below the second large winning opening 2007 in the center accessory 2500. The upper end of the second standing wall portion 2415 is located near the lower end of the attacker left wall portion 2568 in the center accessory 2500 described later, and the right side of the second standing wall portion 2415, that is, the inside of the dividing portion 2410 is the game. It is a space (pseudo-game area 2010) independent of the area 5a.

Further, in the state where the lower right unit 2400 is assembled on the game board 5, the second starting port 2005 is located slightly to the right of the right discharge passage 2565 of the center accessory 2500, and the inclined wall portion 2418. The lower end (left end) of is located below the first starting port 2004. Also above the second starting port 2005, the second sub-out port 2022, and the inclined wall portion 2418, the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed forward, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are also planted in the relevant parts. It is installed.

Further, in the state where the lower right unit 2400 is assembled on the game board 5, the pseudo out port 2404 is separated from the out port 1008 by about one game ball B to the upper right. In addition, the pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403 can be visually recognized from the front through a transparent base plate 2407 or the like.

The lower right unit 2400 can guide the game ball B received in the second starting port 2005 to the rear of the game panel 1100, detect it with the second starting port sensor 2401, and then discharge it downward. Further, the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 can be guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward.

The lower right unit 2400 has a pseudo-large winning opening 2402 and a pseudo-out opening 2404 inside the dividing portion 2410 (pseudo-game area 2010). Inside the partition portion 2410, only the game ball B received in the second major winning opening 2007 is formed so as to circulate.

Then, in the lower right unit 2400, in the normal state, the pseudo-large winning door 2405 is in an upright state, and the pseudo-large winning door 2405 closes the pseudo-large winning door 2402 so that the game ball B cannot be accepted. ing. In this state, the game ball B supplied to the inside of the partition portion 2410 (pseudo-game area 2010) passes in front of the pseudo-grand prize opening door 2405 that closes the pseudo-grand prize opening 2402, and passes through the bottom wall portion 2411. It flows down, rolls to the left along the slope of the bottom wall 2411, and is prevented from rolling further to the left by the third standing wall 2419, and opens forward at the site. It is accepted by the pseudo-out port 2404. The game ball B received in the pseudo-out port 2404 is not returned to the game area 5a, is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and is then discharged downward.

In the lower right unit 2400, the bottom wall portion 2411 is provided close to the lower right rail 1004, and the pseudo out port 2404 is provided close to the out port 1008, so that the bottom wall portion 2411 is left on the left. The game ball B, which has been rolled toward and received in the pseudo-out port 2404, can make the player illusion that the game ball B has rolled the lower right rail 1004 and has been received in the out port 1008.

The pseudo-grand prize opening door 2405 that closes the pseudo-grand prize opening 2402 has the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B at the first starting port 2004 and the second starting opening 2005, and the first (Ii) When the pseudo-large winning opening solenoid 2406 is energized according to the lottery result of the special symbol, the upper end rotates so as to move forward around the lower side, and the upper end is located slightly above the lower end. It is in a state of protruding forward from the base plate 2407 (game panel 1100) so that the rear side is lowered. In this state, the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 can accept the game ball B. Then, when the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is in a state where the game ball B can be accepted, if the game ball B flows down in front of the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, it hits the pseudo-large winning opening door 2405 protruding forward. It touches and is guided backward by the inclination of the pseudo grand prize opening door 2405 and is accepted by the pseudo grand winning opening 2402.

Since the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 extends to the left even to the lower part of the right discharge passage 2565 for discharging downward from the center accessory 2500 without being accepted by the second large winning opening 2007, it is pseudo. If the game ball B is discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 while the large winning opening 2402 (pseudo large winning opening door 2405) is opening and closing, the game ball B is also accepted by the pseudo large winning opening 2402. The player can be illusioned as if it were.

In addition, since it extends to the left directly below the second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022, it is accepted by the second large winning opening 2007 when the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is opening and closing. As if the game ball B, which was discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 of the center accessory 2500 and was received in the second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022, was also received in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. It can be an illusion.

The game ball B received in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403, and then discharged downward. The pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403 can also be visually recognized from the player side through the open pseudo-large winning opening 2402. By visually recognizing the pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403, the player can be illusioned as if the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is a real large winning opening.

The pseudo grand prize opening sensor 2403 is for executing a predetermined effect by detecting the game ball B, and opening and closing the pseudo grand prize opening door 2405 by counting the number of game balls B. .. By opening and closing the pseudo-large prize opening door 2405 according to the number of game balls B received in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, it is possible to make it easier to make the illusion that the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is a real large-winning opening. can.

According to the lower right unit 2400 of the present embodiment, since it has a pseudo-large winning opening 2402 that is wider than the maximum width of 135 mm of the large winning opening that is normally used and extends long to the left and right, it is a conventional pachinko machine. If it has a big winning opening that you have never seen before, you can make the player feel like you have a strong impact on the player, and as a pachinko machine to play with the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected positively, and the appealing power to the player can be enhanced.

Further, according to the lower right unit 2400, the right side wall portion 2414 and the left side wall portion 2417 are above the pseudo grand prize opening 2402 in which the left-right direction of the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is larger than that of the second large winning opening 2007. And a sloping wall portion 2418 is provided, and is separated between the right side wall portion 2414 and the left side wall portion 2417 (right sloping wall portion 2413 and left sloping wall portion 2413) separated by about half the distance in the left-right direction of the second prize opening 2007. (Between 2416), the game ball B is received by the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. As a result, the plurality of game balls B received in the second prize opening 2007 can be aggregated in a narrow range and directed to the pseudo-large prize opening 2402, so that the game received in the second prize opening 2007 It is possible to make the player illusion that a larger number of game balls B than the ball B are accepted in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, and it is possible to greatly entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 to 150 and the like. FIG. 148 (a) is a front view showing the right half of the front unit together with the panel plate and the obstacle nail, and FIG. 148 (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the front. FIG. 149 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate disassembled in FIG. 148 and viewed from the front, and FIG. 148 (b) shows the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate disassembled in FIG. 148. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 150 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 148 when only the center right front plate is disassembled and viewed from the front.

The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and slightly above the center of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, and various production units and the like provided in the effect display device 1600 provided behind the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front. ..

The center accessory 2500 will be described in detail later, but has a variable winning opening 2003 that opens and closes the game ball B so as to be acceptable according to the lottery result of a normal symbol drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate 2002, and the first start. The first big prize that opens and closes the game ball B so that it can be accepted according to the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the mouth 2004 or the second starting port 2005 or the lottery result of the second special symbol. It is equipped with a mouth 2006 and a second prize winning mouth 2007.

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a portion (a part of the peripheral wall portion 2501) protruding forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and is driven into the game area 5a. The game ball B cannot enter the frame.

The center accessory 2500 has a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-shaped portion protruding from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and abutting on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat plate-shaped support portion 2503 protruding from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where the rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 into which the center accessory 2500 in the panel plate 1110 is inserted. The peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent the game ball B from entering the inside of the frame from the outside of the center accessory 2500 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5.

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is formed to be thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (thickness of 1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 project from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same positions in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

A plurality of support portions 2503 are partially provided on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, in the support portion 2503, the end side protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or in a straight line so that the support portion 2503 is inconspicuous. The support portion 2503 has a protrusion amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), and the player exerts the effect as reinforcement. I try to make it inconspicuous.

The center accessory 2500 is a warp entrance 2511 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open to enter at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 on the left side of the front view and in front of the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). The warp outlet 2512, which is made capable of releasing the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 and is open in the frame behind the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B released from the warp outlet 2512 are left and right. It includes a stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after being rolled in a direction, and a stage cover 2515 that is provided so as to cover the upper part of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 146 and the like). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the game ball B from entering the frame from outside the frame of the center accessory 2500 by bouncing the game ball B bounced on the stage 2513 toward the stage 2513 side.

The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and is located at a position corresponding to directly above the first start port 2004 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the panel plate of the game panel 1100. When attached to 1110, it is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) so that the position at the substantially center in the left-right direction is slightly higher than that on both the left and right sides. In this stage 2513, a portion slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center in the left-right direction (central discharge portion 2513a) and the lowest portion on both the left and right sides (side discharge portion 2513b) are directed forward. It is inclined so as to be low, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (center discharge portion 2513a) in the center of the stage 2513 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first start port 2004 of the start port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central discharge portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, it is received by the first starting port 2004 with an extremely high probability.

[5-8e-1. First Attacker Department]
The center accessory 2500 includes a first attacker portion 2520 having a variable winning opening 2003 and a first large winning opening 2006 above the warp entrance 2511 on the left outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501. The first attacker portion 2520 of the center accessory 2500 responds to the variable winning opening door 2521 that closes the variable winning opening 2003 so as to be openable and closable, and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol drawn by the passage of the game ball B at the gate 2002. A variable winning opening solenoid 2522 (see FIG. 160, etc.) that is energized to open and close the variable winning opening door 2521, a variable winning opening sensor 2526 that detects the game ball B received in the variable winning opening 2003, and a variable winning opening sensor 2526.

In addition, the first attacker unit 2520 receives the first prize-winning door 2523, which closes the first prize-winning door 2006 so as to be openable, and the game ball B into the first start-up door 2004 and the second start-up door 2005. With the first special winning opening solenoid 2524 (see Fig. 160 etc.) that is energized according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol to open and close the first winning opening door 2523. The first grand prize opening sensor 2525 for detecting the game ball B received in the first grand winning opening 2006 is provided.

Further, the first attacker portion 2520 includes a variable winning opening 2003, a first large winning opening 2006, and a transparent flat plate-shaped center left front plate 2527 provided in front of the left second guide passage 2532 (Fig.). 137 etc.).

The center accessory 2500 is provided with a first attacker portion 2520 above the warp inlet 2511 on the left outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501. The first attacker unit 2520 has a variable winning opening 2003 and a first large winning opening 2006.

The variable winning opening 2003 is provided above the warp entrance 2511, is on the front side of the flange portion 2502 extending outward on the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and near the substantially center in the vertical direction of the center accessory 2500. It opens to the left. Further, the first large winning opening 2006 opens upward just above the variable winning opening 2003 with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B.

The variable winning opening door 2521 is rotatably supported around an axis whose lower end extends forward and backward, and by setting it in an upright state (normal state), the game ball B can be accepted for the variable winning opening 2003. Can be closed to. When the variable winning opening solenoid 2522 is energized, the variable winning opening door 2521 rotates so that the upper end moves to the left, and the game ball B can accept the variable winning opening 2003 (open state). ). When the variable winning door 2521 is in the open state, the upper end side is higher than the lower end side and is inclined so as to be lower to the right. You can guide to the variable winning door 2003.

The game ball B received in the variable winning opening 2003 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the variable winning opening sensor 2526, and then delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and discharged downward. Will be done.

The first prize-winning door 2523 has a flat plate shape that is inclined so as to be lowered to the left, and is provided so as to be able to move forward and backward from the front surface of the flange portion 2502. In the normal state, the first prize-winning door 2523 protrudes forward from the flange portion 2502, making it impossible to accept the game ball B into the first prize-winning door 2006. In this state, the game ball B that has flowed down above the first prize-winning door 2523 is guided to the left by the inclination of the first prize-winning door 2523, and is distributed through the left second guide passage 2532. ..

When the first prize opening solenoid 2524 is energized, the front end of the first prize opening door 2523 retracts rearward from the front surface of the flange portion 2502, and the game ball B is pushed against the first prize opening 2006. It can be in an acceptable state. The game ball B received in the first large winning opening 2006 in this state flows down in front of the flange portion 2502 and is provided at a height portion between the first large winning opening 2006 and the variable winning opening 2003. After being detected by the first large winning opening sensor 2525, the player is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 directly above the variable winning opening 2003. After that, the game ball B is delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and discharged downward.

[5-8e-2. Left guide passage group]
The center accessory 2500 is provided in front of the flange portion 2502 on the left outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and includes a left guide passage group 2530 composed of a plurality of (here, two) passages through which the game ball B can circulate. There is. In other words, a left guide passage group 2530 composed of a plurality of (here, two) passages through which the game ball B can be distributed is provided between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the inner rail 1002. Therefore, when the game ball B is driven so as to circulate on the left side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B is formed so as to always pass through the left guide passage group 2530.

The left guide passage group 2530 is provided at a portion lower than the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and on the left side at a height of about 2/3 from the bottom with respect to the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5. ing. The height of the left guide passage group 2530 is about three times the diameter of the game ball B in the vertical direction. The left guide passage group 2530 is formed so that the game ball B in circulation can be visually recognized in a good state.

The left guide passage group 2530 is composed of a left first guide passage 2531 in contact with the inner rail 1002 and a left second guide passage 2532 provided on the right side of the left first guide passage 2531. The left first guide passage 2531 and the left second guide passage 2532 are separated by a passage wall 2533 projecting forward from the flange portion 2502.

The first grand prize opening 2006 is provided on the downstream side of the entrance of the left second guide passage 2532. Therefore, when it is desired to accept the game ball B in the first large winning opening 2006, it is necessary to perform a driving operation so that the game ball B enters the left second guide passage 2532.

[5-8e-3. Right guide passage group]
Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided in the upper right corner and includes a right guide passage group 2540 composed of a plurality of (here, two) passages through which the game ball B can be distributed. In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end of the right guide passage group 2540 (the end of the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500) is the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the impact of the front component 1000). The game ball B, which is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005) near the stop 1006 and is driven to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500, is formed so as to always pass through the right guide passage group 2540.

The length of the right guide passage group 2540 in the vertical direction is about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. The right guide passage group 2540 can visually recognize the game ball B in circulation in a good state.

The right guide passage group 2540 is provided on the right outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and is provided on the right side of the right first guide passage 2541 and the right first guide passage 2541 away from the peripheral wall portion 2501. It is composed of the right second guide passage 2542 and the right second guide passage. The entrance of the right first guide passage 2541 and the entrance of the right second guide passage 2542 are separated from each other to the left and right.

The right first guide passage 2541 extends rearward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 at a portion directly below the entrance and then extends downward, and then extends downward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 at a position to the left of the entrance directly below. After extending forward, the exit opens diagonally to the lower right. Further, the right second guide passage 2542 extends downward from the entrance, then bends to the right, and the exit opens diagonally to the lower right while being lined up on the right side of the exit of the right first guide passage 2541. doing. That is, the right first guide passage 2541 and the right second guide passage 2542 are twisted so that the left and right intersect.

The right guide passage group 2540 is located above the space forming portion 2550 (specific obstacle nail group 2700) in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. Further, the right end of the entrance of the right first guide passage 2541 is located directly below the lower end of the abutting portion 1006 of the front component 1000, and most of the game balls B in contact with the abutting portion 1006 are on the right. It is formed so as to enter the guide passage 2541.

The game ball B that has entered the right first guide passage 2541 is released to the side near the peripheral wall portion 2501 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and enters the first guidance region 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, which will be described later. On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the right second guide passage 2542 is released to the side closer to the right rail 1005, and enters the second guidance region 2712 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, which will be described later. The details will be described later, but since the game ball B that has entered the second guidance region 2712 is more likely to be accepted by the first sub-out port 2021 provided downstream, it is placed in the right second guide passage 2542. When the game ball B is entered, it is more likely to be accepted by the first sub-out port 2021 as compared with the case where the game ball B is entered into the right first guide passage 2541.

The right guide passage group 2540 is provided with a distribution detection sensor 2543 that can detect the game ball B circulating in the right first guide passage 2541 (see FIG. 144). As a result, for example, in a game situation in which the player is made to perform "right-handed", when the number of game balls B detected by the distribution detection sensor 2543 is less than or equal to a predetermined number per hour, the game situation can be further enjoyed. In order to do so, it is possible to encourage "right-handed" or to instruct the driving strength to avoid acceptance to the first sub-out port 2021 by entering the right second guide passage 2542. It becomes.

[5-8e-4. Space forming part]
The center accessory 2500 includes a space forming portion 2550 provided below the right guide passage group 2540 and a second attacker portion 2560 provided below the space forming portion 2550 (FIG. 147, etc.). See). The space forming portion 2550 is provided between the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the right rail 1005, and is formed at a height of about half of the total height of the game area 5a. The second attacker portion 2560 has a second large winning opening 2007 and a first sub-out opening 2021, and is provided in the lower right corner of the center accessory 2500.

In the space forming portion 2550, the flange portion 2502 extending to the right from the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends to a position close to the right rail 1005 when assembled on the game board 5. The space forming portion 2550 of the center accessory 2500 is from the right wall portion 2551 protruding forward from the right side of the flange portion 2502 and the lower portion of the space forming portion 2550 in the peripheral wall portion 2501 protruding forward from the flange portion 2502. It has a guide wall portion 2552 extending to the lower right, and an opening 2553 that penetrates the flange portion 2502 back and forth at a portion between the right wall portion 2551 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552. ing.

The right wall portion 2551 extends along the right rail 1005 so as to form a slight gap with the right rail 1005 when assembled on the game board 5. Further, the right wall portion 2551 is provided with notches 2551a penetrating to the left and right near the upper portion. The guide wall portion 2552 is provided between the lower end (right end) and the right wall portion 2551 so that a distance of about three times the diameter of the game ball B is formed in the left-right direction.

The opening 2553 extends vertically over substantially the total height of the space forming portion 2550. The opening 2553 has a constant distance from the peripheral wall portion 2501 on the side close to the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2551, and the side closer to the right wall portion 2551 moves away from the right wall portion 2551 as it goes downward. That is, in the space forming portion 2550, the side of the flange portion 2502 close to the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552 extends vertically from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552 to the right with a certain width, and the flange portion 2502. The side closer to the right wall portion 2551 extends vertically so as to widen to the left as it goes downward.

When the opening 2553 is assembled on the game board 5, a part of a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 is inserted from the rear. The plurality of obstacle nails N inserted through the opening 2553 are a specific obstacle nail group 2700 planted in a specific gauge arrangement, which will be described in detail later. That is, the space forming portion 2550 of the center accessory 2500 forms a space in which the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is arranged.

Further, the space forming portion 2550 has a plurality of ridge portions rear 2554 that bulge forward from the flange portion 2502 and extend to the left and right at intervals in the front-rear direction. The ridge rear 2554 is provided at a position corresponding to a plurality of ridge front 2555d of the center right front plate 2555, which will be described later, so that the front-rear directions are staggered. As a result, the game ball B flowing down in front of the flange portion 2502 in the space forming portion 2550 can be made to flow down while meandering in the front-rear direction by the ridge portion front 2555d and the ridge portion rear 2554.

Further, the space forming portion 2550 has a transparent flat plate-shaped center right front plate 2555 covering between the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the front end of the right wall portion 2551, and a translucent translucent portion attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555. Center right front plate seal 2556 and has (see FIG. 149 and the like). The center right front plate 2555 extends upward to the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540, and closes the front side of the right guide passage group 2540.

The center right front plate 2555 penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a plurality of first accommodating portions 2555a in which the heads of a plurality of obstacle nails N (braided nail portions 2701) are accommodated, and one obstacle which penetrates in the front-rear direction. The second accommodating portion 2555b in which the head of the nail N is accommodated, the peeling hole 2555c penetrating the front and rear at the part where the center right front plate seal 2556 is attached, and the peeling hole 2555c that bulges rearward from the rear surface and extends to the left and right. It has a plurality of ridges in front of 2555d, which are provided at intervals in the front-rear direction. The center right front plate 2555 is attached so that the center accessory 2500 cannot be removed from the center accessory 2500 unless the center accessory 2500 is removed from the game panel 1100.

The first accommodating portion 2555a is provided in an elongated hole shape forming a certain gap with respect to the peripheral line that surrounds and is in contact with the heads of the plurality of obstructing nails N (braided nail portions 2701) that are accommodating. Has been done. In the present embodiment, one first accommodating portion 2555a is formed in a size for accommodating the heads of two obstruction nails N, and the center of the first accommodating portion 2555a is different from the center of the obstruction nail N. (Eccentric). The second accommodating portion 2555b is formed concentrically with the obstacle nail N. The first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b are provided at locations corresponding to the respective obstacle nails N of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, which will be described later.

The gap between the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b with the front end (head) of the obstacle nail N is within the range of 1 mm to 3 mm, and further 1.5 mm to 2.5 mm. It is desirable to keep it within the range of. If the gap is smaller than this range, the obstacle nail N may be affected when the center right front plate 2555 expands and contracts due to changes in the environment, and the obstacle nail N may bend. This is because it becomes difficult to accommodate the front end of the obstacle nail N in the portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b, and it takes time and effort, which may increase the cost. Further, if the gap is larger than this range, the bending condition when the obstacle nail N is bent due to the impact due to the contact of the game ball B or the like exceeds the permissible range, and it is difficult to distribute the game ball B in the intended flow. This is because there is a risk of becoming.

As a result, it is possible to restrict the movement of the head of the obstacle nail N housed in the first storage part 2555a and the second storage part 2555b, so that the impact due to the distribution (contact) of the game ball B It is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being deformed (bent) due to an external impact or the like, and it is possible to reduce the flow of the game ball B in an unintended flow and to specify it. The game ball B can be distributed in a stable state in the obstacle nail group 2700, and the action and effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be continuously exerted, and the movement of the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as described above, since the deformation of the obstacle nail N can be suppressed by the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555, on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to reduce the time and effort required for maintenance of the obstacle nail N.

Further, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the front side of the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b is closed by the center right front plate seal 2556 attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555. It is not possible to touch the obstacle nail N whose head is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2555a or the second accommodating portion 2555b from the front. As a result, it is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being bent due to contact with a tool or the like during maintenance or the like, or the obstacle nail N being intentionally bent. Further, when the obstacle nail N whose head is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b is bent via the center right front plate seal 2556, the trace remains on the center right front plate seal 2556. It is possible to make it easier to notice the defect of the obstacle nail N.

In the release hole 2555c, a rod-shaped member such as a wire is inserted from the rear side in a state where the center right front plate seal 2556 is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, and the center right front plate seal 2556 is inserted from the rear by the rod-shaped member. By pressing forward, a part of the center right front plate seal 2556 can be rolled up from the center right front plate 2555. Then, the operator can easily remove (peel off) the center right front plate seal 2556 from the center right front plate 2555 by pulling the rolled portion of the center right front plate seal 2556. As a result, workability such as reattachment work of the center right front plate seal 2556 at the time of manufacturing and sorting work at the time of disposal can be improved.

This peeling hole 2555c is provided in front of a triangular portion surrounded by the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501, the guide wall portion 2552, and the closed wall portion 2566 when assembled on the game board 5, and thus is a peeling hole. It is possible to prevent a linear fraudulent tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the rear side of the game panel 1100 or a portion where the game ball B is distributed through 2555c, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts. ..

Further, since the peeling hole 2555c is hidden from the front by attaching the center right front plate seal 2556 to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, deterioration of the appearance due to the peeling hole 2555c can be suppressed, and the player can use it. On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the peeling hole 2555c, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the peeling hole 2555c.

The plurality of ridge portion front 2555d is provided at a position corresponding to the plurality of ridge portion rear 2554 protruding from the flange portion 2502. These ridge portion front 2555d are provided so as to be staggered in the vertical direction with respect to the ridge portion rear 2554. As a result, the game ball B flowing down in front of the flange portion 2502 in the space forming portion 2550 can be made to flow down while meandering in the front-rear direction by the ridge portion front 2555d and the ridge portion rear 2554.

[5-8e-5. Second attacker part]
The second attacker portion 2560 of the center accessory 2500 has a second large winning opening 2007 that is long in the left-right direction and opens upward, and a first sub-out opening 2021 provided on the right side of the second large winning opening 2007. And have. The right end of the second prize opening 2007 is located at a portion slightly less than twice the diameter of the game ball B from the right end (lower end) of the guide wall portion 2552 to the right, and the left end is the total width in the game area 5a. It is located about 1/3 from the right side of. The second prize opening 2007 is provided at a position higher than the upper end of the stage cover 2515. The right wall of the first sub-out port 2021 is continuous with the right wall portion 2551 of the space forming portion 2550.

In addition, the second attacker unit 2560 can open and close the second major winning opening sensor 2561 that detects the game ball B received in the second major winning opening 2007 and the second major winning opening 2007 by advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction. It was drawn by accepting the flat plate-shaped second prize opening door 2562, which is closed to the left and is inclined to the left, and the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005. It has a second special winning opening solenoid 2563 that is energized according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol to open and close the second special winning opening door 2562.

Further, the second attacker portion 2560 is provided in front of the flange portion 2502 and above the second large winning opening door 2562, and the attacker passage 2564 through which the game ball B can flow to the left and the second large winning opening 2007. The right discharge passage 2565, which extends downward from the left end of the attacker passage 2564 to the left, and can discharge the game ball B downward, and the ceiling wall of the attacker passage 2564, which protrudes forward from the flange portion 2502. It has a closed wall portion 2566 which constitutes a part and extends to the left from the lower end of the guide wall portion 2552 to the peripheral wall portion 2501.

The attacker passage 2564 extends so as to be slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B and lower to the left, and the ceiling wall is composed of a part of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the closed wall portion 2566. At the same time, the wall of the floor is composed of the second prize-winning door 2562. In this attacker passage 2564, the portion of the attacker passage 2564 in the flange portion 2502 is bulged forward and extends in the vertical direction, and is provided with a plurality of ridge portions rear 2564a provided at intervals in the left-right direction. , The part of the attacker passage 2564 in the lower right front plate 2572 of the center, which will be described later, bulges rearward and extends in the vertical direction, and is spaced in the left-right direction so as to be staggered with the rear 2564a of the plurality of ridges. In front of a plurality of ridges (not shown) are provided. With the plurality of ridges in front and after the ridges 2564a, the game ball B can be circulated to the left while meandering in the front-rear direction in the attacker passage 2564, and the distribution speed can be suppressed.

The right discharge passage 2565 extends vertically downward with a width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B. The right discharge passage 2565 is provided with an outlet at a height between the stage 2513 and the upper end of the stage cover 2515. In the right discharge passage 2565, the right wall is composed of the attacker left wall portion 2568, and the left wall is composed of a part of the peripheral wall portion 2501.

Further, the second attacker portion 2560 protrudes forward from the flange portion 2502 on the right side of the second prize opening door 2562, is higher than the right end of the second prize opening door 2562, and is slightly higher than the right end of the closed wall portion 2566. The attacker right wall part 2567 extending downward from the lower position and the position protruding forward from the flange part 2502 on the left side of the second prize opening door 2562 and lower than the left end of the second prize opening door 2562. Left and right between the attacker left wall 2568 extending downward from the attacker, the right shelf 2569 extending left from the lower end of the attacker right wall 2567, and the right shelf 2569. It is provided in the center between the left shelf 2570 extending from the vicinity of the upper end of the attacker left wall 2568 to the right so as to form a gap, and the left shelf 2570 and the right shelf 2569. It has a middle wall portion 2571 and the like.

The second major winning opening 2007 is defined by the attacker right wall portion 2567 and the attacker left wall portion 2568 in the left-right direction. That is, the width in the left-right direction between the attacker right wall portion 2567 and the attacker left wall portion 2568 is the width in the left-right direction of the second large winning opening 2007. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the width of the second large winning opening 2007 in the left-right direction is 131 mm.

The attacker left wall portion 2568 extends downward from the lower end of the attacker right wall portion 2567, and the lower end is bent short to the right. When the attacker left wall portion 2568 is assembled on the game board 5, the upper end of the second standing wall portion 2415 of the lower right unit 2400 is close to the lower end, and the game ball B cannot move to and from the left and right sides. There is. The lower ends of the right shelf 2569 and the left shelf 2570 are located above the lower ends of the attacker left wall 2568. The second large winning opening sensor 2561 is provided between the lower end of the right shelf 2569 and the middle wall 2571, and between the lower end of the left shelf 2570 and the middle wall 2571, respectively. The middle wall portion 2571 is located directly above the lower right middle decoration portion 2433 of the lower right unit 2400 when assembled on the game board 5.

The second attacker portion 2560 is in front of the attacker passage 2564, the right discharge passage 2565, and the space formed by the attacker right wall portion 2567, the attacker left wall portion 2568, the right shelf portion 2569, and the left shelf portion 2570. It further has a closed transparent flat plate-shaped lower right front plate 2572 (see FIG. 137 and the like).

In the second attacker portion 2560, under normal conditions, the front end of the second major winning opening door 2562 protrudes forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2502, and the game ball B cannot be accepted for the second major winning opening 2007. It is closed to. The second prize opening door 2562, which closes the second prize opening 2007 so that it can be opened and closed, is formed in a flat plate shape extending left and right and front and back, which makes it difficult to see when viewed from the front. , It is difficult to understand the open / closed state.

In this normal state, the game ball B, which has been driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 and has flowed down the right guide passage group 2540 and the space forming portion 2550 (specific obstacle nail group 2700), has the guide wall portion 2552 and the right wall. It will flow down from between the part 2551 and the second attacker part 2560 side. At this time, the game ball B that has flowed down along the right wall portion 2551 is received by the first sub-out port 2021 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then discharged downward.

The game ball B, which was not accepted by the first sub-out port 2021 and flowed down onto the second prize opening door 2562, meanders in the attacker passage 2564 in the front-rear direction by the plurality of ridges in front and after the ridges 2564a. After rolling to the left, the player enters the right discharge passage 2565 from the left end of the second prize opening door 2562, and is returned to the game area 5a from the lower end (exit) of the right discharge passage 2565.

The second attacker portion 2560 of the center accessory 2500 is located directly above the lower right unit 2400 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and constitutes the right wall of the right discharge passage 2565. The upper end of the second standing wall portion 2415 of the lower right unit 2400 is close to the lower end of the portion 2568. As a result, the movement of the game ball B is blocked between the right discharge passage 2565 side and the right side of the second standing wall portion 2415. That is, a region (pseudo-game area 2010) that cannot be entered from the right discharge passage 2565 or the game area 5a is formed on the right side of the second standing wall portion 2415.

In other words, the pseudo-game area partitioned by the front surface of the game panel 1100, the partition portion 2410 of the lower right unit 2400, the attacker left wall portion 2568, the right shelf portion 2569, and the left shelf portion 2570 in the second attacker portion 2560. 2010 is formed. In this pseudo-game area 2010, only the game ball B received in the second major winning opening 2007 can be distributed.

Then, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005, the second large winning opening solenoid 2563 is used. When the power is turned on, the second major winning opening door 2562 retracts, and the second major winning opening 2007 becomes ready to accept the game ball B. At this time, the game ball B circulating in the attacker passage 2564 and the game ball B flowing down from the space forming unit 2550 to the second large winning opening 2007 are accepted by the second large winning opening 2007.

The game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2007 is detected by the second big winning opening sensor 2561 after rolling on the right shelf portion 2569 or the left shelf portion 2570 and released into the lower pseudo game area 2010. Will be done. In this second attacker unit 2560, since the two second major winning opening sensors 2561 are arranged on the left and right, even if many game balls B are received in the second major winning opening 2007 in a short time, they are delayed. Can be detected without.

According to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, the first accommodating portion 2555a accommodating the heads of a plurality of obstruction nails N of each set nail portion 2701 constituting the specific obstacle nail group 2700 in the center right front plate 2555 a. The movement of the head of the obstacle nail N can be restricted, and the obstacle nail N is deformed by an impact due to the circulation (contact) of the game ball B or an external impact due to something. It is possible to suppress (bending). As a result, it is possible to reduce the flow of the game ball B in an unintended flow, the game ball B can be circulated in a stable state in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the action and effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700. Can be continuously exerted, and the movement of the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

In addition, according to the center accessory 2500, the second large winning opening door 2562, which closes the second large winning opening 2007 so as to be openable and closable, has a flat plate shape extending in the left-right direction and the front-back direction, and the second large winning opening. Since the second prize opening 2007 is opened and closed by moving the winning door 2562 forward and backward, the second big winning door 2562 can be made difficult to see when viewed from the front. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the grand prize opening 2007. As a result, the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 (pseudo-large winning opening door 2405) provided below the second large winning opening 2007 can be made relatively conspicuous, so that the player's interest can be raised to the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. Can be strongly attracted to, and the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 can be strongly illusioned as if it were a real large winning opening. Therefore, if a pachinko machine is equipped with a large winning opening that has never been seen before, it can give the player an illusion, give a strong impact to the player, and give the player a game. It is possible to facilitate the positive selection of the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to be used, and it is possible to enhance the appealing power to the player.

Further, according to the center accessory 2500, since the support portion 2503 projecting inward is provided in the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. As a result, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the outside of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, it is possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the support portion 2503 can increase the strength of the center accessory 2500, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the injection molding mold without being deformed.

Further, since the transparent support portion 2503 is projected shortly from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is partially provided with respect to the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the back surface where the support portion 2503 is provided at the rear. It is possible to reduce the hindrance to the visibility of the decorative body of the unit 3000 and the effect image of the effect display device 1600.

Further, by providing the support portion 2503, the support portion 2503 in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) has a portion in which the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided. At a close portion, the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. As a result, the area of the game by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be widened as much as possible in the game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed in the original game.

Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape similar to the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is on the same surface as the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the support portion 2503. Is provided on substantially the same surface as the front surface of the panel plate 1110, so that the support portion 2503 can be made inconspicuous to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel plate 1110. be able to.

Further, since the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center accessory 2500, the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 can be further increased as compared with the case where the support portion 2503 is provided over the entire circumference. It can be made wider, and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear can be made easier to see. In other words, if it is desired to make the non-distribution area (inside the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 look large, the support portion 2503 should be provided on a part of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. You can do it. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support unit 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap with the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear in the front view.

[5-8f. Gate member]
Subsequently, the gate member 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The gate member 2600 of the table unit 2000 is arranged on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. More specifically, the gate member 2600 is provided at a position slightly below the central skein in the vertical direction of the game area 5a and below the variable winning opening 2003 of the center accessory 2500. Immediately above the gate member 2600, the exit of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center accessory 2500 is arranged. Further, at the lower right of the gate member 2600, the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 opens to the left.

The gate member 2600 includes a gate 2002 in which a lottery of ordinary symbols for opening and closing the variable winning opening 2003 is performed by passing the game ball B, and a gate sensor 2601 for detecting that the game ball B has passed through the gate 2002. Have. In the present embodiment, the detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2601 is the gate 2002.

[5-8 g. Specific obstacle nail group]
Next, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 among the plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 and 147. The specific obstacle nail group 2700 is provided on the right side in the game area 5a and on the upstream side of the second prize opening 2007. The specific obstacle nail group 2700 of the present embodiment is provided in the space formed by the space forming portion 2550 of the center accessory 2500.

The specific obstacle nail group 2700 has a plurality of set nail portions 2701 in which a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged adjacent to each other are set as one set, and the plurality of set nail portions 2701 are one game ball with each other. They are arranged at intervals that allow them to pass through B. In the present embodiment, the braided nail portion 2701 is composed of two obstacle nails N.

The specific obstacle nail group 2700 is provided so that the portions (gap portions) between the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 arranged at intervals are arranged in a predetermined pattern, and the plurality of braided nails are arranged. The game ball B can be guided by the part 2701. As a result, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 forms a guidance region 2710 capable of guiding the game ball B from a specific position to a desired position with a predetermined probability.

The guidance region 2710 formed by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can guide the game ball B to a desired position with a predetermined probability. The induction region 2710 is composed of a first induction region 2711 and a second induction region 2712 provided on the right side of the first induction region 2711. The first guide region 2711 is capable of guiding the game ball B from the exit of the right first guide passage 2541 in the right guide passage group 2540 to the position of the portion on the left side from the center of the guide wall portion 2552. The second guide region 2712 is capable of guiding the game ball B from the exit of the right second guide passage 2542 in the right guide passage group 2540 to the position of the portion on the right side from the center of the guide wall portion 2552.

The first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712 formed by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 are provided in an arc shape so that the center in the vertical direction protrudes to the right. More specifically, in the first lead region 2711 and the second guide region 2712, in the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 forming the outside of the arc, a straight line connecting the braided nail portions 2701 near the upper end portion and the lower end portion. On the other hand, the arcs formed by the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 forming the inside of the arc are provided so as to be in contact with each other. That is, the first lead region 2711 and the second guide region 2712 are formed so that the width in the left-right direction is the distance of two game balls B. Since the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712 extend in an arc shape, the portion extending vertically is reduced, and the game ball B is easily meandered in the left-right direction.

Further, the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 forming the first lead region 2711 and the second lead region 2712 are the braided nail portions located below between the two braided nail portions 2701 separated to the left and right. The 2701 is provided on the right side (far side from the center of the arc) from the center between the two upper nail portions 2701. This makes it difficult for the game ball B to move outward from each of the first lead region 2711 and the second guide region 2712.

Further, the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 forming the first lead region 2711 and the second guide region 2712 have gaps separated above and below the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 arranged in an arc shape. It is provided so that it is located upward toward the right row. In other words, in the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 forming the left and right side walls of the first lead region 2711 and the second lead region 2712, the two braided nail portions 2701 paired in the left-right direction are on the right side. The braided nail portion 2701 is arranged so as to be higher. This makes it easier for the game ball B to meander in the left-right direction.

The guidance region 2710 by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can guide the game ball B downward by a plurality of braided nail portions 2701 arranged at intervals, as if meandering in the left-right direction. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball B can be suppressed and slowed down as compared with the area where the obstacle nail N is planted in a general arrangement, and the flow time of the game ball B to a predetermined position ( Arrival time) can be delayed. Further, in the set nail portion 2701, by combining two obstacle nails N into one set, the number of collisions between the obstacle nail N and the game ball B can be increased as compared with the case where the set nail portion N is composed of one obstacle nail N. The effect of delaying the fall of the ball B is enhanced.

In the guidance region 2710, since the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, the guided game ball B moves to the left outer side or the right outer side through the portion of the interval. It may end up. That is, the game ball B moves from the first lead region 2711 to the second lead region 2712, moves from the second guide region 2712 to the first lead region 2711, or moves from the first guide region 2711 to the left outer side. Or, it may move from the second induction region 2712 to the right outer side.

The game ball B guided to the lower end by the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712 comes into contact with the guide wall portion 2552, and is between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 (second prize). It will flow down to the top of the door 2562 or inside the second prize opening 2007).

The game ball B that has moved to the left outside from the first guide region 2711 is located between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and is located behind the plurality of ridge portions 2554 provided on the flange portion 2502. In addition, the plurality of ridges in front of the 2555 on the right front plate of the center 2555d meander in the front-rear direction and flow down. Then, it comes into contact with the guide wall portion 2552 and flows down between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 (on the second prize opening door 2562 or in the second prize opening 2007). ..

The game ball B that has moved to the right outside from the second guide region 2712 has a plurality of ridges rear 2554 and a center right front plate provided on the flange portion 2502 between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the right wall portion 2551. The plurality of ridges provided in the 2555, 2555d in front of the ridges, meander in the front-rear direction and flow down. Then, it will flow down to the first sub-out opening 2021 or between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 (on the second major winning opening door 2562 or in the second major winning opening 2007).

As a result, when the game ball B enters the right second guide passage 2542 in the right guide passage group 2540, the game ball B circulates in the second guide region 2712, and when the game ball B moves from the second guide region 2712 to the right outer side, the first There is a possibility that it will be accepted by one sub-out port 2021. That is, in the present embodiment, in the right guide passage group 2540, the probability that the game ball B is accepted in the first sub-out port 2021 is higher in the right second guide passage 2542 than in the right first guide passage 2541. .. Therefore, the player can be made to perform a driving operation such that the game ball B enters the right first guide passage 2541. In other words, when "right-handed", by hitting hard, the game ball B can easily enter the right first guide passage 2541 near the abutment portion 1006, so it is necessary to hit the game ball B with delicate adjustment. There is no such thing, and the driving operation can be performed easily.

By the way, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, if the braided nail portion is composed of only one obstacle nail N, a pair is formed with respect to the obstacle nail N in order to form a gap through which the game ball B can pass. The other obstacle nail N becomes an obstacle nail N in all directions forming a gap around the obstacle nail N. That is, one obstacle nail N is in charge of forming gaps in all directions. As a result, when the obstacle nail N bends, the gap widens in one direction and narrows in the opposite direction. Therefore, the deformation of one obstacle nail N greatly changes the induction probability of the game ball B by the induction region 2710. Therefore, it becomes difficult to distribute the game ball B in a stable state. Further, when the obstacle nail N is bent, it is necessary to adjust the obstacle nail N provided in all directions so as to have a gap of a desired distance, which requires a great deal of time and effort for maintenance. It becomes.

On the other hand, when the braided nail portion 2701 is configured by a plurality of obstruction nails N as in the present embodiment, the direction of the obstruction nail N adjacent to a certain obstruction nail N in the braided nail portion 2701 is set. Since the adjacent obstacle nail N is in charge of forming the gap, the direction in which a certain (one) obstacle nail N is in charge of forming the gap can be only a part of the directions, and the gap can be formed. It is possible to reduce the number of obstacle nails N that are paired with the formation of. As a result, even if one of the obstacle nails N of the braided nail portion 2701 is bent, the portion of the gap affected is small, so that the change in the induction probability of the game ball B due to the induction region 2710 can be suppressed. Further, when a certain obstacle nail N is bent, it is sufficient to adjust the gap with the obstacle nail N in a certain direction to be a desired distance, which is more suitable for maintenance than the case where the gap in all directions is adjusted. This time and effort can be reduced.

When the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of the present embodiment is assembled on the game board 5, the head of the obstacle nail N is inserted into the first accommodation portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 and is accommodated. The braided nail portion 2701 composed of a plurality of obstacle nails N is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2555a so as to surround the heads thereof.

As a result, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the obstacle nail N is accommodated in the first accommodation portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555, thereby restricting the movement of the head of the obstacle nail N. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being deformed (bent) due to an impact due to the circulation (contact) of the game ball B or an external impact due to something, and the game ball. It is possible to reduce B from flowing down in an unintended flow, and it is possible to distribute the game ball B in a stable state in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the action and effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be sustained. It can be exerted, and the movement of the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, as described above, the head of the obstacle nail N is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555, whereby the obstruction nail N is deformed. Since it can be suppressed, it is possible to reduce the time and effort required for the maintenance of the obstacle nail N on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the first accommodation portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b accommodating the head of the obstacle nail N are attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, and the center right front plate seal 2556. Because it is closed by, the obstacle nail N cannot be touched from the front. As a result, it is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being bent due to contact with a tool or the like during maintenance or the like, or the obstacle nail N being intentionally bent. Further, when the obstacle nail N of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is bent from the front, the trace remains on the center right front plate seal 2556, so that the defect of the obstacle nail N can be easily noticed.

Further, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 has a function of distributing the inflowing game ball B to either the first sub-out opening 2021 or the second major winning opening 2007. This function is an important function that affects the ball output rate. All nail adjustments are prohibited in the game hall. Therefore, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of the present embodiment, as described above, the center right front plate 2555 and the center right front plate 2555 and the center are prevented from being removed unless the center accessory 2500 is removed from the game panel 1100. Since the right front plate seal 2556 covers the front side of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, it is not possible to adjust the nails at all.

In the above embodiment, a plurality of braided nail portions 2701 forming the specific obstacle nail group 2700 are shown to be composed of two obstacle nails N, but the present invention is not limited to three. It may be composed of the above obstacle nails N. When the braided nail portion 2701 is composed of three or more obstacle nails N, a plurality of obstacle nails N may be arranged in a row, or arranged in a polygon such as a triangle, a quadrangle, a pentagon, or a hexagon. Is also good.

Further, in the above embodiment, the guide region 2710 by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is shown to be composed of two regions, the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712, but the present invention is not limited to this. , One, or may be composed of three or more areas.

According to the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of the present embodiment, the flow speed of the game ball B can be suppressed and delayed. Therefore, for example, in the second attacker portion 2560 provided downstream, the first special symbol is used. If the second big winning opening 2007 is opened and closed in a short time so that the game ball B can be accepted according to the lottery result and the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, "small hit"), the game is played. Even if a person tries to drive the game ball B so that the game ball B arrives at the timing when it becomes acceptable to the second prize opening 2007, the game ball B is hit by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 at a desired timing. It can be made difficult to reach, and the timing of hitting the game ball B can be difficult. As a result, it is possible to give a difficulty level to the driving operation of the game ball B, so that the player can be entertained by arousing the rewardingness of the game, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. Further, in the above case, since it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to be accepted by the second major winning opening 2007, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, according to the specific obstacle nail group 2700, since the distribution speed of the game ball B is suppressed by planting a plurality of obstacle nails N, the configuration is compared with the case of being composed of a synthetic resin member. It is possible to reduce the cost required for the pachinko machine 1 and suppress an increase in the cost required for the pachinko machine 1.

[5-8h. Pseudo game area]
Next, the pseudo game area 2010 formed in front of the game panel 1100 by the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 147 and the like. The pseudo-game area 2010 is independent of the game area 5a, and is an area in which only a specific game ball B can be distributed. Specifically, the area in which only the game ball B (so-called dead ball that does not affect the game) received in the second prize opening 2007 can be distributed is the pseudo game area 2010. The pseudo game area 2010 is provided on the same surface as the game area 5a.

The pseudo-game area 2010 includes a portion where the front surface of the flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 provided with the game area 5a in front is exposed, and a plurality of obstacles planted in the exposed portion of the game panel 1100. Pseudo-large prize that can be opened and closed according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the nail N and the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005. It has a port 2402 and a pseudo-out port 2404 for discharging the game ball B that was not accepted by the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 to the rear of the game panel 1100. That is, the pseudo-game area 2010 has a plurality of obstacle nails N, a pseudo-large winning opening 2402 as a reception port capable of receiving the game ball B, and a pseudo-out port 2404 for discharging the game ball B. The configuration is similar to that in the game area 5a.

The pseudo-game area 2010 is formed by a game panel 1100, a partition portion 2410 of the lower right unit 2400, and a second attacker portion 2560 of the center accessory 2500. The upper end of the pseudo game area 2010 is divided by a right shelf portion 2569, a left shelf portion 2570, and a middle wall portion 2571 of the second attacker portion 2560. The right end of the pseudo game area 2010 is divided by the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the first standing wall portion 2412 of the dividing portion 2410. The left end of the pseudo game area 2010 is divided by the attacker left wall portion 2568 of the second attacker portion 2560, the second standing wall portion 2415 of the dividing portion 2410, the left side wall portion 2417, the inclined wall portion 2418, and the third standing wall portion 2419. ing. The lower end of the pseudo game area 2010 is divided by the bottom wall portion 2411 of the partition portion 2410.

In the pseudo-game area 2010, the front surface of the game panel 1100 is exposed forward between the second attacker portion 2560 and the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the portion.

The second big winning opening 2007 as a supply source of the game ball B to the pseudo game area 2010 is opened and closed by the second big winning opening door 2562. Since the second prize-winning door 2562 is formed in a flat plate shape that advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, it is difficult for the player to see the second prize-winning door 2562. The pseudo-game area 2010 is provided on the same surface as the game area 5a, and the portion (partition portion 2410, attacker left wall portion 2568 of the center accessory 2500, etc.) partitioned from the game area 5a becomes transparent. Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the exposed portion of the game panel 1100 as well as being formed, whether the pseudo game area 2010 is a part of the game area 5a for the player. It can be illusioned as.

The pseudo-large winning opening 2402 provided in the pseudo-game area 2010 is formed longer in the left-right direction than the second large winning opening 2007 provided above. In the present embodiment, the left and right sizes of the second large winning opening 2007 are 131 mm, and the left and right sizes of the pseudo large winning opening 2402 are 170 mm. Since the pseudo-grand prize opening 2402 opens toward the front, the pseudo-grand prize opening door 2405 that can open and close the pseudo-grand prize opening 2402 is in a state in which the pseudo-grand prize opening 2402 is closed (usually). In the state of), the surface is turned forward, and the pseudo-large winning door 2405 is conspicuous from the player.

For this reason, when the player sees the pachinko machine 1, the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is more prominent than the second major winning opening 2007, so he has seen it with conventional pachinko machines. It can be made to think that it has a big winning opening that does not exist, and it can strongly attract the interest of the player.

In the pseudo-game area 2010 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the pseudo-large prize opening door 2405 is in an upright state, and the pseudo-large winning opening door 2405 makes the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 unable to accept the game ball B. It is closed. In addition, under normal conditions, the second prize opening 2007 is closed by the second prize door 2562, so the game is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 and flows down to the second prize door 2562. The ball B rolls to the left on the second prize opening door 2562 and is discharged into the game area 5a through the right discharge passage 2565. Therefore, in the normal state, the game ball B does not circulate in the pseudo game area 2010.

From the normal state, depending on the lottery result of the first special symbol, the lottery result of the second special symbol, etc. When the large winning opening door 2562 retracts, the game ball B can be accepted into the second large winning opening 2007. In this state, when the game ball B is received by the second big winning opening 2007, the game ball B is detected by the second big winning opening sensor 2561 and then supplied to the pseudo game area 2010.

Then, the game ball B supplied to the pseudo game area 2010 flows down while abutting on a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in a portion of the game panel 1100 exposed to the front. At this time, if the pseudo grand prize opening 2402 is closed by the pseudo grand winning door 2405, the game ball B supplied into the pseudo game area 2010 passes in front of the pseudo grand winning door 2405 and bottoms out. After flowing down onto the wall 2411 and rolling to the left along the inclination of the bottom wall 2411, the third standing wall 2419 prevented further rolling to the left and headed forward at the site. The pseudo-out port 2404 that is open is discharged to the rear of the game panel 1100. That is, it is discharged from the pseudo game area 2010.

Since the pseudo out port 2404 of the pseudo game area 2010 is provided close to the right side of the out port 1008, the game ball B received in the pseudo out port 2404 is provided to the player by the out port 1008. It is possible to make the illusion that it is accepted by. As a result, it is possible to make the illusion that the pseudo game area 2010 is a part of the game area 5a.

Therefore, it is possible to make the illusion that the game in which the game ball B passes in front of the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 in the pseudo-game area 2010 is the same as the game in which the game ball B passes through the large winning opening in the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to disappoint the player by not accepting the game ball B in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. On the other hand, since the game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2007 is distributed in the pseudo game area 2010, even if the game ball B is not accepted in the pseudo big winning opening 2402, the second big winning opening 2007 is entered. Upon acceptance, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out. As a result, even though the game ball B is not accepted in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, the game ball B is paid out, so that the player can feel as if he / she has gained, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

By the way, when the pseudo-grand prize opening 2402 is opened and closed, the large pseudo-grand prize opening door 2405 that stands out from the front opens and closes, so that the player instantly notices that the pseudo-grand prize opening 2402 can be accepted. Can be made. As a result, it is possible to perform a driving operation (so-called "right-handed") of the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B is accepted by the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. Further, the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 may be opened / closed as a kind of notice, or the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 may be opened / closed as one of the signals for instructing the player to "hit right". Since the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 can be entered only when "right-handed", the player can easily understand it intuitively.

For this reason, for example, before the second big winning opening 2007 becomes acceptable, the pseudo big winning opening 2402 may be opened and closed with a fluttering operation so that the player can perform "right-handed". .. This makes it easier for the "right-handed" game ball B to reach the second prize opening 2007 at the timing when the second prize opening 2007 becomes acceptable, so that the player can be more entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Then, during the "big hit" game in which the second big winning opening 2007 opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern, if the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is also opened and closed, many game balls B are opened and closed in a short time through the second big winning opening 2007. It can be supplied into the pseudo-game area 2010, and many game balls B are distributed in the pseudo-game area 2010, so that the player can enjoy the movement and the game of the game ball B in the pseudo-game area 2010. You can do it. At this time, if the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 opens and closes, the game ball B is accepted by the large pseudo-large winning opening 2402, so that the player can be greatly entertained and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed. Can be made to.

In the present embodiment, the left-right direction of the pseudo-grand prize opening 2402 is formed larger than that of the second grand prize opening 2007, but above the pseudo-grand winning opening 2402, the right side wall portion 2414, the left side wall portion 2417 and A sloping wall portion 2418 is provided, and the game ball B passing between the right side wall portion 2414 and the left side wall portion 2417 (between the right sloping wall portion 2413 and the left sloping wall portion 2416) is a pseudo-large winning opening. Accepted at 2402. The distance between the right side wall portion 2414 and the left side wall portion 2417 is about half of the distance in the left-right direction of the second prize opening 2007. Therefore, the plurality of game balls B received in the second prize opening 2007 are aggregated in a narrow range and head toward the pseudo-large prize opening 2402, so that the game balls B received in the second prize opening 2007 It is possible to make the player illusion that a larger number of game balls B are accepted in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, and it is possible to greatly entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

The pseudo-large winning opening 2402 of the present embodiment does not pay out the game ball B or give a privilege to the player by accepting the game ball B. Therefore, the pseudo grand prize opening 2402 has an opening / closing pattern (for example, 337 beats, minuet, waltz, bossanova, swing, 8 beats, 16 beats, BGM, etc.) that cannot be seen in the grand prize openings of conventional pachinko machines. It can be opened and closed according to the tempo of the music, etc., and can entertain the player.

In addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W may be provided in the pseudo game area 2010. By making the wind turbine W exist in the pseudo game area 2010, it becomes more realistic, and it becomes difficult to distinguish between the pseudo game area 2010 and the game area 5a.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 to 147 and the like. In the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the left and right outer portions and the lower portion of the center accessory 2500. Further, a windmill W that rotates due to contact with the game ball B is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300.

First, on the left side of the center accessory 2500, the left guide passage group 2530, the gate 2002, and the side upper left unit 2300 are arranged at intervals from above, and between them and above the left guide passage group 2530. , Multiple obstacle nails N are planted. The plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the left guide passage group 2530 are arranged so that the game balls B are collected above the entrance of the left second guide passage 2532. As a result, when the game ball B is driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500, it can be distributed to the left second guide passage 2532 with a higher probability than the left first guide passage 2531. The game ball B that has circulated through the left second guide passage 2532 will circulate downward in a state of approaching the center accessory 2500, and will flow down to the left of the variable winning opening 2003 with a high probability.

Near the entrance in the left second guide passage 2532, the first prize entrance 2006, which is normally closed by the first prize entrance door 2523, is provided, and the left second guide passage 2532 The game ball B that has entered the game rolls on the first prize opening door 2523 and flows down. Then, the first grand prize opening door 2523 is set according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005. If the game ball B enters the left second guide passage 2532 while retreating, it will be accepted into the first big winning opening 2006 with a high probability.

The game ball B received in the first big prize opening 2006 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 even after being detected by the first big winning opening sensor 2525 provided below, and the back ball guidance of the back unit 3000. It is discharged downward through the unit 3100. When the game ball B is detected by the first large winning opening sensor 2525, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

A plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the left guide passage group 2530 and the gate 2002 are arranged so as to be collected directly above the gate 2002 at a portion below the variable winning opening 2003. As a result, when the game ball B is driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500, the gate 2002 can be passed with a certain probability. The gate 2002 is arranged so that the game ball B circulates downward on both the left outer side and the right outer side of the gate 2002.

When the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, a lottery of ordinary symbols is executed. Then, when the lottery result of the drawn ordinary symbol is "ordinary hit", the variable winning opening 2003 is in a state where the game ball B can be accepted for a predetermined time. When the variable winning opening 2003 is in a state where it can be accepted, the variable winning opening door 2521 rotates to the left, so that the game ball B circulating in the left second guide passage 2532 has a high probability of making a variable winning. Accepted in the mouth 2003. The game ball B received in the variable winning opening 2003 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the variable winning opening sensor 2526, and then delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and lowered. Is discharged to. When the game ball B is detected by the variable winning opening sensor 2526, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

A warp entrance 2511 and a wind turbine W are provided between the gate 2002 and the side upper left unit 2300 from above. The warp entrance 2511 opens to the left at the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. The wind turbine W is arranged between the center accessory 2500 and the inner rail 1002 near the center accessory 2500.

In the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate 2002 and the wind turbine W, the game ball B circulating on the right outside of the gate 2002 and the gate 2002 flows down mainly on the part on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W. It is arranged to do. Therefore, the game ball B circulating through the gate 2002 and the right outer side of the gate 2002 can enter the warp entrance 2511 with a certain probability. On the other hand, the game ball B circulating on the left outer side of the gate 2002 does not enter the warp entrance 2511.

The game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 is provided near the lower end of the center portion in the left-right direction of the center accessory 2500 from the warp outlet 2512 that is opened in the frame of the center accessory 2500 through the warp passage. It is supplied to the stage 2513. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls in the left-right direction on the stage 2513, and is discharged from either the central discharge portion 2513a or the side discharge portion 2513b so as to return into the game region 5a.

Since the central release portion 2513a of the stage 2513 is provided in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the first start port 2004, the game ball B released from the central release portion 2513a has a high probability of being first. Accepted at the start port 2004. The game ball B released from the left and right side discharge portions 2513b of the central discharge portion 2513a is received by the first starting port 2004 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting port 2004 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and detected by the first starting port sensor 3002. Is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first start port sensor 3002, a lottery for the first special symbol is performed and a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first starting port 2004 is received in the out port 1008 and discharged to the outside of the game area 5a. The game ball B received in the out port 1008 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 by the out guide unit 1003, and then discharged downward.

The game ball B that circulates on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W has a high probability of being on the upper side of the plurality of obstacle nails N that are arranged diagonally in two upper and lower stages along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It flows down onto a plurality of obstacle nails N. The game ball B that has passed through the right side of the wind turbine W and has not flowed down onto the plurality of obstacle nails N on the upper stage side flows down onto the plurality of obstacle nails N on the lower stage side. On the other hand, the game ball B circulating on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W flows down onto the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300, rolls the shelf portion 2301 to the right, and then is placed on a plurality of obstacle nails N on the lower stage side. Flow down to.

The game ball B, which circulates on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W and flows down to the upper side of a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally, is located in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction below the center accessory 2500. There is a possibility that it will be guided to the first starting port 2004) side and accepted by the first starting port 2004. Further, on the upper stage side where a plurality of obstacle nails N are diagonally arranged, a gap through which one game ball B can pass is provided, so that the gap may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through the gap. There is a possibility that it will be accepted by the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. The game ball B that has not been accepted by the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting port 2004 is discharged from the out opening 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, in the lower left portion of the center accessory 2500, the game balls B that have flowed down to the lower side of the plurality of obstacle nails N that are diagonally arranged are left and right in the game area 5a due to the plurality of obstacle nails N. It is guided to the center side, is received by the out port 1008 without being received by the first starting port 2004, and is discharged from the game area 5a. Since a plurality of gaps through which one game ball B can pass are provided on the lower side, there is a possibility that the game balls B will be accepted into the general winning opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 through the gaps.

The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001. Above, it is discharged downward. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

Next, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, a right guide passage group 2540, a space forming portion 2550, a specific obstacle nail group 2700, a second attacker portion 2560, and a lower right unit 2400 are arranged in order from the top. The space forming portion 2550 between the right guide passage group 2540 and the second attacker portion 2560 is provided with a specific obstacle nail group 2700 composed of a plurality of obstacle nails N.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is placed with the strength that the game ball B enters above the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 that becomes lower from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction toward the right. When driven, the game ball B circulates in either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540.

The game ball B, which is hit relatively strongly toward the right side of the center accessory 2500, abuts on the abutment portion 1006 and enters the right first guide passage 2541 of the right guide passage group 2540. On the other hand, the game ball B, which is hit relatively weakly aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500, rolls to the right on the upper surface of the upper end portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and the right guide passage group 2540. Enter the second guide passage on the right 2542.

The game ball B that has entered the right first guide passage 2541 is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2543, and then moves downward from the side close to the peripheral wall portion 2501 between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the right rail 1005. It is released. Then, the game ball B passing through the right first guide passage 2541 enters the first guide region 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 arranged in the space forming portion 2550, and enters the first guide region 2711 in the left-right direction in the first guide region 2711. It flows down while meandering. The game ball B that has flowed through the first guidance region 2711 comes into contact with the guide wall portion 2552 and flows diagonally to the lower right along the guide wall portion 2552.

Since the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 forming the left and right side walls of the first guidance region 2711 form a gap through which one game ball B can pass, the gap is formed between the two in the vertical direction. The game ball B may move to the left outer side or the right outer side (second lead region 2712) of the first guide region 2711 through the game ball B. The game ball B that has moved from the first guide region 2711 to the left outer side flows down to the guide wall portion 2552 through between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the peripheral wall portion 2501. At this time, the flange portion 2502 has a plurality of ridges rear 2554 and the center right front plate 2555 has a plurality of ridge fronts 2555d, so that the flange portion 2502 flows down while meandering in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that has flowed down to the guide wall portion 2552 flows diagonally to the lower right along the guide wall portion 2552. The game ball B that has moved from the first induction region 2711 to the right outer side will circulate in the second induction region 2712.

On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the right second guide passage 2542 is discharged downward from the side close to the right rail 1005 between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the right rail 1005. Then, the game ball B passing through the right second guide passage 2542 enters the second guide region 2712 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 arranged in the space forming portion 2550, and enters the second guide region 2712 in the second guide region 2712 in the left-right direction. It flows down while meandering. The game ball B that has flowed through the second guidance region 2712 comes into contact with the guide wall portion 2552 and flows diagonally to the lower right along the guide wall portion 2552.

Since the plurality of braided nail portions 2701 forming the left and right side walls of the second guidance region 2712 form a gap through which one game ball B can pass, the gap is formed between the two nail portions 2701 in the vertical direction. The game ball B may move to the left outer side (first lead region 2711) or the right outer side of the second lead region 2712 through the game ball B. The game ball B that has moved from the second induction region 2712 to the left outer side circulates in the first induction region 2711. The game ball B that has moved from the second guide region 2712 to the right outside passes between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the right rail 1005 or the right wall portion 2551, and is between the guide wall portion 2552 and the right wall portion 2551. It flows down to the part. At this time, the flange portion 2502 has a plurality of ridges rear 2554 and the center right front plate 2555 has a plurality of ridge fronts 2555d, so that the flange portion 2502 flows down while meandering in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that has moved to the right outside from the second induction region 2712 is received by the first sub-out port 2021 with a high probability and is discharged to the outside of the game region 5a. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then is discharged downward through the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000.

The game ball B guided by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 has the same height as the distribution speed of the game ball B is suppressed as compared with the part where the obstacle nail N is planted in a general gauge arrangement. It will be delayed and flow down.

The game ball B that circulated through the specific obstacle nail group 2700 (space forming portion 2550) and was not accepted by the first sub-out port 2021 was the second attacker portion from between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567. Enter the attacker passage 2564 provided above the second prize opening 2007 of 2560. Under normal conditions, the second prize opening door 2562 moves forward and closes the second prize opening 2007 unacceptably. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the attacker passage 2564 moves forward and closes the second prize opening door 2562. After rolling to the left on the upper surface of the door, it is discharged downward through the right discharge passage 2565. In the attacker passage 2564, the game ball B meanders in the front-rear direction but rolls to the left due to the rear 2564a of the ridge portion of the flange portion 2502 and the front of the ridge portion of the lower right front plate 2572 of the center.

The game ball B discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 of the second attacker portion 2560 flows down while abutting on a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the second attacker portion 2640 and the lower right unit 2400 (left side wall portion 2417). do. Then, with a certain probability, it is accepted by the second starting port 2005, which is always open upward below the right discharge passage 2565. Further, although it is lower than the acceptance probability to the second starting port 2005, it is accepted to the second sub-out port 2022 opened on the right side of the second starting port 2005 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the second starting port 2005 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the second starting port sensor 2401, and then discharged downward. When the game ball B is detected by the second start port sensor 2401, a lottery for the second special symbol is performed and a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward.

The game ball B released from the right discharge passage 2565 and not accepted by either the second starting port 2005 or the second sub-out port 2022 rolls diagonally to the lower left on the inclined wall portion 2418 of the lower right unit 2400. After moving, it is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B circulating in the attacker passage 2564 of the second attacker unit 2560 has a lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005, and the first (Ii) If the second major winning opening door 2562 retracts according to the lottery result of the special symbol, it will be accepted into the second major winning opening 2007 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2007 is supplied into the pseudo game area 2010 after being detected by any of the two second big winning opening sensors 2561 provided below. When the game ball B is detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2561, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

The game ball B supplied into the pseudo-game area 2010 from the second grand prize opening 2007 flows down while abutting on a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo-game area 2010. Then, when the pseudo grand prize opening 2402 is closed by the pseudo grand winning door 2405, it flows down onto the bottom wall portion 2411 through the front of the pseudo grand winning door 2405 and follows the inclination of the bottom wall portion 2411. After rolling to the left, it is accepted by the pseudo-out port 2404. The game ball B received in the pseudo-out port 2404 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward.

When the game ball B is distributed in the pseudo game area 2010, the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005. If the pseudo-large winning opening door 2405 is rotated forward by the peripheral control board 1510 according to the lottery result, there is a high probability that the pseudo-large winning opening door 2405 will come into contact with the pseudo-large winning opening door 2405 and be accepted by the rear pseudo-large winning opening 2402. Be done. The game ball B received in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403, and then discharged downward. By detecting the game ball B by the pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect.

As an effect using the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, depending on the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, according to "big hit", "small hit", etc.) When the second grand prize opening 2007 is open, the peripheral control board 1510 opens the pseudo grand prize opening 2402 for production. At that time, since the peripheral control board 1510 can know the opening timing of the second big winning opening 2007, the degree to which the pseudo big winning opening 2402 picks up the game ball B can be adjusted by the peripheral control board 1510. Utilizing this property, it can be suggested that when a lot of pseudo-large winning openings 2402 pick up the game ball B, it is put into a high probability state (so-called probabilistic state) after "big hit". On the contrary, when there are many omissions at the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, it can be suggested that a low probability state (so-called normal non-probability change state) is reached after a "big hit". Furthermore, it is possible to suggest a probability setting (generally, 6 steps of settings 1 to 6) based on such a missing state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the game ball B is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 in a normal state, there is only a possibility that the game ball B is accepted at the second starting port 2005 to which the privilege is given, and the gate 2002 is opened. Since there is no possibility of passing through or being accepted by the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2004, it is possible to perform a driving operation such that the game ball B is distributed to the left side of the center accessory 2500.

More specifically, the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 and the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second starting port 2005. In the lottery result, the special variation time for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol to the player is set longer in the lottery result of the second special symbol than in the lottery result of the first special symbol. Therefore, since the lottery result of the second special symbol takes longer to consume the reserved number, even if the number of game balls B received per unit time for the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005 is the same. , The number of lottery results of the second special symbol executed by the second starting port 2005 is smaller. Further, even if the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2005, the number of game balls B to be paid out is one. For this reason, under normal conditions, even if the game ball B is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500, only the second starting port 2005 may be accepted, and even if it is accepted at the second starting port 2005, it is a privilege. Since the number of game balls B paid out is one, it is possible to make it easier for the player to drive the game ball B to the left side of the center accessory 2500.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball B is accepted in the first prize opening 2006 or the second prize opening 2007, a privilege that many game balls B are paid out is given. In order to enable the acceptance of the game ball B into the first major winning opening 2006 and the second major winning opening 2007, the first starting port 2004 and the second starting opening 2005 are made to accept the game ball B, and they are used. It is necessary to draw a lottery for the first special symbol and the second special symbol that can be accepted.

For this reason as well, under normal conditions, the game is such that the game ball B flows down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B can be received by the first starting port 2004. The driving operation of the ball B can be performed, the movement of the game ball B guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, and the original game by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the first starting port 2004 It is possible to raise the expectation for the acceptance of the game ball B into the game.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2004, a "hit" (for example, "small hit", "medium hit", "big hit", etc.) is drawn as a lottery result of the first special symbol. Then, since the first prize opening 2006 or the second prize opening 2007 opens and closes, the game ball B is driven so that the game ball B is accepted into the first prize opening 2006 or the second prize opening 2007. The operation can be enjoyed, and the expectation for the acceptance of the game ball B into the first prize opening 2006 or the second prize opening 2007 can be increased.

Specifically, when the first major winning opening 2006 becomes acceptable, the driving operation can be performed so that the game ball B is distributed to the left side of the center accessory 2500. On the other hand, when the second big winning opening 2007 becomes acceptable, the driving operation (“right-handed”) can be performed so that the game ball B is distributed to the right side of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, there is a right guide passage group 2540 composed of a right first guide passage 2541 and a right second guide passage 2542, and a specific obstacle. A guide region 2710 including a first guide region 2711 and a second guide region 2712 by the nail group 2700 is provided, and the guide passage to be distributed facilitates acceptance into the second sub-out port 2022. The driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B circulates in the passage (here, the right first guide passage 2541), and the player can perform the driving operation of the game ball B. Can be entertained.

In addition, since the second major winning opening 2007 has a larger opening in the left-right direction than the first major winning opening 2006, the second major winning opening 2007 can be used in a shorter time at first glance to the player. It is possible to recognize that it is possible to accept many game balls B. As a result, when the second major winning opening 2007 becomes acceptable, the player can immediately change the driving operation so that the game ball B is distributed to the right side of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to raise expectations for the acceptance of the game ball B into the grand prize opening 2007 and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the game ball B is received in the second big winning opening 2007, the game ball B is supplied into the pseudo game area 2010 provided with the pseudo big winning opening 2402 having a larger opening than the second big winning opening 2007. Therefore, it is possible to raise the expectation for the acceptance of the game ball B into the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, and it is possible to enjoy the movement of the game ball B in the pseudo-game area 2010, thereby suppressing the decline in interest. Can be made to.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The back unit 3000 has a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B that is received by the general winning opening 2001 and is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and a general winning opening sensor 3001 that is received by the first starting port 2004 and is behind the game panel 1100. It includes a first start port sensor 3002 that detects the guided game ball B. The general winning opening sensor 3001 and the first starting opening sensor 3002 are provided in the back ball guiding unit 3100.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and is attached to the back wall 3010 having a box-shaped opening 3010a having a square opening 3010a in the rear wall and the rear wall of the back box 3010. It includes a back box rear unit 3030 that is detachably attached by a lock slider 3020, and a back board unit 3040 that is arranged behind the back box rear unit 3030 and is attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010. There is.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided in the lower part near the front end in the back box 3010, and the back ball guidance unit 3100 in which the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 is distributed and the vicinity of the front end in the back box 3010. The back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 provided in the back box 3010, the back upper front effect unit 3300 provided at the upper part in the back box 3010 at substantially the same position as the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, and the inside of the back box 3010. The back bottom front effect unit 3400 provided in the lower part behind the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, and the back top rear effect unit 3500 provided behind the back top front effect unit 3300 in the back box 3010 (FIG. (Refer to 155 and the like), and a back bottom rear effect unit 3600 provided behind the back bottom front effect unit 3400 in the back box 3010.

[5-9a. Back box related]
Next, the configuration related to the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153 and the like. FIG. 151 (a) is a perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 151 (b) is a perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 152 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back box relationship of FIG. 151 disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 152 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the back. FIG. 153 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear box rear unit in FIG. 152 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 153 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the rear.

The back unit 3000 is provided behind the box-shaped back box 3010 opened forward, the back box rear unit 3030 attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010, and the back box rear unit 3030. It includes a back board unit 3040 attached to the rear side of the 3010. The back box rear unit 3030 is detachably attached to the back box 3010 by the lock slider 3020.

The back box 3010 has a box-shaped opening 3010a with an open front and a square penetration through the rear wall, and a back box rear unit 3030 (set plate 1650) provided on the lower side of the opening 3010a. The mounting surface portion 3010b to be mounted, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed from the inside to the upper side in the frame on the upper side of the opening 3010a, and the mounting surface portion 3010b are provided on the lower side near the center in the left-right direction. It includes a lock mechanism portion 3010d to which the lock slider 3020 can be slidably attached to the left and right.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed in a quadrangle having an aspect ratio of 3: 4 when viewed from the front. The opening 3010a is formed so that the left-right direction is substantially the same as the left-right direction of the rear wall of the back box 3010. Further, the opening 3010a is provided at a position where the vertical direction is offset (eccentric) upward with respect to the center of the back box 3010 in the vertical direction. The opening 3010a is formed to have the same size as a 19-inch liquid crystal display device.

The upper fixing piece 1651 of the set plate 1650 in the back box rear unit 3030 is inserted into the two fixing grooves 3010c of the back box 3010 from below. Further, the lower fixing piece 1652 of the set plate 1650 can be inserted into the lock mechanism portion 3010d of the back box 3010 from the rear while the lock slider 3020 is slid to the left in the rear view. When the lower fixing piece 1652 of the set plate 1650 is inserted into the lock mechanism portion 3010d and the lock slider 3020 is slid to the right in rear view, the lock slider 3020 prevents the lower fixing piece 1652 from moving backward. be able to.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the back ball guiding unit 3100 and the like at appropriate positions.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a pair of shaft support portions 3010f capable of rotatably supporting the shaft portion 3041a of the back substrate unit 3040 on the rear surface around the shaft extending in the vertical direction, and a pair of shaft support portions 3010f. Is provided on the rear surface on the opposite side in the left-right direction, and includes a locking portion 3010 g to which the locking claw 3041b of the back substrate unit 3040 is locked.

The back box rear unit 3030 is detachably attached to the rear wall so as to close the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 from the rear. The back box rear unit 3030 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, the set plate 1650 to which the effect display device 1600 is attached to the front side and attached to the back box 3010, and the set plate 1650. It is composed of a peripheral control unit 1500 and a peripheral control unit 1500 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed.

The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch liquid crystal display device having an aspect ratio of 3: 4.

The set plate 1650 is formed in a rectangular shape having the same size as the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. The set plate 1650 has two upper fixing pieces 1651 that are separated from the upper side in the left-right direction and protrude upward, and one lower fixing piece 1652 that protrudes downward from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the lower side. There is. The two upper fixing pieces 1651 are inserted into the fixing grooves 3010c of the back box 3010. The lower fixing piece 1652 is inserted into the lock mechanism portion 3010d of the back box 3010.

Further, the set plate 1650 has a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 1653 that is open to the front side toward the front. The liquid crystal mounting portion 1653 is formed in a size corresponding to the effect display device 1600, and the effect display device 1600 is fitted and mounted from the front. In the present embodiment, the center of the liquid crystal mounting portion 1653 and the center of the set plate 1650 coincide with each other in the front view. The set plate 1650 is formed transparently. As a result, the inside of the back box 3010 can be visually recognized from the rear through the set plate 1650.

The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 160 and the like) having a peripheral control unit 1511 and an effect display control unit 1512, and a peripheral control board box 1520 containing the peripheral control board 1510. Has been done. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the set plate 1650 so that the upper side of the peripheral control board box 1520 is located slightly below the upper side of the set plate 1650. As a result, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the set plate 1650, a region having a height of about 1/3 of the total height of the set plate 1650 is formed between the lower end of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the lower end of the set plate 1650. It is formed.

The back board unit 3040 includes a box-shaped board box 3041 having an L-shaped front view and thin front and rear, and a panel relay board and an effect drive board (not shown) housed in the board box 3041. I have. The substrate box 3041 has two shaft portions 3041a rotatably supported by the shaft support portion 3010f of the back box 3010 on the outer side of the L-shaped vertically extending portion. Further, the substrate box 3041 has a locking claw 3041b that is locked to the locking portion 3010 g of the back box 3010 at the tip of an L-shaped extending portion to the left and right.

The back board unit 3040 is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 so as to straddle the opening 3010a (back box rear unit 3030). When assembled on the game board 5, the L-shaped vertically extending portion of the back substrate unit 3040 is located to the left of the peripheral control unit 1500 in rear view. Further, the L-shaped left and right extending portions of the back substrate unit 3040 are located between the lower end behind the set plate 1650 and the lower end of the peripheral control unit 1500.

The back board unit 3040 releases the locking between the locking portion 3010g and the locking claw 3041b, and rotates the locking claw 3041b around the shaft portion 3041a so that the locking claw 3041b moves rearward, thereby causing the back box. The rear of the rear unit 3030 can be opened, and the back box rear unit 3030 can be attached to and detached from the back box 3010 without removing it from the back box 3010.

In the present embodiment, an opening 3010a having a size capable of attaching a 19-inch liquid crystal display device is provided on the rear wall of the back box 3010 so that the set plate 1650 can be attached to the opening 3010a. A 15-inch effect display device 1600 is attached to the front side of the 1650. As a result, when the effect display device 1600 is 19 inches in size, the effect display device 1600 can be directly attached to the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, and when the effect display device 1600 is smaller than 19 inches, the effect is displayed. It can be attached to the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 via a set plate 1650 corresponding to the size of the display device 1600. Therefore, the effect display device 1600 having a different size can be attached by simply changing the set plate 1650 while leaving the back box 3010 as it is. That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, the design of the back box 3010 is also changed according to the model change, but in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back box 3010 can be used as a common part even if the model is changed. , The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650, when the position of the effect display device 1600 is to be changed due to a design change or the like, it can be easily handled by changing only the set plate 1650. This makes it possible to reduce the cost of design changes and the like.

In the above embodiment, a transparent set plate 1650 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and colored ones such as colored transparent, colored opaque, and the like may be used. When the set plate 1650 is visible from the player side, it is desirable that the set plate 1650 has a translucent color including black. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being unsightly due to the player being able to see the inside of the island equipment or the light from the rear. In this case, in particular, by making the set plate 1650 black, even if the set plate 1650 is visible from the player side, the set plate 1650 can be made inconspicuous, so that the effect display device in the pachinko machine 1 can be made inconspicuous. The 1600 and other decorative objects can be made more conspicuous, and the effect of the effect can be sufficiently exerted.

[5-9b. Back ball guidance unit]
Next, the back ball guidance unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back ball guidance unit 3100 is provided in the lower part of the back box 3010 near the front end. The back ball guidance unit 3100 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and a first starting port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2004. , A magnetic sensor 1050 capable of detecting an illegal magnetism acting on the game board 5 (see FIG. 160 and the like).

The back ball guidance unit 3100 includes a general winning opening 2001, a variable winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, a first major winning opening 2006, a second major winning opening 2007, a first sub-out opening 2021, and It has a discharge passage for receiving the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, guiding the game ball B to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the lower end portion, and then discharging the game ball B downward. There is.

[5-9c. Back front peripheral decoration unit]
Next, the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 is attached near the front end in the back box 3010. When assembled on the game board 5, the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 is for emitting and decorating the back front peripheral edge decorative body 3201 formed in an annular shape along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a and the back front peripheral edge decorative body 3201. It includes a back front peripheral decorative substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

The back front peripheral decoration body 3201 is formed in a shape imitating a sumo ring. The back front peripheral decoration body 3201 is formed so as to have translucency, and can be light-emitting and decorated by light from an LED mounted on the back front peripheral decoration substrate.

According to the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200, the peripheral edge of the game area 5a can be decorated in a ring shape by the back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201, and the appearance of the game area 5a can be improved. Further, by illuminating the back front peripheral edge decorative body 3201, the peripheral edge of the game area 5a can be made to emit light in a ring shape, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game area 5a.

Further, since the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 can independently emit and decorate the portions divided into the plurality of parts in the circumferential direction by the plurality of LEDs of the back front peripheral decoration substrate, the light rotates in the circumferential direction. The light emitting effect can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

[5-9d. Back-up front production unit]
Subsequently, the back-up front effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back-up front effect unit 3300 is provided at a position substantially the same as the back-front peripheral decoration unit 3200 in the front-rear direction in the upper part of the back box 3010. The back-up front effect unit 3300 is provided behind a rectangular back-up front decorative body 3310 that is long in the left-right direction in the front view and a back-up front decorative body 3310, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front. It includes an upper front decorative substrate (not shown) and a back upper front elevating unit (not shown) for raising and lowering the back upper front decorative body 3310.

The back-up front decoration body 3310 is provided so that the sumo rankings such as "Yokozuna", "Ozeki", and "Sekiwake" are arranged from the left, and each number is assigned by the LED of the back-up front decoration board. Is independently luminescent and can be decorated. The back-up front decorative body 3310 is formed to have a length in which the left-right direction crosses the front of the effect display device 1600.

The back-up front decorative body 3310 is attached so as to be able to move up and down, and can be raised and lowered by the back-up front raising and lowering unit. The back-up front decoration body 3310 can be raised and lowered within a range of substantially the same height as the height of the back-up front decoration body 3310. In the normal state, the back-up front decorative body 3310 is in the state of the ascending position moved to the uppermost position. In this state, when assembled on the game board 5, the center in the vertical direction is located at substantially the same height as the upper end of the inner rail 1002 in the front view, and is located at the upper part of the game area 5a. Most of the back-up front decoration body 3310 can be visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the remaining part can be visually recognized through the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500. can.

The back-up front decorative body 3310 can be moved downward from the normal ascending position state to the back-up front elevating unit by the back-up front elevating unit. When the back-up front decoration body 3310 is in the lowered position, the center in the vertical direction is located at substantially the same height as the upper end of the left guide passage group 2530 in the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 159). In the lowered position, substantially the entire back-up front decorative body 3310 can be visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500.

According to the back-up front effect unit 3300, the numbering of the back-up front decoration body 3310 can be independently luminescent and decorated. Therefore, for example, after all the rankings are luminescent and decorated, only one numbering is available. It is possible to perform a light emission effect that is decorated with light emission and stops the fluctuation. As a result, when the high-ranking ranking is luminescent and decorated, the player can be made to think that an opportunity has arrived, the expectation for the game can be raised, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, according to the back-up front decorative body 3310, the ranking of the light-emitting decorations suggests to the player the degree of expectation that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) will occur in which the player is advantageous. can do. As a result, when a plurality of variable light emitting decorations of the back-up front decorative body 3310 are started, the player can be thrilled depending on whether or not the fluctuation is stopped at the desired number. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the back upper front elevating unit moves the back upper front decorative body 3310 from the ascending position to the lowering position, the back upper front decorative body 3310 moves to the center side of the game area 5a and at the same time, on the front surface of the effect display device 1600. Since the upper part is blocked, the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the back-up front decoration body 3310, and the back-up front decoration body 3310 can be focused on. As a result, the light emitting effect using the back-up front decorative body 3310 as described above can be surely shown to the player, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. Further, if the above-mentioned light emitting effect is executed at the descending position rather than at the rising position, the player can feel a premium feeling, so that the reliability of the suggestion of the expectation level by the light emitting effect can be increased. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

[5-9e. Backside front production unit]
Next, the back lower front effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back lower front effect unit 3400 is provided at the lower part in the back box 3010 behind the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200. Back-bottom front effect The Unito 3400 is provided behind the back-bottom front decoration body 3410, which is long in the left-right direction, and the back-bottom front decoration body 3410, and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-bottom front decoration board (illustrated). (Omitted) and a lower back front elevating unit (not shown) for raising and lowering the lower back front decorative body 3410.

The lower back front decorative body 3410 can be light-emitting decorated by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower back front decorative substrate. Further, the lower back front decorative body 3410 is provided so as to be able to move up and down between the lowermost lowering position and the highest ascending position by the lower back lower front elevating unit. The lower back front decorative body 3410 is formed to have a length in which the left-right direction crosses the front of the effect display device 1600.

The lower back front decorative body 3410 can cover the long left and right base decorative body 3411, the central decorative body 3412 provided in the center in the left-right direction of the base decorative body 3411, and the central decorative body 3412 from the front. It has a front left decorative body and a front right decorative body 3414 provided in front of the center in the left-right direction (see FIG. 156 and the like).

The base decorative body 3411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape imitating a rope and has translucency. The central decorative body 3412 has a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the characters "Gourmet" are formed in a relief shape. The central decorative body 3412 is rotatably provided around an axis extending in the front-rear direction about the center by a drive motor (not shown).

The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are located so as to be in contact with each other, and are provided so as to be movable so as to be separated from each other in the left-right direction. The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are each translucent. In the front left decorative body 3413, the characters "heaven" are formed in a relief shape. In the front right decorative body 3414, the characters "Noboru" are formed in a relief shape.

The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are normally located in a closed position where they are in close contact with each other, and the central decorative body 3412 provided at the rear is hidden from the front invisible. ing. The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 can be moved from the normal state to open positions that are separated from each other in the left-right direction. In this open position, the central decorative body 3412 provided at the rear can be visually recognized from the front through between the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414.

In the normal state of the under-back front effect unit 3400, the under-back front decorative body 3410 is located at a lowered position. Further, in the normal state, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are located at the closed positions, and the central decorative body 3412 is invisible from the front. When the back lower front decorative body 3410 in the normal state is assembled on the game board 5, the center in the vertical direction is located at a height slightly above the side upper left unit 2300, and the lower end is the lower end of the center accessory 2500. The upper end is located at a height slightly below the warp entrance 2511. A part of the back lower front decoration body 3410 in this normal state is visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the rest is the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500. It is visible through.

The lower back front decorative body 3410 can be moved from the lower back position to the upper back position by the lower back lower front elevating unit. In the state where the lower back front decorative body 3410 is in the raised position, the upper end is located at a height slightly lower than the back upper front decorative body 3310 in the raised position (see FIG. 154). In other words, the lower back front decorative body 3410 in the ascending position is located at the center in the vertical direction at substantially the same height as the first grand prize opening 2006. Further, the lower back front decorative body 3410 holds the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 between the open position and the closed position at an arbitrary position (height) between the lowered position and the raised position. Can be moved.

According to the back bottom front effect unit 3400, when the back bottom front decoration body 3410 is moved upward from the descending position, it moves to the center side of the game area 5a and blocks a part of the effect display device 1600, so that the player It is possible to attract the attention of the under-back front decoration body 3410.

Further, in the lower back front decorative body 3410, when the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are moved from the closed position to the open position, the central decorative body 3412 provided at the rear becomes visible (appears). ) Therefore, the appearance of the centerpiece 3412 can make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, in the lower back front decorative body 3410, since the central decorative body 3412 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are moved to the open position to perform the central decoration. Rotating the centerpiece 3412 with the body 3412 appearing can make the player feel strongly that there must be something good, further raising the player's expectations. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. Further, since the central decorative body 3412 can be rotated, when the central decorative body 3412 appears visibly, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the central decorative body 3412 is rotated. Can be entertained.

Further, in the back lower front effect unit 3400, the central decorative body 3412 appears due to the raising and lowering of the back lower front decorative body 3410, the movement of the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414, and the rotation of the central decorative body 3412. By appropriately combining,, it is possible to show the player a variety of movable effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, in the back bottom front effect unit 3400, in addition to the above-mentioned movable effect of the back bottom front decorative body 3410, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect by a plurality of LEDs on the back bottom front decorative substrate, so that a wider variety of effects can be achieved. It can be shown to the player, entertaining the player and suppressing the decline in interest.

[5-9f. After-back production unit]
Next, the back-up post-effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described. The back-up rear effect unit 3500 is provided at the upper part in the back box 3010 and behind the back-up front effect unit 3300. The back-up rear effect unit 3500 is provided behind the back-up rear decoration body 3510 (see FIG. 155, etc.), which is long in the left-right direction, and the back-up rear decoration body 3510, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. It includes a back-up rear decorative substrate (not shown) and a back-up rear elevating unit (not shown) for raising and lowering the back-up rear decorative body 3510.

The back-up rear decoration body 3510 has translucency, and can be light-emitting and decorated by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-up rear decoration substrate. Further, the back-up rear decorative body 3510 is provided so as to be able to move up and down between the highest ascending position and the most lowered lowering position by the back-up rear elevating unit. Further, the back upper rear decorative body 3510 is provided behind the back lower front decorative body 3410.

The back-up rear decoration body 3510 is formed in a shape imitating the upper half of the winning cup, and the letter "Yu" is formed in a relief shape in the center in the left-right direction. The back-up rear decoration body 3510 can form one large victory cup when the back-bottom rear decoration body 3610 abuts on the lower end (see FIG. 157 and the like). The back-up rear decorative body 3510 has substantially the same height as the back-up front decorative body 3310.

In the normal state of the back-up rear effect unit 3500, the back-up rear decorative body 3510 is located in the raised position. In this state, the back-up rear decoration body 3510 is located behind the back-up front decoration body 3310 in the raised position, and is invisible from the front.

In the back-up rear effect unit 3500, when the back-up rear decorative body 3510 is moved to the descending position by the back-up rear elevating unit, the lower end of the back-up rear decorative body 3510 is substantially the height of the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. It is located in the area. When the decorative body 3510 is moved downward from the ascending position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600. In this state, if the back upper front decorative body 3310 or the back lower front decorative body 3410 has not moved in front of the back upper rear decorative body 3510, the back upper rear decorative body 3510 is visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500. can do.

According to the back-up rear decoration unit 3500, by raising and lowering the back-up rear decoration body 3510, it can be made visible from the front, so that the appearance of the back-up rear decoration body 3510 may surprise the player. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest. Further, since the back-up rear decoration body 3510 can form one large decoration by abutting the back-bottom rear decoration body 3610, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by making people think that an opportunity has arrived.

[5-9 g. After-the-back production unit]
Next, the backside rear effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The under-back effect unit 3600 is provided behind the under-back effect unit 3400 in the lower part of the back box 3010. The back-bottom rear effect unit 3600 is provided behind the back-bottom rear decoration body 3610 (see FIG. 155, etc.), which is long in the left-right direction, and the back-bottom rear decoration body 3610, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. It includes a lower back decorative substrate (not shown) and a lower back elevating unit (not shown) for raising and lowering the lower back decorative body 3610.

The under-back decorative body 3610 has translucency, and can be light-emitting and decorated by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the under-back decorative substrate. Further, the back lower rear decorative body 3610 is provided so as to be able to move up and down between the most lowered lowering position and the most raised rising position by the back lower rear elevating unit.

The lower back decoration body 3610 is formed in a shape imitating the lower half of the winning cup, and the letters "Prize" are formed in a relief shape in the center in the left-right direction. The back-up rear decoration body 3610 can form one large victory cup when the back-up rear decoration body 3510 abuts on the upper end (see FIG. 157 and the like). The lower back decorative body 3610 has substantially the same height as the lower back front decorative body 3410.

In the normal state of the under-back effect unit 3600, the under-back decorative body 3610 is located in the lowered position. In this state, the lower back decorative body 3610 is located behind the lower back front decorative body 3410 in the descending position, and is invisible from the front.

In the back lower rear effect unit 3600, when the back lower rear decorative body 3610 is moved to the ascending position by the back lower rear elevating unit, the upper end of the back lower rear decorative body 3610 is the lower end of the back upper rear decorative body 3510 in the raised position. It is located at a height that makes contact with. When the decorative body 3610 is moved upward from the lowered position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600. In this state, if the back upper front decorative body 3310 or the back lower front decorative body 3410 has not moved in front of the back lower rear decorative body 3610, the back lower rear decorative body 3610 is visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500. can do.

According to the under-back effect unit 3600, by raising and lowering the under-back decorative body 3610, it can be made visible from the front, so that the appearance of the under-back decorative body 3610 may surprise the player. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest. Further, since the back lower rear decorative body 3610 can form one large decoration by abutting the back upper rear decorative body 3510, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by making people think that an opportunity has arrived.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, the main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 154 to 159 and the like. FIG. 154 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back lower front decorative body of the back lower front effect unit and the back lower rear decorative body of the back lower rear effect unit in the back unit are moved to the ascending positions, respectively. .. In FIG. 155, the back lower front decoration body of the back lower front effect unit in the back unit is moved to the center of the game area, and the back upper rear decoration of the back upper rear effect unit is moved to the upper side of the back lower front decoration body. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-bottom rear decoration of the back-bottom rear effect unit is moving to the underside of the back-bottom front decoration. FIG. 156 shows a state in which the front left decorative body and the front right decorative body in the back lower front decorative body of the back lower front effect unit move to open positions with each other and the central decorative body appears in the state of FIG. 155. It is a front view of a game board.

Further, in FIG. 157, the back-up and rear-rear decoration unit of the back-up and rear-effect unit in the back unit is moved to the descending position, and the back-up and rear-representation unit and the back-lower and rear-decorative body are raised to raise the back-up and rear-decorative body. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which is in contact with. FIG. 158 shows a state in which the front left decorative body and the front right decorative body in the back lower front decorative body of the back lower front effect unit move to open positions with each other and the central decorative body appears in the state of FIG. 157. It is a front view of a game board. In FIG. 159, the back-up front decoration of the back-up front effect unit in the back unit is moved to the descending position, and the back-up rear decoration of the back-up rear effect unit is moved to the rear of the back-up front decoration. The back lower front decoration of the back lower front production unit rises and moves to the lower side of the back upper front decoration, and the back lower rear decoration of the back lower back production unit rises and moves to the lower back upper front decoration. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which is in contact with the decorative body after the back upper side of the body.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that divides the rear end side of the game area 5a, a start port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and a side. Since the upper left unit 2300, the lower right unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, and the gate member 2600 are formed substantially entirely transparent, under normal conditions, as shown in FIG. 142, the game panel is passed through them. In the back unit 3000 arranged behind the 1100, the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 of the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back upper front decorative body 3310 of the back upper front effect unit 3300, and the back lower front effect unit 3400. The front decorative body 3410, etc. can be satisfactorily visually recognized, and the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be satisfactorily visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500.

More specifically, the back front peripheral decoration unit 3201 of the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 is provided in an annular shape along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a, and is visually recognized through a transparent game panel 1100, a center accessory 2500, or the like. Can be done. The back-up front decoration unit 3310 of the back-up front effect unit 3300 is located above the upper end of the effect display device 1600 and at an ascending position where the center in the vertical direction is substantially the same height as the upper end of the inner rail 1002. Most of them can be visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the remaining parts can be visually recognized through the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500.

Further, the back lower front decorative body 3410 of the back lower front effect unit 3400 is located at a lower position near the lower end of the effect display device 1600 so that the center in the vertical direction is slightly higher than the side upper left unit 2300. A part can be visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the rest can be visually recognized through the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500. The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 are located directly above the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500. The effect display device 1600 can be satisfactorily visually recognized within the frame of the center accessory 2500 through the square area between the back upper front decorative body 3310 and the back lower front decorative body 3410.

The back-up rear decoration unit 3510 of the back-up rear effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 is located behind the back-up front decoration 3310 and cannot be visually recognized from the front. Further, the back lower rear decorative body 3610 of the back lower rear effect unit 3600 is located behind the back lower front decorative body 3410 and cannot be visually recognized from the front.

The game board 5 has a back unit 3000 according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol, which are drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005. The back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back upper front effect unit 3300, the back lower front effect unit 3400, the back upper rear effect unit 3500, the back lower rear effect unit 3600, and the like perform predetermined movable effects and light emission effects. Further, the game board 5 performs an effect using the game ball B (here, a so-called dead ball that does not affect the game) in the lower right unit 2400 of the table unit 2000.

Specifically, for example, the back unit 3000 can be used to perform a movable effect as shown in FIGS. 154 to 157. First, as shown in FIG. 154, the back lower front decorative body 3410 of the back lower front effect unit 3400 and the back lower rear decorative body 3610 of the back lower rear effect unit 3600 are moved together to the ascending position, respectively. As a result, the back lower front decorative body 3410 crossing the effect display device 1600 moves upward so as to traverse the effect display device 1600, so that the player's interest is attracted to the back lower front decorative body 3410. You can do it and make you think there is something good about it.

By the way, in FIG. 154, when only the lower back decorative body 3410 is moved upward, the lower back decorative body 3610 in the descending position becomes visible from the front, but the lower back decorative body 3610 is on the back upper side. Since it is formed so as to form a pair with respect to the rear decorative body 3510, if only the back lower rear decorative body 3610 can be visually recognized, it looks half-finished and unnatural, and the appearance of the game area 5a deteriorates. There is a fear. Further, when the back-up and rear decorative body 3610 is visible, some players recognize that it is combined with other decorative bodies due to its incomplete shape, and the combination with the back-up and rear decorative body 3510 described later. When the movable effect of is executed, the impact on the player is reduced, and there is a risk that a sufficient effect cannot be obtained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the back lower back decorative body 3610 is moved upward together with the back lower front decorative body 3410, the back lower rear decorative body 3610 can be kept hidden. It is possible to prevent the appearance in the game area 5a from being deteriorated, and it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the back-up rear decoration body 3610. It is possible to fully exert the effect of the production.

Next, from the state shown in FIG. 154, as shown in FIG. 155, the lower back front decorative body 3410 is moved to the center of the game area. At this time, for the same reason as described above, the back lower rear decoration body 3610 is moved together with the back lower front decoration body 3410 so that the back lower front decoration body 3410 is located forward. Further, the back upper rear decorative body 3510 is moved to the portion between the back upper front decorative body 3310 and the back lower front decorative body 3410, and the back lower rear decorative body 3610 is moved to the lower side of the back lower front decorative body 3410. Let me.

As a result, the front surface of the effect display device 1600 is substantially covered by the back upper rear decorative body 3510, the back lower front decorative body 3410, and the back lower rear decorative body 3610, which has a strong impact on the player. It can be given and can make you strongly think that there is something good. In this state, the back-up rear decoration body 3510 and the back-bottom rear decoration body 3610, which form one decoration (here, the winning cup), are separated from each other vertically, but in between. Since the back lower front decoration 3410 is located, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the middle of the long winning cup is hidden by the back lower front decoration 3410, which makes the appearance worse. Can be avoided.

Then, from the state shown in FIG. 155, as shown in FIG. 156, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 are moved from the closed position close to each other to the open position separated from each other. The central decorative body 3412 is made to appear visibly between the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414. As a result, when the central decorative body 3412 newly appears in the back lower front decorative body 3410, an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming state) in which the player is advantageous to the player occurs. It can be strongly reminded, and it is possible to raise expectations for an advantageous gaming state and suppress a decline in interest.

When the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are moved to the open position, they may be gradually moved or may be repeatedly opened and closed. As a result, the player can be thrilled and excited depending on whether or not the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are opened and the central decorative body 3412 appears, and the player can be entertained.

In the state shown in FIG. 156, the central decorative body 3412 of the lower back front decorative body 3410 may be further rotated. As a result, the rotation of the central decorative body 3412 can convince the player that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming state) in which the player is advantageous occurs. It is possible to raise expectations and suppress the decline in interest.

Subsequently, from the state shown in FIG. 156, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 are moved to the closed positions as shown in FIG. 155, and then as shown in FIG. 157. The back lower front decorative body 3410 is moved to the descending position, and the back upper rear decorative body 3510 and the back lower rear decorative body 3610 are moved to the center in the vertical direction and brought into contact with each other (coalescing). As a result, a large winning cup appears in the center of the game area 5a, so that the player can be convinced that an advantageous game state (for example, a "big hit" game state) in which the player is advantageous will occur. , It is possible to raise the expectation for the advantageous gaming state and suppress the decline in the interest.

Then, from the state shown in FIG. 157, as shown in FIG. 158, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 are moved from the closed position to the open position. As a result, the player can be strongly convinced that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming state) in which the player is advantageous occurs, which raises the expectation for the advantageous gaming state and reduces the interest. Can be suppressed.

In the state shown in FIG. 158, the central decorative body 3412 of the lower back front decorative body 3410 may be rotated. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state (for example, the "big hit" gaming state) in which the player is advantageous has been confirmed, and the expectation for the advantageous gaming state is raised. Can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 154, as the first operation, the back lower front decorative body 3410 (back lower rear decorative body 3610) is moved to the ascending position, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 159, the back upper front decoration body 3310 is moved to the descending position, and the back upper rear decoration body 3510 is moved together with the back upper front decoration body 3310 to the back upper front decoration body 3310. The back lower front decoration body 3410 is moved to the rear side, and the back lower front decoration body 3410 is moved to the lower side of the back upper front decoration body 3310, and the back lower rear decoration body 3610 is moved to the rear side of the back lower front decoration body 3410 together with the back lower front decoration body 3410. You may move it to. Alternatively, the lower back decorative body 3410 may be moved to the center of the game area 5a together with the lower back decorative body 3610. With these, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

As described above, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the series of effects as described above is a lottery of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005. It is executed according to the result and the lottery result of the second special symbol, and can entertain the player. In addition, a series of productions are made to proceed to the end or end in the middle according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol, which are drawn in multiple stages. By showing it, it is difficult for the player to get bored.

Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect as described above can be appropriately combined with the light emitting effect, and also combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, it is possible to present a variety of patterns to the player by appropriately combining the light emission effect, the display effect, and the like, and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored. It can be entertained, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the above-mentioned movable effect is the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005, and the first (Ii) Although the one to be executed according to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be executed according to the detection of the game ball B by the pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403. As a result, even during an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming state) in which the player is advantageous, the movable production can be enjoyed, the player is less likely to get bored, and the deterioration of the interest is suppressed. be able to.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 160 and the like. FIG. 160 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control unit 1511 and the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 1310. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the above. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 195.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. The MPU 1310a, the main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), the main control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and the main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. The circuit, the RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, the setting display 1310g for displaying the set value and the error display, and the game board 5 are divided. It is provided with a base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a formed. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM") of the main control MPU 1310a. It also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out an ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the register changes to a content that does not make sense, the main control MPU 1310a is forced to be affected by electrical noise. It is a circuit to reset. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be invalidated by being controlled by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power off processing described later, and again executes the main control side power on power processing described later. Will be reset. In this case, since the main control side power off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (as described later). Will be cleared). Even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control board 1310 (main control) does not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633 from the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a. Only the MPU1310a) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 will be maintained in the activated state.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit that updates the big hit determination random number to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game among various random numbers related to the game by hardware (hereinafter, "hard random number with built-in main control"). It is described as "circuit".) Is built-in. This main control built-in hard random number circuit generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value of 65535 is preset as a minimum value), and an initial value is generated. The circuit is configured so that a predetermined value is not fixed as a value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a single value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and a clock signal (main) input to the main control MPU 1310a. Based on the control MPU 1310a (clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without duplication, and within the predetermined numerical range. When all the values in the above are extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a random number for jackpot determination. It is designed to be set as.

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various sensors are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from the various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit to be used.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2004, and a second start for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2005. The mouth sensor 2401, the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, the gate sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate 2002, and the game received in the first large winning opening 2006. The first big winning opening sensor 2525 that detects the ball B, the second big winning opening sensor 2561 that detects the game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2007, and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 are detected. The detection signals from the out sensor 664, the magnetic sensor 1050 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, the vibration sensor that detects the vibration acting on the game board 5, etc. are the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. It is input to the input terminal of the specified input port of.

Further, each detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch are transmitted via the payout control board 633 (via, that is, the payout control input circuit and the payout control output circuit described later). When they are input to the main control board 1310 as they are, they are input to the input terminals of the predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first start port sensor 3002, and the second start port sensor 2401 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without passing through another board, that is, the main control. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via an input circuit. On the other hand, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2601, the first winning opening sensor 2525, the second major winning opening sensor 2561, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the vibration sensor are transmitted to the panel relay board. It is input to the main control board 1310 via, that is, indirectly, and is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the variable winning port solenoid 2522, the first The drive signals to the large winning opening solenoid 2524 and the second winning opening solenoid 2563 are output via the panel relay board, that is, indirectly, or from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the function display unit 1400. Status indicator, ordinary symbol indicator, ordinary hold indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special hold number indicator, second special symbol indicator, second special hold number indicator, round indicator, to Each drive signal is output without going through another board, that is, directly. Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the setting change board 1311 by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information related to the game (game information) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, thereby outputting various information related to the game (game information) to the payout control board 633. By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power failure clear signal) can be output to the power failure monitoring circuit, or the game ball B can be output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B, a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B is output to the payout control board 633. The logic of the launch permission signal that conveys that the launch is permitted is set to the launch permission logic when the launch is permitted, while the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is the reverse of the launch permission logic when the launch is not permitted. Is set to. As for the logic of the launch permission signal, as an initial value (default), the launch permission signal setting process in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is started after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored). It is composed of hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so as to be set to a launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted.

In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2401, the variable winning opening sensor 2526, the gate sensor 2601, the first major winning opening sensor 2525, the second major winning opening sensor 2561, and the out sensor. The non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the 664, while the contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, the variable winning opening 2003, and the gate 2002, so that the first starting port sensor 3002 and the second starting port sensor 3002 and the second starting port sensor Detection of the game ball B by 2401 and the gate sensor 2601 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2401, the variable winning opening sensor 2526, and the gate sensor 2601.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2006 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the first big winning opening sensor The detection of the game ball B by 2525 also frequently occurs. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is also used for the first prize opening sensor 2525. Further, since the game ball B launched into the game area 5a is collected in a large amount by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5, the game ball B is frequently detected by the out sensor 664. Occurs in. For this reason, a proximity switch having high durability and a long life is used for the out sensor 664 as well. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch. Regardless of whether the game ball B frequently enters the general winning opening 2001, a proximity switch having high durability and a long life may be used.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. The main control MPU 1310a will be described in detail later, but when it receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, it formats these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. It is equipped with. With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1310a can store various information in the RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of the game ball B, performs launch control by the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout and the launch solenoid 542, and launches by ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that has a pressing operation unit for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and a ball during maintenance. A ball removal switch for discharging the game ball B in the tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guidance unit 570, and the payout device 580 to the outside (upper plate 201) of the pachinko machine 1 to start the ball removal operation. , Is equipped.

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is a micro that contains a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 is paid out. The detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

The detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit and payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the payout device 580, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the power failure of the main control board 1310. The power failure warning signal from the monitoring circuit and the error release signal from the error release switch are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal plate 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, which displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, it is a ball. Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that a "count switch error" has occurred (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , When the number "5" is displayed, a "retry error" is notified (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it indicates that the tank is full (specifically, the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 633 to the CR unit). When the number "9" is displayed, it is informed that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of balls of the game ball B that has not been paid out has reached a predetermined number). ..

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is used for ball lending. It is input to and displayed on the ball rental display unit 226 of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b has a launch control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to launch, an oscillation circuit for outputting a clock signal at regular time intervals, and the clock signal. Based on this, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and a launch It is provided with a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on a reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game region 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 195, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will is detected. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit. The launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys that the launch of the game ball B is permitted is input to the launch control input circuit and then input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 195 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In the launch timing control circuit, the launch condition 1 that the palm or finger is touching the handle 195 is satisfied based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, and the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are formed based on the CR connection signal. If the launch condition 2 that the solenoids are electrically connected is satisfied and the launch condition 3 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted based on the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 is not satisfied, the game ball B is not satisfied. Since the firing reference pulse for launching the game toward the game area 5a is not output, for example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be launched.

In this launch solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch reference pulse generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle 195. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper dish 201 of the dish unit 200 One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to move the received game ball B to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

In the present embodiment, the payout control board 633 is provided with the launch control unit 633b, which controls the launch by the launch solenoid 542 and the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145, but the power supply board 630 is provided. It may be configured. In this case, the emission permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be directly input to the power supply board 630, may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and is shown in the figure. It may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that does not.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 160, the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the above.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration of the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is omitted, the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like are mounted on one semiconductor chip. The integrated peripheral control IC, the peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, the sound source IC that performs high-quality performance, and the sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by this sound source IC. It has a stored sound ROM.

A plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. are integrated on one semiconductor chip in the peripheral control IC, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, the peripherals are based on the various commands. The CPU of the control IC outputs the game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the game board 5, and serial I / O for the lamp drive board. For the game board decorative drive board, the game board side drive data for transmitting from the port to each decorative board of the game board 5 and outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating various production units provided on the game board 5. Transmission from the serial I / O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5, or drive signals to the vibration motor 356 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the sudden output adjustment drive motor 381, and the like. It is composed of door-side drive data for outputting the data, and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. The door side drive light emission data to be transmitted is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side, and the control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed serial for the display control unit. In addition to transmitting data from the I / O port to the effect display control unit 1512, it also outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

The detection signals from the contact detection sensor main body 358, the pressure detection sensor 373, the elevating detection sensor 374, and the sudden output detection sensor 375 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

Further, in the CPU of the peripheral control IC, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect display control unit is based on this operation signal. The operation of 1512 is monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and provides the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the like provided in the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. , The main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 and the like are controlled so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects are played. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume adjusting switch protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 have acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, etc.) as sound information. By sending a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). The built-in WDT and the external WDT are used in combination to diagnose whether or not the own system is out of control.

The display command output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2. Kilo (k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, the movable body drive command, etc. output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side are a plurality of serial inputs / outputs different from the display commands. It is performed by the port, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

[6-3b. Production display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 displays and controls a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that displays and controls the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. It is in control. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an execution signal is input from VDP and the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, and the control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. As the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM is defined.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM, outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an executing signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. This "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line that draws the left-right direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded in the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when displaying various characters on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "the order of superimposing the sprites").

The sprite is composed of a plurality of rectangular areas having 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in width 2 x height 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 repeats a main scan for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels and a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction in order from left to right when viewed from the front. Driven by sub-scanning performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially performs one line from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as the main scan. Output to each pixel. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, it is based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scan, the output is sequentially output to one line of pixels from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game content]
The content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 147 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player by rotating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, the game board 5 is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The striking strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195, and the more it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the striking can be, and a maximum of 100 game balls can be continuously driven per minute. B, that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in front of the game panel 1100 at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N to cause the game ball. The flow speed of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movements can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N while contacting the plurality of obstacle nails N. Either the left first guide passage 2531 or the left second guide passage 2532 of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center accessory 2500 will be distributed. Near the entrance in the left second guide passage 2532, the first prize entrance 2006, which is normally closed by the first prize entrance door 2523, is provided, and the left second guide passage 2532 The game ball B that has entered the game rolls on the first prize opening door 2523 and flows down.

The game ball B that has circulated through the left guide passage group 2530 is released above the gate 2002, and is normally closed by the variable winning opening door 2521. On the left and right sides of the variable winning opening 2003, the left guide passage group 2530 and the gate After contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the door and the 2002, the gate 2002 is passed through the gate 2002 with a certain probability.

When the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 and is detected by the gate sensor 2601, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and if the lottery result of the drawn normal symbols is "normal hit", the variable winning opening The variable winning opening 2003 closed by the door 2521 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be accepted into the variable winning opening 2003.

In the present embodiment, since the variable winning opening 2003 is provided near the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, it is higher to distribute the left second guide passage 2532 than to the left first guide passage 2531. It is accepted by the variable winning opening 2003 with a probability. Then, when the game balls B are received in the variable winning opening 2003, a predetermined number (for example, 1 to 5) of game balls B are released from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is paid out to.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by passing the game ball B through the gate 2002, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to suggesting the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (for example,). 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the lottery result of this ordinary symbol is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The variable winning opening 2003 is normally opened after the lapse of the variable time.

If the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 between the time when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 and the time when the lottery result of the normal symbol is suggested, the suggestion of the lottery result of the normal symbol cannot be started. Therefore, the start of suggestion of the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the previous ordinary symbol is completed. In addition, the number of pending lottery results of ordinary symbols is limited to four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, the number of pending cards is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

At the site of the gate 2002, the game ball B flows down any of the gate 2002, the left outer side of the gate 2002, and the right outer side of the gate 2002. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down below the gate 2002 enters the warp entrance 2511 that is open to the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. In the present embodiment, the game ball B that has passed through the right outside of the gate 2002 enters the warp entrance 2511 with a high probability by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the area between the gate 2002 and the wind turbine W. ..

Then, the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth from side to side, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the central discharge portion 2513a is located directly above the first starting port 2004, so that the first is likely to occur. Accepted at the start port 2004.

When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, the first special symbol (for example, "missing", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", A lottery will be held for "time reduction (time reduction) hit", "probability change time reduction hit", "probability change time reduction no hit", "second big hit", etc.). If the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is other than "missing", an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time).

In the present embodiment, the first start is performed from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first start port 2004 (special variation time). When the game ball B is accepted in the mouth 2004, the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol cannot be started. Therefore, until the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn earlier is completed, the first special The start of suggestion of the lottery result of the symbol is suspended. The number of pending first special symbol lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting openings 2004, and for more than that, the game ball B is accepted at the first starting opening 2004. However, the lottery result of the first special symbol is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 may be received by the first start port 2004 of the start port unit 2100.

By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200. There is a possibility that the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting port 2004 of the starting port unit 2100 will be accepted. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, it is to the right of the center accessory 2500. It is discharged to the space forming portion 2550 where the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is planted through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the guide passage group 2540.

The right guide passage group 2540 of the center accessory 2500 has an entrance to the right first guide passage 2541 whose entrance is open in the vicinity of the abutment portion 1006 and an entrance to the left at intervals from the entrance of the right first guide passage 2541. It is composed of a right second guide passage 2542 and an opening. As a result, when the game ball B is driven with a strength that abuts on the abutting portion 1006 (so-called right-handed striking), it enters the right first guide passage 2541 and has a strength that does not abut on the abutting portion 1006 (right). When the game ball B is hit with a strength that is somewhat weaker than the hit, there is a high probability that the game ball B will enter the right second guide passage 2542. That is, the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 circulates in either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 according to the driving strength.

In the present embodiment, the game ball B circulated through the right first guide passage 2541 is released into the first guide region 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the game ball B circulated through the right second guide passage 2542 is a specific obstacle. It is released into the second lead region 2712 of the nail group 2700.

The game ball B released to the specific obstacle nail group 2700 flows down while meandering in the left-right direction along the guidance region 2710. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed in the portion of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 as compared with the normal region.

In the first guidance region 2711 and the second guidance region 2712, the game ball B may deviate from the guidance region 2710, and when it deviates from the second guidance region 2712 to the right outside, the first sub-out port 2021 provided below is provided. Will be accepted with high probability. When the game ball B is received in the first sub-out opening 2021, it is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a without any chance of being accepted in the second big winning opening 2007 or the second starting opening 2005 provided downstream.

In the present embodiment, it is configured so that the distribution of the right second guide passage 2542 is more likely to be accepted by the first sub-out port 2021 than the right first guide passage 2541. This makes it possible for the player to perform a driving operation of the game ball B so that the game ball B is distributed in the right first guide passage 2541 at the time of "right-handed". There is. That is, at the time of "right-handed", the driving operation of rotating the handle 195 greatly is prompted so that the game ball B is driven with a strength such that the game ball B abuts on the abutting portion 1006. This makes it easier to entertain the original game of the pachinko machine 1 with a relatively easy driving operation.

The game ball B that circulates through the specific obstacle nail group 2700 (space forming portion 2550) and is not received by the first sub-out port 2021 passes between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 and is the second attacker. Enter the section 2560. Under normal conditions, the second major winning opening 2007 provided in the second attacker portion 2560 is closed by the second major winning opening door 2562 so that the game ball B cannot be accepted, so that the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker are closed. The game ball B that has passed between the right wall portion 2567 flows down onto the second prize-winning door 2562, rolls to the left on the second prize-winning door 2562 (attacker passage 2564), and then to the right. It is discharged downward from the second attacker portion 2560 through the discharge passage 2565.

A second starting port 2005 is provided below the right discharge passage 2565, a second sub-out port 2022 is provided on the right side of the second starting port 2005, and a lower right unit 2400 is provided on the left side of the second starting port 2005. Inclined wall portions 2418 are provided respectively. Further, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the exit of the right discharge passage 2565, the second starting port 2005, the second sub-out port 2022, and the inclined wall portion 2418. Therefore, the game ball B discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 is received by the second starting port 2005 with a certain probability. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 is received by the second sub-out port 2022 with a lower probability than that of the second starting port 2005. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a.

Then, the game ball B, which is discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 and is not received in the second starting port 2005 or the second sub-out port 2022, flows down on the inclined wall portion 2418 and becomes inclined on the inclined wall portion 2418. It rolls diagonally to the lower left along the line, is discharged to the left at a portion below the first starting port 2004, and is received by the out port 1008.

That is, in a normal state, when the game ball B is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (when "right-handed"), only the second starting port 2005 has an opportunity to accept the game ball B. As a result, in a normal state, the player can be made to positively perform a driving operation such that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the right side of the center accessory 2500 (““ It is possible to give a premium feeling to "right-handed").

When the game balls B driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 are received in the second starting port 2005, a predetermined number (for example, one) is sent from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. The game ball B is paid out to the upper plate 201, and on the main control board 1310, the second special symbol (for example, "missing", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit" , "Probability change (probability change) hit", "Time reduction (time reduction) hit", "Probability change time reduction hit", "Probability change time reduction no hit", "Second big hit", etc.) will be drawn. If the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn is other than "missing", an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by the player takes a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time) longer than the special fluctuation time of the lottery result of the first special symbol. Suggested in.

In the present embodiment, the second start is performed from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the second start port 2005 (special variation time). When the game ball B is accepted in the mouth 2005, the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol cannot be started. Therefore, the second special until the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn earlier is completed. The start of suggestion of the lottery result of the symbol is suspended. The number of pending second special symbol lottery results is limited to four for each of the second starting openings 2005, and for more than that, the game ball B is accepted at the second starting opening 2005. However, the lottery result of the second special symbol is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The special variation time of the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2005 is the special variation time of the first special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting port 2004. It is set longer than the special fluctuation time of the lottery result. As a result, the lottery result of the second special symbol takes longer to consume the reserved number, so that the number of game balls B received per unit time for the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005 is the same. However, the number of lottery results of the second special symbol executed by the second starting port 2005 is smaller. Therefore, under normal conditions, even if the game ball B is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500, only the second starting port 2005 may be accepted, and the lottery result of the second special symbol is rarely executed. , The player can be made to positively perform a driving operation such that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center accessory 2500.

As described above, the first big prize is obtained based on the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B at the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005. The mouth 2006 and the second big winning mouth 2007 open and close in a predetermined opening / closing pattern, and the game ball B is ready to be accepted.

When the first prize opening 2006 becomes acceptable, the first prize opening 2006 is provided in the left second guide passage 2532 on the left side of the center accessory 2500, so that the player can see the left first prize opening 2006. (Ii) The driving operation can be performed so that the game ball B circulates in the guide passage 2532. Then, when the game ball B that has entered the left second guide passage 2532 is received by the first prize opening 2006 when the first prize opening 2006 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted, the main control board 1310 and the main control board 1310 and A predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 by the payout control board 633 to the upper plate 201.

On the other hand, when the second major winning opening 2007 becomes acceptable, the second major winning opening 2007 is provided below the right side of the center accessory 2500, so that the player can see the right side of the center accessory 2500. The driving operation can be performed so that the game ball B is distributed. Then, when the second big winning opening 2007 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted, the game ball B that has entered the attacker passage 2564 of the second attacker part 2560 from between the guidance wall part 2552 and the attacker right wall part 2567. Is accepted into the second prize opening 2007, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 to the upper plate 201. Will be done.

In this way, when the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 can accept the game ball B, the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 can accept the game ball B. Since a large number of game balls B can be paid out, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

By the way, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is, for example, "small hit", the second big winning opening 2007 can accept the game ball B for a short time. It opens and closes in between (for example, a small hit rush). At this time, even if an attempt is made to hit the game ball B aiming at the second big prize opening 2007 at the timing when the second big winning opening 2007 opens and the game ball B can be accepted, the second big winning opening 2007 Since the specific obstacle nail group 2700 capable of delaying the flow speed of the game ball B is provided upstream, it is difficult to take the timing of hitting the game ball B. As a result, the difficulty level is given to the driving operation of the game ball B, so that the player can be entertained by arousing the rewardingness of the game and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. .. Further, in the above case, since it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to be accepted by the second major winning opening 2007, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is "big hit", after the second big winning opening 2007 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted. When a predetermined time (for example, 20 to 40 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are accepted into the second prize opening 2007, the game ball B is satisfied. The opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the closed state unacceptable is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, "2R jackpot" is repeated for 2 rounds, "5R jackpot" is for 5 rounds, and "15R jackpot" is for 15 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In the "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that the first special symbol such as "big hit" or the second special symbol will be drawn is changed ("probability change hit"), or the lottery result of the first special symbol is changed. And there is a "hit" that changes the display time of the production image that suggests the lottery result of the second special symbol ("short time hit").

When the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, the lottery result of the second special symbol) is "second big hit", the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007 After making the game ball B acceptable in a predetermined pattern, ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous game state. This ST is to maintain a probabilistic change or a time saving state during a predetermined specific number of fluctuations.

In the present embodiment, below the second major winning opening 2007, there is a pseudo-game area 2010 in which only the game ball B received in the second major winning opening 2007 can be distributed. The game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2007 enters the pseudo game area 2010 after being detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2561. When the game ball B that has entered the pseudo game area 2010 flows down while contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo game area 2010, and the pseudo grand prize opening 2402 can accept the game ball B, , The game ball B is accepted in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. On the other hand, when the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 cannot accept the game ball B, it passes in front of the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 and is discharged from the pseudo-out opening 2404 without being returned to the game area 5a.

This pseudo-large winning opening 2402 uses, for example, a game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern when the second large winning opening 2007 is capable of accepting the game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern due to the above-mentioned "big hit" or the like. Will be accepted. Since this pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is provided so as to be larger and more prominent than the second major winning opening 2007, many game balls B received by the second major winning opening 2007 are placed in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. By being accepted, it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored and entertain during the "big hit" game, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest.

In the present embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol. In the function display unit 1400, the lottery result of the special symbol (the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol) is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the lottery result of the special symbol in the function display unit 1400 suggests the lottery result of the special symbol by repeatedly turning on and off a plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lit LEDs. ..

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the lottery result of the special symbol is suggested as the effect image. The effect image suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each pattern row in a state where three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. The pattern rows are stopped and displayed in sequence, and each of the pattern rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three pattern rows that are stopped and displayed are combined with the lottery result of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is other than "missing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. , An advantageous game state (for example, "small hit" game, "big hit" game, etc.) occurs according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn.

The time suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (special fluctuation time)) and the time suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol in the effect display device 1600 (the symbol sequence fluctuates). The time until the confirmed image is displayed) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit in the door frame 3 according to the lottery result of the lottered special symbol. It is possible to perform a player participation type production in which the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in 300 are operated. In the player participation type production, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the lower right unit 2400, and the back front of the back unit 3000. It is possible to perform light emission effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back upper front effect unit 3300, the back lower front effect unit 3400, the back upper rear effect unit 3500, the back lower rear effect unit 3600, and the like. Therefore, the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type production in which the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, the correct operation is performed when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation to be operated. Notify the player to that effect.

[8. Second Embodiment of the game board]
Next, the game board 5A of the second embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 161 to 166 and the like. FIG. 161 is a front view of the game board of the second embodiment showing a state in which the front unit is cut in parallel with the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed. FIG. 162 (a) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the game board of the second embodiment as viewed from the front, and FIG. 162 (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the game board of the second embodiment as viewed from the back. be. FIG. 163 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the center front right plate and the ball guidance unit disassembled in the right half of the center accessory of FIG. 162 and viewed from the front, and FIG. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 164 (a) is a front view of the ball guiding unit in the center accessory of FIG. 162, and FIG. 164 (b) is a right side view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 165 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 164, FIG. 165 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 164, and FIG. It is a cross-sectional view cut along the Saw line, and FIG. 164 is a cross-sectional view cut along the starter line in FIG. 164. FIG. 166 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit of FIG. 164 disassembled and viewed from the front right, and FIG. 166 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit of FIG. 164 disassembled and viewed from the front left.

The game board 5A of the second embodiment differs only in the configuration of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and a part of the front unit 2000. Other parts have the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, and detailed description of the parts having the same configuration will be omitted.

The game board 5A of the second embodiment is provided with three general winning openings 2001. Further, in the game board 5A, instead of the gate 2002, the second starting port 2005 of the lower right unit 2400 in the game board 5 is used as the normal winning opening 2008, and the variable winning opening 2003 of the game board 5 is used as the normal winning opening 2008. The second starting port 2005 is set to open and close according to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol drawn by the acceptance of the ball B. Further, in the game board 5A, a ball guidance unit 2580 capable of guiding the game ball B is provided instead of the specific obstacle nail group 2700.

Due to the above differences, in the game board 5A of the second embodiment, the variable winning opening sensor 2526 of the game board 5 is replaced with the second starting port sensor, and the second starting port sensor 2401 of the game board 5 is replaced. It has replaced the normal winning opening sensor.

The center accessory 2500 of the game board 5A is provided in the space forming portion 2550 between the right guide passage group 2540 and the second attacker portion 2560, and is a ball capable of guiding the game ball B circulating through the right guide passage group 2540. It has a guidance unit 2580 and a flat plate-shaped center right front plate 2590 extending vertically from the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 to the upper end of the second attacker portion 2560 so as to cover the front of the ball guidance unit 2580. ..

The space forming portion 2550 of the center accessory 2500 of the game board 5A has an opening 2553 penetrating in a vertically long quadrangle in a flange portion 2502 extending to the right from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and below the opening 2553. It has a lower right first passage 2550a and a lower right second passage 2550b through which the game ball B guided by the ball guidance unit 2580 is provided.

The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are formed in a crank shape that extends downward from the entrance, then extends to the right, and then extends downward. A lower right second passage 2550b is provided on the right side of the lower right first passage 2550a. The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are open at the front and are closed by the center right front plate 2590. The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are located substantially in the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction when assembled on the game board 5A.

A space is formed between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker portion 2560 so that the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the area.

The lower right second passage 2550b opens downward just above the first sub-out port 2021. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the lower right second passage 2550b is more likely to be accepted by the first sub-out port 2021 than the lower right first passage 2550a. Since the game ball B passing through the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 and the second guide passage 2580b of the ball guidance unit 2580 circulates in the lower right second passage 2550b, the game ball B goes to the first sub-out port 2021. In order to reduce the acceptance probability of the game ball B, the player can be made to positively perform a driving operation for entering the game ball B into the right first guide passage 2541. Therefore, when "right-handed", by hitting hard, the game ball B can easily enter the right first guide passage 2541 near the abutment portion 1006, so it is necessary to hit the game ball B with delicate adjustment. There is no such thing, and the driving operation can be performed easily.

[8-1. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 2580 guides the game balls B circulating through the right first guide passage 2541 and the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 separately in a state where they can be visually recognized from the front. The ball guidance unit 2580 has a first guide passage 2580a for guiding the game ball B from the right first guide passage 2541 and a second guide passage 2580b for guiding the game ball B from the right second guide passage 2542. doing. A second guide passage 2580b is provided on the right side of the first guide passage 2580a. The first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b can guide the game ball B downward while swinging in the left-right direction and the front-back direction in a visible state.

The first guide passage 2580a of the ball guidance unit 2580 has an inlet opening toward the front near the upper end and an outlet opening diagonally forward and downward at the lower end. Further, the entrance of the second guide passage 2580b opens forward at a position slightly lower than the entrance of the first guide passage 2580a, and the exit opens diagonally forward and downward at the lower end.

The ball guidance unit 2580 includes a left passage member 2581 provided with a first guidance passage 2580a open to the right and a second guide attached to the right side of the left passage member 2581 and open to the right. It is composed of a right passage member 2582 provided with a passage 2580b and a flat plate-shaped passage closing plate 2583 attached to the right side of the right passage member 2582. The ball guidance unit 2580 is transparently formed.

The left passage member 2581 protrudes to the right from the flat side wall portion 2581a extending in the front-rear and up-down directions and the side surface portion 2581a facing the right side, and is inclined so that one side in the front-rear direction becomes lower. It has a plurality of inclined portions 2581b provided at intervals in the vertical direction. The plurality of inclined portions 2581b are provided at intervals in which the game ball B can be distributed in the vertical direction, and are provided so that the lower side is alternately different in the upper and lower sides. Further, in the plurality of inclined portions 2581b, the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2581b extends outward in the front-rear direction at intervals so that the game ball B can flow from the lower end of the upper inclined portion 2581b. It is provided.

Further, the left passage member 2581 extends upward from the upper end portion of each inclined portion 2581b to the upper inclined portion 2581b and the upper inclined portion 2581b from the upper end portion of the standing wall portion 2581c. It has a top wall portion 2581d that is exposed.
The top wall portion 2581d extends in the front-rear direction substantially parallel to the inclined portion 2581b on the upper side of the inclined portion 2581b on which the standing wall portion 2581c rises. Further, the top wall portion 2581d extends in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the lower surface of the upper inclined portion 2581b of the upper inclined portion 2581b, and forms a gap between the upper inclined portion 2581b and the upper inclined portion 2581b. ..

Further, the left passage member 2581 is formed by a plurality of first protruding portions 2581e projecting to the right from a portion between the vertically separated inclined portions 2581b on the side wall portion 2581a and the inclined portion 2581b on the side wall portion 2581a. It has a plurality of first projecting piece portions 2581f protruding to the right from the portion between the lower end and the standing wall portion 2581c. The first protruding portion 2581e is provided at a position corresponding to the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction of the inclined portion 2581b, and has a flat plate shape extending in parallel with the lower inclined portion 2581b and having a triangular shape having a tapered tip. It is formed. The first projecting piece portion 2581f extends vertically and its lower end is in contact with the upper surface of the inclined portion 2581b, and the upper end is inclined so as to be lowered to the right.

In the left passage member 2581, the uppermost inclined portion 2581b is inclined so that the rear end is lowered, and the upper end side extends upward in an arc shape to form the lower side of the entrance of the first guide passage 2580a. .. Further, the lowermost inclined portion 2581b is inclined so that the front end is lowered, and is located behind the front end of the upper inclined portion 2581b, forming the lower side of the exit of the first guide passage 2580a. doing. Further, the lowermost top wall portion 2581d does not extend from the upper end of the standing wall portion 2581c. The left passage member 2581 of the present embodiment is provided with eight inclined portions 2581b.

The right passage member 2582 includes a flat side wall portion 2582a that closes the first guide passage 2580a that is open to the right, and a plurality of positions that protrude to the left from the left-facing surface of the side wall portion 2582a. It has one protruding portion 2582b. Two of the plurality of first protrusions 2582b are provided in one inclined portion 2581b of the left passage member 2581 with the first protrusions 2581e in between in the front-rear direction when assembled into the ball guidance unit 2580. In the first protrusion 2582b, the upstream side of the first protrusion 2581e protrudes to the left in a triangular shape, and the downstream side of the first protrusion 2581e has an inclined upstream end and extends downstream to the vicinity of the standing wall portion 2581c. It protrudes to the left in the trapezoidal shape.

Further, the right passage member 2582 projects to the right from the right-facing surface of the side wall portion 2582a, and is inclined so that one side in the front-rear direction becomes lower, and is provided at intervals in the vertical direction. It has a plurality of inclined portions 2582c which are formed. The plurality of inclined portions 2582c are provided at intervals in which the game ball B can be distributed in the vertical direction, and are provided so that the lower side is alternately different in the upper and lower sides. Further, in the plurality of inclined portions 2582c, the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2582c extends outward in the front-rear direction at intervals so that the game ball B can flow from the lower end of the upper inclined portion 2582c. It is provided.

Further, the right passage member 2582 extends from the upper end of each inclined portion 2582c to the upper side of the upper inclined portion 2582c with the standing wall portion 2582d and from the upper end of the standing wall portion 2582d to the upper side of the upper inclined portion 2582c. It has a top wall portion 2582e that is exposed.
The top wall portion 2582e extends in the front-rear direction substantially parallel to the inclined portion 2582c on the upper side of the inclined portion 2582c on which the standing wall portion 2582d stands. Further, the top wall portion 2582e extends in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the lower surface of the upper inclined portion 2582c of the upper inclined portion 2582c, and forms a gap between the upper inclined portion 2582c and the upper inclined portion 2582c. ..

Further, the right passage member 2582 includes a plurality of second protruding portions 2582f projecting to the right from a portion between the vertically separated inclined portions 2582c on the side wall portion 2582a, and the inclined portion 2582c on the side wall portion 2581a. It has a plurality of second projecting piece portions 2582g protruding to the right from the portion between the lower end and the standing wall portion 2582d. The second projecting piece portion 2582g is provided at a position corresponding to the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction of the inclined portion 2582c, and has a flat plate shape extending in parallel with the lower inclined portion 2582c and having a triangular shape having a tapered tip. Is formed in. The second projecting piece portion 2582g extends vertically and its lower end is in contact with the upper surface of the inclined portion 2582c, and the upper end is inclined so as to be lowered to the right.

In the right passage member 2582, the uppermost inclined portion 2582c is inclined so that the rear end is lowered, and the front end forms the lower side of the entrance of the second guide passage 2580b. Further, the lowermost inclined portion 2582c is inclined so that the front end is lowered, and is located behind the front end of the upper inclined portion 2582c, forming the lower side of the exit of the second guide passage 2580b. doing. Further, the lowermost top wall portion 2582e does not extend from the upper end of the standing wall portion 2582d. The right passage member 2582 of the present embodiment is provided with eight inclined portions 2582c.

The passage closing plate 2583 includes a flat side wall portion 2583a that closes the second guide passage 2580b that is open to the right, and a plurality of positions that protrude to the left from the left-facing surface of the side wall portion 2583a. It has two protrusions 2583b. Two of the plurality of second protrusions 2583b are provided in one inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582 with the second protrusion 2582f in between in the front-rear direction when assembled into the ball guidance unit 2580. In the second protrusion 2583b, the upstream side of the second protrusion 2582f protrudes to the left in a triangular shape, and the downstream side of the second protrusion 2582f has an inclined upstream end and extends downstream to the vicinity of the standing wall portion 2582d. It protrudes to the left in the trapezoidal shape.

In the ball guidance unit 2580 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B enters the first guidance passage 2580a through the right first guidance passage 2541 of the right guidance passage group 2540, it is moved backward by the inclined portion 2581b of the left passage member 2581. Roll towards. Above the inclined portion 2581b, a first protruding portion 2581e protrudes from the left, and two first protruding portions 2582b of the right passage member 2582 project from the right so as to be in front of and behind the first protruding portion 2581e. There is. As a result, the game ball B is guided to the left by the first protruding portion 2582b, then guided to the right by the next first protruding portion 2581e, and further guided to the left by the next first protruding portion 2582b. Then, it rolls while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction to the rear end (lower end) of the inclined portion 2581b.

Then, it flows down from the lower end of the inclined portion 2581b along the vertical wall portion 2581c onto the lower inclined portion 2581b. At this time, the game ball B guided to the left by the first protruding portion 2582b is guided to the right by the first projecting piece portion 2581f protruding to the right and flows down to the lower inclined portion 2581b. do. As a result, the game ball B does not flow vertically from the upper inclined portion 2581b to the lower inclined portion 2581b.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the lower inclined portion 2581b rolls forward according to the inclination of the inclined portion 2581b. Also above the inclined portion 2581b, the first protruding portion 2581e protrudes from the left, and two first protruding portions 2582b of the right passage member 2582 protrude from the right so as to be in front of and behind the first protruding portion 2581e. There is. As a result, the game ball B guided to the right by the first protrusion 2581f on the rear side is guided to the left by the first protrusion 2582b, and then guided to the right by the next first protrusion 2581e. Then, it is further guided to the left by the next first protruding portion 2582b and rolls while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction to the front end of the inclined portion 2581b. After that, when flowing downward from the front end of the inclined portion 2581b, it is guided to the right by the first projecting piece portion 2581f on the front side and further flows down onto the inclined portion 2581b on the lower side, and exits from the first induction passage 2580a. The movement of the game ball B as described above is repeated until.

Further, in the ball guidance unit 2580, when the game ball B enters the second guidance passage 2580b through the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540, the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582 moves backward. Roll. In the second guide passage 2580b as well, the game ball B flows down while swinging in the left-right direction and the front-back direction as in the case of the first guide passage 2580a described above. More specifically, a second protruding portion 2582f protrudes from the left above the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582, and a second passage closing plate 2583 from the right so as to be in front of and behind the second protruding portion 2582f. Two protruding portions 2583b are projected. As a result, the game ball B is guided to the left by the second protruding portion 2583b, then guided to the right by the next second protruding portion 2582f, and further guided to the left by the next second protruding portion 2583b. Then, it rolls while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction to the rear end (lower end) of the inclined portion 2582c.

Then, it flows down from the lower end of the inclined portion 2582c along the vertical wall portion 2582d onto the lower inclined portion 2582c. At this time, the game ball B guided to the left by the second protruding portion 2583b is guided to the right by the second projecting piece portion 2582g protruding to the right and flows down to the lower inclined portion 2582c. do. As a result, the game ball B does not flow vertically from the upper inclined portion 2582c to the lower inclined portion 2582c.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the lower inclined portion 2582c rolls forward according to the inclination of the inclined portion 2582c. Also above the inclined portion 2582c, the second protruding portion 2582f protrudes from the left, and two second protruding portions 2583b of the passage closing plate 2583 protrude from the right so as to be in front of and behind the second protruding portion 2582f. There is. As a result, the game ball B guided to the right by the second protruding piece portion 2582g on the rear side is guided to the left by the second protruding portion 2583b, and then guided to the right by the next second protruding portion 2582f. Then, it is further guided to the left by the next second protruding portion 2583b and rolls while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction to the front end of the inclined portion 2582c. After that, when flowing downward from the front end of the inclined portion 2582c, it is guided to the right by the second projecting piece portion 2582g on the front side and further flows down onto the inclined portion 2582c on the lower side, and exits the second induction passage 2580b. The movement of the game ball B as described above is repeated until.

As described above, according to the ball guidance unit 2580 of the present embodiment, the game ball B passing through the right guide passage group 2540 is caused to flow down while swinging (meandering) in the left-right direction and the front-back direction, and then released downward. Therefore, the residence time (flow time) of the game ball B at the same height is lengthened as compared with the case where the game ball B is allowed to flow down vertically or through a spiral passage. Can be done. As a result, the distribution speed of the game ball B becomes relatively slow, so that the game ball B can be easily seen by the player, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. can.

Further, according to the ball guidance unit 2580, since the game ball B is caused to flow down while swinging (meandering) in the left-right direction and the front-back direction, the game ball B is compared with the case where the game ball B is made to flow down by the spiral passage. However, since the movement of the game ball B is complicated, the movement of the game ball B, which has not been seen in the conventional pachinko machines, can entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, according to the ball guidance unit 2580, since the left side surface faces the frame of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B in the ball guidance unit 2580 can be seen in the front-rear direction by looking through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to visually recognize the distribution while meandering in a good state, and it is possible to enjoy the movement of the game ball B.

Further, according to the ball guidance unit 2580, since the flow speed of the game ball B can be suppressed and delayed, the same action and effect as the above-mentioned specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be obtained. More specifically, for example, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 (for example, "" "Small hit" lottery), the second big winning opening 2007 of the second attacker unit 2560 provided below the ball guidance unit 2580 is opened and closed in a short time so that the game ball B can be accepted (for example). , Small hit rush), the player operates the game ball B so that the game ball B reaches the second big prize opening 2007 at the timing when the second big prize opening 2007 can be accepted. Will be done. At this time, even if the game ball B is to be driven at that timing, the ball guidance unit 2580 capable of delaying the flow speed of the game ball B is provided upstream of the second prize opening 2007. It is possible to make it difficult to take the timing of hitting the game ball B. As a result, it is possible to give a difficulty level to the driving operation of the game ball B, so that the player can be entertained by arousing the rewardingness of the game, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, according to the ball guidance unit 2580, since a gap is formed between the inclined portion 2581b and the top wall portion 2581d and between the inclined portion 2582c and the top wall portion 2582e, the first guide passage 2580a and the first guide passage 2580a and the first (Ii) When a ball clogging occurs inside the guide passage 2580b, the ball clogging can be eliminated by inserting a thin rod-shaped member through the gap.

Further, according to the ball guidance unit 2580, the left passage member 2581, the right passage member 2582, and the passage closing plate 2583 form the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b for guiding the game ball B. Compared with the case where a passage is formed by using a plurality of obstacle nails N, the flow path is not deformed (deformation of the obstacle nail N) due to the circulation of the game ball B, and the game ball B is guided in a stable state. can do.

[8-2. Center right front plate]
The center right front plate 2590 of the game board 5A is transparent and formed in a flat plate shape, and covers the front from the vicinity of the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 to the upper end of the second attacker portion 2560 so as to cover the front of the center accessory 2500. It is attached to the front end on the right outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 in the above. The center right front plate 2590 covers the front of the right guide passage group 2540 and the space forming portion 2550 (including the ball guidance unit 2580).

The center right front plate 2590 penetrates back and forth at the lower part, and has a plurality of first accommodating portions 2590a in which the heads of a plurality of obstacle nails N are accommodated, and a plurality of first accommodating portions 2590a penetrating the front and rear and one obstacle nail N. It has a second accommodating portion 2590b in which the head is accommodating, and a peeling hole 2590c penetrating the front and rear.

In the first accommodating portion 2590a and the second accommodating portion 2590b, the panel plate of the game panel 1100 whose front surface is exposed between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker portion 2560. The heads of a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in 1110 are accommodated.

The first accommodating portion 2590a is constant with respect to a peripheral line that surrounds and is in contact with the heads of a plurality of accommodating (not shown, but in the present embodiment, two or three) obstacle nails N. It is provided in the shape of an elongated hole forming a gap between the two. As a result, the center of the first accommodating portion 2590a is different (eccentric) from the center of the obstacle nail N. The second accommodating portion 2590b is formed concentrically with the obstacle nail N. The first accommodating portion 2590a and the second accommodating portion 2590b correspond to the respective obstacle nails N planted between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker portion 2560. It is provided at the site.

As a result, it is possible to restrict the movement of the head of the obstacle nail N accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2590a and the second accommodating portion 2590b. It is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being deformed (bent) due to an external impact or the like, and it is possible to reduce the flow of the game ball B in an unintended flow. The ball B can be distributed in a stable state, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the deformation of the obstacle nail N can be suppressed by the first accommodating portion 2590a and the second accommodating portion 2590b of the center right front plate 2590, on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to reduce the time and effort required for maintenance of the obstacle nail N.

The peeling hole 2590c of the center right front plate 2590 is provided in the mounting boss for mounting the center right front plate 2590 to the main body of the center accessory 2500, and is provided coaxially with the mounting hole of the mounting boss. When a sticker for decoration or protection is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, the peeling hole 2590c is inserted with a rod-shaped member such as a wire from the rear side with the sticker attached. By pressing the seal forward from the rear with the rod-shaped member, a part of the seal can be rolled up forward from the center right front plate 2590. Then, the operator can easily remove (peel off) the seal from the center right front plate 2590 by pulling the rolled portion of the seal. As a result, workability such as re-sticking work at the time of manufacturing and sorting work at the time of disposal can be improved.

Since the peeling hole 2590c is provided at the portion of the mounting boss, an attempt is made to insert a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire into the rear side of the game panel 1100 or the portion where the game ball B is distributed through the peeling hole 2590c. However, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the rear side is closed by the mounting screw, so that it is possible to prevent the illegal tool from being inserted, and it is possible to prevent the illegal act from being performed.

If a sticker is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, the peeling hole 2590c can be made difficult to see from the front, and the deterioration of the appearance due to the peeling hole 2590c can be suppressed, and the player can use the sticker. On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the peeling hole 2590c, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the peeling hole 2590c.

Further, if a sticker is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the seal attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590 provides the first accommodating portion 2590a and the second accommodating portion 2590a. Since the front side of the portion 2590b can be closed, the obstacle nail N whose head is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2590a and the second accommodating portion 2590b cannot be touched from the front. As a result, it is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being bent due to contact with a tool or the like during maintenance or the like, or the obstacle nail N being intentionally bent. Further, when the sticker is attached, when the obstacle nail N whose head is housed in the first storage part 2590a and the second storage part 2590b is bent through the seal, the trace remains on the sticker. It is possible to make it easier to notice the defect of the obstacle nail N.

[9. Relationship between the present invention and embodiments]
The center right front plate 2555 of the center accessory 2500 in the game board 5 of the present embodiment is the holding plate of the present invention, and the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 of the present embodiment are accommodating the present invention. 2555d in front of the ridge portion of the center right front plate 2555 in the present embodiment corresponds to the ridge portion of the present invention, respectively.

[10. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B enters the specific obstacle nail group 2700 composed of a plurality of obstacle nails N in the game area 5a of the game board 5, a predetermined guidance area 2701 (first guidance area) The game ball B can be guided with a predetermined probability along 2711 or the second guidance region 2712). In this specific obstacle nail group 2700, at least two obstacle nails N are formed by a plurality of braided nail portions 2710 having a pair of braided nail portions 2710, and a game is played between the plurality of braided nail portions 2710. Since the interval through which the ball B can pass is provided, in one obstacle nail N of the braided nail portion 2710, a gap through which the game ball B can pass is formed in the direction in which the remaining obstacle nails N are adjacent to each other. Therefore, the remaining obstacle nails N are only responsible for forming a gap in a direction in which they are not adjacent to each other. That is, in the braided nail portion 2710, in one obstacle nail N, the direction in charge of forming the gap through which the game ball B can pass can be a part of the direction. Therefore, even if one obstacle nail N of the braided nail portion 2710 is bent, the number of gaps affected by the number of gaps formed with the braided nail portion 2710 paired with the braided nail portion 2710. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game ball B from being significantly changed, and it is possible to facilitate the distribution of the game ball B in a desired intended flow path in a stable state.

At this time, the first accommodating portion 2555a of the center right front plate 2555 accommodates the front ends of the obstacle nails N of the plurality of braided nail portions 2710 constituting the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the center right front plate. The second accommodating portion 2555b of 2555 accommodates the front end of a single obstruction nail N constituting the specific obstruction nail group 2700. In the braided nail portion 2710, the front ends of the two obstacle nails N planted close to each other are accommodated in one first accommodating portion 2555a, and the two obstacles planted close to each other. Since it is difficult for the nails N to bend in the direction in which they are close to each other, the obstacle nails N can be surrounded by the first accommodating portion 2555a in any direction by enclosing the parts in the directions in which they are not close to each other as a set. It can also be made difficult to bend. On the other hand, since the front end of one obstacle nail N planted independently is accommodated in the second accommodating portion 2555b, the obstruction nail N can be made difficult to bend by the second accommodating portion 2555b. For this reason, the obstacle nails N of the plurality of braided nail portions 2710 and the single obstacle nails N constituting the specific obstacle nail group 2700 are placed in the first accommodation portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555. Even if an impact acts on the obstacle nail N due to the contact of the game ball B or the contact of a tool or the like during maintenance, the front end of the obstacle nail N is the first accommodation portion. By abutting on the peripheral wall of 2555a or the second accommodating portion 2555b, further movement can be prevented and the (plurality) obstacle nails N can be made difficult to bend, and a plurality of obstacle nails N (specific obstacle nail group 2700) can be prevented from bending. The flow of the game ball B can be maintained in the intended initial state (at the time of shipment). Therefore, the plurality of first accommodating portions 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 can make it difficult for the plurality of obstacle nails N constituting the specific obstacle nail group 2700 to bend, so that the game ball B can be made difficult to bend. It can be stably distributed in the intended flow, and the game ball B can be continuously guided by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 with a predetermined probability, and the intended action and effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be obtained. It can be surely exhibited, and the performance assumed by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 can be exhibited for a long time.

Further, since the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is composed of a plurality of braided nail portions 2710 and a single obstacle nail N, the number of obstacle nails N planted can be relatively increased, and more. The game ball B can be brought into contact with the obstacle nail N of the above. Therefore, by increasing the number of times of contact with the obstacle nail N, it is possible to further suppress the distribution speed of the game ball B and change the distribution direction of the game ball B in various directions. It is possible to make the movement of the game ball B more enjoyable, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the center right front plate 2555 is provided with a plurality of ridge front 2555d protruding rearward, and the game ball B comes into contact with the ridge front 2555d of the center right front plate 2555, whereby the game ball B is provided. Since it is possible to suppress the distribution speed of the game ball B and change the distribution direction of the game ball B, it is possible to show the player a wider variety of movements of the game ball B, which is entertaining and entertaining. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the 2555d in front of the ridge portion of the center right front plate 2555 does not bend unlike the obstacle nail N, the flow of the game ball B by the plurality of 2555d in front of the ridge portion can be stably maintained, and the pachinko machine 1 The performance expected by the manufacturer of the machine can be exhibited for a long time.

Further, since the center right front plate 2555 is provided with the ridge portion front 2555d, the obstacle nail that suppresses the distribution speed of the game ball B or changes the distribution direction by the ridge portion front 2555d of the center right front plate 2555. Since the function similar to that of N can be exhibited and the front end of the obstacle nail N is accommodated in the accommodating portion of the center right front plate 2555, the center right front plate 2555 is provided near the front end of the game area 5a. The center right front plate 2555 can be extended to a portion of the game area 5a where the obstacle nail N is difficult to be planted, and the ridge portion front 2555d can be provided at that portion. As a result, a game ball can be provided by providing 2555d in front of the ridge instead of the obstruction nail N in a part where the obstacle nail N cannot be planted by the conventional pachinko machine or a part outside the specific obstacle nail group 2700. Since B can be made to move in the same manner as the obstacle nail N, the movement of the game ball B can be entertained by the player in a wider range, and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed.

In addition, a second large winning opening 2007 is provided downstream of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 so that the game ball B can be opened and closed according to the progress of the game (the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol). Since the game ball B can be brought into contact with many obstacle nails N in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, it is possible to delay the distribution of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is a specific obstacle nail. When guided by the group 2700, the game ball B can be delayed to reach the second large winning opening 2007 provided downstream as compared with the normal plurality of obstacle nails N, so that the second large prize can be reached. It is possible to make it difficult to set the timing of driving the game ball B aiming at the winning opening 2007, and it is possible to give a desired difficulty level to the driving operation of the game ball B. At this time, since the obstacle nail N of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is made difficult to bend by the center right front plate 2555 as described above, the game ball B can be continuously guided by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 with a predetermined probability. The driving operation can be surely set to a desired difficulty level, and the driving operation difficulty level as the performance assumed by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 can be maintained for a long time. For this reason, the player can be motivated to perform the driving operation, the driving operation of the game ball B can be enjoyed, and the game ball B is accepted by the second prize opening 2007. It is possible to give a sense of accomplishment by being able to suppress the decline in the interest of the player. Further, as described above, since the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can give a difficulty level to the driving operation, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to be accepted by the second major winning opening 2007, and the second By suppressing the opportunity to pay out the game ball B by accepting it to the large winning opening 2007, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, since the plurality of first accommodating portions 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 are provided with a gap between the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b with the front end of the obstacle nail N accommodated in each, the temperature and humidity are affected. Even if the center right front plate 2555 expands and contracts due to such a change in the environment, the change in the position between the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b and the obstacle nail N due to the expansion and contraction can be absorbed by the gap. Therefore, even if the center right front plate 2555 expands and contracts, it is possible to prevent the plurality of obstacle nails N from bending or the center right front plate 2555 being damaged due to resistance from the plurality of obstacle nails N. As a result, by enlarging the center right front plate 2555, even if the change in the distance from one end to the other end becomes large due to expansion and contraction, the above-mentioned action and effect can be obtained. The plate 2555 can be enlarged, and a plurality of obstacle nails N of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 planted in a wide range in the game area 5a can be surely made difficult to bend. Therefore, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can guide the game ball B to the second large winning opening 2007 downstream with a predetermined probability intended, and entertain the movement of the game ball B by the intended flow of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest, and to stably maintain the flow of the game ball B by the specific obstacle nail group 2700, so that the performance assumed by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 can be exhibited for a long time. For this large center right front plate 2555, for example, the height is in the range of 1/3 to 3/3 of the height of the game area 5a, and the left and right widths are 1/10 to 10/10 of the width of the game area 5a. The range can be mentioned.

Further, since the plurality of first accommodating portions 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 have a gap between the plurality of obstacle nails N of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the front ends of the plurality of obstacle nails N, the game board At the time of assembling, the front ends of the plurality of obstacle nails N planted can be easily inserted into the corresponding first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b, and the pachinko can be easily assembled. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the machine 1.

Further, since the center right front plate seal 2556 that closes the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b are attached from the front. The obstacle nail N in which the front end is housed cannot be touched. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being bent due to contact with a tool or the like during maintenance or the like, or the obstacle nail N being intentionally bent during maintenance or the like. Further, in this case, when the obstacle nail N whose front end is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b is bent via the center right front plate seal 2556, the trace remains on the center right front plate seal 2556. Therefore, it is possible to easily notice the defect of the obstacle nail N.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the plurality of game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 in the door frame 3 are supplied to the lower plate 202 through the ball extraction guide path 241c of the plate unit base 211. From the right side near the front end of the lower plate ball supply port 211c that opens to the front of the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 for supplying the game ball B that cannot be stored in the upper plate 201 from the rear to the lower plate 202. The game ball B enters the storage passage 150e and rolls to the left side surface on the opposite side. On the left side surface of the lower plate ball supply port 211c on the opposite side, a ball guide portion 213 that is inclined so as to move to the other side toward the front is provided, so that the game ball from the ball extraction guide path 241c is provided. The game ball B is far from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a because B rolls along the ball guide portion 213 and easily rolls along the peripheral edge of the lower plate 202, which is a high portion on the bottom surface of the lower plate 202. It can be rolled to the other portion in the left-right direction, and it is possible to prevent the supplied game ball B from immediately reaching the portion of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. Therefore, since the game ball B can be rolled so as to orbit toward the lowest lower plate ball extraction hole 202a in the lower plate 202, the game ball B can be rotated evenly in each direction centered on the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The game ball B can be stored, and the game ball B can be made difficult to be stored in the vicinity of the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e. That is, it is possible to reduce the clogging of the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e (ball extraction taxiway 241c) by the game ball B at an early stage when the lower plate 202 has a margin for storing the game ball B. As many game balls B as possible can be stored even if the player does not level the lower plate 202. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frequent execution of guidance for prompting the player to eject the game ball B in the lower plate 202 to the dollar box or the like when the player is in an advantageous gaming state such as a "big hit" game. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel annoyed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, since the left side surface of the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e is inclined so as to move to the other side as the ball guiding portion 213 toward the front, the lower plate ball of the storage passage 150e is inclined in the lower plate 202. Even if a plurality of game balls B are accumulated in front of the supply port 211c, it is possible to form a gap through which the game balls B can flow between the pool of the game balls B and the ball guiding portion 213. The game ball B sent to the lower plate 202 without being completely stored in the upper plate 201 through the gap, the game ball B from the ball extraction taxiway 241c, and the like can be sent to the left portion of the lower plate 202, and the lower part can be sent. As many game balls B as possible can be stored in the plate 202.

Further, the center of the lower plate ball supply port 211c that opens toward the front of the storage passage 150e is located on the right side of the center of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202, so that the storage passage is located. Compared with the case where the center of the outlet of 150e in the left-right direction and the center of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a are aligned (see FIG. 50B), the right side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a in the lower plate 202 Since the area can be widened, the number of stored game balls B when the game balls B are stored until the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e is closed in the lower plate 202 can be increased. .. Therefore, by combining with the action and effect of the ball guiding portion 213 as described above, it is possible to store as many game balls B as possible even if the player does not level the lower plate 202, as described above. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is more likely to exert its action and effect.

By the way, in the conventional pachinko machine 1 as shown in FIG. 50B, even if the lower plate 202 has a margin for storing the game ball B, the vicinity of the lower plate ball supply port 211j is clogged by the game ball B, so that the lower plate 202 The game ball B cannot be supplied to the plate 202. As a result, although the lower plate 202 still has a margin, the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned on, and the payout of the game ball B is stopped. Then, depending on the player, even though the lower plate 202 has a margin, the payout is stopped, which may cause distrust and reduce the interest. Alternatively, if the lower plate 202 has a margin, but the guidance for opening the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b and moving the game ball B to the dollar box is executed, it feels annoying and reduces the interest. There is a risk that it will end up. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, as many game balls B as possible are stored in the lower plate 202 until the lower plate 202 is almost full even if the player does not even out. Therefore, when the lower plate 202 is viewed when the payout is stopped, it can be immediately recognized that the lower plate 202 has no room and is full, and the lower plate 202 does not give a feeling of resistance to the player. It is possible to open the ball extraction hole 202a and move it to the dollar box, and it is possible to recognize that many game balls B have been paid out, so that the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed. ..

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is stagnant in the tank rail 553 of the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 (so-called ball clogging occurs), the tank rail 553 By touching the game ball B that is jammed from the outside through any of the plurality of openings 553d that penetrate the bottom portion (main guide portion 553a) of the ball, the game ball B is broken and the ball jam is eliminated. Can be done. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be easily eliminated, the interruption time of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and the discomfort given to the player due to the interruption of the game can be reduced. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the ball rectifying member 556 that can swing in the vertical direction is provided on the upper part of the tank rail 553, the ball rectifying member 556 comes into contact with the game balls B stacked vertically on the tank rail 553 from above. When the game balls B are distributed in this state, the height of the game balls B stacked vertically changes, and the ball rectifying member 556 swings in the vertical direction due to the change in the height. When the ball rectifying member 556 swings in the vertical direction, resistance is applied to the upper game ball B in contact with the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball rectifying member 556 tends to move to the downstream side faster than the lower game ball B. This can be prevented, and the game balls B can be moved downward so as to interrupt the row of the lower game balls B arranged in a row to prevent the game balls B from engaging with each other. Further, when the ball rectifying member 556 moves downward, the upper game ball B is hit downward, so that the upper game ball B can be collapsed and the game balls B stacked vertically can be broken. , The occurrence of ball clogging of the game ball B can be suppressed, the interruption of the game due to the ball clogging can be reduced as much as possible, and the deterioration of the interest due to the interruption of the game can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the game ball B circulates in the tank rail 553, the game ball B can be hit from above to below by the ball rectifying member 556, so that the game ball B adheres to the game ball B by the hit. It is possible to remove dust and dirt, and it is possible to vibrate the tank rail 553 to facilitate the discharge of dust and dirt in the tank rail 553 downward from the opening 553d. Therefore, since dust and dirt in the tank rail 553 can be reduced as much as possible, it is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging due to dust and dirt to occur, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above. can.

Further, since at least one of the plurality of openings 553d is provided below the portion where the ball rectifying member 556 is provided, it is caused by dust, dust, etc. at the portion below the ball rectifying member 556 in the tank rail 553. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is less likely to cause ball clogging and is more likely to exert the above-mentioned effects.

Further, since a plurality of openings 553d having the above-described effects are provided in the guiding direction of the game ball B on the tank rail 553, even if the ball is clogged at any part of the tank rail 553. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of eliminating ball clogging through the opening 553d at the nearest position and reliably achieving the above-mentioned effects.

Further, since the opening 553d is extended in the guiding direction of the game ball B, the opening of the opening 553d can be made relatively large, and the game ball rolling on the bottom of the tank rail 553. It is possible to facilitate the downward discharge of dust, dirt, etc. from B. Therefore, it is possible to reduce dust and dirt in the tank rail 553 as much as possible, and it is possible to easily embody the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-mentioned effects.

Further, since the opening 553d is opened downward and backward, the opening has a size that allows contact from the outside while making it impossible for the game ball B to pass through and hindering rolling (distribution). Part 553d can be used, and the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-mentioned effects can be easily embodied.

Further, since the opening 553d is opened downward and rearward, the internal game ball B can be easily visually recognized through the opening 553d simply by looking from the rear without looking from below. Therefore, even if the tank rail 553 is opaque, the location where the ball clogging is occurring can be easily identified, so that the ball clogging can be easily eliminated, and the pachinko machine can surely achieve the above-mentioned action and effect. Machine 1 can be provided.

Further, since at least one opening 553d is provided in the portion of the tank rail 553 below the ball rectifying member 556, the tank rail 553 is filled with a plurality of game balls B from the outside. By touching the game ball B so as to press upward through the opening 553d, the ball rectifying member 556 can be pressed upward through the plurality of game balls B. At this time, by confirming the upward movement of the ball rectifying member 556, it is possible to confirm whether or not the ball rectifying member 556 is in a swingable state, as described above by the ball rectifying member 556. It is possible to surely exert the alignment effect of the game ball B and suppress the ball clogging. Further, since the state of the ball rectifying member 556 can be easily confirmed through the opening 553d, the workability at the time of maintenance can be improved, and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is reduced. Can be made to.

Further, since the transparent protective cover 559 that covers the upper part of the tank rail 553 in a state where the ball rectifying member 556 can swing in the vertical direction is provided, the protective cover 559 causes dust and dirt to enter the tank rail 553 from above. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can prevent dust and the like from entering and can surely exert the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, since the protective cover 559 that covers the ball rectifying member 556 and the tank rail 555 is made transparent, the state of the ball rectifying member 556 can be seen from the outside through the protective cover 559, and the state of the ball rectifying member 556 can be easily confirmed. can do. Further, since the inside of the tank rail 553 can be seen through the protective cover 559, the location where the ball is clogged can be easily found. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time and effort required for maintenance, and it is possible to surely achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Further, as described above, by hitting the game ball B from above to below with the ball rectifying member 556, it is possible to remove dust and dirt adhering to the game ball B, and the opening 553d makes it possible to remove the tank. Since the dust and dirt in the rail 553 can be discharged to the outside, the game ball B with as little dust and dirt as possible can be supplied to the payout device 580, and the dust and dirt in the payout device 580 can be supplied. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of problems caused by dust and dirt.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4, a plurality of game balls B are attached to the external terminal plate 558558 to which the electric wire from which the coating on the tip is removed is connected from the rear. The stored ball tank 552 is provided adjacent to the right side, and the tank rail 553 that aligns and guides the game balls B from the ball tank 552 to the payout device 580 is below and behind the external terminal plate 558. A ball rectifying member 556 that swings up and down is provided so as to extend in the left-right direction at the portion of the tank rail 553 and can collapse the game balls B stacked on the upper part of the tank rail 553. Then, the game ball B can be guided outward in the left direction in front of and below the top plate portion 559c and the top plate portion 559c that cover a part of the upper part of the tank rail 553 and the upper part of the ball rectifying member 556. A protective cover 559 having a plate portion 559d and a plate portion 559d is provided. As a result, the guide plate portion 559d of the protective cover 559 is provided between the top plate portion 559c above the tank rail 555 and the external terminal plate 558 at a position lower than the top plate portion 559c, so that the external terminal is provided. An electric wire connected to the plate 558 and hanging backward can be bridged between the external terminal plate 558 and the top plate portion 559c like a bridge, and the game ball B is below the electric wire at the portion of the guide plate portion 559d. Can form a flowable gap. Therefore, even if the electric wire connected to the external terminal plate 558 from the rear hangs down on the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559, the game ball is formed in the guide plate portion 559d between the top plate portion 559c and the external terminal plate 558. By making it possible to secure a gap in the height direction through which B can flow, the guidance of the game ball B to the left by the guide plate portion 559d is not obstructed by the electric wire, and the guidance of the protective cover 559 is not blocked. The plate portion 559d can guide the game ball B near the external terminal plate 558 to the outside in the left direction away from the external terminal plate 558, and the game ball B is reliably removed from the rear of the external terminal plate 558. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from staying in the vicinity of the external terminal plate 558. Therefore, even if the electric wire connected to the external terminal board 558 is pulled out due to incomplete insertion of the electric wire into the external terminal board 558 or the electric wire being pulled backward for some reason, the electric wire is pulled out. Since the game ball B with which the tip of the electric wire comes into contact does not exist in the vicinity of the external terminal board 558, the tip of the electric wire does not come into contact with the game ball B, and a short circuit of the electric wire can be avoided. .. Then, by avoiding a short circuit of the electric wire, it is possible to ensure that the computer (hall controller) of the game hall can receive the necessary information, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of counting error in the game hall. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Further, since at least a part above the ball rectifying member 556 and the tank rail 555 is covered by the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559, the electric wire connected to the external terminal plate 558 is external for some reason. Even if it comes off from the terminal plate 558, it is possible to prevent the tip of the electric wire pulled out by the top plate portion 559c from coming into contact with the game ball B in the tank rail 553, and the electric wire due to contact with the game ball B can be prevented. It is possible to prevent a short circuit and achieve the same effect as described above.

Further, as described above, since the short circuit of the electric wire can be avoided, it is possible to surely receive the necessary information to the hall controller due to the short circuit of the electric wire and to prevent an error in the counting. It is possible to avoid maintenance due to the occurrence of the error and the like, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, since the guide plate portion 559d of the protective cover 559 guides the game ball B to the outside in the left direction, even if the game ball B flows down on the protective cover 559 for some reason, the game ball B Can be dropped to the outside in the left-right direction of the gaming machine, and the gaming ball B can be prevented from falling to the rear side of the gaming machine. Therefore, since the game ball B does not come into contact with the electric wire hanging on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, the game ball B is caught and stays on the electric wire hanging on the rear side, or the game ball B stays on the electric wire. There is no risk that the electric wire will come off from the external terminal board 558 due to contact, and the game ball B will stay on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, or the electric wire will come off from the external terminal board 558. The occurrence of defects can be reduced.

By the way, in the tank rail 553, the game balls B stacked vertically are arranged in one stage, but when the stacked game balls B are reduced from the second stage to the first stage, the upper game balls B are moved. If you try to overtake the lower game balls B, those game balls B may mesh with each other and become stuck (so-called ball clogging due to ball shavings). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the ball rectifying member 556 is provided on the upper part of the tank rail 553, the ball rectifying member 556 comes into contact with the game balls B stacked vertically on the tank rail 553 from above. When the game balls B are distributed in this state, the height of the game balls B stacked vertically changes, and the ball rectifying member 556 swings in the vertical direction due to the change in the height. When the ball rectifying member 556 swings in the vertical direction, resistance is applied to the upper game ball B in contact with the ball rectifying member 556, and it is prevented from trying to overtake the lower game ball B. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from engaging with each other by moving them downward so as to interrupt behind the lower game balls B arranged in a row. Further, when the ball rectifying member 556 moves downward, the upper game ball B is hit downward, so that the upper game ball B can be collapsed and the game balls B stacked vertically can be broken. , It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging of the game ball B, and the tank rail 553 and the ball rectifying member 556 can align the game balls B stacked in the ball tank 552 and supply them to the payout device. The payout device 580 allows the game ball B to be paid out without delay.

Since the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559 covers the upper part of the ball rectifying member 556, the electric wire hanging from the external terminal plate 558 comes into contact with the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559, so that the ball rectifying member 556 It is possible to prevent the ball rectifying member 556 from swinging in the vertical direction due to the contact of the electric wires. Therefore, even if the electric wire hangs from the external terminal plate 558 above the ball rectifying member 556, the ball rectifying member 556 can swing in the vertical direction while being protected by the protective cover 559, so that the ball rectifying member 556 swings. The game balls B piled up by the movement can be surely collapsed, and the occurrence of ball clogging can be prevented.

Further, since the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559 covers the upper part of the ball rectifying member 556, even if the game ball B flows down toward the ball rectifying member 556 for some reason, the top plate portion of the protective cover 559 The game ball B can be guided away from the external terminal plate 558 and eliminated by the 559c before coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from being unable to swing in the vertical direction due to the game ball B being placed on the ball rectifying member 556, and the game balls B stacked by the ball rectifying member 556 are collapsed to cause ball clogging. Occurrence can be prevented.

Further, since the tank rail 553 is extended in the left-right direction so as to pass behind the external terminal plate 558, the volume of the tank rail 553 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 is combined with the ball tank 552. The storage amount of the game ball B for payout in the above can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, when a player such as a "big hit" game in which a large number of game balls B are paid out is in an advantageous gaming state, there is no game ball B to be paid out (so-called ball out), which makes the player uncomfortable. It is possible to prevent the player from giving the game, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a box-shaped back box having an opening 3010a penetrating back and forth behind the game panel 1100 in which the game area 5a in the game board 5 is provided in front. 3000 is provided, and an effect display device 1600 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image is directly attached to and detachably attached to the back box 3010 at the position of the opening 3010a of the back box 3000 when the size is the same as the opening 3010a. When it is smaller than the opening 3010a, it is detachably attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650. Therefore, when the size of the effect display device 1600 is smaller than the opening 3010a, it is backed through the set plate 1650. The effect display device 1600 can be attached to the box 3010. More specifically, in the present embodiment, the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is sized so that an effect display device having a size of 19 inches can be attached, and 15 inches is attached to a set plate 1650 having a size of 19 inches corresponding to the opening 3010a. After attaching the effect display device 1600, the set plate 1650 is fitted into the opening 3010a and attached to the back box 3010. As a result, the 15-inch effect display device 1600 can be attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650.

Therefore, when the size of the effect display device 1600 is changed due to a model change or a design change, the effect display device 1600 is attached by a set plate 1650 that matches the size of the effect display device 1600 without changing the back box 3010. Therefore, the back box 3010 can be used as it is, and an increase in cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to provide the effect display device 1600 having a size different from that of the conventional one while suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the size of the effect display device 1600 is different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. Can easily make the pachinko machine 1 having a different appearance and strongly attract the interest of the player, and can provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player.

Further, since the back box 3010 has a box shape and the strength and rigidity of the back box 3010 are high, even if a large (heavy) effect display device 1600 is attached, it can be sufficiently supported. The opening 3010a to which the 1600 is attached can be made as large as possible, and the largest (here, 19 inch) effect display device 1600 can be attached to the back box 3010 (pachinko machine). .. In addition, due to model changes and design changes, the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back top front production unit 3300, the back bottom front production unit 3400, and the back top rear production unit are used as various decorative bodies and production devices in front of the production display device 1600. When the range that can be seen from the front is changed by providing the 3500 and the rear lower rear effect unit 3600, the effect display device 1600 (here, 15 inches) having the optimum size for the range is set on the set plate 1650. It can be attached to the back box 3010 via. Therefore, by using the set plate 1650, it is possible to attach the effect display device 1600 of various sizes, so that it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being provided with an unnecessarily large effect display device 1600. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650 arranged in the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, the position of the effect display device 1600 with respect to the back box 3010 may be changed due to a design change or the like. When changing, the position of the effect display device 1600 can be changed simply by changing the set plate 1650 without changing the back box 3010, and the increase in cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. The effect display device 1600 can be provided at a more effective position, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided.

Further, when the size of the effect display device 1600 is smaller than the opening 3010a, the effect display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650, so that the effect display device 1600 and the opening 3010a The space can be closed by the set plate 1650. Therefore, in the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, dust, dirt, game ball B, etc. enter the pachinko machine 1 through the gap between the effect display device 1600 and the opening 3010a. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems that cause interruption of the game, and it is possible to prevent the interruption of the game from deteriorating the interest of the player, which makes the player enjoyable. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the set plate 1650 for attaching the effect display device 1600 to the back box 3010 is transparent and flat, when the effect display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650, the effect display device is used. Through the space between the 1600 and the opening 3010a, the front to the rear or the rear to the front can be visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to check the inside of the pachinko machine 1 from the outside, or to check the inside of the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed from the inside of the pachinko machine 1, and the time and effort required for maintenance is easy. It is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, since the set plate 1650 has a flat plate shape, the space occupancy in the front-rear direction by the set plate 1650 can be reduced. Back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, back top front production unit 3300, back bottom front as a decorative body, a production device, etc. that can easily secure a space for arranging It is possible to provide the effect unit 3400, the back-up after-effect unit 3500, and the back-down after-effect unit 3600, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player.

Further, since the back box 3010 is provided behind the game panel 1100 in which the game area 5a is provided in the front, the effect display device attached to the back box 3010 through the game panel 1100 when viewed from the front. The effect image produced by 1600 can be visually recognized, and the effect image can be entertained by the player. Further, since the pachinko machine 1 has a feeling similar to that of the conventional pachinko machine in which the effect image can be seen in the game area 5a, the player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine is given a sense of security by appearance. This makes it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play.

In addition, the pachinko machine is provided by the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back upper front effect unit 3300, the back lower front effect unit 3400, the back upper rear effect unit 3500, and the back lower rear effect unit 3600 arranged inside the back box 3010. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that easily attracts the attention of the player, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that has a high appeal to the player. Further, by the production by the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back top front production unit 3300, the back bottom front production unit 3400, the back top rear production unit 3500, and the back bottom rear production unit 3600 arranged inside the back box 3010. Along with entertaining the player, the production of the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back top front production unit 3300, the back bottom front production unit 3400, the back top rear production unit 3500, and the back bottom rear production unit 3600. By appropriately combining the effect image of the effect display device 1600, various effects can be shown to the player, and the player can be less likely to get bored and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the back box 3010, the effect display device 1600 can be easily removed from the back box 3010 when the effect display device 1600 breaks down, and it takes time and effort for maintenance. It is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a game provided in the left-right direction in the ball guidance unit 2580 of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a of the game board 5A in which the game is played by the game ball B. Depending on the progress of the game (lottery result of the special symbol drawn) on the downstream side of the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b where the ball B can flow and the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b. Since the second major winning opening 2007, which allows the game ball B to be accepted, is provided, when the second major winning opening 2007 becomes acceptable according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn, the second major winning opening 2007 is provided. In order for the game ball B to be accepted by the grand prize opening 2007, the player is hit with the game ball B into the game area 5a so that the game ball B circulates in the first guide passage 2580a or the second guide passage 2580b. It can be inserted, and the game ball B can be driven (“right-handed”) aiming at the entrance of the first guide passage 2580a and the entrance of the second guide passage 2580b, and can be inserted into the game area 5a. The player can be thrilled depending on whether or not the driven game ball B is guided by the desired first guidance passage 2580a, which is easily accepted by the second prize opening 2007, and the player's expectation. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. Further, at the timing when the second prize opening 2007 becomes acceptable, the player is asked so that the game ball B passing through the first guide passage 2580a or the second guidance passage 2580b reaches the second prize opening 2007. The driving operation of the game ball B can be promoted to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a, and the driving operation of the game ball B can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Then, when the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2580a or the second guide passage 2580b, a plurality of inclined sides are alternately provided in the vertical direction so that one side in the front-rear direction becomes lower. A game ball is formed by an inclined portion 2581b of the left passage member 2581 or an inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582, and a standing wall portion 2581c or a standing wall portion 2582d extending upward from the lower end of each inclined portion 2581b or the inclined portion 2582c. B is guided downward in a zigzag manner in the front-rear direction, and the first protruding portion 2581e and the first protruding portion 2582b and the first protruding portion 2582b protruding from the side wall portion 2581a and the side wall portion 2582a above each inclined portion 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c. (Ii) A side wall portion 2581a at a portion between the second protruding portion 2583b of the protruding portion 2582f and the passage closing plate 2583, the lower end of the upper inclined portion 2581b or the inclined portion 2582c, and the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2581b or the inclined portion 2582c. The game ball B is guided in a meandering manner in the left-right direction by the first projecting piece portion 2581f and the second projecting piece portion 2582g protruding from the side wall portion 2582a. As a result, the game ball B is guided downward while swinging in the left-right direction and the front-back direction in a visible state, so that the player can move the game ball B, which has never been seen in the conventional pachinko machine 1. It is possible to entertain the player with the movement of the game ball B and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

At this time, the game ball B is moved from the inclined portion 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c to the left and right outside by the side wall portions 2581a, the side wall portion 2582a, and the side wall portion 2583a provided on the left and right sides of the inclined portion 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c. Can be regulated, and by the vertical wall portion 2581c and the vertical wall portion 2582d extending upward from the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c, the upper inclined portion 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c are inclined downward. Since it is possible to prevent the game ball B moving to the portion 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c from falling outward in the front-rear direction, the game ball B is guided along the plurality of inclined portions 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c. And the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely achieved.

Since the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b have a plurality of inclined portions 2581b and inclined portions 2582c that are inclined so that one side in the front-rear direction is lowered, the inclined portions 2581b and the inclined portions are provided. When the game ball B guided in 2582c is viewed from the front, the flow speed is slower than that of the free flow, and the position of the game ball B in the front-rear direction is unclear. It is possible to make the game ball B appear to be slowly flowing down against gravity, and it is possible to show the player the movement of the game ball B, which was not possible with conventional pachinko machines. It is possible to entertain people and suppress the decline in interest.

In this way, since the game ball B can be guided downward while swinging in the left-right direction and the front-back direction by the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b, it is compared with the case where the game ball B is freely flowed down. Therefore, the flow speed of the game ball B can be relatively slowed (delayed). As a result, the staying time of the game ball B in the game area 5a can be lengthened, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B for a long time, and the player is less likely to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

By the way, if the game ball B is made to flow down in a spiral shape as a guide passage, the game ball B that flows down in a spiral shape passes through the foremost part of the spiral shape many times, so that the flow speed of the game ball B flows down. It is easy to take the timing for. Therefore, at the time of "small hit" or the like, it is possible to accept the game ball B into the second large winning opening 2007 on the downstream side relatively easily, so that some players may perform a driving operation of the game ball B. There was a risk that he would get bored early and lose his interest. On the other hand, in the ball guidance unit 2580 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is guided by the first guidance passage 2580a and the second guidance passage 2580b, in the first guidance passage 2580a and the second guidance passage 2580b. Since the circulation speed is suppressed by swinging the game ball B in the left-right direction and the front-back direction, the game ball B is delayed to the second major winning opening 2007 on the downstream side as compared with other areas in the game area 5a. It is possible to make it difficult to take the timing of hitting the game ball B aiming at the second big winning opening 2007, and it is possible to give a difficulty level to the hitting operation. As a result, the player can be motivated to perform the driving operation, the driving operation of the game ball B can be enjoyed, and the game ball B is accepted in the second prize opening 2007. It is possible to give a feeling and suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

Further, since it is possible to give a difficulty level to the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the second big winning opening 2007 by the first guiding passage 2580a and the second guiding passage 2580b, the second big winning opening 2007 is reached. It is possible to make it difficult to accept the game ball B. As a result, it is difficult for the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b to accept the game balls B into the second major winning opening 2007. Therefore, by accepting the game balls B into the second major winning opening 2007, a predetermined number of game balls are accepted. It is possible to reduce the chance that B is paid out, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, when the game ball B is clogged in the first guide passage 2580a or the second guide passage 2580b (when the ball is clogged), the inclined portion 2581b and the top wall portion 2581d of the left passage member 2581 as a communication portion are formed. A thin rod-shaped member is inserted from the outside through the gap between the two, and the gap between the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582 and the top wall portion 2582e, and the game ball B is pierced to easily eliminate the clogging. Can be done. Therefore, even if a ball clogging occurs in the first guide passage 2580a or the second guide passage 2580b during the game, it can be eliminated at an early stage, so that the interruption time of the game can be shortened as much as possible. , It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, since the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b are provided in the left-right direction, the game ball B guided in each of the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b can be shown to the player. It is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball B and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player drives the game ball B into the game area 5a in order to play a game, a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the game area 5a cause the game ball B to be driven into the game area 5a. , The game ball B flows down while making various movements, and the game ball B that has flowed down to the downstream end in the game area 5a is discharged from the out port 1008. In this game area 5a, the progress of the game (the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005). Since the second big winning opening 2007 that opens and closes according to the above is provided, when the second big winning opening 2007 is in a state where the game ball B can be accepted, the game ball B is accepted into the second big winning opening 2007. , The game ball B will be distributed in the pseudo game area 2010 after being detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2561. Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are also planted in this pseudo game area 2010, the game ball B flows down while making various movements due to these obstacle nails N, and reaches the downstream end in the pseudo game area 2010. The flowing game ball B is discharged from the pseudo out port 2404 adjacent to the out port 1008. Since the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 having a larger opening than the second major winning opening 2007 is provided in this pseudo-game area 2010, the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 receives the game ball B according to the progress of the game. The game ball B received in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2561.

As a result, since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the game area 5a and the pseudo game area 2010, the game ball B flows down while making complicated movements due to the plurality of obstacle nails N. It is possible to entertain the player with the movement of the game ball B and to make it difficult for the player to get bored. Further, since the out port 1008 of the game area 5a and the pseudo out port 2404 of the pseudo game area 2010 are adjacent to each other, the player has an illusion that the pseudo game area 2010 is a part of the game area 5a. Can be made to. Furthermore, since the 2nd prize opening door 2562 door of the 2nd prize opening 2007 is to be moved in the front-rear direction, the existence of the 2nd prize opening door 2562 can be seen when viewed from the front (player). It can be made difficult, and the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 (pseudo-large winning opening door 2405) that can be opened and closed can be relatively made to stand out. Since the opening of the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is made larger than that of the second large winning opening 2007, it is an illusion that the game ball B received in the second large winning opening 2007 circulates in the game area 5a again. In addition to making the game area 5a, it is possible to give the illusion that a huge winning opening, which has never been seen in conventional pachinko machines, is provided, so that a strong impact can be given to the player, and the game can be played. In addition to being able to strongly attract the interest of the player, the player can be strongly focused on the pseudo-game area 2010 regardless of the presence or absence of the game ball B in the pseudo-game area 2010, and the appealing power to the player. It is possible to provide a high-quality pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the opening of the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is larger than that of the second large winning opening 2007, when the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is in a state where the game ball B can be accepted, many game balls B can be played in a short time. It is possible to make the player instantly recognize that it can be accepted, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest to the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, and the game ball B to the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. It is possible to raise the expectation for acceptance of the game and suppress the decline in interest, and the pseudo-large prize opening 2402 provided in the pseudo-game area 2010 is a real large-scale prize provided in the game area 5a. It can make the player think that it is a mouth. Further, by accepting the game ball B in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 which is normally closed for the player, a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of the game ball B, the player is advantageous) to the player. It is possible to strongly think that an advantageous gaming state is generated, etc.), and it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game.

For this reason, when the second major winning opening 2007 and the pseudo grand winning opening 2402 are opened according to the progress of the game and the game ball B can be accepted, the second major winning opening 2007 is given to the player. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a aiming at, and the player can be entertained. Then, when the game ball B is received in the open second prize opening 2007 and supplied into the pseudo game area 2010, the game ball B is provided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo game area 2010. Can flow down while making various movements to entertain the movement of the game ball B, and the player can be thrilled depending on whether or not the game ball B is accepted by the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. , It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is opened according to the progress of the game and the game ball B can be accepted, it is possible to make the player think that a chance has arrived, and the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 (No. 1). It is possible to perform a driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the two major winning openings 2007), and it is possible to entertain the player by accepting a large number of game balls B in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. It is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of a person's game.

In addition, since the opening of the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is larger than that of the second large winning opening 2007, it is provided with a huge large winning opening that has never been seen in pachinko machines for players. It is possible to misunderstand that the pachinko machine is as if it were, and it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the interest in the pachinko machine 1, and to make it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to be played. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players. Then, when the second big winning opening 2007 opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern and the pseudo big winning opening 2402 opens and closes due to a "big hit" or the like, as described above, the second big winning opening opens due to the arrival of a chance for the player. It is possible to perform a driving operation of the game ball B aiming at 2007 (pseudo-large winning opening 2402), and it is possible to greatly entertain the player and suppress a decline in interest. At this time, since the game ball B circulating in the pseudo-game area 2010 is the one that has been accepted by the second prize opening 2007 and finished the game (so-called dead ball that does not affect the game). Even if it is accepted by the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, the player is not given a privilege such as paying out the game ball B, and the increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is suppressed. Can be done. In addition, since all the game balls B received in the second big winning opening 2007 are paid out, the player is paid out by accepting the game ball B in the pseudo big winning opening 2402. It is possible to make the illusion that the game ball B is accepted into the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. Further, since all the game balls B received in the second big prize opening 2007 are paid out, the game balls B not accepted in the pseudo big winning opening 2402 on the downstream side of the second big winning opening 2007. Since the payout is also made for the player, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the number of game balls B to be paid out is larger than the number of game balls B received in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. , It is possible to make the player feel like he / she has gained, and at the same time, he / she can entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 may be opened and closed so that the game ball B can be accepted as a "big hit" or a notice that the player is in an advantageous gaming state. As a result, the pseudo-grand prize opening 2402 opens and closes flutteringly, which can indicate the arrival of a chance to the player, raise the expectation of the player for the game, and suppress the decline in the interest. can. As this notice, for example, it is possible to suggest a high or low degree of expectation that an advantageous gaming state will be obtained, depending on the opening / closing speed, the number of opening / closing times, etc. of the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. Alternatively, by opening and closing the pseudo-big prize opening 2402 with a rhythm such as 337 beats or a musical rhythm in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, the high and low expectations and the game state after the "big hit" (for example). , Time saving state, probability change state), etc. can also be suggested. In this way, by opening and closing the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, it is possible to present a variety of effects to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored.

Further, in the normal state, since the second big winning opening 2007 is closed and the game ball B cannot be accepted, even if the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is opened, the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is provided. Since the game ball B cannot be distributed in the game area 2010, a premium feeling can be given to the distribution of the game ball B in the pseudo game area 2010, and the second major winning opening is given according to the progress of the game. It is possible to raise the expectation of the player so that 2007 will be accepted.

Further, since the game ball B supplied from the second large winning opening 2007 to the pseudo game area 2010 is discharged from the pseudo out port 2404 without returning to the game area 5a, the pseudo game area 2010 is a game. Since it is possible to make the player strongly think that it is a special area (premium area) independent of the area 5a, the player is strongly requested to distribute the game ball B in the pseudo game area 2010. When the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is opened and closed according to the progress of the game, the game ball B is actively aimed at the second large winning opening 2007 in order to distribute the game ball B in the pseudo-game area 2010. It is possible to enter the game, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2007 and supplied into the pseudo game area 2010 is not received in the pseudo big winning opening 2402, the pseudo out port at the downstream end in the pseudo game area 2010. Since it is discharged from the 2404, it is possible to make the player think that the pseudo out port 2404 is similar to the out port 1008 provided at the downstream end in the game area 5a, and the pseudo grand prize opening. It is possible to entertain the acceptance of the game ball B into the 2402 without a sense of incongruity, as in the case of the openable and closable second large winning opening 2007 provided in the game area 5a, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the pseudo-out port 2404 for discharging the game ball B that was not accepted by the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is provided so as to be adjacent to the out port 1008 provided at the downstream end in the game area 5a, the first is It is possible to make it appear that the game ball B supplied from the two major winning openings 2007 to the pseudo-game area 2010 and not accepted by the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is discharged from the out opening 1008.

Further, since the game ball B (so-called dead ball that does not affect the game) that has been detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2561 and finished the game is supplied to the pseudo game area 2010, the pseudo game In the area 2010, the game ball B that does not affect the game is used for the production. Therefore, for example, as compared with the effect device in which the pseudo game ball similar to the game ball B is enclosed, it is not necessary to provide a mechanism for circulating the pseudo game ball for the effect, and the cost for the pachinko machine 1 is increased. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403 can detect the acceptance of the game ball B into the pseudo-large winning opening 2402, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect by detecting the game ball B, which makes the player more likely to play. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can entertain and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, since the pseudo-large winning opening sensor 2403 is made visible to the player, the game ball B (so-called dead ball that does not affect the game) that has finished the game is distributed in the pseudo-game area 2010. Even so, it is possible to make the player think that the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is a real large winning opening, so that the game ball to the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 that opens and closes according to the progress of the game. It is possible to strongly request the acceptance of B, and it is possible to entertain the driving of the game ball B aiming at the second grand prize opening 2007 (pseudo grand winning opening 2402) and suppress the decline in interest.

[11. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 to 172. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 167, and FIG. 169 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. 170 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing, FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing an example of setting value confirmation display processing, and FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing an example of error display processing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be explained, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, the main control side timer interrupt processing, the setting change processing, the setting value confirmation display processing, and the error. The display process will be described.

[11-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a special random number for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game or a small hit game, and a random number for determining a hit determination to be used for determining the initial value of this special random number. And, a random number for reach determination to be used for determining whether or not to generate reach (reach loss) when the jackpot game is not generated, and a first special symbol display and a second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. With the random number for the variable display pattern used to determine the variable display pattern of the special symbol that is variablely displayed in, and the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 when the big hit game is generated. A symbol random number to be used for determining the jackpot symbol and the small hit symbol (determination of the hit type) to be derived and displayed, and a random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol to be used for determining the initial value of this symbol random number are prepared. ing. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining whether or not to open and close the variable winning opening door 2521 capable of guiding the game ball B to the variable winning opening 2003, and a random number for determining whether or not to open and close the variable winning opening door 2521, and this ordinary symbol hit. Normal symbol hit judgment initial value determination random number to be used to determine the initial value of the judgment random number, and normal symbol to be used to determine the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Random numbers for pattern variation display patterns are available.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the special random numbers are updated by the hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by the software.

[11-2. Initial value update type counter movement]
For example, the special random number is updated directly by the hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value and preliminarily at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. When other values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another and all the values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again and the main control is performed. Based on the clock signal input to the MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit. It is designed to do.

On the other hand, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number, the normal symbol hit judgment initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch (RWM switch 633d) of the payout control board 633 is operated when the power is turned on, or in the main control side power-on processing described later, the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is used. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the total of various stored information as numerical values is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off processing (power off). When clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, such as when the sum value does not match, the main control MPU1310a incorporates the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. An ID code is extracted from the non-volatile RAM, and an initial value derivation process is executed to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit judgment random number based on the extracted ID code. The mechanism is such that the derived fixed value is set. That is, the same fixed value derived based on the ID code is always overwritten and updated in the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used when the ID code is stored, and the initial value derivation process when clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. It is prevented from being analyzed by taking a second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code by executing it and a two-step security measure by.

Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as an initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and inputs an ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing when the value of the counter that illegally acquires and updates the random value for normal symbol hit judgment and the normal symbol hit judgment value match, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a'provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for the normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in another game board 5', that is, another pachinko machine 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and the game ball is passed through the gate 2002 at each predetermined interval, the variable winning opening door 2521 is opened and closed to guide the game ball B to the variable winning opening 2003. The possible state cannot be generated.

[11-3. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set at a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, as shown in FIGS. 167 and 168, the main control side power-on processing is performed. When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control MPU 1310a sets the RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM can be updated.

Following step S10, the main control MPU1310a performs a power failure clearing process (step S12). In this power failure clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input. The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the voltage reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). Has been done.

Following step S12, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch is being operated (step S14). The RAM clear switch has three functions (RAM clear switch, setting changeover button, and error release switch), and here, the information stored in the predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM is completely erased. Operates as a function of the RAM clear switch for. In this determination, the main control MPU1310a determines that the RAM is cleared when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated, while the RAM When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared, and it is determined that the RAM clear switch is operated. Since the time is extremely short within the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, to the determination in step S14, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is actually pressed. The person who does this turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch.

In the determination in step S14, when it is determined that the RAM clear switch is being operated, the main control MPU1310a sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S14, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated, the value 0 is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU 1310a is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and is stored in the main control built-in RAM. It is a flag indicating whether to delete various information including information indicating the value of the information output judgment counter), and is set to a value 1 when various information is deleted and a value 0 when various information is not deleted. .. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not there is an operation of opening the main body frame 4 and turning on the setting key (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a inserts the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a is set by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) and turning it ON. The key is turned on, and the setting key is turned on from the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key is turned on. Since the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, to the determination in step S18 is extremely short, the person who actually turns on the setting key switch 1311a After turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

In the determination in step S18, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and the setting key switch is determined by the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key 1311a is ON, the value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S18, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main body frame 4 is not open to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and / or a signal of turning on the setting key. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on, the value 0 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20B). The setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area (described later, a setting value dedicated area in a specific area) of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Is a flag indicating whether or not to allow the setting change or confirmation display of the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 at the time when is turned ON, and the setting change or confirmation of the setting value. The value is set to 1 when the display is permitted, and the value is set to 0 when the setting change of the set value or the confirmation display is not permitted. The value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG set in steps S20A and S20B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU1310a performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the system that controls drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until it starts (boots). In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is in a state in which various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) can be received at the time when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process. When the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process, the payout control board 633 completes booting in a shorter time than the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the payout control board 633 is the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). ) Is ready to receive various commands.

Following step S22, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is performed based on this power failure warning signal. In the determination in step S24, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the power failure warning signal is input, the main control MPU 1310a returns to the determination in step S24 again and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. A detailed description of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described later.

In the determination in step S24, when the main control MPU1310a determines that there is no input of the power failure warning signal, whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1. (Step S25). The main control MPU1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, and thus the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied. judge.

In the determination in step S25, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not a value 1, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a value 1. In addition, it is determined whether or not the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0 (step S26). The main control MPU1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, so that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied. , It is determined that various information will be deleted in the same manner as when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied.

In the determination in step S26, the main control MPU1310a calculates the checksum when it is determined that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not a value 0 (step S29). .. This checksum considers various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculates the total.

Following step S29, in the main control MPU1310a, the calculated checksum value (sum value) is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off processing (power off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). In step S30, when it is determined that the main control MPU1310a matches, it is determined whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores various information, checksum value (sum value), game backup information such as backup flag BK-FLG value, etc. in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power off processing described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not the operation has been performed, and is set to a value 1 when the main control side power off processing is normally completed, and a value 0 when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S29 is calculated and the determination of step S30 is performed when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. , Will be described in detail later.

In the determination of step S30, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S32, the backup flag BK-FLG of the main control MPU 1310a is not a value 1. When (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power off processing has not been normally completed, an error display processing is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is completed is maintained, the game cannot proceed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. The detailed explanation of this error display processing will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power off processing is not completed normally when the power is cut off. If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as abnormal (or unreliable), and an error display is performed to inform that fact. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

The power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is set from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). This routine is performed again by turning on the pachinko machine 1 while operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633 after turning it 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on. The processing is started when the power is turned on on the main control side. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is being operated in the determination in step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. In the determination in step S18 described above, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and the setting key switch 1311a is determined by the setting key ON signal. Since it is determined that the setting key is ON and the value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in the above-mentioned step S20A, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 in the above-mentioned determination in step S25. Moreover, assuming that the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, and the step described later is followed by the setting change process in step S37 described later. In the process of S38, the RAM error can be cleared and the game can proceed by clearing all the areas of the main control built-in RAM except for the specific area (hereinafter, "first RAM error". How to cancel ").

As a method different from this first RAM error canceling method, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, and the setting key cylinder remains in the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633, the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, is started again. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is being operated in the determination in step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. On the other hand, in step S18 described above, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and / or the setting key switch is determined by the setting key ON signal. Since it is determined that the setting key 1311a is not turned on and the value 0 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in the above-mentioned step S20B, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in the above-mentioned determination in step S26. Assuming that the value is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a value 0, that is, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, but the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied. It is determined that various information will be erased, and in the process of step S38 described later, the RAM error can be canceled and the game can proceed by clearing all the areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. (Hereinafter, it will be described as "second RAM error canceling method").

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S30, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU 1310a determines. When the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power off processing has not been completed normally, the error display in step S33 is performed and the main control built-in RAM is displayed. When telling that there is something wrong with the contents stored in (or it is unreliable), there are two cancellation methods, the first RAM error cancellation method and the second RAM error cancellation method. Can be done by. As a result, when it is not necessary to change the setting of the set value at all, the RAM error can be canceled by performing the second RAM error canceling method using the RAM clear switch.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control side power off processing has been normally completed, the main control MPU1310a has a built-in main control as a power recovery time. The work area of the RAM is set (step S34). In this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU 1310a advances the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the "reset" is the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, and the fraudulent means (for example, the cheating person is on the hem of the arm). The state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with the high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device), the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset, and then returned is also included.

Following step S34, the main control MPU1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed by performing various subsequent processes. Therefore, the backup flag BK- is normally terminated when the main control side power is turned off, which will be described later. If the value 1 is not set in the FLG, as will be described later, all the areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are cleared.

Following the determination in step S36, the main control MPU1310a determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1 (step S27). The main control MPU1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, and thus the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. judge.

In the determination in step S27, the main control MPU1310a satisfies the predetermined set value display permission condition on the assumption that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1. When it is determined that the value is present, the set value confirmation display process is performed (step S28). In this set value confirmation display process, a detailed description thereof will be described later, but the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is displayed on the setting display 1310 g.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S25, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, that is, a predetermined set value change. When it is determined that the permission condition is satisfied, the setting change process is performed (step S37). The detailed description of this setting change process will be described later, but it is performed based on the signal from the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633. As described above, the RAM clear switch has a function (RAM clear switch, setting changeover button, and error release switch) that has three functions, and here, a setting changeover button for selecting and switching a set value. It works as a function of. Each time the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is operated, a signal (setting value selection switching signal) is input to change the set value and display it on the setting display 1310g, and the setting key switch 1311a The changed setting value is determined based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a when the setting key cylinder is operated from the ON operation to the OFF operation, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, it is predetermined. When it is determined that various information will be deleted in the same way as when the preset setting value change permission condition is satisfied, the specified area is excluded from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. And clear (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a is performed by writing a value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area excluding a specific area of the total area of the main control built-in RAM). In the present embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, and when the setting change process is completed, the main control built-in RAM is always used. Except for a specific area among all the areas of the above (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area excluding the specific area of the total area of the main control built-in RAM)) is cleared. Here, the "specific area" is an area dedicated to the set value in which the set value is stored, and an out port 1008, a first sub-out port 2021, and a second sub-out port provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5. It is composed of an out-ball counting dedicated area in which the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by 2022 is stored. The set value dedicated area stores the set value whose setting is changed in the setting change process described later, and the out ball counting dedicated area is the out port 1008, the first sub out port 2021 and the first sub out port 2021 counted in the ball number counting process described later. The counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the two sub-out ports 2022 is stored.

The main control MPU 1310a may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a sum when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) for informing that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633 has been operated indicates RAM clear and various information is erased. When the values do not match, or when the main control side power off processing is not completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and the taken out ID code is taken out. The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment based on is performed, and this fixed value is used as the initial value of the above-mentioned normal symbol hit judgment random number. Set to the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination to be used for determination.

Following step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value 0. Further, the main control MPU 1310a advances the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following steps S36, S28 or S40, the main control MPU 1310a sets the initial value and the start setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, the watchdog timer control register built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter, "" The timer setting value is set in the WDT control register) to start the main control built-in WDT and start the time counting until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT is started, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is started, and the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a is reached by the time when the timed time reaches the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in the “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the WDT with built-in main control is started and the time is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time is reached by the time set by the timer setting value, The timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the time measurement. It is possible to monitor whether or not it is.

Following step S41, the main control MPU1310a performs interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports built into the main control MPU 1310a (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 633, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the peripheral control board 1510). ), The communication speed is set and the presence / absence of parity is set in the transmission serial port prescaler, and the initialization of the transmission circuit and the transmission permission are set in the transmission serial port control register.

Following step S44, the main control MPU 1310a sets the test signal output port initialization (step S46). Here, in a gaming machine testing institution, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control MPU 1310a sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, the special random numbers used for determining whether or not to generate the big hit game are latched in the hard random number control register built in the main control MPU1310a in order to be updated by the hardware. In addition to making settings such as acquisition, the start of the main control built-in hard random number circuit is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without duplication, and are predetermined. When all the values in the numerical range have been extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the numerical range predetermined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Other values in are extracted one after another without duplication. When the main control MPU1310a acquires a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control built-in hardware when this latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU 1310a sets a reservation for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on. Create a power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output judgment counter notification command as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Remember in. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information may be stored. be. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information The output judgment counter notification command will be sent. These commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later. A detailed description of the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU1310a sets interrupt enable setting (step S52). With this setting, the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. NS. The determination in step S54 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

In the determination in step S54, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is not input, the main control MPU1310a performs the non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for reach determination, random number for variable display pattern, random number for determining initial value for big hit symbol, random number for determining initial value for small hit symbol, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, the random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by the software. The above-mentioned random numbers for determining normal symbol hits, random numbers for determining initial value for determining normal symbol hits, random numbers for ordinary symbol variation display patterns, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU1310a determines whether or not there is a power failure warning signal input, and if there is no power failure warning signal input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processes of steps S54 to S56 are referred to as "main control side main process".

On the other hand, in the determination in step S54, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU1310a sets the interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). This setting prevents the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, from being performed, prevents writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protects the above-mentioned rewriting of various information including game information and other information.

Following step S58, the main control MPU 1310a starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting the output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S12 is performed.

Following step S60, the main control MPU 1310a outputs to, for example, various indicators of the function display unit 1400, a variable winning opening solenoid 2522, a first winning opening solenoid 2524, a second major winning opening solenoid 2563, a special monitor, and the like. The driving signal is stopped (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum calculates the total of the game information of the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value described above, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control MPU1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). As a result, the storage of the game backup information is completed.

Following step S66, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM, so that it is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S41, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time counting is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power-on processing again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power off processing".

As described above, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit when it is affected by electrical noise. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a cannot perform the determination in step S54, and cannot perform the main control side power cutoff process. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power off processing, and the main control side power on processing is executed again. .. That is, since the main control side power off processing is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off processing based on immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored, so that the previous time The checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power off processing is executed when the power is cut off, and the checksum calculated in step S28 when the system is restarted after being forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. The value (sum value) cannot match, and a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and in the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are excluded. It will be completely erased (cleared).

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, the main control side power-on processing is performed.

In step S30, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32, whether or not the main control side power off processing is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

Further, in the determination in step S25, when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting change of the set value is permitted, the setting change process of step S37 is performed. In the process of step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area, and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1). At that time, that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area in the process of step S38. In this way, when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch), the set value is changed and determined. When the setting is changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This is because when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is pressed, for example, when the game hall is closed, the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, per probability fluctuation (probability change)). In the case of (such as), it is necessary to erase (clear) the above-mentioned game backup information before the next business start, so the staff such as the clerk of the game hall presses the RAM clear switch. It is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the operation unit. In addition, when deciding to change the setting value, if the setting change processing is performed (even if the current setting value is maintained as a result, the setting value before the setting change processing is performed is obtained. It is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information including various information such as the game information from the main control built-in RAM. As described above, the setting key is set in addition to the change of the set value. Since it is an important key that allows confirmation of the set value, possession is permitted only to a limited number of people including the manager of the game hall, and is limited to 2 to 3 people. In the present embodiment, the set value is set. Even if the change is not decided, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed only by a limited specific person, the clerk of the game hall or the like can delete (clear) the game backup information in the RAM. By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the clear switch, the game backup information can be erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM.

Here, a point will be described in which the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is not determined, that is, the case where the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined after the wait time standby process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is proceeded. The problem in is explained.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, receives the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. It is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or momentary power failure. That is, even if the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as + 5V, so that the island equipment of the game hall It is possible to complete the power cutoff process on the main control side within a period of about 7 ms after the power is cut off from the main control side. This is because a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs when the player is playing a game, that is, when the main control side main process or the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed, and the island equipment of the game hall When the power supply from the main control side is cut off, the main control side power supply cutoff process can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process in step S22 at the time of power recovery, the waiting time until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots) (boot timer: in the present embodiment). (2.5 seconds is set.) Is started, and if a momentary power failure or power failure occurs just before the standby time is reached, hardware called an electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU1310a. Although the charged charge is applied as + 5V, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so that the main control side timer described later is performed. Even if the interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing may not be completed. Therefore, the calculated value of the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control side power-on processing is started again at the time of power recovery.

Then, at the time of this power recovery, the main control side power-on processing is started, the wait time standby processing in step S22 is completed without causing a momentary power failure or a power failure, and then in step S28, the main control built-in RAM is completed. When the value calculated based on the contents of the above and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs are compared and judged in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, in step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area. In other words, the RAM clear switch is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM even if the RAM clear switch is operated by a staff member such as a game hall clerk at the time of power recovery and there is no manifestation of intention by a staff member such as a game hall clerk to clear the RAM. There is a problem that the above-mentioned game backup information is deleted (cleared).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, The determination in step S24 is returned again, and the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. This makes it impossible to proceed with the game. Although the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S16A or step S16B before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the determination in step S24 is returned again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. By repeating the determination in step S24, the game cannot be progressed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter). Can be prevented from being updated, and the check sum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 and the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64 match. Therefore, the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure stored in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized at the time of power recovery.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), the pachinko machine is being played while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game. Even if the power to 1 is cut off, the power is supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU1310a, by the electrolytic capacitor MC2, so that the game information and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) due to the progress of this game The main control board performs the processes of steps S58 to S68, which are backup processes for storing various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, and the main control side power failure process composed of an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the 1310 can be completed, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a is restarted, the checksum calculation result of step S28 and the checksum calculation in the backup process are performed. Since it is determined that the result (that is, the value calculated and stored in the checksum of step S64) matches, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored in the main control built-in RAM is stored. Never initializes. That is, the main control board 1310 can be started by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal is input, the main control built-in WDT forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a to contents the main control built-in RAM. While the main control side power off processing can be started again without updating at all, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, so far. It is possible to surely complete the processing when the power is cut off on the main control side within the "power supply securing period at the time of momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by the hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure during the processing when the main control side power is turned on at the time of power recovery, and the main control The charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU 1310a, as + 5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power cutoff process cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the step immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22. It is determined in S24 whether or not the power failure warning signal is input, and when the power failure warning signal is input, the determination in step S24 is returned again, and as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input, the determination in step S24 is performed. By repeating the game, the game cannot be progressed.

By making it impossible for the game to proceed by such software, the steps after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt is enabled in step S52. By blocking the progress to the main control side timer interrupt process that is set and described later, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination)) We have adopted a mechanism that can prevent various information) including information indicating the value of the counter for use) from being updated. When the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure in this way, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination)) Various information including information indicating the value of the counter for) is covered by the hardware so that it will not be changed at all, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and game information) by surely completing the main control side power outage processing. By dividing it into two parts, one is covered by hardware so that other information (for example, various information including the value of the main prize ball number information output judgment counter) is not changed at all. , The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) are surely prevented from being changed. Can be done.

Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In order to convey, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output judgment counter notification command are created and the main control is built in as transmission information. It is stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. This power-on main control return destination command includes information indicating the driving state of the variable winning opening solenoid 2522, information indicating the driving state of the first winning opening solenoid 2524, and driving of the second winning opening solenoid 2563. It is mainly composed of information indicating the state. Here, first, the information instructing the drive state of the variable winning opening solenoid 2522, the information instructing the driving state of the first special winning opening solenoid 2524, and the second major winning opening solenoid are given to the main control return destination command when the power is turned on. The problem when the information indicating the drive state of 2563 and the information indicating the drive state are not included, that is, the problem when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the main control return destination command at power-on is turned on is not performed in step S50. The points will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the jackpot game screen (for example, the screen of the jackpot game effect) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 controls the second large winning opening solenoid 2563. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the second prize opening 2007 is opened by the opening / closing member after driving, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 is in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of, the second major winning opening solenoid 2563 is driven by restoring to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. From the start, the second grand prize opening 2007 will shift from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member to the state of being opened.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state and a big hit game is generated, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is transferred from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Which of the big hit games, even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the received power-on state command. It is a round or cannot be displayed at all. That is, for example, a game ball enters the second major winning opening 2007 and is detected by the second major winning opening sensor 2561. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits a display command to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the display command, the peripheral control board 1510 enters the second prize opening 2007 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number of balls of the game ball can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, the number of rounds) of the jackpot game.

In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310 finishes the fourth round (fourth round) of the big hit game, the drive of the second big winning opening solenoid 2563 is stopped and the second big winning opening 2007 opens and closes. Around the main control board 1310, the big winning opening 1 closing display command instructing the transition from the open state to the closed state by the member (that is, the start of closing between the rounds of the second big winning opening 2007) is issued. When transmitting to the control board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) of the big hit game, the second big winning opening solenoid 2563 is started to be driven and the second big winning opening 2007 is an opening / closing member. The main control board 1310 issues a large winning opening opening 5th display command instructing the transition from the closed state to the open state (that is, the opening of the 5th round of the 2nd major winning opening 2007). To the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of starting 5 rounds of the jackpot game from the screen according to the above-mentioned probability and time saving state and displays it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

Further, for example, a screen (for example, the variable winning opening door 2521 is open) telling the second starting port 2005 that the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted and the game state is advantageous to the player. The main control board 1310 drives the variable winning opening solenoid 2522 to open the variable winning opening door 2521 while the peripheral control board 1510 displays and controls the display in the display area of the effect display device 1600. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the game ball B is in a state where it can be operated and guided to the second starting port 2005, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 has a built-in main control in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the RAM, the variable winning opening solenoid 2522 is restored to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. The drive is started, the variable winning opening door 2521 is closed, and the second starting opening 2005 is closed.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a game state in which the game ball can be accepted into the variable winning opening 2003 as a game state and a game state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 produces a screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. A screen that informs the player that the game is in a game state in which the game ball can be accepted even if it can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600 and returned to the variable winning opening 2003. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display at all in the display area of the effect display device 1600. For this reason, the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and the game ball can be accepted into the variable winning opening 2003 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power restoration. In such a case, it may be forgotten that the gaming state is such that the gaming ball is returned to the variable winning opening 2003 as the gaming state at the time of power recovery. Regardless of which player is in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the power is restored, the screen instructing the game (that is, the screen instructing the game to insert the game ball into the variable winning opening 2003) is not displayed. There was also the problem that if you played such a game, you wouldn't know.

As described above, in the above-mentioned two examples, there is a problem that the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), a power-on state command is used. And the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on A counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310. When a power stop or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the drive of the second major winning opening solenoid 2563 is started as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the second major winning opening 2007 is closed by the opening / closing member. Since it is possible to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the state is changed to the open state, the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen that specifies that it is the 4th round of the jackpot game (that is, how many rounds it is). Although it is not possible to display the screen indicating A screen that tells you that you are in a state (for example, "It's a big hit. The second big prize opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the second big winning opening." Is displayed in the display area of the directing display device 1600, and the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is instructed to enter the game ball into the second prize opening 2007 after the power is restored. For example, in the above-described example, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs in a state in which the game ball can be accepted into the variable winning opening 2003 and the game state is favorable to the player. When the power is emitted and then the power is restored, the variable winning opening solenoid 2522 can be started to be driven to open the variable winning opening door 2521 to guide the game ball B to the variable winning opening 2003 as the return destination of the main control board 1310. (For example, a screen that tells the player that the variable winning opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the variable winning opening.) Is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the peripheral control board 1510, and the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine can be instructed to play the game by inserting the game ball into the variable winning opening 2003 after the power is restored. ..

As a result, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power is restored after that, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. Can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection step, which is the inspection step of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection step, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is composed of the above-mentioned backup processes of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control side power off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30. In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and in step S38, all the areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are always cleared.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information By creating an output judgment counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball Only three commands, the counter notification command for determining the number information output, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, in these commands, in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, the power-on state command is first transmitted, then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted, and then the number of main prize balls at power-on. The information output judgment counter notification command is sent. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is issued as the first command from the main control board 1310. It will be transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on state command is used when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure), the RAM clear switch is operated and the RAM is executed. Information to indicate that when clearing, and the above-mentioned low when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). Indicates information indicating which of the probabilistic time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) is to be restored, and the model code of the pachinko machine. It consists of information and. Here, a problem will be described when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

The model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and amadeji type as the pachinko machine 1 (to be exact, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game occurs, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). It is possible to specify whether or not the game specification (so-called ST machine), etc., in which the probability fluctuation occurs in the state of being played.

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works may coexist. Then, the worker of the production line is responsible for the copyright of any of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works of movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, cartoon E, and cartoon F). It is difficult to know whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line in order to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misunderstandings that it is flowing to the production line.

For this reason, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line can move the main control board 1310 to the manufacturing line. It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and for the copyright of the same work, any model type (max type, middle type, or Amadeji type). It is also not possible to confirm whether it is a type) and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine that, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game occurs).

As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed. The 1310 will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 while being mixed. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine is used when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). In order to transmit the power-on state command including the information indicating the power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on A counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the worker of the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line, so that the inspection device can perform the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, the above-mentioned max type, middle type, indicating the model type, which constitutes the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. And the series code for specifying which type of Amadeji type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuates, the next big hit game will occur. In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it is played, the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited, etc. Based on this, by visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and which model is for the copyright of the same work. What type (maximum type, middle type, and Amadeji type), and what kind of game specifications (when probability fluctuations occur, that state will continue until the next big hit game occurs. It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine).

As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line is performed. By visually observing the inspection monitor and accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the worker can sort each of the main control boards 1310 for the copyright of the work and succeed. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the worker of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[11-4. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 167 and 168.

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1310a switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 169 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is the main control side, the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing is the second to the second register bank. Switch the register bank to the register tank of. In this embodiment, it is not necessary to save each register on the stack when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the routine, is started.

Following step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs a timer subtraction process (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to the fluctuation display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) transmits. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands has been input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. .. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a is, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2601, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first start opening sensor 3002, and a detection from the second start opening sensor 2401. Signal, detection signal from variable winning opening sensor 2526, detection signal from first big winning opening sensor 2524, detection signal from second big winning opening sensor 2561, detection signal from out sensor 664, first ball sensor 703, And the detection signal from the second ball sensor 704, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050, the operation signal from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), the detection signal from the door frame open switch, the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b. , The signal from the setting key switch 1311a, the signal from the setting switching button, and the payer ACK from the payout control board 633 that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. Each signal is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, when the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2401 are read respectively, the corresponding start port winning command classified into others is used as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002, the corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and from the second start port sensor 2401. When there is a detection signal of, the corresponding start opening winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

In this embodiment, when the switch input process is started in the state where all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are input (including those that have been subjected to the empty terminal process). First, each is read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time and the result read for the first time are compared. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball or if the input is ignored.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the state of being input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including those that have been subjected to the empty terminal processing) is set for the first to third times. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc. by performing a total of two readings, one for comparing twice and the other for comparing twice to four times. Because it is possible, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2601, the detection signal from the general winning port sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2401, and the variable winning. Detection signal from mouth sensor 2526, detection signal from first prize opening sensor 2524, detection signal from second prize opening sensor 2561, out sensor 664, first ball sensor 703, and second ball sensor 704 Detection signal, detection signal from magnetic sensor 1050, operation signal from RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), detection signal from door frame open switch, detection signal from main body frame open switch 4b, signal from setting key switch 1311a , The reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that the payout control board 633 has normally received the signal from the setting switching button and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later can be improved. can.

Following step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs an input terminal defect monitoring process (step S105). In this input terminal defect monitoring process, among the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a, the state of which the empty terminal process is performed is performed based on the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process, the logical state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal defect monitoring process, information acquired in the switch input process in step S104 is performed to determine whether or not the logical state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal process is performed is LOW among the input terminals of various input ports. Do based on. The main control MPU 1310a is classified into a notification display indicating that a problem has occurred in the peripheral circuits of the main control MPU 1310a when it is determined that the logical state of the input terminal to which the free terminal processing has been performed is not LOW. The malfunction command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU1310a performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the symbol random number described above is updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated by the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to the winning determination (winning determination), each counter counts up only each time the winning random number update process is performed. The above-mentioned random number for determining the hit of the normal symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the normal symbol are also updated by this winning random number update process.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is an initial value update type counter as described above, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value. The range from to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number, the hit judgment initial value determination random number is updated by this winning random number update process. The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are not in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 168. The winning random number is updated in the winning random number update processing and the winning random number update processing in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, but the processing time of this routine becomes uneven every time the interrupt timer occurs. If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs a ball count processing (step S107). In this ball number counting process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the out sensor 664 is input, discharged from the game board 5, and distributed through the out ball passage 663. The game ball to be played (dried into the game area 5a and accepted into the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the second major winning opening 2007, etc. The game ball discharged from the game board 5 is accepted into any of the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 without being accepted by any of the winning openings after being driven into the game area 5a. When the out sensor 664 detects the game ball discharged from the game board 5, the value 1 is added (incremented) to the value of the total recovery ball counter, and the detection from the first ball sensor 703 is performed. When the first ball sensor 703 detects a game ball that is received by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 and flows through the first ball path 701 when a signal is input, the out port 1008 , The value 1 is added (incremented) to the value of the out ball counter that counts the number of game balls, so-called out balls, collected by the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022. A detection signal from the two-ball sensor 704 is input and driven into the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the second major winning opening 2007, When the second ball sensor 704 detects a game ball that is accepted by the winning opening such as, etc. and flows through the second ball path 702, the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, and the second starting Performs an operation of adding (incrementing) a value of 1 to the value of the safe ball counter that counts the number of game balls accepted in the winning openings such as the opening 2005 and the second major winning opening 2007, so-called safe balls. .. That is, in the ball number counting process, the out sensor 664 is a game accepted by the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, and the second major winning opening 2007. Both the ball and the game ball accepted by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 are detected, and the first ball sensor 703 detects the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022. The game ball collected by 2022 is detected, and the second ball sensor 704 is a winning opening such as a general winning opening 2001, a variable winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, a second major winning opening 2007, and the like. Detects the game ball accepted by.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value of the total collection ball counter, which is the calculation result, to the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the second major winning opening 2007, and the like. The total number of game balls received in the mouth and the game balls received in the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 is stored in the total collected ball counting area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. , The value of the out ball counter is stored in the out ball counting area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM as the total number of out balls collected by the out port 1008, the first sub out port 2021 and the second sub out port 2022, and is a safe ball. The value of the counter is the total number of safe balls accepted in the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the second major winning opening 2007, etc. It is stored in the safe ball counting area in the specific area of. In addition, the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of prize balls paid out) to the value of the total collected ball counter, that is, the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of prize balls paid out) to the total number of game balls driven in is calculated. , The calculation result is stored in the base calculation area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the special monitor is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Further, in the main control MPU 1310a, when the value of the total collection ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, and the second major winning opening 2007. , Etc., every time the total number of game balls collected at the winning openings, out openings 1008, first sub-out opening 2021 and second sub-out opening 2022 reaches 10, a ball collection command for notifying that fact is created, and transmission information is created. Is stored in the output information storage area. In the main control MPU 1310a, the value of the recovery ball counter, the value of the out ball counter, and the value of the safe ball counter, which are the calculation results, each reach the maximum value (value 65535 in this embodiment), and further, the recovery ball. When the value 1 is added (incremented) to the values of the counter, the out ball counter, and the safe ball counter, the values of the collected ball counter, the out ball counter, and the safe ball counter overflow and become the value 0, and the calculation of adding from this value 0 is performed. conduct.

Following step S107, the main control MPU 1310a performs a prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and a prize ball command for paying out a game ball is created based on this input information, or a main control board 1310 and a payout control board 633 are used. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between the boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the second major winning opening 2007, a prize ball command that pays out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball is 10 balls. In order to convey that fact, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633. A self-check to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 when the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time. Create a command and send it to the payout control board 633.

Further, in the prize ball control process of step S108, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10 based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area. In order to convey that fact, a main prize ball number information output command, which is classified into other categories, is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, that is, the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, provided in the game board 5. For game balls that have entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, and the second major winning opening 2007 (hereinafter, referred to as "various winning openings provided in the game board 5"). Based on this, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is counted, and in the prize ball control process in step S108, the memory is updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. ing. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read. The input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of, and the value indicating the added number of balls is a value of 10. When the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10 (that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to inform that fact, and as transmission information. It is stored in the output information storage area, and the value indicating the excess number of balls is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. It has become.

Following step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs a frame command reception process (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into status displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information for transmitting that fact to the payout control board 633 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU1310a formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, etc.). And frame state 2 command)), it is stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

Following step S110, the main control MPU1310a performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. When it is determined that a fraudulent act by radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation goto") is being performed, the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter is added (incremented) by a value of 1. The value of this radio wave goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the timer interrupt process on the main control side. ), Create a radio wave irradiation goto notification command classified into a notification display that informs that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed, and store it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Further, in the fraud detection process of step S112, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input, the fraud using a magnet (hereinafter, “magnet goto”” It is determined that the above is performed, and the value of the magnet goto counter is added (incremented) by the value 1. The value of this magnet goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information. The value 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the timer interrupt process on the main control side. ), Create a magnet goto notification command classified into a notification display that informs that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed, and store it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. In the present embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying the magnet goto by such a mechanism, it is possible to contribute to the ability of the staff such as the clerk of the game hall to find the magnet goto at an early stage. It has become.

Further, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and when it is not a big hit game, the detection signal from the first big winning opening sensor 2525 or the second big winning opening sensor 2561 is generated. When a game ball enters the first major winning opening 2006 or the second major winning opening 2007, the winning abnormality is classified as an abnormal state and is classified as a notification display. A display command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, or the value of the safe ball counter stored in the safe ball counting area is the general winning opening sensor 3001, the variable winning opening sensor 2526, and the first. The total number of game balls detected by the one starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2401, the first large winning opening sensor 2525, and the second large winning opening sensor 2561, that is, the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, If it is different from the total number of game balls accepted in the winning openings such as the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first major winning opening 2006, the second major winning opening 2007, etc., the notification is displayed as an abnormal state. A winning abnormality display command to be classified is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In the fraud detection process of step S112, when the radio wave irradiation goto and / or the magnet goto is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value 1 as the detection of the cheating, while the radio wave irradiation goto and the magnet. When the goto is not detected, the value 0 is set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as the fraud detection has not been detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, a value of 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. Further, even when the occurrence of abnormal winning of the large winning opening is detected, the value 1 may be set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as the detection of fraudulent activity.

Following step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs a firing permission signal setting process (step S113). In this launch permission signal setting process, the logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to permit the launch of the game ball B is set. Specifically, the main control MPU1310a determines that the fraud detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, the fraud has not been detected, based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG described above. Occasionally, it is set in the launch permission logic as the logic of the launch permission signal and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information, while the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, a fraudulent activity. When it is determined that the detection is, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. The main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. When the door frame open switch detects that the door frame is open, the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b is input and the main body frame open switch 4b detects that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. Is set in the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted as the logic of the launch permission signal, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. The logic of the firing permission signal is that, as an initial value (default), the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored), is performed. Until it is started, it is composed of hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that it is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted.

Following step S113, the main control MPU 1310a performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is mainly used. It is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the control MPU 1310a, and the acquired random number value is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) and the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match (big hit). Whether or not to generate a game is determined (referred to as "special lottery"), and the value of the counter that updates the symbol random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM according to the big hit type and small hit type. Judgment (determines the hit type) whether or not it matches any of the hit type judgment values.

When these determination results (lottery results) are based on the first start port sensor 3002, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are the second start port sensor 2401. In the case of, various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the variation display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the variation display pattern. Then, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is turned on so as to light the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big hit game, various commands classified as big hit related commands (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 open Nth display command, big winning opening 1 closed display command, big winning A mouth 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. When the output of the drive signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) that the second prize opening 2007 is opened from the closed state is two, the function display unit 1400 The output of the lighting signal to the 2-round indicator lamp is set so as to turn on the 2-round indicator lamp of the round indicator, and it is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the round is 15 times, the function display unit 1400 Set the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round indicator lamp so that the 15-round indicator lamp of the round indicator of The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the ordinary winning opening winning process is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 2601 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned normal symbol hit judgment random number is extracted and the main control is built in as the normal winning opening winning information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

The normal winning opening winning information storage area is provided with the 0th to 3rd sections (4 sections), and the normal winning opening is in the order of the 0th section, the 1st section, the 2nd section, and the 3rd section. Winning information is stored. For example, when the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2601 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal winning opening The winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

As for the normal winning opening winning information, the one stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this ordinary winning opening winning information is set, the ordinary winning opening winning information in the first section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory is placed in the 0th section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory, and the second section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory is stored. The ordinary winning opening winning information of the section is in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information memory, and the ordinary winning opening winning information of the third section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory is in the second section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory. After being shifted, the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the ordinary winning opening winning information is stored in the first to second sections of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage, the ordinary winning opening winning information in the first section of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage is the ordinary winning. The normal winning mouth winning information in the second section of the ordinary winning opening information storage is shifted to the first section of the ordinary winning opening information storage in the 0th section of the ordinary winning opening information storage, and the ordinary winning opening winning information memory is shifted to the first section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory. The 2nd section and the 3rd section of the normal winning opening winning information storage are free areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first to third sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored ordinary winning opening winning information is used as a hold ball and the normal winning opening unit 1400 is used. The output of the lighting signal of the normal hold indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned ordinary winning opening winning information so as to turn on the hold indicator, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

Following the normal winning opening winning process, the normal winning opening winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit is extracted from the read normal winning opening winning information and the main control is performed. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as "normal lottery"). Based on this determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery), it is determined whether or not to open / close the variable winning door 2521. When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the variable winning opening door 2521 is opened, so that the game ball can be accepted into the variable winning opening 2003, which is advantageous to the player. .. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect are created, and the transmission information storage described above is performed as transmission information. While storing in the area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol, and the output information. Is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Further, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit judgment random number matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric service effect are created and transmitted. While storing as information in the transmission information storage area, the output of the drive signal to the variable winning port solenoid 2522 is set so as to open and close the variable winning port door 2521, and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. When the value of the extracted normal symbol hit judgment random number does not match the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display is based on the above-mentioned normal symbol variation display pattern random number. A pattern is determined, various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect are created, stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the normal symbol of the function display unit 1400 is stored according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the display, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. In this example, the winning probability of the ordinary lottery (probability of winning the ordinary lottery) is halved.

Following step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a main pay ACK signal when, for example, normally receives various commands from the payout control board 633 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. When it is a big hit game, a drive signal is sent to the first big prize opening solenoid 2524 and the second big winning opening solenoid 2563 that open and close the opening and closing members of the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007. In addition to outputting and outputting a drive signal to the variable winning port solenoid 2522 that opens and closes the variable winning opening door 2521 for opening and closing the second starting port 2005, a 15-round jackpot information output signal and a 2-round jackpot Various information (game information) signals related to the game such as information output signal, small hit information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, start opening winning information output signal, etc. Output to board 633, output permission signal set in launch permission logic or launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) to payout control board 633, payout number for the total number of game balls hit (payout) To output a display signal to a special monitor that displays the ratio of the total number of prize balls that have been won, or to display the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310 g. Outputs the lighting signal of.

Following step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified in the special figure 1 tuning effect-related, various commands classified in the special figure 2 tuning effect-related, and jackpot-related, which are created by the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine. Various commands to be executed (for example, when a game ball entered in the second special winning opening 2007 is detected, the large winning opening 1 corresponding to the large winning opening counting command is based on the detection signal from the second large winning opening sensor 2561. Count display command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal electric power production, various commands classified as normal electric service production, various commands classified as notification display, status display Various commands to be classified, various commands to be classified for testing, and various commands to be classified to others (for example, a prize ball based on a game ball in which the main control board 1310 has entered various winning openings provided in the game board 5). Every time the number of game balls to be paid out reaches 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 as the main prize ball number information. Main prize ball number information output command to be performed) and various commands classified into a specific history (for example, general winning opening 2001, variable winning opening 2003, first starting port 2004, second starting port 2005, first large winning opening Every time the number of game balls collected at the winning openings such as 2006, the second major winning opening 2007, the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021 and the second sub-out opening 2022 reaches 10, a ball that informs that fact. Recovery command, setting change command that tells that the setting value has been changed, error display command that tells that there is something wrong (or unreliable) in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM, main The ON operation command of the setting key that informs the confirmation of the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area, which will be described later in the specific area of the control built-in RAM) is stored. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. It is composed of a sum value obtained by regarding the mode as a numerical value and the sum of the sum values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands as main peripheral serial data. As described above, the charge charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, in the event of a power failure or a momentary power failure. The main peripheral serial transmission port built in the control MPU 1310a can at least transfer the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and complete the transmission as main peripheral serial data from the transmission shift register. You can do it. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure after the power is turned on, transmission is performed when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 168. In the reservation setting of the command to be executed, in order to notify that the power has been restored, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter are classified as power-on. Since a notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command are used as main peripheral serial data in that order. Sends to the peripheral control board 1510, then sends to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configures the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then the main prize ball number information when the power is turned on. The output determination counter notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various information is read from the game backup information and responds to the various information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the process when the power is turned on on the main control side. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information The output judgment counter notification command will be sent.

It should be noted that the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first major winning opening 2006, the second major winning opening 2007, etc. When a ball collection command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 every time the number of game balls collected at the ports 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 reaches 10, the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted. For each received ball collection command, a winning slot such as a general winning slot 2001, a variable winning slot 2003, a first starting slot 2004, a second starting slot 2005, a first major winning slot 2006, a second major winning slot 2007, etc. The number of game balls collected at the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 is counted, and the ball collection information (counted value) stored and stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). (That is, general winning opening 2001, variable winning opening 2003, first starting opening 2004, second starting opening 2005, first big winning opening 2006, second big winning opening 2007, etc. Information that associates the total number of game balls collected at the mouth 2021 and the second sub-out mouth 2022 with the updated date and time) is updated. If the pachinko machine 1 is turned off after the business hours of the game hall are closed without receiving the ball collection command, as a result, the last counted values (that is, the general winning opening 2001 and the variable winning opening 2003) are obtained. , 1st starting port 2004, 2nd starting port 2005, 1st big winning opening 2006, 2nd big winning opening 2007, etc. The ball collection information associated with the total number of balls of the gaming ball and the updated date and time is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when the game hall is opened, the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 sells the ball collection information stored and stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The ball collection information is created again from the start date, and the ball collection information is stored and held as the ball collection history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). As the counted value stored and stored as ball recovery information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day may be used, or from the value 0 (zero) on that day. Both the counted value and the sum of the counted values so far may be used.

Following step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122) and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT in step S122 is cleared by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, by restarting the time counting by the main control built-in WDT, the main control MPU 1310a is not forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

As described above, the main control board 1310 is used as the backup for storing the game information due to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off during the progress of the game. The process can be executed and completed, and at the time of power recovery, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information in which the backup process is executed as the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310. At the time of turning on the power, which indicates the drive state of the variable winning port solenoid 2522, the first winning opening solenoid 2524, and the second winning opening solenoid 2563, which are the electric drive sources by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine. The main control return destination command can be output to the peripheral control board 1510. That is, the main control board 1310 has the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same process shown in FIG. 167 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Power-on status command, which is classified as power-on, to notify that the power has been turned on (restored) based on the power-on information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the work area setting of. The main control return destination command at power-on and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in step S120 in this routine. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main peripheral serial data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command, and then the main control return destination when the power is turned on. The command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the status, mode, and sum value that configures the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on. The data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration to the display area of the effect display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command when the power is turned on from the main control board 1310. Can be displayed in the production. As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the player is playing a game and then the power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure is quickly restored after the power is restored. At the same time, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a solid state, that is, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure by promptly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored.

Further, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, FIG. 167 shows. In step S38 in the main control side power-on processing shown, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared except for a specific area. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. 168, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is made, the power-on state command classified as power-on , When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A state in which only three commands, a status command, a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in this routine, the main control board inspection device is used as the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command as main peripheral serial data. It is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then the main prize ball number information is output when the power is turned on. The judgment counter notification command is sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , The series code for specifying which of the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and Amadeji type indicating the model type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, in addition to the game specification that when the probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in the state where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited (ST machine). ) Etc.), and based on the game specification code, detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process.

[11-5. Setting change process]
Next, the setting change process will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 167.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the current installation value as shown in FIG. 170 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When acquiring this set value, it may be read out or taken out, but when the set value is taken out, the taken out set value is set in a predetermined area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU1310a calculates the checksum (step S202). This checksum calculates the total of various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values, and is performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 167. This is the same process as the calculation of.

Following step S202, the calculated checksum value (sum value) of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in the main control side power off processing (power off) in the main control side power on processing shown in FIG. 168. It is determined whether or not the checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (step S204). In step S204, when it is determined that the main control MPU1310a matches, it is determined whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 167. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG has a built-in main control in the main control side power cutoff processing which will be described later for game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value. It is a flag indicating whether or not the memory is stored in the RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power off processing is normally completed and a value of 0 when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed. Will be done.

In the determination of step S204, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S206, the backup flag BK-FLG of the main control MPU 1310a is not a value 1. When (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power off processing has not been normally completed, it is determined whether or not the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). .. Here, the "normal range" is a value whose setting value can be changed, and in the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting. It is preset to a value up to a value of 6. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM by proceeding to the determination in step S208, or when it is determined that the main control side power off processing is not normally completed when the power is cut off. Therefore, there is something wrong with the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM (or it cannot be trusted). Therefore, in the determination in step S208, the main control MPU 1310a has the set value 1 to the set value 6 in which the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is in the normal range. It is determined whether or not the value is one of the values, and when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S208, when it is determined that the main control MPU 1310a is not in the normal range, the set value 1 which is the initial value is set with respect to the set value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In the determination in step S208, any one of the set value 1 to the set value 6 in which the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is in the normal range. Although it is determined whether or not it is a value, the main control MPU1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S204 without performing the determination in step S208. When, or in the determination in step S206, the main control MPU1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), that is, the main control side power off processing is not normally completed. Occasionally, the process of step S210 may be proceeded, and the set value 1 which is the initial value may be set with respect to the set value acquired in step S200.

In the determination in step S206, the main control MPU1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, that the main control side power off processing has been normally completed, or in the determination in step S208, the main control When the MPU 1310a determines that the range is normal, or following step S210, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to light the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). ..

Following step S214, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the setting switching button is being operated (step S216). This determination reads the detection signal from the setting switching button and determines whether or not the detection signal from the setting switching button is input. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button is operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button is input, while the setting switching button is operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button is not input. Judge that it is not.

In the determination in step S216, when it is determined that the setting switching button is being operated, the main control MPU 1310a updates by performing an operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the set value (step S218). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area is set. The value 1 is added (incremented) to the set value set in.

Following step S218, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 to the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and updates the setting value for the setting display 1310g. Is displayed (step S220).

Following step S220 or in the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button has not been operated, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the enter key has been operated (step S222). ). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a is set counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees (that is, the initial position which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch is operated by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the rotation position) and turning it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise) by performing the second ON operation. 1311a is turned on and the decision key is turned on based on the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a. When the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the decision key has been operated. When the signal of the decision key ON from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, it is determined that the decision key is not operated.

In the determination in step S222, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the enter key has not been operated, it returns to the determination in step S216 again and determines whether or not the setting switching button has been operated. In the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the setting switching button is being operated, the processes of steps S218 and S220 are performed again, the determination of step S222 is performed, and the enter key is not operated. When it is determined, the determination is returned to step S216 again, and when the setting switching button is operated until the enter key is operated, the set value is added and updated by one value each time the operation is performed, and the setting display 1310 g. If the setting switching button is not operated, the setting switching button is operated immediately before and the updated setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored by the time the decision key is determined in step S222, the set value updated immediately before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is the main control. Since it is not stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the built-in RAM, it is discarded and the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S222, when it is determined that the enter key has been operated, the main control MPU 1310a stores the updated set value in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area is set. Since it is updated with respect to the set value set in, the updated set value is returned to the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs after the processing in step S224 is completed and the power is restored, the updated setting value when the enter key is operated before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is the main control built-in RAM. It is stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of.

Following step S224, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a is set to the initial position (that is, the setting key) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return to the setting key cylinder rotation position), and the setting key switch 1311a is turned off and the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. It is performed based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned off, but the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input. Sometimes it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

In the determination of step S226, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the setting key has not been turned off, it returns to the determination of step S226 and repeats the determination of step S226 until the setting key is turned off.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S226, when it is determined that the setting key has been turned off, the main control MPU 1310a stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. Then, the updated setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU 1310a stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

Following step S230, the main control MPU1310a sets the value 0 in the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S232). As described above, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is the current setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is the first ON). It is a flag indicating whether or not to allow the setting change of the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time of operation), and when the setting change of the set value is permitted. The value is set to 1 and the value is set to 0 when the setting change of the set value is not permitted. In the process of step S232, by setting the value 0 in the setting change permission flag CS-FLG, the setting change of the setting value is not permitted after that.

Following step S232, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The “normal range” is the same as that of the determination in step S208, and as described above, in the present embodiment, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the setting It is preset to a value up to a value of 6. In the determination in step S233, in order to reconfirm whether the set value is an abnormal value in the main control MPU1310a, the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S224 is normal. It is determined whether or not the value is one of the set value 1 to the set value 6 which is the range, and when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

In the determination of step S233, when it is determined that the main control MPU1310a is in the normal range, the serial communication initial setting is performed (step S234), and then a setting change command is created to set the transmission information (step S236). Subsequently, the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process for transmitting the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 as the main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 is performed (step S238), and this routine is terminated. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 168, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 is FIG. 169. This is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in 1. Here, in the initial setting of serial communication in step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 is mainly performed prior to the initial setting of serial communication in step S44. Although it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as peripheral serial data, this is prioritized before the reservation of the command to be transmitted at power-on is set in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 168. This is to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the set value has been changed by the setting change command. The setting change command is a command for notifying the setting value whose setting has been changed and the setting value storage completion. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the set value history information (information corresponding to the set value and the date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). do.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S233, when it is determined that the main control MPU1310a is not in the normal range, an error display process is performed (step S240), and the infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is completed is maintained, the game cannot proceed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. The detailed explanation of this error display processing will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power off processing is not completed normally when the power is cut off. If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as abnormal (or unreliable), and an error display is performed to inform that fact. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

[11-6. Setting value confirmation display processing]
Next, the set value confirmation display process will be described. This set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 169.

When the set value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 171 (step S350). This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and the value 1 is set when the set value is confirmed and displayed. When the value is not confirmed and displayed, the value is set to 0.

In the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the set value is not confirmed and displayed, the main control MPU 1310a has whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on. (Step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, detects from the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The setting key is inserted into the signal and the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder moves clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the first ON operation after being rotated 60 degrees, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a causes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Is determined to be open, and the setting key switch 1311a is determined to be ON by the setting key ON signal, thereby determining that the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. On the other hand, the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b determines that the main body frame 4 is not open to the outer frame 2, and / or the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. By determining that there is no such condition, it is determined that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied.

In the determination in step S352, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a terminates this routine as it is, while the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the set value is to be confirmed and displayed, the value 1 is set in the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S354), and then the current installation value is acquired (step S356). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S356, the main control MPU1310a determines whether or not the set value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The "normal range" is the same as that of the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process of FIG. 170. As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, and the setting The values up to the value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are preset. In the determination in step S357, the main control MPU 1310a reconfirms whether the set value is an abnormal value, so that the set value acquired in step S356 (that is, the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM) is used. It is determined whether or not the set value (set value stored in) is one of the set values 1 to 6 which is in the normal range, and when it is determined that the set value is in the normal range, the set value is used as it is. do.

In the determination of step S357, when it is determined that the main control MPU 1310a is in the normal range, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value acquired in step S356 on the setting indicator 1310g to the setting indicator 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310 g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU1310a creates an ON operation command for the setting key, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and sets the ON operation command for the setting key (step S360). ), End this routine. The ON operation command of this setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 169. The ON operation command of the setting key indicates that the setting value confirmation display process, which is this routine, has started (that is, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is confirmed). It is a command to convey.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the ON operation history information (setting value is confirmed) of the setting key stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). Information that associates the fact with the date and time) is updated.

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the ball collection history information, the set value history information, the error display history information, and the ON operation history information of the setting key described above are received. The predetermined specific history information display permission condition that the display of the specific history information such as the above can be permitted is satisfied. In the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510, a person who confirms the specific history information in a state where the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied performs a rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 and a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. By performing the above, control is performed to switch from the image displayed so far to the specific history information display image for selectively displaying the specific history information and display the specific history information in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S350, whether the main control MPU1310a has an OFF operation of the setting key when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when the set value is confirmed and displayed. Whether or not it is determined (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise so as to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the enter key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). Then, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off by the OFF operation, and the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is used. When the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. On the other hand, when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned OFF.

In the determination of step S362, the main control MPU 1310a terminates this routine as it is when it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off, but does not confirm and display the set value when it is determined that the setting key has been turned off. The value 0 is set in the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S364), and then the output of the lighting signal for displaying the set value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g is stopped. The acquired setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S366), and then an OFF operation command for the setting key is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , The OFF operation command of the setting key is set (step S368), and this routine is terminated. The OFF operation command of this setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 169. The OFF operation command of the setting key indicates that the setting value confirmation display process, which is this routine, has been completed (that is, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been confirmed). It is a command to convey.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the OFF operation command of the setting key, the predetermined specific history information display permission condition described above is not satisfied. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 controls to display the above-mentioned specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, immediately before switching to the specific history information display image. Control is performed to switch back to the original image by switching to the image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S357, when it is determined that the main control MPU1310a is not in the normal range, the interrupt disallow setting is set (step S370). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 169, which was repeatedly performed every 4 ms, is stopped.

Following step S370, the main control MPU 1310a enters an infinite loop that performs error display processing (step S372) and then continues to clear the main control built-in WDT (step S374). Due to this infinite loop, the main control built-in WDT will continue to be cleared, but this cannot be stopped once the main control built-in WDT is started, so by continuing to clear the main control built-in WDT, the main control built-in WDT will continue to be cleared. By setting the timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the control MPU1310a, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is restarted, so that the main control is mainly controlled by the main control built-in WDT. The MPU 1310a does not have to be forcibly reset. Further, due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, the game cannot proceed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. The detailed explanation of this error display processing will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power off processing is not completed normally when the power is cut off. If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as abnormal (or unreliable), and an error display is performed to inform that fact. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

[11-7. Error display processing]
Next, the error display process will be described. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 167, and is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 167 (FIG. 170). It is a process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 171), and is a process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 171.

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a stops the firing permission signal as shown in FIG. 172 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal conveys that the launch of the game ball B is permitted to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, and when the logic is set to the launch permission logic, the launch is performed. If the logic is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is the reverse of the launch permission logic, it is possible to tell that the launch is stopped (not permitted). ..

The error display process of this routine is one of the processes performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 167 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 167. When started as (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 170), the main control MPU 1310a interrupts step S52 in the process at power-on on the main control side shown in FIG. 168. Since the permission setting cannot be performed, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 169 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the same process cannot be performed. Since the launch permission signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function, a reset function is provided at the time of power recovery. The main control output circuit has been reset, and its logic is the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is the reverse of the launch permission logic.

Therefore, the error display process of this routine is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 167 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 167. When started as one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 170), the main control MPU1310a recovers power in step S400 and then displays an error, which is the present routine. In order to prevent the game ball B from being fired even after the processing is started, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic), and the predetermined output port thereof. It is output from the output terminal of the above to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function.

When the error display process of this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 171, the main control MPU 1310a is set in step S357 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 171. In the judgment, it is judged that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM. Although the main control MPU 1310a has already set the interrupt permission in step S52 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 168, it has already been shown in FIG. 171 before the error display processing of this routine is started. Since the interrupt non-permission setting is performed in step S370 in the set value confirmation display process, when the error display process, which is this routine, is completed, an infinite loop is entered as described above. Therefore, the main control side shown in FIG. 169. The timer interrupt process cannot be performed, and the launch permission signal setting process in step S113 in the process cannot be performed.

Therefore, when the error display process of this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 171, the main control MPU 1310a has an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S400. In order to prevent the game ball B from being fired in a certain state, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) and reset from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. It is output to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a function.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the alphabet E as an error display on the setting display 1310g is output to the setting display 1310g, and an error is displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU 1310a displays an error to the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In this step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

Following step S404, the main control MPU1310a performs serial communication initial setting (step S406), then creates an error display command to set transmission information (step S408), and then sets in step S406. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting transmission information (error display command) as main peripheral serial data to peripheral control board 1510 is performed (step S410), and this routine is terminated.

The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 170 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 168. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410 is the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 170 and the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 169. This is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S120. The error display process of this routine is performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 167, and is performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 167 (FIG. 170). The process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 171) and the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 171 are started and ended, respectively, and the infinite loop is entered as described above. , This infinite loop keeps the state where the error display process is completed, and the game cannot proceed at all.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the serial communication is initially installed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410 is used as the main peripheral serial data as the peripheral control board. It is being transmitted to 1510.

The error display command is a command for notifying that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the error display history information (information corresponding to the error display command and the date and time of reception) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). ) Is updated.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the display area of the effect display device 1600 says "RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff." In the blue background image. In addition to controlling the display of message images in white characters, the announcement "A RAM error has occurred. Please call a staff member." Is adjusted by rotating the volume control switch on the peripheral control board 1510. It is controlled to flow from various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main body frame speaker of main body frame 4, etc.) by forcibly setting the maximum volume without depending on the volume. The process of notifying a RAM error by an error display command is the process having the highest priority, and when the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command to convey another error and then receives an error display command, the RAM Gives the highest priority to error notification.

[12. Various control processes for payout control boards]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 to 176. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on processing of the payout control unit, FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing of the payout control unit of FIG. 173, and FIG. 175 is a payout control unit following FIG. 174. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on, and FIG. 176 is the flowchart which shows an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[12-1. Discharge control unit power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633, as shown in FIGS. 173 to 175, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed. .. When the payout control unit power-on processing is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the interrupt priority of the payout control MPU. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set to have the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input / output settings (I / O input / output settings) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506) and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the voltage reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. .. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (waiting timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633 is being operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch, and it is determined that it does not instruct to perform RAM clear when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI. While it is determined that the RAM clear switch is not operated, it is determined that when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared and the RAM is cleared. Determine that the switch is operating.

In the determination in step S512, when it is determined that the RAM clear switch is being operated, the payout control MPU sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S512, when it is determined that the RAM clear switch is not operated, the payout control MPU sets the value 0 in the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, a prize ball information storage area). The logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the CR communication information storage area is set. It is a flag indicating whether or not to delete the payout information related to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information, etc.), and is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S514 and step S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU is set to allow access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the RAM with built-in payout control can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

Following step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are pushed onto the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading in order from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

In the determination in step S522, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not erased (step S524). This checksum considers the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power cutoff process (when the power is turned off), which will be described later. (Step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the payout backup information such as the payout information and the checksum value is stored and held in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power cutoff process described later, and is paid out. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power off processing is normally completed, and is set to 0 when the payout control unit power off processing is not normally completed.

In the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power cutoff process has been normally completed, the payout control built-in RAM is used as the time of power recovery. The work area of (step S530) is set. In this setting, the value 0 is set in the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, and the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM), and the power is restored. The information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area), which are the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., and PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal is set, which is stored in the CR communication information storage area. Information used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset judgment time stored in the time management information storage area. The term "recovery" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on from the state in which the power is cut off, but also the state in which the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S522, the payout control MPU determines that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, that the payout information is to be erased, or in the determination in step S526. When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, When it is determined that the payout control unit power off processing has not been normally completed, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). This setting reads the initial information from the payout control built-in ROM and sets this initial information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initial setting (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt enable setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every 2 ms, that is, the interrupt cycle set in step S536.

Following step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is set to clear by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. Will be done. The determination in step S540 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

In the determination in step S540, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 when it is determined that there is no input of the power failure warning signal (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 2 ms by the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. Set.

In the determination of step S542, when the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the payout control MPU returns to step S540, and the payout control MPU inputs a power failure warning signal. Judge whether or not it has been done.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S542, the payout control MPU sets the value 0 in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544). ).

Following step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information for notifying that various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 584 are performed. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display is stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU, the payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or the drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Alternatively, the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is output to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information output signal (in the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 actually pays 10 game balls). The prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 each time it is output.

Specifically, a counter for determining the number of prize balls information for determining whether or not to output the number of prize balls information is provided, and the payout motor 584 actually determines the counter for determining the number of prize balls. The number of game balls paid out to is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, and the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584. Is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring.

In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, the prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM Based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value and stored and updated.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the value of the read prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( That is, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10, the prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeding the number is indicated). The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter), and the display signal is output to the error LED display.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal of the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit, The BRDY signal, CR connection signal, main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, etc. are read and input as input information. Store in the information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball squeeze determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball squeeze state is generated by the payout blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted is determined. The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, and the skip determination time set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the game ball in which the lower plate 202 is stored is full. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 during the full tank determination time. In addition to managing the time such as the ball out judgment time set as the judgment condition, the number of game balls received and paid out by the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the actual payout detection sensor 591 Judgment when determining whether to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the inconsistent payout of game balls due to inconsistency with the number of balls detected in Inconsistency counter set as a condition Time management of reset judgment time is performed. For example, when the ball gadget judgment time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms. Therefore, the ball gummy judgment time is subtracted by 2 ms each time the timer update process is performed, and the subtraction result is a value. When it becomes 0, the ball shaving judgment time is accurately measured. These various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input is determined. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags and various information stored in the various information storage areas, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Etc. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc. in which the logical state of the signal is set).

By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. It can be restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, even if the payout operation of the game ball is being executed by the payout device 580 and the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game ball can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication processing, the payout control MPU momentarily stops or loses power when paying out the game ball to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202 while exchanging various signals with the CR unit. Even if the exchange of various signals is cut off and the payout of the game ball cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery The value is restored to the value stored as the payout backup information, such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC, immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before the power stop or power failure can be continued from the time of power restoration, and the game balls can be continuously paid out. ing.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (pain control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power stop or stop even if the power is restored. Therefore, various signals by the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit do not change due to the influence of the momentary power failure or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be improved.

Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 at the time of power recovery. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal that conveys, for example, that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is paid out. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the specified output port of the MPU. Then, in the retry operation monitoring process, which is performed as one of the main operation setting processes, for example, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM included in the payout backup information. Based on, it is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, and when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal operation. In other words, it is determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, a value 1 is set in the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball Gami movement determination setting process, As a setting of the output of the error state to the CR unit, for example, the PRDY signal output is the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal that informs that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible when the communication with the CR unit is not in progress. It is set in the setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication processing, the logical state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area by the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery, and the PRDY signal is read out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. Outputs to the CR unit. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, that state is restored when the power is restored, so that it is extremely early after the power is restored. At the stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible can be output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU, and the payout device 580 can be output to the CR unit. It is possible to convey that the payout operation of the game ball is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal, from being output from the CR unit at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery.

Further, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, when the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal, that is, the pachinko machine. When 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, PRDY is used to convey that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible. While the logical state of the signal is output as HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU sets the logical state of the PRDY signal as LOW in order to convey that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the specified output port of. The logical state of the EXE signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and is stored with the payout control board 633. The CR connection signal that conveys whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and out-of-ball check process (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the game ball in which the above-mentioned lower plate 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. The number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 described above by the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is equal to or more than a predetermined number. It is judged whether or not it is. For example, to determine whether or not the lower plate 202 is full with the stored game balls, the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms is used to determine whether or not the lower plate 202 is full from the full tank detection sensor 154 in the current full tank and ball out check process. When the detection signal is ON and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and ball out check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is changed from OFF to ON. When the transition occurs, the timer update process in step S552 starts the time counting of the full tank determination time described above. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, is the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process? Judge whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the lower plate 202 is full in the stored game ball is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area. do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the full tank information indicating that the lower plate 202 is not full in the stored game ball is stored in the state information storage area.

The timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms is also used to determine whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. When the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is turned on, and the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is turned off in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and out-of-ball check processing, that is, the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is When the transition from OFF to ON is performed, the timer update process in step S552 starts the time counting of the ball-out determination time described above. Then, when the ball-out determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball-out determination time is reached, is the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 ON in this full tank and ball-out check process? Judge whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is ON, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number, and the ball breaks to that effect. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number. The out-of-ball information that conveys that fact is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs a command reception process (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received. When these various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality is transmitted to indicate that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs a command analysis process (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as received command information.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs the main operation setting process (step S562). In this main motion setting process, motion settings such as prize balls, ball lending, ball removal and ball shavings are set, retry motions are determined, and the number of unpaid balls (prize ball stock number) is monitored. ..

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the state information storage area described above, display data to be displayed on the error LED display of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored as LED display information in the output information storage area described above. do. For example, when the above-mentioned ball breakage information is read from the state information storage area and the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the ball breakage information, the corresponding number is supported. Display data (in the present embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) are created based on the various information. Then, it is transmitted to the main control board 1310. For example, when the ball-out information is read from the state information storage area, the frame state 1 is obtained when the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the ball-out information. A command is created and sent to the main control board 1310.

Following step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is set to clear.

Following step S568, returning to step S539 again, the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input in step S540, and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If there is no signal input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, step S544 Set the value 0 in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, set the value B in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S546, perform port output processing in step S548, perform port input processing in step S550, and step S552. Performs timer update processing in step S554, CR communication processing in step S554, full tank and ball out check processing in step S556, command reception processing in step S558, command analysis processing in step S560, and step S562. The main operation setting process is performed, the LED display data creation process is performed in step S564, the command transmission process is performed in step S566, the value C is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. conduct. The processes of steps S539 to S568 are referred to as "payout control unit main process".

The processing content of the payout control unit main processing differs according to the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. Therefore, the time required for processing the payout control MPU will fluctuate. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received to the main control board 1310. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU secures the processing time so that other fluctuating processing can be sufficiently performed.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S540, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has been input, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt prohibition setting (step S570). With this setting, the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-mentioned rewriting of the payout information is protected.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). As a result, the payout of the game ball is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU sets the watchdog timer to clear (step S576). As described above, this clear setting is performed by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S576, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). For this checksum, the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM excluding the storage area of the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is regarded as a numerical value, and the total is calculated.

Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S580). As a result, the storage of the payout backup information is completed.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU sets the prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading become impossible, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not set to clear because the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on processing is performed again. The process of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power cutoff process".

The pachinko machine 1 (pain control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed.

In step S526, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power off processing is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

[22-2. Payout control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 173 to 175.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to disabled and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 176 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 1 (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that clocks 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and becomes a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Each is set.

Following step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) registers (step S594). This return switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the main processing of the payout control unit, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt enable (step S596) and ends this routine.

[13. Various control processes for peripheral control boards]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 to 181. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 179 shows an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing. First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing will be described. .. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority as the interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510") includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, a sound source, a SATA controller, and a SATA controller. Various I / O interfaces and the like are integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[13-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 177. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIG. 177 under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the initial setting processing (step S1000). In this initial setting process, a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs the process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC takes an extremely short time. Can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, a command related to control of the game effect output from the main control board 1310. And various commands such as commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

In the present embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires the calendar information and the time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after performing the current time information acquisition process so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG receives a V blank signal from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to convey that the screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is executed when the data is executed. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), the CPU returns to step S1006 again to see if the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1. Whether or not it is repeatedly determined. By repeating such a determination, it becomes a state of waiting until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset. ing.

In the determination of step S1006, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first sets the flag SP-FLG during steady processing. The value 1 is set (step S1008). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to a value of 1, and the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the pressure detection provided in the effect operation unit 300. The rotation (rotation direction) of the contact operation unit 302 and the rotation (rotation direction) of the contact operation unit 302 based on the detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sensor 373 and the elevating detection sensor 374 (hereinafter, referred to as “various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300”). Various information acquired from the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the contact operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and pressing operation. Based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC in which the operation history information of the unit 303 is set, the rotation direction of the contact operation unit 302 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 303 are monitored, and the rotation direction and pressing of the contact operation unit 302 are monitored. It is appropriately determined whether or not the operation state of the operation unit 303 is reflected in the game effect. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted by the effect operation unit information acquisition process, the schedule data for sound generation is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode is adjusted according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the generation schedule data. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and the brightness is reflected in real time, and the production proceeds with the adjusted volume and the brightness.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. Are set respectively. While the production is in progress, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the production operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to perform the first operation. When one brightness specified value ranging from the brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value which is the maximum brightness is set, the above-mentioned floor set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to be the set brightness specified value. The key information can be updated.

Here, the luminance designation value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. As the specified brightness value, one brightness specified value can be set in a range of 32 steps ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value which is the minimum brightness (off) to the 31st brightness specified value which is the maximum brightness. It is a possible value, and the normal palette value and the special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance corresponding to the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value. The player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable production operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the 31st brightness, which is the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value. It is possible to set one specified brightness value up to the specified value.

For example, a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) specifies the 0th (zero) brightness in which the current brightness is tentatively the minimum brightness (extinguished) when the contact operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise. When it is set to the first luminance specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the value, a predetermined formula (for example, linear) is set from the first luminance specified value to the 31st luminance designated value which is the maximum brightness. Along the tone curve (or spline curve tone curve), the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed so as to increase, while the contact operation unit 302 is countered. When the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness in the case of rotating clockwise, a predetermined formula (for example, linear) from the 31st brightness specified value, which is the maximum brightness, to the first brightness specified value. The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed so as to be lowered along the tone curve (or a spline curve-like tone curve). When the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) rotates the contact operation unit 302 to select the desired brightness and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is determined. In the present embodiment, there is a case in which the player (or a clerk of the game hall or the like) can set the brightness while the production is in progress. At this time, the player (or the clerk of the game hall) can set the brightness. Etc.) can set the desired brightness by operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. Further, when a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) operates the contact operation unit 302 at a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 1600 while the effect is in progress, the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness are obtained. By displaying a rod-shaped indicator showing the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually show as an image how much the desired brightness of the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) is. You can do it. Further, in the present embodiment, the 14th luminance designated value is set as the initial value (default).

The normal palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information by the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side, which are irradiated as direct light. be. As the normal pallet value, one of 17 steps is selected in 5% increments from the minimum pallet value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum pallet value (100%), which is the maximum value. A mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve) in which one brightness designation and the corresponding palette value are defined in a range of 32 steps from the specified value of the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value. , Or a spline curve tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is the maximum palette value corresponding to one brightness designation in the range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the above-mentioned brightness designation value. It is a value of 20% with respect to (100%), and similarly for other palette values, the value (%) described in parentheses is the 0th (zero) brightness specified value ~ which is the above-mentioned brightness specified value. It is a value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation in the range of 32 steps up to the 31st luminance designation value.

In the present embodiment, as the normal pallet value, the maximum pallet value (100%) is selected in advance with respect to various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side, which are irradiated as direct light. Of the various decorative substrates provided on the game board side that are set as the gradation information described above and are irradiated as direct light, a palette is provided for a specific decorative substrate (LED that the player feels dazzling), which is not shown. A value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

The special pallet value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information of the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one step, and is one of the 32 steps in the range from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the brightness designation value described above. The luminance designation and the corresponding palette value are set as the above-mentioned gradation information according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as the direct light, the indirect light by the light guide plate becomes darker than the direct light. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set by using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value set with respect to the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light with the first luminance specified value, which is the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance specified value, which is the minimum luminance (extinguished). As the lowest possible brightness, the normal palette value is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the maximum palette value (100%) is set, and the range from the 1st brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value. Of these, one luminance designated value and a corresponding palette value are set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curved tone curve).

As described above, in the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. The brightness of the LED used as the direct light when the brightness of While it is set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the specified value, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) touches the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit with respect to the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. It is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the specified brightness value by the operation of 303. As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and the player operates and sets the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in order to reduce the brightness, the direct light is used. The brightness of the LED used is set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (lights out)), and is linked to this. Therefore, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value at which the brightness is the next highest after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value which is the minimum brightness (extinguished)). Even so, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value substantially equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). The minimum brightness at which the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light by indirect light can be visually recognized is set.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually sets the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and the various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side with respect to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if it is not set, the light emission mode according to the flow of the effect is set, and the flow of the effect by the light emission mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. After seeing, set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too dazzling (or a slightly darker brightness can exert the effect more), and other By setting the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) with respect to the decorative substrate, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed extremely easily. That is, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable production operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value. Even if one brightness designation value up to the brightness designation value is set, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the one brightness designation value is set for a specific decorative substrate. Since one brightness designation value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set for each of the other decorative substrates, the relationship between the light emission modes set to each other (bright or dark). The brightness can be adjusted extremely easily without breaking the relationship.

Further, although it is difficult to adjust the brightness of the indirect light by the light guide plate as compared with the direct light, the LED used as the indirect light has a special palette value different from the normal palette value (that is, independent of the normal palette value). The brightness can be set by. As a result, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is controlled by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is controlled by the normal palette value. Therefore, the LED used as indirect light. The brightness of the LED and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, in the display data creation process described later, one screen generated on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC by reading the image data from the SDRAM based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC by the VDP of the peripheral control IC. Minutes (1 frame) of drawing data are output to the liquid crystal output board 1530. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when drawing that exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP of the peripheral control IC is performed, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, but so-called frame dropping occurs, but the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker of the main body frame 4 by the sound data output processing described later are performed. From various speakers such as 622 (hereinafter, referred to as "various speakers"), it is possible to give priority to the production by the production sound such as music and sound effect according to the various production.

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC and outputs it to various speakers from the set output channel. .. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various effects are played from various speakers.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the number of screen data from the first screen data is instructed to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC. Update the pointer to.

Further, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is set to indicate which light emission data is to be output from the first light emission data among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Update.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the sound data of the directing sounds such as music and sound effects, and the sound command data for instructing the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in the time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation. The pointer is updated in order to indicate which sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC from the first sound command data.

In the scheduler update process, the output target is the drive data from the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the time series that compose the electrical drive source schedule data. Update the pointer to indicate if you want to. Electrical drive source The drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that compose the schedule data is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. It updates the pointer to the data and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed in the motor and solenoid drive processing for some reason. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be instructed, the drive data that should be originally instructed in the scheduler update process is forcibly updated.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the received command analysis process (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, and the received commands are analyzed and used for various settings of the effect. Update random numbers (for example, random numbers used for hold look-ahead related effects). Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In this reception command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyze the various commands that have been issued. The CPU of the peripheral control IC reads out the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like from the peripheral control ROM based on the various analyzed commands. (Extract) Set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the above-mentioned brightness designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value. And, respectively. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads (extracts) the schedule data for generating the light emission mode from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and performs the lamp palette setting process. By executing this, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value described above. When one brightness specified value up to the 31st brightness specified value is set, the above-mentioned gradation information may be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to be the set brightness specified value. You can do it.

Further, in the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start opening winning command for instructing the start of the starting opening winning effect, or a normal symbol. A normal symbol storage command for identifying the number of holds (0 to 4), and a variation pattern for instructing the start of a variation effect such as a variation display of a decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of a special symbol. Whether it is a command, a symbol memory command that is output when the number of start hold changes, or a large winning opening 1 count display command that is output every time a game ball is accepted in the first major winning opening 206 or the second major winning opening 2007. Is analyzed, and which game state is currently in the game is recognized.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the reception command analysis processing. Analyze various commands. Various commands include various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronization effect, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, and so on. Various commands classified as related to the synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to the normal electric service effect, various commands classified as the notification display, various commands classified as the status display, various commands classified as related to the test, and so on. There are various other commands that are classified. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process related to a notice or the like based on the received command, and based on the lottery result, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical The drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, the effect according to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

The peripheral control ROM stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control unit 1511, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sounds for generating effect sounds such as music and sound effects. There are schedule data for generation, schedule data for electric drive sources that generate drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, and the like. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission mode data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in a time series. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and the order in which music and sound effects are played is defined. This sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. , A track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects, and a track number are specified. The electric drive source schedule data is composed of drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order, and the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids is specified.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display, the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in descending order of priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transitioned to. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and the time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, is updated, and the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is stored in the peripheral control ROM. It is read from (extracted) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on the input screen data and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600. Minutes (1 frame) of drawing data are generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is displayed. It is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When the sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates the sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. , Set the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit performs steady processing), the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. Is specified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the volume corresponds to the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch, and in the sound data output process of step S1018, the output set in this sound data creation process. Sound data is output from the channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various effects are played from various speakers.

Specifically, the resistance value is variable by rotating the volume control switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the value is 0 to 0. It is converted into a value of 1024 steps up to the value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set so as to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music is played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4. Sound effects are playing. In this way, music and sound effects can be played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch. ing.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data, and multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC include directing sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume, the sound data of the notification sound and its volume are adjusted to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1. Subvolume value to be included.

Specifically, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch described above is set as a sub-volume value for the effect sound, and the volume adjustment switch is rotated for the notification sound. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special symbol display. A certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral control unit) when starting or stopping the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the device (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) 0.5 seconds have passed since the variation pattern command was received and 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, and 0.5 seconds have passed since the stop display command was received by the peripheral control unit. Except for (up to)), the adjustment can be performed by operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)). A certain period of time (in this example, the periphery) when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display). 0.5 seconds after the variable pattern command is received by the control unit until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or 0.5 after the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed after the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command. By operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch in the sound data creation process is applied to the substrate except for (until the elapse of seconds). It is converted into 7 levels of volume 0 to 6, and further, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is used to operate the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by setting the board volume by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value accordingly.

In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC include a plurality of multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined production sound is calculated. Actually, the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4 are amplified, and the amplified production sound is serialized to audio data. It is designed to be output as.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined production sound is the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value, so that the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, The volume flowing from the top side speaker and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. The volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value to adjust is combined with the board volume adjusted by rotation operation, and the volume of this combined production sound is actually the top center on the door frame 3 side. The speaker, top side speaker, and the master volume value, which is the volume that flows from the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4, are amplified, and this amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data. , Completely depends on the sound data of the notification sound built into the track to be used and the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound built into the track to be used. The maximum volume is combined, and the volume of the combined notification sound is actually the volume that flows from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4. It is amplified to the master volume value that becomes, and this amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4, a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or an illegality is made to the pachinko machine 1. To briefly explain the control to play the notification sound to notify the clerk of the hall of the action, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and this production sound is incorporated. The sound data of the track, the sub-volume value set to mute the sound, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are combined, and this composition is performed. The volume of the produced sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4. Then, the amplified production sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. That is, as for the sound actually flowing from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4, only the maximum volume notification sound is played. At this time, since the production sound is muted, the production sound does not flow from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4, but the production sound is generated as described above. It is proceeding according to the schedule data.

In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). After a lapse of a predetermined period, the volume of the effect sound that has been progressing according to the sound generation schedule data forcibly set to mute is set as the sub-volume value of the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch. It is set again (at this time, if the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set. (Set), the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4 are made to flow.

In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4, a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or the pachinko machine 1 is dealt with. When a notification sound is played to notify the clerk of the hall of fraudulent activity, the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is for the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass of the main body frame 4. Although it flows from the main body frame speaker, this muted production sound progresses according to the sound generation schedule data, so that the notification sound has passed for a predetermined period, and the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and so on. When the bass frame speaker of the main body frame 4 stops flowing, the production sound does not start to flow again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow, but the schedule data for sound generation until the time when the notification sound starts to flow and a predetermined period elapses. It starts to flow again from where it progressed according to.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC peripherally controls the volume from mute to the maximum volume by a program. The sound source of the IC can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall rotates the volume control switch to set the volume low, the production sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers are reduced, but the pachinko machine 1 is used. When a problem occurs or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the staff such as the clerk of the game hall from being less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the fraudulent act of the player due to the notification sound.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and backed up, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are provided in the SDRAM. Copy to the backup area for routine processing and back up.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. A value 0 is set in the flag VB-FLG for initialization, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until a value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, it waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1008 to step S1006. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

In this peripheral control unit steady-state processing, first, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed in step S1008, and a value 1 is set in the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG. Then, each process of step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally, in step S1038, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value 0 as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the process is completed. Become. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to the peripheral control IC. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, which is executed when the data is input to the CPU. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so that the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[13-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC. Will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 178 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 177 is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

In the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, this is performed as it is. End the routine. On the other hand, in the determination in step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been executed, the V blank signal detection flag VB -The value 1 is set in FLG (step S1050), and this routine ends. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the steady processing is not executed.

In the present embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been executed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. When completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady state currently being executed is assumed to be executed in the determination of step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 177. Since the processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, for the purpose of preventing this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 177. By setting the value 1 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG in, the peripheral control unit is informing that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control in FIG. 177. Peripheral control unit, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed by setting the value 0 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). By transmitting to the V-blank signal interrupt processing, whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V-blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing Is designed to determine whether or not the execution has been completed. In other words, it is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed by the time the V-blank signal is input and the next V-blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined by step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 177. It will be in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed the processing is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. 177. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady processing, but if the above-mentioned processing failure this time peripheral control unit steady processing exists, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is 64 times. It is designed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the consistency between the production progress state by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the production progress state by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[13-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 177 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. 179 (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 177 to activate the 1 ms interrupt timer in this routine. A peripheral control unit 1ms timer A counter that counts the number of times interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so that the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

In the determination of step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. When it is determined, this routine is terminated as it is. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1100, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, the CPU of the peripheral control IC adds a value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 177. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, a motor and solenoid drive process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid is driven according to the drive data to be performed, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor or solenoid drive process is executed. do. As a result, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 or an electric drive source provided in various production units provided in the game board 5). ) Is driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the movable body information acquisition process (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, the original) is determined by determining whether or not the detection signals from the various sensors provided in the various production units provided on the game board 5 are input. (Position history information, movable position history information, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC is the original position (standby position) of various movable bodies provided in the various production units provided on the game board 5 based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The movable position can be grasped by setting or acquiring the movable position.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the effect operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, a contact operation unit) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input. The rotation (rotation direction) history information of 302, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Whether or not the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by operating the effect operation unit 301, the volume of the effect sound output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker of the main body frame 4 can be adjusted, and the door frame can be adjusted. It is possible to adjust the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided in 3 and the game board 5.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and backed up, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are transferred to the SDRAM. Copy to the provided backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing and back up. In the present embodiment, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the peripheral control IC RAM and the steady processing backup area provided in the peripheral control IC RAM are set in different areas and are set in different areas, and SDRAM. The 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the SDRAM and the steady processing backup area provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 177, various processes related to the production of steps S1014 to S1032 are executed as the progress of the production within a period of about 33.3 ms. There is. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process, restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1 ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the progress state of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the size of the liquid crystal display of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is also generated in the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the unit V blank interrupt processing. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V-blank signal is output.

[13-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses this as an opportunity to send 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data to the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC. ) Is fetched into the receive buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated with this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main peripheral serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte, and the total thereof. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 180 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

In the determination in step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs 1 byte (8 bits) of information when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, among the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that the data is within the receivable period, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC is taken in (step S1202), and the value 1 is added (incremented) to the reception counter SRXC. Step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been fetched from the receive buffer, and when the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data is fetched from the receive buffer, the value is 1, and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data is set. When it is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 3. The initial value 0 of the reception counter SRXC is set when the power is turned on or the like.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has been fetched from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data are sequentially output from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a mode in which the reception counter SRXC is not a value 3, that is, the status is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the CPU is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. Then, when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has not been sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, in the second byte of the main peripheral serial data following the status of the first byte of the main peripheral serial data. When it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer in a certain mode, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 are regarded as numerical values, and the total (sum value). ) Is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step). S1214). The thumb value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202, is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, in the pachinko machine 1, game balls are supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a vulnerable environment.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is judged whether or not. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal one due to the influence of noise between the substrates of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. It can be determined.

In the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC matches the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined, the received status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216). ), End this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC has 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that the period during which information can be received has been exceeded, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC has a sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202. When it is determined that the sum value calculated in step S1212 does not match, this routine is terminated as it is.

[13-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is executed when the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310, will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first activates a 2-microsecond timer (step S1300) as shown in FIG. 181 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. (Step S1302). In the determination in step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC ends this routine as it is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1302, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has elapsed 2 microseconds. In the determination of step S1304, when 2 macroseconds have not elapsed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302, determines whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input, and if the power failure warning signal has not been input. When it is determined, this routine is terminated as it is, and when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the routine, is started.

In the determination in step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has been continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is the routine, is started, the power saving process is performed. (Step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off the excitation to the motor and solenoid provided on the game board 5, turning off various LEDs, and the like. By suppressing the power consumption of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC can receive the commands being transmitted for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described above is started, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is copied to the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1312). In the determination in step S1312, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the WDT clear process (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input, or after step S1314, the CPU returns to step S1312 again to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. Is determined. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this way, in the determination in step S1312, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has not been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC cannot output the clear signal to the external WDT. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has been input in the determination of step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314 to perform the WDT clear processing of the peripheral control IC. The CPU does not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 177 is restarted.

In this way, when the input of the power failure warning signal continues in the infinite loop according to the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is executed in step S1314, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset immediately before the power failure state occurs. It is designed not to take. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It has become. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination in step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination in S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset because the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed. It is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[Game content]
Next, the content of the game played by the game board 5 of the third embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 182. FIG. 182 is a front view of the game board of the third embodiment.

In the game board 5 of the third embodiment, one of the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 of the first embodiment is set as the second starting opening 2005, and the first embodiment is performed. The second starting port 2005 provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 of the form is used as the general winning opening 2001. Other parts have the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, and detailed description of the parts having the same configuration will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player by rotating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, the game board 5 is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The striking strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195, and the more it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the striking can be, and a maximum of 100 game balls can be continuously driven per minute. B, that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, and the second starting port 2005 are used as entry ports for the game ball B to enter. A large winning opening 2006 is provided, and in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500, a second large winning opening 2007 is provided as an entrance for the game ball B to enter. Of these, regarding the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005, the upper part is always open and the game ball B can be accepted at all times, whereas the variable winning opening 2003 and the first large winning opening 2006 The second major winning opening 2007 is closed in a normal state, and is opened when a predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the game ball B can be accepted.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in front of the game panel 1100 at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N to cause the game ball. The flow speed of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movements can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N while contacting the plurality of obstacle nails N. Either the left first guide passage 2531 or the left second guide passage 2532 of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center accessory 2500 will be distributed. Near the entrance in the left second guide passage 2532, the first prize entrance 2006, which is normally closed by the first prize entrance door 2523, is provided, and the left second guide passage 2532 The game ball B that has entered the game rolls on the first prize opening door 2523 and flows down.

The game ball B that has circulated through the left guide passage group 2530 is released above the gate 2002, and is normally closed by the variable winning opening door 2521. On the left and right sides of the variable winning opening 2003, the left guide passage group 2530 and the gate After contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the door and the 2002, the gate 2002 is passed through the gate 2002 with a certain probability.

When the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 and is detected by the gate sensor 2601, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and if the lottery result of the drawn normal symbols is "normal hit", the variable winning opening The variable winning opening 2003 closed by the door 2521 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be accepted into the variable winning opening 2003. In this example, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be "normal hit" in the normal lottery in the low probability non-time saving state and the high probability non-time saving state is 0/100, and the other gaming states (high probability time saving). In the normal lottery in the state, the low probability time saving state A, the low probability time saving state B, and the low probability time saving state C), the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol becomes "normal hit" is 100/100. That is, in the low-probability non-time-saving state and the high-probability non-time-saving state, a variable prize is won after some peculiar situations (high-probability time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state A, low-probability time-saving state B, and low-probability time-saving state C are completed. Except for the situation where a part of the opening operation of the door 2521 has continued), the possibility that the game ball B is accepted in the variable winning opening 2003 is set to be extremely low, and the high probability time saving state and the low probability time saving state A are set. In the low-probability time-saving state B and the low-probability time-saving state C, the possibility that the game ball B is accepted by the variable winning opening 2003 is set to be higher than in the low-probability non-time-saving state and the high-probability non-time-saving state.

In the present embodiment, since the variable winning opening 2003 is provided near the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, it is higher to distribute the left second guide passage 2532 than to the left first guide passage 2531. It is accepted by the variable winning opening 2003 with a probability. Then, when the game balls B are received in the variable winning opening 2003, a predetermined number (for example, 1 to 5) of game balls B are released from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is paid out to.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by passing the game ball B through the gate 2002, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to suggesting the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (for example,). 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the lottery result of this ordinary symbol is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The variable winning opening 2003 is normally opened after the lapse of the variable time.

If the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 between the time when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 and the time when the lottery result of the normal symbol is suggested, the suggestion of the lottery result of the normal symbol cannot be started. Therefore, the start of suggestion of the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the previous ordinary symbol is completed. In addition, the number of pending lottery results of ordinary symbols is limited to four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, the number of pending cards is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

At the site of the gate 2002, the game ball B flows down any of the gate 2002, the left outer side of the gate 2002, and the right outer side of the gate 2002. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down below the gate 2002 enters the warp entrance 2511 that is open to the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. In the present embodiment, the game ball B that has passed through the right outside of the gate 2002 enters the warp entrance 2511 with a high probability by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the area between the gate 2002 and the wind turbine W. ..

Then, the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth from side to side, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the central discharge portion 2513a is located directly above the first starting port 2004, so that the first is likely to occur. Accepted at the start port 2004.

When the game balls B driven into the left side of the center accessory 2500 are received in the first starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) is sent from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. The game ball B is paid out to the upper plate 201, and the first special symbol (for example, "off", "small hit", "big hit", "immediate short hit", etc.) is drawn on the main control board 1310. Is done. If the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is other than "off", an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time).

By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200. There is a possibility that the general winning opening 2001, the second starting port 2005, or the first starting port 2004 of the starting port unit 2100 will be accepted. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

As for the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005, the upper part is always open, and the game ball B can be accepted at all times. However, for the first start port 2004, the game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 is accepted with a high probability, but for the second start port 2005, the center There is no possibility that the game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the accessory 2500 into the game area 5a will be accepted. Therefore, the game ball B driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500 is accepted by the first starting port 2004 with a higher probability than that of the second starting port 2005.

When the game balls B driven into the left side of the center accessory 2500 are received by the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning opening 2003, a predetermined number (for example,) from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (for example). , 1) game ball B is paid out to the upper plate 201, and on the main control board 1310, the second special symbol (for example, "off", "small hit", "big hit", "immediate short hit" , Etc.) will be drawn. If the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn is other than "off", an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time).

In the present embodiment, in the order of acceptance to the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning opening 2003, the first special symbol is drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2004, and the second A lottery for the second special symbol is performed by accepting the game ball B into the starting opening 2005 or the variable winning opening 2003. That is, the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2004, and the lottery of the second special symbol by accepting the game ball B to the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning opening 2003. The suggestion of the result is made in the order of acceptance to the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning opening 2003.

The lottery result of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) drawn from the start of the special lottery by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning opening 2003 is suggested. If the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2004 before (special fluctuation time), it is not possible to start suggesting the lottery result of the first special symbol, so that the special symbol drawn earlier cannot be started. The start of suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of (first special symbol, second special symbol) is completed. The number of pending first special symbol lottery results is limited to four with respect to the first starting port 2004, and for more than that, the game ball B is accepted at the first starting port 2004. Also discards the lottery result of the first special symbol without holding it. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

Similarly, a lottery of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) drawn from the start of the special lottery by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning opening 2003. If the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning opening 2003 before the result is suggested (special fluctuation time), the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol cannot be started. , The start of suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) drawn earlier is completed. The number of pending second special symbol lottery results is limited to four for the second starting port 2005 and the variable winning opening 2003, and for more than that, the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning opening 2005 or the variable winning opening 2003. Even if the game ball B is accepted in the mouth 2003, the lottery result of the second special symbol is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

Under normal conditions, even if the game ball B is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500, there is no possibility that the game ball B will be accepted into the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, or the variable winning opening 2003. It is possible to positively perform a driving operation such that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center accessory 2500.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, it is to the right of the center accessory 2500. It is discharged to the space forming portion 2550 where the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is planted through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the guide passage group 2540.

The right guide passage group 2540 of the center accessory 2500 has an entrance to the right first guide passage 2541 whose entrance is open in the vicinity of the abutment portion 1006 and an entrance to the left at intervals from the entrance of the right first guide passage 2541. It is composed of a right second guide passage 2542 and an opening. As a result, when the game ball B is driven with a strength that abuts on the abutting portion 1006 (so-called right-handed striking), it enters the right first guide passage 2541 and has a strength that does not abut on the abutting portion 1006 (right). When the game ball B is hit with a strength that is somewhat weaker than the hit, there is a high probability that the game ball B will enter the right second guide passage 2542. That is, the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 circulates in either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 according to the driving strength.

In the present embodiment, the game ball B circulated through the right first guide passage 2541 is released into the first guide region 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the game ball B circulated through the right second guide passage 2542 is a specific obstacle. It is released into the second lead region 2712 of the nail group 2700.

The game ball B released to the specific obstacle nail group 2700 flows down while meandering in the left-right direction along the guidance region 2710. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed in the portion of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 as compared with the normal region.

In the first guidance region 2711 and the second guidance region 2712, the game ball B may deviate from the guidance region 2710, and when it deviates from the second guidance region 2712 to the right outside, the first sub-out port 2021 provided below is provided. Will be accepted with high probability. When the game ball B is received in the first sub-out opening 2021, it is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a without any chance of being accepted in the second big winning opening 2007 or the second starting opening 2005 provided downstream.

In the present embodiment, it is configured so that the distribution of the right second guide passage 2542 is more likely to be accepted by the first sub-out port 2021 than the right first guide passage 2541. This makes it possible for the player to perform a driving operation of the game ball B so that the game ball B is distributed in the right first guide passage 2541 at the time of "right-handed". There is. That is, at the time of "right-handed", the driving operation of rotating the handle 195 greatly is prompted so that the game ball B is driven with a strength such that the game ball B abuts on the abutting portion 1006. This makes it easier to entertain the original game of the pachinko machine 1 with a relatively easy driving operation.

The game ball B that circulates through the specific obstacle nail group 2700 (space forming portion 2550) and is not accepted by the first sub-out port 2021 passes between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 and is passed through the second attacker portion. Enter 2560. Under normal conditions, the second major winning opening 2007 provided in the second attacker portion 2560 is closed by the second major winning opening door 2562 so that the game ball B cannot be accepted, so that the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker are closed. The game ball B that has passed between the right wall portion 2567 flows down onto the second prize-winning door 2562, rolls to the left on the second prize-winning door 2562 (attacker passage 2564), and then to the right. It is discharged downward from the second attacker portion 2560 through the discharge passage 2565.

A general start port 2001 is provided below the right discharge passage 2565, a second sub-out port 2022 is provided on the right side of the general start port 2001, and an inclined wall portion of the lower right unit 2400 is provided on the left side of the general start port 2001. 2418s are provided respectively. Further, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the exit of the right discharge passage 2565, the general starting port 2001, the second sub-out port 2022, and the inclined wall portion 2418. Therefore, the game ball B discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 is accepted by the general starting port 2001 with a certain probability. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 is received by the second sub-out port 2022 with a lower probability than that of the general start port 2001. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a.

Then, the game ball B, which is discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 and is not received in the general starting port 2001 or the second sub-out port 2022, flows down on the inclined wall portion 2418 and follows the inclination of the inclined wall portion 2418. It rolls diagonally to the lower left, is discharged to the left at a portion below the first starting port 2004, and is received by the out port 1008.

That is, under normal conditions, when the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (“right hit”), there is an opportunity to accept the game ball B into the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, or the variable winning opening 2003. There is no. As a result, in a normal state, the player can be made to positively perform a driving operation such that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the right side of the center accessory 2500 (““ It is possible to give a premium feeling to "right-handed").

As described above, the first big winning opening is based on the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005. The 2006 or second prize opening 2007 opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern, and the game ball B is ready to be accepted.

When the first prize opening 2006 becomes acceptable, the first prize opening 2006 is provided in the left second guide passage 2532 on the left side of the center accessory 2500, so that the player can see the left first prize opening 2006. (Ii) The driving operation can be performed so that the game ball B circulates in the guide passage 2532. Then, when the game ball B that has entered the left second guide passage 2532 is received by the first prize opening 2006 when the first prize opening 2006 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted, the main control board 1310 and the main control board 1310 and A predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 by the payout control board 633 to the upper plate 201.

On the other hand, when the second major winning opening 2007 becomes acceptable, the second major winning opening 2007 is provided below the right side of the center accessory 2500, so that the player can see the right side of the center accessory 2500. The driving operation can be performed so that the game ball B is distributed. Then, when the second big winning opening 2007 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted, the game ball B that has entered the attacker passage 2564 of the second attacker part 2560 from between the guidance wall part 2552 and the attacker right wall part 2567. Is accepted into the second prize opening 2007, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 to the upper plate 201. Will be done.

In this way, when the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 can accept the game ball B, the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 can accept the game ball B. Since a large number of game balls B can be paid out, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

By the way, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is "big hit", the second big winning opening 2007 can accept the game ball B as a big hit game. Either a predetermined time (for example, 20 to 40 seconds) has passed after the open state, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are accepted into the second prize opening 2007. When the condition is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game ball B unacceptable is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, a "5R jackpot" is repeated for 5 rounds, and a "10R jackpot" is repeated for 10 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player. At this time, even if an attempt is made to hit the game ball B aiming at the second big prize opening 2007 at the timing when the second big winning opening 2007 opens and the game ball B can be accepted, the second big winning opening 2007 Since the specific obstacle nail group 2700 capable of delaying the flow speed of the game ball B is provided upstream, it is difficult to take the timing of hitting the game ball B. As a result, the difficulty level is given to the driving operation of the game ball B, so that the player can be entertained by arousing the rewardingness of the game and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. .. Further, in the above case, since it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to be accepted by the second major winning opening 2007, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, in "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that the first special symbol such as "big hit" and the second special symbol will be drawn will be high ("probability change hit"), or the variable winning opening There is a "hit" that is changed ("short time hit") so that the game ball B can be easily accepted into 2003. For example, when the ordinary lottery is held, the probability that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol will be "ordinary hit" is increased, or when the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is "ordinary hit", it is closed by the variable winning door 2521. By increasing the time and the number of times that the variable winning opening 2003 is opened, it is easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003.

In addition, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is "small hit", as a small hit game, the first big winning opening 2006 can accept the game ball B for a short time. It opens and closes in between (for example, a small hit rush).

In addition, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is "immediate short hit", the big hit game or the small hit game is not executed, and the first big prize opening 2006 or the second big prize is won. The mouth 2007 is not in an open state in which the game ball B can be accepted, but thereafter, it is assumed that the time-saving state is maintained as an advantageous game state for a predetermined specific number of fluctuations.

In the present embodiment, below the second major winning opening 2007, there is a pseudo-game area 2010 in which only the game ball B received in the second major winning opening 2007 can be distributed. The game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2007 enters the pseudo game area 2010 after being detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2561. When the game ball B that has entered the pseudo game area 2010 flows down while contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo game area 2010, and the pseudo grand prize opening 2402 can accept the game ball B, , The game ball B is accepted in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. On the other hand, when the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 cannot accept the game ball B, it passes in front of the pseudo-large winning opening 2402 and is discharged from the pseudo-out opening 2404 without being returned to the game area 5a.

This pseudo-large winning opening 2402 uses, for example, a game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern when the second large winning opening 2007 is capable of accepting the game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern due to the above-mentioned "big hit" or the like. Will be accepted. Since this pseudo-large winning opening 2402 is provided so as to be larger and more prominent than the second major winning opening 2007, many game balls B accepted in the second major winning opening 2007 are accepted in the pseudo-large winning opening 2402. By doing so, it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored and entertain during the "big hit" game, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest.

In the present embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol. In the function display unit 1400, the lottery result of the special symbol (the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol) is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the lottery result of the special symbol in the function display unit 1400 suggests the lottery result of the special symbol by repeatedly turning on and off a plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lit LEDs. ..

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the lottery result of the special symbol is suggested as the effect image. The effect image suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each pattern row in a state where three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. The pattern rows are stopped and displayed in sequence, and each of the pattern rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three pattern rows that are stopped and displayed are combined with the lottery result of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is other than "off", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. , An advantageous game state (for example, "small hit" game, "big hit" game, "short time" game, etc.) occurs according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn.

The time suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (special fluctuation time)) and the time suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol in the effect display device 1600 (the symbol sequence fluctuates). The time until the confirmed image is displayed) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit in the door frame 3 according to the lottery result of the lottered special symbol. It is possible to perform a player participation type production in which the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in 300 are operated. In the player participation type production, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the lower right unit 2400, and the back front of the back unit 3000. It is possible to perform light emission effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back upper front effect unit 3300, the back lower front effect unit 3400, the back upper rear effect unit 3500, the back lower rear effect unit 3600, and the like. Therefore, the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type production in which the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, the correct operation is performed when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation to be operated. Notify the player to that effect.

[Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of the control process executed on the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S114).

Assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. 183, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is first driven by the first start port sensor 3002. On condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first start port 2004) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the above random number counter, and this is the first of the RAM. (I) The first start port passage process such as storing in the special symbol hold storage area is executed (step S232). Further, on condition that the detection signal by the second start port sensor 2401 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second start port 2005) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the above random number. A second start port passage process such as acquiring from a counter and storing this in the second special symbol hold storage area of the RAM is executed (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game is controlled is set (step S235), and if the jackpot executing flag is set, the jackpot control that controls the jackpot game is performed. The process (step S240) is executed. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is a mode suggesting "big hit A", 10R A process of opening / closing the second big winning opening 2007 is executed according to the big hit game. In addition, when the mode suggests "big hit B", the process of opening and closing the second big winning opening 2007 is executed according to the 5R big hit game, and the mode suggests "big hit C". A process of opening / closing the second big winning opening 2007 is executed according to the 10R big hit game.

Further, in the big hit control process (step S240), after the opening control of the second big winning opening 2007 is performed, each set process of the high probability flag, the time saving flag, and the time saving number counter is executed. The high-probability flag is a flag indicating that the special symbol is in a high-probability state, and when the 10R jackpot game based on the result of the lottery processing when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped is in a mode suggesting "big hit A" is completed. , Set at the end of the 5R jackpot game based on the mode suggesting "big hit B". Then, the high probability flag is reset by the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 194, which will be described later, when the next big hit occurs.

Further, the time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time is shortened, and the 10R big hit is based on the fact that the result of the lottery process when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "big hit A" or "big hit C". It is set when the game is finished and the mode suggests "immediate short hits A to C". Then, the time saving flag is reset by the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 194, which will be described later, when the next big hit or when the counter value of the time saving number counter becomes "0".

Further, the time reduction counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of fluctuations of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuations of the time reduction state, and suggests "big hit A" or "big hit C". When the 10R jackpot game based on the mode is completed, the number of continuations of the time saving state is set when the mode suggests "immediate short hits A to C". Then, the time reduction counter is counted down every time the fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed until the counter value becomes "0", but the next big hit is made before the counter value becomes "0". Occasionally, it is reset by the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 194, which will be described later (the counter value is returned to "0").

If the big hit executing flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the small hit executing flag indicating that the small hit game is controlled is set (step S236), and the small hit executing flag is set. If it is set, the small hit control process (step S239) for controlling the small hit game is executed. In the small hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is a mode suggesting "small hit". A process of opening / closing the first large winning opening 2006 is executed according to the small hit game.

If the small hit execution flag is not set, the special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is executed (step). S238). In this example, when the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and when the second special random number of the second special symbol is acquired from the random number counter, the special symbol hold memory common to both is stored. It is configured to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the order of storing in the area and storing in the special symbol holding storage area.

FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S232).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S231 that the first start port sensor 3002 is in the ON state and the game ball has entered the first start port 2004, as shown in FIG. 184. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S241.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires a counter value by the first special hold number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the special symbol hold storage area from the main control built-in RAM, and this counter value. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is the maximum value (upper limit value) of "4" (step S242). In the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to the following steps S243 to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S245 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S244, each random number acquired in step S241 is used as a counter value by the first special hold number counter and a counter by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in the special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the total value consisting of the values.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is a display result of the variation display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variation random number acquired in step S241. Whether or not to make a big hit, a small hit, and an immediate short hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is a small hit, the type of small hit, and if it is an immediate short hit, the type of immediate short hit If the big hit, the small hit, or the immediate short hit is not obtained, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the pre-judgment information such as the mode type (variable pattern type) of the game effect to be executed. Is executed before the start of the variable display according to the start winning prize, and the effect pre-determination process (step S245) is executed, and then the process is terminated.

However, in the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S243 to S245, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the first hold storage number changes based on the game ball entering the first start port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is stored in the first hold storage. A command (first hold number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 memory command 0 to 0)) instructing the first hold storage number in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) while updating to correspond to the number. 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0 to 4). It has become like.

FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the effect pre-determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, it has a pre-determination table (not shown) and a random number acquired in step S241 described above or a random number acquired in step S251 described later, specifically, a special random number (first). By comparing special random numbers, second special random numbers), symbol random numbers (first symbol random numbers, second symbol random numbers), reach random numbers, and variable random numbers, whether or not to make a big hit, a small hit, an immediate short hit, and a big hit If it is, the type of big hit, if it is a small hit, the type of small hit, if it is an immediate short hit, the type of immediate short hit, big hit, small hit, if it is not an immediate short hit, an effect display device The reach effect is executed as the game effect executed in 1600, or the mode type (variable pattern type) of the game effect to be executed is specified (step S261).

Then, the specified pre-judgment information (whether or not to make a big hit, a small hit, or an immediate short hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it is a small hit, the type of the small hit, if it is an immediate short hit The type of immediate short hit, big hit, small hit, and if the immediate short hit does not occur, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed (variable pattern). (Type), etc.), the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number, second special random number), and the number of pending storages (value of the pending number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. Set the pre-judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process relating to the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first start port passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reserved storage number (the first hold storage number). (1) The value of the special hold number counter) and the first special symbol pre-judgment command corresponding to the setting are set, and in the effect pre-judgment process relating to the second special symbol executed in step S255 of the second start port passage process described later, The second special symbol pre-judgment command is set according to the specified pre-judgment information, the acquisition of the second special random number, the second hold storage number (value of the second special hold count counter), and the second special symbol pre-judgment command (step S262). ).

Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), the pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005 in which the start winning is generated are generated. In addition to the number of reserved memories stored in response to, whether or not the display result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol based on the generated start prize is a big hit, a small hit, an immediate short hit, and if it is a big hit, a big hit Type, type of small hit if it is a small hit, type of immediate short hit if it is an immediate short hit, big hit, small hit, game executed by the effect display device 1600 if it is not an immediate short hit Preliminary determination information such as whether to execute the reach effect as the effect or the mode type (variation pattern type) of the game effect to be executed is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before starting the variation display according to the start winning prize. Peripheral control IC can be grasped.

When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a hold storage area for storing prior determination information regarding the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol).

Further, the reserved storage area has 1 to 8 storage areas corresponding to the total number of reserved storage areas of the first reserved storage area and the second reserved storage area, and the peripheral control IC receives a pre-determination command. The indicated pre-determination information is stored in order from the first (earliest) storage area. Then, when the pre-judgment command is received when the pre-judgment information is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 7) storage area, the pre-judgment information notified to the n + 1-th (n = 1 to 7) storage area is received. Is stored, and when a variation pattern command (first variation pattern command, second variation pattern command) for notifying the start of variation display of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is received, it responds to the received variation pattern command. The pre-judgment information stored in the first storage area of the reserved storage area is discarded, and the pre-judgment information stored in the Nth (N = 2-8) storage area is set to the N-1th (N =). 2 to 8) Move to the th-th storage area (shift the pre-determination information stored in the hold storage area). As a result, the pre-judgment information of the above special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is memorized so that the order in which the suspension of the variable display start occurs can be specified and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-judgment information. Become so.

When the variable display control is put on hold in this way, the jackpot expectation (pseudo-winning probability) of the variable display control is maintained even though the variable display control is maintained in the unexecuted state (holding state). ) Will be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, for example, when the hold display is newly output or when the hold display is shifted according to the hold digestion. ..

FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S234).

Now, assuming that in the process of step S233, the second start port sensor 2401 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second start port 2005, as shown in FIG. 186. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S251.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the second hold storage number is the maximum value (upper limit value) based on this counter value. ) Is "4" or not (step S252). In the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253 to S253 to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S255 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S254, each random number acquired in step S251 is used as a counter value by the first special hold number counter and a counter by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in the special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the total value consisting of the values.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is a display result of the variation display of the second special symbol based on the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variation random number acquired in step S251. Whether or not to make a big hit, a small hit, and an immediate short hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is a small hit, the type of small hit, and if it is an immediate short hit, the type of immediate short hit If the big hit, the small hit, or the immediate short hit is not obtained, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the pre-judgment information such as the mode type (variable pattern type) of the game effect to be executed. Is executed before the start of the variation display according to the start winning prize, and then the effect pre-determination process (step S255) is executed, and then the process is terminated.

However, in the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S255, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the second hold storage number changes based on the game ball entering the second start port 2005, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is stored in the second hold storage. A command (second hold number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 2 memory command 0 to 0)) for instructing the second hold storage number in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) while updating to correspond to the number. 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 to 4). It has become like.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the first reserved memory number based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2004 is set to "4", and the game ball is set to the second starting port 2005. The upper limit of the second reserved memory number based on the entry of the ball is set to "4". Since it is easier to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003 than in the normal state during the time saving state, the first start is performed by continuing the period in which the second reserved memory number is the upper limit for a long time. Even if a game ball enters the mouth 2004 or the second starting mouth 2005, it is suppressed that the player is in a disadvantageous state that the chance of a big hit lottery is not obtained.

FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process process (step S238). In the special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the above-mentioned special symbol process flag.

1. 1. The special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a are read, and based on the read special random numbers, a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the special symbol is stopped is performed. Special symbol normal processing to be performed (step S280)
2. Special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which the process of determining the mode when the special symbol variation control is stopped is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the special symbol variation control is stopped (step S281).
3. 3. The variation mode of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and the special symbol on the effect display device 1600. Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282) in which a lottery process or the like for a variation mode of the effect display executed in response is performed.
4. Special symbol variation processing (step S283) that waits until the variation display of the above special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. The mode when the fluctuation control of the special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of symbols (step S284)

The special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed in the main control side power-on processing (see FIG. 167).

FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol normal processing (step S280).

When the special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 188, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the processing of step S301. As a variable display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special random number) in the pending state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter and the counter value of the second special hold number counter. Judge whether or not. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variation display control of the special symbol in the hold state, then, as the process of step S302, the special symbol stored in the special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The earliest of random numbers related to the display mode of the symbol (for example, special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number), symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number), reach random number, variable random number) The random numbers stored in the storage area are read from the same RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, when the read special random number is the first special random number, the first special hold number counter is counted down, and when it is the second special random number, the above A random number (special random number (special random number)) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol stored in each storage area of the special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stopped while counting down the second special hold number counter. The first special random number, the second special random number), the symbol random number (the first symbol random number, the second symbol random number), the reach random number, and the variable random number) are shifted in a first-in, first-out (First-In First-Out) manner.

Specifically, the special symbol reservation storage area has eight storage areas 1 to 8, and the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning prize are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a start prize occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 7) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 7) storage area, and the first prize is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 8) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-8) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display control hold of the special symbol occurs can be identifiable and stored, and the hold of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). ..

After that, as the process of step S305, when the read special random number is the first special random number, the first special random number is used, and when the read special random number is the second special random number, the second special random number is used. The hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the big hit, the small hit, and the immediate short hit, is performed. After that, when the above-mentioned special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) (step S306), this process is terminated.

FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the hit determination process (step S305).

If the current gaming state is a high-probability state (high-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state) (step S311), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 will be in the high-probability time shown in FIG. 190 (A). If the lottery table is selected (step S312) and the current gaming state is a low probability state (low probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state) (step S311), the lottery at the low probability shown in FIG. 190 (B). A table is selected (step S313), and the selected lottery table is compared with the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) read in step S302 of the special symbol normal processing (step S314).

In the lottery table shown in FIGS. 190 (A) and 190 (B), when the game state is low probability (low probability non-time saving state (normal state)) for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number), A low-probability lottery table used in the case of low-probability time-saving state) and a high-probability lottery table used in the case of high-probability gaming state (high-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state). I have. Then, in the low-probability lottery table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, when the set value is 1, 1/319, when the set value is 2, 1/309, and when the set value is 3. The first special random number was won with a jackpot probability of 1/299, 1/289 when the set value is 4, 1/279 when the set value is 5, and 1/269 when the set value is 6. Immediate short hit judgment indicating that the first special random number was won in the immediate short hit with the immediate short hit probability of 3/319, which matches the big hit judgment value indicating that and is the same in all of the set values 1 to 6. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the value and match the deviation determination value indicating that the other first special random numbers are out of the above. Further, in the lottery table at the time of low probability referred for comparison with the second special random number, when the set value is 1, 1/319, when the set value is 2, 1/309, and when the set value is 3. The second special random number was won with a jackpot probability of 1/299, 1/289 when the set value is 4, 1/279 when the set value is 5, and 1/269 when the set value is 6. It matches with the big hit judgment value indicating that, and is the same as the small hit judgment value indicating that the second special random number has won the small hit with a small hit probability of 144/319 which is the same in all of the set values 1 to 6. However, the second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that the other second special random numbers are out of the above. Further, the lottery table at the time of high probability is configured so that the jackpot probability for each set value is increased 10 times as compared with the lottery table at the time of low probability.

In the above, the lottery table referred to for comparison with the first special random number does not have a small hit determination value, whereas the lottery table referred for for comparison with the second special random number has a small hit. A judgment value is provided. As a result, in the time saving state, it becomes easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003, and in addition to being able to easily execute the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning in the variable winning opening 2003, the variable winning opening Since there is a possibility of winning a small hit by winning a start in 2003, the player can play the game without significantly reducing the number of balls held by the player.

Further, in the lottery table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, an immediate short hit determination value is provided, whereas in the lottery table referred for for comparison with the second special random number, the immediate short hit is set. There is no hit judgment value. As a result, it is difficult to accept the game ball B to the variable winning opening 2003 in the non-time saving state, and the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first starting opening 2004 has become mainstream. Since there is a possibility of winning an immediate short hit by winning a start to the first starting port 2004, it is possible to play the game with expectation even in a state where a disadvantageous game is performed in a non-time saving state. ..

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is a big hit as a result of comparison between the lottery table and a special random number (a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) read in step S302 of the special symbol normal processing). When it is determined to be either a small hit or an immediate short hit (step S315), a hit flag (big hit flag, small hit) indicating that the fluctuation has been won as a big hit, a small hit, or an immediate short hit. (Flag, immediate short hit flag) is set (step S316), and the hit determination process is completed.

On the other hand, when none of the big hit, the small hit, and the immediate short hit is won, that is, when it is determined that the hit is out, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S317).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is the time reduction state and the reach determination table in the time reduction state, and the non-time reduction table used when the game state is the non-time reduction state. It is equipped with a reach judgment table for the state. Then, in the reach determination table in the time saving state, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number reaches is matched with the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach random numbers do not reach. Random numbers are associated with each other.

Further, in the reach determination table in the non-time saving state, it matches the reach determination value indicating that five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time saving state reach. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reach is higher in the non-time saving state than in the time saving state.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be out of reach as a result of comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S302 (step S317), the variation Sets the reach flag indicating that is the reach, and ends the process (step S319).

FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the special symbol process flag indicates that the special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first changes the special symbol, as shown in FIG. 191. The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the display is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the immediate short hit flag are set (step S321).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a has the symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) read in step S302 of the special symbol normal processing and the jackpot time shown in FIG. 190 (C). By comparing with the symbol determination table of (step S322), the type of jackpot is determined, and the mode (stop symbol of the special symbol) at the time of stopping the variation control of the special symbol corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is determined. (Step S323).

In particular,
1. 1. After opening the second prize opening 2007 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the second prize opening sensor 2561 that 10 game balls have won in the second prize opening 2007, the second prize opening 2007 is closed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 10 times (10 rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 10R big hit game that can enter the second big winning opening 2007 (easy), and there is a high probability until the next big hit is reached after the big hit game is completed. Big hit A to control the time saving state
2. After opening the second prize opening 2007 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the second prize opening sensor 2561 that 10 game balls have won in the second prize opening 2007, the second prize opening 2007 is closed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 5 times (5 rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 5R jackpot game that can enter the second big winning opening 2007 (easy), and there is a high probability until the next jackpot is reached after the jackpot game is completed. Big hit B to control to non-time saving state
3. 3. After opening the second prize opening 2007 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the second prize opening sensor 2561 that 10 game balls have won in the second prize opening 2007, the second prize opening 2007 is closed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 10 times (10 rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 10R jackpot game in which the ball can enter the second prize opening 2007 (easy), and after the jackpot game is completed, a special symbol (first special symbol, first special symbol, first) is controlled. If the variable display of (2) special symbol) is not executed 100 times before the jackpot is reached, the time-saving state is terminated. The jackpot C is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state A.
4. After opening the second prize opening 2007 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the second prize opening sensor 2561 that 10 game balls have won in the second prize opening 2007, the second prize opening 2007 is closed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 10 times (10 rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 10R jackpot game in which the ball can enter the second prize opening 2007 (easy), and after the jackpot game is completed, a special symbol (first special symbol, first special symbol, first) is controlled. If the variable display of (2) special symbol) does not become a big hit before it is executed 599 times, the time saving state ends. The big hit D that controls to the low probability time saving state A.
One of the four types of jackpots is decided.

In the symbol determination table at the time of a jackpot to be compared with the first symbol random number, the determination values are distributed to the jackpot A, the jackpot B, the jackpot C, and the jackpot D. Specifically, the judgment values are distributed at a ratio of "big hit A: big hit B: big hit C: big hit D = 25: 25: 49: 1" with respect to the first symbol random number (for example, a random number value of 1 to 100). Has been done. On the other hand, in the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, the determination values are distributed to the jackpot A and the jackpot C, but the determination values are not distributed to the jackpot B and the jackpot D. Specifically, the determination value is distributed to the second symbol random number (for example, a random number value of 1 to 100) at a ratio of "big hit A: big hit C = 70: 30". Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number has a higher probability of being determined as jackpot A than the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number. It is configured and the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start prize to the second start port 2005 or the variable winning opening 2003 is executed rather than the variation display of the first special symbol based on the start prize to the first start port 2004. In some cases, it is in an advantageous state for the player.

Further, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the jackpot A is decided, the jackpot A symbol is decided as the jackpot symbol, when the jackpot B is decided, the jackpot B symbol is decided as the jackpot symbol, and when the jackpot C is decided, the jackpot B symbol is decided. The jackpot C symbol is determined as the symbol, and when the jackpot D is determined, the jackpot D symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

Further, if the immediate short hit flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 will be a symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) read in step S302 of the special symbol normal processing. By comparing with the symbol determination table at the time of immediate short hit shown in FIG. 190 (D) (step S322), the type of immediate short hit is determined, and the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the determined type of immediate short hit. The mode (stop symbol of the special symbol) at the time of control stop is determined (step S323).

In particular,
1. 1. Low probability that the time saving state will end if there is no big hit before the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 100 times without controlling to the big hit game or the small hit game. Immediate short hit A controlled to time saving state C
2. Low probability that the time saving state will end if there is no big hit before the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 40 times without controlling to the big hit game or the small hit game. Immediate short hit B controlled to time saving state C
3. 3. Low probability that the time saving state will end if there is no big hit before the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 20 times without controlling to the big hit game or the small hit game. Immediate short hit C controlled to time saving state C
One of the three types of immediate short hits is determined.

In the symbol determination table at the time of immediate short hit, which is compared with the first symbol random number, the determination values are assigned to immediate short hit A, immediate short hit B, and immediate short hit C. Specifically, the judgment value is the ratio of "immediate short hit A: immediate short hit B: immediate short hit C = 10: 20: 70" to the first symbol random number (for example, a random number value of 1 to 100). It is sorted. On the other hand, since the immediate short hit is not won by the lottery based on the second special random number, the symbol determination table at the time of the immediate short hit compared with the second symbol random number is immediate short hit A, immediate short hit B and immediate. The judgment value is not distributed to the short hit C. However, the immediate short hit will be won by a lottery based on the second special random number, and the symbol determination table at the time of the immediate short hit compared with the second symbol random number will also be the immediate short hit A, the immediate short hit B and the immediate short. The determination value may be distributed to the hit C at a ratio of "immediate short hit A: immediate short hit B: immediate short hit C = 10: 20: 70". Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, after winning an immediate short hit by a lottery based on a special random number, the type of the immediate short hit is determined by using the symbol determination table at the time of the immediate short hit compared with the symbol random number. However, in the lottery table that is referred to for comparison with the special random number, the judgment value that is the immediate short hit A, the judgment value that is the immediate short hit B, and the judgment value that is the immediate short hit C are set. , When each determination value and the special symbol match, it may be decided to win the immediate short hit A, the immediate short hit B, and the immediate short hit C. That is, the type of immediate short hit may be determined only by the lottery based on the special random number.

Further, when the type of immediate short hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of immediate short hit is determined as the mode when the special symbol is stopped. Specifically, if it is determined to be an immediate short hit A, it is determined to be an immediate short hit A symbol as an immediate short hit symbol, and if it is determined to be an immediate short hit B, it is determined to be an immediate short hit B symbol as an immediate short hit symbol. If it is determined and the immediate short hit C is determined, the immediate short hit C symbol is determined as the immediate short hit symbol.

Further, if the small hit flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) and a diagram read in step S302 of the special symbol normal processing. By comparing with the symbol determination table at the time of small hit shown in 190 (E) (step S322), the type of small hit is determined, and when the fluctuation control of the special symbol corresponding to the determined type of small hit is stopped. The aspect (stop symbol of the special symbol) is determined (step S323).

In particular,
1. 1. A small hit game in which the game ball can enter the first big prize opening 2006 (easy) by executing the opening / closing pattern twice after opening the first big winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms). Decide on a hit.

In the small hit symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, the determination values are distributed to the small hits. Specifically, a determination value is set in which one type of "small hit" is selected for all of the second symbol random numbers (for example, random numbers of 1 to 100). On the other hand, since the small hit is not won by the lottery based on the first special random number, the judgment value is not distributed to the small hit in the symbol determination table at the time of the small hit compared with the first symbol random number. However, a small hit may be won by a lottery based on the first special random number, and the judgment value may be distributed to the small hit in the symbol determination table at the time of the small hit to be compared with the first symbol random number. In addition, although only one type of small hit is set in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a plurality of types of small hits having different opening times and opening times of the first big winning opening 2006 are set and compared with the symbol random number. You may decide one of a plurality of types of small hits by using the symbol determination table at the time of small hits.

Further, when the type of small hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of small hit is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when it is decided to be a small hit, it is decided to be a small hit symbol.

When none of the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the immediate short hit flag is set, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the symbol to be off (step S324). Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the above lottery result (type of big hit, type of immediate short hit, small hit, reach) as the process of step S328. A judgment result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that either disengagement or disengagement instruction (which may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. (Step S328). After that, as the process of step S329, this process ends when the special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the variation pattern setting process (step S282).

The peripheral control unit 1511 displays and controls the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and fluctuation pattern command (left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variablely displayed, and left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle. The decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the decorative symbols (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the same symbol and stopped and displayed at the same time). Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1511 specifies the jackpot A from the received determination result notification command as the mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600, the jackpot A If the symbol (combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols among the symbols "0" to "9") is determined and the jackpot B is determined, the jackpot B symbol (left, middle, and right) If the right decorative symbol is determined to be a combination of "579" symbols) and the jackpot C is determined, the jackpot C symbol (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are among the symbols "0" to "9"). If the combination is determined to be the same even-numbered symbol and the jackpot D is determined, the jackpot D symbol (the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are the same even-numbered symbols among the symbols "0" to "9". Combination) is decided. When the jackpot C and the jackpot D are determined, a common even-numbered symbol combination can be displayed, and at the stage when the symbol combination is displayed, it is not clearly shown to the player which hit is the jackpot D. I try to keep the game going by giving a feeling of expectation of something. In addition, when the immediate short hit A is determined, the immediate short hit A symbol (combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the symbols of "549") is determined, and when the immediate short hit B is determined, the immediate short hit B is determined. Immediate short hit B symbol (combination where the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are "549" symbols) is decided, and if immediate short hit C is decided, immediate short hit C symbol (left, middle, right) The combination in which the decorative symbol is the symbol of "549") is determined. When the immediate short hit A, the immediate short hit B, and the immediate short hit C are determined, the common combination of "549" can be displayed, and at the stage when the symbol combination is displayed, which hit is used. The game is continued by giving a feeling of expectation that it is a more advantageous immediate short hit without clearly indicating it to the player. If a small hit is determined, the small hit symbol (a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are "135" symbols) is determined. In addition, when the reach out of reach is specified, the out-of-reach symbol with reach (the combination of the same symbols whose left and right decorative symbols are "0" to "9" but different in the middle decorative symbol; reach; If it is decided to be an out-of-order symbol and an out-of-order is specified, a combination of out-of-order symbols without reach (at least the left / right decorative symbols out of the left / middle / right decorative symbols will be different symbols. The hit B symbol, the immediate short hit C symbol, and the small hit symbol are excluded), and the determined stop symbol is displayed on the effect display device when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect). Display control is performed at 1600. Further, as will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, even when the immediate short hit A, the immediate short hit B, and the immediate short hit C are determined, the gaming state at that time is a gaming state other than the low probability non-time saving state. If (high-probability time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state), the process of setting the time-saving flag and the time-saving number counter corresponding to the immediate short-time hit A, the immediate short-time hit B, and the immediate short-time hit C is executed. Therefore, in the gaming state other than the low probability non-time saving state, even if the immediate short hit A, the immediate short hit B, and the immediate short hit C are determined, the immediate short hit A to C symbols (left, middle, right decorative symbols) Does not determine the combination that becomes the symbol of "549"), but determines the above-mentioned "out-of-reach symbol without reach".

FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the special symbol process flag indicates that the fluctuation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 192, if the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is set with the jackpot flag. (Step S341), the variable pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit and the game state determined in step S323 of the special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S342), and the small hit flag is set. If you enter (step S341), select the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of small hit according to the type of small hit and the game state determined in step S325 of the special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S342), and immediately. If the short hit flag is set (step S341), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of immediate short hit according to the type of immediate short hit and the game state determined in step S325 of the special symbol stop symbol setting process is displayed. Select (step S342). If the reach flag is set (step S343), the variation pattern table at the time of reach (not shown) is selected (step S344), and all of the big hit flag, the small hit flag, the immediate short flag, and the reach flag are set. If this is not the case, that is, if it is a normal deviation (a deviation that does not execute the reach effect), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the deviation is selected (step S345).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S302 of the special symbol normal processing (step S348), and the determined variation pattern is started by the peripheral control board. A special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) displayed on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special indicator) of the function display unit 1400 by setting the variation pattern command to be notified to 1510. ) Is started (step S349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S350). As a result, the effect control is performed by the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 for the fluctuation time determined in this way.

In addition, a plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables of this example are provided for each determination result based on a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and a symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). Further, in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. It is stored in a form associated with each variable random number. Then, the main control MPU 1310a compares the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S302 of the special symbol normal processing from among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. Then, by acquiring the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the above special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. .. For example, among the reach effects, the super reach effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the big hit game is increased.

Further, as will be described in detail later, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed, the fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state. At times, a specific variation pattern table is selected when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when a specific variation pattern table is selected, a specific variation pattern (a variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect described later) is determined. ing. Then, when the specific variation pattern is determined, the help mode L is executed only in the variation display of the special symbol in which the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). I try to perform a precursory effect.

Further, when the variation display control of the special symbol is started, next, as the process of step S351, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time reduction counter for which the continuation number of the time reduction state is set is "0". Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time reduction counter (step S352), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous reduction counter is "0" (step S353). .. As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving end flag indicating that the control in the time saving state (time saving control) is terminated is set (step S354).

If it is determined in the process of step S351 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is "0", or if it is determined in the process of step S353 that the time reduction counter is not "0", that time point In step S355, the process proceeds to step S355. Then, when the above-mentioned special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned special symbol variation process (step S283), this process ends.

FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol variation processing (step S283).

When the special symbol process flag indicates that the special symbol variation process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as the process of step S371, as shown in FIG. 193. The fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time is set according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S282) for the fluctuation pattern is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of step S373, this process ends when the above-mentioned special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned special symbol stop process (step S284).

FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol stop process (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 194, first steps S381. As the process of, display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the special symbol stop symbol setting process on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed, and the special symbol is stopped on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol according to the symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag and resets the time saving flag (step S384). As a result, when the variable display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times, 40 times, 20 times, etc. according to various time saving states) of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed, the time saving is performed. The control (control in the time saving state) is terminated and the non-time saving control (control in the normal state) is started.

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start the jackpot game (step S387), and the jackpot game The jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot is being executed is set (step S388), and the waiting time until the start of the jackpot game (time for displaying the start of the jackpot game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S389). ). In step S389, a process of setting the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot in the jackpot count counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The jackpot count counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process (step S240), and when the jackpot count counter becomes "0", the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes the specified number of rounds. Judge and control to end the jackpot game. When the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the high probability flag is reset when the high probability flag is set, and the time reduction flag is set when the time reduction flag is set. Is reset, and if the counter value of the time reduction counter is not "0", the counter value is reset (returned to "0").

The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (big hit A start command, jackpot B start command, jackpot C start command, jackpot D start command) is set according to the type of jackpot (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D). .. As a result, the effect of the jackpot game according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. In this embodiment, a common effect (the effect executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, etc. is the same) is set as the effect of the big hit game according to the big hit C start command and the big hit D start command. ing. Also, if the production of the jackpot game according to the jackpot C start command and the jackpot D start command is to be a common production, the jackpot C start command and the jackpot D start command are set to the same command instead of being separate commands. You may leave it.

Further, when the jackpot game is finished, the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is specifically set in the jackpot control process (step S240) of the second jackpot 2007 according to the type of jackpot. After opening / closing control (for example, the second big winning opening 2007 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or 10 game balls are won in the second big winning opening 2007, it is detected by the second big winning opening sensor 2525. It is reset when the opening / closing pattern (opening / closing control in which the opening / closing pattern to be closed is repeated 10 times or 5 times) is completed (all rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game). By resetting the jackpot executing flag, the jackpot control process (step S240) is not executed in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), while the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed. Variable display of the first special symbol on the device and function display The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the unit 1400 becomes feasible.

If the small hit flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a small hit start command indicating to start the small hit game (step S387), and the small hit starts. A small hit execution flag indicating that the game is being executed is set (step S388), and the waiting time until the start of the small hit game (time for displaying the start of the small hit game, etc.) is set as the interval timer. Set (step S389). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of small hit. In step S389, a small hit start command is set according to the type of small hit. As a result, the effect of the small hit game according to the type of the small hit instructed by the small hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

Further, when the small hit game is finished, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is specifically the first in the small hit control process (step S241) according to the type of the small hit. It is reset when the opening / closing control of the large winning opening 2006 (for example, opening / closing control in which the opening / closing pattern of opening and closing the first special winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) is repeated twice) is completed. By resetting the small hit execution flag, the small hit control process (step S2341) is not executed in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), while the first special of the function display unit 1400. The variable display of the first special symbol on the symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 become feasible.

If the big hit flag and the small hit flag are not set and the immediate short hit flag is set (step S390), the high probability flag and the time saving flag are not set and the low probability non-time saving is not set. It is determined whether or not it is in a state (step S391). Then, in the case of a low-probability non-time-saving state, the time-saving flag is set, and the number of times the time-saving state is continued according to the type of immediate short-time hit is set as the number of times the time-saving state is continued (first special symbol and second). It is set in the time reduction counter indicating the remaining number of times of the variation display of the special symbol) (step S392). Specifically, in the case of immediate short hit A, "100" is set in the time reduction counter, and in the case of immediate short hit B, "40" is set in the time reduction counter, and the immediate short hit C is used. If there is, set "20" to the time reduction counter. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a high-probability non-time-saving state, a high-probability non-time-saving state, or a low-probability non-time-saving state as a gaming state other than the low-probability non-time-saving state, the process of setting the time-saving flag and the time-saving number counter is not executed.

As described above, in the low probability state, when the immediate short hit occurs, the time reduction state is controlled based on the immediate short hit, whereas in the high probability state, when the immediate short hit occurs, the time is controlled immediately. It is not controlled to the time saving state based on the short hit. In this way, the purpose of "immediate short hit" is to relieve the disadvantageous game being played in a low probability state, and in the time saving state based on immediate short hit, the game ball to the variable winning opening 2003. Since it is easy to accept B, the player can play the game without significantly reducing the number of balls held by the player.

Further, in the time saving state, when the time saving state becomes an immediate short hit, the already controlled time saving state is continued without being newly controlled to the time saving state based on the immediate short hit. In this way, the purpose of "immediate short hit" is to relieve the disadvantageous game being played in the non-short time state, and in the state where the time is already controlled, the immediate short hit is newly applied. I try not to control the time saving state based on it. As another example, when an immediate short hit occurs in the time saving state, the already controlled time saving state may be terminated, and the time saving state may be newly controlled based on the immediate short hit. As another example, in the case of an immediate short hit in the time saving state, the remaining number of time saving times for the already controlled time saving state is compared with the time saving number for the time saving state based on the immediate short hit. Then, it may be controlled to the one with the larger number of time reductions. Further, as another example, in the case of an immediate short hit, the number of time reductions applied to the time reduction state based on the immediate short hit is set with respect to the remaining number of time reductions required for the already controlled time reduction state. It may be controlled to add.

In addition, in the low probability state, when the immediate short hit symbol is reached, the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed, and the time reduction flag is set. However, at the timing of setting the time reduction flag, the immediate short hit symbol is stopped. It may be at the beginning or end of the fixed time, which is the time to maintain. Of these, when the time reduction flag is set at the start of the fixed time, the time reduction state is controlled based on the immediate short hit, and the state in which the game ball B can be easily accepted into the variable winning opening 2003 is quickly set. Can be granted. In addition, when the time saving flag is set at the end of the fixed time, it is possible to execute an effect of notifying the start of the time saving state based on the immediate short hit by using the fixed time after the stop of the immediate short hit symbol. It is possible to specialize in the winning effect during the variable display of the special symbol before the immediate short hit symbol is stopped. When executing an effect of notifying the start of the time saving state based on the immediate short hit, the fixed time after the stop of the immediate short hit symbol is set to a specific fixed time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than the normal fixed time (for example, 1 second). ), Etc. can be exemplified.

In addition, when the big hit flag or the small hit flag is not set, that is, when the immediate short hit or the miss is made, the big hit game or the small hit game is not executed, so that the waiting until the next special symbol variation display is started is started. The time (the time during which the stop symbol of the special symbol is displayed) is set in the interval timer (step S392), and the process proceeds to step S393. In this embodiment, a common standby time is set in the interval timer when an immediate short hit or a miss occurs, but when an immediate short hit occurs, it is set to be longer than when the hit is missed. The waiting time may be set in the interval timer. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the hit is an immediate short hit, not a deviation, by the difference in the length of the waiting time. Further, when the special waiting time is provided in this way, the player may be made to recognize that the hit is an immediate short hit instead of a deviation within the special waiting time.

When the processes of steps S386 to S393 are executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not to control in a time saving state by satisfying a predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. When step S394) is executed and the special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S395), this process ends.

FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the relief number counting process (step S394).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the initial value of the relief count counter, which is additionally counted according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state, to "0" after the power is turned on with the RAM clear. When the jackpot flag is set (step S3941), the count value of the relief count counter indicating the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is reset and returned to the initial value "0" (step S3942). ).

If the jackpot flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the high probability flag is not set and the probability is low (low probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state) (step S3943). .. Then, in the low probability state, +1 is added to the count value of the relief count counter (step S3944), and when the count value of the relief count counter becomes "600" (step S3945), the time saving flag is set. At the same time, it is set in the time reduction counter indicating the remaining number of variations of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuations of the time reduction state (step S3946). Specifically, when the count value of the relief count counter reaches "600", "700" is set in the time reduction counter. Although not shown, in some of the low-probability non-time-saving states, +1 is not added to the count value of the relief count counter.

As described above, the relief count counter counts each time the special symbol variation display in the low probability state is executed, and when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the time is shortened. It is supposed to be controlled. Further, the relief count counter counts the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state regardless of whether it is in the non-time saving state or the time saving state. Further, in the main control board 1310, when the symbol determination command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the number of changes of the special symbol by the relief count counter is counted up. On the other hand, the relief count counter does not count even if the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the high probability state is executed. In this way, the control of the time saving state by satisfying the predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is aimed at relieving the disadvantageous game being performed in the low probability state, and in the time saving state, the variable winning opening Since the game ball B can be easily accepted into the 2003, the game can be performed without significantly reducing the number of balls held by the player. In addition, 700 times is set as the number of time reductions, and the probability that the next "big hit" will be obtained before the variation display of the special symbol reaches 700 times in the time reduction state is very high, so the time reduction is performed. In the state, the game can be played with expectation. In addition, 700 times as the number of time reductions is considered to be the number of times that the next "big hit" is not necessarily obtained even if the set value is 1/269, and even in a long-term time reduction state of 700 times. It is possible to give a feeling of tension to the player and continue the game. For this reason, regarding the number of time reductions given by "controlling the time reduction state by satisfying the predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol" using the relief number counter, the next "big hit" is likely to be obtained, but tension It is preferable to set the number of times so that the feeling is not completely eliminated (the number of times that the possibility that a big hit cannot be obtained occurs at least 3% or more). In addition, the number of time reductions given by "controlling the time reduction state by satisfying the predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol" using the relief number counter is the limit value of the relief number counter (the number of fluctuations practiced by the player). By setting the number of times to be equal to or greater than that, it is possible to give a feeling of satisfaction that dispels the disappointment given to the player by the time the limit value of the relief number counter is reached.

Further, when a big hit occurs, the relief count counter is reset, whereas when a small hit or an immediate short hit occurs, the relief count counter is not reset. That is, unless it becomes a big hit, the counting of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is continued. In this way, the control of the time saving state by satisfying the predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is aimed at relieving that the state in which the big hit game is not performed continues, and in the time saving state, the variable winning opening Since the game ball B can be easily accepted into the 2003, the game can be performed without significantly reducing the number of balls held by the player. In addition, 700 times is set as the number of time reductions, and the probability that the next "big hit" will be obtained before the variation display of the special symbol reaches 700 times in the time reduction state is very high, so the time reduction is performed. In the state, the game can be played with expectation.

The relief count counter is reset not only when a big hit occurs but also when the power is turned on with RAM clear. That is, when the set value is changed when the power is turned on, or when the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a is built in a predetermined area of the RAM (the entire area of the RAM). The area excluding the specific area) is cleared, so that the relief count counter is reset. In this way, the relief count counter can be appropriately reset by the hall manager. On the other hand, if the set value is confirmed when the power is turned on, or if the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, the RAM is not cleared, so the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is reset. However, after the power is turned on, the count is restarted from the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state stored when the power is turned off.

In addition, in the variation display in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, when the immediate short hit occurs, the special symbol in the low probability state has priority over the time reduction state based on the immediate short hit. It is assumed that the time saving state is controlled based on the number of fluctuations of the above reaching 600 times. This is because the time saving state based on the immediate short hit is the time saving given until the variation display of the special symbol reaches 20 to 100 times, whereas the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times. Based on this, the time saving state is the time saving until it reaches 700 times, and the time saving giving in favor of the player is prioritized. However, in the variation display in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 times in the low probability state, when the immediate short hit occurs, the time reduction state based on the immediate short hit may be controlled.

[Transition of game state]
FIG. 196 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition of the gaming state. As shown in FIG. 196, the gaming states are roughly classified into a low-probability state and a high-probability state, and a non-time-saving state and a time-saving state. When the power is turned on, the gaming state is in a low-probability non-time saving state.

In the high probability state, the jackpot probability is set to be higher than in the low probability state. Further, regarding the transition from the low probability state to the high probability state, it is possible to shift when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "big hit". The jackpot probability can also be changed by switching the set value of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, the small hit probability and the immediate short hit probability do not change between the low probability state and the high probability state, and do not change even when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is switched.

In the time saving state, it is set so that the game ball B can be easily accepted into the variable winning opening 2003 as compared with the non-time saving state. For example, when the ordinary lottery is held, the probability that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol will be "ordinary hit" is increased, or when the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is "ordinary hit", it is closed by the variable winning door 2521. By increasing the time and the number of times that the variable winning opening 2003 is opened, it is easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003. As a result, in the non-time saving state, it is difficult or impossible to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003, so that the game in which the game ball B is inserted into the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005 has become mainstream. On the other hand, in the time-saving state, it is easier to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003 than in the non-time-saving state, so that the game in which the game ball B is inserted into the variable winning opening 2003 has become mainstream. There is. Further, in the time-saving state, it is easier to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003 than in the non-time-saving state, so that the player can play the game without significantly reducing the number of balls held by the player.

In addition, regarding the transition from the non-time saving state to the time saving state, it is possible to shift when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "big hit" or "immediate short hit". If the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit", the game shifts to the time saving state after the big hit game is executed, whereas if the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", the time is shortened. It is different in that it shifts to a shorter time state without executing a jackpot game. In addition, even if the lottery result of the special symbol does not become "big hit" or "immediate short hit", it is possible to shift from the non-time saving state to the time saving state by satisfying the predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. Is possible. In this example, after the power is turned on or after the jackpot game is executed, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is counted, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, so that the non-time saving state is achieved. It is possible to shift from the time saving state to the time saving state.

Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", it is controlled to a high probability time saving state after the execution of the 10R big hit game until the next "big hit". Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B", it is controlled to a high probability non-time saving state after the execution of the 5R big hit game until the next "big hit". Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit C", it is controlled to the low probability time saving state A after the execution of the 10R big hit game until the variation display of the special symbol reaches 100 times. However, if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "big hit" before the variable display of the special symbol reaches 100 times, the low probability time saving state A ends at that point. Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit D", it is controlled to the low probability time saving state A after the execution of the 10R big hit game until the variation display of the special symbol reaches 599 times. However, if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "big hit" before the variable display of the special symbol reaches 599 times, the low probability time saving state A ends at that point. In addition, when the variation display of the special symbol reaches 599 times, immediately after that, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 times, and the state shifts from the non-time saving state to the time saving state (low probability time saving state B) again. It is possible to advance the game from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state B in a substantially continuous manner. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A" or "big hit B", the period until the next "big hit" is set as the period for controlling the high probability time saving state or the high probability non-time saving state. Although it is set, for example, the period until the fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches 10,000 times is set, and the next "big hit" is set before the fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches 10,000 times. It may be the number of times that the probability of obtaining is very high.

Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "small hit", the game state is controlled after the small hit game is executed and before the small hit game. That is, the game state does not change when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "small hit". If the lottery result of the special symbol is "small hit", the game state before the small hit game may be continuously controlled even during the small hit game. In this case as well, the game state does not change when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "small hit".

Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", the big hit game is not executed, and the low probability time saving state C is controlled until the variable display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times. Here, the predetermined number of times is 100 times when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit A", 40 times when the lottery result is "immediate short hit B", and "immediate short hit C". If, 20 times is set. However, if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "big hit" before the variable display of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of times, the low probability time saving state C is terminated at that point.

In the above, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, the low-probability time-saving state C is controlled only when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short-time hit". On the other hand, as game states other than the low-probability non-time-saving state, in the high-probability non-time-saving state, the high-probability time-saving state, the low-probability time-saving state A, the low-probability time-saving state B, and the low-probability time-saving state C, the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained. When it becomes "immediate short hit", it is not necessarily controlled to the low probability time saving state C, and the gaming state before the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit" is maintained. In other words, for game states other than the low-probability non-time-saving state, it is set as the "immediate short-time hit symbol invalid period" that is not controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short-time hit". ing. In this way, the "immediate short hit" is aimed at relieving the disadvantageous game being played in the low probability non-time saving state, and the low probability time saving triggered by the "immediate short hit". In the state C, since the game ball B can be easily accepted into the variable winning opening 2003, the game can be performed without significantly reducing the number of balls held by the player.

In this example, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short-time hit", it is controlled to the low-probability non-time-saving state C, but it is a part of the low-probability non-time-saving state. Is set as an "immediate short hit symbol invalid period" that is not controlled to the low probability time saving state C when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit". Details will be described later.

In the above, the low probability time saving state C is controlled only when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit" in the low probability non-time saving state, but at least in the low probability state, the special symbol is controlled. Only when the lottery result is "immediate short hit", it is sufficient to control the low probability time saving state C. That is, not only in the low-probability non-time-saving states, but also in the low-probability time-saving states A to C, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short-time hit", the low-probability time-saving states A to C already controlled. May be terminated and controlled to the low probability time saving state C. As another example, in the low-probability time-saving states A to C, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short-time hit", the number of time-saving times applied to the already controlled low-probability time-saving states A to C The remaining number of times may be compared with the number of time reductions applied to the low-probability time-saving state C triggered by the fact that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes an "immediate short-time hit", and the number of time reductions may be controlled to be larger. As another example, in the low-probability time-saving states A to C, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short-time hit", the number of time-saving times applied to the already controlled low-probability time-saving states A to C It may be controlled to add the number of time reductions related to the low probability time reduction state C triggered by the fact that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit" with respect to the remaining number of times.

Further, in the above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", the number of time reductions (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol to be controlled to the low probability time reduction state C) differs depending on the type of immediate short hit. However, the content of the low-probability time-saving state C may differ depending on the type of immediate short-time hit. Specifically, depending on the type of immediate short hit, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning opening 2003, which enables the acceptance of the game ball B when the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal hit", are different. Also, the opening time and the number of times of opening and the number of time reductions of the variable winning opening 2003 may be different.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", in the variable display of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400, the stop symbol of the special symbol is a unique immediate short that is different from other stop symbols. The hit symbol (which may be different for the immediate short hit A to C symbols) is stopped and displayed, and the immediate short hit symbol ("" The symbol combination of "549") is to be stopped and displayed. However, gaming states other than the low-probability non-time-saving state (high-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state A, low-probability time-saving state B, low-probability time-saving state C) and "immediate short-time symbol invalid period" In, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400, while the effect is produced. In the variable display of the decorative symbol on the display device 1600, the immediate short hit symbol (combination of symbols of "549") is not stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and the symbol different from the immediate short hit symbol (in this example, the symbol is off). The design) is to be stopped and displayed. In this way, gaming states other than the low-probability non-time-saving state (high-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state A, low-probability time-saving state B, low-probability time-saving state C) and "immediate short-time hit symbol invalid" In the "period", when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", the stop symbol of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 does not suggest that fact, so the "immediate short hit" is won. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice and reduce the feeling of loss when "immediate short hit" is invalidated.

In addition, even if the lottery result of the special symbol does not become "big hit" or "immediate short hit", if the predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is satisfied, the jackpot game is not executed and the special symbol changes. Until the display reaches a predetermined number of times, the low probability time saving state B is controlled. Here, 700 times is set as the predetermined number of times. However, if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "big hit" before the variable display of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of times, the low probability time saving state B ends at that point.

In the above, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is additionally counted from the initial value "0" by using the relief count counter described above. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low-probability state reaches 600 times, the low-probability time-saving state B is controlled. Here, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed, only the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is counted, and in the high probability state, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is counted. Not set as "count suppression period". On the other hand, in the case of a low probability state, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is counted regardless of whether it is in the non-time saving state or the time saving state. Further, when the big hit game is executed when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "big hit", the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is reset. In this way, regarding the control of the low-probability time-saving state B by satisfying the predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, there are cases where a disadvantageous game is performed in the low-probability state and a jackpot game is not performed. The purpose is to relieve the continuation, and in the low probability time saving state B, the game ball B can be easily accepted into the variable winning opening 2003, so that the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls held by the player. Can be done. In addition, 700 times is set as a predetermined number of times, and the probability that the next "big hit" will be obtained before the variation display of the special symbol reaches 700 times in the low probability time saving state B is very high. Therefore, in the low-probability time-saving state B, the game can be played with expectation.

In this example, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (the number of fluctuations other than the jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is counted. However, in some of the low-probability non-time-saving states, the "count suppression period" is set so that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is not counted. Details will be described later.

Further, in this example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B, but the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is a big hit. It is set to be larger than the expected value of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until it becomes a big hit calculated from the probability (for example, 319 times if the big hit probability is 1/319). Therefore, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the big hit game is executed, there is a high probability that the next "big hit" will be obtained before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times. It has become.

Further, in this example, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is reset not only when the jackpot game is executed but also when the power is turned on with the RAM clear. That is, when the set value is changed when the power is turned on, or when the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a is built in a predetermined area of the RAM (the entire area of the RAM). By clearing the area excluding the specific area), the count of the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state is reset. In this way, the relief count counter can be appropriately reset by the hall manager. On the other hand, if the set value is confirmed when the power is turned on, or if the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, the RAM is not cleared, so the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is reset. However, after the power is turned on, the count is restarted from the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state stored when the power is turned off.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "big hit" in the fluctuation display in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 times in the low probability state after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the big hit game is executed. , After the big hit game is executed, the game state (high probability time saving state, high probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state A) corresponding to the type of big hit is controlled, and after the big hit game is executed, the low probability It is assumed that the time saving state B is not controlled.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "small hit" in the fluctuation display in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 times in the low probability state after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the big hit game is executed. Is controlled to the low probability time saving state B after the small hit game is executed.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit" in the fluctuation display in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 times in the low probability state after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the big hit game is executed. Is controlled to the low probability time saving state B. This is because the low-probability time-saving state C triggered by the lottery result of the special symbol becoming "immediate short-term hit" is given the time-saving until the variation display of the special symbol reaches 20 to 100 times. On the other hand, the low-probability time-saving state B due to the establishment of the predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the time-saving grant until it reaches 700 times, and the time-saving granting that is advantageous to the player is prioritized. However, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit" in the fluctuation display where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 times in the low probability state after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the big hit game is executed. May be controlled to the low-probability non-time-saving state C triggered by the fact that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes an "immediate short-time hit".

Further, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times after the power is turned on with the RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed, the effect display device 1600 is used to control the low probability time saving state B. , Notifies that the low probability time saving state B is started. For example, at the start of the low-probability time-saving state B, or in the fluctuation display in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low-probability state reaches 600 times, it is sufficient to notify that the low-probability time-saving state B is started.

By the way, the time saving state is supposed to be terminated when the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied. In this example, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B and the low-probability time-saving state C, the variation display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "big hit" or "immediate short hit". When it reaches the set specified number of times), it is supposed to shift to the low probability non-time saving state. In addition to this, for example, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B and the low-probability time-saving state C, an end lottery is performed to determine whether or not to end the time-saving state each time a variation display of a special symbol is performed. When the end of the time saving state is determined by the end lottery, or when the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "small hit" reaches a predetermined number of times, the end condition of the time saving state may be satisfied.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 displays a status indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game status and a lottery result of a normal symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the gate 2002. It is provided with a normal symbol display composed of two LEDs and a normal hold display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the gate 2002. In such a state display, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "big hit" or "small hit", at the same time when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped (when the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped). The "state display LED corresponding to the time reduction" is not emitted, and the "state display LED corresponding to the time reduction" is emitted at the end of the big hit game or the small hit game. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", the "status display LED corresponding to the time reduction" is emitted at the same time when the variation display of the special symbol is stopped (when the immediate short hit symbol is stopped). Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize to the outside that the hit is a hit other than a big hit or a small hit.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "missing", the "state display LED corresponding to the time saving" is not emitted at the same time when the variation display of the special symbol is stopped (when the missing symbol is stopped). .. On the other hand, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state using the above-mentioned relief count counter (the number of fluctuations other than the jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). Is added and counted from the initial value "0", and when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B. When executing the variation display of the special symbol in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol has reached 600 times in such a low probability state, the variation display of the special symbol is stopped (when the out-of-order symbol is stopped) and at the same time, "in a short time". Since the "corresponding state display LED" is made to emit light, it is possible to easily recognize to the outside that it is not a normal deviation.

[Example of production related to time reduction control when the number of reliefs is reached]
In this example, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (the number of fluctuations other than the jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is counted. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B, but in the period before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times. Is executing a predetermined effect toward the 600th variation display of the special symbol. Here, a specific production example until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 times in the low probability state will be described with reference to FIG. 197.

As shown in FIG. 197 (A), when the variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the variation display of the decorative symbol 1600a is executed in the central portion of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 1600a are displayed in a variable manner until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command elapses, and the display is stopped in the order of left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol. do. As the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1600a, the symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed.

Further, when the variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the variation display of the identification symbol 1600b, which is smaller than the decorative symbol and is inconspicuous, is executed in the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, 〇 and × are displayed in a variable manner as the identification symbol 1600b until the fluctuation time corresponding to the variation pattern command elapses, and stop display is performed by either 〇 or ×. As the stop symbol of the identification symbol 1600b, 〇 is displayed when the lottery result is a hit (big hit, small hit, immediate short hit), and × is stopped and displayed when the lottery result is out of order. In addition to this example, when the purpose is to conceal as much as possible that the lottery result is an immediate short hit, the stop symbol of the identification symbol 1600b is when the lottery result is a big hit or a small hit. 〇, × may be stopped and displayed when the lottery result is an immediate short hit or a miss, and it may be difficult to recognize that it is an immediate short hit from the stop symbol of the identification symbol 1600b.

Further, in the lower part of the effect display device 1600, the hold display 1600c of the first special symbol (state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is waiting) and the hold display 1600d of the second special symbol (the second special symbol). The variable display is waiting). Specifically, the hold display 1600c of the first special symbol is displayed with a circle at the lower left of the effect display device 1600 by the number of holds, and the hold display 1600d of the second special symbol is the number of holds. Is displayed in □ at the lower right of the effect display device 1600. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol displayed on hold is started, the hold displays 1600c and 1600d for the start are deleted. However, the reserved display 1600c and 1600d of the special symbol may be continuously displayed after the start of the variable display of the special symbol displayed on hold until the variable display of the special symbol ends. ..

Further, in the upper left portion of the effect display device 1600, a state display indicating the current game state is executed. In this example, the current gaming state is a low-probability non-time-saving state, and "normal medium" corresponding to the low-probability non-time-saving state is displayed.

In addition, as a period before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, from the 500th variation display of the special symbol, every time the variation display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is stopped, At the upper part of the effect display device 1600, a count effect for notifying the number of times the special symbol is changed in the low probability state is executed. In this example, the relief notice image A of "500 fluctuations" corresponding to the 500th stop of the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is displayed is 500. .. By executing the count effect in this way, it is possible to play the game in anticipation that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state approaches 600 times.

Specifically, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol 1600a in the effect display device 1600 is stopped by transmitting the symbol confirmation command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, but it is low. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the probability state reaches 500, when the symbol confirmation command is transmitted, a relief count command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the symbol confirmation command. This relief count command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 every time the symbol confirmation command is transmitted while the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 500 to 600 times. The peripheral control board 1510 has a dedicated counter that counts the number of times the relief count command has been received, thereby storing the number of times the relief count command has been received. In this way, the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command is received, and by receiving the relief count command for the first time, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500 times. By recognizing that and receiving the relief count command for the second time, it is recognized that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state has reached 501, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is increased. It is possible to grasp how many times it is, and based on this grasped number of fluctuations, how many times the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is when the variation display of the decorative symbol 1600a in the effect display device 1600 is stopped. It is possible to execute a count effect to notify. Further, the relief count command is not limited to the above-described mode from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and each time the symbol confirmation command is transmitted while the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 500 to 600 times. A different command may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 each time. Even in this case, the peripheral control board 1510 recognizes that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state has reached 500 times by receiving the relief count command 1, and receives the relief count command 2 to receive the relief count command 2. It becomes possible to grasp how many times the special symbol has changed in the low-probability state, such as recognizing that the number of changes in the special symbol has reached 501 in the low-probability state. Becomes possible.

As shown in FIGS. 197 (B) and 197 (C), as a period before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the decorative symbol 1600a (decorative symbol 1600a Every time the variation display of the special symbol) is stopped, the stop display of the decorative symbol 1600a indicating the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is stopped and displayed as a count effect. In this example, when the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 597th, the relief notice of "597" as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1600a is provided on the condition that the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order. The symbol combination is selected and set, and the stop display is displayed instead of the normal stop symbol. This relief notice symbol combination can be displayed both when the reach effect is not executed and when the reach effect is executed, and when the reach effect is executed (when the reach is out of reach), the above-mentioned reach is displayed. As a result of variable display, the out-of-order symbols (combination of the same symbols with the left and right decorative symbols "0" to "9" but different intermediate decorative symbols; reach out-of-reach symbols) are once displayed. Although it is displayed, it is subsequently changed and displayed with a symbol combination for relief notice such as "597". In addition, from the 597th variation display of the special symbol, the "help mode" that is executed when the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 in the upper part of the effect display device 1600 is imminent. A relief notice image B indicating "Help is imminent!" Is displayed.

In addition, in the period before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the variation display in which the lottery result is excluded is executed as the variation display of the 600th special symbol. If there is a hold, the hold display 1600c of the first special symbol is a hold display of a special symbol indicating that the special symbol is on hold for executing the 600th variable display of the special symbol (FIG. 197). (Face hold) displayed at the lower left of (C) to (G) is displayed. As a result, in the period before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold display of the special symbol is executed, so that the "help mode" is set. The player can know in advance that he will rush.

As shown in FIGS. 197 (D) and 197 (E), when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 598th, the decorative symbol 1600a is provided on the condition that the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order. A combination of symbols for relief notice called "598" is selected and set as the stop symbol, and the stop is displayed instead of the normal stop symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 197 (F) and 197 (G), when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 599th, the decorative symbol 1600a is provided on the condition that the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order. A combination of symbols for relief notice called "599" is selected and set as the stop symbol, and the stop is displayed instead of the normal stop symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 197 (H) and 197 (I), when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 600th, the decorative symbol 1600a is provided on the condition that the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order. As the stop symbol, a symbol combination for relief notice of "600" is selected and set, and the stop is displayed instead of the normal stop symbol. In addition, when the 600th change display of the special symbol is stopped, a relief suggestion image "CHANGE!" Is displayed on the upper part of the effect display device 1600, indicating that the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state has reached 600 times. doing.

If the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit between the time when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state exceeds the 500th time and the number of times it reaches the 600th time (while the count effect is being executed). , The counting effect is finished at the end of the variable display of the special symbol that became the big hit.

As shown in FIG. 197 (J), when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low-probability state reaches 600 times, the low-probability time-saving state B is controlled and a dedicated time-saving state is given. In this example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 in the low probability state, the total number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 1300 until the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed 700 times thereafter. (Until the number of times is reached), the low-probability time-saving state B is controlled, and the period for controlling such a low-probability time-saving state B (700 times of special symbol variation display) is referred to as "help mode L". It is called. In the effect display device 1600, when the variation display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is stopped for the 600th time, the relief of "help mode L rush !!" is given so as to notify that the "help mode L" is entered. A confirmed image is displayed. In FIG. 197 (J), the face hold displayed in the lower left of FIGS. 197 (C) to (G) is moved / enlarged and displayed next to the character display "Help mode L rushed !!". So, it is clearly shown that the face hold corresponds to "help mode L".

As shown in FIG. 197 (K), if there is no reservation of the special symbol after entering the "help mode L", the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is not immediately started, and the effect display is displayed. At the bottom of the device 1600, a volume adjustment bar indicating the currently set volume level and a light amount adjustment bar indicating the currently set light amount level are displayed. In addition, the volume adjustment bar can change the memory display as the volume level is changed by operating the volume button, and the light amount adjustment bar changes the light amount level by operating the light amount button. Therefore, it is possible to change the memory display. Further, the volume level and the light amount level can be changed during the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) and the non-variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol). In this way, after the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is stopped, if the special symbol is not held and the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is not executed, the volume adjustment bar and the amount of light are not executed. By displaying the adjustment bar, it is possible to know that the volume level and the light intensity level can be changed during the period.

Further, after entering the "help mode L", the "help mode" indicating that the low probability time saving state B is being controlled is displayed on the upper left portion of the effect display device 1600 as a state display indicating the current gaming state. The image being rescued, which is "in L", is displayed. Further, in the low probability time saving state B, the game ball B can be easily accepted into the variable winning opening 2003. Therefore, in the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600, the variable winning opening 2003 located on the left side of the effect display device 1600. The arrow bar of "Left-handed!" Is displayed to instruct the launch to aim at. The relief image and the arrow bar can be continuously displayed even when the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is not executed, and is not hidden (or is not hidden) in the volume adjustment bar and the light amount adjustment bar described above. It is continuously displayed at the display position (which does not overlap), so that the player does not accidentally leave the seat in spite of the low probability time saving state B. In addition, the above-mentioned relief notice image B "helping soon!" And the relief suggestion image "CHANGE!" Continue to be displayed when the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is not executed. These images can be displayed, and these images are continuously displayed at the display positions that are not hidden (or do not overlap) in the volume adjustment bar and the light amount adjustment bar described above, and the player is in the low probability time saving state B up close. I try not to accidentally leave my seat.

As shown in FIG. 197 (L), after entering the "help mode L", there is no reservation of the special symbol, and the player enters various winning openings until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. When there is no ball, a demonstration effect (demonstration) that introduces the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is executed on the effect display device 1600. At the end of the demonstration production, a "depression prevention display" (not shown) is also executed to prevent the player from being too absorbed in the game. The above-mentioned rescued image and arrow bar can be continuously displayed even during the demo production, and are continuously displayed at the display positions that are not hidden (or do not overlap) in the above-mentioned demo production or the "depression prevention display". , The player is prevented from accidentally leaving the seat in spite of the low probability time saving state B. In addition, the above-mentioned relief notice image B "help is imminent!" And the relief suggestion image "CHANGE!" Can be continuously displayed during the demonstration production, and these images can also be displayed during the demonstration production and "immersion". It is continuously displayed in the display position that is not hidden (or does not overlap) by the "prevention display", so that the player does not accidentally leave the seat even though the low probability time saving state B is imminent. ..

As shown in FIG. 197 (M), when a ball is entered into various winning openings such as the variable winning opening 2003 after entering the "help mode L", the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a is executed. NS. If there is a ball entering various winning openings such as the variable winning opening 2003 during the execution of the demo production, only the demo production is ended at that point, and the relief image and the arrow bar are displayed continuously. ..

As shown in FIG. 197 (N), when the 700th decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) variation display is executed during the execution of the "help mode L", that is, during the control of the low probability time saving state B ( When the total number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 1300 times), in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600, the last decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) during the execution of "help mode L" A relief end image "Help last!" Is displayed to notify that the display is variable.

As shown in FIG. 197 (O), after the execution of the "help mode L", that is, after the 700th decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) variation display is stopped during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B (low-probability state). After the change display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is stopped for the 1300th time, the low-probability time-saving state B is terminated and the transition to the low-probability non-time-saving state is performed. In the upper left part of the device 1600, "normal" is displayed to notify that the current gaming state is a low-probability non-time saving state that has passed through the "help mode L". Further, in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600, a relief history image of "help L: once" is displayed so that it can be grasped from the outside that "help mode L" has been executed once. .. In addition, during the execution of "help mode L", that is, during the control of the low probability time saving state B, the lottery result is "big hit" before the 700th variation display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is executed. In the case of "", the low-probability time-saving state B is terminated and the game state shifts to the game state corresponding to the type of "big hit", so that the "help mode L" is terminated at that point.

(Restriction on counting effect when entering the second starting port)
As described above, the 500th to 600th special symbols are set before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of fluctuations other than the jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) in the low probability state reaches 600. As for the variable display of, every time the variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) is stopped, a count effect is executed to notify the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state. However, at the time of entering the ball at the second starting port 2005, the variable display of the second special symbol (decorative symbol) is executed in a manner in which it is difficult to recognize the entering ball. In addition, at the time when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is stopped, the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 is counted up, but the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is not increased. .. The limitation of the counting effect at the time of entering the second starting port 2005 will be described below.

In this example, in the game area 5a, in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting port 2004, and the second starting port 2005 are used as entry ports for the game ball B to enter. , The first grand prize opening 2006 is provided. Of these, with respect to the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005, since the upper part is always in the open state, it is possible to enter any of the balls in the low probability non-time saving state. However, for the first start port 2004, the game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 is accepted with a high probability, but for the second start port 2005, the center There is no possibility that the game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the accessory 2500 into the game area 5a will be accepted. Therefore, the game ball B hit on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will enter the first starting port 2004 with a higher probability than the second starting port 2005. Further, since the second starting port 2005 has the same shape as the general winning opening 2001 and is inconspicuous with respect to the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005 is purposely used in the low probability non-time saving state. It is difficult to notice even if there is a ball entering the second starting port 2005 without aiming to enter the ball.

Further, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, and when the ball enters the second starting port 2005, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. The variable display of the special symbol is executed in the order of entering the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005.

Further, in the low probability non-time saving state, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004 and the lottery of the first special symbol is missed, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the effect display device 1600 is used. The variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed. Further, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (decorative symbol) is set to about 5 to 10 seconds (in the case of disengagement without reach). That is, in a low-probability non-time saving state, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004 and the lottery of the first special symbol is missed, the first special symbol (decoration) is in an manner in which it is easy to recognize the entry. The variable display of the symbol) is being executed.

On the other hand, in a low-probability non-time saving state, when the ball enters the second starting port 2005 and the lottery of the second special symbol is missed or a small hit, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, but the effect display device. The execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern at 1600 is restricted. Further, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to about 0.1 second (in the case of deviation without reach), which is extremely shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. Further, during the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect sound accompanying the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 is output from the speaker, whereas during the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect sound is output. , The effect sound accompanying the variable display of the decorative pattern on the effect display device 1600 is not output from the speaker. That is, in a low-probability non-time saving state, when the ball enters the second starting port 2005 and the lottery of the second special symbol is missed or a small hit, the second special is in a manner in which it is difficult to recognize the entry. The variable display of the symbol is being executed. As a result, in the low-probability non-time saving state, it becomes difficult to notice the ball entering the second starting port 2005, and it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the number of times the special symbol changes in the low-probability state. In the low-probability non-time saving state, when the ball enters the second starting port 2005 and the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit, the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 is not restricted. , The output of the effect sound accompanying the variation with reach and the variation display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 is executed as in the case of the first special symbol.

In this example, as described above, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the symbol confirmation command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the symbol confirmation command to display the effect display device 1600. However, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500, when the symbol confirmation command is transmitted, the main control board 1310 is used separately from the symbol confirmation command. A rescue count command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. This relief count command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 every time the symbol confirmation command is transmitted while the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 500 to 600 times. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command is received so that the number of times the special symbol fluctuates in the low probability state can be grasped, and the decorative symbol in the effect display device 1600 can be grasped. When the fluctuation display is stopped, a count effect is executed to notify the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state.

Here, in the low-probability non-time saving state, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed, but when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped, the main relief count command is used. A relief count command A is transmitted from the control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the main control board 1310 counts up the relief count counter, and the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command A is received, so that the number of changes in the first special symbol in the low probability state is the number of times. When the variation display of the first special symbol (decorative symbol) is stopped, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is increased.

On the other hand, in the low probability non-time saving state, when the ball enters the second starting port 2005, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed, but when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped, the main control is performed as a relief count command. The relief count command B is transmitted from the board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the main control board 1310 counts up the relief count counter, and the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command B is received, so that the number of times the second special symbol changes in the low probability state is the number of times. However, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is stopped, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is not increased, and the actual number of fluctuations of the special symbol is used. I am trying to cause a gap. That is, when the ball enters the second starting port 2005 during the execution of the count effect, the special symbol is notified by the number of changes of the special symbol by the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 and the count effect on the peripheral control board 1510. Does not match the number of times the symbol changes. In this way, when the ball enters the second starting port 2005 during the execution of the count effect, the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 is counted up, but the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is increased. Therefore, it becomes difficult to notice the entry into the second starting port 2005, and it is difficult to grasp the actual number of fluctuations of the special symbol from the count effect.

Then, the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command B is received, and the number of times the relief count command B is received is counted by the count effect at a predetermined timing during the execution of the count effect. It is executed so as to add to the number of changes of the special symbol to be notified. In this example, among the 500th to 600th special symbol fluctuation displays during the execution of the count effect, the number of changes of the special symbol notified by the count effect is 520 times, 540 times, 560 times, 580 times as a predetermined timing. The number of times is set to 596 times, and when these times are reached, the number of times the relief count command B is received for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect (difference accumulated without adding). Is being executed to add. That is, for example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is 520 times, the number of balls entered into the second starting port 2005 during the 500th to 520th variation display of the special symbol is the "relief count". It corresponds to "the number of times the command B is received (difference accumulated without adding)", and the number of times is added to the number of times the special symbol is changed, which is notified by the count effect. As a result, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect may suddenly increase at once, so that the count effect can be paid attention to with expectation. The number of times the relief count command B has been received may be calculated by calculating the difference, or a counter that separately counts only the number of times the relief count command B has been received is provided, and the value is calculated at each predetermined timing. It may be a method of referencing and clearing.

In the above, at a predetermined timing, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is a predetermined number, the relief count command B is received for the number of changes of the special symbol notified by the count effect. In addition to this, when the number of times the special symbol fluctuates is the predetermined number of times, or the number of times the relief count command B is received reaches the predetermined number of times. When it is decided by lottery to add the number of times the relief count command B is received, or when a predetermined error or notification is resolved.

FIG. 198 is a specific example of the effect when the ball enters the second starting port 2005 during the execution of the count effect.

As shown in FIG. 198 (A), as a period before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is displayed from the 500th variation display of the special symbol. Every time the variation display is stopped, a count effect is executed on the upper part of the effect display device 1600 to notify the number of times the special symbol is changed in the low probability state. In this example, the relief notice image A of "505 fluctuation" is displayed, which corresponds to the 505th change of the special symbol when the fluctuation display is stopped and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 505. .. If a ball enters the second starting port 2005 during the variable display of the special symbol (decorative symbol 1600a), the hold display 1600d (second) of the second special symbol is placed at the lower part of the effect display device 1600. (A state in which the variable display of the special symbol is waiting) is displayed, but it is preferable that the hold display 1600d of the second special symbol is displayed in a less conspicuous manner than the hold display 1600c of the first special symbol. .. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the entry of the ball into the second starting port 2005 during the execution of the counting effect. Further, from the viewpoint of making it more difficult to notice the entry of the ball into the second starting port 2005 during the execution of the count effect, the hold display 1600d of the second special symbol may not be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

As shown in FIGS. 198 (B) and 198 (C), during the execution of the count effect, the variation display of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second starting port 2005 is displayed as the variation display of the 506th special symbol. When executing, the variation display of the decorative symbol 1600a is not executed until 0.1 seconds elapse as the variation time of the second special symbol, and the state in which the decorative symbol 1600a is stopped is continuously displayed. There is. However, with respect to the identification symbol 1600b displayed in the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600, the variation display is executed until 0.1 second elapses as the variation time of the second special symbol. When the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped, the execution is performed so as not to add to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect. That is, although the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 506th time (relief count counter = 506), the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect remains "505 fluctuation" and does not change. There is a "1" variation in unadded (difference).

As shown in FIGS. 198 (D) and 198 (E), during the execution of the count effect, the variation display of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first starting port 2004 is displayed as the variation display of the 507th special symbol. When it is executed, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol (decorative symbol 1600a) is stopped, it is executed so as to add to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect. That is, although the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 507th (relief count counter = 507), "506 fluctuation" is displayed as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect. Here, too, the state in which the unadded (difference) fluctuation of "1" exists is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 198 (F), when the variation display of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first starting port 2004 is executed as the 521st variation display of the special symbol during the execution of the count effect. Is executed so as to add to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect when the fluctuation of the first special symbol (decorative symbol 1600a) is stopped. In this example, although the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 521st (relief count counter = 521), "519 fluctuation" is displayed as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect. .. That is, here, there is a state in which "2" of unadded (difference) fluctuations exist.

As shown in FIGS. 198 (G) and 198 (H), the variation display of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first starting port 2004 is displayed as the variation display of the 522nd special symbol during the execution of the count effect. When executing, an increase effect image of "increase chance!" Is displayed on the upper part of the effect display device 1600, indicating that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is an increase. Then, during the variation display of the special symbol in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is 500 to 520 times, the number of balls entered into the second starting port 2005 is two (unadded (unadded (unadded)). When the fluctuation of the first special symbol (decorative symbol 1600a) is stopped, +2 is added to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect. That is, while the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 522nd (relief count counter = 522), the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is displayed as "520 fluctuation + 2 fluctuation!". Therefore, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol matches, and the fluctuation of the unadded (difference) becomes "0".

As shown in FIGS. 198 (I) and 198 (J), as the 523rd variation display of the special symbol during the execution of the count effect, the variation display of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first starting port 2004 is displayed. When it is executed, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol (decorative symbol 1600a) is stopped, it is executed so as to add to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect. That is, while the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 523rd (relief count counter = 523), "523 fluctuation" is displayed as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect. ..

As described above in detail, in the 597th to 600th special symbol variation display during the execution of the count effect, every time the variation display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is stopped, the count effect is set in a low probability state. The stop symbol (relief notice image B) of the decorative symbol 1600a indicating how many times the special symbol is changed is stopped and displayed. In such a period, even when the variation display of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second starting port 2005 is executed, the variation display of the decorative symbol 1600a is not executed, and the variation of the special symbol in the low probability state is executed. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1600a indicating the number of times is not displayed. However, except when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1600a indicating the actual number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief notice image B). It is set to stop and display with. For example, during the execution of the count effect, only the 598th special symbol variation display is the second special symbol variation display among the 579th to 600th special symbol variation displays, and the other special symbol variation displays. When is the variation display of the first special symbol, "597" → "599" as the stop symbol (relief notice image B) of the decorative symbol 1600a indicating the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state. "→" 600 "is stopped and displayed, and the counting effect is advanced except for the 598th special symbol variation display (second special symbol variation display). If all of the 597th to 600th special symbol fluctuation displays are the second special symbol fluctuation display during the execution of the count effect, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the number of times. The relief confirmation image as shown in FIG. 197 (J) is displayed in the 600th variation display of the special symbol without any stop symbol (relief notice image B) of the decorative symbol 1600a indicating the probability. .. In such a case, another surprise that "help mode L" is suddenly started can be given to the player, and even if the counting effect is not executed, it is possible to avoid a decrease in interest. can.

Further, as described above, during the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) or the non-variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol), the volume button is operated to change the volume level or the light amount button is pressed. It is possible to change the light intensity level by operating it. In this regard, when the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is stopped and the special symbol is not held, the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a is not executed and the volume button or the light amount button is operated. In addition, the operation sound is output from the speaker. On the other hand, when the variation display of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second starting port 2005 is executed during the execution of the count effect, the variation display of the decorative symbol 1600a is not executed. However, when the volume button or light amount button is operated, the operation sound is restricted from being output from the speaker. As a result, when the variable display of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second starting port 2005 is executed during the execution of the count effect, the game is played by the operation sound when the volume button or the light amount button is operated. The production sound inside is not disturbed. In addition, it is confirmed whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner depending on whether or not the operation sound is output from the speaker when the volume button or the light amount button is operated during the non-variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a. You can also do it.

In this example, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, and when the ball enters the second starting port 2005, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. , The variation display of each special symbol is executed in the order of entering the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005. On the other hand, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be configured to be executed at the same time. Specifically, the second starting port 2005 is arranged so as to enter a large number of balls in a low probability non-time saving state. At this time, the ball enters the second starting port 2005 frequently, but the fluctuation time of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second starting port 2005 is an extremely long time in the low probability non-time saving state. (For example, 180 seconds) is set. That is, since the variation display of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 2005 is not frequently executed in the low probability non-time saving state, the ball is entered into the first starting port 2004 and the first The mainstream of the game is to execute the variable display of the special symbol. Then, in such a configuration, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a on the effect display device 1600 is restricted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is restricted. When the game is stopped, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is not increased. In addition, the number of changes of the second special symbol that was not notified by the count effect is added to the number of changes of the special symbol notified by the count effect at a predetermined timing during the execution of the count effect. ing. As a result, the same effect as described above can be obtained. Then, after a special jackpot game (a jackpot that controls a non-time saving state after the jackpot game) or after the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 600 fluctuations after the power is turned on), the second starting port The fluctuation time of the second special symbol based on the entry into the ball in 2005 is shortened so that the variation display of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second starting port 2005 is frequently executed. As a result, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), which makes it possible to shift from the non-time saving state to the time saving state, but a special jackpot game (big hit). After the game, after a big hit that controls to a non-time saving state) or after the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 600 fluctuations after the power is turned on), the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600 times. (Relief count counter = 600) can be easily approached, and the game can be continued with expectation.

In the above, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be "normal hit" in the normal lottery in the low probability non-time saving state and the high probability non-time saving state is set to 0/100, and the other gaming states (high probability time saving state). , Low probability time saving state A, low probability time saving state B, low probability time saving state C) The probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be "normal hit" is set to 100/100. It is not limited, and the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be "normal hit" in the normal lottery in the low probability non-time saving state and the high probability non-time saving state is 1/100, and the other gaming states (high probability). In the normal lottery in the time saving state, the low probability time saving state A, the low probability time saving state B, and the low probability time saving state C), the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol becomes "normal hit" may be set to 100/100. .. In this case, the possibility that the game ball B is accepted by the variable winning opening 2003 is slightly increased in the low probability non-time saving state, and the frequency of transmitting the relief count command B increases (accompanied by the entry into the second starting port 2005). Relief count command B is sent not only when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, but also when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped due to the entry into the variable winning opening 2003), as described above. , The addition range in the effect of adding the number of times the relief count command B is received at a predetermined timing can be further increased, and the game entertainment can be further improved. Further, for those in which the game ball B may be accepted in the variable winning opening 2003 in a low probability non-time saving state, it is not always necessary to provide the second starting opening 2005 in which the upper side is always open, and the variable winning opening is variable. It is also possible to use only the relief count command B caused by the ball entering the mouth 2003 to add the number of times the ball is received at a predetermined timing.

Further, in the above, the gate 2002, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005 are provided in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a. The variable winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening 2005 may be provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a. Even in such a case, there is a possibility that a launch ball or the like that the player accidentally hits right in the normal time (low probability non-time saving state) enters the variable winning opening 2003 or the second starting opening 2005. , The relief count command B is transmitted even when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is stopped due to such a ball entry, and as described above, the number of times the relief count command B is received is added at a predetermined timing. By doing so, it is possible to obtain the same gaming effect as described above.

Further, in the above, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is stopped, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is not increased, and the actual number of fluctuations of the special symbol and the deviation are caused. , It is desirable to make the player aware of the deviation as much as possible. In view of this point, it is desirable that the player is configured to make it difficult for the player to see the general data display provided in the game hall in the normal posture in which the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. .. For example, since a general data display provided in a game hall is located above the pachinko machine 1, the door frame top unit 450 of the pachinko machine 1 is decorated so that the upper side cannot be seen through, and the game is played. It is preferable to design the amount of protrusion toward the user side (front side) so as to block the line of sight of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and make it difficult to see the data display. If the door frame top unit 450 is projected to the extent that the data display is difficult to see, it may be difficult to operate the staff call button provided on the general data display. It is desirable that the door frame 3 is provided with a staff call button so that the operation signal can be transmitted to the data display through the external terminal plate 558.

(Modification example)
Next, a modified example that is partially different from the above-mentioned production example will be described below. In the modified example, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (the number of fluctuations other than the jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is set to the relief count counter. It is the same in that it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), but the relief count counter is used. On the other hand, it is possible to count not only when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner but also when the special symbol is displayed in a non-variable manner.

Even in the modified example, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the variation display of the decorative symbol in the effect display device 1600 is stopped by transmitting the symbol confirmation command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, but the probability state is low. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in is 500, when the symbol confirmation command is transmitted, the relief count command A is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the symbol confirmation command. The relief count command A is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 every time the symbol confirmation command is transmitted while the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 500 to 600 times. The peripheral control board 1510 has a dedicated counter that counts the number of times the relief count command A has been received, thereby storing the number of times the relief count command A has been received. In this way, the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command A is received, and by receiving the relief count command for the first time, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500 times. By recognizing that this has been done and receiving the relief count command for the second time, it is recognized that the number of changes of the special symbol in the low probability state has reached 501 times, and so on. Is possible to grasp the number of times, and based on the grasped number of fluctuations, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is increased when the variation display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 is stopped. It is made feasible.

In the modified example, when a specific condition such as entering a winning opening (for example, general winning opening 2001) that does not execute the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, but the main control board 1310 does not execute the variable display. , The relief count counter is counting up. That is, in the modified example, since the variation display of the special symbol is not executed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not executed, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is counted by the relief count counter only when a specific condition is satisfied. It is possible to upload. At this time, the symbol confirmation command is not transmitted, but the relief count command B is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. The relief count command B is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 every time a specific condition is satisfied while the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 500 to 600 times. Then, the main control board 1310 counts up the number of times the special symbol is changed by the relief number counter, and the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command B is received. I try to grasp whether it is the second time, but when a specific condition is satisfied, I try not to increase the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect, and cause a deviation from the actual number of fluctuations of the special symbol. I am trying to do it. That is, during the execution of the count effect, when a specific condition is satisfied, the number of changes of the special symbol by the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 and the number of changes of the special symbol notified by the count effect on the peripheral control board 1510. And will not match. In this way, when a specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the count effect, the number of changes of the special symbol by the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 is counted up, but the number of changes of the special symbol notified by the count effect is counted. Since it does not increase, it becomes difficult to notice the establishment of the specific condition, and it is difficult to grasp the number of times the special symbol is changed by the relief number counter on the main control board 1310 from the count effect.

In the above, when the ball is entered into a winning opening (for example, general winning opening 2001) that does not execute the variable display of the special symbol, the specific condition is satisfied, but in addition to this, it is related to the entry into the winning opening. Instead, a specific condition may be satisfied when it is determined by lottery to count up the relief count counter.

Then, the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command B is received, and the number of times the relief count command B is received is counted by the count effect at a predetermined timing during the execution of the count effect. It is executed so as to add to the number of changes of the special symbol to be notified. In this example, among the 500th to 600th special symbol fluctuation displays during the execution of the count effect, the number of changes of the special symbol notified by the count effect is 520 times, 540 times, 560 times, 580 times as a predetermined timing. The number of times is set to 596 times, and when these times are reached, the number of times the relief count command B is received for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect (difference accumulated without adding). Is being executed to add. That is, for example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is 520 times, the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied during the 500th to 520th variation display of the special symbol is "the number of times the relief count command B is received". It corresponds to "minutes (differences accumulated without addition)", and the number of times is added to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect. As a result, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect may suddenly increase at once, so that the count effect can be paid attention to with expectation. The number of times the relief count command B has been received may be calculated by calculating the difference, or a counter that separately counts only the number of times the relief count command B has been received is provided, and the value is calculated at each predetermined timing. It may be a method of referencing and clearing.

In the above, at a predetermined timing, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is a predetermined number, the relief count command B is received for the number of changes of the special symbol notified by the count effect. In addition to this, when the number of times the special symbol fluctuates is the predetermined number of times, or the number of times the relief count command B is received reaches the predetermined number of times. When it is decided by lottery to add the number of times the relief count command B is received, or when a predetermined error or notification is resolved.

When the fluctuation of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is stopped, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is counted up by the relief count counter on the main control board 1310, and the relief is made toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal plate 558. Information about the number of changes in the special symbol by the number counter is output. Similarly, even when a specific condition is satisfied, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol by the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 is counted up, and the special symbol by the relief count counter is used toward the outside via the external terminal plate 558. Information about the number of fluctuations is output. As a result, when the specific condition is satisfied, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is counted up by the relief count counter, whereas the number of fluctuations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is not increased. From the count effect, it is not possible to grasp the number of times the special symbol changes due to the relief count counter on the main control board 1310, but from the outside, the change of the special symbol due to the relief count counter on the main control board 1310. It is possible to grasp how many times the number is. That is, the hall manager illegally tries to satisfy the specific condition by checking whether the number of fluctuations of the special symbol by the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 is abnormally increased. It is possible to monitor whether or not it has been damaged.

Further, when a special abnormality such as detection of a magnet or vibration occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the progress of the game is stopped. That is, when a special abnormality occurs, even if the ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005, the variation display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is not executed, and the main control board 1310 The information before the occurrence of a special abnormality (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol by the relief count counter on the main control board 1310) is retained without counting up the number of fluctuations of the special symbol by the relief count counter in. .. Similarly, when a special abnormality occurs, even if a specific condition is satisfied, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol by the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 is not counted up, and before the special abnormality occurs. Information (the number of times the special symbol is changed by the relief number counter on the main control board 1310) is retained. As a result, when a special abnormality occurs, it is possible to prevent an act of illegally counting up the number of times the special symbol is changed by the relief number counter on the main control board 1310.

[Example of production related to immediate short hit]
In this example, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, when the lottery result becomes "immediate short-time hit", the low-probability time-saving state C is controlled. Here, a specific production example until the lottery result becomes "immediate short hit" will be described with reference to FIG. 199.

As shown in FIG. 199 (A), when the variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the variation display of the decorative symbol 1600a is executed in the central portion of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 1600a are displayed in a variable manner until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command elapses, and the display is stopped in the order of left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol. do. As the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1600a, the symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed.

Further, when the variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the variation display of the identification symbol 1600b, which is smaller than the decorative symbol and is inconspicuous, is executed in the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, 〇 and × are displayed in a variable manner as the identification symbol 1600b until the fluctuation time corresponding to the variation pattern command elapses, and stop display is performed by either 〇 or ×. As the stop symbol of the identification symbol 1600b, 〇 is displayed when the lottery result is a hit (big hit, small hit, immediate short hit), and × is stopped and displayed when the lottery result is out of order. In addition to this example, when the purpose is to conceal as much as possible that the lottery result is an immediate short hit, the stop symbol of the identification symbol 1600b is when the lottery result is a big hit or a small hit. 〇, × may be stopped and displayed when the lottery result is an immediate short hit or a miss, and it may be difficult to recognize that it is an immediate short hit from the stop symbol of the identification symbol 1600b.

Further, in the lower part of the effect display device 1600, the hold display 1600c of the first special symbol (state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is waiting) and the hold display 1600d of the second special symbol (the second special symbol). The variable display is waiting). Specifically, the hold display 1600c of the first special symbol is displayed with a circle at the lower left of the effect display device 1600 by the number of holds, and the hold display 1600d of the second special symbol is the number of holds. Is displayed in □ at the lower right of the effect display device 1600. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol displayed on hold is started, the hold displays 1600c and 1600d for the start are deleted. However, the reserved display 1600c and 1600d of the special symbol may be continuously displayed after the start of the variable display of the special symbol displayed on hold until the variable display of the special symbol ends. ..

Further, in the upper left portion of the effect display device 1600, a state display indicating the current game state is executed. In this example, the current gaming state is a low-probability non-time-saving state, and "normal medium" corresponding to the low-probability non-time-saving state is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 199 (B) and 199 (C), during the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol), the ball enters the first starting port 2004 and the lottery result is "immediate short hit". If there is a hold, the hold display 1600c of the first special symbol is a hold display of a special symbol suggesting that the lottery result is "immediate short hit" (Fig. 199 (B)). , (Face hold displayed at the bottom left of (C)) is displayed. In addition, for the hold display of a special pattern, a comment in a balloon saying "Would you like to help?" Is displayed, making it easier to notice that the special pattern is on hold with the lottery result being "immediate short hit". .. As a result, in the period before the start of the variable display of the special symbol whose lottery result is "immediate short hit", the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold display of the special symbol is executed. You can know in advance that you will enter "help mode". Further, in this example, the holding display of the special symbol indicating that the special symbol for which the above-mentioned 600th variation display of the special symbol is to be executed is held (at the lower left of FIGS. 197 (C) to (G)). The displayed face hold) and the hold display of a special pattern (displayed at the lower left of FIGS. 199 (B) and (C)) suggesting that the lottery result is a hold of a special pattern that is "immediate short hit". The common "face hold" image is used in (face hold), but is it intended to be the "600th special symbol variation display" depending on the presence or absence of a balloon comment "Would you like to help?" It is possible to distinguish whether the intention is "immediate short hit". If it is possible to more reliably distinguish between the one intended for "600th special symbol variation display" and the one intended for "immediate short hit", even though it is a reserved image with a common symbol. It is preferable to make the color patterns different, or to make the reserved images of patterns having different shapes from each other.

In this example, as a specific example of displaying a hold display of a special symbol suggesting that it is a hold of a special symbol that is an "immediate short hit", when the ball is entered into various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2004, By transmitting a pre-judgment command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 receives pre-judgment information (whether or not to make a big hit, a small hit, an immediate short hit, or a big hit if a big hit. Type, type of small hit when it is a small hit, type of immediate short hit when it is an immediate short hit, big hit, small hit, and when it is not an immediate short hit, it is executed by the effect display device 1600. The reach effect is executed as the game effect, or the mode type (variable pattern type) of the game effect to be executed is specified. Then, when it is specified that the immediate short hit will be made as the preliminary judgment information, when the hold display is displayed, the special symbol is displayed in the hold display of the special pattern, and the lottery result is the "immediate short hit". We are executing a look-ahead effect that suggests that the information is on hold. Regarding the hold display of a special pattern, the pattern may be different depending on the type of immediate short hit. In addition, regarding the hold display of a special pattern, it is possible to display it as pre-judgment information not only when it is specified that an immediate short hit will occur, but also when it does not result in an immediate short hit. Even if the hold display of the pattern is displayed, it is possible to execute a ghost effect that does not result in an immediate short hit. Further, in the case of displaying the hold display of the special pattern by specifying that it will be an immediate short hit as the pre-judgment information, the hold display of the special picture may be immediately displayed on the effect display device 1600. After displaying a normal hold image (such as the above-mentioned "○" hold image) on the effect display device 1600, a predetermined change effect accompanied by voice, vibration, character image, etc. is performed at a predetermined timing, and such a change effect is performed. After that, the normal hold image may be changed to the hold display of a special pattern. In addition, when it is not specified as the pre-judgment information that an immediate short hit will occur, after displaying a normal hold image (such as the hold image of "○" mentioned above) once, the voice, vibration, and character are displayed at a predetermined timing. It is also possible to perform a predetermined change effect accompanied by an image or the like, and after such a change effect, perform a ghost effect that maintains the normal hold image (does not change to the hold display of a special pattern).

As described above, when it is specified that the immediate short hit will be made as the preliminary judgment information, it is suggested that the lottery result is the hold of the special symbol that becomes the "immediate short hit" when the hold display is displayed. Although the look-ahead effect is executed, the look-ahead effect that suggests such an "immediate short hit" is restricted not to be executed for a part of the period. Specifically, in the low-probability non-time saving state, when an immediate short hit occurs, until the fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (in this example, 20 times, 40 times, or 100 times). During the period, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C, but after the stop of the immediate short hit symbol corresponding to such an immediate short hit, the execution of the look-ahead effect suggesting "immediate short hit" is restricted. .. Here, as game states other than the low-probability non-time-saving state, in the high-probability non-time-saving state, the high-probability time-saving state, the low-probability time-saving state A, the low-probability time-saving state B, and the low-probability time-saving state C, an immediate short-time hit is obtained. In this case, it is set as an "immediate short hit symbol invalid period" that is not controlled to the low probability time saving state C. That is, in the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short-hit symbol corresponding to the immediate short-hit is stopped, the lottery result may be "immediate short-hit", but the lottery result is "immediate short-hit". Therefore, it is not possible to control the low probability time saving state C again. In addition, when an immediate short hit occurs during the immediate short hit symbol invalid period, the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol of the special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400, while the effect is produced. In the variable display of the decorative symbol on the display device 1600, the immediate short hit symbol is not stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and the symbol different from the immediate short hit symbol (in this example, the off symbol) is stopped and displayed. There is. In this respect, in this example, "immediate short hit" is suggested even when it is specified as the preliminary judgment information that the immediate short hit is to be performed after the stop of the immediate short hit symbol corresponding to the immediate short hit. By not executing the look-ahead effect, it is possible to reduce the feeling of loss for the immediate short hit being invalid without knowing that the immediate short hit is invalid during the immediate short hit symbol invalid period.

In addition, a gaming state other than the low-probability non-time-saving state set as the "immediate short-time symbol invalid period" that is not controlled by the low-probability time-saving state C (high-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state A, low) In the probability time saving state B and the low probability time saving state C), the look-ahead effect suggesting "immediate short hit" is also executed for the hold of the first starting port 2004, which will be displayed in a variable manner after the final variable display. It is restricted. For example, when the time is controlled to the low probability time saving state C of 100 times corresponding to the immediate short hit A, four game balls are set in the first starting port 2004 during the variation display of the special symbol of the last round (100th time). Is entered, and even if there is a hold of a special symbol whose lottery result is "immediate short hit", "immediate short hit" is given to all holds that occurred during the final round of fluctuation display. The suggestive look-ahead effect is not executed. However, with regard to the hold of the first start port 2004, which will be displayed in a variable manner after the final variable display, the variable display will be performed after the end of the "immediate short hit symbol invalid period". Although the execution of the look-ahead effect that suggests "immediate short hit" is restricted, if the immediate short hit occurs after the end of the "immediate short hit symbol invalid period", in the variable display of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400. , The immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the special symbol, and the immediate short hit symbol (combination of the symbols of "547") is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1600a in the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a on the effect display device 1600. ) Is to be stopped and displayed. As a result, during the "immediate short hit symbol invalid period", the pre-reading effect suggesting "immediate short hit" is not executed, but after the end of the "immediate short hit symbol invalid period", the normal game is in progress. It is possible to make the player grasp the occurrence of the immediate short hit as in the case of the immediate short hit.

In the low-probability non-time saving state, when an immediate short hit occurs, until the fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times, 40 times, or 100 times in this example). Although it is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C, it shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving state after the fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times. Then, after the immediate short hit symbol corresponding to the immediate short hit is stopped, after the variation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times, when it is specified as the preliminary judgment information that the immediate short hit is to be performed, "immediately". It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that suggests "short hit". As a result, pay attention to whether or not a look-ahead effect suggesting "immediate short hit" is executed after the variation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times after the immediate short hit symbol corresponding to the immediate short hit is stopped. Can be made to.

In addition, as a look-ahead effect, when it is specified that an immediate short hit is to be made as advance judgment information, when the hold displays 1600c and 1600d are displayed, a special symbol whose lottery result is "immediate short hit" is held. In addition to executing the look-ahead effect that suggests that there is, when it is specified that it will be a big hit as pre-judgment information, when the hold display 1600c, 1600d is displayed, the lottery result will be a "big hit". We are executing a look-ahead effect that suggests that the information is on hold. Then, after the immediate short hit symbol corresponding to the immediate short hit is stopped, the execution of the look-ahead effect suggesting "immediate short hit" is restricted, while the execution of the look-ahead effect suggesting "big hit" is restricted. Not done. In this way, after the immediate short hit symbol corresponding to the immediate short hit is stopped, the entire look-ahead effect is not restricted, and only the execution of the look-ahead effect suggesting "immediate short hit" is restricted. , It is possible to pay attention to whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 199 (D) and 199 (E), when the variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) whose lottery result is "immediate short hit" is executed, when the display is stopped, the decorative symbol 1600a is stopped as "547". ”(A specific symbol among the out-of-order symbols) is stopped and displayed, and the symbols attached to the numerical symbols are stopped and displayed so that they are the same symbol.

As shown in FIG. 199 (F), in the low-probability non-time-saving state, when the lottery result is "immediate short-time hit", the low-probability time-saving state C is controlled and the time-saving is given. In this example, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, the lottery result is "immediate short-time hit", so that the low-probability time-saving state C is controlled until the variation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times. The period for controlling such a low-probability time-saving state C is called "help mode S". In the effect display device 1600, when the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) whose lottery result is "immediate short hit" is stopped, the "help mode S" is notified to enter the "help mode S". The relief confirmation image "S rush !!" is displayed. The predetermined number of times is 100 times when the lottery result is "immediate short hit A", 40 times when the lottery result is "immediate short hit B", and "immediate short hit C". Is set to 20 times.

As shown in FIG. 199 (G), if there is no reservation of the special symbol after entering the "help mode S", the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is not immediately started, and the effect display is displayed. At the bottom of the device 1600, a volume adjustment bar indicating the currently set volume level and a light amount adjustment bar indicating the currently set light amount level are displayed. In addition, the volume adjustment bar can change the memory display as the volume level is changed by operating the volume button, and the light amount adjustment bar changes the light amount level by operating the light amount button. Therefore, it is possible to change the memory display. Further, the volume level and the light intensity level can be changed during the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) and the non-variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol). In this way, after the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is stopped, if the special symbol is not held and the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is not executed, the volume adjustment bar and the amount of light are not executed. By displaying the adjustment bar, it is possible to know that the volume level and the light intensity level can be changed during the period.

Further, after entering the "help mode S", in the upper left portion of the effect display device 1600, as a state display indicating the current game state, a "help mode" indicating that the low probability time saving state C is being controlled is being performed. The image being rescued, "S in progress," is displayed. Further, in the low probability time saving state C, the game ball B can be easily accepted into the variable winning opening 2003. Therefore, in the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600, the variable winning opening 2003 located on the left side of the effect display device 1600. The arrow bar of "Left-handed!" Is displayed to instruct the launch to aim at. The relief image and the arrow bar can be continuously displayed even when the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is not executed, and is not hidden (or is not hidden) in the volume adjustment bar and the light amount adjustment bar described above. It is continuously displayed at the display position (which does not overlap), so that the player does not accidentally leave the seat in spite of the low probability time saving state C.

As shown in FIG. 199 (H), after entering the "help mode S", there is no reservation of the special symbol, and the player enters various winning openings until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. When there is no ball, a demonstration effect (demonstration) that introduces the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is executed on the effect display device 1600. At the end of the demonstration production, a "depression prevention display (not shown)" is also executed to prevent the player from being too absorbed in the game. The above-mentioned rescued image and arrow bar can be continuously displayed even during the demo production, and are continuously displayed at the display positions that are not hidden (or do not overlap) in the above-mentioned demo production or the "depression prevention display". , The player is prevented from accidentally leaving the seat in spite of the low probability time saving state C.

As shown in FIG. 199 (I), when a ball is entered into various winning openings such as the variable winning opening 2003 after entering the "help mode S", the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a is executed. NS. If there is a ball entering various winning openings such as the variable winning opening 2003 during the execution of the demo production, only the demo production is ended at that point, and the relief image and the arrow bar are displayed continuously. ..

As shown in FIG. 199 (J), when the "help mode S" is being executed, that is, during the control of the low probability time saving state C, the predetermined number of times (for example, when the lottery result is "immediate short hit A"). When the variation display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) of the 100th time is executed, the variation of the last decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) during the execution of the "help mode S" in the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600. The relief end image "Help last!" Is displayed to notify that it is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 199 (K), 100 times after the execution of the "help mode S", that is, during the control of the low probability time saving state C (for example, when the lottery result is "immediate short hit A"). After the variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) of the second time) is stopped, the low-probability time-saving state C is terminated and the state shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving state. Is displaying "normal" to notify that it is in a low-probability non-time saving state that has undergone "help mode S". Further, in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600, a relief history image of "help S: once" is displayed so that it can be grasped from the outside that "help mode S" has been executed once. .. In addition, during the execution of the "help mode S", that is, during the control of the low probability time saving state C, the lottery result is ". When it becomes a "big hit", the low-probability time-saving state C is terminated and the game state shifts to the game state corresponding to the type of "big hit", so that the "help mode S" is terminated at that point. ..

[About the count suppression period]
In this example, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief count counter) is counted, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600. When the number of times (relief count counter = 600) is reached, the low probability time saving state B is controlled. Here, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed, only the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is counted, and in the high probability state, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is counted. Not set as "count suppression period". On the other hand, in the low-probability state, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is counted regardless of whether it is in the non-time-saving state or the time-saving state. Is set as a "count suppression period" that is not subject to counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. The count suppression period set as a part of the low-probability non-time saving state among such low-probability states will be described with reference to FIG. 200. FIG. 200 is a time chart showing a count suppression period.

First, in the count valid period, when the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variation display of the special symbol is executed in the low probability non-time saving state, the relief count counter on the main control board 1310. Is updated to approach the relief count counter = 600, which is controlled to the low probability time saving state B by counting up. On the other hand, in the count suppression period, when the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variation display of the special symbol is executed in the low probability non-time saving state, the relief count counter on the main control board 1310. Is not counted up, so it is updated so as not to approach the relief count counter = 600, which is controlled to the low probability time saving state B.

In addition, a plurality of types of count suppression periods are provided. Regarding the count suppression period A, the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 when the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variation display of the special symbol is executed in the low probability non-time saving state. I try to keep the relief count counter without counting up. Further, regarding the count suppression period B, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and the variation display of the special symbol is executed in the low probability non-time saving state, the relief on the main control board 1310 is performed. The number of times counter is counted down and updated so as to move away from the relief number of times counter = 600, which is controlled to the low probability time saving state B. That is, since the count suppression period B moves away from the relief count counter = 600, which is controlled to the low probability time saving state B, and then it becomes difficult to reach the relief count counter = 600, the count suppression period A Is also a disadvantageous period.

Further, in the count suppression period, when it is determined by lottery to generate the count suppression period in the low probability non-time saving state, the start condition of the count suppression period is satisfied and the count suppression period is generated. In this example, when it is decided to generate the count suppression period by lottery, the count suppression period is suddenly generated by not notifying the fact. Therefore, at the start of the count suppression period, it is difficult to notice whether or not the count suppression period has started. However, when it is decided by the lottery to generate the count suppression period, a notification to that effect may be given. Further, in this example, when it is determined by lottery to generate the count suppression period in the low probability non-time saving state, the start condition of the count suppression period is satisfied. In the probability non-time saving state, the start condition of the count suppression period may be satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 200 times).

Further, after the start of the count suppression period, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the end condition of the count suppression period is satisfied, and the count suppression period is terminated. However, in addition to this, for example, after the start of the count suppression period, when it is determined by lottery to end the count suppression period, the end condition of the count suppression period may be satisfied.

As shown in FIG. 200, during the count valid period in the low-probability non-time saving state, each time the ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the main control board 1310 The relief count counter is counting up. In this example, when the variation display A to C of the special symbol is executed, the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 is counted up, and the relief count counter changes from 450 to 451 to 452.

In addition, during the count valid period in the low-probability non-time saving state, every time the ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the pachinko machine is passed through the external terminal unit 558. Information about the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is output to the outside of 1. Specifically, a hall computer and an external information device provided on the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 are connected via an external terminal unit 558. Then, the external display device displays information on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, information on the number of big hits, and the like. In this example, when the variable display A to C of the special symbol is executed, the information regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is output to the external display device, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external display device is 450 →. It has changed from 451 to 452.

In addition, during the count valid period in the low-probability non-time saving state, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the change display of the special symbol is executed, the effect display device 1600 corresponds to the change pattern. When executing the effect to be performed, the normal effect is executed.

Next, in the count suppression period A, which is started when the start condition of the count suppression period A is satisfied, each time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the main The relief count counter on the control board 1310 is not counted up, and the relief count counter is maintained. In this example, in the count suppression period A, when the fluctuation display D, E, etc. of the special symbol is executed, the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 is not counted up, and the relief count counter is maintained at 452. I have to.

Further, in the count suppression period A, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the change display of the special symbol is executed, the information regarding the number of changes of the special symbol is output to the external display device. doing. In this example, when the fluctuation display D, E, etc. of the special symbol is executed in the count suppression period A, the information regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is output to the external display device and displayed on the external display device. The number of fluctuations of the symbol changes from 453 to 454 to (+1 for each fluctuation).

Further, in the count suppression period A, in the effect display device 1600, the variation display D of the special symbol which is the first variation display of the special symbol, the variation display E of the special symbol which is the variation display of the second and subsequent special symbols, and the like. And, different productions are performed. Here, in the count suppression period A, during the execution of the variation display D of the special symbol during which the first variation display of the special symbol is being executed, the count valid period is executed when the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is executed. A common effect that is the same in terms of the variable display A to C of the special symbol in the above and the background image is executed. As described above, since the fact is not clearly notified at the start of the count suppression period A, it is difficult to recognize whether the count is the count valid period or the count suppression period A, and the count is valid from the count valid period. It can also make it difficult to notice that a disadvantageous period has begun.

On the other hand, during the count suppression period A, during the execution of the fluctuation display E of the special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the special symbol from the second time onward, the count is suppressed when the effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is executed. A pinch effect 1 (specific effect) suggesting that the period is A is being executed. Here, as the pinch effect 1, a background image (a background image different from the variable display A to C of the special symbol during the count valid period) and a mini character suggesting that the count suppression period A is displayed, or a count suppression period is displayed. An effect such as outputting a sound or light emission suggesting that the image is A is being executed. As described above, it can be inferred that the count suppression period A is the count suppression period A because it suggests that fact except for the first variation display of the special symbol. Further, in the count suppression period A, by not executing the pinch effect 1 only during the execution of the first variation display of the special symbol, it is possible to prevent the start of the count suppression period A from being noticed early. ..

In the above, the pinch effect 1 (specific effect) is not executed at the start of the count suppression period A (during the execution of the variation display D of the special symbol), but the pinch is performed from the start of the count suppression period A. The effect 1 may be executed.

Next, in the count valid period when the end condition of the count suppression period A is satisfied and started, each time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the main control is performed. The relief count counter on the board 1310 is counted up. In this example, when the variation display F to H of the special symbol is executed, the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 is counted up, and the relief count counter changes from 453 to 454 to 455.

In addition, during the count valid period, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the change display of the special symbol is executed, the information regarding the number of changes of the special symbol is output to the external display device. ing. In this example, when the variable display F to H of the special symbol is executed during the count valid period, the information regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is output to the external display device, and the special symbol displayed on the external display device is displayed. The number of fluctuations has changed from 463 to 464 to 465.

Further, during the count valid period, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the effect display device 1600 executes the effect corresponding to the variation pattern. In addition, the normal production is performed.

Next, in the count suppression period B, which is started when the start condition of the count suppression period B is satisfied, each time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the main The relief count counter on the control board 1310 is counting down. In this example, in the count suppression period B, when the fluctuation display I of the special symbol is executed, the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 is counted down, and the relief count counter changes from 454 to (-1 for each fluctuation). It's changing.

Further, in the count suppression period B, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the change display of the special symbol is executed, the information regarding the number of changes of the special symbol is output to the external display device. doing. In this example, when the variation display I of the special symbol is executed in the count suppression period B, the information regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is output to the external display device, and the variation of the special symbol displayed on the external display device is output. The number of times has changed from 466 to (+1 for each change).

Further, in the count suppression period B, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the change display of the special symbol is executed, the effect corresponding to the change pattern is executed. When executing the effect corresponding to, the common effect that is the same in terms of the variable display F to H of the special symbol during the count valid period and the background image is executed. As described above, when the count suppression period B is executed, it is difficult to recognize whether the count is the count validity period or the count suppression period B because the fact is not clearly notified. Can also make it difficult to notice that a disadvantageous period is being carried out.

Next, in the count valid period when the end condition of the count suppression period B is satisfied and started, each time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the main control is performed. The relief count counter on the board 1310 is counted up. In this example, when the variation display J of the special symbol is executed, the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 is counted up, and the relief count counter is changed to 443.

In addition, during the count valid period, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the change display of the special symbol is executed, the information regarding the number of changes of the special symbol is output to the external display device. ing. In this example, when the special symbol variation display J is executed during the count validity period, information regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is output to the external display device, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external display device. Has changed to 476.

Further, during the count valid period, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the effect display device 1600 executes the effect corresponding to the variation pattern. In addition, the normal production is performed.

As described above, the information regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external display device does not match the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 when the count suppression period A or the count suppression period B occurs. It becomes. That is, even if the information regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external display device is visually recognized, the number of fluctuations of the relief count counter is compared with the relief count counter = 600 which is controlled to the low probability time saving state B. I can't figure out if there is one. Therefore, the information regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed on the external display device is only a guideline for the relief count counter = 600 that is controlled to the low probability time saving state B, and what number of fluctuations the relief count counter is. Can give fun to guess.

Further, in the count suppression period B, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the relief count counter on the main control board 1310 is counted down. For the count suppression period B, the low probability non-time saving state is being controlled after the relief count counter = 600 is being controlled, rather than the low probability non-time saving state being controlled before the relief count counter = 600 is reached. It is configured so that the execution rate is higher (the probability that the start condition is satisfied is higher). Here, the relief count counter counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol during the count valid period in the low-probability non-time-saving state, and when the relief count counter = 600 is reached in the low-probability non-time-saving state, the low probability is low. It is controlled to the time saving state B. Then, in the low-probability time-saving state B, when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed 700 times without becoming a big hit, the low-probability non-time-saving state is controlled again and the relief count counter can be counted up. In this respect, in the low-probability non-time-saving state after reaching the relief count counter = 600 and controlling to the low-probability time-saving state B, since the control of the low-probability time-saving state B has already been acquired once, the second time. It is more difficult than the first time to acquire the low-probability time-saving state B. That is, in the low-probability non-time-saving state after reaching the relief count counter = 600 and controlling to the low-probability time-saving state B, by increasing the execution rate of the count suppression period B, the low-probability time-saving state B is lower than the first time. It becomes difficult to obtain the item, and excessive relief can be suppressed.

Further, the count suppression period A and the count suppression period B can be forcibly terminated by the operation of the hall manager. Specifically, in the count suppression period A and the count suppression period B, when the power is turned on with RAM clear after the power is turned off, the count is returned to the valid period. As a result, when the count suppression period A and the count suppression period B are generated and the player avoids the game, the count suppression period A and the count suppression period B are terminated by the operation of the hall manager. By returning to the valid period of the count, it is possible to newly participate in the game with expectation.

[Immediate short hit symbol invalid period]
In this example, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, when an immediate short-time hit occurs, the low-probability time-saving state C is controlled. Here, as game states other than the low-probability non-time-saving state, in the high-probability non-time-saving state, the high-probability time-saving state, the low-probability time-saving state A, the low-probability time-saving state B, and the low-probability time-saving state C, an immediate short-time hit is obtained. In this case, it is set as an "immediate short hit symbol invalid period" that is not controlled to the low probability time saving state C. In addition, a part of the low-probability non-time-saving state is also set as an "immediate short-time hit symbol invalid period" that is not controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C when an immediate short-time hit occurs. The immediate short hit symbol invalid period set as a part of such a low-probability non-time saving state will be described with reference to FIG. 201. FIG. 201 is a time chart showing an immediate short hit symbol invalid period.

First, in the immediate short hit symbol valid period, in the low probability non-time saving state, when the immediate short hit is reached, the low probability time saving state C is controlled. On the other hand, in the immediate short-time symbol invalid period, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, when the immediate short-time hit occurs, the low-probability non-time-saving state is set as the gaming state before the immediate short-time hit without controlling to the low-probability time-saving state C. I try to keep the time saving.

In addition, there are a plurality of types of immediate short hit symbol invalid periods. Regarding the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A, the start condition is the same and the end condition is different from that of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B.

In addition, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period, when it is determined by lottery to generate the immediate short hit symbol invalid period in the low probability non-time saving state, the start condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period is satisfied and immediately. A short hit symbol invalid period is generated. In this example, when it is decided by lottery to generate an immediate short hit symbol invalid period, the immediate short hit symbol invalid period is suddenly generated by not notifying that fact. Therefore, at the start of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period, it is difficult to notice whether or not the immediate short hit symbol invalid period has started. However, when it is decided by the lottery that an immediate short hit symbol invalid period will occur, a notification to that effect may be given. Further, in this example, when it is determined by lottery to generate an immediate short hit symbol invalid period in a low probability non-time saving state, the start condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period is satisfied, but other than this. Further, for example, in a low-probability non-time saving state, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 200 times), the start condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period may be satisfied.

Further, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times) after the start of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A, the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A The end condition of is satisfied, and the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is ended. On the other hand, after the start of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, when it is determined by lottery to end the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, the end condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B is satisfied and immediately. The short hit symbol invalid period B has ended.

If an immediate short hit occurs during the immediate short hit symbol validity period, the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol of the special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400, and the effect is produced. In the variable display of the decorative symbol on the display device 1600, the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. On the other hand, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period, when the immediate short hit occurs, the immediate short hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400, while the effect is produced. In the variable display of the decorative symbol on the display device 1600, the immediate short hit symbol is not stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and the symbol different from the immediate short hit symbol (in this example, the off symbol) is stopped and displayed. There is. In this way, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period, when the immediate short hit occurs, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 does not indicate that fact, so that the immediate short hit becomes invalid. It is possible to reduce the feeling of loss for things.

As shown in FIG. 201, during the immediate short hit symbol validity period in the low-probability non-time saving state, the variation display A to C of the special symbol is executed every time the ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005. ing. During such an immediate short hit symbol validity period, information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal unit 558. That is, in the immediate short hit symbol valid period, when the immediate short hit is obtained, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, but the immediate short hit is not obtained. In this case, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. Further, a hall computer and an external information device provided on the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 are connected via the external terminal portion 558. Then, the external display device displays information on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, information on the number of big hits, information on the number of immediate short hits, and the like. In this way, by outputting the information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol to the hall computer, the hall manager can know that the immediate short hit has occurred, and the immediate short hit symbol can be displayed to the external display device. By outputting the information regarding the stop of the player, the player can know that the short hit has been made immediately.

Further, in the immediate short hit symbol valid period in the low probability non-time saving state, every time the ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and the variation display A to C of the special symbol is executed, the effect display device 1600 In, when the effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is executed, the normal effect is executed.

Next, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A, which is started when the start condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is satisfied, the special symbol changes each time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005. Display D, E, etc. are being executed. In such an immediate short hit symbol invalid period A, information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol cannot be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal portion 558. That is, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A, when the immediate short hit occurs, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A, even if the immediate short hit occurs, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol is not output to the hall computer, so that the immediate short hit is obtained. Since the hall manager cannot know that and does not output the information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol to the external display device, the player cannot know that the immediate short hit has occurred.

Further, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A, in the effect display device 1600, the variation display D of the special symbol which is the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation of the special symbol which is the variation display of the special symbol after the second time. A different effect is performed on the display E and the like. Here, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A, during the execution of the variation display D of the special symbol during the execution of the first variation display of the special symbol, when the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is executed, Immediate short hits A common effect that is the same in terms of the variable display A to C of the special symbol during the valid period of the symbol and the background image is executed. In this way, at the start of the immediate short-hit symbol invalid period A, since that fact is not clearly notified, it is necessary to recognize whether the immediate short-hit symbol is valid or the immediate short-hit symbol is invalid. It is difficult to make it difficult to notice that a period more disadvantageous than the immediate short hit symbol validity period has started.

On the other hand, during the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A, during the execution of the variation display E of the special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol from the second time onward, when the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is executed. , The pinch effect 2 (invalidity response effect) suggesting that the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is being executed. Here, as the pinch effect 2, a background image (a background image different from the variation display A to C of the special symbol in the immediate short hit symbol valid period) and a mini character suggesting that the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is displayed. Or, the effect of outputting a voice or light emission suggesting that the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is being executed. In this way, since the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A suggests that fact except for the first change display of the special symbol, it can be inferred that it is the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A. .. In addition, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A, the start of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is noticed early by not executing the pinch effect 2 only during the execution of the first variation display of the special symbol. Can be prevented.

In the above, the pinch effect 2 (invalidation response effect) is not executed at the start of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A (during the execution of the special symbol variation display D), but the immediate short hit symbol invalid period The pinch effect 2 may be executed from the start of A.

Further, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the end condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is satisfied, and the immediate short hit symbol is invalid. Although the period A is terminated, in the variation display (for example, 4 variations) of the special symbol several times before the end condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is satisfied, the effect display device 1600 immediately terminates. A count display indicating the remaining number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol until the end of the short hit symbol invalid period A is displayed. As a result, the game can be continued with expectation until the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A ends.

Next, in the immediate short hit symbol valid period, which is started when the end condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is satisfied, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner each time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005. F to H are being executed. During such an immediate short hit symbol validity period, information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal unit 558. That is, in the immediate short hit symbol valid period, when the immediate short hit is obtained, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, but the immediate short hit is not obtained. In this case, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, during the immediate short hit symbol validity period, each time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variation display F to H of the special symbol is executed, the effect display device 1600 corresponds to the variation pattern. When executing the effect to be performed, the normal effect is executed.

Next, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, which is started when the start condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B is satisfied, the special symbol changes each time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005. Display I and the like are being executed. In such an immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol cannot be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal portion 558. That is, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, when the immediate short hit occurs, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, even if the immediate short hit occurs, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol is not output to the hall computer, so that the immediate short hit is obtained. Since the hall manager cannot know that and does not output the information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol to the external display device, the player cannot know that the immediate short hit has occurred.

Further, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, in the effect display device 1600, the variation display I of the special symbol which is the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation of the special symbol which is the variation display of the special symbol after the second time. The display and the display are different. Here, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, during the execution of the variation display I of the special symbol during the execution of the first variation display of the special symbol, when the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is executed, Immediate short hits A common effect that is the same in terms of the variable display F to G of the special symbol during the valid period of the symbol and the background image is executed. In this way, at the start of the immediate short-hit symbol invalid period B, since that fact is not clearly notified, it is necessary to recognize whether the immediate short-hit symbol is valid or the immediate short-hit symbol is invalid. It is difficult to make it difficult to notice that a period more disadvantageous than the immediate short hit symbol validity period has started.

On the other hand, during the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol from the second time onward, when the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is executed, it is immediate. A pinch effect 2 (invalidity response effect) suggesting that the short hit symbol is invalid period B is being executed. Here, as the pinch effect 2, a background image (a background image different from the variation display A to C of the special symbol in the immediate short hit symbol valid period) and a mini character suggesting that the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B is displayed. Or, the effect of outputting a voice or light emission suggesting that the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B is being executed. In this way, since the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B suggests that fact except for the first change display of the special symbol, it can be inferred that it is the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B. .. In addition, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A, the start of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B is noticed early by not executing the pinch effect 2 only during the execution of the first variation display of the special symbol. Can be prevented. The pinch effect 2 suggesting that the immediate short hit symbol is invalid period B is the same as the pinch effect 2 suggesting that the immediate short hit symbol is invalid period A, but the effect contents may be different. ..

In the above, the pinch effect 2 (invalidation response effect) is not executed at the start of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B (during the execution of the special symbol variation display I), but the immediate short hit symbol invalid period The pinch effect 2 may be executed from the start of B.

Further, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, when it is determined by lottery to end the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, the end condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B is satisfied, and the immediate short hit symbol is invalid. Although the period B is terminated, before the end condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B is satisfied, the effect display device 1600 executes the period B before the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A ends. The count display is not displayed. This is because the end condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B is when it is determined by lottery to end the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, so the end timing of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B is set in advance. This is because it cannot be determined.

Next, in the immediate short hit symbol valid period, which is started when the end condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B is satisfied, when the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, the variation display of the special symbol is displayed. Running J. During such an immediate short hit symbol validity period, information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal unit 558. That is, in the immediate short hit symbol valid period, when the immediate short hit is obtained, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, but the immediate short hit is not obtained. In this case, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short hit symbol is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, during the immediate short hit symbol validity period, when the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variation display J of the special symbol is executed, the effect display device 1600 displays the effect corresponding to the variation pattern. When executing, the normal production is executed.

As described above, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the end condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is satisfied, and the immediate short hit symbol is invalid. The winning symbol invalid period A is terminated, but when it is decided by lottery to terminate the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A before the end condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is satisfied, it is immediate. The end condition of the short hit symbol invalid period A may be satisfied, and the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A may be forcibly terminated. In this example, in the variation display (for example, 4 variations) of the special symbol several times before the end condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is satisfied, the immediate short hit symbol invalid period is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The count display indicating the remaining number of fluctuation display of the special symbol until the end of A is displayed, but when the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is forcibly terminated, the count display does not end. , Even if the count display is in the middle, it is forcibly terminated.

Further, the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A and the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B can be forcibly terminated by the operation of the hall manager. Specifically, in the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A and the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, if the power is turned on with RAM clear after the power is turned off, the immediate short hit symbol valid period is restored. ing. As a result, if the player avoids the game due to the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A or the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B occurring, the immediate short hit symbol is invalidated by the operation of the hall manager. It suffices to end the period A and the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B, and by returning to the immediate short hit symbol valid period, it is possible to newly participate in the game with expectation.

As described above, some of the low-probability non-time-saving states among the low-probability states are set as a "count suppression period" that is not subject to counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. Then, among the count suppression periods, the count suppression period A is mainly when the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variable display of the special symbol is executed in the low probability non-time saving state. The relief count counter on the control board 1310 is not counted up, and the relief count counter is maintained. In such a count suppression period A, an "immediate short hit symbol invalid period" that is not controlled to the low probability time saving state C may occur at the same time even if the immediate short hit occurs. A case where such a count suppression period A and an immediate short hit symbol invalid period are used in combination will be described with reference to FIG. 202. FIG. 202 is a time chart showing the time when the count suppression period A and the immediate short hit symbol invalid period are used together.

As shown in FIG. 202, since the immediate short hit symbol valid period is generated at the same time in the count valid period, the low probability time saving state is obtained when the immediate short hit occurs in such a count valid period. It is controlled by C.

Further, in the count suppression period A, the immediate short hit symbol invalid period is generated at the same time. That is, in the count suppression period A, when the immediate short hit occurs, the low probability non-time saving state is maintained as the gaming state before the immediate short hit without controlling to the low probability time saving state C. There is. Here, during the count suppression period A and the immediate short hit symbol invalid period, during the execution of the fluctuation display D of the special symbol during which the first fluctuation display of the special symbol is being executed, the effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is executed. At that time, a common effect that is the same in terms of the variable display A to C of the special symbol during the count valid period and the background image is executed. On the other hand, during the count suppression period A and the immediate short hit symbol invalid period, during the execution of the fluctuation display E of the special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the special symbol from the second time onward, the effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is produced. At the time of execution, the pinch effect 2 (invalidity response effect) suggesting that the count suppression period A and the immediate short hit symbol invalid period are executed is executed.

On the other hand, in the count suppression period B, the immediate short hit symbol invalid period is not generated at the same time. That is, in the count suppression period B, when an immediate short hit occurs, the low probability time saving state C is controlled. Here, in the count suppression period B, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the change display of the special symbol is executed, the effect corresponding to the change pattern is executed. When executing the effect corresponding to the pattern, a common effect that is the same in terms of the variable display F to H of the special symbol during the count valid period and the background image is executed.

As described above, regarding the count suppression period B, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and the variation display of the special symbol is executed in the low probability non-time saving state, the main control board 1310 The number of relief counters in the above is counted down and updated so as to move away from the number of relief counters = 600, which is controlled to the low probability time saving state B. That is, since the count suppression period B moves away from the relief count counter = 600, which is controlled to the low probability time saving state B, and then it becomes difficult to reach the relief count counter = 600, the count suppression period A Is also a disadvantageous period. Then, if the immediate short hit symbol invalid period is generated at the same time in the count suppression period B, not only is it difficult to reach the relief count counter = 600, but even if the immediate short hit is reached, it is low. It is no longer controlled to the probability time saving state C, and the probability of obtaining the low probability time saving state (low probability time saving state B, low probability time saving state C) becomes extremely low. In this respect, in this example, it is possible to prevent an extremely disadvantageous period from occurring by not generating the immediate short hit symbol invalid period at the same time in the count suppression period B.

[Priority of RTC production]
In this example, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 acquires calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) to control the peripheral. The current calendar information and the current time information are set in the RAM of the IC. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, using such RTC (real-time clock) information, the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is performed every time a predetermined period (for example, 3 hours) elapses from the power-on. Apart from that, the RTC production is being performed. In this RTC effect, a dedicated effect different from the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is executed by the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp emission and the voice output. Therefore, it is possible to give a different enjoyment from the symbol variation effect (the effect corresponding to the variation pattern), and it can be expected that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 will be high.

The RTC effect and the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) both execute the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp light emission, and the sound output, and are used for the effect. The production elements used are duplicated (at least partly duplicated). Here, since the RTC effect is executed every time a predetermined period (for example, 3 hours) elapses from the power-on, the execution timing of the RTC effect and the low probability time saving state B are controlled. The execution timing of the effect before and after the variation display of the symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) may overlap. Similarly, the execution timing of the effect before and after the immediate short hit, which is controlled to the low probability time saving state C, may overlap. In such a case, priority is given to the execution of the RTC effect, and the effect before and after the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) and a part of the effect before and after the immediate short hit is restricted. I try to do it. Here, first, the RTC effect and the effect before and after the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) will be explained, and then the variation display of the special symbol will be 600 times (relief count counter = 600). A case where the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied before reaching the limit, and a case where the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied after the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) will be described. Then, after explaining the effect before and after the immediate short hit, when the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied before the immediate short hit, or when the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied after the immediate short hit. Will be described.

FIG. 203 is a time chart showing the progress of the RTC effect. As shown in FIG. 203, the RTC effect is not executed before the predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) elapses from the power-on and the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, and the symbol variation effect (for example, 3 hours). The effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern) is set to the normal effect state that can be executed. In the normal effect state, when the symbol variation (for example, the symbol variation A) is executed, the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is executed as the symbol variation effect. Then, in the symbol variation effect, the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp emission, the sound emission, and the like are set to the variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310. Based on the fluctuation pattern, the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp light emission, the sound light emission, and the like are executed.

In addition, in the effect display device 1600, as a symbol variation effect, a variation display of a decorative symbol is executed, and an effect display suggesting a lottery result is executed. Further, with respect to the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are made to operate at a predetermined timing in conjunction with the effect display suggesting the lottery result. Further, in the lamp light emission, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit light at a predetermined timing in conjunction with the effect display suggesting the lottery result. Further, in the audio output, the BGM is output from the speaker during the effect display suggesting the lottery result.

Next, at t1, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) has elapsed from the power-on and the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, the RTC effect state for executing the RTC effect is set. When t1 arrives during the execution of the symbol variation B, the execution of the symbol variation effect is restricted, and the RTC effect is preferentially executed. Then, in the RTC effect, the effect content for RTC is executed with respect to the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp light emission, the sound light emission, and the like. The RTC effect state continues to be executed from t1 when the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied until a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) elapses until t4 where the end condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, and t4. In, the RTC effect state is shifted to the normal effect state.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600 first executes an RTC countdown display that counts down (for example, 3 → 2 → 1) from t1 to t2 until the start of the RTC effect. The RTC countdown display starts at t1 without depending on the symbol variation and ends at t2 when 3 seconds have passed from t1 without depending on the symbol variation. That is, the RTC countdown display is executed for 3 seconds from t1 to t2. Then, from t2 to tx, the RTC start display for notifying the start of the RTC effect is executed. The RTC start display starts at t2 without depending on the symbol fluctuation, is executed at least from t2 to t3 when 5 seconds have passed, and depends on the symbol fluctuation, the symbol fluctuation (symbol fluctuation) is first performed after t3. It is designed to end at the time of tx when D) starts. That is, the RTC start display is executed for a variable time of 5 seconds + α from t2 to tx. If there is a period in which the symbol variation (symbol variation effect) is not started after t3, the RTC start display is finished after waiting for the symbol variation D to start after t3.

Then, the effect display device 1600 executes the effect display for RTC, which is not executed except for the RTC effect, from tx to t4 when the end condition of the RTC effect is satisfied. Since the effect display for the RTC starts after waiting for the first symbol variation (symbol variation D) to start after t3, the symbol variation D is to be started as soon as possible after t3. You can play the game with motivation.

Further, regarding the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are sequentially operated from t2 to t3 as the RTC start display is executed by the effect display device 1600. Specifically, from t2 to t3, the RTC start operation of the movable body A, the RTC start operation of the movable body B, and the RTC start operation of the movable body C are sequentially executed. On the other hand, among t1 to t4 in the RTC effect state, the movable bodies A to C are not used in the RTC effect except for the period of t2 to t3, and the movable bodies A to C have a symbol variation effect (variation). The operation specified in the effect corresponding to the pattern) is being executed.

Further, in the lamp light emission, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit light in the light emission pattern for RTC during the period from t1 to t4 as the RTC effect is executed. .. Further, in the audio output, the BGM for the RTC is output from the speaker during the period from t1 to t4 as the RTC effect is executed.

(Restrictions on help mode L production)
FIG. 204 is a time chart showing the progress of the effect before and after the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). As shown in FIG. 204, when the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) is executed after the power is turned on with the RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed. Shifts from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B at t5, which is the time when the symbol variation B is stopped. Further, before t5, the help mode L precursor effect state for executing the "help mode L precursor effect" suggesting that the "help mode L" is imminent is set, whereas from t5. , The state has shifted to the help mode L effect state in which the "help mode L effect" indicating that the "help mode L" is being executed is executed. In this example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low-probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), the low-probability time-saving state B is set until the fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches 700 times. It is controlled, and the period for controlling such a low-probability time-saving state B is called "help mode L". Then, the help mode L effect state is at the time of t6 when the 700th symbol variation X is stopped if the big hit is not obtained until the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability time saving state B reaches 700 times. Then, in the case of a big hit, at the time of t6 when the symbol fluctuation that becomes the big hit is stopped, the low probability time saving state B is changed to the low probability non-time saving state, and the help mode L production state is changed to the normal production state. It is designed to move to.

In the above-mentioned effect example, when the variation display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 is stopped, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is reached until the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500 to 600 times. The count effect of notifying how many times is executed is executed, and such a count effect corresponds to the "help mode L precursor effect". Further, after starting the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, the effect display device 1600 displays "in the help mode L" indicating that the low-probability time-saving state B is being controlled. The display corresponds to "help mode L production".

Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, before t5, a countdown is performed until the start of the help mode L effect (for example, a count effect that notifies how many times the special symbol changes in the low probability state). ) Help mode L The effect display for the precursor is being executed. Then, after t5, the effect display for the help mode L indicating that the help mode L is being executed (controlling the low probability time saving state B) is being executed. Even if there is a period (for example, between the symbol variation C and the symbol variation D) in which the symbol variation (symbol variation effect) is not started after t5, the effect for the help mode L is produced in that period. The display is continuously executed.

Further, regarding the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are not used in the help mode L precursor effect before t5 and the help mode L effect after t5, and the symbol variation effect (variation). The operation specified in the effect corresponding to the pattern) is being executed.

Further, in the lamp light emission, before t5, along with the execution of the help mode L precursor effect, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are the light emission patterns for the help mode L precursor. After t5, with the execution of the help mode L effect, the light is emitted in the light emission pattern for the help mode L. Further, in the audio output, the BGM for the help mode L precursor is output from the speaker according to the execution of the help mode L precursor effect before t5, and the help mode L effect is output after t5. Along with the execution of, the BGM for the help mode L is output from the speaker.

FIG. 205 is a time chart showing the progress of the effect when the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied before the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). In this example, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) elapses from the power-on and the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied at t1, the help mode L precursor effect state or the help mode L effect state. It is determined whether or not there is a help mode L precursor effect state or a normal effect state other than the help mode L effect state. In the above, the case where it is determined to be in the normal effect state at the time of t1 is described, and in the following, the case where it is determined to be the help mode L precursor effect state or the help mode L effect state at the time of t1 is described. Explaining.

As shown in FIG. 205, when t1 that satisfies the start condition of the RTC effect arrives, if the help mode L precursor effect state is reached, the help mode L precursor effect state is shifted to the RTC effect state. There is. Further, when the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state is executed after the power is turned on with the RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed, the symbol variation B is executed. At the time of t5, which is the stop time of, the low-probability non-time-saving state is shifted to the low-probability time-saving state B.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600 counts down until the start of the help mode L effect at t1 (for example, a count effect that notifies how many times the special symbol changes in the low probability state). Help mode L The effect display for the precursor is being executed, and from t1 to t5 when the symbol fluctuation B in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). During that time, the effect display for the help mode L precursor is continuously executed. Then, after t5, since the low-probability time-saving state C is controlled, the effect display for the help mode L indicating that the help mode L is being executed (the low-probability time-saving state B is being controlled) is displayed. Running. That is, the RTC countdown display and the RTC start display as the RTC effect are not executed between t1 to tx.

Further, in the effect display device 1600, from tx to t4 when the end condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, in addition to the effect display for the help mode L, the effect display for RTC that is not executed except for the RTC effect. Is running. The effect display for the RTC is started after waiting for the first symbol variation (symbol variation D) to start after t3. In such a state, for example, the effect display for RTC is executed using the entire display area, and "in the help mode L" indicating that the low probability time saving state B is being controlled in the upper left portion of the display area. The effect display for the help mode L is executed so as to display.

Further, regarding the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are sequentially operated from t2 to t3 even though the RTC start display is not executed by the effect display device 1600. Specifically, from t2 to t3, the RTC start operation of the movable body A, the RTC start operation of the movable body B, and the RTC start operation of the movable body C are sequentially executed. In this way, when t2 for starting the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C arrives during the execution of the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state. The operation specified in the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is terminated, and the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C is forcibly started. Then, during the execution of the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C, when t5, which is the stop time of the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), arrives. The RTC start operation of the moving bodies A to C being executed is continuously executed without ending. Further, among t1 to t4 in the RTC effect state, for t2 to t3, the operation specified in the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is not executed for the movable bodies A to C. , Except for the period of t2 to t3, the movable bodies A to C are not used in the RTC effect, and the operation specified by the symbol variation effect (the effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is applied to the movable bodies A to C. Is running.

Further, in the lamp light emission, the RTC countdown display and the RTC start display are not executed on the effect display device 1600 during t1 to t3, but the lamps are mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3. The LED is set to emit light in the light emission pattern for RTC, and continuously emits light in the light emission pattern for RTC until t4. That is, between t1 to t3, the game board 5 and the door are executed even though the effect display for the help mode L precursor and the effect display for the help mode L are executed in the effect display device 1600. The LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates of the frame 3 do not emit light in the light emission pattern for the help mode L precursor or the light emission pattern for the help mode L. Further, in the audio output, the BGM for RTC is output from the speaker even though the RTC countdown display and the RTC start display are not executed on the effect display device 1600 during t1 to t3, and t4. Until then, the BGM for RTC is continuously output. That is, between t1 to t3, although the effect display for the help mode L precursor and the effect display for the help mode L are executed on the effect display device 1600, the help mode is performed from the speaker. The BGM for the L precursor and the BGM for the help mode L are not output.

As described above, during the execution of the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C, t5, which is the stop of the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state, is set. When it arrives, the RTC start operation of the moving bodies A to C being executed is continuously executed without ending. As a result, the RTC start display on the effect display device 1600 is not executed between t1 to t2, but the RTC start operations of the movable bodies A to C are all executed without being terminated in the middle. , It is possible to notify the outside that the RTC effect is started, and it is possible to prevent the start of the RTC effect from being unrecognized.

Further, the RTC effect and the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) both execute the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp light emission, and the voice output. The production elements used for the production are duplicated (at least partly overlapped). At this time, when t1 is reached when the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, if the help mode L precursor effect state is reached, the effect display of the effect display device 1600 used in the help mode L precursor effect is described. While it is being executed, the operation of the movable bodies A to C used in the help mode L precursor effect, the lamp emission, and the voice output are restricted from being executed. That is, the execution of some of the effect elements used in the help mode L precursor effect is restricted. Similarly, when t5, which is the stop time of the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state, arrives after t1, the help mode L effect is produced. Although it is the timing to execute, the effect display of the effect display device 1600 used in the help mode L effect is executed, whereas the movements of the movable bodies A to C used in the help mode L effect, Execution of lamp emission and audio output is restricted. That is, the execution of some of the effect elements used in the help mode L effect is restricted. As a result, from the time when t1 that the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp light emission, and the sound output can be used in the RTC effect. It is possible to notify that the RTC effect is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the execution of the RTC effect from being unrecognized.

On the other hand, from the time when t1 when the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, the effect display of the effect display device 1600 is used in the help mode L precursor effect and the help mode L effect. Since the effect display device 1600 is provided in the central portion of the game board 5, it is the part that the player pays the most attention to. For such an effect display device 1600, the help mode L precursor effect display Since the help mode L effect display is executed, it is not overlooked that the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) and is controlled to the low probability time saving state B. It is possible to prevent the start of control of the low probability time saving state B from being unrecognized.

The movable bodies A to C described above include a movable body that the player can contact and a movable body that the player cannot contact. Specifically, the movable body A is the back-up front effect unit 3300 attached to the game board 5, and the movable body B is the back-bottom front effect unit 3400 attached to the game board 5, and these are movable. The body is inaccessible to the player. On the other hand, the movable body C is an effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 attached to the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, and is accessible to the player. Then, the movable bodies A to C sequentially execute the RTC start operation during the execution of the RTC effect, so that each movable body operates. Here, the movable bodies A to C are monitored to see if they operate normally, but if an abnormality that does not operate normally occurs with respect to the movable body C, the movable body is mischievous by the player. There is a high possibility that C will not operate normally. Therefore, if an abnormality occurs in which the movable body C does not operate normally during the execution of the RTC effect, the effect element used in the help mode L precursor effect or the help mode L effect as a penalty to the player. Of these, the period during which some of the executions are restricted is extended. That is, even after the end condition of the RTC effect is satisfied at t4, the execution of some of the effect elements used in the help mode L precursor effect and the help mode L effect is restricted. I have to. As a penalty for the player, the degree of restriction may be increased in a state where the execution of some of the production elements used in the help mode L precursor effect and the help mode L effect is restricted. For example, during the execution of the RTC effect, the execution of the effect display of the effect display device 1600, which is not restricted as the help mode L precursor effect or the help mode L effect, may be restricted. .. In this way, if an abnormality occurs in which the movable body C does not operate normally during the execution of the RTC effect, a penalty is given to the player so that the player does not mischief the movable body C. I can work on it.

FIG. 206 is a time chart showing the progress of the effect when the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied after the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). As shown in FIG. 206, when t1 that satisfies the start condition of the RTC effect arrives, if the help mode L effect state is reached, the help mode L effect state is shifted to the RTC effect state. Further, when t1 that satisfies the start condition of the RTC effect arrives, it is already controlled to the low probability time saving state B.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600 executes the effect display for the help mode L indicating that the help mode L is being executed (controlling the low probability time saving state B) at the time of t1. However, during t1 to t2, in addition to the effect display for the help mode L, the RTC countdown display that counts down (for example, 3 → 2 → 1) until the start of the RTC effect is executed. Further, between t2 to tx, the RTC start display for notifying the start of the RTC effect is executed. Then, between tx and tx, from tx to t4 when the end condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, in addition to the effect display for the help mode L, it is not executed except for the RTC effect. The effect display for RTC is being executed. The effect display for the RTC is started after waiting for the first symbol variation (symbol variation D) to start after t3. In such a state, for example, the RTC countdown display, the RTC start display, and the effect display for the RTC are executed using the entire display area, and the low probability time saving state B is being controlled in the upper left portion of the display area. The effect display for the help mode L is executed so as to display the "help mode L in progress" shown.

Further, regarding the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are sequentially operated from t2 to t3 as the RTC start display is executed by the effect display device 1600. Specifically, from t2 to t3, the RTC start operation of the movable body A, the RTC start operation of the movable body B, and the RTC start operation of the movable body C are sequentially executed. In this way, when t2 for starting the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C arrives during the execution of the symbol variation B during the execution of the help mode L (during the control of the low probability time saving state B), The operation specified by the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is terminated, and the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C is forcibly started. Further, among t1 to t4 in the RTC effect state, for t2 to t3, the operation specified in the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is not executed for the movable bodies A to C. , Except for the period of t2 to t3, the movable bodies A to C are not used in the RTC effect, and the operation specified by the symbol variation effect (the effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is applied to the movable bodies A to C. Is running.

Further, in the lamp light emission, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit light in the light emission pattern for RTC during the period from t1 to t4 as the RTC effect is executed. .. That is, between t1 to t3, even though the effect display for the help mode L is executed by the effect display device 1600, it is mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3. The LED is not emitting light in the emission pattern for help mode L. Further, in the audio output, the BGM for the RTC is output from the speaker during the period from t1 to t4 as the RTC effect is executed. That is, between t1 to t3, the BGM for the help mode L is not output from the speaker even though the effect display for the help mode L is executed by the effect display device 1600.

As described above, the RTC effect and the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) both execute the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp emission, and the sound output. Therefore, the production elements used in the production are duplicated (at least a part of them are duplicated). At this time, when t1 that satisfies the start condition of the RTC effect arrives, if the help mode L effect state is reached, the effect display of the effect display device 1600 used in the help mode L effect is executed. On the other hand, the operation of the movable bodies A to C used in the help mode L effect, the lamp light emission, and the voice output are restricted. That is, the execution of some of the effect elements used in the help mode L effect is restricted. As a result, from the time when t1 that the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp light emission, and the sound output can be used in the RTC effect. It is possible to notify that the RTC effect is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the execution of the RTC effect from being unrecognized.

On the other hand, during the execution of the help mode L (during the control of the low-probability time saving state B), from the time when t1 for which the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied arrives, the effect display of the effect display device 1600 is the help mode L. It is used in the production. Since the effect display device 1600 is provided in the central portion of the game board 5, it is the part that the player pays the most attention to. For such an effect display device 1600, the help mode L effect display is displayed. Since it is executed, it is not overlooked that the help mode L is being executed (the low probability time saving state B is being controlled), and the help mode L is being executed (the low probability time saving state B is being controlled). It is possible to prevent the fact from not being recognized.

(Restrictions on help mode S production)
FIG. 207 is a time chart showing the progress of the production before and after the immediate short hit. As shown in FIG. 207, when the symbol variation B that is an immediate short hit is executed, the low probability non-time saving state is changed to the low probability time saving state C at t5 when the symbol variation B is stopped. There is. Further, before t5, during the execution of the symbol variation B, which is an immediate short hit, the help mode S is executed, which suggests that the "help mode S" is entered. In contrast to the precursor effect state, from t5, the state shifts to the help mode S effect state in which the "help mode S effect" indicating that the "help mode S" is being executed is executed. In this example, by making an immediate short hit, the low-probability time-saving state C is controlled until the variation display of the special symbol reaches 20 to 100 times, and such a low-probability time-saving state C. The period of control is called "help mode S". Then, the help mode S effect state is when the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability time saving state C reaches 20 to 100 times, and when the big hit is not obtained, the 20th to 100th symbol fluctuation X is stopped. At a certain t6, if a big hit occurs, at the time of t6 when the symbol fluctuation that becomes the big hit is stopped, the low-probability time-saving state C shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving state, and the help mode S production state It is designed to shift to the normal production state.

In the above-mentioned effect example, as a symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) that becomes an immediate short hit, a variation display of the decorative symbol is executed, and an effect display that stops at the stop symbol of the immediate short hit is executed. , Such a symbol variation effect that becomes an immediate short hit corresponds to "help mode S precursor effect". Further, after starting the control of the low-probability time-saving state C, the effect display device 1600 displays "during help mode S" indicating that the low-probability time-saving state C is being controlled. The display corresponds to "help mode S production".

Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, before t5, during the execution of the symbol variation B, which is an immediate short hit, the effect display for the help mode S precursor is executed as the symbol variation effect. Then, after t5, the effect display for the help mode S indicating that the help mode S is being executed (controlling the low probability time saving state C) is being executed. Even if there is a period (for example, between the symbol variation C and the symbol variation D) in which the symbol variation (symbol variation effect) is not started after t5, the effect for the help mode S is produced in that period. The display is continuously executed.

Further, for the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are not used in the help mode S effect after t5, and the operation specified in the symbol variation effect (the effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is executed. doing.

Further, in the lamp light emission, before t5, it is mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 with the execution of the help mode S precursor effect during the execution of the symbol variation B which is an immediate short hit. The LED is set to emit light in the light emitting pattern for the help mode S precursor, and after t5, the light is emitted in the light emitting pattern for the help mode S with the execution of the help mode S effect. Further, in the voice output, the BGM for the help mode S precursor is output from the speaker in accordance with the execution of the help mode S precursor effect during the execution of the symbol variation B which is an immediate short hit before t5. Then, after t5, the BGM for the help mode S is output from the speaker along with the execution of the help mode S effect.

FIG. 208 is a time chart showing the progress of the effect when the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied before the immediate short hit. In this example, at the time of t1 when a predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) elapses from the power-on and the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, the help mode S precursor effect state or the help mode S effect state. It is determined whether or not there is a help mode S precursor effect state or a normal effect state other than the help mode S effect state. In the above, the case where it is determined to be in the normal effect state at the time of t1 is described, and in the following, the case where it is determined to be the help mode S precursor effect state or the help mode S effect state at the time of t1 is described. Explaining.

As shown in FIG. 208, when t1 that satisfies the start condition of the RTC effect arrives, if the help mode S precursor effect state is reached, the help mode S precursor effect state is shifted to the RTC effect state. There is. Further, when the symbol variation B that is an immediate short hit is executed, the low probability non-time saving state is shifted to the low probability time saving state C at t5 when the symbol variation B is stopped.

Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, at the time of t1, the effect display for the help mode S precursor is being executed as the symbol variation effect, and from t1 when the symbol variation B, which is an immediate short hit, is stopped. Until a certain t5, the effect display for the help mode S precursor is continuously executed. Then, after t5, since the low-probability time-saving state C is controlled, the effect display for the help mode S indicating that the help mode S is being executed (the low-probability time-saving state C is being controlled) is displayed. Running. That is, the RTC countdown display and the RTC start display as the RTC effect are not executed between t1 to tx.

Further, in the effect display device 1600, from tx to t4 when the end condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, in addition to the effect display for the help mode S, the effect display for RTC that is not executed except for the RTC effect. Is running. The effect display for the RTC is started after waiting for the first symbol variation (symbol variation D) to start after t3. In such a state, for example, an effect display for RTC is executed using the entire display area, and "during help mode S" indicating that the low probability time saving state C is being controlled in the upper left portion of the display area. The effect display for the help mode S is executed so as to display.

Further, regarding the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are sequentially operated from t2 to t3 even though the RTC start display is not executed by the effect display device 1600. Specifically, from t2 to t3, the RTC start operation of the movable body A, the RTC start operation of the movable body B, and the RTC start operation of the movable body C are sequentially executed. In this way, when t2, which starts the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C, arrives during the execution of the symbol variation B, which is an immediate short hit, it is designated by the symbol variation effect (the effect corresponding to the variation pattern). The operation to be performed is terminated, and the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C is forcibly started. Then, during the execution of the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C, when t5, which is the stop time of the symbol variation B which is an immediate short hit, arrives, the RTC start operation of the moving bodies A to C being executed is performed. I try to continue running without quitting. Further, among t1 to t4 in the RTC effect state, for t2 to t3, the operation specified in the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is not executed for the movable bodies A to C. , Except for the period of t2 to t3, the movable bodies A to C are not used in the RTC effect, and the operation specified by the symbol variation effect (the effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is applied to the movable bodies A to C. Is running.

Further, in the lamp light emission, the RTC countdown display and the RTC start display are not executed on the effect display device 1600 during t1 to t3, but the lamps are mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3. The LED is set to emit light in the light emission pattern for RTC, and continuously emits light in the light emission pattern for RTC until t4. That is, between t1 to t3, the game board 5 and the door are executed even though the effect display for the help mode S precursor and the effect display for the help mode S are executed on the effect display device 1600. The LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates of the frame 3 do not emit light in the light emission pattern for the help mode S precursor or the light emission pattern for the help mode S. Further, in the audio output, the BGM for RTC is output from the speaker even though the RTC countdown display and the RTC start display are not executed on the effect display device 1600 during t1 to t3, and t4. Until then, the BGM for RTC is continuously output. That is, between t1 to t3, although the effect display for the help mode S precursor and the effect display for the help mode S are executed on the effect display device 1600, the help mode is performed from the speaker. The BGM for the S precursor and the BGM for the help mode S are not output.

As described above, during the execution of the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C, when t5, which is the stop time of the symbol variation B which is an immediate short hit, arrives, the RTC of the moving bodies A to C being executed The start operation is continuously executed without ending. As a result, the RTC start display on the effect display device 1600 is not executed between t1 to t2, but the RTC start operations of the movable bodies A to C are all executed without being terminated in the middle. , It is possible to notify the outside that the RTC effect is started, and it is possible to prevent the start of the RTC effect from being unrecognized.

Further, the RTC effect and the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) both execute the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp light emission, and the voice output. The production elements used for the production are duplicated (at least partly overlapped). At this time, when t1 is reached when the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, if the help mode S precursor effect state is reached, the effect display of the effect display device 1600 used in the help mode S precursor effect is described. While it is being executed, the operation of the movable bodies A to C used in the help mode S precursor effect, the lamp emission, and the voice output are restricted from being executed. That is, the execution of some of the effect elements used in the help mode S precursor effect is restricted. Similarly, when t5, which is the stop time of the symbol variation B, which is an immediate short hit, arrives after t1, it is the timing to execute the help mode S effect, but it is used in the help mode S effect. While the effect display of the effect display device 1600 is executed, the operation of the movable bodies A to C used in the help mode S effect, the lamp light emission, and the sound output are restricted. That is, the execution of some of the effect elements used in the help mode S effect is restricted. As a result, from the time when t1 that the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp light emission, and the sound output can be used in the RTC effect. It is possible to notify that the RTC effect is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the execution of the RTC effect from being unrecognized.

On the other hand, from the time when t1 when the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, the effect display of the effect display device 1600 is used in the help mode S precursor effect and the help mode S effect. Since the effect display device 1600 is provided in the central portion of the game board 5, it is the part that the player pays the most attention to. For such an effect display device 1600, the help mode S precursor effect display Since the help mode S effect display is executed, it is possible to prevent the start of control of the low-probability time-saving state C from being recognized without overlooking the fact that the low-probability time-saving state C is controlled by the immediate short hit. be able to.

The movable bodies A to C described above include a movable body that the player can contact and a movable body that the player cannot contact. Specifically, the movable body A is the back-up front effect unit 3300 attached to the game board 5, and the movable body B is the back-bottom front effect unit 3400 attached to the game board 5, and these are movable. The body is inaccessible to the player. On the other hand, the movable body C is an effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 attached to the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, and is accessible to the player. Then, the movable bodies A to C sequentially execute the RTC start operation during the execution of the RTC effect, so that each movable body operates. Here, the movable bodies A to C are monitored to see if they operate normally, but if an abnormality that does not operate normally occurs with respect to the movable body C, the movable body is mischievous by the player. There is a high possibility that C will not operate normally. Therefore, if an abnormality occurs in which the movable body C does not operate normally during the execution of the RTC effect, the effect element used in the help mode S precursor effect or the help mode S effect as a penalty to the player. Of these, the period during which some of the executions are restricted is extended. That is, even after the end condition of the RTC effect is satisfied at t4, the execution of some of the effect elements used in the help mode S precursor effect and the help mode S effect is restricted. I have to. As a penalty to the player, the degree of restriction may be increased in a state where the execution of some of the production elements used in the help mode S precursor effect and the help mode S effect is restricted. For example, during the execution of the RTC effect, the execution of the effect display of the effect display device 1600, which is not restricted as the help mode S precursor effect or the help mode S effect, may be restricted. .. In this way, if an abnormality occurs in which the movable body C does not operate normally during the execution of the RTC effect, a penalty is given to the player so that the player does not mischief the movable body C. I can work on it.

FIG. 209 is a time chart showing the progress of the effect when the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied after the immediate short hit. As shown in FIG. 209, when t1 that satisfies the start condition of the RTC effect arrives, if the help mode S effect state is reached, the help mode S effect state is shifted to the RTC effect state. Further, when t1 that satisfies the start condition of the RTC effect arrives, it is already controlled to the low probability time saving state C.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600 executes the effect display for the help mode S indicating that the help mode S is being executed (controlling the low probability time saving state C) at the time of t1. However, during t1 to t2, in addition to the effect display for the help mode S, the RTC countdown display that counts down (for example, 3 → 2 → 1) until the start of the RTC effect is executed. Further, between t2 to tx, the RTC start display for notifying the start of the RTC effect is executed. Then, between tx and tx, from tx to t4 when the end condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, in addition to the effect display for the help mode S, it is not executed except for the RTC effect. The effect display for RTC is being executed. The effect display for the RTC is started after waiting for the first symbol variation (symbol variation D) to start after t3. In such a state, for example, the RTC countdown display, the RTC start display, and the effect display for the RTC are executed using the entire display area, and the low probability time saving state C is being controlled in the upper left part of the display area. The effect display for the help mode S is executed so as to display the "help mode S in progress" shown.

Further, regarding the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are sequentially operated from t2 to t3 as the RTC start display is executed by the effect display device 1600. Specifically, from t2 to t3, the RTC start operation of the movable body A, the RTC start operation of the movable body B, and the RTC start operation of the movable body C are sequentially executed. In this way, when t2 for starting the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C arrives during the execution of the symbol variation B during the execution of the help mode S (during the control of the low probability time saving state C), The operation specified by the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is terminated, and the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C is forcibly started. Further, among t1 to t4 in the RTC effect state, for t2 to t3, the operation specified in the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is not executed for the movable bodies A to C. , Except for the period of t2 to t3, the movable bodies A to C are not used in the RTC effect, and the operation specified by the symbol variation effect (the effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is applied to the movable bodies A to C. Is running.

Further, in the lamp light emission, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit light in the light emission pattern for RTC during the period from t1 to t4 as the RTC effect is executed. .. That is, between t1 to t3, even though the effect display for the help mode S is executed by the effect display device 1600, it is mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3. The LED is not emitting light in the emission pattern for help mode S. Further, in the audio output, the BGM for the RTC is output from the speaker during the period from t1 to t4 as the RTC effect is executed. That is, between t1 to t3, the BGM for the help mode S is not output from the speaker even though the effect display for the help mode S is executed by the effect display device 1600.

As described above, the RTC effect and the symbol variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) both execute the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp emission, and the sound output. Therefore, the production elements used in the production are duplicated (at least a part of them are duplicated). At this time, when t1 that satisfies the start condition of the RTC effect arrives, if the help mode S effect state is reached, the effect display of the effect display device 1600 used in the help mode S effect is executed. On the other hand, the operation of the movable bodies A to C used in the help mode S effect, the lamp light emission, and the voice output are restricted. That is, the execution of some of the effect elements used in the help mode S effect is restricted. As a result, from the time when t1 that the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp light emission, and the sound output can be used in the RTC effect. It is possible to notify that the RTC effect is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the execution of the RTC effect from being unrecognized.

On the other hand, during the execution of the help mode S (during the control of the low-probability time saving state C), from the time when t1 for which the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied arrives, the effect display of the effect display device 1600 is the help mode S. It is used in the production. Since the effect display device 1600 is provided in the central portion of the game board 5, it is the part that the player pays the most attention to. For such an effect display device 1600, the help mode S effect display is displayed. Since it is executed, it is not overlooked that the help mode S is being executed (the low probability time saving state C is being controlled), and the help mode S is being executed (the low probability time saving state C is being controlled). It is possible to prevent the fact from not being recognized.

(Restriction on help mode L precursor production)
As described with reference to FIG. 204, when the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) is executed after the power is turned on with the RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed. At t5, when the symbol variation B is stopped, the low-probability non-time-saving state is shifted to the low-probability time-saving state B. Further, before t5, the help mode L precursor effect state for executing the "help mode L precursor effect" suggesting that the "help mode L" is imminent is set, whereas from t5. , The state has shifted to the help mode L effect state in which the "help mode L effect" indicating that the "help mode L" is being executed is executed. In this example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low-probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), the low-probability time-saving state B is set until the fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches 700 times. It is controlled, and the period for controlling such a low-probability time-saving state B is called "help mode L".

In the above-mentioned effect example, when the variation display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 is stopped, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is reached until the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500 to 600 times. The count effect of notifying how many times is executed is executed, and such a count effect corresponds to the "help mode L precursor effect". Regarding such a count effect, the main control board 1310 counts up the relief count counter when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops in the low probability state, and the information regarding the relief count counter from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 (relief count command). ) Is transmitted so that the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state, and the probability is low when the variation display of the special symbol (decorative symbol) is stopped. A counting effect is executed to notify how many times the special symbol has changed in the state. That is, the count effect is executed as an effect determined by the peripheral control board 1510, separately from the effect indicated by the fluctuation pattern determined by the main control board 1310.

In this example, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed, the main control is performed when the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state is executed. As the fluctuation pattern determined by the substrate 1310, the fluctuation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect can be determined. Here, when the symbol variation in which the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state has not reached 600 times (relief count counter = 600) is executed, the variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310 is a normal variation. The pattern is determined, and the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect is not determined. Then, when the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect is determined, the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state is executed only in the symbol variation B that reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). By executing the non-help mode L precursor effect, it is possible to know in advance that the “help mode L” controlled by the low probability time saving state B is executed.

In addition, when the above-mentioned counting effect is not executed as the "help mode L precursor effect", when the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) is executed. In addition, when the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect is determined, the effect corresponding to the variation pattern (help mode L precursor effect) is executed, so that the low probability time saving state B is controlled. While it is possible to know in advance that "help mode L" will be executed, if the normal fluctuation pattern is determined without determining the fluctuation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect, the fluctuation pattern will be used. By executing the corresponding effect (effect that is not a precursor effect of help mode L), it is not possible to know in advance that "help mode L" controlled by the low probability time saving state B is executed. In this example, the above-mentioned count effect is not executed as the "help mode L precursor effect", but the above-mentioned count is performed regardless of whether or not the fluctuation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect is determined. You may perform the production. Further, in this example, when the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state is executed, the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect can be determined. However, the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state may be any symbol fluctuation before reaching 600 times (relief count counter = 600), for example, a plurality of symbol fluctuations (for example, 579 to 600 times). It may be possible to determine the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect over 500 to 600 times).

Further, in this example, when the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state is executed, the variation pattern (specific variation pattern) for the help mode L precursor effect is executed. A specific fluctuation pattern execution button (not shown), which is a special operation unit for determining), is provided on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. The specific fluctuation pattern execution button may be an operation unit provided in a place where the player cannot operate or visually recognize the power switch 630a, which is related to the power-on, and may be a rotary switch type operation unit or pressed. An example is a switch-type operation unit, or a type of operation unit that is operated by inserting a special tool (thin rod, etc.) or a key possessed by the administrator. Of these, if the operation unit is of the type that the administrator possesses a special tool (such as a thin rod) or a key that is inserted and operated, it is possible to prevent an unintentional erroneous operation in the hall.

Specifically, when the specific variation pattern execution button is operated when the power is turned on, the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) is executed. Help mode L The fluctuation pattern for the precursory effect is determined. On the other hand, when the specific fluctuation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, when the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state is executed, Help mode L The normal fluctuation pattern is determined without determining the fluctuation pattern for the precursor effect. That is, when the hall manager executes the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) depending on whether or not the specific variation pattern execution button is operated when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to select whether or not to determine the fluctuation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect. In this way, when the specific variation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) is executed. , Help mode L Support mode L corresponding to the fluctuation pattern for precursor effect Without executing the precursor effect, the help mode L is being executed in the next symbol variation C (controlling the low probability time saving state B). Since the help mode L effect indicating that the case is suddenly executed, it is possible to give a strong impact that the time is shortened without hitting.

During the execution of the help mode L (during the control of the low probability time saving state B), the variation for the help mode L effect is determined as the variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310 when the symbol variation is executed. The pattern is determined. That is, after the control of the low-probability time-saving state B is started, the variation pattern for the help mode L effect is determined in the symbol variation until the variation display of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving state B reaches 700 times. The fluctuation pattern for the help mode L effect is determined while the help mode L is being executed (during the control of the low probability time saving state B) regardless of whether or not the specific fluctuation pattern execution button is operated when the power is turned on. I try to do it. That is, when the specific fluctuation pattern execution button is operated when the power is turned on, before or after the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), the transition to the low probability time saving state B is performed. Also, the help mode L precursor effect is executed before, and the help mode L effect is executed after shifting to the low probability time saving state B. On the other hand, when the specific fluctuation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, the transition to the low-probability time-saving state B shifts to the low-probability time-saving state B before and after the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low-probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). The help mode L effect is not executed before the help mode L effect is performed, and the help mode L effect is executed after the transition to the low probability time saving state B. In this way, when the specific fluctuation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, the help mode L precursor effect is not executed before the transition to the low-probability time-saving state B, and the low-probability time-saving state is not executed. Since the help mode L effect is suddenly executed after the transition to B, it is possible to give a strong impact that the time is shortened without hitting.

Further, even when the power switch 630a is operated while operating the RAM clear switch 1310f when the power is turned on and the power is turned on with the RAM clear, a specific fluctuation pattern different from that of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the power switch 630a is executed. If the button is not operated when the power is turned on, when the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state is executed, the help mode L variation for the precursor effect is executed. No pattern is determined (normal fluctuation pattern is determined). That is, only by whether or not the hall manager turns on the power with RAM clear, when the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state is executed, Help mode L Since it does not change whether or not to determine the variation pattern for the precursor effect, when the hall manager operates the specific variation pattern execution button when the power is turned on as necessary to execute the symbol variation B. , Help mode L It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern for the precursor effect.

In the above, the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) is executed depending on whether or not the hall manager operates the specific variation pattern execution button when the power is turned on. At that time, whether or not to determine the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect is different, but it may be configured as follows. Specifically, if a big hit (big hit game) has already been obtained after the power is turned on, and then the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), that 600. When the symbol variation B that reaches the number of times (relief count counter = 600) is executed, the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect is determined. On the other hand, if the big hit (big hit game) is not obtained after the power is turned on and the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), that 600 times (relief count). When executing the symbol variation B reaching the counter = 600), the normal variation pattern is determined without determining the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect. That is, depending on whether or not a big hit (big hit game) has already been obtained before the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), the 600 times (relief count counter =). When executing the symbol variation B reaching 600), it is different whether or not the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect is determined. In such a configuration, as a consideration for the jackpot (big hit game) that has already been obtained, it is possible to execute the help mode L precursor effect before shifting to the low probability time saving state B, which helps. Mode L You can enjoy the precursory effect.

Further, in the above, when the specific variation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, when the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) is executed. In addition, although the normal fluctuation pattern is determined without determining the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect, it may be configured as follows. Specifically, when the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600) after the power is turned on, the state shifts from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B. However, in the first low-probability time-saving state B (help mode L) after the power is turned on, the fluctuation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect is determined before the transition to the low-probability time-saving state B. In contrast to the fact that there is no such thing (determining the normal fluctuation pattern), in the low-probability time-saving state B (help mode L) after the second time after the power is turned on, before the transition to the low-probability time-saving state B. Help mode L The fluctuation pattern for the precursor effect is determined. That is, depending on whether or not it is the first low-probability time-saving state B (help mode L) after the power is turned on, it helps when executing the symbol variation B before the transition to the low-probability time-saving state B. Whether or not to determine the fluctuation pattern for the mode L precursor effect is different. In such a configuration, it is known that in the first low-probability time-saving state B (help mode L) after the power is turned on, it is already possible to shift from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B. In the low-probability time-saving state B (help mode L) after the second time after the power is turned on, the effect can be produced by newly executing the help mode L precursor effect before shifting to the low-probability time-saving state B. It is possible to prevent it from becoming monotonous.

[Resetting the relief count counter]
In the above, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is additionally counted from the initial value "0" by using the relief count counter on the main control board 1310. As a result, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), the low probability time saving state B is controlled. With respect to such a relief count counter, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is reset when the power is turned on with RAM clear or when the jackpot game is executed. However, since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low-probability state is directly related to whether or not the transition from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B is made, whether or not to reset the count of the relief count counter. It is preferable that the hall manager can select the power on when the power is turned on, regardless of whether or not the power is turned on with RAM clear. In this example, a configuration that enables whether or not to reset the count of the relief count counter when the power is turned on will be described below.

In this example, a relief maintenance button (not shown), which is a special operation unit for resetting the count of the relief count counter when the power is turned on, is provided on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. The relief maintenance button may be an operation unit provided in a place where the player cannot operate or see, in addition to the power switch 630a related to power-on, and may be a rotary switch type operation unit or a push switch type. An example of the operation unit of the above, or a type of operation unit that is operated by inserting a special tool (thin rod, etc.) or a key possessed by the administrator. Of these, if the operation unit is of the type that the administrator possesses a special tool (such as a thin rod) or a key that is inserted and operated, it is possible to prevent an unintentional erroneous operation in the hall.

Specifically, when the relief maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained without being reset. On the other hand, when the relief maintenance button is not operated when the power is turned on, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is reset. That is, it is possible to select whether or not to reset the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state depending on whether or not the hall manager operates the relief maintenance button. In this way, when the relief maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained, so that the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B The number of times the special symbol changes in the low-probability state until the transition to is displayed is small, whereas the number of times the special symbol changes in the low-probability state when the rescue maintenance button is not operated when the power is turned on. Since the count of (relief count counter) is reset, it is necessary to display the fluctuation of the special symbol many times in the low probability state from the low probability non-time saving state to the transition to the low probability time saving state B, and the hall manager is required to perform the hall. You can choose whether or not to reset according to the environment.

FIG. 210 is a list of RAM clear conditions showing an operation at power-on for executing RAM clear. In this example, when the power is turned on (when the power switch 630a is operated), the RAM clear operation for operating the RAM clear switch 1310f is performed, and the setting change operation for turning on the setting key switch 1311a (RAM clear switch). When the setting change operation of turning on the 1310f and the setting key switch 1311a) is performed, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is executed to initialize the game state. (Set to low probability non-time saving state). Further, the set value is stored in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control board 1310a, and when the setting change operation is performed, the set value already set (power cutoff before the power is turned on). The time setting value) can be changed. Further, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is stored in the second specific area of the RAM built in the main control board 1310a, and the relief maintenance button is pressed when the power is turned on. The count can be maintained when operated.

As shown in FIG. 210, when the relief maintenance button is operated during the RAM clear operation, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is executed to initialize the game state. .. Further, regarding the RAM of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510, since the backup is not created when the power is cut off, the effect state is returned to the initial state. In addition, the setting value of the set value is not changed or the confirmation display is not performed, and the set value already set (the set value when the power is turned off before the power is turned on) is maintained. In addition, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained. Further, the initialization of the game state is executed at the timing when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation. Further, as a notification mode for notifying the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are displayed in blue from the timing when the RAM clear signal is determined to be ON until the predetermined period elapses. It emits light and outputs the voice "The game state has been cleared. The set value and the number of reliefs are maintained." Therefore, when the relief maintenance button is operated during the RAM clear operation, the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained while maintaining the already set value. , It is designed to count from the continuation when the power is cut off.

As for the RAM of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510, since the backup is not created when the power is turned off, the information about the effect being executed is lost when the power is turned off, and the subsequent effect after the power is turned on. The state is executed in the initial state, and the effect state is restored after waiting for a command related to the effect to be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, when the relief maintenance button is not operated during the RAM clear operation, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is executed to initialize the game state. Further, regarding the RAM of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510, since the backup is not created when the power is cut off, the effect state is returned to the initial state. In addition, the setting value of the set value is not changed or the confirmation display is not performed, and the set value already set (the set value when the power is turned off before the power is turned on) is maintained. In addition, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is reset. Further, the initialization of the game state and the reset of the count are executed at the timing when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation. Further, as a notification mode for notifying the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are displayed in yellow from the timing when the RAM clear signal is determined to be ON until the predetermined period elapses. It emits light and outputs the voice "The game status and the number of reliefs have been cleared. The set value is maintained." From the speaker. Therefore, when the relief maintenance button is not operated during the RAM clear operation, the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained while maintaining the already set value. , It is designed to count from the initial value "0".

On the other hand, when the relief maintenance button is being operated during the setting change operation, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is executed to initialize the game state. Further, regarding the RAM of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510, since the backup is not created when the power is cut off, the effect state is returned to the initial state. In addition, the setting of the set value can be changed, and when changing the setting of the set value, the setting switching button 1311b is operated from the state where the already set value (the set value when the power is turned off before the power is turned on) is maintained. Each time the value is increased, the value is increased by 1, and when the maximum value of the set value of 6 is reached, the value is returned to the initial value of the set value of 1, and the value can be increased by the value of 1 again. In addition, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained. Regarding the initialization of the game state, after the setting change operation, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off to determine that the setting change operation is completed (the setting key OFF signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is the input timing. ) Is running. At the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation is completed, the set value determined by changing the setting is stored in the specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. In addition, as a notification mode for notifying the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are displayed in green from the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation is completed until the predetermined period elapses. It emits light and outputs the voice "The set value has been changed and the game state has been cleared. The set value is maintained." Therefore, when the relief maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation, the setting value can be changed, and the power supply is used for counting the number of changes of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state. It is designed to count from the continuation at the time of interruption.

If the relief maintenance button is not operated during the setting change operation, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is executed to initialize the game state. Further, regarding the RAM of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510, since the backup is not created when the power is cut off, the effect state is returned to the initial state. In addition, the setting of the set value can be changed, and when changing the setting of the set value, the setting switching button 1311b is operated from the state where the already set value (the set value when the power is turned off before the power is turned on) is maintained. Each time the value is increased, the value is increased by 1, and when the maximum value of the set value of 6 is reached, the value is returned to the initial value of the set value of 1, and the value can be increased by the value of 1 again. In addition, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is reset. Regarding the initialization of the game state and the reset of the count, after the setting change operation, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off to determine that the setting change operation is completed (the setting key OFF input to the main control MPU 1310a). The signal is executing at the input timing). At the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation is completed, the set value determined by changing the setting is stored in the specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Further, as a notification mode for notifying the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are displayed in white from the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation is completed until the predetermined period elapses. It emits light and outputs the voice "The setting value has been changed and the game status and the number of reliefs have been cleared." Therefore, when the relief maintenance button is not operated during the setting change operation, the setting of the set value can be changed, and the count for the number of changes of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is initially set. It is designed to count from the value "0".

Further, as described above in detail, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM when the power is turned on, or that the main control side power off processing is not normally completed when the power is turned off. In this case, an error message is displayed to inform that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or unreliable). When such a RAM error occurs, the RAM error is caused by turning on the specific abnormality flag, shutting off the power of the pachinko machine 1, and performing a setting change operation when the power is turned on again. You can unlock it and proceed with the game. Specifically, when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), if the setting change operation is performed, regardless of whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation. While initializing the game state, it is possible to change the setting of the set value. When changing the setting of the set value, the value is incremented by 1 each time the setting switching button 1311b is operated from the state where the minimum setting value 1 which is the initial value is temporarily set, and when the setting value 6 which is the maximum value is reached, It is possible to return to the set value 1 which is the initial value and increase the value by 1 again. In addition, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is reset. Regarding the initialization of the game state and the reset of the count, after the setting change operation, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off to determine that the setting change operation is completed (the setting key OFF input to the main control MPU 1310a). The signal is executing at the input timing). At the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation is completed, the set value determined by changing the setting is stored in the specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

In the above, if the setting change operation is performed when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), the probability is low regardless of whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation. The count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the state is reset. This is because when a RAM error occurs, there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM, and there is a possibility that the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is also abnormal. Therefore, by resetting the count, it is possible to maintain the fairness of the game. When the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), if the power is turned on without a setting change operation, the specific abnormality flag remains ON without canceling the RAM error. There is.

In this example, when the relief maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on, when the relief maintenance button is operated during the RAM clear operation, the set value already set is maintained and the probability is low. The count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) is counted from the continuation when the power is turned off, whereas when the relief maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation, the setting value is changed. The count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the continuation when the power is cut off. In addition, when the relief maintenance button is not operated when the power is turned on, and when the relief maintenance button is not operated during the RAM clear operation, the special symbol in the low probability state is maintained while maintaining the already set value. The count for the number of fluctuations (relief count counter) of is counted from the initial value of "0", whereas the setting change of the set value is performed when the relief maintenance button is not operated during the setting change operation. The count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0". That is, when the power is turned on, the hall manager determines whether or not the setting value of the set value is changed and whether or not the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained. The operation unit may be operated, and the hall manager can selectively execute from four patterns according to the hall environment. For example, when the relief maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on at the start of business of the hall, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained, so that the low probability non-time saving state is low. The fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state until the transition to the probability time reduction state B can be performed a small number of times, and the player is expected to shift to the low probability time reduction state B as soon as the hall is opened. Can be done. On the other hand, if the relief maintenance button is not operated when the power is turned on at the start of business of the hall, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is reset, so that the low probability non-time saving state is reached. It is necessary to display the fluctuation of the special symbol many times in the low probability state from the time to the transition to the low probability time reduction state B, and the player's expectation is that the hall does not shift to the low probability time reduction state B immediately after the opening of the hall. Does not increase quickly.

Regardless of whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on, the power switch 630a is operated without turning on the RAM clear switch 1310f and the setting key switch 1311a, which is not a RAM clear operation or a setting change operation. If only) is performed, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built into the main control MPU1310a is not executed, and the game state is changed to the state when the power is cut off based on the backup created when the power is turned off. I'm returning. Further, regarding the RAM of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510, since the backup is not created when the power is cut off, the effect state is returned to the initial state. In addition, the setting value of the set value is not changed or the confirmation display is not performed, and the set value already set (the set value when the power is turned off before the power is turned on) is maintained. In addition, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained. Further, as a notification mode for notifying the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are colored purple from the timing when the RAM clear signal is determined to be ON until the predetermined period elapses. It emits light and outputs the voice "The game state has been restored. The set value and the number of reliefs are maintained." Therefore, when the power is turned on normally, the set value that has already been set is maintained, and the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the continuation when the power is turned off. However, the game state is also restored to the state when the power was cut off.

Further, in this example, when the gaming state is initialized, the notification mode for notifying the outside is different depending on whether the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained or reset. There is. As a result, for example, even if the hall manager mistakenly operates the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on and maintains the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state, it is external to the outside. The notification mode makes it possible to notice the mistake and prevent the hall manager from unintentionally maintaining the count.

In the above, the relief maintenance button is provided, but for example, even when the relief maintenance button is not provided, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted when the power is turned on. It is preferable that the hall manager can select whether to maintain or not according to the hall environment. In such a configuration, for example, when the RAM clear operation is performed without turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is maintained while maintaining the set value already set. The count for (relief count counter) is counted from the continuation when the power is cut off, but when the setting change operation for turning on the setting key switch 1311a is performed, the setting value can be changed. On the other hand, the count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0". As a result, only when the hall manager performs the RAM clear operation instead of the setting change operation, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state can be maintained without being reset, and the hall manager can maintain the count. Can be tailored to your needs.

In addition, even if the relief maintenance button is not provided, if the hall manager wants to maintain the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state when the power is turned on, the hall manager has some kind of operation unit. It is preferable that the configuration is such that Specifically, some operation unit may be an ON operation of the setting key switch 1311a as a setting change operation. In such a configuration, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the time of power-on, when the setting change operation is performed, the setting value can be changed while the special symbol changes in the low probability state. The count for the number of times (relief count counter) is counted from the continuation when the power is cut off, but when the RAM clear operation without turning on the setting key switch 1311a is performed, the set value already set. The count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0". As a result, if the hall manager does not turn on the setting key switch 1311a when the power is turned on, the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state will be reset, and the hall manager will reset the count. It is possible to prevent the count from being maintained unintentionally.

In the case where the relief maintenance button is provided, the hall manager selects from four patterns depending on whether the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation is operated or the relief maintenance button is operated. However, in the case where the relief maintenance button is not provided, it is only necessary to operate the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation, and the hall manager has only two patterns. Cannot be selectively executed. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is not provided with the relief maintenance button, an operation unit that can be operated on the hall side may be provided to increase the patterns that can be selected by the hall manager.

In this example, in the variable display of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400, the stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be. Then, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted when the special symbol is stopped. Further, in the case of a big hit, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol of the special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400, and the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 is displayed. The jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. Then, after the jackpot symbol is stopped, the jackpot game is executed, but the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is reset when the jackpot symbol is stopped before the start of the jackpot game. .. In such a configuration, if the power is cut off during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol and the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on thereafter, the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a Since the RAM clear is executed to initialize the variable state (the state is set so that the variable display is not displayed), the variable display of the special symbol being executed is not restored when the power is turned on. Also, if the power is cut off during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol based on the big hit before the big hit game is executed, and the RAM clear operation or setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on thereafter, the main Initialize the RAM built into the control MPU 1310a. Execute RAM clear to initialize the fluctuation state (make it a state where the fluctuation is not displayed), so it returns to the fluctuation display of the special symbol based on the big hit being executed. There is nothing to do, and the jackpot game scheduled after that is not executed.

In the above configuration, if the power is cut off during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol based on the jackpot and the relief maintenance button is operated during the RAM clear operation when the power is turned on thereafter, the game state is initialized. At that time, the fluctuation display of the special symbol based on the running jackpot is initialized, and while maintaining the already set value, the power supply is used for counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state. While counting from the continuation when the power is turned off, if the relief maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation when the power is turned on, the special symbol changes based on the big hit being executed when the game state is initialized. While initializing the display and making it possible to change the setting of the set value, the count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the continuation when the power is cut off. In addition, if the power is cut off during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol based on the jackpot and the relief maintenance button is not operated during the RAM clear operation when the power is turned on thereafter, the game state is initialized. The variable display of the special symbol based on the big hit being executed is initialized, and the count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is the initial value while maintaining the set value already set. While counting from "0", if the relief maintenance button is not operated during the setting change operation when the power is turned on, when the game state is initialized, the variation display of the special symbol based on the running jackpot is displayed. Is initialized to enable the setting of the set value to be changed, and the count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0". That is, when the power is cut off during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol based on the jackpot, and when the power is turned on after that (when the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation is performed), the game state is initialized. Although the fluctuation display of the special symbol based on the jackpot is initialized, it depends on whether you want to change the setting of the set value and whether you want to maintain the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state. The hall manager only needs to operate a predetermined operation unit, and the hall manager can selectively execute from four patterns according to the hall environment.

Further, in this example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (the number of fluctuations other than the jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is counted, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600. By reaching the number of times, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B, but for example, if a configuration that initializes all the controls related to the progress of the game like the RAM clear processing of the conventional pachinko machine 1 is added, it is special. Since the RAM clear processing is performed during the symbol variation display, even the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is reset, and the probability is low in the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1. It may be difficult to confirm the transition to the time saving state B. In this respect, in this example, even if the special symbol changes in the low probability state and the number of changes of the special symbol reaches 600 times, even if it becomes a big hit and the change display of the special symbol based on the big hit is executed, it is based on the big hit. Executed when initializing the game state by shutting off the power during the execution of the special symbol variation display and then operating the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on (when the RAM is cleared or when the setting is changed). While initializing the fluctuation display of the special symbol based on the big hit in the middle, the count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state can be counted from the continuation when the power is cut off, and the pachinko machine 1 In the manufacturing process of the above, it becomes possible to display the variation of the special symbol again, and it is possible to facilitate the confirmation of the transition to the low-probability time-saving state B.

In addition, in the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, if it is desired to confirm various effects when shifting to the low-probability time-saving state B, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low-probability state is the 600th time even if the pachinko machine 1 is out of order. During the fluctuation display that reaches or immediately before that, the power is turned off regardless of whether it is a big hit, and the relief maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on after that (when the RAM is cleared or the setting is changed). By doing so, while initializing the fluctuation display of the special symbol being executed, the count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state can be counted from the continuation when the power is cut off, and pachinko. In the manufacturing process of the machine 1, it becomes possible to display the fluctuation of the special symbol for the 600th time again, and it is possible to facilitate the confirmation of the effect of the process of shifting to the low-probability time-saving state B.

In addition, when initializing the variable display of the special symbol being executed, the stored information on various holds (holding the lottery result of the first special symbol, holding the lottery result of the second special symbol) is also initially set. When confirming the transition to the low-probability time-saving state B and confirming the production of the process of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving state B, the worker can perform the first special symbol and the second special. It is possible to select which of the symbols to be executed and execute the fluctuation display reaching the 600th time or the fluctuation display immediately before that at an arbitrary timing, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the confirmation work. Further, this work can be repeatedly executed by operating the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on (when the RAM is cleared or when the setting is changed), and in this respect as well, the degree of freedom of the confirmation work can be increased.

In the above, the relief maintenance button is provided, but for example, even when the relief maintenance button is not provided, during execution of the variation display of the special symbol reaching 600 times or the variation display of the special symbol based on the jackpot. The hall manager decides whether or not to maintain the count of the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state when the power is turned off and then the power is turned on (when the RAM is cleared or the setting is changed). Is preferably configured so that it can be selected according to the hall environment. In such a configuration, only when the hall administrator performs either the setting change operation or the RAM clear operation, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief) is erased while the fluctuation display being executed is erased. By maintaining the count of the number counter) without resetting, it is possible to meet the needs of the hall manager.

In this example, when the power is cut off during the control of the time saving state and the relief maintenance button is operated during the RAM clear operation when the power is turned on thereafter, when initializing the fluctuation display during execution. , While maintaining the already set value, the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the continuation when the power is turned off, whereas the setting is changed when the power is turned on. When the relief maintenance button is operated during operation, when initializing the fluctuation display during execution, the time saving state is initialized to the low probability non-time saving state, and the setting value can be changed while the low probability is low. The count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the state is counted from the continuation when the power is cut off. In addition, if the power is cut off during the control of the time saving state and the relief maintenance button is not operated during the RAM clear operation when the power is turned on after that, when the variable display during execution is initialized, the time saving state is started. Initialize to the low-probability non-time saving state, and while maintaining the set value that has already been set, the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low-probability state is counted from the initial value "0". On the other hand, if the relief maintenance button is not operated during the setting change operation when the power is turned on, when the variable display during execution is initialized, the time saving state is initialized to the low probability non-time saving state, and the set value is set. While making it possible to change the setting of, the count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0". In other words, when the power is cut off during the control of the time saving state and then the power is turned on (when the RAM is cleared or the setting is changed), when the variation display during execution is initialized, the probability is low from the time saving state. Although it is initialized to the time saving state, the hall manager determines whether or not to change the setting of the set value and whether or not to maintain the count of the number of fluctuations (relief count counter) of the special symbol in the low probability state. The operation unit may be operated, and the hall manager can selectively execute from four patterns according to the hall environment.

In the above, in the case of a big hit, the big hit game is executed after the big hit symbol is stopped, and the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is reset when the big hit symbol is stopped. However, as another example, only in the case of a big hit, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is not when the big hit symbol is stopped, but in the big hit game. It may be reset at the end of (for example, when the ending period set after the end of the final round has elapsed). In other words, in the case of a miss or a small hit, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted when the special symbol is stopped, but in the case of a big hit, the low probability state is reached. Regarding the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the above, the timing of resetting may be delayed until the end of the subsequent jackpot game, not when the special symbol is stopped. In such a configuration, if the power is cut off during the execution of the jackpot game and the RAM clear operation or setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on thereafter, the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is initially initialized. Since the game state is initialized (set to the low probability non-time saving state) so as to erase the big hit game by executing the RAM clear to be changed, the big hit game that is being executed is not returned.

In the above configuration, if the power is cut off during the execution of the jackpot game and the relief maintenance button is operated during the RAM clear operation when the power is turned on thereafter, the game is being executed when the game state is initialized. While initializing the jackpot game and maintaining the set value that has already been set, the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the continuation when the power is cut off, whereas the power supply When the relief maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation at the time of input, when the game state is initialized, the running jackpot game is initialized, and the setting value setting can be changed while the low probability state is set. The count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in is counted from the continuation when the power is cut off. In addition, if the power is cut off during the execution of the jackpot game and the relief maintenance button is not operated during the RAM clear operation when the power is turned on thereafter, the running jackpot game is executed when the game state is initialized. While initializing and maintaining the set value that has already been set, the count for the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0", whereas the power is turned on. If the relief maintenance button is not operated during the setting change operation at the time, when the game state is initialized, the running jackpot game is initialized, and the setting value setting can be changed while in the low probability state. The count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) is counted from the initial value "0". That is, the power is cut off during the execution of the jackpot game, and when the power is turned on after that (when the RAM is cleared or the setting is changed), the running jackpot game is initialized when the game state is initialized. However, if the hall manager operates a predetermined operation unit depending on whether or not he / she wants to change the setting value and whether or not he / she wants to maintain the count of the number of fluctuations (relief count counter) of the special symbol in the low probability state. Often, the hall manager can selectively execute from four patterns according to the hall environment.

Further, in this example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (the number of fluctuations other than the jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is counted, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600. By reaching the number of times, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B, but if a configuration that initializes all the controls related to the progress of the game like the RAM clear processing of the conventional pachinko machine 1 is added, it is a big hit. Since the RAM clear processing is performed during the game, even the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is reset, and the low probability time saving state B is performed in the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1. It may be difficult to confirm the transition to. In this regard, if a big hit occurs and a big hit game occurs before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the power is cut off during the execution of the big hit game, and then the power is turned on. By operating the relief maintenance button at the time (RAM clear operation, setting change operation), when the game state is initialized, the special symbol changes in the low probability state while initializing the running jackpot game. The count for the number of times (relief number counter) can be counted from the continuation when the power is cut off, and it is possible to easily confirm that the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the low probability time saving state B in the manufacturing process.

In the above, the relief maintenance button is provided, but for example, even if the relief maintenance button is not provided, the power is cut off during the execution of the jackpot game, and the power is turned on thereafter (when the RAM clear operation is performed). In the setting change operation), the hall manager can select whether or not to maintain the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state according to the hall environment. preferable. In such a configuration, only when the hall administrator performs either the setting change operation or the RAM clear operation, the count of the number of changes of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state is maintained without being reset. By doing so, it is possible to meet the needs of the hall manager.

In the above, the relief maintenance button is provided, but for example, even if the relief maintenance button is not provided, the power is cut off during the big hit game and the power is turned on thereafter (when the RAM is cleared, the setting is changed). It is preferable that the hall manager can select whether or not to maintain the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state) according to the hall environment. In such a configuration, only when the hall manager performs either the setting change operation or the RAM clear operation, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state while erasing the jackpot game is By maintaining the count without resetting it, it can meet the needs of the hall manager.

Further, as described in detail above, in the effect display device 1600, as the "help mode L precursor effect", the special symbol in the low probability state is displayed until the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 500 to 600 times. A count effect is executed to notify how many times the fluctuation of the number is. Regarding the current count for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in such a low probability state, whether or not the hall manager resets the count even if the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low probability state is other than 500 to 600 times. The hall manager can check the setting value by displaying it even during the period when the setting value is changed and the setting value is confirmed. In the following, the history display to be displayed during the period when the setting of the set value is changed and the display of the set value is confirmed will be described.

FIG. 211 shows a history display that can be displayed during a period in which the setting of the set value is changed and the display of the set value is confirmed. In this example, it is shown that the setting change operation is performed without operating the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on, and the setting value setting is changed. When a setting change operation is performed, the already set setting value (setting value when the power is turned off before the power is turned on) can be changed.

FIGS. 211 (A) and 211 (B) show the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in a state where the setting value is changed, and FIG. 211 (A) shows the setting change of the set value is started. It is a display screen immediately after, and a message image "setting is being changed" is displayed in the center of the screen, and a guidance image (operation image showing the effect operation unit 310) for switching to the history display is displayed below it. NS. FIG. 211 (B) is a history display image switched from the display screen of FIG. 211 (A) when the effect operation unit 310 is operated.

In FIG. 211 (B), the first history display unit that can confirm the history of the past 12 times line by line is displayed on one screen, and the “date and time information” based on the RTC information and the above-mentioned fluctuation of the special symbol are displayed. "Information about the game state" whether or not the game state including the display and the jackpot game has been initialized, "Information about the set value" indicating the current set value, "Information about the count value of the relief count counter", " "Work information such as RAM clear operation and setting change operation" is recorded in order from the left. This information is stored in a specific storage area of the main control board 1310 so that it will not be erased even if the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation is performed. That is, in the display of FIGS. 211 (A) and 211 (B), various information stored in the main control board 1310 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 during the period when the setting of the set value is changed and the display of the set value is confirmed. It is an effect image generated and developed by the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, in FIG. 211 (B), the history (2020/3/9 7:15: 00) shown in the bottom line of the first history display unit is a display related to the current setting change operation, and is described as " The information "changing" is recorded in the "information about the set value" section, and is updated when the set value is confirmed. Further, a guidance image (operation image showing the effect operation unit 310) for returning to the display screen shown in FIG. 211 (A) is displayed at the lower left of the first history display unit, and is displayed at the lower right of the first history display unit. Is highlighted with the current "information about the count value of the relief count counter".

There are two current "information about the count value of the relief count counter", "number of fluctuations after clearing RAM" and "number of fluctuations after big hit", and "number of fluctuations after clearing RAM" has a relief maintenance button. When the RAM clear operation or setting change operation is performed without operating and the count value of the relief count counter is reset to the initial value, the total number of fluctuations counted from the initial value is displayed. In addition, in "Number of fluctuations after big hit", when the big hit game is executed in the progress of the game and the count value of the relief count counter is reset to the initial value, the number of fluctuations counted from the initial value is displayed. Will be done. That is, when the jackpot game is not executed in the progress of the game, the "number of fluctuations after the jackpot" is displayed as zero, and the numerical value is recorded only in the "number of fluctuations after the RAM is cleared". In the example of FIG. 211 (B), the case where the big hit game is executed in the progress process of the game is shown, and "412" is recorded in the "number of fluctuations after the big hit", and "after the RAM is cleared". Only "2995" is recorded in the "number of fluctuations", and the hall manager can recognize the count value of the relief count counter by "412" which is the "number of fluctuations after the big hit".

In this example, since the setting change operation is performed without operating the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on, the RAM is cleared when the setting change operation is completed by turning off the setting key switch 1311a. The count value of the relief count counter will be reset to the initial value. That is, before the count value of the relief count counter is reset to the initial value, the hall manager sets the count value of the relief count counter (count value before initialization) by "412" which is the "number of fluctuations after the big hit". ) Can be recognized. Then, after recognizing the count value of the relief count counter (count value before initialization), if it is desired to maintain the count value of the relief count counter, the setting change operation is not completed (setting key switch). The power supply may be shut off (without turning off the 1311a), and the relief maintenance button may be operated when the power is turned on thereafter to maintain the count value of the relief count counter.

FIG. 211 (C) shows the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in a state where the setting change operation is completed, and the history display image is continuously displayed from the display screen of FIG. 211 (B). Further, the display screen of FIG. 211 (C) shall be displayed from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off to complete the setting change operation until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses. After the predetermined time has elapsed, the history display screen is deleted. Further, in FIG. 211 (C), the setting is changed in the "information about the set value" in the history (2020/3/9 7:15: 00) shown in the bottom line of the first history display unit. Since the set value is fixed by the end of the operation, the fixed value (“4” in this example) is updated and displayed. Further, in this example, the case where the setting change operation is performed without operating the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on is shown, and the RAM is cleared when the setting change operation is completed by turning off the setting key switch 1311a. Is executed, and the count value of the relief count counter is reset to the initial value. Therefore, the "number of fluctuations after clearing the RAM" and "number of fluctuations after the jackpot" are updated to the initial values of zero. Is displayed. The date and time information may also be updated and displayed when the setting change operation is completed.

If the relief maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation, the count value of the relief count counter is performed while the RAM is cleared when the setting change operation is completed by turning off the setting key switch 1311a. For the "number of fluctuations after clearing RAM" and "number of fluctuations after big hit", the values displayed during the setting change operation ("2995" for "number of fluctuations after clearing RAM", "412") is continuously displayed in "Number of fluctuations after big hit" without being updated.

As described above, during the period when the setting value setting is changed and the setting value display is confirmed, the hall management messenger performs an arbitrary operation to change the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (relief count counter). The current count for the above can be confirmed, and the hall manager can determine whether or not to reset the count value of the relief count counter without inadvertently leaking it to the surroundings. In other words, if the hall manager wants to reset the count value of the relief count counter, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief count counter) without operating the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on after the power is turned off. ), And if the hall manager does not want to reset the count value of the relief count counter, operate the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on after the power is turned off, and in a low probability state. The count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) may be maintained.

Further, in addition to the above, in the second history display unit, for example, the number of times the special symbol is changed to the low probability time saving state B by reaching 600 times (relief number counter = 600) in the low probability state, Etc. may be displayed.

Further, during the period when the setting of the set value is changed and the display of the set value is confirmed, the launch control for launching the game ball B from the ball launching device 540 cannot be performed. This is the current count (setting value setting change and setting value) for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low probability state during the period when the setting value setting change and the setting value display confirmation are performed. (Count at the start of display confirmation) is displayed, but if the game ball B can be launched from the ball launcher 540 during such a period, the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005. Occasionally, the number of changes in the special symbol (relief count counter) in the low-probability state is counted up, causing a deviation from the displayed count. In this regard, during the period when the setting of the set value is changed and the display of the set value is confirmed, the launch control for launching the game ball B from the ball launcher 540 cannot be performed, so that the display is displayed. The hall manager can accurately grasp the current count without causing a deviation from the count.

[Return of time saving effect at the time of power failure]
In the above, the low-probability time-saving states A to C are set as the low-probability time-saving states. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit C", it is controlled to the low probability time saving state A after the execution of the 10R big hit game until the next "big hit". In addition, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief count counter) is counted, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600 times (relief). If the number of times the special symbol fluctuates 600 times (relief count counter = 600) in the low probability state without a big hit before reaching the number counter = 600), the lottery result of the special symbol is not a hit. Nevertheless, the low probability time saving state B is controlled until the number of subsequent fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (700 times in this example). If the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", the big hit game is not executed, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number of times (20 to 100 times in this example) after the immediate short hit symbol is stopped. ) Is reached, the low probability time saving state C is controlled.

Further, during the period of controlling the low-probability time-saving states A to C, the effect corresponding to each time-saving state is executed. Specifically, as an effect corresponding to the low-probability time-saving state A, a "time-saving effect" indicating that the low-probability time-saving state A is being controlled is executed. For example, the upper left portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600. "During time saving game" is displayed in. Further, as an effect corresponding to the low-probability time-saving state B, a "help mode L effect" indicating that the help mode L is being executed (controlling the low-probability time-saving state B) is executed. As shown in the above-mentioned effect example, "help mode L in progress" is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600. Further, as an effect corresponding to the low-probability time-saving state C, a "help mode S effect" indicating that the help mode S is being executed (controlling the low-probability time-saving state C) is executed. As shown in the above-mentioned effect example, "help mode S in progress" is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600. In addition to this, in "Time saving production", "Help mode L production", and "Help mode S production", background images and mini characters peculiar to each production are displayed, and voice and light emission are output. It is possible.

In this example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (when the power is cut off), the type of low-probability time-saving state during execution is stored in the main control built-in RAM, and when the power is turned on again, before the power is cut off. A command corresponding to the type of low-probability state being executed is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, after the power is turned on again, the effect corresponding to the time saving state executed before the power failure is restored, and even after the power is turned on again, any of the low probability time saving states A to C You can know if it is controlled by. Specifically, when the power is turned on again when the "time saving effect" is being executed as the effect corresponding to the low probability time saving state A at the time of power failure, the command corresponding to the low probability time saving state A is executed. Is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and after the power is turned on again, the command is executed so as to return to the "time saving effect". Further, when the power is turned on again when the "help mode L effect" is being executed as the effect corresponding to the low probability time saving state B at the time of power failure, the command corresponding to the low probability time saving state B is executed. Is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and after the power is turned on again, the command is executed so as to return to the "help mode L effect". Further, when the power is turned on again when the "help mode S effect" is being executed as the effect corresponding to the low probability time saving state C at the time of power failure, the command corresponding to the low probability time saving state C is executed. Is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and after the power is turned on again, the command is executed so as to return to the "help mode S effect".

In addition, when the "help mode S effect" is being executed as the effect corresponding to the low-probability time-saving state C among the low-probability time-saving states A to C at the time of power failure, after the power is turned on again, It is executed so as to return to the "help mode S effect", but when the "help mode S effect" is restored, a part of the "help mode S effect" is executed so as not to return. ing. For example, during the execution of the "help mode S effect", as shown in the above effect example, "help mode S in progress" is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600. When the "help mode S production" is restored, the "help mode S in progress" is restricted from being displayed, while the background image and mini character peculiar to the production are displayed, and the sound and light emission are output. I'm trying to get back to what I'm doing. This is because, for the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state C, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol during the control of the time-saving state is as small as 20 to 100 times, and the game is compared with the low-probability time-saving state A and the low-probability time-saving state B. A game that is disadvantageous to the person is being performed. In this regard, when the "help mode S effect" is restored, the effect display device 1600 is restricted from displaying "help mode S in progress", so that the control of the low probability time saving state C is restored. It becomes difficult to grasp, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of dissatisfaction with the disadvantageous game in the low probability time saving state C.

In addition, after the power is turned on again, the effect is executed so as to return to the effect corresponding to the time saving state that was executed before the power failure, but before returning to the effect corresponding to the time saving state, In the effect display device 1600, a common return image (in this example, the display of the arrow bar of "Left-handed!" And the message display of "Return in a short time") is temporarily displayed for a predetermined period. There is. In other words, when returning to any of the "time saving effect", "help mode L effect", and "help mode S effect" as the effect corresponding to the time saving state, a common return image is temporarily displayed. Therefore, at that time, it is not possible to grasp which production will be returned. In this way, at the time when the common return image is temporarily displayed, whether the low-probability time-saving state A is being controlled, the low-probability time-saving state B is being controlled, or the low-probability time-saving state C is being controlled. Since it is not possible to grasp, the game is started early in order to return to any of the "time saving effect", "help mode L effect", and "help mode S effect" and to know which time saving state is in which state. Can be motivated. As for the timing to return to any of "time saving effect", "help mode L effect", and "help mode S effect", after displaying the common return image, the variation display of the next special symbol starts. It is preferable that the timing is set. It should be noted that this common return image is not displayed after the power is turned on after the power is cut off in a state other than the time saving state.

Further, as described above in detail, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM when the power is turned on, or that the main control side power off processing is not normally completed when the power is turned off. In this case, an error message is displayed to inform that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or unreliable). Then, at the time of power failure, the effect corresponding to the time saving state is being executed, and if such a RAM error occurs after the power is turned on again, the time saving executed before the power failure is executed. It is executed so as not to return to the production corresponding to the state. This may have caused a RAM error when the power was turned on by illegally shifting the game state before the power failure, and if such a RAM error occurs, it is executed before the power failure. By giving the player a penalty of not returning to the production corresponding to the time saving state and not notifying which time saving state it is, working to prevent fraudulent acts such as illegally shifting the playing state. Can be done.

[Handling of immediate short hits during time reduction control]
In the above, when an immediate short hit occurs in the time saving state, the already controlled time saving state is continued without being newly controlled to the time saving state based on the immediate short hit, but as a modification. , In the time saving state, if the immediate short hit occurs, it can be executed in the remaining number of times of the variation display of the special symbol that can be executed in the already controlled time saving state and the new time saving state based on the immediate short hit. The number of times of variation display of the special symbol may be compared, and the subsequent game progress mode may be determined according to the comparison result. Specifically, the number of times the special symbol variation display that can be executed in the new time saving state based on the immediate short hit is larger than the number of remaining times of the special symbol variation display that can be executed in the already controlled time saving state. In many cases, control for switching from an already controlled time saving state to a new time saving state based on an immediate short hit can be exemplified. An example of such a modification will be described below.

FIG. 212 is a lottery table and a symbol determination table of a modified example. As shown in FIG. 212 (A), the lottery table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number is provided with an immediate short hit determination value, as shown in FIG. 190 (A). Is different, a judgment other than the immediate short hit judgment value in the low probability lottery table referred to for comparison with the first special random number and the low probability lottery table referred for for comparison with the second special random number. The values (big hit determination value, small hit determination value) are the same as those in FIG. 190 (A). Similarly, as shown in FIG. 212 (B), the lottery table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number is provided with an immediate short hit determination value. Unlike B), the immediate short hit judgment value in the low-probability lottery table referred to for comparison with the first special random number and the low-probability lottery table referred for for comparison with the second special random number. The determination values other than the above (big hit determination value, small hit determination value) are the same as those in FIG. 190 (B). As a result, in the time saving state, it becomes easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003, and in addition to being able to easily execute the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning in the variable winning opening 2003, the variable winning opening Since there is a possibility of winning an immediate short hit by winning a start in 2003, the game can be played with even greater expectation even when an advantageous game is being played in a time-saving state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 212 (D), the judgment values are distributed to the immediate short hit A, the immediate short hit B, and the immediate short hit C in the symbol determination table at the time of the immediate short hit to be compared with the second symbol random number. In that respect, unlike FIG. 190 (D), the symbol determination table at the time of immediate short hit compared with the first symbol random number is the same as that of FIG. 190 (D). That is, after winning the immediate short hit by the lottery based on the second special random number, the type of the immediate short hit (immediate short hit A, using the symbol determination table at the time of the immediate short hit compared with the second symbol random number). Either immediate short hit B or immediate short hit C) is determined. Regarding the symbol determination table at the time of big hit shown in FIG. 212 (C) and the symbol determination table at the time of small hit shown in FIG. 212 (E), the symbol determination table at the time of big hit shown in FIG. 190 (C) and the figure It is the same as the symbol determination table at the time of small hit shown in 190 (E).

In this example, the low-probability time-saving states A to C are set as the low-probability time-saving states. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit C", it is controlled to the low probability time saving state A after the execution of the 10R big hit game until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times. There is. Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit D", the low probability time saving state A is controlled until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 599 times after the execution of the 10R big hit game. In addition, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the jackpot game is executed, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief count counter) is counted, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 600 times (relief). If the number of times the special symbol fluctuates 600 times (relief number counter = 600) in the low probability state without a big hit before reaching the number counter = 600), the big hit game is not executed. After that, until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (700 times in this example), the control is performed in the low probability time saving state B. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short hit", the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number of times after the stop of the immediate short hit symbol (in this example, the immediate short hit) even though the big hit game is not executed. It is controlled to the low probability time saving state C until it reaches 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) according to the type of the winning symbol. The number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short-time hit is 100 times when it is "immediate short-time hit A" and 40 times when it is "immediate short-time hit B". When the number of times is "immediate short hit C", 20 times is set.

FIG. 213 is a time chart showing an immediate short hit time during control of the low probability time saving state B. First, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, if an immediate short-time hit occurs, the remaining number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state B and the low-probability time-saving based on the immediate short-time hit. The number of times of variable display of the special symbol that can be executed in the state C is compared. Then, when the number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short hit is larger than the remaining number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state B. Controls to switch from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short-hit symbol is stopped (switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is enabled). Further, when the low-probability time-saving state B is switched to the low-probability time-saving state C, the remaining number of times of the variation display of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state B is discarded, and the execution is performed in the low-probability time-saving state C. It is controlled to newly count the number of possible variations of the special symbol (20 times, 40 times, 100 times according to the type of the immediate short hit symbol). That is, when the low-probability time-saving state B is switched to the low-probability time-saving state C, the time-saving state is controlled to be lower than the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol that should have been executed in the low-probability time-saving state B. The period is to be extended. On the other hand, when the remaining number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state B is larger than the number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short hit. Maintains the low-probability time-saving state B without switching to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short-hit symbol is stopped, and only for the remaining number of variable display of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state B. The low-probability time-saving state B is controlled to continue (switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is invalidated). In this way, if an immediate short hit occurs during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, the low-probability time-saving state with the larger number of variable display of the special symbol is selected and executed. It is possible to execute an advantageous state for as long as possible without giving a feeling of regret or loss, and it is possible to continue the game with expectation.

As shown in FIG. 213, when "immediate short hit A" is obtained in the Nth variation display of the special symbol during the control of the low probability time saving state B, "700-N <100" (N = When the switching condition (the number of times the special symbol changes are displayed) that has already been executed in the low-probability time-saving state B is satisfied, the low-probability time-saving state B is switched to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short hit A symbol is stopped. It is controlled like this. That is, if "immediate short hit A" is obtained during the execution of the 601 to 700th special symbol variation display in the low probability time saving state B, the low probability time saving state B is started after the immediate short hit A symbol is stopped. It is controlled to switch to the low probability time saving state C. On the other hand, if "immediate short hit A" is obtained during the execution of the 1st to 600th special symbol variation display in the low probability time saving state B, the low probability time saving state B is set after the immediate short hit A symbol is stopped. It is controlled to maintain. In this way, during the execution of the 1st to 600th special symbol variation display in the low-probability time-saving state B, the period during which the switching to the low-probability time-saving state C becomes invalid when the "immediate short hit A" is reached. On the other hand, during the execution of the 601 to 700th special symbol variation display in the low-probability time-saving state B, switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is performed when the "immediate short hit A" is reached. It is set as a valid period.

Further, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, if "immediate short-time hit B" is obtained in the Nth variation display of the special symbol, "700-N <40" (N = low-probability time-saving state B). When the switching condition (the number of times the special symbol changes are displayed) that has already been executed in There is. That is, if "immediate short hit B" is obtained during the execution of the 661-700th special symbol variation display in the low probability time saving state B, the low probability time saving state B is started after the immediate short hit B symbol is stopped. It is controlled to switch to the low probability time saving state C. On the other hand, if "immediate short hit B" is obtained during the 1st to 660th variable display of the special symbol in the low probability time saving state B, the low probability time saving state B is set after the immediate short hit B symbol is stopped. It is controlled to maintain. In this way, during the execution of the 1st to 660th variation display of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving state B, the period during which the switching to the low-probability time-saving state C becomes invalid when the "immediate short-time hit B" is reached. On the other hand, during the execution of the 661-700th special symbol variation display in the low-probability time-saving state B, switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is performed when "immediate short-time hit B" is reached. It is set as a valid period.

Further, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, if "immediate short-time hit C" is obtained in the Nth variation display of the special symbol, "700-N <20" (N = low-probability time-saving state B). When the switching condition (the number of times the special symbol changes are displayed) that has already been executed in There is. That is, if "immediate short hit C" is obtained during the execution of the 681 to 700th special symbol variation display in the low probability time saving state B, the low probability time saving state B is started after the immediate short hit C symbol is stopped. It is controlled to switch to the low probability time saving state C. On the other hand, if "immediate short hit C" is obtained during the 1st to 680th variable display of the special symbol in the low probability time saving state B, the low probability time saving state B is set after the immediate short hit C symbol is stopped. It is controlled to maintain. In this way, during the execution of the 1st to 680th variation display of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving state B, the period during which the switching to the low-probability time-saving state C becomes invalid when the "immediate short-time hit C" is reached. On the other hand, during the execution of the 681 to 700th special symbol variation display in the low-probability time-saving state B, switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is performed when "immediate short-time hit C" is reached. It is set as a valid period.

Next, the production progress before and after the immediate short hit time during the control of the low probability time saving state B will be described. In this example, among the 601 to 700th special symbol variation display during the control of the low probability time saving state B, the Nth special symbol variation display (symbol variation Z) becomes "immediate short hit A". The case of controlling to switch from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short hit A symbol is stopped is described.

Specifically, during the execution of the 1st to 600th special symbol variation display during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is performed when the "immediate short hit A" is reached. It is set as an invalid period. Then, during the period in which the switching to the low-probability time-saving state C becomes invalid, the remaining number of times of the variation display of the special symbol during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B is maintained when the "immediate short hit A" is obtained. Since the period for controlling to the low probability time saving state is not extended, it is set as the non-executable period of the extension acquisition effect described later. In addition, during the period when the switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is invalid, the "help mode L effect" indicating that the "help mode L" is being executed (the low-probability time-saving state B is being controlled) is displayed. Running.

Further, during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol after the 681th time during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, the period during which the switching to the low-probability time-saving state C becomes effective when the "immediate short hit A" is reached. Is set as. Then, during the period in which the switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is effective, control is performed so that the low-probability time-saving state B is switched to the low-probability time-saving state C when the "immediate short-time hit A" is reached, and the low-probability time-saving state C is controlled. Since the period for controlling the state is extended, it is set as a feasible period for the extension acquisition effect described later. In addition, during the period when the switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is effective, the "help mode L effect" indicating that the "help mode L" is being executed (the low-probability time-saving state B is being controlled) is displayed. In addition to the execution, the effect display device 1600 executes the "extension chance display" indicating that the period for controlling the low probability time saving state can be extended. Here, the "extension chance display" can be exemplified as an effect display in which a message image related to the extension (a message image "If the character X appears, the time may be shortened ...") is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (Not shown). As a result, during the execution of the "extension chance display", attention is paid to whether or not the extension acquisition effect described later is executed, and it is possible to enjoy whether or not the period for controlling to the low probability time saving state is extended.

In addition, among the fluctuation displays of the special symbols after the 681th time during the control of the low probability time saving state B, when the symbol variation Z, which is the variation display of the Nth special symbol, is being executed, an immediate short hit occurs. , "Extension acquisition effect" is executed, and after the immediate short hit A symbol is stopped, it is controlled to switch from the low probability time saving state B to the low probability time saving state C, and the period of controlling to the low probability state is extended. Here, the "extension acquisition effect" displays a display that encourages whether or not the character X appears from the screen edge of the effect display device 1600, and a success pattern (low probability time reduction) in which the character X appears in the center of the screen of the effect display device 1600. An effect that succeeds in extending the period for controlling the state) and a failure pattern in which the character X does not appear from the screen edge of the effect display device 1600 (an effect that fails to extend the period for controlling the low probability time saving state). ) Is performed (not shown). In addition, during the execution of the symbol variation Z, the extension acquisition effect is set as the executable period, and the "extension acquisition effect" for notifying whether or not the period for controlling to the low probability time saving state is extended is executed. In the "extension acquisition effect" that is executed when an immediate short hit occurs, an effect that succeeds in extending the control period to the low probability time reduction state (extension acquisition effect of the success pattern) is executed. As a result, during the execution of the "extension acquisition effect", it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the period for controlling to the low probability time saving state is extended.

In addition, when the immediate short hit occurs during the control of the low probability non-time reduction state, the control is performed to the low probability time reduction state C after the immediate short hit symbol is stopped, but the "extension acquisition effect" is low. It is an effect that is not executed when an immediate short hit occurs while controlling the probability non-time saving state. As a result, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, it is possible to enjoy an effect different from that of the low-probability non-time-saving state.

Further, during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol after the 681th time during the control of the low probability time saving state B, it is set as the executable period of the extension acquisition effect, and even if the immediate short hit is not achieved, the low probability is low. It is possible to execute an "extension acquisition effect" that notifies whether or not the period for controlling the time saving state is extended. In this example, during the execution of the symbol variation X, which is the N-2nd special symbol variation display during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, the "extension acquisition effect" is executed, although the immediate short hit is not obtained, and the immediate short is executed. In the "extension acquisition effect" that is executed when there is no hit, a gase effect (extension acquisition effect of a failure pattern) that fails to extend the period for controlling to a low probability time saving state is executed. While the symbol variation X is being executed, the "extension acquisition effect" is being executed, but since it is not an immediate short hit, the immediate short hit symbol is not stopped and displayed.

Further, after switching from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C, it is set as a period during which the switching to the new low-probability time-saving state C becomes effective when the "immediate short hit" is further obtained. .. Even in such a case, the remaining number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state C and the variation display of the special symbol that can be executed in the new low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short hit. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol that can be executed in the new low probability time saving state C based on the immediate short hit is larger, the probability is low after the immediate short hit symbol is stopped. It is controlled to switch from the time saving state C to a new low probability time saving state C. That is, when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol that can be executed in the new low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short-time hit is larger, the period for controlling to the low-probability time-saving state is extended. Further, the period during which the switching to the new low-probability time-saving state C becomes effective is set as the feasible period of the extended acquisition effect.

Further, when the low-probability time-saving state B is switched to the low-probability time-saving state C, the "help mode S" corresponding to the low-probability time-saving state C is being executed while the low-probability time-saving state C is being controlled. It is not switched to the "help mode S effect" indicating that, and the "help mode L effect" that was executed in the low probability time saving state B is continuously executed. In this way, before and after switching from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C, there is no change in that the "help mode L effect" is executed, so that the control of the low-probability time-saving state B continues (extended). ) Can be made to look like it was done. Further, after switching from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C, it is set as a period during which the switching to the new low-probability time-saving state C becomes effective when the "immediate short hit" is further obtained. Therefore, in the effect display device 1600, the "extension chance display" is continuously executed.

FIG. 214 is a time chart showing an immediate short hit time during control of 100 low-probability time saving states A started with the big hit C as a trigger. First, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, if an immediate short-time hit occurs, the remaining number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state A and the low-probability time-saving based on the immediate short-time hit. The number of times of variable display of the special symbol that can be executed in the state C is compared. Then, when the number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short hit is larger than the remaining number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state A. Controls to switch from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short-hit symbol is stopped (switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is enabled). Further, when the low-probability time-saving state A is switched to the low-probability time-saving state C, the remaining number of times of the variation display of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state A is discarded, and the execution is performed in the low-probability time-saving state C. It is controlled to newly count the number of possible variations of the special symbol (20 times, 40 times, 100 times according to the type of the immediate short hit symbol). That is, when the low-probability time-saving state A is switched to the low-probability time-saving state C, the time-saving state is controlled to be lower than the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol that should have been executed in the low-probability time-saving state A. The period is to be extended. On the other hand, when the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state A is larger than the number of fluctuations of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short hit. Maintains the low-probability time-saving state A without switching to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short-hit symbol is stopped. The low-probability time-saving state A is controlled to continue (switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is invalidated). In this way, if an immediate short hit occurs during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, the low-probability time-saving state with the larger number of fluctuation display of the special symbol is selected and executed. It is possible to execute an advantageous state for as long as possible without giving a feeling of regret or loss, and it is possible to continue the game with expectation.

As shown in FIG. 214, when the "immediate short hit A" is obtained in the Nth variation display of the special symbol during the control of the low probability time saving state A, "100-N <100" (N = When the switching condition (the number of times the special symbol changes are displayed) that has already been executed in the low-probability time-saving state B is satisfied, the low-probability time-saving state A is switched to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short hit A symbol is stopped. It is controlled like this. That is, if "immediate short hit A" is obtained during the execution of the 1st to 100th variation display of the special symbol in the low probability time saving state A, the low probability time saving state A is started after the immediate short hit A symbol is stopped. It is controlled to switch to the low probability time saving state C. In this way, during the execution of the 1st to 100th variation display of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving state A, the period during which the switching to the low-probability time-saving state C becomes effective when the "immediate short hit A" is reached. Is set as.

Further, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, if "immediate short-time hit B" is obtained in the Nth variation display of the special symbol, "100-N <40" (N = low-probability time-saving state B). When the switching condition (the number of times of variation display of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving state A already executed) is satisfied, the low-probability time-saving state A is changed to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short hit B symbol is stopped. It is controlled to switch. That is, if "immediate short hit B" is obtained during the execution of the 61st to 100th special symbol variation display in the low probability time saving state A, the low probability time saving state A is started after the immediate short hit B symbol is stopped. It is controlled to switch to the low probability time saving state C. On the other hand, if "immediate short hit B" is obtained during the execution of the 1st to 60th special symbol variation display in the low probability time saving state A, the low probability time saving state A is set after the immediate short hit B symbol is stopped. It is controlled to maintain. In this way, during the execution of the 1st to 60th special symbol variation display in the low-probability time-saving state A, the period during which the switching to the low-probability time-saving state C becomes invalid when the "immediate short hit B" is reached. On the other hand, during the execution of the 61st to 100th special symbol variation display in the low-probability time-saving state A, switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is performed when "immediate short-time hit B" is reached. It is set as a valid period.

Further, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, if "immediate short-time hit C" is obtained in the Nth variation display of the special symbol, "100-N <20" (N = low-probability time-saving state B). When the switching condition (the number of times of variation display of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving state A already executed) is satisfied, the low-probability time-saving state A is changed to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short hit C symbol is stopped. It is controlled to switch. That is, if "immediate short hit C" is obtained during the 81st to 100th variation display of the special symbol in the low probability time saving state A, the low probability time saving state A is started after the immediate short hit C symbol is stopped. It is controlled to switch to the low probability time saving state C. On the other hand, if "immediate short hit C" is obtained during the execution of the 1st to 80th special symbol variation display in the low probability time saving state A, the low probability time saving state A is set after the immediate short hit C symbol is stopped. It is controlled to maintain. In this way, during the execution of the 1st to 80th variation display of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving state A, the period during which the switching to the low-probability time-saving state C becomes invalid when the "immediate short-time hit C" is reached. On the other hand, during the execution of the 81st to 100th special symbol variation display in the low-probability time-saving state A, switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is performed when "immediate short-time hit C" is reached. It is set as a valid period.

Next, the production progress before and after the immediate short hit time during the control of the low probability time saving state A will be described. In this example, among the 1st to 100th variation display of the special symbol during the control of the low probability time saving state A, the "immediate short hit A" is obtained at the time of the Nth variation display of the special symbol (symbol variation Z). The case of controlling to switch from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short hit A symbol is stopped is described.

Specifically, during the execution of the 1st to 100th special symbol variation display during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, the switch to the low-probability time-saving state C is performed when the "immediate short-time hit A" is reached. It is set as a valid period. Then, during the period in which the switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is effective, when the "immediate short-time hit A" is reached, the low-probability time-saving state A is controlled to switch to the low-probability time-saving state C, and the low-probability time-saving state C is controlled. Since the period for controlling the state is extended, it is set as the feasible period for the extended acquisition effect. Further, during the period in which the switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is effective, in addition to executing the "pullback mode effect" indicating that the low-probability time-saving state A is being controlled, the effect display device 1600 is low. The "extension chance display" is executed to indicate that the period for controlling the probability time reduction state can be extended. Here, the "extension chance display" can be exemplified as an effect display in which a message image related to the extension (a message image "If the character X appears, the time may be shortened ...") is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (Not shown). As a result, during the execution of the "extension chance display", it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the extension acquisition effect is executed, and to enjoy whether or not the period for controlling to the low probability time saving state is extended.

In addition, when the short hit is immediately obtained during the execution of the symbol variation Z, which is the Nth variation display of the special symbol, among the 1st to 100th variation displays of the special symbol during the control of the low probability time saving state A. Executes the "extension acquisition effect", controls to switch from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short hit A symbol is stopped, and extends the period of controlling to the low-probability time-saving state. .. Here, the "extension acquisition effect" displays a display that encourages whether or not the character X appears from the screen edge of the effect display device 1600, and a success pattern (low probability time reduction) in which the character X appears in the center of the screen of the effect display device 1600. An effect that succeeds in extending the period for controlling the state) and a failure pattern in which the character X does not appear from the screen edge of the effect display device 1600 (an effect that fails to extend the period for controlling the low probability time saving state). ) Is performed (not shown). In addition, during the execution of the symbol variation Z, the extension acquisition effect is set as the executable period, and the "extension acquisition effect" for notifying whether or not the period for controlling to the low probability time saving state is extended is executed. In the "extension acquisition effect" that is executed when an immediate short hit occurs, an effect that succeeds in extending the control period to the low probability time reduction state (extension acquisition effect of the success pattern) is executed. As a result, during the execution of the "extension acquisition effect", it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the period for controlling to the low probability time saving state is extended.

In addition, when the immediate short hit occurs during the control of the low probability non-time reduction state, the control is performed to the low probability time reduction state C after the immediate short hit symbol is stopped, but the "extension acquisition effect" is low. It is an effect that is not executed when an immediate short hit occurs while controlling the probability non-time saving state. As a result, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, it is possible to enjoy an effect different from that of the low-probability non-time-saving state.

In addition, during the execution of the 1st to 100th variation display of the special symbol during the control of the low probability time saving state A, it is set as the executable period of the extended acquisition effect, and even if it does not become an immediate short hit, it is low. It is possible to execute an "extension acquisition effect" that notifies whether or not the period for controlling the probability time reduction state is extended. In this example, during the execution of the symbol variation X, which is the N-2nd special symbol variation display during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, the "extension acquisition effect" is executed and the immediate short is executed. In the "extension acquisition effect" that is executed when there is no hit, a gase effect (extension acquisition effect of a failure pattern) that fails to extend the period for controlling to a low probability time saving state is executed. While the symbol variation X is being executed, the "extension acquisition effect" is being executed, but since it is not an immediate short hit, the immediate short hit symbol is not stopped and displayed.

Further, after switching from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C, it is set as a period during which the switching to the new low-probability time-saving state C becomes effective when the "immediate short hit" is further obtained. .. Even in such a case, the remaining number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state C and the variation display of the special symbol that can be executed in the new low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short hit. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol that can be executed in the new low probability time saving state C based on the immediate short hit is larger, the probability is low after the immediate short hit symbol is stopped. It is controlled to switch from the time saving state C to a new low probability time saving state C. That is, when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol that can be executed in the new low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short-time hit is larger, the period for controlling to the low-probability time-saving state is extended. Further, the period during which the switching to the new low-probability time-saving state C becomes effective is set as the feasible period of the extended acquisition effect.

Further, when the low-probability time-saving state A is switched to the low-probability time-saving state C, the "help mode S" corresponding to the low-probability time-saving state C is being executed while the low-probability time-saving state C is being controlled. It has not been switched to the "help mode S effect" indicating that, and the "pullback mode effect" that was executed in the low probability time saving state A is continuously executed. In this way, before and after switching from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C, there is no change in that the "pullback mode effect" is executed, so that the control of the low-probability time-saving state A is continued (extended). You can make it look as if. Further, after switching from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C, it is set as a period during which the switching to the new low-probability time-saving state C becomes effective when the "immediate short hit" is further obtained. Therefore, in the effect display device 1600, the "extension chance display" is continuously executed.

In the above, if an immediate short hit occurs during the execution of the symbol variation Z, which is the Nth special symbol variation display during the control of the low probability time saving state A or the low probability time saving state B, the immediate short hit is obtained. At the time of the symbol change Z that became, the "extension acquisition effect" (extension acquisition effect of the success pattern) is executed to notify that the period for controlling to the low probability time saving state is extended, but the "extension acquisition effect" is executed. May be executed at the following timings. That is, the low-probability time-saving state set before the immediate short-hit after switching to the low-probability time-saving state C without executing the "extension acquisition effect" at the time of the symbol change Z that became the immediate short-hit. The "extension acquisition effect" (extension acquisition effect of the success pattern) may be executed at the timing when the number of variable display of the special symbol that can be executed in A or the low probability time saving state B expires. For example, the number of times of the variation display of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state A is set to 100 times, and the symbol variation Z which is the 80th variation display of the special symbol during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A. If an immediate short hit occurs during the execution of, after switching to the low probability time saving state C, a special symbol that can be executed in the low probability time saving state A set before the immediate short hit occurs. The "extension acquisition effect" is executed at the timing when the number of times of the variation display reaches 100 times, and the remaining number of times of the variation display of the special symbol that can be executed in the low probability time saving state C at that time is notified. As a result, it is possible to make it appear as if the period for controlling the low-probability time-saving state is suddenly extended without noticing that the immediate short hit has occurred until the "extension acquisition effect" is executed.

In addition, if an immediate short hit occurs during the execution of the symbol variation Z, which is the Nth special symbol variation display during the control of the low probability time saving state A or the low probability time saving state B, the immediate short hit is taken as the immediate short hit. At the time of the symbol change Z, the "extension acquisition effect" (extension acquisition effect of the success pattern) is executed to notify that the period for controlling to the low probability time saving state is extended, but the "extension acquisition effect" If a power failure occurs during the execution of, after the power is turned on again, the return processing for the execution of the "extension acquisition effect" is performed. In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the execution of the "extension acquisition effect", the time is controlled to a low probability by executing the "extension acquisition effect" after the power is turned on again. It is possible to recognize that the period is extended, and it is possible to prevent it from becoming impossible to grasp how long the period for controlling the low probability time saving state will continue.

Next, the immediate short hit time during the control of the low probability time saving state A of 599 times started with the big hit D as a trigger will be described. In order to prevent confusion with the previously explained "100 low-probability time saving states A started with the big hit C", the following 599 low-probability time saving started with the big hit D for convenience of explanation. The state A is described as "low probability time saving state A2".

If an immediate short hit occurs during control of the low-probability time-saving state A2, after the immediate short-hit symbol is stopped, regardless of the remaining number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state A2. The low-probability time-saving state A2 is maintained without switching to the low-probability time-saving state C, and the low-probability time-saving state A2 is continued for the remaining number of times of the variation display of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state A2. Controlling (disables switching to low probability time saving state C). That is, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A2, the above-mentioned "immediate short-time hit symbol invalid period (a period during which the low-probability time-saving state C is not controlled when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes" immediate short-time hit "). The same control as "is performed. As described above, the low-probability time-saving state A2 continuously continues to the low-probability time-saving state B through 599 special symbol fluctuation displays, and the low-probability time-saving state C is in the middle of such a low-probability time-saving state A2. If it is switched to, depending on the timing, the continuity with the low probability time saving state B may be cut off, but in this example, such a disadvantageous situation for the player can be avoided. Further, for example, when switching to the low-probability time-saving state C 100 times in the variation display of the special symbol after the 501st time, the above-mentioned disadvantageous situation does not occur, but the low-probability time-saving state C has no profit. Therefore, there is a concern that the original fun of the low-probability time-saving state C may be reduced, but in this example, such a player can avoid the concern.

In the above, the low-probability time-saving state A and the low-probability time-saving state C, and the low-probability time-saving state B and the low-probability time-saving state C are set to the same time-saving performance. That is, in the low probability time saving states A to C, when the normal lottery is performed, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be "normal hit" is increased, or the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal hit". By increasing the time and the number of times that the variable winning opening 2003, which is closed by the variable winning opening door 2521, is opened, it is easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003. It is said that the probability that the lottery result of the symbol will be "normal hit" and the time and the number of times that the variable winning opening 2003 is opened are the same. On the other hand, the low-probability time-saving state A and the low-probability time-saving state C, and the low-probability time-saving state B and the low-probability time-saving state C may be configured to be set to different time-saving performances. In such a configuration, the higher the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be "normal hit", and the longer the time and the number of times the variable winning opening 2003 is opened, the more the game ball to the variable winning opening 2003. It is said that B can be easily accepted and the time saving performance is high.

Specifically, the first time saving control in the low probability time saving state A and the low probability time saving state B and the second time saving control in the low probability time saving state C are set. When the time saving performance of 2 is higher, when the immediate short hit occurs during the control of the low probability time saving state A or the low probability time saving state B, the low probability time saving state after the immediate short hit symbol is stopped. It is controlled to switch from A or the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C. On the other hand, when the first time-saving control has higher time-saving performance than the second time-saving control, the immediate short-time hit occurs during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A or the low-probability time-saving state B. It is controlled so as to maintain the low-probability time-saving state A and the low-probability time-saving state B without switching to the low-probability time-saving state C after the hit symbol is stopped. Thereby, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A and the low-probability time-saving state B, it is possible to enjoy whether or not it is possible to switch to the low-probability time-saving state C, which is a time-saving performance advantageous to the player.

Further, in the above, when the time saving performance of the first time saving control is higher than that of the second time saving control, the immediate short hit is obtained during the control of the low probability time saving state A or the low probability time saving state B. , It is controlled to maintain the low probability time saving state A and the low probability time saving state B after the immediate short hit symbol is stopped, but in addition to this, when the immediate short hit is reached, the low probability time saving state A and The remaining number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state B is compared with the number of fluctuation displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short hit. If the number of fluctuations of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short-time hit is larger, the low-probability time-saving state A or the low-probability time-saving state B is lower than the low-probability time-saving state A or the low-probability time-saving state B after the immediate short-hit symbol is stopped. It may be controlled to switch to the probability time saving state C. As a result, when the remaining number of variations of the special symbol that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state A or the low-probability time-saving state B is small, the period for controlling to the low-probability time-saving state is extended. You can enjoy whether you can switch to C.

Further, in the above, the case where the immediate short hit is obtained in the low probability non-time saving state and the case where the immediate short hit is obtained in the low probability time saving state A or the low probability time saving state B are the same period and the same. The low-probability time-saving state C is controlled by the time-saving performance of, but apart from this, the period and time-saving performance of the low-probability time-saving state C are changed according to the game state at the time of immediate short hit. It may be. For example, when the immediate short hit A is reached in the low probability non-time saving state A of 100 times triggered by the big hit C, the low probability time saving state C based on the immediate short hit A is 100 times low as described above. While switching to the probability time saving state C is controlled, when the immediate short hit A is reached in the low probability non-time saving state B, the low probability time saving state C based on this immediate short hit A is 120 times of low probability time saving. The switch to the state C may be controlled. Further, for example, when the immediate short hit A is reached in the low probability non-time saving state A of 100 times triggered by the big hit C, the above-mentioned first low probability time saving state C based on the immediate short hit A is obtained. While switching to the low-probability time-saving state C accompanied by the time-saving control is performed, when the immediate short-time hit A is obtained in the low-probability non-time-saving state B, the low-probability time-saving state C based on this immediate short-time hit A is the first. It is also possible to switch and control to the low-probability time-saving state C accompanied by the time-saving control of 2.

Further, as another example, when the immediate short hit A is reached in the low probability non-time saving state A of 100 times triggered by the big hit C, the low probability time saving state C based on the immediate short hit A is described above. While switching to the low-probability time-saving state C 100 times as described above, when the immediate short-time hit A is reached again in the low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short-time hit A, this second immediate short-time hit The low-probability time-saving state C based on A may be switched to the low-probability time-saving state C 120 times for control. Further, for example, when the immediate short hit A is reached in the low probability non-time saving state A of 100 times triggered by the big hit C, the second low probability time saving state C based on the immediate short hit A is described above. While switching to the low-probability time-saving state C with time-saving control is performed, when the low-probability time-saving state C based on this immediate short-time hit A becomes the immediate short-time hit A again, this second immediate short-time hit The low-probability time-saving state C based on A may be switched to the low-probability time-saving state C accompanied by the third time-saving control (time-saving control having higher time-saving performance than the second time-saving control).

By making the period and the time saving performance of the low probability time saving state C different according to the gaming state at the time of the immediate short hit in this way, the game playability using the immediate short hit can be further diversified. It is possible to improve the interest.

[Restriction on setting suggestion effect when ID code does not match]
(About ID code)
In the present embodiment, the game board 5 that allows the game area 5a to be visually recognized from the front is attached to the main body frame 4, and is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 with respect to the door frame 3. The door frame top unit 450 (decorative member), the plate decoration unit 250, and the effect operation unit 300 (operation device) that is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210 and can be operated by the player are attached. As shown in FIG. 215, the game board 5, the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit 300 can be attached to and detached from each other with the pachinko machine 1 attached to the game island in the hall. As a group for each model series, it is possible to install a predetermined game board 5, a door frame top unit 450, and a production operation unit 300 as a set. In other words, when changing to a new model series, with the pachinko machine 1 attached to the game island in the hall, the game board 5, door frame top unit 450, and production corresponding to the series of the model before the change. After removing the operation unit 300, the game board 5, the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit 300 corresponding to the new model series will be installed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the cost of changing the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 (door frame base unit 100) when it is desired to renew not only the game playability but also the appearance of the gaming machine when changing models, and the efficiency is improved. The playability and the appearance of the gaming machine can be renewed.

The peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 is electrically connected to the door frame top relay board (not shown) attached to the door frame top unit 450. The door frame top relay board includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker, and a top side speaker, and a door frame sub of the door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105. As a result, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted on, for example, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 via the door frame top relay board. It is possible to control the light emission of various LEDs.

Further, the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 is electrically connected to the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 332 includes an effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 (front decorative board 321 and rear decorative board 322), a button outer decorative board 355, a vibration motor 356, a contact detection sensor main body 358, a button inner decorative board 364, and an operation button. It is for relaying the connection between the elevating drive motor 367, the push detection sensor 373, the elevating detection sensor 374, the protrusion output detection sensor 375, and the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381, and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210. be. As a result, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 can control light emission of various LEDs mounted on, for example, the front decorative board 321 and the rear decorative board 322 via the operation unit relay board 332.

As shown in FIG. 216, the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450 and the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the effect operation unit 300 are unique for identifying the model series. A unique ID code, which is special information with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world), is stored in advance. This ID code has a unique ID code for each model series and cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used. Then, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 can take out the ID code from the door frame top relay board and the operation unit relay board 332 and refer to it. Further, the RAM built in the peripheral control unit 1511 stores a table for referring to the ID code attached to the door frame top relay board and the operation unit relay board 332. The ID code stored in this table matches the model series with the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450 that matches the model series with respect to the game board 5. It matches the ID code of the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the effect operation unit 300, respectively.

Then, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 has an ID code stored in the reference table and an ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450. A predetermined determination period determines whether or not the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the effect operation unit 300 match. Judgment is made within. Here, when the door frame top unit 450 having the same model series (having a regular relationship) is attached to the game board 5, the ID code stored in the reference table and the door frame are attached. The ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the top unit 450 matches, while the model series does not match the game board 5 (not in a regular relationship). When attached, the respective ID codes do not match. Similarly, when the effect operation unit 300 having the same model series (having a regular relationship) is attached to the game board 5, the ID code stored in the reference table and the effect operation unit The ID code of the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the 300 matches, while the production operation unit 300 whose model series does not match (not in a regular relationship) is attached to the game board 5. If so, the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the effect operation unit 300 do not match.

If only the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match the game board 5, the effect display device 1600 is used to indicate that the effect operation unit 300 whose model series does not match is attached. During an error notification pattern 1 (for example, "Please check the type of door frame top unit" is displayed) is executed. Further, when only the ID code of the effect operation unit 300 does not match the game board 5, the effect display device 1600 is used to indicate that the effect operation unit 300 whose model series does not match is attached. The notification pattern 2 during an error to be notified (for example, the display of "Please check the type of the effect operation unit") is executed. If neither the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 nor the ID code of the effect operation unit 300 match with respect to the game board 5, the effect display device 1600 is used to display a series of models. Error notification pattern 3 that notifies that the door frame top unit 450 that does not match and the production operation unit 300 that does not match the model series are installed (for example, "Check the types of the door frame top unit and the production operation unit." Please do the message).

On the other hand, when the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 are not attached to the door frame 3, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 relays the door frame top relay board and the operation unit when the power is turned on. The ID code cannot be taken out from the board 332 and referred to. In such a case, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 has an ID code stored in the reference table and an ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450. , And whether or not the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the effect operation unit 300 match. At that time, the ID code is not input to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the ID code cannot be confirmed. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is not connected when the ID code is not input from the door frame top relay board or the operation unit relay board 332 even after the predetermined determination period has passed. It is determined that the state is.

Further, when only the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 cannot be confirmed (cannot be acquired) with respect to the game board 5, an error notifying that the effect operation unit 300 is not attached by using the effect display device 1600 is performed. The middle notification pattern 4 (for example, the display of "Please check the connection of the door frame top unit") is executed. Further, when only the ID code of the effect operation unit 300 cannot be confirmed (cannot be acquired) on the game board 5, an error is being generated to notify that the effect operation unit 300 is not attached by using the effect display device 1600. The notification pattern 5 (for example, the display of "Please check the connection of the effect operation unit") is executed. If neither the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 nor the ID code of the effect operation unit 300 can be confirmed (acquired) with respect to the game board 5, the effect display device 1600 is used to use the door frame. The error notification pattern 6 (for example, "Please check the connection between the door frame top unit and the effect operation unit" is displayed) for notifying that the top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 are not attached is executed.

Here, with respect to the game board 5, the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450 and the ID code of the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the effect operation unit 300 match. Regardless of whether or not, it is possible to control the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5 at the time of executing a normal effect (a variable effect or a non-variable effect). Similarly, with respect to the game board 5, even if there is a part of the door frame top unit 450 or the effect operation unit 300 whose ID code cannot be confirmed, the normal effect (effect during fluctuation or effect during non-variation). ) Is executed, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5 can be controlled to emit light.

Further, regarding the door frame top unit 450, when the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450 match, it is normal. At the time of executing the effect (effect during fluctuation or effect during non-variation), for example, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right via the door frame top relay board. While it is possible to control the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the decorative board 457, if they do not match, the series of the model does not match (not in a regular relationship), and the light emission of the door frame top unit 450 The various LEDs mounted on the board are not controlled to emit light, and the various LEDs are turned off. If the door frame top unit 450 is not attached and the ID code of the door frame top relay board cannot be confirmed, the light emission control of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame top unit 450 is performed. There is no.

Similarly, for the effect operation unit 300, when the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the effect operation unit 300 match, it is normal. At the time of executing the effect (effect during fluctuation or effect during non-variation), for example, various LEDs mounted on the front decorative board 321 and the rear decorative board 322 are controlled to emit light via the operation unit relay board 332. However, if they do not match, the series of the model does not match (there is no regular relationship). Various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the effect operation unit 300 are not controlled to emit light. The various LEDs are turned off. Further, when the effect operation unit 300 is not attached and the operation unit relay board 332 cannot be confirmed, the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the effect operation unit 300 are not controlled to emit light.

Further, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, when controlling various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5 to emit light, the light emitting board of the door frame top unit 450 is used as a member located around the game board 5. The light emission control of the various LEDs mounted and the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the effect operation unit 300 is performed in cooperation with each other. As a result, it is possible to execute an integrated light emitting effect using not only the game board 5 but also the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300. However, among the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300, for the parts whose ID codes do not match the game board 5, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the parts that do not match can be controlled to emit light. Because there is no such thing, it is not possible to participate in the light emission production. Similarly, among the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300, the parts that are not attached to the door frame 3 and whose ID code cannot be confirmed are mounted on the light emitting board of the parts whose ID code cannot be confirmed. Since there is no light emission control of various LEDs, it is not possible to participate in the light emission effect.

In this example, the game board 5 can be attached to and detached from the main body frame 4, and the game board 5 can be installed on a predetermined main body frame 4. The peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 is electrically connected to the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 is provided as a dish left decorative board 273 around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 via the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3. Plate right decorative board 278, door frame left side upper decorative board 422, door frame left side lower decorative board 423, door frame right side upper decorative board 432, door frame right side lower decorative board 433, door frame top center decorative board 455, It is connected to the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. As a result, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 passes through the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4, the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3, and the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the door window 101a in the door frame 3 Plate left decorative board 273, dish right decorative board 278, door frame left side upper decorative board 422, door frame left side lower decorative board 423, door frame right side upper decorative board 432, door frame right side It is possible to control light emission of various LEDs mounted on the lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457.

As shown in FIG. 216, the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 has a unique ID, which is special information with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying the model series. The code is stored in advance. This ID code has a unique ID code for each model series and cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used. Then, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 can take out the ID code from the interface board 635 and refer to it. Further, the RAM built in the peripheral control unit 1511 stores a table for referring to the ID code attached to the interface board 635. The ID code stored in this table matches the ID code of the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 in which the model series matches.

Then, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 match. Judgment is made within the judgment period. Here, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 whose model series matches (in a regular relationship), the ID code stored in the reference table and the main body frame 4 If the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 that matches the ID code of the interface board 635 but does not match the model series (not in a regular relationship), it is stored in the reference table. The ID code used does not match the ID code of the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. If the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 do not match, the model series do not match (there is no regular relationship). On the other hand, since the game board 5 is attached, the launch control for launching the game ball B from the ball launcher 540 cannot be performed, and the game is stopped.

As described above, when the predetermined execution conditions are satisfied, the door frame top unit is used as a member located around the game board 5 when controlling the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5. The light emission control of the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the 450 and the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the effect operation unit 300 is performed in cooperation, but it is mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame 3. Light emission control can be performed in cooperation with each of the various LEDs. As a result, it is possible to execute an integrated light emitting effect using not only the game board 5, the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300, but also the door frame 3.

(About setting suggestion production)
In the present embodiment, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit 300 while the symbol is changing or not changing. Various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame 3, and the like are used to perform a setting suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value. The currently set value is stored in the RAM on the main control board 1310 side, and is currently set at a predetermined timing (when the change of the set value is completed, the timing when the symbol change starts, etc.). By transmitting a command related to the set value to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the currently set set value can be grasped on the peripheral control board 1510 side.

In the setting suggestion effect, any of the suggestion effects A to D is executed as an effect according to the currently set set value. Specifically, an execution determination (execution lottery) of which of the suggestion effects A to D is to be executed is performed. In the execution determination, a predetermined random number value is determined by the peripheral control MPU when it is determined to execute the suggestion effect. Suggestion effect A that acquires X and suggests a setting value 6, suggestion effect B that suggests that there is a high possibility of a high setting value (setting values 4 to 6), and an even number of setting values (setting values 2, 4, 6). ), Which suggests that there is a high possibility of (1, 3, 5), and the suggestive effect D, which suggests that there is a high possibility of odd-numbered setting values (1, 3, 5). It is determined according to the random number value X.

Here, when the currently set value is the set value 1, the suggestion effect D has a high probability (suggestion effect A: suggestion effect B: suggestion effect C: suggestion effect D = 0: 1: 1: 8). ) Is referred to, and the effect determination is made according to the random number value X with reference to the suggestion effect distribution table 1. Further, when the currently set value is the set value 2, the suggestion effect C has a high probability (suggestion effect A: suggestion effect B: suggestion effect C: suggestion effect D = 0: 1: 8: 1). The effect determination is made according to the random number value X with reference to the suggestion effect distribution table 2 determined in. Further, when the currently set value is the set value 3, the suggestion effect D has a high probability (suggestion effect A: suggestion effect B: suggestion effect C: suggestion effect D = 0: 1: 1: 8). The effect determination is made according to the random number value X with reference to the suggestion effect distribution table 3 determined in. Further, when the currently set value is the set value 4, the suggestion effect B and the suggestion effect C have a high probability (suggestion effect A: suggestion effect B: suggestion effect C: suggestion effect D = 0: 5: The effect determination according to the random number value X is performed with reference to the suggestion effect distribution table 4 determined in 4: 1). Further, when the currently set value is the set value 5, the suggestion effect B and the suggestion effect D have a high probability (suggestion effect A: suggestion effect B: suggestion effect C: suggestion effect D = 0: 5: The effect determination is made according to the random number value X with reference to the suggestion effect distribution table 5 determined in 1: 4). Further, when the currently set setting value is the setting value 6, the suggestion effects A to D including the suggestion effect A suggesting the setting value 6 which is not determined when the setting values are 1 to 5 are included. Is determined with a predetermined probability (suggestion effect A: suggestion effect B: suggestion effect C: suggestion effect D = 3: 4: 2: 1). Is done. That is, since the suggestion effects A to D may be output regardless of the current set value, the set value is not fixed, but the suggestion effect A is currently set when the suggestion effect A is executed. It is confirmed that the set value is the set value 6. In this way, when the suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to have an expectation according to the suggestion of the set value that can be grasped from the suggestion effect.

Then, at the time of executing the suggestion effect, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5 and the light emitting board of the door frame top unit 450 are used to emit light with a predetermined emission color for each type of suggestion effect. The various LEDs mounted, the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the effect operation unit 300, the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame 3, and the like are controlled to emit light. Specifically, as the suggestion effect A that suggests the set value 6, the suggestion effect B that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode (rainbow color) and suggests that there is a high possibility of a high set value (set values 4 to 6). As a suggestion effect C that blinks in red and suggests that there is a high possibility of even-numbered setting values (setting values 2, 4, 6), it blinks in blue and odd-numbered setting values (1, 3, 6,). As the suggestion effect D suggesting that the possibility of 5) is high, the light emission is controlled so as to blink in green.

As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame top unit 450, and various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the effect operation unit 300. The various LEDs and the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting substrate of the door frame 3 can be divided into a plurality of groups and can be controlled to emit light in each group, and each group can emit light in a predetermined emission color. Is possible.

First, as described in detail above, the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 attached to the game board 5 is a back front peripheral decoration body formed in an annular shape along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5. The back front peripheral decoration body 3201 is provided with a back front peripheral decoration substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs for light emitting and decorating the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 are mounted. The plurality of LEDs on the peripheral decoration substrate make it possible to independently emit and decorate the portions divided into a plurality in the circumferential direction. As shown in FIG. 217, as the light emitting board of the game board 5, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front peripheral decoration board are used to illuminate the upper left portion of the back front peripheral decorative body 3201. Multiple LEDs mounted on the decorative board are LED1, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the back front peripheral decoration board for emitting and decorating the lower left are LED2, and the back front peripheral decoration board for emitting and decorating the lower right. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the above are divided into LED3, and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front peripheral decoration substrate for illuminating and decorating the upper right part are divided into LED4, and the LEDs are emitted for each group of LEDs 1 to 4. It is possible to control the emission of LEDs of the same group to the same color.

As shown in FIG. 218, as for the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame top unit 450, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top left decorative board 456 are mounted on the LED5 and the door frame top center decorative board 455. The plurality of LEDs to be mounted are divided into LED6, and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are divided into LEDs 7, and the LEDs are controlled to emit light for each group of LEDs 5 to 7, and the LEDs of the same group have the same color. It is possible to control the light emission.

Further, as for the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the effect operation unit 300, among the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front decorative board 321 are mounted on the LED 8 and the rear decorative board 322. A plurality of LEDs are divided into LEDs 9, and it is possible to control the light emission of the LEDs for each group of the LEDs 8 to 9 and control the light emission of the LEDs of the same group to the same color.

Further, as for the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame 3, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame of the door frame left side unit 420 are the LEDs 10, and the door of the door frame left side unit 420. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the frame are LED 11, the dish left decorative board 273 provided behind the dish left decorative lens 272, and the dish right decorative board provided behind the dish right decorative lens 277. Multiple LEDs mounted on 278 are LEDs 12, and multiple LEDs mounted on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430 are LEDs 13, and the door frame right side unit 430 door frame right side upper decorative board. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the 432 are divided into LEDs 14, and it is possible to control the light emission of the LEDs for each group of the LEDs 11 to 14 and control the light emission of the LEDs of the same group to the same color.

Further, as the light emitting substrate of the game board 5, in addition to the above-mentioned back front peripheral edge decorative substrate, a variable winning opening decorative substrate (not shown) for light emitting decoration of the variable winning opening 2003 and a first starting port 2004 emit light. A first starting port decorative substrate for decoration (not shown) and a second starting port decorative substrate for light emitting and decorating the second starting port 2005 (not shown) are provided. In this example, among the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the variable winning opening decorative board are LEDs 15, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first starting port decorative board are LEDs 16. , A plurality of LEDs mounted on the second starting port decorative substrate are divided into LEDs 17, and it is possible to control the light emission of the LEDs for each group of LEDs 15 to 17 and control the light emission of the LEDs of the same group to the same color. It has become.

FIG. 219 is a timing chart showing an example of a suggestion effect executed as an effect during the change of the symbol. Here, when the power is turned on, the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 match with the game board 5, and the rainbow is used as the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6 while the design is changing. The case of executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the light emitting mode will be described below.

First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it synchronizes with the fluctuation display of the special symbol as an effect according to the fluctuation pattern specified from the fluctuation pattern command. The effect display device 1600 starts a variable effect such as a variable display of a decorative pattern, and in conjunction with the display of the effect display device 1600, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and an effect operation unit 300. LEDs 8 to 9 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are controlled to emit light (timing t0). Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches a predetermined predetermined timing, the effect display device 1600 prompts the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 (for example, "effect". Press the operation button! ”) To execute the button operation promotion effect.

Then, at the timing t1, the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, or the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is not pressed, and the button valid period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. Then, LEDs 1 and 2 of the game board 5 are "red", LEDs 3 to 4 of the game board 5 are "purple", LEDs 5 to 6 of the door frame top unit 450 are "blue", LED 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the door. LED 8 of the frame 3 is "green", LED 9 of the door frame 3 and LED 10 of the door frame 3 are "orange", LEDs 11 to 12 of the door frame 3 are "yellow", and LEDs 13 to 14 of the door frame 3 are "white". Make it emit light with. That is, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light with different emission colors for each of the two groups. ..

Then, with respect to LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). , The LED that emits light in "red" is emitted in "purple", the LED that emits in "purple" is emitted in "blue", and the LED that emits in "blue" is emitted in "green" and "green". The LED that emits "orange", the LED that emits "orange" is "yellow", the LED that emits "yellow" is "white", the LED that emits "white" is "red", Change to. As described above, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 have a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). Each time, the emission color of the LED for each of the two groups is changed in the predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" until the timing t10 is reached. I try to repeat such regular changes (for example, for 5 seconds).

As described above, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 have their respective emission colors in a short unit emission time. By controlling to switch to a plurality of emission colors in order, these LEDs can cooperate to visually visually recognize the emission in the rainbow emission mode, and emit light with impact. The production can be executed. Further, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are controlled by interlocking the LEDs 1 to 14, and the LEDs 1 to 14 are linked. By emitting light in a plurality of colors so that the two groups emit light in different emission colors and switching the emission colors in a short time, it is possible to execute a light emission effect having a greater impact than usual.

In this example, as the light emission of the rainbow light emission mode, seven colors are made to appear at the same time by using a plurality of LEDs, and the light emission colors of each are switched regularly. It is not necessary to have seven colors, as long as a predetermined number of three or more colors appear at the same time.

On the other hand, as the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, when the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit 300 LEDs 8 to 9 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved, whereas LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are not involved. Then, with respect to the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5, during the execution period of the suggestion effect A, the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern is continued regardless of the emission color constituting the rainbow light emission mode.

Further, as the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, during the execution period of the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and the plurality of display areas are different from each other. The effect image of the rainbow mode to be displayed in the display color is displayed. In such a rainbow-type effect image, the display color displayed in each of the plurality of display areas is changed to "red-> purple-> blue-> green-> orange-> yellow-> white" every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). The changes are made in a predetermined order of "→ red", and such regular changes are repeated until the timing t10 is reached (for example, 5 seconds). The target for displaying the effect image in the rainbow mode may be an effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, for example, a background image, or one of the display areas of the effect display device 1600. An effect image displayed on the unit, for example, an effect image such as a character or an item may be targeted.

Further, as described in detail above, the back-up front effect unit 3300 attached to the game board 5 has a rectangular back-up front decoration 3310 that is long in the left-right direction in the front view and behind the back-top front decoration 3310. It is provided with a back-up front decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a back-up front elevating unit (not shown) for raising and lowering the back-up front decoration body 3310. There is. The back-up front decoration body 3310 is provided so that the seven rankings of sumo such as "Yokozuna", "Ozeki", and "Sekiwake" are arranged from the left. Each of the seven numbers can be independently luminescent and decorated. In this example, as the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, during the execution period of the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, each of the seven numbered display bodies is lit in the rainbow light emission mode that emits light in a different light emission color. In such a display body of the rainbow emission mode, the emission color emitted by each of the seven numbers is changed in a predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red". In this way, such regular changes are repeated until the timing t10 is reached (for example, 5 seconds).

As described above, when the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6 is executed during the fluctuation of the symbol, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit LEDs 8 to 9 of 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in executing a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode, but LEDs 1 to 14 are also involved in executing suggestive effects B to D. And the light emission effect is executed. That is, when executing the suggestion effect B suggesting that there is a high possibility of a high set value (set values 4 to 6), LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 are produced. LEDs 8 to 9 of the operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to execute a light emitting effect that blinks in red, suggesting that there is a high possibility of an even set value (setting values 2, 4, 6). When the suggestion effect C is executed, LEDs 1 to 14 are also involved to execute a light emission effect that blinks in blue, suggesting that there is a high possibility of an odd number of set values (1, 3, 5). When the effect D is executed, the LEDs 1 to 14 are also involved to execute the light emitting effect that blinks in green.

Specifically, when the suggestion effect B suggesting that there is a high possibility of a high set value (set values 4 to 6) is executed, the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is moved by the player at timing t1. When the button validity period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses without pressing or pressing the effect operating unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and LEDs 5 to 4 of the door frame top unit 450 7. The LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light so as to blink in "red". Further, when the suggestion effect C suggesting that there is a high possibility of an even number of set values (set values 2, 4, 6) is executed, LEDs 1 to 14 are also made to emit light so as to blink in "blue". Further, when the suggestion effect D suggesting that there is a high possibility of an odd number of set values (1, 3, 5) is executed, the LEDs 1 to 14 are also made to emit light so as to blink in "green". That is, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 blink in the same emission color for each group. To emit light.

(Regarding restrictions on setting suggestion effects when ID codes do not match)
In the above, the case where the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 match with the game board 5 when the power is turned on has been described, but the door frame top unit 450 with respect to the game board 5 has been described. If either one or both of the ID codes of the effect operation unit 300 and the effect operation unit 300 do not match, at least a part of the light emission effect in the emission color corresponding to the suggestion effect A to D is restricted when the suggestion effect is executed. ing. Similarly, when either or both of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 are not connected to the door frame 3, the suggestion effects A to D are supported when the suggestion effect is executed. At least a part of the light emission effect in the light emission color is limited.

In this example, when the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 matches the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 can be controlled to emit light, whereas the ID code is If they do not match, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 are not controlled to emit light, and the LEDs 5 to 7 are turned off. Similarly, when the ID code of the effect operation unit 300 matches the game board 5, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 can be controlled to emit light, whereas the ID codes match. If not, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are not controlled to emit light, and the LEDs 8 to 9 are turned off. That is, among the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300, for the parts whose ID codes do not match with the game board 5, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the parts that do not match can be controlled to emit light. Instead, the LED is turned off while the symbol is changing or not changing.

FIG. 220 is a timing chart showing an example of a suggestion effect executed as an effect during the change of the symbol when there is a part whose ID code does not match with respect to the game board 5. Here, when the power is turned on, the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 among the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 does not match with the game board 5, and the set value 6 is set while the symbol is changing. As the suggestion effect A suggesting the above, a case where the execution of the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is determined will be described below. When the ID code of the effect operation unit 300 does not match the game board 5, or when the ID codes of both the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 do not match the game board 5. The same control is performed during the execution period of the suggestion effect.

First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it synchronizes with the fluctuation display of the special symbol as an effect according to the fluctuation pattern specified from the fluctuation pattern command. The effect display device 1600 starts a variable effect such as a variable display of a decorative pattern, and in conjunction with the display of the effect display device 1600, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LED 10 of the door frame 3 Light emission control of ~ 14 (timing t0). At this time, for the door frame top unit 450 whose ID code does not match the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 are not controlled to emit light, and the LEDs 5 to 7 are turned off. Become. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches a predetermined predetermined timing, the effect display device 1600 prompts the operation of the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 (for example,). "Press the effect operation button!") Is performed. The button operation promotion effect is executed (timing tA).

Then, when the button operation promotion effect is started at the timing tA, among the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. Not only LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 whose ID codes do not match the game board 5, but also LEDs 8 to 9 and the game board of the production operation unit 300 whose ID codes match the game board 5. The LEDs 1 to 4 of 5 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are also turned off. That is, when the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match the game board 5, not only the door frame top unit 450 but also the effect operation unit 300 whose ID code matches the game board 5 is included. As described above, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are turned off.

Then, at the timing t1, the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, or the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is not pressed, and the button valid period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. Then, as the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, although it is the timing to execute the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode, the light emission that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode until the timing t10 is reached (for example, 5 seconds). There is no directing. Specifically, among the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, the ID code is assigned to the game board 5. Not only LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 that do not match, but also LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 whose ID codes match with respect to the game board 5. The LED is turned off. That is, when the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match the game board 5, not only the door frame top unit 450 but also the effect operation unit 300 whose ID code matches the game board 5 is included. As described above, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are turned off.

On the other hand, between the timing t1 and the timing t10, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are turned off. , LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit in red. That is, when the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match the game board 5, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300. Instead of the light emitting effect in which the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved and lit in the rainbow light emitting mode, the light emitting effect in which the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved and lit in red is executed.

As described above, when there is no part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5 (all parts match), during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6. , LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, the rainbow light emitting mode is used by using the LEDs 1 to 14. The execution of the light emission effect that lights up with is suppressed. Here, if the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 cannot be controlled to emit light, so other LEDs (game board). When an attempt is made to execute a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode using LEDs 1 to 4 of 5, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, one of the emission colors constituting the rainbow light emitting mode. It becomes an incomplete mode in which the portion is missing, and the light is emitted in a mode in which the rainbow light emitting mode is not established. Therefore, when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, the ID code is sent to the game board 5 during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6. By suppressing the execution of the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode including the matching parts, it is possible to prevent the light emission in the mode in which the rainbow light emission mode is not established, and the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6 is executed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which it cannot be determined whether or not the user is present.

Further, as described above, when there is no part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5 (all parts match), it fluctuates at the timing t1 when the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6 is executed. When the execution of the effect according to the fluctuation pattern specified from the pattern command is stopped, but there is a part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5, the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6. At the timing tA before the timing t1 to execute, the execution of the effect according to the fluctuation pattern specified from the fluctuation pattern command is stopped, and the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 are stopped. The LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are turned off. As a result, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, It is possible to implicitly notify in advance that the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode cannot be executed by using the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3.

Further, as described above, when there is no part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5 (all parts match), the execution period of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6 (timing t1 to t10). ), The LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light so as to change with a part of the emission colors constituting the rainbow light emission mode, but there is a component whose ID code does not match with that of the game board 5. In this case, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light so as to light in red without changing the emission color. There is. Here, when there is no part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5 (all parts match), the suggestion effect B suggesting that there is a high possibility of a high set value (set values 4 to 6). When the above is executed, the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light so as to blink in red. That is, when there is a part whose ID code does not match with that of the game board 5, the suggestion effect B is used instead of the light emission effect of lighting the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 in the rainbow light emission mode as the suggestion effect A. A light-emitting effect that lights up in red, similar to that of the door, is being executed. As a result, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed, so that it is not possible to notify that the set value 6 is set. By executing a light emitting effect that lights up in red using LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, it is possible to notify as if there is a high possibility of a high setting value (setting values 4 to 6), and there is no expectation. It is possible to prevent the situation from occurring.

If there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect B suggesting that there is a high possibility of a high set value (set values 4 to 6) is high. ), Instead of the light emitting effect in which LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved and blink in red. , LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in the light emission effect of lighting in red. Further, when there is a part whose ID code does not match with respect to the game board 5, the execution period (timing) of the suggestion effect C suggesting that there is a high possibility that the set value is an even number (set values 2, 4, 6). In t1 to t10), LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to produce a light emitting effect that blinks in blue. Instead, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in performing a light emitting effect of lighting in blue. Further, when there is no part whose ID code does not match with respect to the game board 5 (all parts match), a suggestion effect suggesting that there is a high possibility of an odd number of set values (1, 3, 5). During the execution period of D (timing t1 to t10), LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved. Instead of the light emitting effect that blinks in green, the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in executing the light emitting effect that lights in green.

In this example, when there is no part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5 (all parts match), in the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to perform a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, with respect to the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5, the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern is continued regardless of the light emission color constituting the rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, even when there is a part whose ID code does not match with that of the game board 5, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 Does not turn off the LEDs like LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and continues the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern. I am trying to do it. As a result, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed, but the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 correspond to the fluctuation pattern. By continuing the light emission effect, it is possible to maintain a situation in which expectations can be expected for the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern.

Among the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the variable winning opening decorative board are LEDs 15, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first starting port decorative board are LEDs 16. (2) Starting port A plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate are divided into LEDs 17, and the LED mounting surface of these decorative substrates is coated with a white solder resist (protective material) so as to improve the reflection efficiency. Has been done. For this reason, even when a plurality of full-color LEDs that can emit light are emitted in a wide variety of colors, it is possible to uniformly reflect all the light and develop a vivid color. The first starting port 2004 and the LED 17 can make each of the second starting port 2005 brighter and more vividly (clearly) luminescently decorated, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, for LEDs 15 to 17, LEDs that emit light only in a single color (for example, red) may be used, and even when such LEDs are used, the variable winning openings 2003 are used by the LEDs 15, and the first starting ports 2004 are used by the LEDs 16. Each of the second starting ports 2005 can be brightly and vividly (clearly) luminescently decorated by the LED 17, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in this example, when there is a part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5, there is no part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5 (all parts match). In the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. The production image of is displayed. That is, when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the door frame While LEDs 5 to 7 of the top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are not used to perform a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode, the effect display device 1600 is a rainbow. The effect image of the aspect is displayed. As a result, as long as attention is paid to the light emitting area (light emission by the LEDs 1 to 14) around the display area of the effect display device 1600, it cannot be determined whether or not the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6 is executed, but the effect is produced. By paying attention to the display area of the display device 1600, it can be grasped that the set value 6 is suggested by the effect image of the rainbow mode.

Further, in this example, when there is a part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5, the same as when there is no part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5 (all parts match). During the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, each of the seven numbered display bodies in the back-up front decorative body 3310 is lit in a rainbow light emitting mode that emits light in different light emitting colors. That is, when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the door frame While LEDs 5 to 7 of the top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are not used to perform a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode, the back upper front decoration body 3310 is not used. , Each of the seven numbered display bodies is lit in a rainbow emission mode that emits light in different emission colors. As a result, as long as attention is paid to the light emitting area (light emission by the LEDs 1 to 14) around the display area of the effect display device 1600, it cannot be determined whether or not the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6 is executed, but the effect is produced. By paying attention to the back-up front decorative body 3310 over the upper part of the display area of the display device 1600, it can be understood that the set value 6 is suggested by the light emission in the rainbow light emission mode.

Further, in this example, when there is a part whose ID code does not match with respect to the game board 5, the variation pattern command is used at the timing tA before the timing t1 for executing the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6. The execution of the effect according to the specified fluctuation pattern is stopped so that the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are turned off. However, it may be at least a stage before the timing t1 at which the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6 is executed. The LEDs 1 to 4 of the panel 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 may be turned off. In such a configuration, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the door frame top unit are used as a warning effect for predicting a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode from the start of the symbol fluctuation to the execution of the suggestion effect. Even when the LEDs 5 to 7 of the 450 and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light, such a notice effect is not executed, and the player expects a light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode. Can be deterred from holding. Further, from the variation display of the symbol before the variation display of the symbol on which the suggestion effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are displayed. May be turned off. In such a configuration, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the door frame top are used as a look-ahead effect that anticipates a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode before the variable display of the symbol on which the suggestion effect is to be executed. Even when the LEDs 5 to 7 of the unit 450 and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light, such a look-ahead effect is not executed, and the expectation for the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is expected. It is possible to deter a person from holding it.

Further, in this example, when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, the LEDs 1 to 2 of the game board 5 4. LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 and LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are turned off, but the execution period of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6 (timing t1 to t10). The state in which the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are turned off may be continued even after the end of the above. In such a configuration, after the end of the suggestion effect, for example, when the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed again when the symbol becomes a hit symbol when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, or after the symbol becomes a hit symbol. Even when the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed again during the hit game, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are turned off. Since the light emitting state is set to the above state, it is possible to collectively prevent the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode from being emitted in a mode in which the rainbow light emitting mode is not established.

Further, in this example, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 match with the game board 5, but with respect to the game board 5. Even when the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 are not connected, the same processing as when there is a part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5 is performed. That is, when the door frame top unit 450 or the effect operation unit 300 is not connected to the game board 5 when the power is turned on, the same as when there is a part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5. During the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame. The execution of the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is suppressed by using the LEDs 10 to 14 of 3.

Regarding the above, it is determined whether or not the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 match with the game board 5 when the power is turned on (including the determination of whether or not they are connected). Since it is not determined whether or not the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 match with the game board 5 after the power is turned on, the game is played after the power is turned on. When the door frame top unit 450 or the effect operation unit 300 is removed from the board 5, it cannot be detected that the door frame top unit 450 or the effect operation unit 300 has been removed. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the LEDs are turned off for the parts removed from the game board 5, but for the LEDs of the other parts, the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6 is executed. During the period (timing t1 to t10), the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed, and the light is emitted in a mode in which the rainbow light emitting mode is not established. That is, when the power is turned on, if the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 do not match with the game board 5 (including the case where they are not connected), the set value 6 is suggested. During the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A, the execution of the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is restricted, whereas the door frame top unit 450 with respect to the game board 5 after the power is turned on. Or, when the effect operation unit 300 is removed (including the case where it is not connected), the rainbow light emission mode is not established during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6. Will emit light at. As a result, when the door frame top unit 450 or the effect operation unit 300 is removed from the game board 5 (including the case where it is not connected) after the power is turned on, the trace is notified to the outside. Therefore, it is possible to notify the outside that a problem has occurred in connection with the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300.

Further, after the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 are removed from the game board 5 after the power is turned on, a component having the same ID code as the game board 5 is connected to the removed part. Even if this is the case, it is not possible to detect that the parts having the same ID code are connected. Therefore, for the parts with the same ID code connected to the game board 5, the LEDs are turned off, but for the LEDs of the other parts, the suggestion effect A suggesting the setting value 6 is executed. During the period (timing t1 to t10), the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed, and the light is emitted in a mode in which the rainbow light emitting mode is not established. On the other hand, after the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 are removed from the game board 5 after the power is turned on, parts whose ID codes do not match the game board 5 are connected to the removed parts. If this is the case, it is not possible to detect that a component whose ID code does not match is connected. Therefore, for the parts whose ID codes connected to the game board 5 do not match, the LEDs are turned off, but for the LEDs of the other parts, the suggestion effect A suggesting the setting value 6 is executed. During the period (timing t1 to t10), the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed, and the light is emitted in a mode in which the rainbow light emitting mode is not established. As a result, when the door frame top unit 450 or the effect operation unit 300 is removed from the game board 5 after the power is turned on (including the case where the effect operation unit 300 is not connected), the game board 5 is subsequently connected. Regardless of whether a part with a matching ID code or a part with a non-matching ID code is connected, there is a trace to the outside that the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 have been removed from the game board 5. It is possible to notify the outside that it is necessary to take measures so that a problem does not occur again with respect to the connection of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300.

Further, in this example, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 match (including the determination of whether or not they are connected) with respect to the game board 5. However, after the power is turned on, the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 is input to the game board 5, and the door frame top unit 450 and the effect are produced for the game board 5. It may be determined whether or not the ID codes of the operation unit 300 match (including the determination of whether or not they are connected). In addition, a pachinko machine is used to determine whether or not the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 match (including the determination of whether or not they are connected) with respect to the game board 5. It is provided on the back side of the machine 1, and when the operation switch is operated after the power is turned on, it is determined (connected) whether or not the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 match with the game board 5. Including the determination of whether or not the door is used.) According to such a configuration, when the door frame top unit 450 or the effect operation unit 300 is removed from the game board 5 after the power is turned on, the door frame top unit 450 or the effect operation unit 300 is removed by operating the operation switch thereafter. It is possible to detect that. That is, if the door frame top unit 450 or the effect operation unit 300 is not connected to the game board 5 at the time of operating the operation switch, there may be a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5. Similarly, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300. The LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to prevent the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode from being executed.

Further, in this example, when the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6 is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame 3 Although the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed by using the LEDs 10 to 14, the light emitting effect of lighting in such a rainbow light emitting mode may be executed in an effect other than the suggestive effect, for example. During the variable display of the symbol, it may be executed with a high expectation effect suggesting that there is a high possibility of hitting. Even in such a configuration, if there is no part whose ID code does not match the game board 5 (all parts match), during the execution period of the high expectation effect, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 While LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode, the game board 5 is subjected to a light emission effect. When there is a part whose ID code does not match, it is suppressed so that the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is not executed during the execution period of the high expectation effect.

Further, in this example, the game board 5, the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit 300 can be changed when the model is changed, but other modes may be used. For example, not only the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 but also other decorative units may be changed for the door frame 3 (door frame base unit 100) when the model is changed. As an example. , The upper decoration unit located above the door window 101a provided in the door frame 3 (similar to the door frame top unit 450 of the above embodiment), the right decoration unit located to the right of the door window 101a, and the left of the door window 101a. Even if at least four decorative units such as the left decorative unit located on the side and the lower decorative unit located below the door window 101a (similar to the effect operation unit 300 of the above embodiment) can be changed when the model is changed. good. As a result, the change in the appearance of the gaming machine due to the model change can be further increased, and the player can be given more freshness. It should be noted that a plurality of LEDs are provided in each of these four decorative units, and an ID code is set for each of them so that a match / mismatch / non-mounting determination can be made in the same manner as described above. It is possible to perform the same processing as described above with respect to the light emitting effect such as the rainbow light emitting mode, and it is possible to obtain the same gaming effect as described above.

[Winning button production when executing rainbow production]
In the present embodiment, a rainbow effect (a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode) is executed as a high expectation effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of hitting during the variable display of the symbol. Then, it is not possible to determine whether or not a hit is achieved only by executing the rainbow effect, but it is determined whether or not a hit is achieved when a predetermined operation unit is operated during the execution of the rainbow effect. The player operation effect (button effect) that can be performed is executed.

In this example, as an effect according to the fluctuation pattern, a rainbow effect as a high-expectation effect can be executed during the variation display of the symbol, and a hit rainbow effect is derived as a result of the variation display of the symbol. Although the rainbow effect is executed during the variable display of the symbol, the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection is set, in which the deviation is derived as a result of the variable display of the symbol. That is, at the time of hitting, it is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern for executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, and at the time of hitting, it is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern for executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting. Then, at the time of disengagement, by lowering the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern for executing the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement than the fluctuation pattern for executing the effect at the time of disengagement, the rainbow at the time of disengagement is lower than the effect at the time of other disengagement. The frequency of execution of the production is reduced. As a result, when the rainbow effect is executed, it is not possible to determine whether the rainbow effect is a hit or miss, but the ratio of the rainbow effect at the time of hit is high, and there is a high possibility of winning. It has come to suggest that.

Further, in this example, the effect suggesting the set value 6 can be executed as the above-mentioned suggestion effect A during the variable display of the symbol, and the rainbow effect as the high expectation effect is the light emission that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode. It is the same in that the production is performed. That is, when the rainbow effect as the high expectation effect is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the LEDs 5 to 5 of the door frame top unit 450 are linked to the display of the effect display device 1600 as in the execution of the suggestion effect A. 7. The light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed by using the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. Specifically, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches a predetermined predetermined timing (timing different from the execution timing of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6) (timing). t1), LEDs 1 and 2 of the game board 5 are "red", LEDs 3 to 4 of the game board 5 are "purple", LEDs 5 to 6 of the door frame top unit 450 are "blue", LED 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LED 8 of the door frame 3 is "green", LED 9 of the door frame 3 and LED 10 of the door frame 3 are "orange", LEDs 11 to 12 of the door frame 3 are "yellow", and LEDs 13 to 14 of the door frame 3 are "white". , To make it emit light. That is, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light with different emission colors for each of the two groups. ..

Then, with respect to LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). , The LED that emits light in "red" is emitted in "purple", the LED that emits in "purple" is emitted in "blue", and the LED that emits in "blue" is emitted in "green" and "green". The LED that emits "orange", the LED that emits "orange" is "yellow", the LED that emits "yellow" is "white", the LED that emits "white" is "red", Change to. As described above, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 have a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). Each time, the emission color of the LED for each of the two groups is changed in the predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" until the timing t10 is reached. I try to repeat such regular changes (for example, for 10 seconds).

As described above, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 have their respective emission colors in a short unit emission time. By controlling to switch to a plurality of emission colors in order, these LEDs can cooperate to visually visually recognize the emission in the rainbow emission mode, and emit light with impact. The production can be executed. Further, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are controlled by interlocking the LEDs 1 to 14, and the LEDs 1 to 14 are linked. By emitting light in a plurality of colors so that the two groups emit light in different emission colors and switching the emission colors in a short time, it is possible to execute a light emission effect having a greater impact than usual.

In this example, as the light emission of the rainbow light emission mode, seven colors are made to appear at the same time by using a plurality of LEDs, and the light emission colors of each are switched regularly. It is not necessary to have seven colors, as long as a predetermined number of three or more colors appear at the same time.

Further, during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and the effect image of the rainbow mode in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in different display colors is displayed. In such a rainbow-type effect image, the display color displayed in each of the plurality of display areas is changed to "red-> purple-> blue-> green-> orange-> yellow-> white" every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). The changes are made in a predetermined order of "→ red", and such regular changes are repeated until the timing t10 is reached (for example, 5 seconds). The target for displaying the effect image in the rainbow mode may be an effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, for example, a background image, or one of the display areas of the effect display device 1600. An effect image displayed on the unit, for example, an effect image such as a character or an item may be targeted.

In this example, for the purpose of further enhancing the fun of the rainbow production and further improving the game entertainment, it is determined whether or not a hit is made when a predetermined operation unit is operated during the execution of the rainbow production. A possible button effect is executed, and any of the button effects A to C is executed. Here, a case of executing each of the rainbow effect with the button effect A, the rainbow effect with the button effect B, and the rainbow effect with the button effect C will be described below.

(Rainbow production with button production A)
First, the plate unit 200 is provided with a light amount adjusting button 228 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. As the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame 3 With respect to the LEDs 10 to 14, it is possible to adjust the light amount step by step by performing the light amount adjustment operation using the light amount adjustment button 228. For example, it is possible to adjust the LED light intensity step from 1 (minimum light intensity) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum light intensity), and the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated upward to increase the step. As the light intensity of the LED increases and the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated downward to reduce the step, the light intensity of the LED decreases. Regarding the LED of the light emitting decoration, the amount of light can be adjusted both during the fluctuation and non-variation of the design.

In the button effect A, among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of the rainbow effect, at least the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode are formed. (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) It is possible to determine whether or not. In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of hit is being executed, the amount of light can be adjusted when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, and it is possible to grasp that the hit is a hit. When the invoking effect at the time of disconnection is being executed, when the light intensity adjusting button 228 is operated, the light intensity cannot be adjusted, and it can be grasped that the light intensity is off.

FIG. 221 is a timing chart showing an example of the button effect A during execution of the rainbow effect. First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it synchronizes with the fluctuation display of the special symbol as an effect according to the fluctuation pattern specified from the fluctuation pattern command. The effect display device 1600 starts a variation effect such as a variation display of a decorative pattern. Then, when the variation pattern at the time of executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is determined, or when the variation pattern at the time of executing the rainbow effect at the time of deviation is determined, the variation display of the symbol is determined. When the elapsed time from the start of the operation reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to the effect operation unit 300 are reached. 9. The light emitting effect (rainbow effect) of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is started using the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, and the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is started until the timing t10 is reached (for example, 10 seconds). Is continuing.

Further, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, the effect display device 1600 executes a button operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 (for example, "press the light amount adjustment button!"). At the same time, a display explaining that it is a hit when the light amount can be adjusted by operating the light amount adjustment button 228 and that it is off when the light amount cannot be adjusted (for example, "If the light amount can be adjusted, it is a hit! If it cannot be adjusted, it will come off! ").

Execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit When the fluctuation pattern at the time of hit is determined, the amount of light can be adjusted by operating the light amount adjustment button 228 during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of hit. Set to a possible light intensity adjustable period. During this light amount adjustable period, among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, when the light amount adjusting button 228 is operated, at least the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (game). The amount of light of LEDs 1 to 4 of the panel 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) will change. As a result, when the amount of light can be adjusted during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, it is possible to grasp that the variation display of the symbol being executed is a hit, and it is possible to know whether or not the light amount is a hit. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the light amount adjusting button 228 to be positively operated.

On the other hand, when the variation pattern at the time of disconnection for executing the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection is determined, the light intensity is adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228 during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection. Set to a period during which the amount of light that cannot be adjusted cannot be adjusted. During this light amount non-adjustable period, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, at least the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (game). The amount of light of LEDs 1 to 4 of the panel 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) does not change. As a result, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, when the amount of light cannot be adjusted, it is possible to grasp that the fluctuation display of the symbol being executed is out of order, and it is possible to determine whether or not it is a hit. To know, the light intensity adjustment button 228 can be encouraged to actively operate.

In this example, among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) allow the amount of light to be adjusted, whereas LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute a rainbow light emitting mode are capable of adjusting the amount of light. , The amount of light cannot be adjusted so that it always emits light at a constant amount of light. As a result, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, the LED (rainbow light emission mode) in which the light amount does not change if the rainbow effect is being executed at the time of hitting is configured. The amount of light of the LED (LED that constitutes the rainbow light emission mode) that can change the amount of light changes relatively with respect to the LED that does not), whereas the amount of light does not change if the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection is being executed. The light amount of an LED whose light amount can be changed (LED which constitutes a rainbow light emission mode) changes relative to a certain LED (LED which does not constitute a rainbow light emission mode). From this, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not the light amount can be adjusted when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, and the variable display of the pattern being executed can be displayed. You can clearly see if it will be a hit.

Further, if the light amount cannot be adjusted even though the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection, the effect display device is displayed after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection. In 1600, a specific image that does not recognize that the variable display of the symbol being executed is a hit is displayed. Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, a display (for example, "sorry!") Notifying that the variable display of the symbol being executed was off and a disappointing result was obtained, and the light intensity adjustment button 228 were operated. Occasionally, a display is executed to notify that the state in which the amount of light could not be adjusted has been returned to the state in which the amount of light can be adjusted (for example, "The amount of light can be adjusted already!"). As a result, even if it is not possible to recognize whether or not the light amount can be adjusted when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, it is displayed after the execution of the rainbow effect. It is possible to clearly grasp that the variable display of the symbol being executed is out of alignment by the specific image.

In this example, in the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, when the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement is executed, until a specific period (for example, 3 minutes) elapses after the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement is completed. During that time, the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection is not determined, and the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is not determined, and the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection is restricted so as not to be executed again. On the other hand, it is possible to determine the variation pattern of the hit time to execute the hit time rainbow effect until a specific period (for example, 3 minutes) elapses after the end of the rainbow effect at the time of the hit. The execution of the rainbow production of time is not restricted. As a result, in a short period of time such as a specific period, the rainbow effect at the time of off is not repeated, and the trust in the rainbow effect that is executed as a high expectation effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of hitting is lost. There is no such thing, and you can look forward to the next rainbow production.

In this example, the rainbow effect is terminated when a predetermined time elapses regardless of whether or not the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect. However, when the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection is being executed, it is recognized that the light intensity could not be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228 even before the predetermined time has elapsed. The rainbow effect at the time of disengagement may be terminated at the time when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated. As a result, after recognizing that the light amount could not be adjusted by operating the light amount adjustment button 228, the rainbow effect is not continued, and the rainbow effect is produced even though the variation display of the running symbol is off. Can reduce the discomfort that is being performed.

Further, in this example, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, the effect display device 1600 displays a button operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 (for example, "press the light amount adjustment button!"). However, the operation is not limited to this, and the operation for the light amount adjustment button 228 is performed on the effect display device 1600 during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect while the operation for the light amount adjustment button 228 is enabled. It is also possible not to execute the button operation promotion effect that displays a prompt (for example, "press the light amount adjustment button!"). As a result, the above-mentioned effect functions as a "hidden effect" during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, and for the player who normally actively operates the light amount adjustment button 228. For players who do not normally actively operate the light intensity adjustment button 228 by letting them know whether or not they will hit at an early stage, the hit result will be the result of the fluctuation display of the symbol after the rainbow effect is executed (the hit time described later). You can pay attention to whether or not the warning message or the warning message when the message is missed is displayed, and you can enjoy whether or not it is a hit.

Further, in this example, if the light amount cannot be adjusted even though the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection, after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection, In addition to this, the effect display device 1600 displays a specific image that does not recognize that the variable display of the symbol being executed is a hit, but in addition to this, the execution period of the rainbow effect at the time of off (timing t1 to t10). ), Even when the volume control button 227 provided near the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, a specific image may be displayed in the same manner as when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated. As a result, even if the player mistakenly operates the volume control button 227 instead of the light amount control button 228 during the limited execution period (timing t1 to t10), the intention to operate the light amount control button 228 is determined. The effect can be advanced as if it were present, and the same effect as when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated can be exhibited. In this case, when the volume control button 227 is operated instead of the light amount control button 228 during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the LED (game board 5) constituting the rainbow light emission mode. The amount of light of LEDs 1 to 4, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) does not change, but in such a case, the light amount adjustment button 228 It is preferable to execute a special notification (for example, "It is not a light intensity adjustment!") That is not performed when the is operated to encourage the operation to be erroneous.

Further, in this example, the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect A is executed as the effect during the variable display of the symbol. A rainbow effect accompanied by the effect A may be performed. In this case, depending on the situation of the rainbow effect by the button effect A (whether or not the amount of light is adjusted), the player determines whether or not some game profit (probability fluctuation, time reduction, etc.) is given after the hit game being executed. You just have to make it recognize.

Further, in this example, the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect A is executed as the effect during the variable display of the symbol accompanying the start prize, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button effect A is performed as the effect without the start prize. You may try to perform a rainbow effect accompanied by. Specifically, if the situation where the starting prize does not occur in the middle continues, the player will be disgusted and frustrated, so as a part of alleviating this, when a certain period of time elapses without the starting prize occurring, the design It can be exemplified that a dummy effect imitating the variable display of is started, and a rainbow effect accompanied by a button effect A is executed in the effect. In this case, the rainbow effect at the time of off is executed as the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect A, and the light amount is adjusted even if the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect. It is possible to make the player aware that the result of the dummy effect is not a hit.

(Rainbow production with button production B)
In the button effect B, when the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated during the execution of the rainbow effect, among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the rainbow light emission mode Whether to continue the rainbow effect using the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) It is possible to execute the effect of and determine whether or not it will be a hit. In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is being executed, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated, the rainbow effect is not terminated and continues until a predetermined time elapses. While it is possible to grasp that it is a hit, when the invo effect at the time of off is being executed, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated, the rainbow effect is ended and it is grasped that it is a hit. can do.

FIG. 222 is a timing chart showing an example of the button effect B during execution of the rainbow effect. First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it synchronizes with the fluctuation display of the special symbol as an effect according to the fluctuation pattern specified from the fluctuation pattern command. The effect display device 1600 starts a variation effect such as a variation display of a decorative pattern. Then, when the variation pattern at the time of executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is determined, or when the variation pattern at the time of executing the rainbow effect at the time of deviation is determined, the variation display of the symbol is determined. When the elapsed time from the start of the operation reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to the effect operation unit 300 are reached. 9. The light emitting effect (rainbow effect) of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is started using the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, and the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is started until the timing t10 is reached (for example, 10 seconds). Is continuing.

Further, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, the effect display device 1600 executes a button operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect operation unit 301 (for example, "press the effect operation button!"). At the same time, a display explaining that it is a hit when the rainbow effect being executed continues even after the operation of the effect operation unit 301, and that it is off when the rainbow effect being executed is completed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated. (For example, "If the rainbow continues, it will win! If the rainbow does not continue, it will come off!")

Execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit When the fluctuation pattern at the time of hit is determined, even if the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of hit, the door Among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit 300. The rainbow effect using LEDs 8 to 9 and LEDs 10 to 14) of the door frame 3 is continued without ending. As a result, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, when the rainbow effect being executed continues even after the operation of the effect operation unit 301, it is understood that the variation display of the symbol being executed is a hit. It is possible to encourage the effect operation unit 301 to actively operate in order to know whether or not it will be a hit.

On the other hand, when the variation pattern at the time of disengagement for executing the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement is determined, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement. Among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit). The rainbow effect using the LEDs 8 to 9 of the 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14) of the door frame 3 is completed, and the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode are emitted from the rainbow light emitting mode to the non-light emitting or the single color light emitting. I try to switch to. As a result, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, it is possible to grasp that when the rainbow effect being executed during the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is completed, the variation display of the symbol being executed is removed. It is possible to encourage the effect operation unit 301 to actively operate in order to know whether or not it will be a hit.

In this example, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 10 of the door frame 3 While 14 is involved in executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 correspond to the fluctuation pattern regardless of the light emitting color constituting the rainbow light emitting mode. The light emission effect is being executed. Then, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated, the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the door frame top unit 450) constituting the rainbow light emitting mode are used. Regarding LEDs 5 to 7, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14) of the door frame 3, the rainbow light emitting mode is used, whereas the light emitting mode is switched from the rainbow light emitting mode to the non-light emitting or the single color light emitting mode. With respect to the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that are not configured, the light emission in a predetermined mode is continued by executing the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern. As a result, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement, for example, all the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. On the other hand, if the light emission in the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the non-light emission mode, all the LEDs are turned off, which may give a misunderstanding that the pachinko machine 1 has failed. It is possible to prevent such misidentification by continuing to emit light in a predetermined mode by executing a light emitting effect according to the fluctuation pattern for at least a part of the LED of the light emitting decoration.

In this example, it is possible to confirm whether or not to continue the executing rainbow effect by operating the effect operation unit 301 during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect. In addition to the effect operation unit 301, a plurality of operation units for effect that can be operated by the player may be provided, and all of them may be the operation targets of the button effect B. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously operating other than the effect operation unit 301 during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, and the player cannot recognize the fun of the button effect B. As the operation unit for a plurality of effects, for example, the light amount adjustment button 228 that can be operated by the player to adjust the light amount, and the volume can be adjusted by being operated by the player. The volume control button 227 may also be included, and by operating these buttons, it may be possible to confirm whether or not to continue the running rainbow effect.

Further, in this example, when the light amount cannot be adjusted even though the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect A, the effect display device 1600 is performed after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection. In the above, a specific image that does not recognize that the variable display of the symbol being executed is a hit is displayed, but similarly, when the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect B is executed, the effect operation unit 301 is operated to produce the rainbow effect. When is finished, a specific image that does not recognize that the variable display of the running symbol is a hit may be displayed. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 may execute a display (for example, "sorry!") Notifying that the variable display of the symbol being executed is out of alignment and a disappointing result has been obtained. As a result, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, the effect operation unit 301 is operated just before the end, and it is not possible to recognize whether or not the rainbow effect is completed by the operation of the effect operation unit 301. Even so, it is possible to clearly grasp that the variable display of the symbol being executed is out of alignment by the specific image displayed after the execution of the rainbow effect.

Further, in this example, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, the effect display device 1600 displays a display prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 301 (for example, "press the effect operation button!"). However, the operation is not limited to this, and the operation for the effect operation unit 301 is performed while the operation for the effect operation unit 301 is enabled in the effect display device 1600 during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect. It is possible not to execute the button operation promotion effect which performs the prompt display (for example, "press the effect operation button!"). As a result, the above-mentioned effect functions as a "hidden effect" during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, and for a player who normally actively operates the effect operation unit 301. For players who do not normally actively operate the production operation unit 301 by letting them know whether or not they will win at an early stage, the result of the fluctuation display of the symbol after the execution of the rainbow effect (the hit time described later). You can pay attention to whether or not the warning message or the warning message when the message is missed is displayed, and you can enjoy whether or not it is a hit.

Further, in this example, the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect B is executed as the effect during the variable display of the symbol. A rainbow effect accompanied by effect B may be performed. In this case, the player recognizes whether or not some game profit (probability fluctuation, time reduction, etc.) is given after the running winning game according to the situation of the rainbow effect by the button effect B (whether or not it ends halfway). You just have to let it.

Further, in this example, the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect B is executed as the effect during the variable display of the symbol accompanying the start prize, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button effect B is performed as the effect without the start prize. You may try to perform a rainbow effect accompanied by. Specifically, if the situation where the starting prize does not occur in the middle continues, the player will be disgusted and frustrated, so as a part of alleviating this, when a certain period of time elapses without the starting prize occurring, the design It can be exemplified that a dummy effect imitating the variable display of is started, and a rainbow effect accompanied by a button effect B is executed in the effect. In this case, the rainbow effect at the time of off is executed as the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect B, and during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, the rainbow effect is performed when the effect operation unit 301 is operated. It suffices to end so that the player recognizes that the result of the dummy effect is not a hit.

(Rainbow production with button production C)
First, the plate unit 200 is provided with a volume control button 227 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. With respect to the sound output from various speakers (main body frame speaker 622, etc.), the volume can be adjusted step by step by performing a volume adjustment operation using the volume control button 227. For example, it is possible to adjust the volume level output from various speakers in the order of 1 (lowest volume) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum volume), and operate the volume control button 227 upward. The larger the stage, the higher the volume output from the various speakers, and the volume control button 227 is operated downward to reduce the volume, the lower the volume output from the various speakers. In this example, the volume of the lowest stage (1) is zero, and all the production sounds are inaudible. Further, the volume of the sound output from various speakers can be adjusted both during the fluctuation and non-variation of the symbol.

In this example, during the execution of the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect C, the volume is forcibly set to the lowest stage (1) regardless of the volume control button 227 by the player, and with the start of the rainbow effect this time, the rainbow effect is produced. Any production sound, including the production sound of BGM or the like corresponding to the above, is forcibly changed to an inaudible state that the player cannot recognize. As will be described in detail later, in the button effect C of this example, when the volume control button 227 is operated upward to raise the volume level in such a non-audible state, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect is produced. The effect of whether or not is changed from the non-audible state to the audible state is executed, and it is possible to determine whether or not the hit is achieved. In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of hit is being executed, when the volume control button 227 is operated, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from the inaudible state to the audible state. This makes it possible to know that it is a hit, but when the invo effect at the time of off is being executed, even if the volume control button 227 is operated, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect is produced. The inaudible state is maintained, which makes it known that it is out of audibility.

Further, in this example, when the volume control button 227 is operated to change the volume stage in addition to the above, a specific voice (for example, pip pip) is output as an operation confirmation sound, but the button effect C is involved. In the rainbow effect, it is possible to determine whether or not a hit is made by using whether or not an operation confirmation sound is output when the volume control button 227 is operated. In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is being executed, even if the volume control button 227 is operated, a specific sound (for example, pip pip) is not output from various speakers, which is a hit. On the other hand, when the volume control button 227 is operated, a specific sound (for example, pip pip) is output from various speakers when the invo effect at the time of disconnection is being executed. It is possible to grasp that it is out of order.

That is, in this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of hit is being executed, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from the inaudible state to the audible state when the volume control button 227 is operated. However, in this case, a specific voice (for example, pip pip), which is an operation confirmation sound, is not output in response to the operation of the volume control button 227. On the other hand, when the invo effect at the time of disconnection is being executed, the production sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect is maintained in an inaudible state even if the volume control button 227 is operated. In response to the operation of the volume control button 227, only a specific voice (for example, pip pip), which is an operation confirmation sound, is output. The details of such an effect will be described below.

FIG. 223 is a timing chart showing an example of the button effect C during execution of the rainbow effect. First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it synchronizes with the fluctuation display of the special symbol as an effect according to the fluctuation pattern specified from the fluctuation pattern command. The effect display device 1600 starts a variation effect such as a variation display of a decorative pattern. Then, when the variation pattern at the time of executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is determined, or when the variation pattern at the time of executing the rainbow effect at the time of deviation is determined, the variation display of the symbol is determined. When the elapsed time from the start of the operation reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to the effect operation unit 300 are reached. 9. The light emitting effect (rainbow effect) of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is started using the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, and the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is started until the timing t10 is reached (for example, 10 seconds). Is continuing.

Further, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, the effect display device 1600 executes a button operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the volume control button 227 (for example, "press the volume control button!"). At the same time, by operating the volume control button 227, it is a hit when the production sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from the inaudible state to the audible state, and even if the volume control button 227 is operated, the rainbow A display explaining that the production sound such as BGM corresponding to the production is out of the range when the non-audible state is maintained (does not change to the audible state) (for example, "If it changes to the audible state, it hits! If it doesn't change to the state, it will come off! ")

Execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit When the fluctuation pattern at the time of hit is determined, the rainbow is operated when the volume control button 227 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of hit. The production sound of BGM or the like corresponding to the production is changed from the non-audible state to the audible state. That is, in order to confirm whether or not the production sound of BGM or the like corresponding to the rainbow production changes from the non-audible state to the audible state, it is necessary to operate the volume control button 227. It should be noted that a specific voice (for example, beeping) as an operation confirmation sound is not output when the volume control button 227 is operated. As a result, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, the volume control button 227 is operated to execute when the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from the inaudible state to the audible state. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the symbol inside is a hit, and it is possible to encourage the volume control button 227 to be positively operated in order to know whether or not it is a hit.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection for executing the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection is determined, when the volume control button 227 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection. , The production sound of BGM or the like corresponding to the rainbow production is maintained in an inaudible state (does not change to an audible state). That is, it is necessary to operate the volume control button 227 in order to confirm whether or not the production sound of BGM or the like corresponding to the rainbow production is maintained in the inaudible state (does not change to the audible state). Further, when the volume control button 227 is operated, a specific voice (for example, pip pip) is output as an operation confirmation sound. As a result, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, the volume control button 227 is operated to maintain the non-audible state of the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect (change to the audible state). When a specific voice (for example, beeping) is output as an operation confirmation sound, it is possible to grasp that the fluctuation display of the running symbol is out of order, and to know whether or not it is out of order. It is possible to encourage the volume control button 227 to be actively operated.

As described above, when the volume control button 227 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect is maintained in an inaudible state (). Not only does it not change to an audible state), but it also outputs a specific voice (for example, pip pip) as an operation confirmation sound. As a result, it is not possible to confirm whether or not the operation has been accepted unless any sound is output when the volume control button 227 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection. However, by outputting a specific voice (for example, beeping) as the operation confirmation sound, such confirmation can be appropriately performed.

In this example, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, the rainbow effect is terminated when a predetermined time elapses regardless of whether or not the volume control button 227 is operated. However, when the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement is being executed, even before the predetermined time has elapsed, the volume control button 227 is operated to produce a BGM or the like corresponding to the rainbow effect. When it is recognized that the sound is maintained in the inaudible state (does not change to the audible state) (when the volume control button 227 is operated), the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection may be terminated. .. As a result, after operating the volume control button 227 and recognizing that the production sound of BGM or the like corresponding to the rainbow production is maintained in the inaudible state (does not change to the audible state), the rainbow production is continued. It is possible to reduce the discomfort that the rainbow effect is being executed even though the variable display of the symbol being executed is off.

Further, in this example, as the button effect C during the execution of the rainbow effect, whether or not the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from the inaudible state to the audible state when the volume control button 227 is operated. When the production sound of BGM or the like corresponding to the rainbow production does not change from the non-audible state to the audible state, a specific sound (for example, pip-pi) is output as an operation confirmation sound. However, not limited to this, the operation is confirmed when the volume control button 227 is operated without executing the effect of whether or not the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from the inaudible state to the audible state. It may be configured to execute only the effect of whether or not to output a specific sound (for example, pip pip) as a sound. In such a configuration, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is being executed, a specific voice (for example, pip pip) is not output as an operation confirmation sound when the volume control button 227 is operated, and it is a hit. On the other hand, when the invo effect at the time of disconnection is being executed, a specific voice (for example, pip pip) is output as an operation confirmation sound when the volume control button 227 is operated. , It can be grasped that it is out of order. In addition to this, not only the volume control button 227 is used, but also a plurality of operation units including the volume control button 227 (for the production of whether or not to output a specific voice (for example, pip pip) as the operation confirmation sound). The effect operation unit 301, the light amount adjustment button 228, and the volume adjustment button 227) may also be used. In such a configuration, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is being executed, the operation can be confirmed by operating any of a plurality of operation units (effect operation unit 301, light amount adjustment button 228, volume adjustment button 227). It is possible to grasp that it is a hit without outputting a specific voice (for example, pip pip) as a sound, but when the invo effect at the time of disengagement is being executed, a plurality of operation units (effect). When any of the operation unit 301, the light amount adjustment button 228, and the volume adjustment button 227) is operated, a specific voice (for example, pip-pi) is output as an operation confirmation sound, and it is possible to grasp that the sound is off. ..

In the above configuration, various operation units (effect operation unit 301, light amount adjustment button 228, volume control button 227) may be operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting. The speaker does not output a specific sound (for example, pip pip). Similarly, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection, a specific sound is output from various speakers among the plurality of operation units (effect operation unit 301, light amount adjustment button 228, volume adjustment button 227). Except for the operation unit, no specific voice (for example, pip-pi) is output from various speakers regardless of which operation is performed. Therefore, in the effect display device 1600, when each of the plurality of operation units (effect operation unit 301, light amount adjustment button 228, volume adjustment button 227) is operated, the display corresponding to the operation (for example, "button"). I've operated "). As a result, when any of a plurality of operation units (effect operation unit 301, light intensity adjustment button 228, volume adjustment button 227) is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, any sound is output. If this is not done, it is not possible to confirm whether or not the operation has been accepted, but such confirmation can be appropriately performed by displaying the display corresponding to the operation.

Further, in this example, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, the effect display device 1600 displays a button operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the volume control button 227 (for example, "press the volume control button!"). However, the operation for the volume control button 227 is not limited to this, and the operation for the volume control button 227 is enabled in the effect display device 1600 during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect. It is also possible not to execute the button operation promotion effect that displays a prompt (for example, "press the volume control button!"). As a result, the above-mentioned effect functions as a "hidden effect" during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, and for the player who normally actively operates the volume control button 227. For players who do not normally actively operate the volume control button 227 by letting them know whether or not they will hit at an early stage, the hit result will be the result of the fluctuation display of the symbol after the rainbow effect is executed (the hit time described later). You can pay attention to whether or not the warning message or the warning message when the message is missed is displayed, and you can enjoy whether or not it is a hit.

Further, in this example, when the light amount cannot be adjusted even though the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect A, the effect display device 1600 is performed after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection. In, a specific image is displayed that does not recognize that the variable display of the symbol being executed is a hit, but the volume control button 227 is also operated during the execution of the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect C. If the production sound of BGM or the like corresponding to the rainbow effect does not change from the non-audible state to the audible state, the variation display of the running symbol will be a hit after the rainbow effect is executed at the time of disconnection. A specific image that is not recognized may be displayed. Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, a display (for example, "sorry!") Notifying that the variable display of the symbol being executed was off and a disappointing result was obtained, and the volume control button 227 were operated. Occasionally, a display (for example, "You can adjust the volume already!") May be executed to notify that the state in which the volume could not be adjusted has been returned to the state in which the volume can be adjusted. As a result, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, whether or not the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from the inaudible state to the audible state when the volume control button 227 is operated. Even if it cannot be recognized, it is possible to clearly grasp that the variable display of the symbol being executed is out of alignment by the specific image displayed after the execution of the rainbow effect.

In the above configuration, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect is audible from the inaudible state even though the volume control button 227 is operated. If the state does not change, after executing the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement, the effect display device 1600 displays a specific image that does not recognize that the variable display of the running symbol is a hit. In addition, the volume control button 227 was also operated when the light amount control button 228 provided near the volume control button 227 was operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection. A specific image may be displayed as in the case. As a result, even if the player mistakenly operates the light amount control button 228 instead of the volume control button 227 during the limited execution period (timing t1 to t10), the intention to operate the volume control button 227 is The effect can be advanced as if it were present, and the same effect as when the volume control button 227 is operated can be exhibited. In this case, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated instead of the volume control button 227 during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect is produced. It does not change from inaudible to audible, but in that case it executes a special notification (eg, "It's not volume control!") That isn't done when the volume control button 227 is operated. In this way, it is preferable to encourage the user to make an erroneous operation.

Further, in this example, the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect C is executed as the effect during the variable display of the symbol. A rainbow effect accompanied by effect C may be performed. In this case, the status of the sound output by the button effect C (whether or not the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from the inaudible state to the audible state, and a specific sound as an operation confirmation sound (for example, pip pip)). Depending on whether or not the game is output), the player may be made to recognize whether or not some game profit (probability fluctuation, time reduction, etc.) is given after the winning game being executed.

Further, in this example, the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect C is executed as the effect during the variable display of the symbol accompanying the start prize, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button effect C is performed as the effect without the start prize. You may try to perform a rainbow effect accompanied by. Specifically, if the situation where the starting prize does not occur in the middle continues, the player will be disgusted and frustrated, so as a part of alleviating this, when a certain period of time elapses without the starting prize occurring, the design It can be exemplified that a dummy effect imitating the variable display of is started, and a rainbow effect accompanied by a button effect C is executed in the effect. In this case, the rainbow effect at the time of off is executed as the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect C, and during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, the rainbow is operated even though the volume control button 227 is operated. Prevent the production sound of BGM or the like corresponding to the production from changing from the inaudible state to the audible state, or output a specific sound (for example, pip pip) as an operation confirmation sound when the volume control button 227 is operated. By doing so, the player may be made aware that the result of the dummy effect is not a hit.

Further, in the above, the rainbow effect with the button effect A, the rainbow effect with the button effect B, and the rainbow effect with the button effect C are executed as individual effects, but the rainbow effect in which these button effects are combined is executed. You may do so. For example, a rainbow effect with a composite button effect D having the elements of the button effect A and the button effect B, a rainbow effect with a compound button effect E having the elements of the button effect A and the button effect C, and a button effect B and the button effect. It may be possible to execute a rainbow effect with a composite button effect F having an element of C, and a rainbow effect with a compound button effect G having elements of button effect A, button effect B, and button effect C. More specifically, for example, in a rainbow effect accompanied by a composite button effect G, the amount of light depends on the target operated by the player among a plurality of operation units (light amount adjustment button 228, effect operation unit 301, volume control button 227). (Element of button effect A using the light amount adjustment button 228), effect of whether to continue the rainbow effect (element of button effect B using the effect operation unit 301), BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect Which of the effects (elements of button effect C using the volume control button 227) of whether or not the effect sound such as, etc. changes from the inaudible state to the audible state is executed, and a plurality of operations are performed. It ends when any one of the units (light amount adjustment button 228, effect operation unit 301, volume adjustment button 227) is operated and the result of the effect corresponding to the operation is derived. In the other composite button effect, some effect elements are missing from the compound button effect G, and the target to be operated by the player is more limited than that of the compound button effect G. That is, only when a part of the operation units (light amount adjustment button 228, effect operation unit 301, volume control button 227) is operated, the result of the effect corresponding to the operation is derived. It becomes. In such a composite button effect, the player is arbitrary because it gives the player a choice as to which button effect is to be executed for the rainbow effect (which button effect is used to proceed with the rainbow effect). Allows you to select the mode of progress of the rainbow effect. Therefore, not only the effect equivalent to the above-mentioned various button effects can be obtained, but also the fun of the rainbow effect can be further enhanced.

(Specific alert message after button production)
As described in detail above, the button effect B of the button effects A to C is provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 when the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated during the execution of the rainbow effect. Among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration body, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 of the door frame 3). It is possible to execute the effect of whether or not to continue the rainbow effect using ~ 14) and determine whether or not it is a hit. In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is being executed, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated, the rainbow effect is not terminated and continues until a predetermined time elapses. While it is possible to grasp that it is a hit, when the invo effect at the time of off is being executed, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated, the rainbow effect is ended and it is grasped that it is a hit. can do.

FIG. 224 is a timing chart showing an example of the case where the effect operation unit 301 is not operated in the button effect B during the execution of the rainbow effect. In the above, when the variation pattern at the time of executing the rainbow effect at the time of hit is determined, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of hit. Among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, directing operation). While the rainbow effect using LEDs 8 to 9 of the unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14) of the door frame 3 is continued without ending, even when the effect operation unit 301 is not operated, the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is produced. The rainbow effect is finished after waiting for the execution period (timing t1 to t10) to elapse. Further, when the variation pattern at the time of disengagement for executing the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement is determined, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement. Among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit). While the rainbow effect using LEDs 8 to 9 of 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) is finished, when the effect operation unit 301 is desired to be operated, the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection is completed. ) Elapses before the rainbow production ends. That is, when the effect operation unit 301 is not operated during the rainbow effect execution period (timing t1 to t10), the rainbow effect is performed after waiting for the rainbow effect execution period (timing t1 to t10) to elapse. Since it ends, it is not possible to recognize whether the rainbow effect was a hit or miss rainbow effect at the end of the rainbow effect.

In this respect, in this example, in the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection, the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection elapses without operating the effect operation unit 301. After that, the effect display device 1600 notifies that the rainbow effect being executed is the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement, and also notifies the warning message at the time of disengagement corresponding to the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement (for example). "Don't complain to the clerk because this rainbow is a fake"). In this way, after the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement elapses without operating the effect operation unit 301, the rainbow effect that has been executed is the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement. By notifying, it will not be mistaken as a rainbow production at the time of hitting. In addition, since the rainbow production is executed as a high-expectation production that suggests that there is a high possibility of hitting, the player's dissatisfaction is external just by notifying that it is a rainbow production at the time of deviation. Although it may be directed to the (hall clerk), it is possible to prevent the player's dissatisfaction from being directed to the outside (hall clerk) by notifying the warning message at the time of disengagement.

As described above, after the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement elapses without operating the effect operation unit 301, when the rainbow effect being executed on the effect display device 1600 is disengaged. In addition to notifying that it is a rainbow effect of, a display (for example, "Don't complain to the clerk because this rainbow is a fake") is executed to notify the warning message at the time of disconnection corresponding to the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection. However, the warning message at the time of such disengagement is composed of a number of colors smaller than the number of colors (7 colors in this example) constituting the rainbow light emitting mode. As a result, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement, the motivation for playing is improved by the number of colors constituting the rainbow light emission mode, but after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement, the rainbow light emission mode is configured. By displaying with a smaller number of colors than the number of colors to be played (7 colors in this example), the improved motivation for playing can be diminished, and the display of a warning message or the like at the time of disengagement is effectively notified. be able to. In the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and the effect image of the rainbow mode in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in different display colors is displayed. It is displayed, and after the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect has elapsed, the effect image of the rainbow mode is deleted.

Further, in this example, after the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement elapses without operating the effect operation unit 301, the rainbow effect executed on the effect display device 1600 is disengaged. Execute a display (for example, "Don't complain to the clerk because this rainbow is a fake") to notify that it is a rainbow effect at the time and to notify a warning message at the time of disconnection corresponding to the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection. However, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated while the warning message or the like at the time of disconnection is being displayed, it is possible to erase the display of the warning message or the like at the time of disconnection. As a result, while the warning message or the like at the time of disengagement is being displayed, the state in which the player's willingness to play is diminished continues. The state can be terminated. In this example, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated while the warning message or the like at the time of disconnection is being displayed, the display of the caution message or the like at the time of disconnection is deleted, but the effect operation unit 301 is operated. When this is done, the effect display device 1600 is set to display a predetermined display object (display corresponding to the operation of the effect operation unit 301) on the front side of the display such as the warning message at the time of disconnection, and the warning message at the time of disconnection is displayed. By concealing at least a part of the display such as, etc., the display of the warning message or the like at the time of disengagement may be configured to be difficult or invisible to the player. Even with such a configuration, by operating the production operation unit 301 according to the player's will, it becomes difficult or invisible for the player to display a warning message or the like at the time of disengagement, and the player's motivation to play is reduced. You can end the state you are in.

On the other hand, in the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of hit, regardless of whether or not the effect operation unit 301 is operated, after the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of hit elapses. Executes a display ("This rainbow is a hit!") Notifying that the variable display of the running symbol is a hit. Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed, as a warning message at the time of hitting corresponding to the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, a display for preventing excessive devotion to the game (for example, "Don't immerse yourself in this rainbow only for hitting". ) Is executed. As a result, the rainbow effect is executed as a high-expectation effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of being a hit, and by notifying that the rainbow effect is a hit rainbow effect, the player's A state in which the motivation for playing is excessively improved will occur, but after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, it will be hit after executing the display notifying that the variable display of the running symbol will be hit. By notifying the warning message of the time, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively absorbed in the game in the subsequent game.

As described above, after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement, the effect display device 1600 executes the display for notifying the warning message at the time of disengagement, whereas after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the effect display device 1600 executes the display. In the effect display device 1600, a display for notifying a warning message at the time of hitting is executed. However, immediately after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement, the display notifying the warning message at the time of disengagement is executed, whereas after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the running symbol is executed. After executing the display notifying that the variable display is a hit, the display notifying the warning message at the time of hitting is executed. As a result, if the display that notifies the warning message of the hit is executed immediately after the execution of the rainbow effect of the hit, the lingering sound that the rainbow effect was the rainbow effect of the hit cannot be enjoyed. , After a predetermined period has passed (after executing the display notifying that the variable display of the running symbol is a hit), by executing the display notifying the warning message at the time of hitting, such It is possible to prevent hindrance to the enjoyment of the afterglow.

Further, in this example, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated while the effect alert message or the like is being displayed, a predetermined display object is displayed on the front side of the display of the effect alert message or the like on the effect display device 1600. (Display corresponding to the operation of the effect operation unit 301) is displayed, and at least a part of the display of the warning message at the time of hit is hidden, so that the player can display the warning message at the time of hit. It may be configured to be difficult to see or invisible. With such a configuration, the state in which the player's willingness to play is excessively improved is terminated while the warning message or the like at the time of hitting is being displayed. By operating, it is possible to make the display of a warning message or the like at the time of hitting difficult or invisible to the player, and to prevent such a state from continuing too much.

In this example, the case where the button effect B is executed during the execution of the rainbow effect has been described, but also when the button effect A and the button effect C are executed, the execution period (timing t1) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection is also described. In ~ t10), after the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement elapses without operating the effect operation unit 301, the effect display device 1600 corresponds to the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement. It may be configured to execute a display notifying a warning message at the time of disconnection.

Further, in this example, in the execution period of the rainbow effect at the time of hit (timing t1 to t10), regardless of whether or not the effect operation unit 301 is operated, the execution period of the rainbow effect at the time of hit (timing t1 to t10) After the elapse of, after executing the display notifying that the variable display of the running symbol will be a hit, the display notifying the warning message at the time corresponding to the rainbow effect at the time is executed. However, it is preferable that the execution period of the display for notifying the warning message at the time of hitting is longer than the execution period of the display for notifying the warning message at the time of the miss. As a result, after the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement elapses without operating the effect operation unit 301, the rainbow that has been executed is notified by notifying the warning message at the time of disengagement. It is possible to recognize that the effect is a rainbow effect at the time of disengagement, but such recognition can be ensured by lengthening the execution period of the display for notifying the warning message at the time of disengagement. Further, regarding the execution period of the display for notifying the warning message at the time of hitting and the execution period of the display for notifying the warning message at the time of coming off, the execution period of the rainbow effect executed before that (timing t1 to t10). It is preferable to configure it so as to be shorter than. As a result, while the warning message at the time of hitting or the warning message at the time of missing is being displayed, the state in which the motivation for playing is diminished will continue, but the execution period for displaying those warning messages will be shortened. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the state in which the motivation for playing is excessively diminished from continuing.

[Simulated rainbow production]
There are many effects that players rarely encounter and cannot experience (such as the rainbow effects mentioned above) in the effects that are performed during the variable display of the symbols. There was a case that the operation of was slowed down. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as a specific period during which the player can recognize such an effect, a "effect introduction period" is generated during the standby state during the non-variable display of the symbol. In the production introduction period of this embodiment, in addition to the model introduction such as the specifications of the pachinko machine 1, the rainbow light emission mode that imitates the rainbow production at the time of hitting despite the non-variable display of the design. I am trying to execute a simulated rainbow effect that lights up. This effect introduction period starts when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the end of the variable display of the symbol and the state in which the variable display of the symbol is not performed, and the simulated rainbow effect is executed at the predetermined time in the predetermined period. I am doing it.

In this example, it is possible to execute an effect suggesting the set value 6 as the above-mentioned suggestion effect A during the variable display of the symbol. Is the same in that it executes. That is, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting or the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the LED 5 of the door frame top unit 450 are linked to the display of the effect display device 1600, as in the case of executing the suggestion effect A. ~ 7, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode. Specifically, in the case of executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches a predetermined predetermined timing (timing t1), the game is played. LEDs 1 and 2 of the board 5 are "red", LEDs 3 to 4 of the game board 5 are "purple", LEDs 5 to 6 of the door frame top unit 450 are "blue", LEDs 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and door frame 3 LED8 is "green", LED9 of the door frame 3 and LED10 of the door frame 3 are "orange", LEDs 11 to 12 of the door frame 3 are "yellow", and LEDs 13 to 14 of the door frame 3 are "white". I try to let you. Further, in the case of executing the simulated rainbow effect, when the elapsed time from the start of the effect introduction period reaches a predetermined predetermined timing (timing t1), the LEDs 1 and 2 of the game board 5 are turned on. "Red", LEDs 3-4 of the game board 5 are "purple", LEDs 5-6 of the door frame top unit 450 are "blue", LED 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LED 8 of the door frame 3 are "green", the door The LED 9 of the frame 3 and the LED 10 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light in "orange", the LEDs 11 to 12 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light in "yellow", and the LEDs 13 to 14 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light in "white". That is, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light with different emission colors for each of the two groups. ..

Then, with respect to LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). , The LED that emits light in "red" is emitted in "purple", the LED that emits in "purple" is emitted in "blue", and the LED that emits in "blue" is emitted in "green" and "green". The LED that emits "orange", the LED that emits "orange" is "yellow", the LED that emits "yellow" is "white", the LED that emits "white" is "red", Change to. As described above, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 have a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). Each time, the emission color of the LED for each of the two groups is changed in the predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" until the timing t10 is reached. I try to repeat such regular changes (for example, for 10 seconds).

As described above, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 have their respective emission colors in a short unit emission time. By controlling to switch to a plurality of emission colors in order, these LEDs can cooperate to visually visually recognize the emission in the rainbow emission mode, and emit light with impact. The production can be executed. Further, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are controlled by interlocking the LEDs 1 to 14, and the LEDs 1 to 14 are linked. By emitting light in a plurality of colors so that the two groups emit light in different emission colors and switching the emission colors in a short time, it is possible to execute a light emission effect having a greater impact than usual.

In this example, as the light emission of the rainbow light emission mode, seven colors are made to appear at the same time by using a plurality of LEDs, and the light emission colors of each are switched regularly. It is not necessary to have seven colors, as long as a predetermined number of three or more colors appear at the same time.

Further, the display content displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be different depending on whether the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is executed or the simulated rainbow effect is executed. For example, when the hit rainbow effect is executed, the symbols are displayed in parallel, but when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the symbols may not be displayed in parallel. As a result, when the simulated rainbow effect is being executed, there is no misunderstanding that the rainbow effect is being executed at the time of hitting. The display content displayed on the effect display device 1600 is not limited to this, and for example, a display such as "simulating" may be executed when the simulated rainbow effect is executed.

Further, the rainbow effect and the simulated rainbow effect at the time of hitting are performed by using LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. It is the same in that the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed, but it is preferable to provide the control program of another effect instead of the control program of the same effect and execute those control programs. That is, the control program for the rainbow effect at the time of hitting and the control program for the simulated rainbow effect are stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 as control programs for the separate effects. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in either the hit rainbow effect control program or the simulated rainbow effect control program, the control program can be normally executed for either one, and the abnormality occurs. It is possible to minimize the non-execution of the production at the time.

In this way, the player rarely encounters by executing the simulated rainbow effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode that imitates the rainbow effect at the time of hitting even in the standby state during the non-variable display of the symbol. To make the player aware that the rainbow effect that cannot be experienced can be experienced by the player during the standby state during the non-variable display of the symbol, and that the rainbow effect at the time of hitting can be executed during the variable display of the symbol. Can be done.

(About the display of a warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" after the simulated rainbow production is completed)
In addition, when performing a simulated rainbow production during the production introduction period as described above, the player's motivation to play will be excessively increased beyond the degree of production introduction, such as "Let's play until that production is encountered". There is a risk that you will be "engaged" in the game. Therefore, in this example, the following special processing is performed in order to take care that the simulated rainbow effect causes "immersion" in the game.

FIG. 225 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the immersive prevention display is executed after the simulated rainbow effect is executed. In this example, during the variable display of the symbol, the rainbow effect at the time of hit is executed as the effect of confirming the hit, but the rainbow effect at the time of hit is any of the rainbow effects A to C at the time of hit. Is running. Further, the simulated rainbow effect is executed during the effect introduction period during which the symbol is non-variablely displayed, and any of the simulated rainbow effects A to C is executed as the simulated rainbow effect. Then, for each of the rainbow effects A to C at the time of hitting, and for each of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, during the execution period of the rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, It is the same in that the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed by using the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, but the back upper front decorative body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position. It is different in whether or not it is operated and whether or not each of the seven numbered display bodies in the back-up front decorative body 3310 is lit in a rainbow light emitting mode that emits light in different light emitting colors. As described in detail above, the back-up front effect unit 3300 attached to the game board 5 has a rectangular back-up front decoration 3310 that is long in the left-right direction in the front view, and a back-top front decoration 3310 behind the back-top front decoration 3310. It is provided with a back-up front decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a back-up front elevating unit (not shown) for raising and lowering the back-up front decoration body 3310. When a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the back-up front decorative body 3310 can be moved from the initial position to the appearance position, and the back-up front decorative body 3310 can appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600. ..

Specifically, in the hit rainbow effect A and the simulated rainbow effect A, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, the back-up front decorative body 3310 does not move from the initial position to the appearance position, and is initially set. It shall be maintained at the position, and the back upper front decorative body 3310 is not lit in the rainbow light emitting mode by using each of the seven numbered display bodies. Further, in the rainbow effect B and the simulated rainbow effect B at the time of hitting, it is assumed that the back-up front decoration body 3310 operates from the initial position to the appearance position during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, and the back-up front decoration The body 3310 is lit in a rainbow light emitting mode by using each of the seven numbered display bodies. Further, in the hit rainbow effect C and the simulated rainbow effect C, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timing t1 to t10), the back-up front decorative body 3310 does not move from the initial position to the appearance position, and is initially set. It shall be maintained at the position, and the back upper front decorative body 3310 is lit in a rainbow light emitting mode by using each of the seven numbered display bodies.

In this example, the effect introduction period is started when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the end of the variable display of the symbol and the state in which the variable display of the symbol is not performed. Then, during the production introduction period, the production display device 1600 is used to display (movie) the model introduction of the pachinko machine 1, and at the end stage, the logo display of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. There is. At this time, one of the simulated rainbow effects A to C is executed while the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is being displayed, and during the execution period of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, the LEDs 1 to 4 and the door of the game board 5 are executed. Using LEDs 5 to 7 of the frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode is executed. While the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is being displayed, an effect image in a rainbow mode is displayed for the logo display of the model title. That is, the logo display of the model title is divided into a plurality of display areas, and the effect image of the rainbow mode in which the plurality of display areas are displayed in different display colors is displayed. In such a rainbow-type effect image, the display color displayed in each of the plurality of display areas is changed to "red-> purple-> blue-> green-> orange-> yellow-> white" every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). The changes are made in a predetermined order of "→ red", and such regular changes are repeated until the timing t10 is reached (for example, 5 seconds).

Next, when the logo display of the model title ends, any of the simulated rainbow effects A to C being executed ends, and after the logo display of the model title ends, the manufacturer that manufactured the pachinko machine 1 in the effect display device 1600. After that, a warning message about "prevention of immersiveness" (for example, "Pachinko is something to enjoy moderately. Let's be careful about immersiveness") is displayed to prevent excessive immersiveness in the game. Is running. Then, the production introduction period is terminated by displaying a warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness". Here, when the simulated rainbow effects A to C are executed, the player is motivated to play because the same effect as the rainbow effects A to C at the time of hit, which is executed as the hit confirmation effect, is executed. However, after executing the simulated rainbow effects A to C, after executing the logo display of the manufacturer that manufactured the pachinko machine 1, a warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is displayed. By executing the display, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively absorbed in the game in the subsequent game.

As described above, in the simulated rainbow effect A, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effect A, the back-up front decorative body 3310 does not move from the initial position to the appearance position and is maintained at the initial position. As for the back-up front decorative body 3310, each of the seven numbered display bodies is used so as not to light in the rainbow light emitting mode. For this reason, after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed, there is no need to perform an operation for returning the back-up front decorative body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position, and the period until the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of entanglement" is started. Is short. That is, after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed, the execution period of the logo display of the manufacturer that manufactured the pachinko machine 1 is short, and the start timing of displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is early.

On the other hand, in the simulated rainbow effect B, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effect B, the back-up front decorative body 3310 operates from the initial position to the appearance position, and the back-up front decorative body 3310 is operated. Each of the seven numbered display bodies is used to light up in a rainbow light emitting mode. Here, after the execution of the simulated rainbow effect B, it is necessary to perform an operation for returning the back-up front decoration body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position, and the operation is executed before the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of entanglement". During the execution period of displaying the logo of the model title, the operation for returning the back-up front decorative body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position is executed. For this reason, after the simulated rainbow effect B is executed, it takes a long time to start displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness". That is, after the simulated rainbow effect B is executed, the execution period of the logo display of the manufacturer that manufactured the pachinko machine 1 is long, and the start timing of displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is late.

Further, in the simulated rainbow effect C, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effect C, the back upper front decorative body 3310 does not move from the initial position to the appearance position and is maintained at the initial position. The upper front decorative body 3310 is lit in a rainbow light emitting mode by using each of the seven numbered display bodies. Here, the simulated rainbow effect C is the same as the simulated rainbow effect B in that it lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode using each of the seven numbered display bodies in the back-up front decorative body 3310. At the time of executing the effect C, although the back upper front decorative body 3310 is maintained in the initial position, it is important to pay attention to whether or not the back upper front decorative body 3310 operates from the initial position to the appearance position. For this reason, after the simulated rainbow effect C is executed, there is a possibility that the back-up front decorative body 3310 is being paid attention to, and when a warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is displayed at an early timing, the "prevention of entanglement" is displayed. You may miss the warning message about. In this regard, after the simulated rainbow effect C is executed, the operation for returning the back-up front decorative body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position is not required during the execution period of the logo display of the model title, but the simulated rainbow effect B As with the execution of, it takes a long time to start displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness". That is, after the simulated rainbow effect C is executed, the execution period of the logo display of the manufacturer that manufactured the pachinko machine 1 is long, and the start timing for displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is delayed. It is possible to prevent overlooking the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness".

In this example, in the simulated rainbow effects A to C, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation Using LEDs 8 to 9 of the unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode is executed. In addition, in the simulated rainbow effect A, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effect A, each of the seven numbered display bodies in the back-up front decorative body 3310 is not lit in the rainbow light emitting mode. On the other hand, in the simulated rainbow effects B and C, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effects B and C, each of the seven numbered display bodies in the back-up front decorative body 3310 is used to light up in a rainbow light emitting mode. I try to do it. That is, the simulated rainbow effects B and C are configured so that the number of members (light emitting regions) involved in the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode is larger than that of the simulated rainbow effect A. The simulated rainbow effects B and C are configured so that the start timing for displaying a warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is later than that of the simulated rainbow effects A. In this way, when the simulated rainbow effects B and C are executed, the start timing for displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" to be executed after that is delayed, which is involved in the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode. It is possible to moderately entertain the state in which the player's motivation to play is high due to the large number of members (light emitting areas) until a warning message is displayed.

Further, in this example, in the simulated rainbow effect B, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effect B, the back upper front decorative body 3310 is operated from the initial position to the appearance position, but the back side is the appearance position. The distance that the upper front decorative body 3310 moves from the initial position can be changed in a plurality of steps. Therefore, after the simulated rainbow effect B is executed, the distance moved to return the back-up front decoration body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position is different, so that the warning message regarding "prevention of entanglement" is started to be displayed. The period (execution period of the logo display of the model title) is variable according to the distance traveled. For example, in the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effect B, if the back-up front decorative body 3310 has moved a long distance from the initial position as the appearance position, after the simulated rainbow effect B is executed, the “immersion” is performed. The period until the display of the warning message regarding "prevention" is started is extended. On the other hand, in the simulated rainbow effect A, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effect A, the back-up front decorative body 3310 does not move from the initial position to the appearance position and is maintained at the initial position. Therefore, after executing the simulated rainbow effect A, there is no need to perform an operation to return the back-up front decoration body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position, and until the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of entanglement" is started. (Execution period of logo display of model title) is fixed.

Further, in this example, the execution period of the simulated rainbow effect A and the simulated rainbow effect B is the same, and the period of executing the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is the same. Since the pre-decorative body 3310 operates from the initial position to the appearance position, the execution period may be longer than that of the simulated rainbow effect A. Further, as described above, after the simulated rainbow effect B is executed, a warning message regarding "prevention of entanglement" is displayed according to the distance moved to return the back upper front decoration body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position. The period until the start (execution period of the logo display of the model title) is made variable. As a result, even if the execution period of the simulated rainbow effect B becomes long, the period until the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is started (the execution period of the logo display of the model title) can be changed. , It is possible to make the completion timing of the series of production introduction period as soon as possible by the end of the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness", and the execution period of the series of production introduction period becomes unnecessarily long. Can be prevented.

Further, in this example, after the simulated rainbow effects A to C are executed, the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is started to be displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed, but the rainbow effects A to C at the time of hitting are started. Even after the execution of, the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is started after the lapse of a predetermined period. As a result, when the rainbow effects A to C at the time of hitting are executed, the hit is executed as a fixed hit effect, so that a state in which the player's motivation to play may be excessively improved may occur. By displaying a warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" after executing the rainbow effects A to C at the time of hitting, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively enthusiastic about the game in the subsequent game.

In the above, the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is displayed after the execution of the rainbow effects A to C at the time of hitting. It is preferable that the execution period of the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" after the execution of the simulated rainbow effects A to C is longer than the execution period of the display of the warning message. As a result, when the simulated rainbow effects A to C are executed, the player's motivation to play may be excessively improved even though the effect is not a definite hit effect, but the execution period of displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is lengthened. By doing so, it is possible to surely reduce the state in which such a game motivation is excessively improved. Further, it is preferable that the execution period of displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is shorter than the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect executed before that. As a result, while the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is being displayed, the state in which the motivation for playing is excessively improved is reduced. It is possible to prevent the motivation to play from being excessively reduced.

(Regarding the deletion of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" after the end of simulated rainbow production A)
In this example, in the simulated rainbow effect A, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effect A, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to the effect operation unit 300. 9. The light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed by using the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, but the back upper front decorative body 3310 does not move from the initial position to the appearance position and is maintained at the initial position. As for the back-up front decorative body 3310, each of the seven numbered display bodies is used so as not to light in the rainbow light emitting mode. During the execution of the simulated rainbow effect A, the player's motivation to play is not excessively improved as compared with the simulated rainbow effects B and C, and after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed, the player's motivation to play is not excessively improved. , I don't feel the need to display a warning message about "prevention of immersiveness". Therefore, in this example, only after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated while the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is being displayed, the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is deleted. It is possible to do.

FIG. 226 is a timing chart showing an example of erasing the entanglement prevention display after executing the simulated rainbow effect. As described above, after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed, the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is displayed. When the 301 is operated, it is possible to erase the display of the warning message regarding the "prevention of immersiveness". As a result, while the simulated rainbow effect A is being executed, the motivation for playing is improved by executing the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode, but after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed, cautions regarding "prevention of immersiveness" are taken. By executing the display of the arousal message, the improved play motivation can be diminished, and the display of the caution message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" can be effectively notified. In addition, while the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is being displayed, the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" can be erased by operating the effect operation unit 301 at the player's will, which is excessive. It is possible to prevent the state in which the willingness to play is diminished from continuing.

On the other hand, in the simulated rainbow effect B, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effect B, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, Not only is the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode executed by using the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, but also the back upper front decorative body 3310 is assumed to operate from the initial position to the appearance position, and the back upper front decorative body is assumed to operate. The 3310 is lit in a rainbow light emitting mode by using each of the seven numbered display bodies. That is, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect B, there are more members (light emitting areas) involved in the light emission effect that are lit in the rainbow light emission mode than in the simulated rainbow effect A, and the motivation for playing is excessively improved. It has become. Therefore, after the simulated rainbow effect B is executed, the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is displayed. However, while the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is being displayed, the effect operation unit 301 is displayed. Even if it is operated, it is impossible to erase the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness". As a result, after the simulated rainbow effect B is executed, the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is displayed for a predetermined period regardless of whether or not the effect operation unit 301 is operated. It is possible to surely reduce the state in which the motivation for playing is improved, and it is possible to effectively notify the display of a warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness".

Further, in this example, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated while the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is being displayed after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed, the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is deleted. However, during the period from the execution of the simulated rainbow effect A to the start of displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" (execution period of the logo display of the model title), the effect operation unit 301 is operated. Even when it is done, it is possible to erase (do not execute) the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness". As a result, the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is hidden by operating the production operation unit 301 by the player's will before starting the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness". It is possible to prevent a state in which the willingness to play is reduced by displaying a warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" in advance. Similarly, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect A, the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is deleted (not executed) after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed. Is possible. Even with such a configuration, the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is displayed by operating the production operation unit 301 by the player's will before starting the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness". Can be hidden, and it is possible to prevent a state in which the willingness to play is reduced by displaying a warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" in advance.

(Regarding the execution restrictions of simulated rainbow production)
In this example, during the execution of the effect introduction period during which the symbol is being displayed in a non-variable manner, as the simulated rainbow effects A to C, the light emitting effects that are lit in the rainbow light emitting mode are executed, and the simulated rainbow effects A to C are executed. Later, a warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is displayed. During the execution of such simulated rainbow effects A to C, the player's motivation to play is improved. Therefore, for the player who is easily absorbed in the game, the light emission that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode in the first place. There was a danger of performing the production. Therefore, in this example, a predetermined operation unit that can be operated by the player is newly provided in addition to the effect operation unit 301, and when a specific action is detected for the predetermined operation unit, the simulated rainbow effect A By restricting the execution of ~ C, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming in a state where the player's motivation to play is improved.

FIG. 227 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the execution of the simulated rainbow effect is restricted. First, on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, a "entry prevention switch" (not shown) that can be operated by the player is provided. As for the squeeze prevention switch, a knock type is adopted, which is configured to maintain the pressing position when it is pressed all the way for the first time and to return to the initial position when it is pressed all the way for the second time. Then, when the specific action A is detected by operating the entanglement prevention switch to be maintained at the pressed position, when the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effects A to C arrives, the simulated rainbow effects A to C are executed. However, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is not executed by using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. Is restricted. In addition, if the specific action A is not detected, a warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is displayed after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed. However, when the specific action A is detected, the specific action A is displayed. Also restricts the display of warning messages regarding "prevention of immersiveness" from being executed. Further, when the specific action A is detected, the game cannot be played, for example, the game ball B is not launched from the ball launching device 540 even if the handle 195 is operated, or the game ball B is first started. It is controlled so that the variation display of the symbol is not started even if the ball is entered into various entrances such as the mouth 2004.

The entanglement prevention switch is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and although it can be operated by the player, it is assumed that the player's family and hall personnel will operate it. Then, when the player's family or hall personnel determine that the player is absorbed in the game, the player's family or hall personnel should operate the depression prevention switch so as to stop the game. Just do it. Here, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, the player's motivation to play is improved by executing the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode. By operating the entanglement prevention switch, it is possible to prevent the player from being enthusiastic about the game in advance without executing the simulated rainbow effects A to C. In addition, when the player's family or hall personnel operate the entanglement prevention switch, the purpose is to stop the game in the first place, so not only the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed, but also the simulated rainbow effects A to It is also assumed that the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" after the execution of C is not executed.

Further, on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, apart from the "entry prevention switch", a "entry prevention switch" (not shown) that can be operated by the player is provided. As for the squeeze prevention switch, like the squeeze prevention switch, the knock type is configured to maintain the pressed position when it is pressed all the way for the first time and return to the initial position when it is pressed all the way for the second time. It has been adopted. Then, when the specific action B is detected by operating the squeeze prevention switch to be maintained at the pressed position, the same as when the specific action A is detected by operating the squeeze prevention switch to be maintained at the pressed position. When the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effects A to C arrives, the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed, and LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 of the effect operation unit 300 are not executed. ~ 9, LED 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are restricted so as not to execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. However, when the specific action B is detected by operating the squeeze prevention switch to be maintained at the pressed position, it is different from the case where the squeeze prevention switch is operated to be maintained at the pressed position and the specific action A is detected. , A warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is to be displayed.

The entanglement prevention switch is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and is assumed to be operated by the player. Then, when the player is concerned that he / she will be absorbed in the game, he / she may operate the depression prevention switch himself / herself so that the effect of being absorbed in the game does not occur. Here, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, the player's motivation to play is improved by executing the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode. By operating, it is possible to prevent the player from being absorbed in the game in advance without executing the simulated rainbow effects A to C. In addition, while the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed, the warning message regarding "prevention of immersiveness" is displayed after the simulated rainbow effects A to C are executed. It is possible to prevent the player from becoming absorbed in the game due to the display causing a state in which the player's motivation to play is reduced.

In this example, as the "entry prevention switch" that restricts the execution of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, the "entry strong prevention switch" and the "entry weakness prevention switch" are provided. The immersive strength prevention switch is maintained at the pressed position when it is pressed all the way to the initial position by pressing it all the way to the initial position in a state where the simulated rainbow effects A to C are restricted from being executed. Even if it is returned, the restricted state in which the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed is not released, and the operation is continued unless the power is turned on again. As a result, after the player's family and hall personnel operate the immersive prevention switch, even if the player operates the entanglement prevention switch, the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed and the game is performed. Since the state in which the player cannot play the game continues, the game can be surely stopped. On the other hand, with regard to the immersive weakness prevention switch, when it is pressed all the way to the back, it is maintained at the pressed position, and in a state where the simulated rainbow effects A to C are restricted from being executed, it is initially pressed all the way to the back. When the position is returned, the restricted state in which the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed can be released.

In addition, the entanglement prevention switch is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible for not only the player's family and hall personnel but also the player to operate it, but the player operates it. It is preferable that a person involved in the hall prepares a remote controller or the like so that the pachinko machine 1 can operate the remote controller or the like from a position away from the pachinko machine 1 to detect the specific action A. As a result, even when the player is seated on the pachinko machine 1, the player's family and hall personnel operate the remote controller or the like from a position away from the pachinko machine 1 to detect the specific action A. Can be made to. Further, if the squeeze prevention switch is provided on the remote controller or the like without providing the squeeze prevention switch on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the player cannot operate the squeeze prevention switch without permission, so that a simulated rainbow effect is produced. The player cannot release the state in which the A to C are restricted so as not to be executed, and the game can be stopped.

Further, in this example, the "entry weakness prevention switch" and the "entry prevention switch" are maintained at the pressed position when the first time they are pressed all the way, and the simulated rainbow effects A to C are restricted so as not to be executed. In, when the player returns to the initial position by pressing it all the way for the second time, the restricted state is not immediately released, and when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses, the restricted state is released. It is supposed to be. That is, the state in which the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed continues from the time when the predetermined position is returned to the initial position by pressing the button all the way to the back for the second time. As a result, immediately before the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, even if the player presses the button all the way to the initial position to return to the initial position, the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed and the player can play the game. It is possible to effectively prevent the person from being absorbed in the state.

In addition, during the operation of the "entry prevention switch" and the "entry prevention switch" (when not released), the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed, and the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the door frame top unit 450 are not executed. LEDs 5 to 7, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to limit the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. Instead of lighting the light emitting effect, at least a part of LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit in a single color. It may be configured to notify the outside that the "entry prevention switch" or the "entry prevention switch" is being operated. Further, for each type of "entry prevention switch" and "entry prevention switch", LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 of the door frame 3 It may be configured so that the emission color which lights at least a part of ~ 14 is different. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp from the outside that the simulated rainbow effects A to C are restricted from being executed while the "entry prevention switch" or the "entry prevention switch" is being operated. ..

[Confirmation of rainbow light emission]
In the present embodiment, the rainbow effect at the time of hit (light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode) is executed as the hit confirmation effect at which the hit is confirmed during the variable display of the symbol. If the production is not performed properly, there is a risk that it will be a factor that reduces the enjoyment of the game. In particular, since the appearance rate of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is extremely low, it is difficult to confirm whether or not the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed even in a hall or a factory. Therefore, in this example, the rainbow light emission mode can be confirmed at a timing different from the rainbow effect at the time of hitting. Specifically, during the effect introduction period during which the symbol is being displayed in a non-variable manner, as a simulated rainbow effect, a light emission effect that lights up in the same rainbow light emission mode as the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is executed, and the rainbow light emission mode is executed. It is possible to easily check in halls, factories, etc. whether or not the light emission effect that lights up with is normally executed. The effect introduction period is an effect that starts when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the end of the variable display of the symbol and the state in which the variable display of the symbol is not performed, and the model introduction of the pachinko machine 1. In addition to the above, a simulated rainbow effect will be executed. Then, in this example, with respect to the simulated rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and an effect operation unit are used during the execution period of the rainbow effect, as compared with the rainbow effect at the time of hitting. It is the same in that the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed by using the LEDs 8 to 9 of 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, but the timing of regularly switching the light emission colors constituting the rainbow light emission mode is earlier. It is different in that it is done or slowed down.

In this example, it is possible to execute an effect suggesting the set value 6 as the above-mentioned suggestion effect A during the variable display of the symbol. Is the same in that it executes. That is, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting or the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the LED 5 of the door frame top unit 450 are linked to the display of the effect display device 1600, as in the case of executing the suggestion effect A. ~ 7, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode. Specifically, in the case of executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches a predetermined predetermined timing (timing t1), the game is played. LEDs 1 and 2 of the board 5 are "red", LEDs 3 to 4 of the game board 5 are "purple", LEDs 5 to 6 of the door frame top unit 450 are "blue", LEDs 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and door frame 3 LED8 is "green", LED9 of the door frame 3 and LED10 of the door frame 3 are "orange", LEDs 11 to 12 of the door frame 3 are "yellow", and LEDs 13 to 14 of the door frame 3 are "white". I try to let you. Further, in the case of executing the simulated rainbow effect, when the elapsed time from the start of the effect introduction period reaches a predetermined predetermined timing (timing t1), the LEDs 1 and 2 of the game board 5 are turned on. "Red", LEDs 3-4 of the game board 5 are "purple", LEDs 5-6 of the door frame top unit 450 are "blue", LED 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LED 8 of the door frame 3 are "green", the door The LED 9 of the frame 3 and the LED 10 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light in "orange", the LEDs 11 to 12 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light in "yellow", and the LEDs 13 to 14 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light in "white". That is, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light with different emission colors for each of the two groups. ..

Then, with respect to LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). , The LED that emits light in "red" is emitted in "purple", the LED that emits in "purple" is emitted in "blue", and the LED that emits in "blue" is emitted in "green" and "green". The LED that emits "orange", the LED that emits "orange" is "yellow", the LED that emits "yellow" is "white", the LED that emits "white" is "red", Change to. As described above, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 have a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). Each time, the emission color of the LED for each of the two groups is changed in the predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" until the timing t10 is reached. I try to repeat such regular changes (for example, for 10 seconds).

In this example, not only the hit rainbow effect is executed during the variable display of the symbol, but also the hit rainbow effect is executed as a simulated rainbow effect even during the effect introduction period during the non-variable display of the symbol. Similar to the above, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed. In this way, when executing the simulated rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used. It is possible to confirm whether or not the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed. In addition, when executing the simulated rainbow effect, by observing the state where the LED emission color is changed in the predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" at any time. , It is possible to confirm whether or not each of the LEDs 1 to 14 can normally emit light in each of the emission colors constituting the rainbow emission mode, and it is easy to find out whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the emission of any of the LEDs. can do.

Further, in the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, any of the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 emit light. When no abnormality has occurred in the door, by controlling each emission color to be switched to a plurality of emission colors in order in a short unit emission time, these LEDs cooperate to visually emit light in a rainbow emission mode. It becomes possible to visually recognize as if it is being done, and it is possible to execute a light emitting effect with an impact. Further, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are controlled by interlocking the LEDs 1 to 14, and the LEDs 1 to 14 are linked. By emitting light in a plurality of colors so that the two groups emit light in different emission colors and switching the emission colors in a short time, it is possible to execute a light emission effect having a greater impact than usual.

In this example, as the light emission of the rainbow light emission mode, seven colors are made to appear at the same time by using a plurality of LEDs, and the light emission colors of each are switched regularly. It is not necessary to have seven colors, as long as a predetermined number of three or more colors appear at the same time.

Further, the display content displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be different depending on whether the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is executed or the simulated rainbow effect is executed. For example, when the hit rainbow effect is executed, the symbols are displayed in parallel, but when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the symbols may not be displayed in parallel. As a result, when the simulated rainbow effect is being executed, there is no misunderstanding that the rainbow effect is being executed at the time of hitting. The display content displayed on the effect display device 1600 is not limited to this, and for example, a display such as "simulating" may be executed when the simulated rainbow effect is executed.

Further, the rainbow effect and the simulated rainbow effect at the time of hitting are performed by using LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. It is the same in that the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed, but it is preferable to provide the control program of another effect instead of the control program of the same effect and execute those control programs. That is, the control program for the rainbow effect at the time of hitting and the control program for the simulated rainbow effect are stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 as control programs for the separate effects. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in either the hit rainbow effect control program or the simulated rainbow effect control program, the control program can be normally executed for either one, and the abnormality occurs. It is possible to minimize the non-execution of the production at the time.

FIG. 228 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the light emission confirmation of the LED is performed at the time of executing the simulated rainbow effect. In this example, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are divided into two groups at predetermined intervals. The emission color of the LED is changed in the predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red", but when executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the normal speed (for example) The rainbow emission mode is such that the emission color of the LED is switched in 0.1 seconds), whereas the emission color of the LED is switched at a speed slower than the normal speed (for example, 1 second) when the simulated rainbow effect is executed. The light emission effect that lights up with is started. That is, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is started so that the interval at which the emission color of the LED is switched is longer than that of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting. Then, after the start of the simulated rainbow effect, the emission colors of the LEDs are switched, and at least all the emission colors constituting the rainbow emission mode appear for each of the LEDs 1 to 14, and then the rainbow at the time of hitting. Similar to the effect, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed so that the light emission color of the LED can be switched at a normal speed (for example, 0.1 second). As described above, at the start of the simulated rainbow effect, since the interval at which the LED emission colors are switched is long, whether or not each of the LEDs 1 to 14 can normally emit light in each of the emission colors constituting the rainbow emission mode. Can be slowly confirmed, and it is possible to easily find out whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the light emission of any of the LEDs. In addition, after the start of the simulated rainbow effect, by returning the interval at which the LED emission color is switched to the normal speed, the LED emission color is emitted at the normal speed (for example, 0.1 second) like the rainbow effect at the time of hitting. It can also be confirmed that it is possible to switch.

In addition, as described above in detail, the effect introduction period starts when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the end of the variable display of the symbol (may be after the power is turned on) and the state in which the variable display of the symbol is not displayed. doing. Then, during the production introduction period, the production display device 1600 is used to display (movie) the model introduction of the pachinko machine 1, and at the end stage, the logo display of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. There is. At this time, the simulated rainbow effect is executed while the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is being displayed, and during the execution period of the simulated rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 are executed. Using LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode is executed. On the other hand, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the effect display device 1600 does not execute the logo display of the model title of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, when executing the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode, the effect display device 1600 visually recognizes whether or not the logo display of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is executed, so that the executing rainbow effect is simulated rainbow. It is possible to grasp whether or not it is an effect, and by extension, it is possible to understand that it is an effect for confirming whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the light emission of the LED.

In this example, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, an effect image (for example, a background image) displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 or a part of the display area of the effect display device 1600. The effect image of the rainbow mode is displayed for the effect image (for example, the effect image of a character, an item, etc.) displayed in. On the other hand, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the effect display device 1600 is configured not to display the effect image in the rainbow mode for the logo display of the model title, the background image, the character, the item, and the like. .. As a result, when executing the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode, the effect display device 1600 simulates the rainbow effect being executed by visually recognizing whether or not the effect image in the rainbow mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It is possible to easily grasp whether or not it is a rainbow effect, and by extension, it is possible to easily grasp that it is an effect for confirming whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the light emission of the LED.

Further, in this example, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the back upper front decorative body 3310 can be operated from the initial position to the appearance position, and the back upper front decorative body 3310 is numbered seven. Each display body is used to light up in a rainbow light emitting mode. On the other hand, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the back-up front decoration body 3310 does not move from the initial position to the appearance position and is maintained at the initial position. Each of the numbered display bodies is used so as not to light in the rainbow light emitting mode. As described in detail above, the back-up front effect unit 3300 attached to the game board 5 has a rectangular back-up front decoration 3310 that is long in the left-right direction in the front view, and a back-top front decoration 3310 behind the back-top front decoration 3310. It is provided with a back-up front decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a back-up front elevating unit (not shown) for raising and lowering the back-up front decoration body 3310. When a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the back-up front decorative body 3310 can be moved from the initial position to the appearance position, and the back-up front decorative body 3310 can appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600. .. As a result, when executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode, whether or not to operate the back upper front decorative body 3310 from the initial position to the appearance position, and each of the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decorative body 3310 are displayed. By visually recognizing whether or not to turn on the rainbow light emission mode that emits light with different emission colors, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the rainbow effect being executed is a simulated rainbow effect, and as a result, there is an abnormality in the LED light emission. It can be easily grasped that it is an effect for confirming whether or not it has occurred.

In this way, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting or the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame 3 It is the same in that the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed by using the LEDs 10 to 14, but whether or not the effect image of the rainbow mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the initial front decoration body 3310 on the back. It is different in whether or not it is operated from the position to the appearance position and whether or not each of the seven numbered display bodies in the back-up front decorative body 3310 is lit in a rainbow light emitting mode that emits light in different light emitting colors. That is, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the effect is executed with an incomplete effect content so that a part of the effect content executed in the hit rainbow effect is missing. As a result, when executing the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode, it is easy to check whether the executing rainbow effect is a simulated rainbow effect by visually recognizing whether or not the effect is executed with incomplete effect contents. It can be easily grasped that it is an effect for confirming whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the light emission of the LED. Further, when executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the rainbow light is emitted by using LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. As an effect related to the light emitting effect of lighting in the mode, the operation of the back upper front decorative body 3310 and the lighting of the rainbow light emitting mode in the back upper front decorative body 3310 are added, and an integrated effect is provided so that the number of related members is increased. By executing the above, the production can be made more interesting than the simulated rainbow production, and the production can be noticed by the player.

In the above, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting or the simulated rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame 3 It is the same in that the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed by using the LEDs 10 to 14, but during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) may be configured so that the LEDs do not light up. In such a configuration, during execution of the simulated rainbow effect, a part of the emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode is missing, and the light is emitted in a mode in which the rainbow emission mode is not established. The difference becomes clear, and it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the rainbow effect being executed is a simulated rainbow effect.

Further, as described in detail above, the plate unit 200 is provided with a light amount adjusting button 228 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. As the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame 3 With respect to the LEDs 10 to 14, it is possible to adjust the light amount step by step by performing the light amount adjustment operation using the light amount adjustment button 228. For example, it is possible to adjust the LED light intensity step from 1 (minimum light intensity) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum light intensity), and the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated upward to increase the step. As the light intensity of the LED increases and the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated downward to reduce the step, the light intensity of the LED decreases. Regarding the LED of the light emitting decoration, the amount of light can be adjusted both during the fluctuation and non-variation of the design.

Regarding the above, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting or the simulated rainbow effect, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, at least one of the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is rainbow. It is possible to adjust the amount of light of the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) constituting the light emitting mode. I have to. As a result, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the rainbow is used by using LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. It is possible not only to confirm whether or not the light emitting effect of lighting in the light emitting mode can be normally executed, but also to confirm whether or not each of the LEDs 1 to 14 can normally adjust the amount of light.

In this example, among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 at least during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the door). LEDs 5 to 7 of the frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) allow the amount of light to be adjusted, but do not constitute a rainbow light emitting mode (game). With respect to the LEDs 15 to 17) of the panel 5, the amount of light cannot be adjusted so that the LED 15 to 17) is always maintained in a state of emitting light at a constant amount of light. That is, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, the light amount can be changed (the rainbow light emission mode) as opposed to the LED (the LED that does not constitute the rainbow light emission mode) whose light amount is invariant. The amount of light of the LEDs) constituting the above will change relatively. Thereby, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, when the light amount adjusting button 228 is operated, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the light amount can be normally adjusted with respect to the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode. For LEDs that do not constitute a rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5), it is impossible to adjust the amount of light, and not only the state of constantly emitting light at a constant amount of light is maintained, but also the emission color is maintained. Is preferable. As a result, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs that do not form the rainbow light emitting mode are not paid attention to, and the emission colors of the LEDs that form the rainbow light emitting mode are normally switched. You can pay attention to the confirmation of whether or not.

On the other hand, among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the door) even during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting. LEDs 5 to 7 of the frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) allow the amount of light to be adjusted, whereas the LEDs do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (game). Regarding the LEDs 15 to 17) of the panel 5, the amount of light cannot be adjusted, and when the light is emitted, the light is always emitted at a constant amount. The decorativeness is not lost during the variable display of the design. As with the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, for the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode, the light amount cannot be adjusted, and when the light is emitted, the light is always emitted at a constant amount. However, it is preferable to maintain the emission color. As a result, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the LED that does not constitute the rainbow light emission mode is not paid attention to, and the LED that constitutes the rainbow light emission mode is lit in the rainbow light emission mode. You can notice that it is being executed.

Further, in this example, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, it is confirmed whether or not the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed. However, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the effect operation unit 301 It is possible to end the simulated rainbow effect when you operate. Specifically, among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode. The rainbow effect using (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) is completed, and the rainbow light emission mode is changed. Regarding the constituent LEDs, the light emission in the rainbow light emission mode is switched to non-light emission or light emission in a single color. As a result, at the time of manufacturing confirmation at the factory, after confirming whether or not the simulated rainbow effect can be executed normally and the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed, any arbitrary during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect can be executed. By operating the effect operation unit 301 at the timing, the simulated rainbow effect can be ended at an arbitrary timing, and the execution of the unnecessary rainbow effect after the confirmation affects other manufacturing confirmations and the like. It can be stopped. In addition, after the simulated rainbow effect is completed, it is clarified that the simulated rainbow effect is completed by switching the LED constituting the rainbow light emission mode from the light emission in the rainbow light emission mode to the non-light emission or the light emission in a single color. I can inform you.

On the other hand, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit, even if the effect operation unit 301 is operated, the rainbow effect at the time of hit is not ended. As a result, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the rainbow effect at the time of hitting does not end in the middle, and it is possible to reliably notify that the definite effect at which the hit is confirmed is being executed.

Further, as a modification, among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 at least during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5). As for LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, the LED emission changes depending on the emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode. The LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are configured so as to be in a state in which the LED does not emit light or in a state in which the LED emits light without changing the emission color (does not blink). May be good. As a result, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs that do not form the rainbow light emitting mode are not paid attention to, and the emission colors of the LEDs that form the rainbow light emitting mode are normally switched. You can pay attention to the confirmation of whether or not.

Also in the above modified example, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated at least during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the simulated rainbow effect is terminated and the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the door) constituting the rainbow light emitting mode are terminated. LEDs 5 to 7 of the frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) are switched from light emission in the rainbow light emission mode to non-light emission or single color light emission. .. On the other hand, with respect to the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated, the LED does not emit light or the light emitting color does not change and the LED emits light. I try to keep the state (not blinking). As a result, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, only the light emission status of the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode changes, and it is clearly notified that the simulated rainbow effect has ended. Can be done.

On the other hand, as a modification, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LED 1 of the game board 5). ~ 4, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3), although the LED emission changes with the emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode. On the other hand, the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode may be configured so that the LED can be in a blinking state or the light emitting color of the LED can be changed. .. As a result, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the decorativeness during the variable display of the symbol is not lost even for the LED that does not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode.

Further, in this example, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, when the variable display of the symbol is started by entering the balls into various starting ports (first starting port 2004 and second starting port 2005), the simulated rainbow effect is ended. (The production introduction period ends), but during the execution of the simulated rainbow production, the production is performed even if there is no entry into various start ports (first start port 2004 and second start port 2005). When the operation unit 301 is operated, the simulated rainbow effect can be ended. As a result, when it is desired to end the running rainbow effect at the time of manufacturing confirmation at the factory, it is not necessary to enter the ball into various start ports, and it is only necessary to operate the effect operation unit 301. Further, on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the effect operation unit 301, a plurality of operation units such as a light amount adjustment button 228 and a volume adjustment button 227 are provided. Only when the operation unit 301 is operated, it is possible to end the rainbow effect being executed. As a result, for example, even if the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, the simulated rainbow effect being executed is not ended, and the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the door frame top unit 450) constituting the rainbow light emitting mode are formed. It is possible to sufficiently confirm whether each of the LEDs 5 to 7, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14) of the door frame 3 can normally adjust the amount of light.

Further, in this example, a simulated rainbow effect is executed during the execution of the effect introduction period, which is started when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the state where the symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, and the light is turned on in the rainbow light emission mode. I try to check whether the light emission effect can be executed normally, but after the power is turned on, the simulated start operation unit, which is a special operation unit for forcibly starting the simulated rainbow effect, is on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. It is provided on the side, and when the simulated start operation unit is operated after the power is turned on, it is possible to start the simulated rainbow effect and confirm whether or not the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed. Further, the simulated rainbow effect is not started until a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the operation of the simulated start operation unit after the power is turned on, and the simulated rainbow effect is started after the predetermined period elapses. I am trying to do it. As a result, for example, at the time of manufacturing confirmation in line work in a factory, the simulated rainbow effect can be started at an arbitrary timing by operating the simulated start operation unit at an arbitrary timing after the power is turned on. The problem (confirmation error, omission of confirmation, etc.) caused by the time difference between the work process of turning on the power and operating the simulated start operation unit and the work process of confirming lighting is solved, and the light is lit in the rainbow light emission mode. It is possible to improve the efficiency of the confirmation work of whether or not the production can be executed normally. Further, during the period from the operation of the simulated start operation unit provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to the elapse of a predetermined period (while waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow effect), the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 On the side, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect that lights in a light emitting mode different from the rainbow light emitting mode (for example, a single color light emitting mode or a light emitting mode having a plurality of light emitting colors less than the rainbow light emitting mode), and depending on the mode of line work. These confirmations may be made possible by utilizing the time difference described above. As a result, it is possible not only to prevent mistakes in confirmation and omission of confirmation of the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode executed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, but also to further improve the efficiency of the confirmation work. The simulated start operation unit may be an operation unit provided in a place where the player cannot operate or visually recognize the power switch 630a related to power-on, and may be a rotary switch type operation unit or a push switch. An example is an operation unit of the type, or a type of operation unit that is operated by inserting a special tool (thin rod, etc.) or a key possessed by the administrator. Of these, if the operation unit is a type of operation unit that is operated by inserting a special tool (thin rod, etc.) or key possessed by the administrator, the operation of the simulated start operation unit can be made to function only at the factory, and in the hall. It is also possible to prevent unintentional erroneous operation.

In the above, the simulated start operation unit for forcibly starting the simulated rainbow effect is provided on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, whereas the effect operation unit 301 for ending the simulated rainbow effect is the pachinko machine 1. It is provided on the front side of. As a result, after the simulated start operation unit is operated after the power is turned on and the simulated rainbow effect is started, in order to operate the effect operation unit 301, it is necessary to go around to the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and the factory manufacturing confirmation. At the time of, there is no need to forget to confirm whether or not the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode executed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 can be normally executed, and the effect operation unit 301 is operated to perform the simulated rainbow effect. Can be prevented from terminating.

(Relationship with confirmation other than rainbow emission)
As described above, in the present embodiment, in addition to executing the rainbow effect at the time of hit (light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode) as the hit confirmation effect that the hit is confirmed during the variable display of the symbol, the hit time A simulated rainbow effect is executed at a timing different from that of the rainbow effect, and it is possible to confirm the light emission in the rainbow light emission mode. That is, among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, directing operation). Regarding LEDs 8 to 9 of the unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, it is possible to confirm whether or not the lights are normally turned on during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, but the LEDs (game board) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode. Regarding LEDs 15 to 17) of No. 5, it is possible to confirm whether or not the lights are normally turned on at a timing different from the simulated rainbow effect. Further, it is possible to confirm whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected at a timing different from the simulated rainbow effect.

FIG. 237 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a confirmation period other than the simulated rainbow effect is provided after the power is turned on. In this example, among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 after the power is turned on, all the LEDs of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are used. I try to keep it lit. Further, the light emitting colors of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are set to emit light in a single color (for example, red or blue). As a result, after the power is turned on, by visually recognizing whether or not the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are lit, whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the light emission of the LED. Can be confirmed.

Further, after the power is turned on, the amount of light of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode cannot be adjusted, and the light is always maintained in a constant light amount. That is, even if the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated after the power is turned on, the light amount of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode does not change. As a result, after the power is turned on, the amount of light of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode does not become too dark, and it is confirmed whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the light emission of the LEDs. be able to. For LEDs that do not constitute a rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5), it is impossible to adjust the amount of light, and not only the state of constantly emitting light at a constant amount of light is maintained, but also the emission color is maintained. Is preferable. As a result, after the power is turned on, it is possible to pay attention only to the confirmation of whether or not the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are normally lit.

Further, after the power was turned on, all the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 that did not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) were turned on. Although it is maintained in a state, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 of the door frame 3) are used. Regarding ~ 14), it is restricted not to execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. Specifically, among the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3). , At least some of the LEDs, for example, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are turned on. Regarding the emission colors of the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) constituting the rainbow light emitting mode. , LEDs that do not form a rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) by emitting light in a single color (for example, green or yellow) that is different from the LEDs that do not form a rainbow light emission mode. It is notified that it is a confirmation period for checking whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the light emission of ~ 17). In this way, during the confirmation period of whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the light emission of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode, the LEDs that form the rainbow light emission mode (LED1 of the game board 5) ~ 4, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) do not perform the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. It is possible to pay attention to the confirmation of whether or not each LED is normally lit with respect to the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode without paying attention to the switching of the light emission. Further, the amount of the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) constituting the rainbow light emitting mode is adjusted. Even if the button 228 is operated, the amount of light does not change, which prevents the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode from affecting the confirmation of whether or not the lights are normally turned on. ing.

In this example, it is possible to confirm whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected after the power is turned on. That is, after the power is turned on, a confirmation period is provided to confirm whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. In the pachinko machine 1, the handle touch sensor 192 detects whether or not the player is in contact with the handle 195 on the main control board 1310 side, and the player detects the contact with the handle 195. By operating, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 detects on the main control board 1310 side, and it is possible to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 (launch the game ball B from the ball launcher 540). I have to. That is, even if the player comes into contact with the handle 195, if the contact with the handle 195 is not normally detected, the game ball B cannot be driven. Therefore, after the power is turned on, by providing a confirmation period for confirming whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, the hall manager or the like comes into contact with the handle 195 and comes into contact with the handle 195. Can be confirmed whether is detected normally.

Further, in the confirmation period of whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, when the hall manager or the like makes contact with the handle 195, if the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, the contact with the handle 195 is detected. , The fact that it is normally detected is notified to the outside. Specifically, in addition to the LED of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, an LED for notifying that the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected is provided. There is. Further, when the hall manager or the like contacts the steering wheel 195, if the contact with the steering wheel 195 is normally detected, a confirmation sound is output from the speaker. This makes it possible to appropriately confirm whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected when the hall manager or the like contacts the handle 195 after the power is turned on.

Further, as described above, after the power is turned on, among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the door frame). LEDs 5 to 7 of the top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) are restricted so as not to execute the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. That is, after the power is turned on, during the confirmation period of whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and LEDs 5 to 4 of the door frame top unit 450) are used. 7. LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14) of the door frame 3 are restricted so as not to execute the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. In this way, during the confirmation period of whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect Since the LEDs 8 to 9 of the operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14) of the door frame 3 do not perform the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, the handle 195 does not pay attention to the switching of the light emission in the rainbow light emission mode. Attention can be paid to the confirmation of whether or not the contact of the door is detected normally.

Although the details have been described above, in this example, a simulated start operation unit, which is a special operation unit for forcibly starting the simulated rainbow effect after the power is turned on, is provided on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 and simulated after the power is turned on. When the start operation unit is operated, it is possible to start the simulated rainbow effect and confirm whether or not the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed. Further, the simulated rainbow effect is not started until a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the operation of the simulated start operation unit after the power is turned on, and the simulated rainbow effect is started after the predetermined period elapses. I am trying to do it. As a result, after confirming whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the light emission of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode after the power is turned on, or after confirming that the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. After confirming whether or not to be performed, the simulated rainbow effect can be started at an arbitrary timing by operating the simulated start operation unit at an arbitrary timing during the confirmation period. Further, since the simulated rainbow effect is started after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the operation of the simulated start operation unit, for example, the work of operating the simulated start operation unit at the time of manufacturing confirmation in line work at a factory or the like. The LED (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the door frame top unit 450) that solves the problem (confirmation error, omission of confirmation, etc.) caused by the time difference between the process and the work process of confirming the lighting and constitutes the rainbow light emission mode. It is possible to improve the efficiency of the confirmation work of whether or not the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode can be normally executed in the LEDs 5 to 7, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14) of the door frame 3.

In the above, during the period from the operation of the simulated start operation unit to the elapse of a predetermined period (while waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow effect), the confirmation is executed before the simulated start operation unit is operated. The period is continued, and when the predetermined period elapses (when the simulated rainbow effect is started), the confirmation period executed before operating the simulated start operation unit is terminated. That is, during the period from the operation of the simulated start operation unit to the elapse of a predetermined period (while waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow effect), the simulated rainbow effect is not started and the light is turned on in the rainbow light emitting mode. Since the light emitting effect is not executed, it is confirmed whether the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are normally lit, and the handle is the same as before operating the simulated start operation unit. Attention can be paid to the confirmation of whether the contact with the 195 is normally detected.

Specifically, during the period from the operation of the simulated start operation unit to the elapse of a predetermined period (while waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow effect), the door is the same as before the simulated start operation unit is operated. Among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the frame 3 and the game board 5, all the LEDs of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are maintained in a lit state. When a predetermined period elapses (when the simulated rainbow effect is started), all the LEDs of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are terminated. As a result, by utilizing the time difference that occurs between the work process of operating the simulated start operation unit and the work process of confirming lighting, the light emission of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode is abnormal. Can be confirmed if is not occurring. Further, for example, even if it is not confirmed whether or not the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed before operating the simulated start operation unit, the rainbow light emission mode is performed after the simulated start operation unit is operated. Since it is possible to confirm whether or not the light emitting effect lit by is normally executed, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of confirmation mistakes, confirmation omissions, and the like. However, regarding the light emitting modes of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode, the light emitting modes different from the light emitting modes executed before operating the simulated start operation unit (for example, different light emitting modes). It emits light in color or in a blinking state instead of always lit. As a result, it is possible to clearly grasp whether or not the simulated start operation unit has been operated by the light emitting mode of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode.

Similarly, during the period from the operation of the simulated start operation unit to the elapse of a predetermined period (while waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow effect), the handle 195 is moved to the handle 195 as before the simulated start operation unit is operated. Whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected when the predetermined period elapses (when the simulated rainbow effect is started) is continued. I am trying to end the confirmation period of. That is, when the hall manager or the like contacts the handle 195 during the period from the operation of the simulated start operation unit to the elapse of a predetermined period (while waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow effect), the handle When the contact with the 195 is normally detected, the fact that the contact with the 195 is normally detected is notified to the outside. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected by utilizing the time difference generated between the work process of operating the simulated start operation unit and the work process of confirming the lighting. Further, for example, even if it is not confirmed whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected before operating the simulated start operation unit, the contact with the handle 195 after operating the simulated start operation unit is also performed. Since it is possible to confirm whether or not is normally detected, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of confirmation mistakes, confirmation omissions, and the like.

If the simulated start operation unit is not operated after the power is turned on, the confirmation period executed after the power is turned on is terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the power was turned on. I have to. That is, when the simulated start operation unit is not operated after the power is turned on, the LED (LED 15 of the game board 5) that does not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode is reached when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the power was turned on. ~ 17) is set to end the confirmation period of whether or not the light is normally lit and the confirmation period of whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. As a predetermined period for ending the confirmation period executed after the power is turned on, it is confirmed whether or not the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are normally lit, and the handle 195 is set. There is a period during which it is possible to sufficiently confirm whether or not the contact is detected normally. In this way, if the simulated start operation unit is not operated after the power is turned on, the simulated rainbow effect is not started immediately after the confirmation period executed after the power is turned on. Is executed during the execution of the effect introduction period that starts when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the state in which the variable display is not performed. It is possible to confirm whether or not the production can be executed normally.

Further, even after the simulated rainbow effect is started, it may be possible to confirm whether or not the contact with the steering wheel 195 is normally detected by the contact with the steering wheel 195. Specifically, when the simulated start operation unit is not operated after the power is turned on, the confirmation period executed after the power is turned on is set when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the power was turned on. Although it ends, an extension confirmation period may be generated after the end of the confirmation period, and it may be possible to confirm whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected by the contact with the handle 195 within the extension confirmation period. When the extension confirmation period is provided, the execution condition of the simulated rainbow effect may be satisfied within the extension confirmation period, and the extension confirmation period and the simulated rainbow effect may be executed in parallel. In such a case, if there is contact with the handle 195 within the extension confirmation period, among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, as in the case of operating the effect operation unit 301, Finished the rainbow effect using the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) constituting the rainbow light emitting mode. Then, the LED constituting the rainbow light emitting mode may be switched from the light emitting in the rainbow light emitting mode to the non-light emitting or the light emitting in a single color.

The main purpose of ending the simulated rainbow effect by operating the effect operation unit 301 is to end the unnecessary simulated rainbow effect, while it is not possible to end the simulated rainbow effect by touching the handle 195. The main purpose is not to end the necessary simulated rainbow effect, but to confirm whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. Further, in order to clarify such a difference, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated and when the handle 195 is touched, a partly different process is performed at a control point (for example, sound control) different from the light emission. It is preferable to keep it. For example, a unique effect end sound is output only when the simulated rainbow effect is terminated by the operation of the effect operation unit 301, whereby the simulated rainbow effect is produced by the operation of the effect operation unit 301 and the contact with the handle 195. Even if the point of ending is common, it is possible to make the operator surely recognize whether or not it is the end of an unnecessary simulated rainbow effect depending on the presence or absence of the effect end sound.

Further, in the above example, since a confirmation sound (a sound different from the production end sound) is emitted when the steering wheel 195 is touched, this confirmation sound is output by the contact with the steering wheel 195 within the extension confirmation period. If this is done, the operator can be surely recognized whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected by the difference between the effect end sound and the confirmation sound. Further, as this confirmation sound, a confirmation sound A at the time of contact with the handle 195 within the extension confirmation period and a confirmation sound B at the time of contact with the handle 195 within the confirmation period preceding the extension confirmation period are provided. However, due to the difference between the confirmation sounds A and B, in addition to confirming whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, it is also necessary to check whether or not the confirmation is performed during the extended confirmation period. It can be surely recognized by the person.

Further, in this example, when the power is turned off in the situation where the fluctuation display of the symbol is being performed or the hold in which the fluctuation display of the symbol is not performed is stored, such information is stored. After the power is turned on, such information is restored and the variable display of the symbol is restarted. After such power-on, the confirmation period of whether or not the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are normally lit, and whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. There is no confirmation period for. As a result, if the power is turned off while the symbol variation is being displayed or the hold is stored in which the symbol variation display has not yet been performed, the symbol variation display can be displayed quickly after the power is turned on. It can be restarted and can be prevented from affecting the restart of the game.

Further, in this example, the vibration is detected by the vibration sensor that detects the vibration applied to the pachinko machine 1 by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, or the magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 1. If a state in which magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor 1050 that detects magnetism applied to the pachinko machine 1 occurs, there is a possibility that cheating is being performed by vibration or magnetism, and such anomalies occur. The fact that it has occurred is notified to the outside. Then, after the power is turned on, a confirmation period of whether or not the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are normally lit, and a confirmation period of whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. In the above, when an abnormality occurs due to the detection of vibration or magnetism, such a confirmation period is forcibly terminated. As a result, during the confirmation period of whether or not the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are normally lit, and the confirmation period of whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, Hall managers and others are performing confirmation work, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts due to vibration or magnetism while aiming during such confirmation work.

Further, after the power is turned on, in order to confirm whether or not the back upper front decorative body 3310 operates normally, the back upper front decorative body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position, and the effect display device 1600 is used. The initial operation in which the back upper front decorative body 3310 appears on the front side is performed. In such a case, after the back-up front decoration body 3310 moves from the initial position to the appearance position, the return control for returning from the appearance position to the initial position is performed, and the back-up front decoration body 3310 returns to the initial position. If not, it is determined that an initial position error has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side. Then, after the power is turned on, the confirmation period of whether or not the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are normally lit, and whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. Although confirmation periods are provided, if these confirmation periods are to be paralleled with the initial operation of the back-up front decoration body 3310, attention will be paid to the initial operation of the back-up front decoration body 3310, and confirmation will be made. There is a possibility that confirmation in the period will be neglected. Therefore, regarding the initial operation of the back-up front decorative body 3310, the confirmation period of whether or not the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are normally lit and the contact with the handle 195 is normal. It is preferable to execute it after the confirmation period of whether or not the LED is detected has expired. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the operator can perform the confirmation in the confirmation period and the confirmation in the initial operation of the back-up front decorative body 3310, respectively.

(About the rainbow independent decoration part for checking the rainbow emission)
As described above, in the present embodiment, in addition to executing the rainbow effect at the time of hit (light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode) as the hit confirmation effect that the hit is confirmed during the variable display of the symbol, the hit time It is possible to confirm the light emission in the rainbow light emission mode at a timing different from the rainbow effect of. Specifically, during the effect introduction period during which the symbol is being displayed in a non-variable manner, as a simulated rainbow effect, a light emission effect that lights up in the same rainbow light emission mode as the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is executed, and the rainbow light emission mode is executed. It is possible to check in halls, factories, etc. whether or not the light emission effect that lights up with is normally executed. The effect introduction period is an effect that starts when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the end of the variable display of the symbol and the state in which the variable display of the symbol is not performed, and the model introduction of the pachinko machine 1. In addition to the above, a simulated rainbow effect will be executed. However, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, if the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed, it is possible to know that it is the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effect, but the light emission that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode. When the production could not be executed normally, it was not possible to grasp whether or not the execution timing of the simulated rainbow production had arrived. Therefore, in this example, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used. In addition to executing a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode, a rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 that can be mounted separately from the plurality of members is provided, and the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 emits rainbow light. In order to notify that the simulated rainbow effect is being executed by executing the notification effect that lights up in the mode, and to confirm in the hall, factory, etc. whether the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed. It is made clear that it is the timing of.

FIG. 229 is an explanatory view showing an example in which the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 is attached to the game board 5. The rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 is provided so as to be attached to the game board 5 from the front side. Specifically, in the lower right region of the game board 5 (game area 5a), the connection terminal for connecting the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 is exposed, and the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 is connected to the connection terminal. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 enables the light emission control of the LED provided in the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700.

In this example, since the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 is attached to the game board 5 from the front side, even if the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the rainbow independent decoration is provided. The part 1700 can be easily attached and detached. Therefore, when executing the simulated rainbow effect, the rainbow light emitting mode is used by using LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. The light emitting effect that lights up in is executed, but only when confirming in a hall or factory whether the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode can be executed normally, in order to know the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effect, The rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 may be attached to the game board 5. The rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 is not attached to the game board 5, and is configured so that the decorativeness of the front side of the game board 5 is maintained even when the game board 5 is removed.

Further, as will be described later, the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 is provided with a substrate on which a total of 21 LEDs, 3 in the vertical direction and 7 in the horizontal direction, are mounted, and in front of the LEDs. Provided a transparent cover (not shown) to mitigate the direct light from the LED. When removing the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 with respect to the game board 5, it is possible to remove the entire board on which the LED is mounted, but only the cover body is removed without removing the board on which the LED is mounted. It also makes it possible. Thereby, for example, when it is difficult to see the light emission of the LED in the rainbow single decoration unit 1700, it is sufficient to remove only the cover body, and it is possible to easily grasp that the simulated rainbow effect is being executed.

Further, the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 is provided in the game area 5a on the front side of the game board 5. Therefore, even when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rainbow independent decorative portion 1700 can be easily visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the door window 101a. Further, when executing the simulated rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used in a rainbow light emitting mode. Although the light emitting effect of lighting is executed, the light emitting decoration body provided with LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 is located behind the area where the game ball B flows down, whereas the rainbow The single decoration unit 1700 is located in front of the area where the game ball B flows down. That is, in the light emitting decoration body provided with LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the game ball B can flow down the front side, whereas in the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700, the game ball B does not flow down the front side. It is configured in. As a result, when the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 is turned on in the rainbow light emitting mode, the visual recognition is not hindered by the flow of the game ball B, and it is possible to easily grasp that the simulated rainbow effect is being executed. can.

FIG. 230 is an explanatory view showing the rainbow single decoration unit 1700. The rainbow single decoration unit 1700 includes a substrate on which a total of 21 LEDs, three in the vertical direction and seven in the horizontal direction, are mounted. Then, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed by using the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700. That is, when executing the simulated rainbow effect, the rainbow light emitting mode is used by using LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. In synchronization with the execution of the light emission effect of lighting in, the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed by using the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700. Specifically, in the case of executing the simulated rainbow effect, when the elapsed time from the start of the effect introduction period reaches a predetermined predetermined timing (timing t1), the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 The three LEDs in row A are made to emit light in "red, purple, and blue", respectively. That is, the three LEDs in row A of the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 are made to emit light so that three predetermined colors appear at the same time.

Then, for the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700, each of them is in the order of A row → B row → C row → D row → E row → F row → G row every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). The three LEDs in the row are switched to emit light. In addition, the three LEDs in row A of the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 emit light in "red, purple, blue", and the three LEDs in row B emit light in "purple, blue, green", and row C. The three LEDs in column E emit light in "blue, green, orange", the three LEDs in row D emit light in "green, orange, yellow", and the three LEDs in row E emit "". It emits light in "orange, yellow, white", the three LEDs in row F emit light in "yellow, white, red", and the three LEDs in row G emit light in "white, red, purple". It is supposed to be. In this way, with respect to the LED of the rainbow single decoration unit 1700, one of the three colors is changed every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds) so that the emission color appearing at the same time can be switched. By controlling, these LEDs can be visually recognized as if they are emitting light in a rainbow light emitting mode in cooperation with each other. Then, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, such regular switching of the emission color (switching of the row in which the three LEDs emit light) is repeated.

FIG. 231 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a simulated rainbow effect is executed when the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 is attached. In this example, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to rainbow. In synchronization with executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the light emitting mode, the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed by using the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700. In this way, since the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode as well as the simulated rainbow effect (light emitting effect that lights in the rainbow light emitting mode), it is possible to grasp that the simulated rainbow effect is being executed. It can be used as a guideline for confirming whether or not the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed in a hall, a factory, or the like. Further, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 of the door frame 3) constituting the rainbow light emitting mode are executed. When an abnormality in which the LED does not light occurs in a part of ~ 14), a part of the emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode is missing, resulting in an incomplete aspect, and light emission is performed in a mode in which the rainbow emission mode is not established. Therefore, it is difficult to grasp whether or not the simulated rainbow effect is being executed. However, regardless of whether or not such an abnormality has occurred, the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 has a rainbow light emitting mode. The notification effect that lights up with is executed. As a result, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, if there is an abnormality that the LED does not light up in some of the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode, a visual difference from the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 occurs. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp that the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode has not been normally executed even though the simulated rainbow effect is being executed.

Regarding the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700, not only the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effect during the execution of the effect introduction period during the non-variable display of the symbol, but also the execution timing of the hit rainbow effect during the variable display of the symbol. Also, it may be attached to the game board 5. That is, the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 may always be attached to the game board 5. In such a case, when the rainbow effect is executed at the time of hitting, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used. The LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 is used to execute the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode in synchronization with the execution of the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. In this way, since the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode as well as the rainbow effect at the time of hitting (light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode), it means that the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is being executed. It can be grasped and can be used as a guide for the execution of the hit confirmation effect in which the hit is confirmed. Further, when the rainbow effect is executed at the time of hitting, the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame 3) constituting the rainbow light emitting mode are executed. When an abnormality occurs in which the LED does not light up in a part of the LEDs 10 to 14), the rainbow emission mode is not established because a part of the emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode is missing. It is difficult to know whether or not the rainbow effect is being executed at the time of hitting because it emits light at, but regardless of whether or not such an abnormality has occurred, the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 is , The notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed. As a result, even if there is an abnormality that the LED does not light up in a part of the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode at the time of executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the rainbow light emitting mode in the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 By visually recognizing the light emission of the LED, it is possible to grasp that the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is being executed, and it is possible not to overlook useful information for the player.

Further, as described above in detail, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, after confirming whether or not the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed, the simulated rainbow can be operated by operating the effect operation unit 301. It is possible to end the production. As a result, at the time of manufacturing confirmation at the factory, after confirming whether or not the simulated rainbow effect can be executed normally and the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed, any arbitrary during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect can be executed. By operating the effect operation unit 301 at the timing, the simulated rainbow effect can be ended at an arbitrary timing, and the execution of the unnecessary rainbow effect after the confirmation affects other manufacturing confirmations and the like. It can be stopped. Further, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame 3 Not only the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is ended by using the LEDs 10 to 14, but also the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is ended by using the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700. Specifically, the LED of the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 is switched from light emission in the rainbow light emission mode to non-light emission. In this way, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the simulated rainbow effect is completed by switching the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 from light emission in the rainbow light emission mode to non-light emission. You can clearly tell that.

Even if the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 is not attached to the game board 5, it is not determined that an abnormality has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side, and a rainbow effect or a simulated rainbow effect at the time of hitting is not performed. At the time of execution, as usual, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to light up in a rainbow light emitting mode. I am trying to execute a light emission effect. As a result, in order to know the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effect only when confirming in the hall, factory, etc. whether or not the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed, the rainbow independent decoration unit is attached to the game board 5. The 1700 is attached, and the rainbow single decoration part 1700 can be removed during other periods. Further, when the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 is attached to the game board 5, a notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700, such as a part of the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 not being lit. Is not normally executed, it is not determined that an abnormality has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side. That is, when executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting or the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame 3 are normally used. It is assumed that the LEDs 10 to 14 are used to execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode, and it is possible to prevent the effect of affecting the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting or the simulated rainbow effect. Some of the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) constituting the rainbow light emitting mode are lit. Even if an abnormality has occurred, it is not determined that an abnormality has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side, and when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting or the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the light emission constituting the rainbow light emission mode is formed. The light is emitted in an incomplete mode in which a part of the color is missing (a mode in which the rainbow light emitting mode is not established).

The rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 can be turned on in a rainbow light emitting mode as a single member without using a plurality of members, but the back upper front decorative body 3310 also does not use a plurality of members. As a single member, each of the seven numbered display bodies can be used to light up in a rainbow light emitting mode. However, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the back-up front decoration body 3310 does not move from the initial position to the appearance position and is maintained at the initial position. Each display body is used so as not to light in a rainbow light emitting mode. Therefore, although it is possible to light the back-up front decorative body 3310 in the rainbow light emitting mode, it is not possible to grasp that the simulated rainbow effect is being executed, and the light emitting effect is lit in the rainbow light emitting mode. It cannot be used as a guideline for confirming whether or not the above can be performed normally in a hall or factory. Further, since the back-up front decorative body 3310 is attached to the back side of the game board 5, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the back-up front decorative body 3310 is attached to the game board 5. 3310 cannot be attached or detached. That is, the back-up front decorative body 3310 cannot be easily attached to and detached from the front side of the game board 5 like the rainbow single decorative unit 1700, and can normally execute a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode. It is difficult to attach the back-up front decorative body 3310 to the game board 5 only when confirming whether or not it is in a hall or a factory. Further, since the decorativeness of the front side of the game board 5 cannot be maintained when the back upper front decorative body 3310 is removed from the game board 5, the back upper front decorative body 3310 is a rainbow independent decorative unit 1700. As described above, it is not suitable as a member for confirming the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effect.

As described above, the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 includes a substrate on which 21 LEDs are mounted. Specifically, a top-view type LED is mounted on the front surface of the substrate of the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player). The top-view type LED can irradiate light toward the front (player side) of the rainbow single decoration unit 1700. Therefore, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, when the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed using the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700, each of the emission colors constituting the rainbow light emission mode is visually recognized brightly. Can be done.

Further, as the substrate of the rainbow single decoration portion 1700, a white substrate in which at least the front surface (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player) is painted white is used. When a white substrate is used as the substrate on which the LED is mounted on the front surface, light is reflected with a higher reflectance than when a substrate other than the white substrate (for example, a black substrate or a green substrate) is used. Is possible. Therefore, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, when the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed using the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700, each of the emission colors constituting the rainbow light emission mode is visually recognized brightly. Can be done.

Further, on the front surface of the substrate of the rainbow single decorative portion 1700 (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player), around each of the mounted LEDs, the same color as the emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode is used. A coating film made of solder resist is formed. That is, the 21 LEDs mounted on the front surface of the substrate of the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 are "red, purple, blue, green, orange, yellow", which are the emission colors constituting the rainbow emission mode. It emits light in either "white" or "white", but for the coating film made of solder resist, the same color as the emission color of the LED is used. Specifically, among the emission colors constituting the rainbow emission mode, an LED that emits "purple" by forming a coating film made of "red" solder resist around the LED that emits "red". A coating film made of "purple" solder resist is formed around the LED, and a coating film made of "blue" solder resist is formed around the LED that emits light in "blue" to form "green". A coating film made of "green" solder resist is formed around the LED that emits light in, and a coating film made of "orange" solder resist is formed around the LED that emits light in "orange". A coating film made of a "yellow" solder resist is formed around an LED that is formed and emits light in "yellow", and a coating film made of a "white" solder resist is formed around an LED that emits light in "white". The coating film is formed. Here, when the same color as the emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode is used as the coating film made of the solder resist, the reflectance is higher than when a color different from the emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode is used. Therefore, it is possible to reflect the emission colors constituting the rainbow emission mode. Therefore, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, when the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed using the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700, each of the emission colors constituting the rainbow light emission mode is clearly visible. be able to.

Further, with respect to the coating film made of the above-mentioned solder resist, a solder resist having the same color as the emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode is added based on the white solder resist. When a white solder resist is used as the coating film made of the solder resist, it is possible to reflect light with a higher reflectance than when a non-white solder resist is used. Therefore, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, when the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed using the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700, each of the emission colors constituting the rainbow light emission mode is visually recognized brightly. Can be done. As the coating film made of solder resist, the higher the proportion of the base white solder resist, the higher the reflectance of light can be reflected. Therefore, for the coating film made of solder resist, , It is preferable to increase the proportion of the base white solder resist rather than the solder resist having the same color as the emission color constituting the rainbow light emission mode.

In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting or the simulated rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame 3 are used. When performing a light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the LEDs 10 to 14, each LED has a light emission color "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow" which constitutes the rainbow light emission mode. It emits light in the order of "white", but like the LED of the rainbow independent decoration part 1700, each LED emits "red, purple, blue, green, orange" which is the emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode. It may emit light in any of "color, yellow, and white". That is, regarding LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, each LED is not a full-color LED but a rainbow alone. A single color LED may be used as in the decorative unit 1700. Then, as in the rainbow single decoration unit 1700, for example, by making predetermined three colors appear at the same time and regularly switching the three colors, the rainbow light emitting mode can be realized. In such a case, as the LED substrate involved in the rainbow light emitting mode, a white substrate in which at least the front surface (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player) is painted white is used as in the case of the rainbow single decoration portion 1700. It is used. Further, in the front surface of the LED substrate (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player), which is involved in the rainbow emission mode, around each of the mounted LEDs, the rainbow emission is emitted as in the rainbow single decoration portion 1700. A coating film made of a solder resist having the same color as the light emitting color constituting the embodiment is formed. Further, as for the coating film made of solder resist, a solder resist having the same color as the emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode is added based on the white solder resist. As a result, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting or the simulated rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 3 of the door frame 3 are executed. When the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed by using 14, the same effect as that of the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 can be exhibited. Further, on the front surface of the LED substrate (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player) involved in the rainbow light emitting mode, the surroundings of each of the mounted LEDs are the same as the light emitting colors constituting the rainbow light emitting mode. By forming a coating film made of colored solder resist, if the emission color of the LED does not match the color of the solder resist, it is possible to know that the LED is not mounted in the correct position. can.

In the above, as the LED substrate involved in the rainbow light emitting mode, at least the front surface (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player) is painted white, but the rainbow light emitting mode is used. As the LED substrate that is not involved, a substrate that is painted in a color different from the emission color (for example, black or green) that constitutes the rainbow emission mode is used. As a result, the LED involved in the rainbow light emitting mode can reflect light with a high reflectance, whereas the LED not involved in the rainbow light emitting mode can reflect the light with a high reflectance. Since it becomes difficult, the visibility of the light becomes different, and when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting or the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the emission color constituting the rainbow light emission mode can be visually recognized so as to stand out.

The rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 has an LED mounted on the front surface of the substrate (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player), and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the direct light from the LED. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a light guide unit for guiding the light from the LED may be provided so that the player can visually recognize the indirect light from the light guide unit. Such another example will be described with reference to FIG. 232. FIG. 232 is an explanatory view showing another example of the rainbow single decoration unit 1700. Another example, the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 includes a substrate on which seven LEDs are mounted side by side, and the substrate is provided in a direction perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 5. Then, the seven LEDs mounted on the front surface of the substrate of the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 of another example are "red, purple, blue, green, orange", each of which is the emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode. It emits light in either color, yellow, or white. In such a case, for example, a rainbow light emitting mode can be realized by making predetermined three colors appear at the same time and regularly switching the three colors. Further, a light guide unit is provided so as to be close to the seven LEDs, and by irradiating the light of the LED from the side of the light guide unit, the light guide unit can be made to emit light in the emission color of the LED. .. The front side of the substrate on which the seven LEDs are mounted (the front side facing the player) is covered with a cover portion so that the player does not see the direct light from the LEDs. In this way, by providing a light guide portion that guides the light from the LED and configuring the indirect light from the light guide portion to be visually recognized by the player, the direct viewing light of the LED involved in the rainbow light emission mode is provided. However, it is possible to prevent a situation that causes a burden on the eyes when visually recognizing.

Further, the rainbow single decoration unit 1700, which is another example, can be easily attached to and detached from the game board 5, but it is also possible to remove only the light guide unit without removing the substrate on which the LED is mounted. It is possible. Here, when only the light guide unit is removed, the light guide unit does not guide the light from the LED, and the light emission (emission color) of the LED cannot be recognized. For this reason, a light guide unit is attached in order to know the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effect only during the confirmation period in which the hall or factory confirms whether or not the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed. During the period other than the above period, the light guide portion can be removed for use. Further, even if the light guide unit is removed, the decorativeness of the front side of the game board 5 can be maintained. Therefore, in the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 of another example, the rainbow alone including the substrate on which the LED is mounted is provided. It is preferable to remove only the light guide portion without removing the entire decorative portion 1700.

[Limitation of rainbow light emission when anomaly is detected]
In the present embodiment, it is possible to execute at least a rainbow effect at the time of hitting (a light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode) during the variable display of the symbol, but the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is appropriate due to some trouble or abnormality. If it is not executed, there is a risk that it will be a factor that reduces the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, in this example, when some trouble or abnormality has occurred, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit 300 are executed when the rainbow effect is executed at the time of hitting. LEDs 8 to 9 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to limit the execution of the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode.

In this example, it suffices as long as it is possible to execute at least a rainbow effect at the time of hitting during the variable display of the symbol. As explained, a rainbow effect at the time of deviation is executed during the variable display of the symbol, an effect that suggests the set value 6 as the suggestive effect A is executed during the variable display of the symbol, or the non-variable display of the symbol is performed. It may be possible to perform a simulated rainbow effect. Such a rainbow effect is the same in that a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode is executed. That is, when the rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 of the door frame 3 are linked to the display of the effect display device 1600. ~ 14 is used to perform a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode. Specifically, in the case of executing the rainbow effect, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches a predetermined predetermined timing (timing t1), the game board 5 LEDs 1 and 2 are "red", LEDs 3 to 4 of the game board 5 are "purple", LEDs 5 to 6 of the door frame top unit 450 are "blue", LED 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LED 8 of the door frame 3 are "blue". "Green", LED9 of the door frame 3 and LED10 of the door frame 3 are "orange", LEDs 11 to 12 of the door frame 3 are "yellow", and LEDs 13 to 14 of the door frame 3 are "white". ing. That is, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are made to emit light with different emission colors for each of the two groups. ..

Then, with respect to LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). , The LED that emits light in "red" is emitted in "purple", the LED that emits in "purple" is emitted in "blue", and the LED that emits in "blue" is emitted in "green" and "green". The LED that emits "orange", the LED that emits "orange" is "yellow", the LED that emits "yellow" is "white", the LED that emits "white" is "red", Change to. As described above, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 have a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). Each time, the emission color of the LED for each of the two groups is changed in the predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" until the timing t10 is reached. I try to repeat such regular changes (for example, for 10 seconds).

As described above, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 have their respective emission colors in a short unit emission time. By controlling to switch to a plurality of emission colors in order, these LEDs can cooperate to visually visually recognize the emission in the rainbow emission mode, and emit light with impact. The production can be executed. Further, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are controlled by interlocking the LEDs 1 to 14, and the LEDs 1 to 14 are linked. By emitting light in a plurality of colors so that the two groups emit light in different emission colors and switching the emission colors in a short time, it is possible to execute a light emission effect having a greater impact than usual.

In this example, as the light emission of the rainbow light emission mode, seven colors are made to appear at the same time by using a plurality of LEDs, and the light emission colors of each are switched regularly. It is not necessary to have seven colors, as long as a predetermined number of three or more colors appear at the same time.

Further, during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and the effect image of the rainbow mode in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in different display colors is displayed. In such a rainbow-type effect image, the display color displayed in each of the plurality of display areas is changed to "red-> purple-> blue-> green-> orange-> yellow-> white" every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). The changes are made in a predetermined order of "→ red", and such regular changes are repeated until the timing t10 is reached (for example, 5 seconds). The target for displaying the effect image in the rainbow mode may be an effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, for example, a background image, or one of the display areas of the effect display device 1600. An effect image displayed on the unit, for example, an effect image such as a character or an item may be targeted.

(When an abnormality is detected in the front decorative body (movable body) on the back)
As described in detail above, the back-up front effect unit 3300 attached to the game board 5 is provided behind the back-up front decoration 3310, which is rectangular and long in the left-right direction in the front view, and the back-up front decoration 3310. It is equipped with a back-up front decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a back-up front elevating unit (not shown) that raises and lowers the back-up front decoration body 3310. When a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the back-up front decorative body 3310 can be moved from the initial position to the appearance position, and the back-up front decorative body 3310 can appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600. Further, after the back upper front decorative body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position and used for the effect, when a predetermined effect end condition is satisfied, the return control for returning from the appearance position to the initial position is performed. ing. In such return control, whether or not the back upper front decorative body 3310 has returned to the initial position is detected by using a detection sensor, and when the back upper front decorative body 3310 has not returned to the initial position. It is determined that an initial position error has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side. Then, when it is determined that an initial position error has occurred in the back upper front decorative body 3310, the back upper front decorative body 3310 appears from the initial position even if a predetermined effect condition is satisfied thereafter. It is restricted to perform movable control to move. Further, when it is determined that an initial position error has occurred in the back upper front decorative body 3310, the return control for returning the back upper front decorative body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position is performed a plurality of times. When the back-up front decorative body 3310 returns to the initial position, the determination that the initial position error has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side is eliminated.

In the above, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied during the variable display or the non-variable display of the symbol, the back-up front decorative body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position, and the back-up on the front side of the effect display device 1600. Although it is possible for the front decorative body 3310 to appear, in addition to this, for example, in order to confirm whether or not the back upper front decorative body 3310 operates normally when the power is turned on, the back upper front The decorative body 3310 is movable from the initial position to the appearance position, so that the back upper front decorative body 3310 appears on the front side of the effect display device 1600. Even in such a case, after the back-up front decoration body 3310 moves from the initial position to the appearance position, the return control for returning from the appearance position to the initial position is performed, and similarly, the back-up front decoration body 3310 is performed. If is not returned to the initial position, it is determined that an initial position error has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side.

FIG. 233 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a rainbow effect is executed at the time of an initial position error of the back upper front decorative body 3310. In this example, when the rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame are linked to the display of the effect display device 1600. The light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed by using the LEDs 10 to 14 of No. 3, but apart from this, when the rainbow effect is executed, the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decorative body 3310 are used. A light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode is executed. Here, the back-up front decorative body 3310 is provided so that the seven rankings of sumo such as "Yokozuna", "Ozeki", and "Sekiwake" are arranged from the left. Each of the seven numbers can be independently luminescent and decorated by the LED. Then, when the rainbow effect is executed, each of the seven numbered display bodies is lit in a rainbow emission mode that emits light with different emission colors. In such a display body of the rainbow emission mode, the emission color emitted by each of the seven numbers is changed in a predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red". In this way, such regular changes are repeated until the timing t10 is reached (for example, 5 seconds).

Then, when the initial position error does not occur in the back upper front decorative body 3310, the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decorative body 3310 are used in the rainbow light emitting mode at the time of executing the rainbow effect. If an initial position error has occurred for the back-up front decoration body 3310 while the lighting effect is executed, the seven numbers in the back-up front decoration body 3310 are assigned when the rainbow effect is executed. The display body is not used to execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode, and the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decorative body 3310 are turned off. That is, when an initial position error has occurred in the back-up front decoration body 3310, the seven numbered display bodies in the back-up front decoration body 3310 are used in the rainbow light emission mode at the time of executing the rainbow effect. The execution of the lighting effect is restricted. For example, when an initial position error has occurred in the back upper front decorative body 3310, when a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode is executed using the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decorative body 3310. Since the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode is conspicuous, it becomes easy to notice that an initial position error has occurred in the back upper front decorative body 3310. However, in this example, when an initial position error occurs with respect to the back upper front decorative body 3310, a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode using the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decorative body 3310. By not executing the above, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it becomes easy to notice that an initial position error has occurred in the back-up front decorative body 3310.

Further, when the initial position error does not occur in the back upper front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation are performed when the rainbow effect is executed. When the LED 8 to 9 of the unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode, whereas an initial position error has occurred in the back upper front decorative body 3310. When the rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to emit rainbow light. LED1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are turned off without executing the light emitting effect that lights up in. It is supposed to be. That is, when an initial position error has occurred with respect to the back upper front decorative body 3310, the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decorative body 3310 are used in the rainbow light emitting mode at the time of executing the rainbow effect. In addition to limiting the execution of the light emitting effect that lights up, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used. The execution of the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is restricted. For example, when an initial position error occurs in the back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door. If only the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed by using the LEDs 10 to 14 of the frame 3, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is not executed by using the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decorative body 3310. A feeling of strangeness occurs, and it becomes easy to notice that an initial position error has occurred in the front decorative body 3310 on the back side. However, in this example, when an initial position error occurs in the back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 of the effect operation unit 300. ~ 9, A situation in which it is easy to notice that an initial position error has occurred in the back upper front decorative body 3310 by not executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. Can be prevented from occurring.

In the above, when an initial position error has occurred in the back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 are executed when the rainbow effect is executed. , LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are turned off. As another example, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit Instead of the light emission effect in which the LEDs 8 to 9 of the 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved and light up in the rainbow light emission mode, the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved and light up in a single color (for example, red or blue). The light emitting effect may be executed. As a result, when an initial position error has occurred in the back upper front decorative body 3310, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is not executed when the rainbow effect is executed, but the LEDs 10 to 10 of the door frame 3 are not executed. With respect to 14, by executing a light emitting effect that lights up in a single color (for example, red or blue), it is possible to maintain a situation in which the light emitting effect can be expected.

Further, in the above, when the rainbow effect is executed, the rainbow is used by using LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. In addition to the light emitting effect of lighting in the light emitting mode, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed by using the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decorative body 3310, and the lighting is performed in such a rainbow light emitting mode. The light emitting effect to be performed may not be executed separately, but may be executed integrally. That is, when the rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, and the back upper front decoration body 3310. May be integrated to emit light in a mode in which the rainbow light emitting mode is established. In such a configuration, for example, when an initial position error occurs in the back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and an effect operation unit. When only the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed using the LEDs 8 to 9 of 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, a part of the light emission colors constituting the rainbow light emission mode is missing, resulting in an incomplete mode of rainbow light emission. It will emit light in a mode in which the mode is not established. Therefore, in this example, when an initial position error occurs in the back upper front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit 300 By not executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode by using the LEDs 8 to 9 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, it is possible to prevent the light emitting in the mode in which the rainbow light emitting mode is not established, and whether the rainbow effect is executed. It is possible to prevent a situation that cannot be determined.

In this example, when an initial position error has occurred in the back-up front decoration body 3310, the rainbow light emission is performed using the seven numbered display bodies in the back-up front decoration body 3310 at the time of executing the rainbow effect. Although the light emitting effect that lights up in the mode is not executed, if an initial position error occurs for the back-up front decoration body 3310 after a predetermined time such as several hours has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the subsequent time At the time of executing the rainbow effect, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed by using the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decorative body 3310. In such a case, when executing the rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used. The light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is also executed. For example, from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined time such as several hours elapses, the predetermined time elapses in a situation where the game is continued even though the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed. If the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode is not executed suddenly after that, a sense of incongruity arises that the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode is not executed. However, in this example, when an initial position error occurs in the back-up front decorative body 3310 after a predetermined time such as several hours has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent such a feeling of strangeness from occurring.

Further, in this example, when an initial position error has occurred in the back-up front decoration body 3310, the seven numbered display bodies in the back-up front decoration body 3310 are used at the time of executing the rainbow effect. Although the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode is not executed, after a predetermined time such as several hours has elapsed since the occurrence of such an initial position error, the back side is executed when the subsequent rainbow effect is executed. Using the seven numbered display bodies in the upper front decorative body 3310, a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode is executed. In such a case, when executing the rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used. The light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is also executed. In such a case, the work of eliminating the initial position error is not performed until a predetermined time such as several hours elapses from the occurrence of the initial position error on the back upper front decoration body 3310. become. In this regard, in this example, after a predetermined time such as several hours has elapsed from the occurrence of the initial position error on the back-up front decorative body 3310, the light emission that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode at the time of executing the rainbow effect. By executing the effect, the back-up front decoration body 3310 stands out, so it becomes easy to notice that an initial position error has occurred in the back-up front decoration body 3310, and the work of trying to eliminate the initial position error. It is possible to prevent the situation in which the above is not performed from continuing.

Further, in this example, when an initial position error has occurred in the back upper front decorative body 3310, the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decorative body 3310 are used at the time of executing the rainbow effect. In addition to the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode, the rainbow is used by using LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. Although the light emitting effect of lighting in the light emitting mode is not executed, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (back top front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, effect. LEDs 8 to 9 of the operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14) of the door frame 3) are also used in effects other than the rainbow effect. Then, when an initial position error has occurred in the back-up front decorative body 3310, a variation pattern for executing the rainbow effect (rainbow effect at the time of hitting or rainbow effect at the time of disengagement) is determined and the rainbow effect is performed. During the variable display of the symbol to be executed, when performing an effect other than the rainbow effect, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode are not turned on. On the other hand, during the variable display of the symbol that does not execute the rainbow effect by determining the variation pattern that does not execute the rainbow effect, the LED that constitutes the rainbow light emission mode is turned on when the effect other than the rainbow effect is executed. I have to. In such a configuration, from the start of the fluctuation of the symbol to the execution of the rainbow effect, for example, as a notice effect for anticipating the rainbow effect, the back upper front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, and the door Even when the LEDs 5 to 7 of the frame top unit 450 and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light, such a notice effect is no longer executed, and the player has expectations for the rainbow effect. Can be deterred.

Further, in this example, when the rainbow effect (rainbow effect at the time of hitting or rainbow effect at the time of disengagement) is executed, the front decorative body 3310 on the back, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, and LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 are executed. , LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in performing a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode, whereas LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 emit rainbow light. Regardless of the emission color that constitutes the aspect, the emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern is continued. On the other hand, when an initial position error has occurred in the back-up front decoration body 3310, the back-up front decoration body 3310, the game, with respect to the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 at the time of executing the rainbow effect. Unlike the LEDs 1 to 4 on the panel 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3, the LEDs did not turn off and corresponded to the fluctuation pattern. I try to continue the light emission production. As a result, when an initial position error has occurred in the back-up front decorative body 3310, when the rainbow effect is executed, the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed, but the LEDs 15 to LED 15 of the game board 5 are executed. With respect to 17, by continuing the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern, it is possible to maintain a situation in which the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern can be expected.

Further, in this example, when an initial position error has occurred in the back-up front decorative body 3310, the effect display device is displayed at the time of executing the rainbow effect, as in the case where the initial position error has not occurred. The display area of 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow-type effect image in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color is displayed. That is, when an initial position error occurs with respect to the back upper front decorative body 3310, the back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, and the door frame top unit 450 are executed when the rainbow effect is executed. LEDs 5 to 7, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved and do not perform a light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, whereas the effect display device 1600 is of the rainbow mode. The production image is displayed. As a result, as long as the light emitting area around the display area of the effect display device 1600 (light emission by the back-up front decorative body 3310 and LEDs 1 to 14) is focused, it cannot be determined whether or not the rainbow effect is executed, but the effect is produced. By paying attention to the display area of the display device 1600, it is possible to grasp that the rainbow effect is being executed from the effect image of the rainbow mode.

(When a situation occurs in which the production image of the rainbow mode cannot be visually recognized)
As described above, when the rainbow effect is executed, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and the effect image of the rainbow mode in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in different display colors is displayed. If another image is displayed on the front side of the production image in the rainbow mode, the player cannot see it. In this way, when a situation occurs in which the effect image of the rainbow mode in the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the back top front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, and the door frame top unit 450 LEDs 5 to 7, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to limit the execution of the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode.

Specifically, when a situation occurs in which the effect image of the rainbow mode on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the light amount adjustment operation using the light amount adjustment button 228 or the volume adjustment operation using the volume adjustment button 227 occurs. Time is mentioned. The plate unit 200 of this example is provided with a light amount adjusting button 228 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. As the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame 3 With respect to the LEDs 10 to 14, it is possible to adjust the light amount step by step by performing the light amount adjustment operation using the light amount adjustment button 228. For example, it is possible to adjust the LED light intensity step from 1 (minimum light intensity) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum light intensity), and the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated upward to increase the step. As the light intensity of the LED increases and the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated downward to reduce the step, the light intensity of the LED decreases. The plate unit 200 is provided with a volume control button 227 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. With respect to the sound output from various speakers (main body frame speaker 622, etc.), the volume can be adjusted step by step by performing a volume adjustment operation using the volume control button 227. For example, it is possible to adjust the volume level output from various speakers in the order of 1 (lowest volume) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum volume), and operate the volume control button 227 upward. The larger the stage, the higher the volume output from the various speakers, and the volume control button 227 is operated downward to reduce the volume, the lower the volume output from the various speakers. It should be noted that the amount of light and the volume can be adjusted both during the fluctuation and non-variation of the symbol.

Then, at the time of the light amount adjustment operation using the light amount adjustment button 228, a light amount adjustment image for notifying the stage of the LED light amount is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the volume adjustment using the volume control button 227. At the time of operation, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a volume adjustment image for notifying the stage of the volume output from various speakers is displayed. These light amount adjustment images and volume adjustment images are displayed on the front side of the effect image of the rainbow mode in the effect display device 1600. Therefore, at the time of the light amount adjustment operation using the light amount adjustment button 228 or the volume adjustment operation using the volume control button 227, at least a part of the rainbow mode effect image can be visually recognized by the light amount adjustment image or the volume adjustment image. Since there is no such situation, it is determined that there is a situation in which the effect image of the rainbow mode cannot be visually recognized on the peripheral control board 1510 side. Further, after a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds) has elapsed with the end of the light amount adjustment operation using the light amount adjustment button 228 and the volume adjustment operation using the volume control button 227, the light amount adjustment image and the volume Since the adjustment image is erased and the situation returns to the situation where the rainbow mode production image can be visually recognized, the determination that the rainbow mode production image cannot be visually recognized occurs on the peripheral control board 1510 side is resolved. I try to do it.

Further, in the case where the effect image of the rainbow mode in the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, on the front side of the effect display device 1600, the back upper front decorative body 3310 is abnormally stopped while being movable at the appearance position. There are cases where it is. The back-up front decoration body 3310 of this example moves from the initial position to the appearance position when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and enables the back-up front decoration body 3310 to appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600. ing. Further, after the back upper front decorative body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position and used for the effect, when a predetermined effect end condition is satisfied, the return control for returning from the appearance position to the initial position is performed. However, in such a return control, there is a case where the back upper front decorative body 3310 is abnormally stopped while moving to the appearance position, and the back upper front decorative body 3310 is not returned to the initial position. In such a case, since at least a part of the rainbow mode production image cannot be visually recognized due to the abnormal stop of the back upper front decorative body 3310, the rainbow mode production image is displayed on the peripheral control board 1510 side. It is judged that a situation that cannot be visually recognized has occurred. Further, when it is determined that the back upper front decorative body 3310 is abnormally stopped at the appearance position, the return control for returning the back upper front decorative body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position is performed a plurality of times. When the back-up front decorative body 3310 returns to the initial position, the situation returns to the situation where the production image of the rainbow mode can be visually recognized. Therefore, a situation occurs in which the production image of the rainbow mode cannot be visually recognized on the peripheral control board 1510 side. I am trying to eliminate the judgment that I am doing it.

FIG. 234 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the rainbow effect is executed when a situation occurs in which the effect image of the rainbow mode in the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized. In this example, when there is no situation in which the effect image of the rainbow mode in the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the back top front decorative body 3310 and the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 are executed at the time of executing the rainbow effect. , LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in performing a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode, whereas the effect display device 1600 In the case where the effect image of the rainbow mode in the above is not visible, the front decoration body 3310 on the back, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, and LED 5 of the door frame top unit 450 are generated when the rainbow effect is executed. ~ 7, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved, and the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed, and they are turned off. That is, when a situation occurs in which the effect image of the rainbow mode on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the light emitting area around the display area of the effect display device 1600 (in front of the back) when the rainbow effect is executed. The execution of the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode in the decorative body 3310 (light emission by the LEDs 1 to 14) is restricted. For example, when a situation occurs in which the effect image of the rainbow mode on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, only the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode in the light emitting area around the display area of the effect display device 1600 is executed. , It makes me feel uncomfortable that the production image of the rainbow mode cannot be visually recognized. However, in this example, when a situation occurs in which the effect image of the rainbow mode of the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the light emission that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode in the light emitting area around the display area of the effect display device 1600. By not executing the effect, it is possible to prevent such a feeling of strangeness from occurring.

Further, in this example, when a situation occurs in which the effect image of the rainbow mode in the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, when the rainbow effect is executed, the back-up front decorative body 3310 and the LED 1 of the game board 5 are displayed. ~ 4, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved so as not to execute the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. Even if the production image in the rainbow mode is returned to a state in which the effect image in the rainbow mode can be visually recognized during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the situation in which the light emission effect that lights in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed is continued for the remaining time. For example, during the execution period of the rainbow effect, if the remaining time after returning to the situation where the effect image of the rainbow mode can be visually recognized is too short, the back-up front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, Even if LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to perform a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, the rainbow effect is executed. It may not be possible to determine if it is present. Therefore, in this example, even if the production image in the rainbow mode is returned to a state in which the effect image in the rainbow mode can be visually recognized during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the light emission effect that lights in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed in the remaining time. By continuing, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it cannot be determined whether or not the rainbow effect is being executed occurs.

In the above, when a situation occurs in which the effect image of the rainbow mode in the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and the door frame top unit 450 are used when the rainbow effect is executed. LEDs 5 to 7, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are turned off. As another example, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 and LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 are turned off. Instead of the light emitting effect in which the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved and light up in the rainbow light emitting mode, the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved and a single color (for example, red or red) is involved. A light emitting effect that lights up in blue) may be executed. As a result, when a situation occurs in which the effect image of the rainbow mode on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the door frame does not execute the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode when the rainbow effect is executed. By executing the light emitting effect of lighting the LEDs 10 to 14 in a single color (for example, red or blue), it is possible to maintain a situation in which the light emitting effect can be expected.

Further, in this example, when the rainbow effect (rainbow effect at the time of hitting or rainbow effect at the time of disengagement) is executed, the front decorative body 3310 on the back, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, and LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 are executed. , LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in performing a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode, whereas LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 emit rainbow light. Regardless of the emission color that constitutes the aspect, the emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern is continued. On the other hand, when there is a situation in which the effect image of the rainbow mode in the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are decorated in front of the back when the rainbow effect is executed. Like the body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, the LEDs do not turn off and fluctuate. The light emission effect according to the pattern is continued. As a result, when a situation occurs in which the effect image of the rainbow mode on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed when the rainbow effect is executed, but the game board. With respect to the LEDs 15 to 17, the light emitting effect according to the fluctuation pattern can be continued, so that the situation in which the light emitting effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern can be expected can be maintained.

Further, in this example, in a situation where the effect image of the rainbow mode in the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized, the ball is jammed (for example, many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580, and the upper plate 201 is the game ball B. Even if an abnormality such as (full state) occurs, when the rainbow effect is executed, the back top front decoration body 3310, the game board 5 LEDs 1 to 4, the door frame top unit 450 LEDs 5 to 7, and the effect operation unit The LEDs 8 to 9 of the 300 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. For example, in a situation where the effect image of the rainbow mode in the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized, if the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode in the light emitting region around the display area of the effect display device 1600 is not executed, the rainbow light emission mode is not executed. It makes me feel uncomfortable that the light emitting effect that lights up in is not executed. However, in this example, in a situation where the effect image of the rainbow mode in the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized, it is possible to prevent such a sense of incongruity from occurring by executing the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. ..

(When an abnormality is detected in a pachinko machine)
As described above, when the rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame are linked to the display of the effect display device 1600. The light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed by using the LEDs 10 to 14 of No. 3, but when some abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, it is linked with the display of the effect display device 1600. Using LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, the execution of the light emission effect that lights in the rainbow light emission mode is restricted. ing. Further, depending on the type of abnormality with respect to the pachinko machine 1, the LEDs (back top front decorative body 3310, game board 5 LEDs 1 to 4, door frame top unit 450 LEDs 5 to 7, and production operation unit 300) constituting the rainbow light emitting mode. The execution of light emission other than LEDs 8 to 9 and LEDs 10 to 14) of the door frame 3 is also restricted.

Specifically, as the abnormalities for the pachinko machine 1, the first abnormality in which the possibility of fraudulent activity is low, the second abnormality in which the possibility of fraudulent activity is moderate, and the fraudulent activity There is a third anomaly that is likely to be acting. As the first abnormality, a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B, and the game balls B are sent to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202. There is a condition where it cannot be released. In such a state, only a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580, and it is determined that the first abnormality has occurred on the main control board 1310 side. Further, when the balls are removed from the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 and the game balls B are returned to the state where the game balls B can be discharged to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202, the first one on the main control board 1310 side. I am trying to eliminate the judgment that an abnormality has occurred.

Further, as a second abnormality, there is a state in which the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. In such a state, there is a possibility that the hall clerk has only opened the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and it is determined that the second abnormality has occurred on the main control board 1310 side. Further, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the determination that the second abnormality has occurred on the main control board 1310 side is eliminated.

Further, as a third abnormality, a state in which vibration is detected by a vibration sensor that detects vibration applied to the pachinko machine 1 by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 or a magnet is attached to the pachinko machine 1. There is a state in which magnetism is detected by a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects magnetism applied to the pachinko machine 1 by bringing it closer. In such a state, there is a possibility that fraudulent activity is performed by vibration or magnetism, and when the detection signal from the vibration sensor or magnetic sensor is input, a third abnormality occurs on the main control board 1310 side. It is judged that it has occurred. Further, even when the vibration or magnetism is not detected, the power is turned on again without resolving the determination that the third abnormality has occurred on the main control board 1310 side. By doing so, the determination that the third abnormality has occurred on the main control board 1310 side is eliminated.

FIG. 235 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the rainbow effect is executed when the first to third abnormalities occur. In this example, when the first to third abnormalities have not occurred, the back upper front decorative body 3310, the game board 5 LEDs 1 to 4, and the door frame top unit 450 LEDs 5 to 5 when the rainbow effect is executed. 7. LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in performing a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, when the first abnormality has occurred, when the rainbow effect is executed, the error notification effect in which only the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit in a single color (for example, red or blue) is executed. In this way, the remaining back-up front decoration body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are lit in a rainbow emission mode. Running. As a result, it is possible to notice that some abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 while maintaining a situation in which the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be expected.

In addition, when the second abnormality or the third abnormality has occurred, when the rainbow effect is executed, the back upper front decorative body 3310, the game board 5 LEDs 1 to 4, and the door frame top unit 450 LEDs 5 to 5 7. LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are not involved to perform a light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, and the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode (front decoration on the back). For 3310, LEDs 1 to 14), an error notification effect of lighting in a single color (for example, red or blue) is executed. That is, when the second abnormality or the third abnormality occurs before the execution of the rainbow effect, the light emitting area around the display area of the effect display device 1600 (back-up front decoration 3310, LED1). The execution of the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode in to 14) is restricted. As a result, a situation occurs in which it is not possible to grasp that the rainbow effect is being executed, and it is possible to notice that some abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

In this example, when the first to third abnormalities have not occurred, the back-up front decorative body 3310 and the game board 5 are executed when the rainbow effect (rainbow effect at the time of hitting or rainbow effect at the time of disengagement) is executed. LEDs 1 to 4, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in performing a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, with respect to the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5, the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern is continued regardless of the light emission color constituting the rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, when the first abnormality has occurred, when the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are in a state where the LEDs notify the error like the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. The light emission effect is continued according to the fluctuation pattern. In this way, when the first abnormality occurs, when the rainbow effect is executed, the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern is continued, and the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern is expected. You can maintain the situation you have.

Similarly, when the second abnormality has occurred, when the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are arranged with LEDs (back-up front decorative bodies 3310, LEDs 1 to 5) constituting the rainbow light emitting mode. As in 14), the LED does not go into the error notification state, and the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern is continued. As a result, when the second abnormality occurs, when the rainbow effect is executed, the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed, but the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 correspond to the fluctuation pattern. By continuing the light emitting effect, it is possible to maintain a situation in which the pachinko machine 1 can be expected to have a light emitting effect according to the fluctuation pattern, while notifying the pachinko machine 1 that some abnormality has occurred. ..

On the other hand, when the third abnormality has occurred, when the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are the LEDs (back top front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 14) that constitute the rainbow light emitting mode. ), The LED is lit in a single color (for example, red or blue) to notify an error, and the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern is stopped. As a result, when the third abnormality occurs, not only is the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode not executed when the rainbow effect is executed, but also the fluctuation patterns of the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are observed. By not executing the light emission effect according to the above, the situation where the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern can be expected is eliminated, and the pachinko machine 1 is made aware that some kind of fraudulent activity is being performed. Can be done.

Further, in this example, when the rainbow effect is executed, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and the effect image of the rainbow mode in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in different display colors is displayed. However, when the first to third abnormalities have occurred, the effect display device 1600 displays an image notifying the type of the abnormalities. However, when the first abnormality has occurred, even if the image notifying the type of the abnormality is displayed, the situation in which the effect image of the rainbow mode can be visually recognized is maintained, whereas the second abnormality is maintained. When or a third abnormality has occurred, when the image notifying the type of the abnormality is displayed, the production image of the rainbow mode cannot be visually recognized, and depending on the production image of the rainbow mode, the rainbow It makes it impossible to grasp that the production is in progress.

FIG. 236 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the first to third abnormalities occur during the execution of the rainbow effect. In this example, during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the back-up front decorative body 3310, the LED1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LED 10 of the door frame 3 ~ 14 is involved in the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. Then, when the first abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, only the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit in a single color (for example, red or blue) to execute the error notification effect, and the rest. For the front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is continued. ing. As a result, it is possible to notice that some abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 while maintaining a situation in which the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be expected.

In addition, when a second abnormality or a third abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the back-up front decoration body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to stop the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, and the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode (back top front decoration 3310, LEDs 1 to 14). ), An error notification effect that lights up in a single color (for example, red or blue) is executed. That is, when the second abnormality or the third abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, in the light emitting area (back top front decoration body 3310, LEDs 1 to 14) around the display area of the effect display device 1600. The execution of the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is restricted. As a result, a situation occurs in which it is not possible to grasp that the rainbow effect is being executed, and it is possible to notice that some abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

In this example, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (rainbow effect at the time of hitting or rainbow effect at the time of disengagement), the front decorative body 3310 on the back, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, and the effect. While LEDs 8 to 9 of the operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in performing a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode, the rainbow light emitting modes are used for LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5. Regardless of the constituent emission colors, the emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern is continued. On the other hand, when the first abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are in a state where the LEDs notify the error as in the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. Instead, the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern is continued. In this way, when the first abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, by continuing the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern, the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern can be expected. The situation can be maintained.

Similarly, when the second abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (back-up front decorations 3310, LEDs 1 to 14). The LED does not go into the error notification state as in the above, and the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern is continued. As a result, if a second abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is stopped, but the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 emit light according to the fluctuation pattern. By continuing the production, it is possible to maintain a situation in which the pachinko machine 1 can be expected to produce light emission according to the fluctuation pattern, while notifying the pachinko machine 1 that some abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, when the third abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are the LEDs (back top front decorative bodies 3310, LEDs 1 to 14) constituting the rainbow light emitting mode. As described above, the LED is lit in a single color (for example, red or blue) to notify the error, and the light emission effect according to the fluctuation pattern is stopped. As a result, when a third abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, not only the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is stopped, but also the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 respond to the fluctuation pattern. By canceling the light-emitting effect, it is possible to eliminate the situation in which the light-emitting effect according to the fluctuation pattern can be expected, and to make the pachinko machine 1 aware that some kind of fraudulent activity is being performed. ..

Further, in this example, when the rainbow effect is executed, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and the effect image of the rainbow mode in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in different display colors is displayed. However, when the first to third abnormalities occur during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the effect display device 1600 displays an image notifying the type of the abnormality. However, when the first abnormality occurs, even if the image notifying the type of the abnormality is displayed, the situation in which the effect image of the rainbow mode can be visually recognized is maintained, whereas the second abnormality or the second abnormality or the second abnormality is maintained. When the abnormality of 3 occurs, when the image notifying the type of the abnormality is displayed, the effect image of the rainbow mode cannot be visually recognized, and depending on the effect image of the rainbow mode, the rainbow effect is being executed. I am trying not to know that.

Further, in this example, when the second abnormality has occurred, when the rainbow effect is executed, the back upper front decorative body 3310, the game board 5 LEDs 1 to 4, and the door frame top unit 450 LEDs 5 to 7 are generated. , LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved so as not to execute the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. Similarly, if a second abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the back upper front decorative body 3310, the game board 5 LEDs 1 to 4, the door frame top unit 450 LEDs 5 to 7, and the effect operation unit 300. LEDs 8 to 9 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to stop the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. Under such a situation, even if the second abnormality is resolved during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the situation in which the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed is continued for the remaining time. .. For example, during the execution period of the rainbow effect, if the remaining time after returning to the situation where the effect image of the rainbow mode can be visually recognized is too short, the back-up front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, Even if LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to perform a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, the rainbow effect is executed. It may not be possible to determine if it is present. Therefore, in this example, even if the second abnormality is resolved during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the rainbow is continued by continuing the situation in which the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed during the remaining time. It is possible to prevent a situation in which it is not possible to determine whether or not the effect is being executed.

[Rainbow production with increase / decrease of rainbow emission LED]
In the above, the rainbow effect is executed as a high-expectation effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of hitting during the variable display of the symbol, and when the rainbow effect is executed, it is linked to the display of the effect display device 1600. Using LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode is executed. However, in this example, as a light emitting decoration body involved in the rainbow light emitting mode, an annular decoration portion 1710 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape is provided, and when the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs of the ring decoration portion 1710 are used. A case of executing a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode will be described below. With respect to such an annular decorative portion 1710, the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emitting mode can be increased or decreased, and the impact on the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode can be changed.

FIG. 238 is an explanatory view showing the annular decorative portion 1710. The annular decoration portion 1710 has a first annular decoration portion 1710A in which seven LEDs are arranged in a ring shape on the inside, and 14 LEDs on the outside, which have more LEDs than the first annular decoration portion 1710A. A second annular decorative portion 1710B, in which the LEDs are arranged, is provided. Then, the annular decoration portion 1710 makes it possible to light each of the first annular decoration portion 1710A and the second annular decoration portion 1710B in a rainbow light emitting mode. The annular decoration portion 1710 is provided as one of the light emitting decorative bodies provided in the game area 5a on the front side of the game board 5.

In this example, in the execution period of the light emission effect in which the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A is involved and lights up in the rainbow light emission mode, the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A emits light in different emission colors. Turn on with. In the first annular decorative portion 1710A of such a rainbow light emitting mode, the emission color emitted by each of the LEDs of the first annular decorative portion 1710A is "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white →". The changes are made in a predetermined order of "red", and such regular changes are repeated.

Further, in the execution period of the light emission effect in which the LED of the second annular decoration portion 1710B is involved and lights up in the rainbow light emission mode, the two adjacent LEDs in the second annular decoration portion 1710B are grouped into two LEDs. Each group of the above is lit in a rainbow light emitting mode that emits light with a different light emitting color. In the second annular decorative portion 1710B of such a rainbow light emitting mode, the light emitting color emitted by each of the two LED groups is set to "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" in advance. I try to make changes in a fixed order and repeat such regular changes.

In this way, with respect to the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A and the LED of the second annular decoration portion 1710B, by controlling each emission color to be sequentially switched to a plurality of emission colors in a short unit emission time. , These LEDs can be visually recognized as if they are emitting light in a rainbow light emitting mode in cooperation with each other, and it is possible to execute a light emitting effect having an impact. Further, regarding the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A, seven LEDs are interlocked and controlled, and the seven LEDs are made to emit light in a plurality of colors so as to emit different emission colors, and emit light in a shorter time. By switching the colors, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that has a greater impact than usual. Similarly, with respect to the LED of the second annular decoration portion 1710B, 14 LEDs are interlocked and controlled, and each of the two LED groups is made to emit light in a plurality of colors so as to emit different emission colors, and further shortened. By switching the light emitting color with time, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect that has a greater impact than usual.

In this example, as the light emission of the rainbow light emission mode, seven colors are made to appear at the same time by using a plurality of LEDs, and the light emission colors of each are switched regularly. It is not necessary to have seven colors, as long as a predetermined number of three or more colors appear at the same time.

In this example, as an effect according to the fluctuation pattern, a rainbow effect as a high-expectation effect can be executed during the variation display of the symbol, and a hit rainbow effect is derived as a result of the variation display of the symbol. Although the rainbow effect is executed during the variable display of the symbol, the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection is set, in which the deviation is derived as a result of the variable display of the symbol. That is, at the time of hitting, it is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern for executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, and at the time of hitting, it is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern for executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting. Then, at the time of disengagement, by lowering the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern for executing the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement than the fluctuation pattern for executing the effect at the time of disengagement, the rainbow at the time of disengagement is lower than the effect at the time of other disengagement. The frequency of execution of the production is reduced. As a result, when the rainbow effect is executed, it is not possible to determine whether the rainbow effect is a hit or miss, but the ratio of the rainbow effect at the time of hit is high, and there is a high possibility of winning. It has come to suggest that.

FIG. 239 is a timing chart showing an example of a rainbow effect using the annular decorative portion 1710. First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it synchronizes with the fluctuation display of the special symbol as an effect according to the fluctuation pattern specified from the fluctuation pattern command. The effect display device 1600 starts a variation effect such as a variation display of a decorative pattern. Then, when the variation pattern at the time of executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is determined, or when the variation pattern at the time of executing the rainbow effect at the time of deviation is determined, the variation display of the symbol is determined. When the elapsed time from the start of the operation reaches a predetermined timing determined in advance, a light emitting effect (rainbow effect) in which the first annular decorative portion 1710A of the annular decorative portion 1710 is used to light up in a rainbow light emitting mode. To start.

Further, during the execution period of the rainbow effect using the first annular decoration portion 1710A, when the subsequent rainbow effect (rainbow effect using the second annular decoration portion 1710B) is executed on the effect display device 1600. It is a hit, and a display explaining that it is off when the subsequent rainbow effect (rainbow effect using the second annular decoration portion 1710B) is not executed (for example, "Rainbow emission at the second annular decoration portion 1710B"). If you do, you will win! If the second ring decoration part 1710B does not emit rainbow light, it will come off! ")

When the variation pattern at the time of executing the rainbow effect at the time of hit is determined, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is started by using the first annular decorative portion 1710A, and then at a predetermined timing. In addition to the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B is executed. That is, both the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A and the LED of the second annular decoration portion 1710B execute the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. As a result, after the start of the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A, when the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B is executed, the light emitting effect is executed. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the symbol being executed is a hit, and in order to know whether or not it is a hit, a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B is executed. You can pay attention to whether or not.

Further, as a rainbow effect at the time of hitting, after starting a light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A, a rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B at a predetermined timing. When the light emitting effect lit by is executed, the effect display device 1600 displays a specific image for recognizing that the variable display of the symbol being executed is a hit. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 executes a display (for example, "Congratulations!") Notifying that the variable display of the symbol being executed is a hit and a happy result is obtained. As a result, when a failure or abnormality occurs in the second annular decorative portion 1710B, and it is not possible to recognize that the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B has been executed. Even so, it is possible to clearly grasp that the variable display of the symbol being executed is a hit by the specific image displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Further, as a rainbow effect at the time of hitting, after starting a light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A, a rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B at a predetermined timing. When the light emitting effect lit by is executed, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and the effect image of the rainbow mode in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in different display colors is displayed. .. In such a rainbow mode production image, the display color displayed in each of the plurality of display areas is changed to "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white" every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). The changes are made in a predetermined order of "→ red", and such regular changes are repeated. The target for displaying the effect image in the rainbow mode may be an effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, for example, a background image, or one of the display areas of the effect display device 1600. An effect image displayed on the unit, for example, an effect image such as a character or an item may be targeted. As a result, when a failure or abnormality occurs in the second annular decorative portion 1710B, and it is not possible to recognize that the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B has been executed. Even so, it is possible to clearly grasp that the variable display of the symbol being executed is a hit by the specific image displayed on the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, when the variation pattern at the time of disengagement for executing the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement is determined, after starting the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A, the second The light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the annular decorative portion 1710B is not executed. That is, even if a predetermined timing is reached after starting the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A, the lighting is performed in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B. The LED of the second annular decoration portion 1710B remains extinguished without executing the light emission effect, and only the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A continues to be lit in the rainbow emission mode. .. As a result, when the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B is not executed after the start of the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A. , It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the pattern being executed is out of order, and in order to know whether or not it is a hit, a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B is executed. You can pay attention to whether or not it is done.

Further, as a rainbow effect at the time of disengagement, a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A is started, and then lighting is performed in a rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B. When is not executed, the effect display device 1600 displays a specific image that does not recognize that the variable display of the symbol being executed is a hit at a predetermined timing. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 executes a display (for example, "sorry!") Notifying that the variable display of the symbol being executed is out of alignment and a disappointing result has been obtained. As a result, when a failure or abnormality occurs in the second annular decorative portion 1710B, and it is not possible to recognize that the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B is not executed. Even so, it is possible to clearly grasp that the variable display of the symbol being executed is out of alignment by the specific image displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Further, as a rainbow effect at the time of disengagement, a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A is started, and then lighting is performed in a rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B. When is not executed, the effect display device 1600 does not display the effect image in the rainbow mode at a predetermined timing.

In this example, at the time of executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the second annular decoration portion 1710B is used at a predetermined timing after the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is started by using the first annular decoration portion 1710A. While the light emitting effect that lights up in the existing rainbow light emitting mode is additionally executed, when the off-line rainbow effect is executed, after the light emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode is started by using the first annular decorative portion 1710A, the light emitting effect is started. At a predetermined timing, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B is not executed, and the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is continued using the first annular decorative portion 1710A. I have to. That is, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is executed, not only the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A but also the LED of the second annular decoration portion 1710B is turned on in the rainbow light emission mode, which is involved in the rainbow light emission mode. The number of LEDs to be used is increasing. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the variable display of the running symbol is a hit depending on whether or not the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emitting mode increases. Further, by increasing the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emitting mode, it is possible to excessively increase the player's motivation to play, coupled with the fact that the variable display of the symbol being executed becomes a hit.

In this example, when the rainbow effect is executed at the time of hitting, the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A and the LED of the second annular decoration portion 1710B are configured to light up in a rainbow light emitting mode. However, the first annular decorative portion 1710A and the second annular decorative portion 1710B may be integrally configured to light in a rainbow light emitting mode. Further, at the time of executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, in addition to the state in which the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A is lit in the rainbow emission mode, the LED of the second annular decoration portion 1710B is lit in the rainbow emission mode. Although it is configured, the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A is turned on in the rainbow light emitting mode, the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A is turned off, and the LED of the second annular decoration portion 1710B is turned off. It may be configured to switch to a lighting state in a rainbow light emitting mode. Even in such a configuration, since the number of LEDs in the second annular decoration portion 1710B is larger than that in the first annular decoration portion 1710A, the LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode are used when the rainbow effect is executed. The number will increase.

As a rainbow effect at the time of hitting, after executing a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A and the second annular decorative portion 1710B, the hit result (hit) as a result of the variation display of the symbol. The design) is notified, but during the notification of the hit result, the first annular decoration portion 1710A is not executed without executing the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decoration portion 1710B. Only the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the above is executed. That is, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is executed, both the LED of the first annular decoration part 1710A and the LED of the second annular decoration part 1710B are lit, whereas the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is performed. During the notification of the hit result after the execution, the LED of the second annular decoration portion 1710B is turned off, and only the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A is turned on in the rainbow light emitting mode. In such a case, during the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit, the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode is reduced as compared with the time of execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit. .. Here, at the time of executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, since the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A and the second annular decorative portion 1710B is executed, the player's game A state in which the motivation is excessively improved may occur, but during the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit, the light emission that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A. By executing only the production, it is possible to reduce the state in which the player's motivation to play is excessively improved, and to prevent the player from being excessively absorbed in the game in the subsequent game.

In the above, during the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A is executed, and in the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement. The same effect as the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A is executed, but the same effect is not necessary, and the rainbow is more than the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting. It may be configured so as to reduce the impact on the light emitting mode. Further, during the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit, the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode is reduced as compared with the time of execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit. Not limited to this, it may be configured so that the impact on the rainbow light emitting mode is smaller than that at the time of executing the rainbow effect at the time of hitting. For example, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is executed, the emission color of the LED is switched at a normal speed (for example, 0.1 second) when the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed, whereas the rainbow at the time of hitting is executed. During the notification of the hit result after the execution of the effect, the LED emission color is switched at a speed slower than the normal speed (for example, 1 second) when the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is executed. You may. That is, during the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit, the LED is lit in the rainbow light emission mode so that the interval at which the emission color of the LED is switched is longer than that at the time of execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit. You may perform a light emitting effect. Even in such a configuration, the player's motivation to play is excessively improved because the interval at which the LED emission color is switched becomes long during the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit. It is possible to reduce the state and prevent the player from being excessively absorbed in the game in the subsequent game.

Further, for example, when the rainbow effect at the time of hit is executed, the amount of light of the LED is increased when the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is executed, whereas the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit is notified. In some cases, the amount of light from the LED may be reduced when the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed. That is, during the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed so that the amount of light of the LED is lower than that at the time of executing the rainbow effect at the time of hit. You may. Even in such a configuration, the amount of light of the LED becomes low during the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit, so that the state in which the player's motivation to play is excessively improved is reduced. In the subsequent game, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively absorbed in the game.

Further, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is executed, in addition to the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A being lit in the rainbow emission mode, the LED of the second annular decoration portion 1710B is not only lit in the rainbow emission mode. , The effect display device 1600 displays the effect image in the rainbow mode, but during the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit, the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A is in the rainbow light emission mode. The LED of the second annular decorative portion 1710B does not light in the rainbow light emitting mode only by lighting, and the effect display device 1600 does not display the effect image in the rainbow mode. Even in such a configuration, the effect image of the rainbow mode is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit, so that the player's motivation to play is excessively improved. It is possible to reduce the state of being in the game and prevent the player from being excessively absorbed in the game in the subsequent game.

As described in detail above, it is possible to attach the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 to the game board 5, and the game board is being executed during a rainbow effect such as a simulated rainbow effect or a rainbow effect at the time of hitting. Using LEDs 1 to 4 of No. 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 in synchronization with executing a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode. Therefore, it is possible to execute the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode by using the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700. As a result, during the execution of the rainbow effect, even if there is an abnormality that the LED does not light up in some of the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode, the light is emitted in the rainbow light emitting mode in the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700. By visually recognizing, it is possible to grasp that the rainbow effect is being executed. In this respect, in this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is executed, the first annular decoration portion 1710A and the second annular decoration portion 1710B are used in synchronization with the execution of the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. , The LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 is used to execute the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode, whereas during the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting, the first annular decoration unit 1710A Is used to execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode, but the LED of the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 is not executed in the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. Regarding this, when executing the hit rainbow effect, it is important to understand that the hit rainbow effect is being executed so that the player does not miss useful information. Even when some of the LEDs of the annular decorative portion 1710A and the second annular decorative portion 1710B do not light up, the light emission in the rainbow light emitting mode of the rainbow independent decorative portion 1700 is visually recognized. By doing so, it is possible to grasp that the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is being executed. On the other hand, during the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit, the first annular decorative portion 1710A is used to execute the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, which is useful for the player. Since it is not information that should be conveyed to the player, the rainbow independent decoration unit 1700 has an abnormality in which the LED does not light up in a part of the LED of the first annular decoration unit 1710A. The LED does not light in the rainbow light emitting mode.

In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement is executed, the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement is executed until a specific period (for example, 3 minutes) elapses after the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement is completed. It is restricted so that the rainbow effect at the time of coming off is not executed again without determining the fluctuation pattern of time. On the other hand, it is possible to determine the variation pattern of the hit time to execute the hit time rainbow effect until a specific period (for example, 3 minutes) elapses after the end of the rainbow effect at the time of the hit. The execution of the rainbow production of time is not restricted. As a result, in a short period of time such as a specific period, the rainbow effect at the time of off is not repeated, and the trust in the rainbow effect that is executed as a high expectation effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of hitting is lost. There is no such thing, and you can look forward to the next rainbow production. Further, if the first annular decorative portion 1710A is used as the rainbow effect and the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is started before the specific period elapses after the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement is completed, the light emission effect is started. The rainbow effect is not the rainbow effect when it comes off, and the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is not waited for the addition and execution of the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B. It is possible to grasp that is being executed.

In addition, in this example, the rainbow effect (rainbow effect at the time of hitting, rainbow effect at the time of off) is executed as the effect during the variable display of the symbol, but it is not limited to this, and the hit is not during the variable display of the symbol. During a specific period such as during a game, after executing a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A, a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode is executed using the second annular decorative portion 1710B. You may make a rainbow effect of whether or not to do it. In this case, whether or not to execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A and then executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B. Depending on the situation of the rainbow effect, the player may be made to recognize whether or not some game profit (probability fluctuation, time reduction, etc.) is given after the winning game being executed. Further, after the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed by using the second annular decorative portion 1710B, since useful information for the player is obtained, the second annular decorative portion 1710B is used. Instead of executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the used rainbow light emitting mode, only the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A may be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the state in which the player's motivation to play is excessively improved, and to prevent the player from being excessively absorbed in the game in the subsequent game.

Further, as described above in detail, during execution of the rainbow effect (rainbow effect at the time of hitting, rainbow effect at the time of off), it is possible to determine whether or not a hit occurs when a predetermined operation unit is operated. As the button effect, a rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect A, a rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect B, and a rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect C may be performed. Further, during the execution of the rainbow effect (rainbow effect when hit, rainbow effect when off), the effect display device 1600 displays a display (for example, "press the light amount adjustment button!") Prompting the operation to a predetermined operation unit. The button operation promotion effect to be performed may not be executed, and the button effects A to C may be configured to function as a "hidden effect" during the execution of the rainbow effect (rainbow effect when hit, rainbow effect when off). .. For example, as the button effect A, among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hitting. At least the amount of light of the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) changes. On the other hand, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement, at least the rainbow light emission mode among the LEDs of the light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated. The amount of light of the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) does not change. That is, as a rainbow effect, when the amount of light can be adjusted after starting the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A, the rainbow effect is the rainbow effect at the time of disengagement. It is possible to grasp that the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is being executed without waiting for the addition of the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B. .. As a result, the player who normally actively operates the light amount adjustment button 228 is made to grasp early whether or not it is a hit, and the player who does not normally actively operate the light amount adjustment button 228 is asked. Can pay attention to whether or not to additionally execute a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B, and to enjoy whether or not it is a hit.

Further, in this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of hitting is executed, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decoration portion 1710A and the second annular decoration portion 1710B is executed, whereas the light emission effect at the time of hitting is executed. During the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect, only the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A is executed, but after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit. During the notification of the hit result, the execution period of the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode is longer than that at the time of execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit. Here, during the notification of the hit result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit, the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode is smaller than that at the time of execution of the rainbow effect at the time of hit. It is difficult to recognize whether or not the light is lit in the mode, but by making the execution period of the light emission effect that lights in the rainbow light emission mode longer than when the rainbow effect is executed at the time of hitting, the rainbow light emission mode is used. It is possible to surely recognize whether or not it is lit.

Although various rainbow effects are described individually as necessary for the rainbow effect of the present invention, only one of these rainbow effects may be executed, or a combination of these rainbow effects may be performed in parallel. It may be the one to be executed. For example, as the rainbow effect, a rainbow effect at the time of hitting, a rainbow effect at the time of a miss, and a simulated rainbow effect may be executed in parallel. Further, in the rainbow effect of the present invention, not only LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 but also LEDs of members other than the game board 5 (LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame). The light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed by using the LEDs 10 to 14) of No. 3, but it is sufficient as long as the rainbow light emitting mode is realized by using a plurality of LEDs, for example, only the LED of the game board 5. May be configured to execute a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode.

[New mode of time saving control]
In the above, the general gaming machine that controls the time saving state after the end of the big hit game has been illustrated, but the game may be controlled to the time saving state in a new mode as described below to further improve the game entertainment. ..

(Time saving control triggered by the stop display of the time saving sudden symbol)
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in addition to the normal time saving state (low probability time saving state and high probability time saving state described above) controlled after the end of the big hit game, the variation display of the first special symbol is predetermined. It is controlled so that a special time saving state (low probability time saving state) is executed when the machine stops at the time saving sudden symbol. Specifically, when the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 is a "time saving hit" that is different from any of the big hit, the small hit, and the miss. Based on this, the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped and displayed with a predetermined time-saving sudden symbol (a symbol different from big hit, small hit, or miss), and no hit game is executed. , It is possible to turn on the time saving flag based on the passage of the stop display time and control the time saving state (low probability time saving state). By implementing the time saving control triggered by the stop display of the time saving sudden symbol in this way, it is possible to suddenly shift to the time saving state (low probability time saving state) in the normal game progress process, and the range of game playability is widened. At the same time, it is possible to give the player surprise and unexpectedness and improve the game entertainment. Further, in this embodiment, the time-saving sudden symbol is set only for the first special symbol, but the time-saving sudden symbol may be set for the second special symbol as well. In this case, it is preferable to display the time-saving sudden symbol in a mode different from that of the first special symbol and the second special symbol on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400.

Further, as a result of the lottery of the first special symbol, the winning mode of the "time saving hit" that triggers the stop display of the time saving sudden symbol is the set value 1 in the big hit determination table at the time of low probability in the above-described embodiment. With a probability of 2/319, which is between the jackpot probability of 1/319 and the small hit probability of 3/319, the first special random number matches the time saving hit judgment value indicating that the time saving hit was won. The above first special random number is set in association with. Further, in the hit determination table at the time of high probability, the time reduction hit determination value is not set, and the time reduction hit does not occur during the so-called probability change.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, the hall manager can set any of the set values 1 to 6 having different jackpot probabilities by using the setting key. , It is preferable that the winning mode per time reduction is uniform regardless of the set value (probability of 2/319 regardless of the set value), and by doing so, it is unique regardless of the set value. It becomes possible to easily design a game as a privilege (a privilege different from a big hit).

In addition, a plurality of time-saving sudden symbols can be provided, and the period of occurrence of the time-saving state (low probability time-saving state) triggered by the stop display of the time-saving sudden symbol is, for example, 30 times in the case of the time-saving sudden symbol A. Time-saving state (the same period as the normal time-saving state), such as symbol fluctuation, 50 times of symbol fluctuation in the case of time-saving sudden symbol B, and 100 times of symbol fluctuation in the case of time-saving sudden symbol C (the same period as the normal time-saving state). The period of occurrence of (low probability time saving state) can be set individually. The time-saving sudden symbols A to C are determined by using the symbol random numbers to be used for determining the hit type described above, as in the case of determining the big hit type and the small hit type. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the period of occurrence of the time saving state (low probability time saving state) may be determined at the start of fluctuation by lottery by a lottery means other than the symbol random number. In addition, the time saving hit judgment value set in the big hit judgment table at the time of low probability is divided into the time saving hit judgment value A, the time saving hit judgment value B, and the time saving hit judgment value C, and the time saving sudden symbol is determined by the time saving hit judgment value. Control may be simplified so that any of A to C is derived.

In addition, in the time saving control triggered by the stop display of the time saving sudden symbol, does the variation display of the next special symbol start after the time saving sudden symbol is displayed (when the fixed stop time of the time saving sudden symbol has elapsed)? It is configured to start operation regardless of whether or not (whether or not there is a special symbol on hold), and during the lapse of the stop display time of the time-saving sudden symbol or during the variable display prior to the stop display of the time-shortening sudden symbol. , Execute a specific effect that controls the display, sound, lamp, etc. in a specific mode, and notify the player that "the time saving state (low probability time saving state) starts operating without going through the big hit". Is preferable. As a result, even if the player's ball is lost when the time-saving sudden symbol is stopped and displayed, the player is separated from the gaming machine while the time-saving sudden symbol is still displayed. It is possible to prevent people from sitting down. In addition to the above, if it is important to keep the time saving control triggered by the stop display of the time saving sudden symbol as concealed as possible, during the variable display prior to the stop display of the time saving sudden symbol, , Make common effects (notice, reach, etc.) that are performed even during normal times, display the same combination of symbols on the liquid crystal display as when it is off, and then suddenly display, sound, lamp, etc. in a specific mode. A specific effect to be controlled may be executed to make the player aware of it.

The time saving control triggered by the stop display of the time saving sudden symbol is effective in the time saving state (low probability time saving state), and is invalid in the high probability time saving state such as so-called probability change or the high probability non-time saving state. Will be done. The term "invalid" as used herein means that the above-mentioned determination as to whether or not the time is reduced (lottery for the first special symbol or lottery for the second special symbol) itself is performed, but the result of the determination is whatever ( (Whether or not you win the time saving hit), the time saving control should not be started triggered by the stop display of the time saving sudden symbol.

In addition, as the end condition of the time saving state (low probability time saving state) started by the time saving control triggered by the stop display of the time saving sudden symbol, as described above, the specified fluctuation display is performed and the occurrence period ends. In addition to the case, the end condition may be that it is controlled by the conventional big hit game, or a predetermined number of times for a small hit game (a hit with a higher winning probability than the big hit game but a small number of balls) different from the big hit game. It is also possible to set the end condition to be controlled (for example, 20 times). In particular, when the number of executions of the small hit game is set as the end condition of the time reduction state (low probability time reduction state) started by the time reduction control triggered by the stop display of the time reduction sudden symbol, the small hit By opening and closing the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 in the game in a shorter time than in the big hit game, a time saving state (low probability time saving state) is suddenly started in the game progress process. Furthermore, it is possible to realize a new game mode in which the time saving state (low probability time saving state) suddenly ends at a relatively difficult time (the number of times the small hit game is executed), and the range of game playability can be further expanded. ..

(Time reduction control triggered by the number of reliefs)
In the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the time saving state (low probability time saving state) operates based on the stop display of the time saving sudden symbol has been described, but as another time saving control, a special symbol in a situation where a big hit is not obtained is described. It is possible to control the time saving state (low probability time saving state) to be activated when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of reliefs. The main purpose of the time saving control triggered by such a number of reliefs is to rescue a player who has not obtained a big hit for a long period of time, and from this viewpoint, the start of the time saving state (low probability time saving state). The number of reliefs that triggers the game is preferably set to a value (arbitrary preset number of times) that is about three times the probability that the jackpot game is executed. In this embodiment, for example, "1000 times" is set. It is set. In addition, as an opportunity (start time) to start counting the number of fluctuations (addition type or subtraction type), the starting point can be after the end of the big hit game, and the normal time saving state (low) controlled after the end of the big hit game. The number of fluctuations in the probability time reduction state) is also counted, and the complicated control that causes the starting point of the counting start to diversify is avoided. It should be noted that the number of fluctuations in a state in which a player is given sufficient profit, such as a high-probability time-saving state or a high-probability non-time-saving state, is not counted. In addition, such a count can be reset (initialized) by performing an operation related to RAM clearing or an operation related to setting change, and when reset, the count is counted from the initial value as in the case immediately after the end of the jackpot game. Is supposed to start.

In addition, it is possible to set an arbitrary period in advance for the period of occurrence of the time saving state (low probability time saving state) started by the time saving control triggered by the number of reliefs. It is also possible to set the number of times that the next big hit is promised. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, the hall manager can set any of the set values 1 to 6 by using the setting key, but the time saving control triggered by the number of reliefs. The period of occurrence of the time saving state (low probability time saving state) and the number of reliefs starting with are set to a fixed period regardless of which set value is set.

Further, in the above description, it has been illustrated that the count of the number of reliefs is reset (initialized) by performing an operation related to RAM clearing or an operation related to setting change. You may. That is, regardless of whether the operation related to RAM clear or the operation related to setting change is performed, the above-mentioned count of the number of reliefs itself is reset, but the operation related to RAM clear is performed and the setting is changed. Only on one side when such an operation is performed, the count of the number of reliefs associated with the subsequent fluctuation display is started, and on the other side, the count of the number of reliefs associated with the subsequent fluctuation display is not started (in the number of reliefs). Even if it is reached, the time saving state (low probability time saving state) may not be activated). By doing so, the game determines whether or not the operation related to the setting change is performed depending on whether or not the time saving state (low probability time saving state) is started when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the number of relief times. It is possible to give a new game property that a person recognizes and guesses, and it becomes possible to further expand the range of game playability. In addition, when the set value is downgraded from a higher setting (for example, set values 4 to 6) to a lower setting (for example, set values 1 to 3), the number of relief counts is started to be counted, and the set value is set to a higher setting (for example, set value). When 4 to 6) are maintained, the time saving control triggered by the number of reliefs may be changed according to the degree of advantage / disadvantage to the player, such as not starting the counting of the number of reliefs. ..

In addition, as the end condition of the time saving state (low probability time saving state) started by the time saving control triggered by the number of reliefs, in addition to the case where the above-mentioned occurrence period (for example, 700 symbol fluctuations) is reached, the conventional method The end condition may be that the big hit game has been performed, or the end condition may be that the small hit game has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). In particular, when the number of executions of the small hit game is set as the end condition of the time reduction state (low probability time reduction state) started by the time reduction control triggered by the number of reliefs, the execution of the small hit game is executed. As an aspect, by setting the opening / closing mode of the first big winning opening 2006, the second big winning opening 2007, etc. in the small hit game to be shorter than that of the big hit game, the time saving state (low probability time saving state) occurs. Although it is clarified, only the end time can be set to a relatively difficult time (the number of times the small hit game is executed), and the range of playability can be further expanded.

In addition, it is also possible to combine the above-mentioned two new types of time saving control (time saving control triggered by the stop display of the time saving sudden symbol and time saving control triggered by the number of reliefs) and use it in the conventional time saving. By combining with control, it is possible to diversify the operation pattern of the time saving state (low probability time saving state), and it is possible to further expand the range of playability. In addition, when the time saving control triggered by the stop display of the time saving sudden symbol and the time saving control triggered by the number of reliefs are used in combination for the game, when both occurrence triggers occur in duplicate. In order to avoid complication of control, it is desirable to set priorities in advance in relation to each other's degree of advantage. For example, when the user is in the time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state) started by the time-saving control triggered by the number of reliefs, the stop display of the time-saving sudden symbol is triggered as in the case of the high-probability time-saving state or the high-probability non-time-saving state. It can be exemplified that the time saving control is disabled and the transition from the advantageous time saving state to the disadvantageous time saving state is not performed.

In addition, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the number of reliefs while in the time saving state (low probability time saving state) started by the time saving control triggered by the stop display of the time saving sudden symbol, the time saving state is occurring. The (low-probability time-saving state) is terminated, and a new time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state) is started by giving priority to the time-saving control triggered by the number of reliefs. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of security without hindering the transition to the advantageous time saving state. If the purpose is not to be disadvantageous to the player, whether or not to start a new time saving state (low probability time saving state) according to the remaining number of times of the generated time saving state (low probability time saving state). May be decided.

In addition, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the number of reliefs in the normal time saving state (low probability time saving state) controlled after the end of the big hit state, or the normal time saving state controlled after the end of the big hit state. If the time-saving sudden symbol is stopped and displayed while in (low-probability time-saving state), the normal time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state) that has occurred is terminated, and priority is given to time-saving control according to each opportunity. Then, a new time saving state (low probability time saving state) is started. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of security without hindering the transition to the advantageous time saving state. In this case as well, if the purpose is not to be disadvantageous to the player, a new time saving state (low probability time saving state) is set according to the remaining number of times of the generated time saving state (low probability time saving state). You may decide whether or not to start.

In addition, the various rainbow-related controls described above are games that execute the above-mentioned two new types of time saving control (time saving control triggered by the stop display of the time saving sudden symbol and time saving control triggered by the number of reliefs). It can be made to appear even under the circumstances. For example, various rainbow-related controls (rainbow effect, etc.) can be performed when the time saving state is started or after the time saving state is started by the time saving control triggered by the stop display of the time saving sudden symbol. It may be executed, or various rainbow-related controls (rainbow effect, etc.) may be executed when the time saving state is started or after the time saving state is started by the time saving control triggered by the number of reliefs. ..

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 or the slot machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game is a combination of a pachinko machine or a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. It may be applied to the machine, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained. It can also be applied to so-called enclosed gaming machines in which the player does not touch the gaming ball B and gaming machines called managed gaming machines.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect display device 1600 is attached to the center of the set plate 1650, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect is produced at an eccentric position with respect to the center of the set plate 1650. A display device 1600 may be attached. Further, although one effect display device 1600 is attached to the set plate 1650, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of effect display devices may be attached to the set plate 1650.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 2000 Table unit 2500 Center accessory 2555 Center right front plate (holding plate)
2555a First containment section (accommodation section)
2555b Second containment section (accommodation section)
2555c Peeling hole 2555d In front of the ridge (protrusion)
2700 Specific obstacle nail group 2701 Braided nail part 2710 Lead area 2711 First lead area 2712 Second lead area N Obstacle nail

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that can control a high profit-giving state by displaying a variable display of a symbol based on a prize in a specific winning opening and stopping and displaying a profit-giving symbol as a result of the variable display of the symbol.
A first specific game state control means for controlling the first specific game state after the end of the high profit granting state, and
When a game ball enters the specific winning opening, a counting value updating means for updating the counting value related to the winning ball and a counting value updating means.
When the count value becomes a specific value, the second specific game state control means for controlling the high profit granting state and the second specific game state different from the first specific game state, and the second specific game state control means.
It is equipped with a setting means that can set the probability of being in a high profit granting state to one probability from a plurality of probabilities by an administrator operation.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific value is the same regardless of which probability is set.

Images